:/*ou^z> /?3e
HARVARD UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
OF THE
MU9E0M OF COMPARATIVE ZOOLOOY
£l)^cH/^NOri
MAY 1 1 m?
-^Årr^bO^
BERGENS MUSEUM
HYDiGRAPHICAL AND BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGAIiOIIS
IN
NORWEGIAN FIORDS
By
O. NORDGAARD
THE PROTIST PLANKTON AND THE DIATOMS IN BOTTOM SAMPLES
E. JØRGENSEN
WITH 21 PLATES AND 10 FIGURES IN THE TEXT
BERGEN
JOHN GRIEG
1903
m 11 1927
HYOROGRAPHICAL UNO BIOLOGICAL INVESTIGATIONS
NORWEGIAN FIORDS
\
=^
<A '^
BE HG ENS MUSEUM
SknU
mmmwkv and Éogical iniestigations
IN
NORWEGIAN FIORDS
By
0. NORDGAARD
THE PROTIST PLANKTON AND THE DIATOMS IN BOTTOM SAMPLES
E. JØRGENSEN
WITH 21 PLATES AND 10 FIGURES IN THE TEXT
BERGEN
JOHN GRIEG
1905
PREFACE
In the present work. I liavc collected tiic results of the hydro graphical and biological investigations made by ine in some ul'
the liords in the nortii of Norway, in the winter of 1899 and 1900, when at the cost of the Norwegian government and the Bergen
Museum I maile investigations in the lishing waters of Lofoten. For this purpose, I hired a little steamer „Gunnar Berg" from Januaiy
to the beginning of May, 1899. During these months, observations were made in the Vest Fiord and in the sea beyond Lofoten,
Vesteraalen, Senjen and Finmarken. Several fiords were also visited, as for instance, the Kirk, the 0gs, the Kanstad, the Sag-, the
'i\s and the Ofoten Fiords, Skjomen, Rombaken, Malangen, Lyngen, Kvænangen (including the Jøkel Fiord), the Porsanger Fiord etc.
In the winter of 1900, S/S „ Asbjørn Selsbane" was hired for one month, so that investigations might be made in the fishinir
hanlcs wliich would fninish material with which to compare the results obtained the previous year. We weix' also aliic to visit tiic
IMorsdai, Salten. Skjerstad and Folden Fiords. Of these, the Skjerstad Fiord proved to he especially interesting.
The following apparatus were used: —
1. Dr. Pettekson's water bottle and meter wheel,
2. A crab with 1000 meters af bronze-line.
3. German nets for plankton gatherings,
4. Dr. Petersen's closing net,
5. Dredges and a small ti-aAvl for zoological gatherings,
(i. Lines and ropes.
The dredges and trawl were drawn up liy the steam winch, but we took in the watei' bottle and the plankton nets witii
one worked by hand.
I had a veiy capable assistant, Mr. Niels Haac;ensen', both winters, he rendered very gi'eat service m many ways. For
tile sake of uniformity, I took all the temperatures personally. Li determining the zoological material, I have had many helpers, Nor-
wegians and foreigners. But, unless otherwise stated, I am personally responsible for the arrangement of the species, and for the remarks,
wliich, in some cases, are added. I am especially indebted to my friend, Mr. E. Jpkgensen, for his exceedingly careful treatment of
the Protistplankton and the Diatoms in the Bottom samples.
To the following naturalists, I also wish to tender my hearty thanks for their kind assistance, viz: —
A. Appellof, 0. BiDEKKAP, Miss K. Bonnevie, Edw. Bhowne, 0. Caklgren, R. Collett, M. Foslie, Heeman Friele,
. I AMES Grieg, R. Hartmeyer, Johan Kiær, Hans Kiæe. J. Huiteeldt-Kaas, G. W. R. Levinsen, W. Lundbeck, R. C. Punnett.
<l 0. Saks. J. Sparre Schneider and H.i. Ostergkex.
My thanks are also due to the Norwegian government officials and to the managing board of the Bergen Museum, for having
Ijeen by them enabled to undertake these investigations. Finally, I would especially thank the Director of the Bergen Museum, Dr.
,1. BK^NCHOR^<T. wiio lias, in so many ways, given me valuable assistance.
Bergen, 7u 1904.
O. Nordgaard.
CONTENTS.
III.
Page
Ilydioiiraphy.
A. ObsiM-v;itions on the Nortlieni Coast and in tlie Noitlieni Fiords H
B. Remarks on the Observations.
a. Tlie Vest Fiord and the Coast Sea 10
b. The Fiords 13
c. Hydrographical Characteristic of tlie Fiords of Northern Norway 19
Plankton.
.\. Tlio gre«t«j; Forms of animal Plankton.
a. Plankton stations 1899—1900 23
b. Phxnkton Tables 25
c. Remarks on some Plankton Forms 37
B. Protistplankton.
a. Planklon Tables 49
b. Remarks on the Plankton 87
The species found in Plankton and their Distribution (prin-
cipally in the nearest Seas) and Remarks on the new ard
ciitical Forms 90
I. BaciUariales 90
II. Peridiniales 108
III Pterospermataceae 113
IV Halosphaeraceae 113
V. Flagellata 113
VI. Silicofiagellata 113
VII. Radiolaria 114
(Phylogeny of the Nassellaria) 123
VIII. Tintinnodea 142
Errata et Addenda 146
Bibliogiaphy 147
Index 149
Bottom-Life.
A. Results of dredgings.
a. Dredging Statioi.s. 1899—1900 155
b. Outcome of Dredgings 156
Porifera 156
Hydrozoa 156
Scyphozoa 158
Anthozoa 158
Ci inoidea 159
0|ihiiiri.>id,.a 159
IV.
Page
Asteroidea 1 60
Ec)iinoidea KiO
Holothurioidea 16i
Nemertinea 161
Annelida 161
Gephyrea 164
Bryozoa or Polyzoa 164
Braohiopoda 174
Pelecypoda 174
Scaphopoda 1 78
Placophora 178
Gastropoda 1 7S
Nudibrancliiata 181
Cephalopoda 1 82
Crnstacea 182
Pantopoda 189
Tunicata . , 189
Pisces 190
B. Bottom Samples.
a. Foraminifera 192
b. Diatoms in Bottom Samples from Lofoten and Vesteraalen.
By E. Jørgensen 195
General remarks on the character of the bottom diatom flora 220
Index 222
Combination of Hydrographical and Biological Facts.
A. The natural Conditions of the Fiords.
a. Topographical Notes 229
b. Hydrographical Notes 231
c. Biological Notes 234
Notes on the Animal Life in some of the Fiords examined . 235
The northernmost Lophohelia-reef, liitherto known 239
A few Words on the Fauna in Clay 241
Remarks on the Fauna of the Ocean Banks 242
Shallow-water shells found at great depths 242
Fauna and Hydrography 243
Further Remarks on Plankton 244
B. The Investigations considered from a practical point of view.
a. Some Invertebrates of Economic Importance 245
b. The ,,Skrei^ Fishery in Lofoten L'47
c. Some Remarks on the Cod-fishery in Finmark £53
ERRATA.
3, line '2 from foot, for 150 m. (siiniple nr. 154), read 180 iii.
9, for Landego 3" 19' E, read Landego 14° 4' E.
9, for Arno 3" 15' E, read Arna 14» E.
10, line 2 from foot, for E t S, read E b S.
172, line 21, for Rlmmphostella, read Rhamphostomclln.
HYDROGRAPHY.
NOTES.
The water samples were taken by means of prof. Petteesson's water-bottle ami the titration has been made at the laboratory
of the Beriren Biological Station by Messrs. Thom.\s Mathiesen (samples of 1899) and R.\gnak Bakmax (samples of 1900) according-
to the methods of prof. Petteessox. I have made every temperature observation myself with a termometer of dr. H. Geissler Nachf.
Fez. Mi'llee in Bonn.
The distances of the tables are expressed in nautical miles (= 1852 metres).
A. Obsei *^ atioiis at the Northeni (Joast aud in the Northern Fjords.
1899
1
111
i If
Sal
lie contents
1899
1
Saline contents
Nr.
1 :!i
Localitv 'a ji ^f
CI.
Salt
Salt
Locality
%.it
CI. Salt
Salt
Date
1 ^ illi
per
liti-e
per
litre
per
mUle
Date
^ nil
per per
litre 1 litre
mille
January
Hola at Svolvær Metres
Metres
C»
^
' January
Metres Metres
c«
1
1 11
eSOlO'.S X., 150
0
3.3
18.79
:;i,n(. :;:i.i(i
79 17
Reine.
110
7.0
19.41 35 10
34.23
•J
14«35'.5 E.
10
3.5
18.79
.■;i.iiii .',:;, li>
80
130
7.1
19.51 35 27 34.40 1
:>
20
3.6
18.79
:i I.I 'l 1
:; ;.ii.
81
Stamsund.
0
3.9
18.89 34.18 i 33.33 |
4
3(J
3.7
18.79
:; I.I II 1
.;.;,ii.
82
8 miles Sto of
150
10
4.1
18.92
3423 i 33.39
40
3.7
18.79
;> I.I Hi
:;.;.ii;
83
Stamsund.
30
4.2
1
1^
50
3.7
18.82
:ii II.-,
'■''■<:J\
84
50
4.3
18.92
34 23 33.39
7
80
3.8
18.82
:ii.ii'i
.f-'.'J]
85
80
4.45
18.96
34.31 , 33.46
s
100
4.6
18.82
ii l.il.'i
.'i:; _'l
86
100
5.5
19.13
.34.60 33.74
>i
110
6.4
19.37
:;,-, 111
:;|.IT
87
120
6.9
19.51
35.28 34.40
10
127
6.6
19.45
:!.■.. 1 s
:;i.:;ii
88
150
6.8
19.58
35.41 34.52
U
1.50
6.6
19.58
:i.j.4l
:ji..->2
89 !
Henningsvær.
180
0
4.2
18.92
34.23 33.39
12 Outside Ski-oven.
0
4.0
18.85
34.11
33.26
90
7 miles S of.
10
4.2
18.92 34.23 33.39
I.< Between Groto
0
4.4
18.92
34.23
33 39
91
18
Yttersiden.
110
0
4.1
18.99 34.36 33..50
14 and Skroven.
10
4.4
18.92
34.-23
33.39
92
Outside the Lofoten
10
4.6
18.99 34.36 33..50
i:. hi the middle of
20
4.4
IS ;»_'
:'i 1 1'.;
93
islands.
20
4.6
18.99 34..36 ; 33..50
l<i ihe Vestfjonl.
30
4.5
1 s.li_'
,1 J ;
94
30
4.6
18.99 34.36' 33..50
17
40
4.6
Is ;i_'
'' 1 J '■
95 1
50
4.7
18.99 , 34..36 j 33.50
l.S
50
4.8
ls..ini
.j4..;o
ij.j.'jU
96 i
60
4.9
19.07 , 34.50 33.65
19
60
5.0
18.99
34.36
33.50
97 'l
80
.5.5
19.20 34.74 33.87
20
70
5.3
18.99
34.36
33..50
98
Gaukværo.
250
0
4.1
19.02
34.42 33.56
21
80
6.3
19.13
34.60
33.74
99
68<'35' N.,
10
4.4
19.02
34.42 33..56
22
100
6.9
19.48
35.24
34.35
100
14"13' E.
20
4.5
19.02
34.42 33.56
23
150
6.3
19.68
35.59
34.69
101
30
4.5
19.02
34.42 : 33..56
24
200
6.3
19.79
35.78
34.87
102
8(J
5.6
19.30
34.91 34.04
2.5
250
6.2
19.79
.35.78
34.87
103
150
6.9
19.43
35.14 1 34.27
2B
12
Off Flado.
0
4.2
18.89
34.18
33.33
104
250
7.1
19.50
35.27 ; 34.38
27
4 miles W of
Husøbaran.
0
4.2
18.89
34.18
33.33
105
106
19
Havet.
40 miles NNW of
0
10
5.9
6.2
19..50
19.50
35.27 : 34.38
35.27 .34.38
28
10 miles NW of
0
4.3
ls.ii2
:;i,L'.;
107
Gaukværo.
20
6.4
19.50
35.27
.34..3S
29
Helligvær.
10
4.3
Is.fii'
i ! L' '.
108
30
6.4
19.61
35.47
34.57
30 j
20
4.3
Is,!!:.'
109
40
6.4
19.50
35.27
34.38
31
30
4.4
lt,M2
o4.2.j
..i.i..j:i
110
50
6.4
19..50
35.27
34.38
32
50
4.4
18.92
34.23
33.39
1 111
80
6.7
19..50
35.27
34.38
33
80
5.0
18.99
34.36
33.50
112
100
6.9
19..58
35.42
34.53
34
100
5.0
19.17
34.68
33.82
113
120
7.0
19.58
35 42
.34.53
3.5
110
7.0
19.41
35.10
34.23
114
1.50
6.8
19..58
35.41
34..52
36
120
7.3
19.58
35.41
34.52
; 115
200
6.7
19.58
35.41
34.52
37
140
7.6
19.71
35.64
34.74
116 1
250
6.6
19.58
.35.41
34.52
38 1
150
7.6
19.71
35.64
34.74
117
300
6.5
19.58
35.41
34.52
39
200
7.4
19.86
35.91
34.99
118
400
6.2
19..58
35.41
34.52
40
250
7.3
19.93
36.04
3.5.11
119 i
500
.5.9
19..50
35.27
34.:^8
41
13 1 Vestfiord I.
180
0
4.6
18.99
34.36
33.50
120 i
600
4.2
19.50
35.27
34.38
42 ' Between Helligvær
10
4.7
18.99
34.36
33.50
121 i
700
3.6
19..50
35.27
34.38
43 j and Værø in the
20
4.7
18.99
34.36
33.50
122
800
2.0
19.43
3.5.14
34.27
44 , middle of the fjord.
30
4.8
18.99
34.36
33.50
123
looo
2.0
19 43
.3.5.14
.34.27
45
50
4.9
124 32 miles NNW of
0
5.0
19.16
34.66
33.84
46
80
5.1
19.07
34.50
33.65
Gaukværø.
47
100
5.3
19.10
34.56
33.70
125 ! 24 miles NNW of i
0
4.0
18.77
33.96
33.13
48
110
6.7
19.41
35.10
34.23
Gaukværø.
49
120
7.2
19.45
35.18
34.30
126 I 21
Senjen.
130
0
3.3
18.77
33.96
33.13
50
130
7.2
19.55
35..36
34.47
127
12 miles NWtW of
10
3.9
18.77
32.96
33.13
51
150
6.4
19.61
35.47
34.57
128
Maanesodden.
20
3.9
18.77
33.96 1 33 13 1
52
180
6.5
19.61
35.47
34.57
129
40
3.9
18.77
33.96
33.13
53
Vestfjord n.
225
0
3.9
18.85
34.11
33.26
130
50
4.3
18.77
33.96
33.13
54
Between Vestfj. I
10
4.0
18.85
34.11
33.26 i
i 131
8f)
4.5
18.89
.34.18
33.33
55
and Værø.
20
4.0
18.85
34.11
33.26
, 132
100
46
18.89
34.18
33.33
5(i
30
4.6
18 9-.'
34.23
33.39
133
120
4.4
18.89
34.18
3333
57 !
50
4.6
18.92
34.23
33.39
134
23
Tromsosund.
0
0.6
19.00
34.--8
33..53
58
80
4.8
18.99
34.H6
33.50
135
24
Kvænangen I.
1.50
0
3.6
19.32
34.95
34.o,s
59
100
6.4
19.27
34.86
34.00
1.36
Between Logo and
10
3.7
19.32
34.95
34.08
tJO
120
7.2
19.41
35.10
34.23
137
Brynilen.
20
3.7
19.32
34.95
34.08
61
150
7.6
19.61
35.47
34.57
138
30
3.7
19.32
34.95
34.08
62
200
7.2
19.79
35.78
34.87
139
40
3.9
19.32
34 i 15
34.08
63
225
6.8
19.82
35.84
34.92
140
50
3.9
1932
:( 1 !).".
:;i,iis
64
14
Off Mosken.
0
3.9
18.85
34.10
33.26
141
80
3.9
19.32
". 1 ' 1 'i
.;i 111
65
Moskenstrømmen.
0
4.0
18 85
34.10
33 2<i
142
100
3.9
19.32
.lii:, :il,'.^|
66
Moskenstrommeu.
150
0
4.1
]«.<»-_>
:"! 1 '_':!
:;:;.:',!i
143
120
3.9
19..32
34 \>:> :u.o.s 1
67
10 miles SOtO of
30
4.3
Is. ill'
: ; ! _' ;
144
140
4.0
19.32
34.95
34.06
68
Evenstad.
50
4.5
Is. hi;
:; 1 ;]
:; ; [i,
145
Kvæuanot.u II. 1 180
0
2.6
19.20
34.74
33.87
69
80
4.6
Is IK)
:; i..:i
.■;,; 1,;
146 i 70" 1' N.,
10
2.6
19.20
34.74
33.87
70
100
4.7
is/jy
:ii :;i
:;:', li;
147 21"28'..'> !■:.
20
2.6
19.20
34.74
33.87
71
120
5.4
19.13
:il.i;ii
:;:; 7 1
1 IS l',rUv,...ii SpiMei-en
30
2.6
19.20
34.74
33.87
72
150
6.5
19.65
: ; .■) .'i 1
: ; 1 1 i 1
14!l iiiiH K\ ^1 ii.iii'S-
50
2.6
19. -20
34.74
: 3.87
73
17
Reine.
130
0
4.18
IS.!)-.'
:; 1 ■_',;
150 limlfnir.
80
2.6
19.20
3 1.74
3i,87
74
8 miles SO of R.
10
4.2
Is.HJ
1 ^ • ' ,
151'
100
2.6
19.20
34.74
33.87
75
30
4.3
Is.'iij
1 ~ -J ''
152 1
120
2.6
19.20
34.74 33.87
76
50
4.3
IS.ilLj
|s.L',;
1.53 1
1.50
2.8
19.20
34.74 33.87
77
80
4.3
1«.92
34.-23
33.3!l
154 '
1.50
3.1
19.20
34.74 33 87
78
100
5.1
19.09
34.54
33.68
1.55
27
Lynat-n I.
118
0
1.1
19 20
34.74
33.87 1
1899
-st
Saline contents
1899 1 1 1 III
lit
Saline contents
Xr.
Locality o - ''^-^
i r r
Cl.
Salt ' Salt
Nr.
Locality
1 5^1
S -15
CI.
Salt
Salt
Date
M III
^ o t;
per
litre
per per
litre j mille
Date
^ III
g'S 5
per
litre
per
litre
per
mille
January
Lyngen I.
Metres
Metres
CO
February
Henningsvær.
Metres
Metres
158
27
Abreast of Ski-
10
1.1
19.20
34.74 33.87
236 ' 1
8 miles StW of H.
30
8.6
18.98
34.34
33.49
lo7
botten.
20
1.1
19.20
34 74 33.87
237 ,
50
8.6
18.91
34.22
33.37
158
30
1.1
19.20
34.74! 33.87
238
60
3.6
18.98
34.34
33.49
159
50
1.1
19.20
34.74! 33 87
239
80
5.3
19 13
34.60
83.74
160
80
1.1
19.20
34.74 1 33.87
240
100
6.2
19.32
34 95
84.08
1«1
100
1.1
19.20
34.74 33.87
241
Skroven.
300
0
3.3
18.94
34.27
33.42
162
118
1.1
19.20
34.74 33.87
242
4 miles S of
50
3.4
18.98
34.34
33.49
163
Lyngen II.
250
0
3.0
19.17
34.68 33.82
243 I
Skroven.
100
5.6
19.24
34.81 33.94
164
63037' N.,
10
3.1
19.20
34.74 1 33.87
244 1
200
6.9
19.88
35.95 ' :i.'i.ii:!
165
20024' E.
20
3.1
19.20
34,74 ! 33.87
245
300
6.4
19.88
35.95 :!."..' i:'.
166
Off the Kaafjord.
30
3.0
19.24
34.80 i 33.94
246
3
Raftsund I.
40
0
2.9
18.87
34.14 3:5.30
167
50
2.6
19.32
34.95 : 34.08
247
Abreast of the
10
3.1
18.87
34.14 1 33.30
168
80
2.5
19.20
34.74 33.87
248
Troldfjord.
20
3.3
18.91
34.22
33.37
169
100
2.5
19.20
34.74 ' 33.87
249
30
3.4
18.94
34.27
33.42
170
150
2.2
19.17
.34.r,S 3:l.s2
250
40
3.4
18.94
34.27
33.42
171
180
1.9
19.17
3-1. r.^ :'.:;.><■-'
251
Raftsund II.
270
0
2.7
18.91
34.22
33.37
172
200
1.7
19.17
;i-l,ii-s :;:; ,s_'
252
Between Aarstenen
20
2.9
18.91
34.22
33.37
173
250
1.6
19.17
34.1 ;s :i:i,,s-
253
aud Ulvaag-.
50
2.9
18.99
34.36
33..50
174
Lyngen m.
0
1.8
18.47
33.41 1 32.60
254
80
4.0
19.05
34.46 .Ci.iil
175
69"45.5 N.,
10
3.2
19.09
34.54 33 68
255
100
6.2
19.51
35.28 ::i-lii
176
20022' E.
80
3.4
19.20
34.74 1 33.87
256
150
6.5
19.65
.35.54 :U.<il
177
Abreast of Spokenes.
50
3.4
19.20
34.74 33.87
1 257
200
6.5
19.69
35, (In :;] ,11
178
80
3.4
19.20
34.74
33.87
258
250
6.6
19.6(1
:',,5,i;ii :; 1 7"
179
100
3.4
19.24
34.80
33.94
259
4
Skroven.
380
0
3.0
19.02
:il I'j :;:;,. ■)!;
180
150
3.4
19.24
34.80
33.94
260
5 miles OSO of S.
50
3.3
19.02
:;| ii' :;:;,-.i;
181
200
2.9
19.24
34.80
33.94
261
80
3.5
19.02
\\\.vi :;:;.".(;
1.S2
29
Malangen.
350
0
2.8
19.23
34.79
33.92
262
90
4.8
19.17
:l|,l^ .'i:i.^2
IS.-j
Between Lysbotn
10
2.9
19.23
34.79 1 33.92
263
100
6.4
19.43
:;.•>. 14 :; 1.2(1
184
and Stonnesbotn.
20
2.9
19.23
34.79 1 33.92
264
150
7.1
19.80
3r).«(.i :;i ^9
185
30
2.9
19.23
34.79 ! 33.92
265
200
7.0
19.95
36.07 :i.'i.l4
186
50
2.9
19.2.J
34.79 : 33.92
266
2.50
6.9
19.95
36.07 ::.■>. 14
187
80
2.9
19.23
34.79 1 33.92
267
300
6.4
19.95
36.07 :i.'i.l4
188
100
2.9
19.23
34.79 1 33.92
268
375
6.3
19.95
36.07 ; *").14
189
120
3.0
19.26
34.84. 33.97
269
6
Tranodvbet.
630
0
2.5
18.99
34.36
83.50
190
150
3.2
19.26
34.84' 33.97
270
68015.5 N.,
20
2.7
18.99
34.36
33 50
191
180
3.9
19.33
3J.!)7 ;i| 111
271
15049' E.
50
2.8
18.99
34.36
33.50
192 i
200
4.1
19.33
;-H!i7 :;i 1m
272
Between Lødingen
80
4.6
19.13
34.60
83.74
193
250
5.5
19.58
v>'i. 11 :; i 'ri
273
and Tranø.
100
5.5
19.36
35.02
34.15
194
300
5.5
19.58
o5. Jl i ;> \.'yl
274
1.50
6.5
19.80
35.80
34.89
1-15
350
5.5
19.58
35.41 34.52
275
200
6.4
19.88
85.95
35.03
1116
31
Hela.
150
0
2.1
18.84
34.09 33.25
276
250
6.4
19.88
35.95
35.03
197
Svolvær, Lofoten.
10
2.5
18.84
34.09 33.25
277
300
6.3
19.95
36.07
35.14
198
20
2.5
Is sj
:;i.ii!i :;;;.L',-|
278
400
6.3
19.95
36.07
35.14
199
30
2.6
1 S ,s 1
:;i n'i :;:; j.-,
279
500
6.3
19.95
36.07
35.14
2(J0
40
2.7
1 -s s 1
:;| n'i :; ; :;.-,
280
600
6.3
19.95
36.07
35.14
201
50
3.3
18.91
:; !,_'_' .;:; :'i7
281
630
6.3
202
60
3.9
1895
282
7
Ofoten I.
360
0
1.7
18 87
34.14
33.30
2U3
80
5.2
19.11
:!l.."i7 :i:''.7_'
283
Between Havnes
20
1.9
18.87
34.14
33.30
204
100
6.4
19.39
:i.-,.n7 :;|.jii
284
and Ramsund.
50
1.9
18.87
34 14 1 33.30
205
120
6.7
19.54
:-ii.:;i :;i 1.-.
285
80
3.6
19.02
.•iJ.42 :i:i..-.(i
206
150
6.8
19.62
:!.">. |s :; 1 .".'i
286
100
5.7
19.32
:i|.'.i.-. :!l,(i.s
207
Lilandsbugten.
0
2.2
18.80
:il.nl :;:;is
287
120
6.2
19.61
:;,■., (7 ;i 1 .■).
208
Østnesfjord.
10
2.2
18.84
34.119 1 o:;.-;;,-.
i 288
150
6.4
19.7:f
:;,■!, 1;^ :;I77
209
20
2.4
18.84
34.09 33.25
289
200
6.8
19.8t
,';,'i s7 ,■; 1 Mil
210
30
3.3
18.91
34.22 33.37
290
250
6.3
19..N1
;'i ^7 '. 1 '"■
211
40
3.4
18.91
34.22 33.37
291
300
6.3
19..SS
212
46
3.5
18.95
3 l.:in :'.:i 1 1
292
350
6.3
19.8S
213
55
4.7
19.10
:;i,-.i; :;:;,7n
293 i
Ofoten II.
258
0
1.5
18.87
:;i,ll :;:;,:;n
214
Kolstad.
120
0
2.5
18.84
:;i.n!. :;:;,-.-,
294 1
Between Bogen
20
1.8
18.87
:;i.l! :;:;:;(i
215
Østnesfjord.
10
2.7
18.84
295
and Ballangen.
50
1.8
18.87
:;i II :;:;,:;'i
216
20
2.8
18.84
:;|n:, :,:;j.-,
2il6 i
80
1.9
18.91
, 1 J- ,■,,; ,;7
217
30
3.4
18.95
:!|:;m :;:; 11
297
100
5.4
19.-1(1
218
40
4.0
18.99
:;i:;i, :::i.-,n
298 ;
120
6.2
19.6.-.
:;,•,„-,! :;i,(;i
219
50
4.3
19.03
:>l 1 1 :;;:.--
299
150
6.2
19.73
35.6S 31.77
220
60
4.6
19.07
:;i ,Mi :;■; 1.:.
.300
200
19.80
35.80 34.89
221
80
5.5
19.23
:'i 1 ■, '1 :;'; 'i'
:foi
250
6^2
19.84
35.87 34.96
222
100
6.5
19..50
:i02 ■ 8
Rombaken I.
40
0
0.2
18.80
.3101 3:i.ls
223
120
6.7
19.58
:i03
At the hea<l of R.
10
0.2
18.8 1
■.■;i(i!i :;:;2.-)
224
Helle.
140
0
2.1
18.84
:; 1 1 i'i :;,:■'!
:i04 ,
20
0.3
18.84
:;i,ii!i ■x\-i:y
225
Østnesfjord.
10
2.2
18.72
:;:; s7 :; ; ( 1 1
31)0
30
0.4
18,84
:; 1 ii!i .■; :,L'.5
226
20
2.3
18 80
3101 :!:{.18
306 1
40
0.5
18.84
:; 1 1 i'i , ,,';,j,7
227
30
2.5
18.80
.34.01 33,18
307
Rombaken II.
110
0
0.2
18.81
; 1 MM ,■;,; j,5
228
40
2.7
18.80
.n.i.oi 1 3.3. 18
308
Abreast of v^^e
20
0.5
18.8 1
; M i'i ,; ; -J,",
229
50
3.75
18.95
31.30' :;:5. 1 1
309
Sildvik."
50
0.7
18.8 1
:; 1.11:1 :;,;, ■_'.">
230
60
4.3
19.03
:il.ll ir..-..-^
310 '
80
0.7
18.84
:;i,(i:i ww.-i^i
231
80
5.4
19.09
3 1.-. 1 :;:;.i;s
311
no
0.6
18.91
:; i.-jl' ."..'l :i7
232
100
6.4
19.32
3l.!l.-. 3 1. ON
312
Rombaken III.
310
0
1.4
18.87
:; 1 1 1 ii i.:iO
233
120
6.7
19.54
35.34
34.45
313
Inside Oijord.
20
1.4
18.87
34.14
33.30
234
February
140
6.7
19.62
35.48
34.59
314
315
50
80
1.4
1.4
18.87
18.87
34.14
34.14
33.30
33.30
235
1
Henningsvær.
100
10
3.4
18.98
34.34
33.49
316
100
4.8
19 28
34,88
34.01
IIydrograi)liy.
1899
.1
ill
11}
Saline contents
1899
1
ig-i
III
Saline contents
Nr.
.
r:i
« ? -3
CI.
Salt
Salt
1 Nr.
Locality
0
t:i
2 ?'=
Ill
CI.
Salt
Salt
Locality
■
g-l;
f^^
per
per
per
Date
l^ s
per
per
per
'"'
æ
Q|g
H"S^
litre
litre
mille
00
P|g
i£lx
litre
litre
mille
Febiuai-v
l{,.Mil.aki'n III.
Metres
Metres
CO
February
Reine I,
Metres
Metres
CO
:U7
8
120
6.0
19.54
35.34
34.45
392 1 23
120
6.5
19.69
35.60
34.70
:iI8
150
6.0
19.69
35.60
31.70
293
150
6.2
19.91
36.00
35.08
31(1
200
6.0
19.69
3.V(;(.
:il.7o
.394
180
6.2
19.91
36.00 .35.081
:i:iii
250
6.0
19.76
3."i 7:;
; ; 1 s J
395
Heine 11.
130
0
3.0
19.12
34.59
33.73
3-21
300
6.0
19.76
:i.').7:;
: ; 1 ,^-_'
396
8 mill's OtS of R.
20
3.1
19.12
34.59
33.73
■åJ-J
■1
Skjomen I.
40
0
1.9
18.91
:il,i.'L'
397
50
4 5
19.29
34.90
34.02
■i-23
At Elvegaartl.
20
1.9
18.84
34.09
33.25
398
80
5.0
19.44
35.16
.34.28
324
40
2.0
18.94
34 27
33.42
399 1
100
5.6
19.51
35.28
34.40
325
Skjonu-n II.
150
0
1.8
18.99
34.36
33.50
400
120
6.8
19.72
35.66
.34,75
326
Abreast of Kontind.
20
1.8
18.91
31 ■_'■_'
33 37
401
Reine 111.
85
0
2.7
19.04
.34 45
33.59
327
50
1.8
18.91
3 1 L'_'
;;:;,:;7
102
4 miles (.Its of R.
20
3.7
19.19
.34.72
,33.85
328
100
1.7
18.91
3 1 L'L'
403
.50
4.5
19.33
34.97
34,10
329
At Frost isen.
150
0
1.7
1.7
18.94
18.94
31 -J 7
34.27
33,42
404
March
85
6.1
19.55
35.36
.34,47
At the head of the
405
1
Evenstad I.
157
0
3.9
19.31
34.93
34.06
Skjomenfjord.
406
7 miles SO of
20
3.9
19.31
34.93
,34.06
331
Ofotenfjord.
Abreast of Skarstad.
550
6.3
19.95
36.07
35.14
407
408
Lofot odden.
50
80
4.3
4.5
19.40
19.47
35.09
35.22
.34 21
34.34
332
13
Stronnnen I.
80
0
2.2
19.02
34 42
33.56
409
100
5.55
19.62
35.47
34.58
333
At Henningsvær.
20
2.3
18.94
34.27
33.42
410
120
5.8
19.65
35..53
34.64
334
50
3.3
18.94
34. -JT
:'.3, [J
411
150
5.6
19.69
35.60
34.70
335
80
3.4
19.13
31 i;ii
3:; 7 1
412
Moskenstronnnen I.
204
0
2.8
19.16
34 66
33.80
336
Stronnnen 11.
35
0
1.7
19.02
3 1, 1-.'
:'<:, ,"iO
413
10 miles SO of
20
3.4
19.20
34 74
33,H7
337
20
1.7
18.94
;;:; )o
414
Lofotodden.
.50
3.4
19.20
317 1
3:; ^'7
338
30
1.75
18.94
31 -JT
:i3.Il'
415
80
3.9
19.3.-)
; 1 1.1
339
Skroven.
248
0
2.1
19.05
3( hi
33.0 1
416
100
4.5
19.43
; 1 -.;
340
5 miles SWtS of S.
20
2.9
19.02
34.4 L'
33 ."ili
417
120
4.7
19.47
;■ ) ; )
341
50
3.0
19.02
34.42
33.56
418
150
5.0
19.51
35.28
34.40
342
80
3.1
19.05
34.46
33.61
419
200
6.6
19.85
35.89
34,97
343
90
38
19.13
34.60
33.74
420
3
Kirkfjord I.
108
0
2.0
18.79
34.00
.33,16
:U4
100
5.4
19.35
35.00
34 13
421
Inside the Vorfjord.
20
2.5
18.90
34.18
33,35
345
110
6.4
19.51
35.28
34.40 :
422
50
2.6
18.97
34.33
33,48
346
120
6.85
19.69
35.60
34.70 1
423
100
2.7
18.97
34 33
33.48
347
150
6.8
19.83
35.85
34 94
424
Kirkfjord II.
50
0
1.5
18.67
33.78
32,95
348
200
6.7
19.91
3(1.011
3.1. 0.S
425
In the middle of
50
2.5
18.93
34.26
33.40
349
240
6.6
19.91
30.011
3."i.os
the Kirkfjord.
350
Brettesnes— Skroven.
Between Brettesnes
and Skroven.
410
6.3
19.91
30. on
.i.i.os
426
427
428
4 Beine I.
11 miles SO of R.
150
0
20
40
2.1
2.3
2..35
19.01
19.01
19.01
34.40
34.40
34.40
33..54
.33,54
33.54
351
17
Ø.xsund.
630
0
1.1
18.83
34.07
33.23 i
429
50
2.5
19.05
34.47
33,61
352
6801' N.,
20
1.8
18.86
.34 13
33 28 !
430
60
3.4
19.13
34.60
33,76
353
l.^OlS'.o E.
50
2.7
18.97
3 1.3-J
:;3.4s
431
70
.5.1
19.35
35.00
34.13
354
Between Hammerø
80
5.4
19.29
34 110
:;i,nj
432
80
5.9
19.43
3.5.15
34.26
noo
and Lundø.
100
6.4
19.38
3."i.o0
34.10
433
100
6.5
19.58
35.41
34.52
356
150
6.9
19.72
35.0(i
34.75
434
120
6.6
19.62
35.48
34.59
357
200
6.8
19.83
35.85
34.94
435
1,50
6.7
19.69
35.60
34.70
358
250
6.6
19.83
35 85
34 9 4
436
5
Ure I.
230
0
2.6
359
300
6.6
19.91
36.00
S.'ros
437
9' „ miles SSO of U.
20
2.7
19.13
34.60
33.76
360
400
6.4
19.91
30 o 1
3,"i OS
438
50
2.7
19.13
34.60
33.76
361
500
6.3
19.91
31 ; 1 1' 1
3,'i.lls
439
80
2.8
19.13
34.60
33.76
362
630
6.3
19 91
3.1.110
3."i 1 IS
440
100
4.0
19.24
34.80
33 94
363
Sagfjord I.
210
0
2.7
18.97
3 1 .;!'
:;,; is
441
120
5.2
19.43
35.15
,34.26
364
At Furruuesvæggen.
10
3.1
19.00
3 1..;'-.
442
150
6.7
19.65
35.53
,34.64
365
20
3.9
19.08
3 1 'i-J
:; ; oo
443
200
6.8
19.85
35.89
34.97
366
50
6.1
19.37
3.->.ol
lu'io.
444
6
Henningsvær I.
142
0
2.1
19.01
34 40
33.54
367
100
6.85
19.58
35.42
34 52 1
445
6 miles SWtWi/„W
20
2.0
19.01
34.40
33.54
368
200
6.4
19.80
35.80
34 89
446
of H.
50
2.1
19.01
34.40
33.54
369
21
Henningsvær I.
85
0
2.6
19.00
34.38
33.52 1
447
3.1
19.13
34.60
33.76
370
4 miles SSW of H.
20
2.6
IIMII)
3-1, 3.S
448
100
5.4
19.39
35.07
34.20
371
50
3.2
]\l \-J
:; 1 ,"i!i
;;:; ;;;
449
120
.5.4
19.39
35.07
34.2fl
372
85
4.2
r.i -j'l
:; 1 !io
;; 1 1 i^<
450
140
62
19..58
3.5.41
3152
373
Henningsvær II.
98
0
2.6
I'.I.IH)
3 1 :;.s
45]
Henningsvær II.
110
0
1.7
18.97
34.32
,33.48
374
6 miles SSW of H.
20
2.6
19.00
452
5 miles SWtW of H.
50
2.1
19.01
34.40
33 54
375
60
3.0
19.08
; ; 1 ,-, J
:;:; oo
453
80
25
19.04
34.45
33,59
376
90
3.9
19.26
;j:; i|7
454
100
5.1
19.39
35.07
34.20
377
Henningsvær III.
260
0
2.6
l!i nil
.". 1 3.-^
33.52
455
10
Risværflaket.
175
0
1.2
18.82
34.05
.33 21
378
16 miles SSW of H.
20
2.9
IIMIS
3 l,.'i-'
33.60
456
Outside the Ogs-
20
1.25
18.90
34.20
.33,35
379
50
4.0
m.L'ii
3|M
.33 97
457
fjord.
50
1.3
18.90
.34.20
33.35
380
80
5.3
i;).44
3 1 2s
4.58
80
1.3
18.90
3 1 20
33.35
381
100
6.9
19,62
:{,-, |,s
3 1 .VI
459
100
1.4
18.93
3 1 L' 1
33 111
382
120
7.0
19.69
3 1 7i 1
460
150
1.5
18.9.3
3 1 'J 1 1
:; , M
383
1.50
6.9
19.80
3.'i,so
34 Ml
461
170
1.6
18.93
3 1 I'll
3.t to
384
200
6.7
19.88
35.95
35.03 1
462
Flaket II.
225
220
1.7
18.93
34.26
33.40
385
2.50
6.6
19.88
35.95
35.03
Nearer to the mouth
386
22
Jlortsund I.
230
220
6.6
19.88
35.95
35.03
of the Ogsfjord.
SO of Jlortsund.
463
Brettesnes I.
177
0
1.7
1901
34.40
33..54
387
23
Reine I.
180
0
2.7
19.04
34.45
33..59
464
21/4 miles SOV4O
20
1.8
19.01
34.40
33..54
388
12 miles OtS of R.
20
2.7
19.04
34.45
33.59
465
of B.
50
1.9
19.01
34.40
33.54
389
50
4.1
19.29
.34.90
34.02
466 '
100
2.7
19.13
.34 60
33.76
3S»0
80
5.0
19..58
35.42
34.52
467
120
4.9
19..35
35.00
34.13
391
100
5.2
19.51
35.28
34.40
, 468
150
19.65
35.53
34,64
0. Nordgnard.
Nr.
1899
Locality
1
c
.£ £ ■=
III
Saline contents
Nr.
1899
|||
5 !l
fil
Saline contents
Cl.
Salt
Salt
Locality
Cl.
Salt j Salt
Dato
g
r- '-
r - ■=
per
per
per
Date
o
"S T-.
pl
per
per ! per
-"s ?
~ O ^
litre
Htre
mille
æ
«fl
£j^
litre
litre
mille
i March
Metres
Metres
c
j
March
Tranødybet.
Metres
Metres
co
469 10
Brettesnes I.
170
6.7
19.77
35.75
34.87
547
18
100
5.0
19.47
35.22
34.34
470
Bi-ettesnes II.
180
0
1.5
18.97
34.32
33.48
548
150
6.2
19.72
35.66
34 75
471
1 mile NtO'/nO
20
1.8
18.97
34,32
33.48
549
200
6.5
19.87
35.92
35.00
472
of B. I.
50
1.9
19.01
34.40
33.54
550
500
6.5
19.87
35.92
35.00
473 i
80
2.4
19.13
34.60
33.76
551
20
Hola.
150
0
1.0
18.96
34.31
33.46
474 i
100
2.6
19.16
34.66
33.80
.552
At Svolvær.
20
1.2
19.00
34.38
33.53
575
120
4.0
19.31
34.93
34.06
553
50
1.3
19.03
34.44
33.58
47(5
140
6.3
19.58
35.41
34. .52
554
80
4.0
19.29
34.90' 34.03
477
150
6.8
19.73
,'l.").li,S
:il 77
555
100
4.5
19,36
35.02 34.14
478
180
6.7
19.80
:;l -vil
556
120
5.2
19.51
36.28 34.40
479
Eaftsiind I.
48
0
2.3
18 82
:-i 1 II.".
. 1 ; ■_' 1
557
150
6.5
19.77
35.75 1 34.84
480
Off the Troldfjord.
20
2.4
1«.||-
.". \:.\i
:;:;.|s
558
Bålstad.
95
4.3
19.44
:;,- 17 :; i.oi)
48J
45
3.1
: ; 1 1 .",
:; I.."!'!
559 1
Bålstad L
180
0
2.0
19.1s
0 1 7.1 L'.; s|
482
11
Kanstadfjord I.
30
0
1.6
INV'I
:;i lill
:;,;.l(;
5(;o
lO'.o miles 8S0
20
2.J
19.11
.0 1.07 o,,;.7l'
483
At the head of K.
30
2.2
1S.1I7
:; 1 'i-j
:;:; Is
561
of B.
50
2.6
19.22
:il.77 00 Hl
484
Kanstadfjord II.
84
0
1.7
18.86
:-; 1 1 : ;
;:;.L's
562
80
3.1
19.39
35.07 34.20
485
Inside the Kvalø.
20
2.2
18.97
: 1 1 : 1 _'
:;:;. |.s
563
100
3.4
19.32
34.95 34 08
486
50
2.0
18.97
ol .'11'
;;:;. is
564
120
5.15
19.47
35.22 34.34
487
80
1.8
18.97
34.32
33.48
565
150
6.3
19.69
35.60 34.70
488
Kanstadfjord m.
Inside the ridge.
94
90
1.6
18.97
34 32
33.48
566
567
Bålstad n.
130
180
0
6.7
2.0
19.69
19.15
35.60 -34.70
34.65 1 33.79
489
Kanstadfjord IV.
95
20
1.4
18.90
34.20
3335
568
6i,/„ miles SSO of B.
20
2.0
19.15
34.65 ' 33.7H
490
Outside the ridge.
90
4.4
19.31
34.93
34.06
569
50
2.1
19.15
34.65 o:!.77
491
13
Hela.
150
0
1.3
18.97
34.32
33.48
570
80
3.0
1925
34.82 0.111(1
492
Svolvær, Lofoten.
20
1.5
18.97
34.32
33.48
571
100
3.95
19.39
3.5.07 iil.L'd
493
50
2.0
19.13
34.60
33.76
572
130
5.75
19.58
35.41 54.52
494
80
3.45
19.20
34.74
33.87
573
Bålstad III.
75
3.5
19.22
34.77 i 33.91
495
100
4.0
19.27
84.86
34.00
574
Henningsvær I.
105
0
1.5
19.08
34.52 1 .33 67
496
120
5.1
19.43
35.15
34.2(i
575
[3V„ miles'StO of H.
20
1.5
34.52 3:i 67
497
150
6.1
]9.(;-j
:;,-.. IS
:; 1 ,-|i)
576
50
1.5
19!os
0 1.52 o.i (17
41)8
Henningsvær I.
100
0
1.5
111,111
:;i l.'i
:;:;.. 'ill
577
80
2.0
19.0S
0 i.Ol' :;o 07
499
5 miles SOtO'/eO
50
2.4
lli.Ki
:; 1 (ill
:;:>.7(i
.578
105
4.8
19.3K
:io (i7 'il ■'II
500
of H.
100
3.2
19.31
34.93
34.01)
579
Henningsvær H.
280
0
1.7
19.08
34^52
33.67
501
Henningsvær II.
250
0
1.8
19.04
34.45
33.59 i
580
6 miles StOVoO
20
2.0
19.04
34.45
33.59
502
6 miles StOVaO
20
2.2
19.13
34.60
33.76 !
581
of H.
50
1.8
19.08
34.52
33.67
503
of H.
50
2.6
19.13
34.60
38. 7t;
582
80
2.5
19.37
35.04
34.17
504
80
3.7
19.35
.-i5.(io
: ; 1 . 1 .' 1
583
100
3.9
19.44
3.5.17
34.29
505
100
5.3
19.51
584
120
5.5
19.51
35.28
34 40
506
120
5.9
19..58
:;."> 1 1
:; \'yi
585
150
6.5
19.72
35.66
34.75
507
150
6.7
19.73
:;ri iis
: ; 1 77
,'S() '
180
6.8
19.79
35.78
34.87
508
200
6.8
19.88
:;.'i o:;
Os 7
200
6.8
19.82
38.84
34.92
5(i9
250
6.7
19.96
:ii; oil
,■;.".. 10
OSS
250
6.6
19.87
35.92
35.00
510
14
Eisvær I.
60
2.0
19.04
ol.l.J
:;3..")'j
oS9 ,
280
6.55
19.90
35.98
35.06
At Eisvær in East
590
21 1 Moskenstrommen.
100
100
6.5
19.72
35.66
34.75
Lofoten.
5 miles sots of
511
Eisvær II.
250
100
4.6
19.39
35.07
34,20
'
Lofotodden.
512
150
6.1
l'i.i;5
:;i.i; 1
591
Beine I.
105
0
2.5
lll.lK
0 1.72 o:i.,s(i
513
200
6.6
1 II. so
:;.'. --1 1
:;| ,s!i
592
5 miles SOtS of R.
20
2.65
1 II l'l'
01,77 :;o.|i|
514
Eisvær III.
50
2.8
r. 1 111
:;i.o.,
,-93
50
2..s(i
1 11. l'l'
0 1.77 0.; 01
515
85
4.7
19.i:j
:;i.:iO
594
80
2.95
1 9.-2
.') 1.77 , ;;:; lU
516
Paulsgrunden.
125
20
1.6
18.96
34.31
33.46 i
i 595
105
5.00
19.51
35.28 ; 34^40
517
Fishingplace at
50
1.8
18.96
34.31
33.46
596
Væro.
175
0
3.2
19.33
34.97 34.1(1
518
Eisvær.
80
2.7
597
[ 7 miles StW of
20
3.25
19.33
34.97 .34.1(1
519
100
3.4
19.22
.■i 1.77
:!.'i.ii 1
59.S 1 Maaliornet.
50
3.3
19.33
;"ii.iii :ii,|ii
520
110
4 3
l!i. .".■_'
:;i.ii.".
:;l,iis
onii 1
80
4,3
19,43
00.11 oi'l'1.
521
120
5.6
];i ,-,,",
:i.-, :;i;
:;i. 17
(idd
100
5.1
19.5S
00.11 0,1 0_'
522
Øgsljord I.
0
2.1
I8.4:i
:;:; :;t
Ol' ,'. i
(iOl
120
5.65
19.6.5
:'0.."..o .01 01
523
At the head of the
20
2.2
18.72
:;:; ,^7
:io I • I
602
1.50
6.7
1 9.8.0
;0 s.-. ;;| .,)
524
fjord.
50
2.1
18.75
:;:; ol'
:;.; |n
603
170
6.8
19.9(1
.00. '1-^ :;.o I. li
525
100
2.1
18.75
00, 1 1 1
(104
22
Hosthavet.
930
0
5.05
19.87
526
Øgsfjord II.
207
0
1.3
Is. 117
:;:; 7s
505
680,3' N..
20
5.2
19 87
0 .,'!-' 0.'. 1 II 1
527
At Halvarso.
20
1.6
1 s.sii
:;i.i:;
(106
10"0'.5 E.
50
6.0
;..''! .;■. I i'i
528
50
1.7
In, Ml
:: 1 is
(107
80
6.4
20.(11
529
100
1.5
i.s.y.i
". 1 . 1 s
(108
100
6.4
20,05
.;i. -.0 .;o 01
530
150
1.4
18.89
:;i is
(1(19
120
6.4
20.O.-1
;i..lo ;.-, 01
531
200
1.4
18.89
:n.ls
610
150
6.3
20. 0.-.
532
16
Tranodvl.et.
640
0
1.5
19.03
31.11
611
200
6.15
20.00
:;.. L'.o ,0.'. 0,1
533
Between Trano and
20
1.6
111,0(1
:;i :;s
612
250
5.S
L'(l l'.'.
;■, ,1
534
Lod ingen.
60
3.0
:; 1.711
0 ". s 1
613
300
5 6
■'II 1 1.0
. - ' . . 0
535
80
4.2
19 -II
.".I. 'Ill
:; 1 II.;
(114
400
'h.\
■'II ilO
... J". : 0:1
536
100
4.2
19 29
34. '.10
:i 1.1)0
615
500
4.05
19.111
537
150
6.5
19.72
35.6(i
34.75 1
616
600
2.5
19. Hl
...,' '.' ,'.1 :;
538
200
6.4
19.83
35.86
34.94
617
700
1.3
19.S7
539
250
6.5
19.90
35.99
35,06
618
900
1.1
19.87
540
300
6.5
19.90
00. Ol.
619
20 miles NW of
0
3.7
19,51
35.2S , ;).i.|(i
541
500
6.3
19.90
Eøst.
542
607
6.3
19.90
1120
30 miles NW of
100
5.6
19.72
35 66
34.75
543
640
6.3
19.90
;!."i.'.);i
O.ooo
621
Eost.
195
6.4
19.97
36.10
35.18
544
18
0
20
1.4
1.5
18.93
19.00
34.25
34.38
33,41
33.53
622
40 miles NW of
Rost.
0
4.4
19.68
35.59
34.69
546
50
3.0
19.18
34.70
33.84 1
623
24
Eøst I.
120
0
3.1
19.52
35.30
34.42
1899
1
il
m
Saline contents
Nr.
1899
1
i
M
Saline contents
Ni-.
1
1
Cl.
per
litre
Salt
per
litre
Salt 1
per j
mille
Date
I o,"ilitv ^
Cl.
litre
Salt
Salt
per
mille
Date
Looality
a
1
March 1 Eost I.
Metres
Metres
C"
'
April
Hola.
Metres
Metres
c
tilU
24 Ontsi.te Rost.
20
3.15
19.52
35.30
34.42
704 4
At Svolvær.
20
1.0
19.03
34.44
33.58
&2r> ;
50
3.05
19.52
35.30
34.42
705
50
1.05
19.15
34.65
33.78
U-J« 1
80
3.05
19.52
35.30
34.42
701)
80
4.1
19.41 3.5.10
34.23
H27 1
100
3.5
19.55
35.36
34.47
707
100
5.6
19.63 35..50
34.60
&2S • ,
120
4.25
19.63
35.50
34.iin
70s
120
5.9
19.74 1 3.5.70 1 34.79
629 ' Kost II. 1 105
0
2.9
19..55
35.36
34 47
709 1
150
6.4
19.85 1 35.89 j 34.97
6:t0 Outsiao Kost 1
20
3.35
19.55
35.36
34.47
710 6 , Ht-nninysvær I. ; 95
0
1.1
19.18! 34.40 1 33.84
m\
50
4.4
19.67
35.57
34.67
711 14' B miles SU of H.
20
1.1
19.18 i 34.40 33.84
ti:VJ
80
4.5
19.67
35.57
34.(i7
712
50
1.1
19.18 1 34.40 33.84
ir.u
100
4.85
19.74
35.70
34.79
713
70
1.4
19.18 34.40 3384
ti:U ".^o Rost I.
136
0
2.9
19.44
35.16
34 2S
714
80
1.7
III. Is .'il. lo ;j.i ,s 1
t;:i.-, , Insi.le Rost.
20
2.8
19.44
35.16
34.28
; 715
93
2.5.-)
(i:i(i
50
3.4
19..52
35.30
34.42
716
Henningsvær II.
165
0
1.7:.
1 ;i.'_'_' '. 1.77 :i:j m
(i:i7
80
3.5
19..52
35.30
34.42
717
6 miles SO ot H.
20
1.85
l;).22 , :il.77 , ■i3,'.n
ii:i8 1
100
3.8
718
50
1.85
19.22
34.77
33.91
h:m
120
3.8
19.55
35.36
34 47
719
80
2.85
19.30
34.91
34.05
(UO
Rost II.
150
0
2.5
19.74
35.70
34.79
720
100
4.3
1937
35.04
34.17
(Ul 1
Inside Rost.
50
4.05
19.55
35.36
34.47
721
120
5..55
19., 56
35.37
34.49
(U2 1
100
5.6
19.74
35 70
34.79
722
160
6.6
19.74
35.70 ; .34.79
ii43 I
120
6.6
19.85
35.90
34.97
723
7
Steue I.
85
0
1.05
19.06
34.49 33.63
(144 ■
1.50
67
19.93
36.04
35.11
724
6>;2 miles Sto of S.
20
1.3
19.10
34..56 33.70
i; 4.')
27
Risvær.
45
45
2.8
19.33
34.97
34.10
735
50
1.5
19.14
34.63 33.77
ii4ii
Gulvik.
100
0
0.9
19.03
34.44
33.58
7 26
80
1.65
19.14
34.63
33.77
(i47
20
1.2
19.11
34.57
33.72
727
Stene II.
194
0
1.95
19.21
34.75
33.89
«48
50
2.5
19.22
34.77
33.91
728
9'/„ miles Sto of S.
20
1.95
19.21
34.75
33.89
«49
80
0.4
19.55
35.36
34 47
729
50
2.9
19.37
35.04
.34.17
6.50
100
6.1
19 74
35.70
34.79
,: 730
80
2.95
19.'37
35.04
34.17
6.51
28
Tysfjord I.
725
0
0.75
19.03
34.44
33..58
' 731
100
4.6
19.52
35.30
34.42
652
68''12'.o N.,
50
2.3
19.15
34.65
33.79
732
120
5.7
19.67
35.57
34.67
653
16<'12'.5 E.
90
4.4
19.44
35.16
34.28
733
150
6.6
19.78
35.77
34.86
654
Inside Skårberget.
100
.5.5
19.59
35.43
34.54
734
194
6.6
19.86
35.91
.34.99
(i"i5
120
6.4
19.67
35.57
34.67
735
Reine.
110
0
2.0
19.21
34.75
33.89
(i56
150
6.4
19.81
35.82
34.91
736
6i/„ miles SSO
20
2.0
19.21
34.75
33.89
ii.57
200
6.3
19.85
35.90
34.97
737
■ of R.
50
2.35
19.21
34.75
33.89
tio8
250
6.3
19.85
35.90
34.97
738
80
4.0
19.44
35.17
.34 29
659
300
6.3
19.93
36.04
3.5.11 1
739
110
4.5
19.52
35.30
34.42
660
400
6.3
19.93
36.04
35.11
740
Moskenstronmien.
90
0
1.95
19.21
34.75
33.89
661
500
6.3
19,93
36.04
3.5.11
741
5 miles S of Lofot-
20
2.0
19.21
34.75
33.89
662
600
6.3
19.93
36.04
3.5.11
742
odden.
50
2.3
19.21
34.75
33.89
66.^
700
6.3
19.93
36.04
35.11
743
90
4.1
19.44
35.17
34.29
664
29
Tysfjord II.
409
0
1.55
19.07
34 50
33.60
744
11
Off Gaukværø.
0
2.75
19.44
35.17 ! 34.29
665
Inside Tvsfiord
50
1.4
19.11
34.57
33.72
745
Gaukværo I.
40
0
2.6
19.37
35.04 34.17
666
chui-ch.
80
5.2
19 48
35.24
34.35
746
68O4I' N.,
20
2.6
667
100
.5.75
19.59
35.43
34..54
747
1402' E.
40
3.7
19.48
35.23 34.35
668
120
6.1
19.67
35.57
34.67 i
748
Gaukværø n.
0
2.85
19.37
35.04 ! 34.17
669
150
6.2
19.74
35.70
34.79
749
680.34' N..
20
2.65
19.37
35.04 34.17
1)70
200
6.2
19.81
35.81
34.90
750
14017' E.
50
2.7
19.37
35.04 34.17
li71
250
6.3
19.85
35.90
34.98
751
80
3.2
19.44
35.17 34.29
(I70
400
6.3
19.93
36.03
35.11
752
100
4.0
19.56
35.37 i 34.49
April
753
120
4.4
19.63
3o..50
34.60
1)73
1
Gulvik.
100
.5.3
19.59
35.43
34.53
7.54
150
4.6
19.71
35.64
34.74
1)74
190
6.5
1981
35,81
34 90
7.55
200
5.05
19.74
35.70
34.79
675
4
Lilaudsbugten.
58
0
0.4
18.86
:u.i:;
:;:5 2n
756 i
250
5.2
19.78
35.77
34.8ti
H76
Østnesfjorden.
20
1.1
19.07
;;l.M)
:!:',. (i."i
757 ; 12
Malangen.
380
0
1.6
19.25
34.82 33.96]
677
58
3.4
19.33
:! 1.117
:; 1 1 (}
7.58
69033' N.,
20
1.75
19.33
34.96 1 34.10
678
Brettesnes I.
77
0
1.05
19 03
34.44
:,',i .")N
7.59
1800' E. .
50
1.6
19.33
34.96
34.10
679
Inside Moldora.
20
1.1
19.07
34.50
33,60
760
Off Stoimesbotn.
80
1.85
19.40
35.09
34.21
680
50
2.5
19.22
34.77
33.91
761
100
2.15
19.48
35.23
34.35
681
4.7
19.48
35.23
34.35
762
120
2.3
19.48
35.23
34.35
682
Brettesnes II.
145
0
1.1
19.07
34 50
33..i5
763 1
150
3.25
19.56
35.37
34.49
(;83
20
1.1
19.07
34.50
33.65
764 1
200
3.7
19.59
35.43
34.54
684
50
19.26
34.84
33,97
765 1
250
4.05
19.67
35.57
3467
685
80
4J5
19.48
35.23
34.35
766 ^
300
4.01
19.67
35.57
34.67
686
100
6.2
19.70
35.62
34.72
i 7(^7 ■
380
4.1
19.67
35.57
34.67
687
140
6 5
19.81
35.81
34.90
768 , 13 1 «enjenhavet.
80
0
3..35
19.63
35.50
34.60
688
Følstad.
77 I 0
-^0.4
18.88
34.16
33.32
769 , 1 69040' N.,
20
3.45
19.63
35.50
34.60
689
Østnesfjorden.
20
0.25
19.07
34.50
33.6.5
770 1 16047' E.
50
5.1
19.85
35.90
34.97
690
50
2.9
19.22
34.77
.33 91
771
80
5.3
19.85
35.90
34.97
691
77
4.9
19.48
3.5.23
34.35
772 , 1 Nearer land.
0
2.6
19..56
35.37
34.49
692
Helle.
118
0
0.5
19.86
34.13
33.28
1
69038' N.,
693
Østnesfjorden.
20
1.0
19.07
34.50
.33.65
1709' E.
694
50
2.9
19.26
34.84
.33.97
773
14
Malangen.
382
0
1.7
19.37
35.04
34.17
695
80
5.0
19.48
35.23
34.35
774
Off Stønnesbotn.
10
1.65
19.37
35.04
34.17
696
118
5 7
19 63
35.50
34.60
775
20
1.7
19.37
35.04
34.17
697
«kroven.
190
0
LI
19.11
34.57
33.72
776
30
1.7
19.37
35.04
34.17
698
At the edge inside S.
50
2.2
19.18
34.70
33.84
777
40
1.75
19.40
35.09
34.21
699
80
4.9
19 48
35.23
34.53
778
50
1.8
19.40
35.09
34.21
700
100
6.3
19..59
35.43
34.53
779
80
2.15
19.44
35.17
34.29
701
120
6.2
19.74
35.70
34.79
780
100
2.4
19.48
35.23
34.35
702
180
6.7
19.89
35.96
35.04
781
120
2.7
19.48
3.5.33
34.35
703
Hola.
1.50
0
0.8
19.11
34.57
33.72
782
350
4.1
19.67
35.57
.34.67
Xr.
1899
Locality
.1
1
m
III
|2|
Saline contents
1899
1
if!
III
'ås 'S
Saline contents
CI.
Salt
Salt
Nr.
CI.
Salt
Salt
Locality
Date
1
Mu
per
per
per
Date
§1 ?
per
per
per
^it
i-ol
litre
Utre
mille
fill
h'S -g
litre
litre
mille
April
Metres
Metres
CO
Mai
Metres
Metres
CO
783 19
Kvænangen I.
167
0
0.75
19.40
35.09
34.21
860
2
Silden.
0
1.55
19.41
3.5.10
34 24
784 1
Between Spilderen
20
0.75
19 40
35.09
34.21
At Silden Island.
785
and Kvænangs-
50
0.75
19.40
35.09
34,21
861
3
Lyngen I.
120
0
1.7
19.37
35,04
3417
786
tindeme.
80
0.75
19.40
35.09
34.21
862
Off Skibotten.
20
1.9
19.41
35.10
34.24
787
100
0.75
19.40
35.09
.34.21
! 863
50
1.9
19.41
35,10
34.24
788
120
0.75
19.40
35.09
:14 21
8(1-1
80
2.1
19.4.5
35,18
34.30
789
160
2.0
19 56
35.37
.■■■1 I'l
,Ml."l
100
2.3
19.45
35.18
34.30
790 1
Kvænangen U.
90
0
1.0
19.44
35.17
3 1 L'll
81 111
120
2,55
19.48
35.23
.34.35
791
At Xoklen island.
20
0.75
19.40
35.09
:il.--'l
867
Lvngen H.
250
0
1.1
19.37
35.04
34.17
792
50
0.75
l!l |o
:15 o!i
■ ll.-JI
868
Off tiie Kaafjord.
20
1.1
19.37
35.04
34.17
793
90
0.75
lit 10
:)5.o:i
:il -Jl
869
50
1.15
19.37
35.04
34.17
794
20
Jokeli'jurd I.
110
0
0.85
ni.io
35.09
:i l._'l
870
80
2.05
19.45
35.18
34.30
795
At the head of the
20
0.85
19.40
35.09
34.21 :
871
100
2.2
19.48
35.23
34,35
79H
fjord.
50
0.85
19.40
35.09
.34.21
872
150
2.55
19.48
35.23
34,35
797
80
0.90
19.44
3.5.17
34.29
873
200
2,7
19.55
35..36
34.47
798
100
1.00
19.44
35.17
34,29
8,4
250
2.85
l'l..55
35.36
34.47
799
21
Jøkelfjord III.
95
0
0.80
19.44
35.17
34.29
875
Lyngen m.
320
0
l,:i.-.
I'l :i7
:i,"p04
34.17
800
Off the Tverfjord.
20
0.75
19.44
3.5.17
34.29
876
69054' N.,
20
l.'^'i
Iii,:i7
:i.").iil
34.17
801
50
0.90
19.44
35.17
34.29
877
20027' E.
50
1.7_
III, l.">
:;,-, |,s
34 30
80-J
90
1.4
19.48
:i 1 :i.'i
878
Between vtre Gam-
80
111, In
:i.-..23
34,35
8(J3
Kvænangen.
343
0
1.05
19.48
:;i :i,"i
879
vik and Ulo.
100
iji.-i
:!."). 36
34.47
8t)4
7002'.5 N,,
20
0.8
19.48
: 1 1 ; ."i
880
120
3.J."i
111. ."ill
0.-..43
34.54
805
21041' E. '
50
0.8
19.44
li.'i. 1 7
:i 1 -'l
881
150
3,45
19.(i6
35.55
34 65
806
Between Spilderen
100
19.48
:il.:i.'.
200
3.3
19.66
35.55
34.65
807
and the northern
150
l'.45
19.48
11 ,;:,
s>:l
250
3,5
19.73
35.68
34.78
808
mainland.
200
1.95
19.63
:i,"i..".ii
.11 l,H
N.Sl
320
3,65
19.77
3.5.75
34.84
809
250
2.2
19.56
.11 l:i
S85 , 5
Hola.
150
0
2.65
19J2
34.59
33.73
810
340
2.3
19.5()
:il 111
S86 1
At Svolvær.
10
2,55
19.12
34.59
33.73
811
24
Ingohavet.
315
0
3.2
19.78
:;.-, 77
;; 1 ,s,i
887
20
19
19.12
34.59
33.73
812
71010' N,.
10
3.15
19 82
:;."i si
.11 'i:i
888
30
2,45
19 23
34.79
33.92
813
23» 10' E.
20
3.111
ll^^.'
:i."..si
:il :i:i
889
50
4..-.
111 1.".
:i.-..18
34.30
814
30
50
3.3
3.65
1!IM,
l!i.90
:>."■. :il
iil.'i'.i
890
891
80
100
5.:i.">
5.5
111,1111
:i,-,,55
35.55
34.65
34.65
81 ti
70
3.65
19.93
.'ill.OI
:i5 l-j
892
120
5.8
19,73
35.68
34.78
817
80
3.8
19.93
:iii.oi
:i.-..Il'
893
150
6.15
19.77
3.5.75
34.84
818
100
3.8
19.97
;',(i.l(i
:i.-|.ls
1900
819
120
3.65
20.01
: ;,',■_! I
820
150
3.55
■Jii.iij
.111.17
March
200
3.5
L'O.Ol
:iii.l7
;;-, ., ]
894
20
Hola,
150
0
2.85
19.28
34.88
34.02
822
250
3.45
L'onl
.111. 17
;;;, .; |
895
10
2.85
19.35
35.01
34.04
823
300
3.45
-'O 111
llil.lT
:i."i Jl
896
20
2.9
19.35
35.01
34.04
824
Ingahavet n.
0
2.75
Mt.iiT
.11 117
897
50
2.95
19.35
35.01
34.04
825
Between Ingo and
20
2.80
I'.l.iiV
:; 1 i;7
898
80
3,4
19.43
35,15
34.28
82li
the preceding
50
3.25
19.74
111. 711
899
100
4.05
19.44
.■■.'.17
31.29
827
station.
100
3.8
19.86
:;,"i.!i 1
:ii.!i:i
900
120
4,6
19..-,1
:;,"., :iii
lll.tl
828
200
3.8
19.97
:i.-..|s
901
150
.5,4
19.il."i
: 1 1 65
829
Havet III.
3 miles off Ingø.
"
20
19.63
35.50
3 1.60 1
902
903
Skroven.
1 mile SSO of S.
400
0
20
2,75
{;;:;:;
;;■:;;;
:il 14
:il 14
830
Breisund.
100
0
1.7
19.59
35.43
34.54
904
50
2,8,">
111 :i'i
:i.-, (IS
:il.21
831
Between Hjelmesø
50
1.65
19 59
35.43
34..54
905
80
3,15
ill. .I'l
:il 21
832
and Have.
100
17
\'j 59
34.54 1
906
100
4,55
1 1 1 ."l 1
.11 -17
833
27
Porsangerfjord.
200
0
1.05
I'l,'-;
:;,', .Ml
34, (ill
' 91.(7
120
5,10
19J,-|
:| 115
834
Between Great and
20
1.05
i;i,i;.'.
31,60
908
150
6.10
]!1,N-
11. HI
835
Litle Tamso.
50
1.0
l;i (j7
;;.7i ;,7
34,67 j
909
200
6.5
I9.8N
:;;, ;i,;
r. ii5
83(3
80
1.0
19^67
35.57
34 67
910
250
6.5
19.94
3(>.07
35:i5
837
100
0.95
19.63
35.50
34.60
911
300
6 5
19.94
36.07
35.15
838
120
0 95
19.63
35.50
31.60
912
400
6.35
19.94
3607
35.15
839
150
0.75
1 9.117
.'11 117
913
Henningsvær.
270
0
2.85
19.35
35.01
34.14
840
200
0.2O
1 9. .'li'
:il Is
914
6% miles SSO of H.
20
2.85
19.:5
35,01
.34.14
811
28
Porsangei'fjord.
275
0
2.25
1 '.1 Ti',!
:i.">. 1.1
:ii :.l
915
50
2.9
19,35
3.5.01
3-1.14
812
70058'.5 i\.,
20
2.25
l!l ."ill
:;:<, l:;
: 1 1 '. 1
916
80
3.0
19.37
35,04
34 1 7
813
26025' E.
50
2.15
I'.i.'.'.i
:i.', 11
: 1 1 .M
917
100
3.15
19 II
:;,-,lj
m.L'i
844
Off Sværholt-
100
1.4
1 'i.'<:i
:;■> :iii
:i 1, 17
918
120
3.7
19.111
:il :;s
815
klubben.
200
1.3
l!l.-"ill
:;,-, I:;
:il..'il
919
135
5.40
:;i (l.">
84G
May
250
2.75
19.73
35.68
"■'"i
1 920
! 921
150
200
6.10
6.6
li'so
3 1,84
.■!| 111
847
1
Vardo.
225
0
2.0
19.70
35.62
.34.72
922
Henningsvær 11.
165
0
2.7
19.211
11,1111
:il.o4
848
70"21'.5 N.,
20
1.9
19.66
35,55
3-1. (15
923
23/4 miles of H.
20
2.8
19,311
:; \ \\j
:il o5
849
31028' E.
50
1.95
19.6(i
:!"i,."i.')
.1 1 il.'i
924
50
2.9
19,11
:il ml
850
80
1,95
19.66
:il,ii,',
925
100
2.95
19,3:i
'\ 1 117
:il II
851
100
1.95
19. (16
:il 1,'.
926
120
4.0
19,511
:i.'i.:lli
111 ."ill
852
150
2.25
Ml.iKl
-•■ 1 (.'.
927 !
150
6.25
19.81
35^8 1
34^93
853
200
2.25
I'.i.iiil
i:i.:,:,
:i 1 1,.-,
928
165
6.V5
19.81
35.94
34.93
854
Vardo II.
183
0
1.9
1:m;i;
il.i.:,
!t29 ; 21 Stronnneli.
65
0
2.8
855
180
2.05
19.(1(1
:;.'j..'i.'i
:;i.i.,'i ,
930 1 , Between Ilenuings-
20
2.7
19.35
3497
34 11
856
Vardø III.
0
1.45
19.63
35^50
34.60
931
vær and Valberg.
60
2.7
19.36
35.03
34.16
Close np to
932
I Bålstad I.
212
0
3.05
19.33
84.97
34.11
Vardo.
933
! 3 miles of B.
20
2.9
19.36
35.03
34.16
857
Nordkvn.
53
0
1.9
19.63
35.50
34.60
934
50
2.9
19.39
35.08
34.21
858
7108' N.,
20
2.05
19.63
35.50
34.60
935
80
5.35
19.47
35.22
;i 1 :i."i
859
270-12' E.
50
2.05
19.63
35..50
34.60 i
936
88
5.65
19.47
35.22
3 1.:;.".
1900
! 1 ill
lit
3.2 «
Saline contents t
1900
1
111
li!
«aline contents
\,-.
Locality ', | |^ _ •§
{'l. 1 Salt 1 Salt 1
Nr.
Locality
1
1
- '''2
CI. ; Salt Salt
Date
1 «
II!
per
litre
litre
per
mille
Date
M
K;
per
litre
per
litre
per
Miille
March
Metres
Metres
(■0
March
Metres
Metres
C»
(137
21
Balst;ul 1.
100
6.2
19.69
35.62
34 72
1018
30
LandcKo.
1.50
5 3
19.66
35.67
34.67
>);!8
IL'O
6.2)
19.70
3.5.64
34.74
1019
200
5.9
19.90
36.00
35.02
!):i9
150
6.6
19.82
35.68
34.94 1
1020
260
6.0
19.90
36.00
35.08
94(1
180
6.6
19.96
36.11
35.18
lOil
300
6.05
19.93
36.04
.3.5.13
-141
200
6.6
19.96
36.11
3.5.18 i
1022
400
6.2
19.93
36.04
.35.13
W2
Balsta.l 11.
110
0
2,95
19.32
34.95
34.09
1023
450
4.0 r
i)4:i
20
2.8
19.34
34.99
34.12
1024
.\rnii.
410
400
6 55
19,96
36.11
35.18
944
50
2.8
19.39
35.08
34.21
67"! 1' N'.,
!M5
80
3.45
l!l.39
35.08 34.21 1
1
April
:i<'\ry K.
;i4(>
100
3.1
1!i:'.j ■ -il <r. ;u,()9
1025
2
Skiersta.lfj.ird 11.
185
0
2.5
19.11
34 58
33.73
947
Balstail III.
0
2.95
I'l ; ' \ ' . ; 1,(19
1026
50
3.25
19.18
34.70
.33,85
948
50
2.80
1027
80
3.5
19.19
34.72
33.87
949
70
2.85
l:i. ;j :; !.:>:. :U.()9
1028
100
3.5
19.21
34.75
33.90
950
80
3.85
19.36 35.03 i 34.16
1029
150
3.2
19.26
34.85
33.99
951
100
2.85
19.36
35.03
34.16 ;
1030
185
3.35
1926
34,85
33.99
952
Nufsfjord.
125
0
3.05
19.29
34.90
34.04 :
1031
Skjersladfjord IV.
330
250
.3.2
19.29
3490
34.04
953
«i/s; miles SSO of N.
50
2.95
19.29
34.90
34.04 I
1032
300
3.2
19.29
34.90
34.04
954
80
2.95
19.32
34.95
34.09
1033
3.30
3.15
19.29
34.90
34.04
955
100
2.95
19.39
35.08
3421
1034
Skjerstadfjord V.
420
0
2.4
19.18
34.70 i 33.85
956
120
3.0
1035
Off Kvænflaaet.
20
2.45
19.18
34.70 33.85
957
Reine.
112
0
2.95
19.32
.34.95
34.09
1036
50
3.4
19.18
34.70 33.85
958
.nO
2.85
19.32
34.95
34.09
1037
80
3.55
19.21
34.76 33.90
959
80
2.85
19.32
34 95
34.09
1038
100
3.5
19.21
34.76 j 33.90
9H0
100
4.2
19.39
35.08
34.21
1039
150
3.3
19 26
34.85 33.99
9H1
22
Tranodybet.
620
0
2.7
19.32
34.95
.34 09
1040
■
200
3.2
19.26 34.85 33.99
9H2
Between Trano and
50
2.75
19.32
34.95
34.09
1041
2.50
3.2
19.27 1 .34.86 34.(.tO
963
Lødingen.
80
2.75
19.32
34.95
34.00
1042
300
3.15
19.29, 34.90 34.04
964
100
2.7
19.32
34.95
34.09
i 1043
400
3.15
19.32 34.95 1 34.09
965
120
2.65
19.32
34.95
34 09
1 1044
Skjerstadfjocd UI.
230
200
3.2
19.26' 34.85
33.99
966
150
19.32
34.95
.34.09
1045
Skjerstadfjord VH.
480
400
3.2
19.32, 34.85
33.99
967
180
2^8
19.52
35.31
34.43
1046
Off Fauske.
475
3.15
19.32
34 85
33.99
968
190
6.25
19.75
35.73
34.83
1047
4
Skjerstadfjord XII.
515
0
2.3
19.11
34.58
33 73
969
200
5.5
19.75
35.73
3483
1048
Off Skjerstad
20
2.7
19.11
34.58
33.73
970
250
6.25
19.75
35.73
34.83
1U49
church.
50
3.45
19.18
34.70
33.85
971
400
6.3
19.91
36.02
35.10
1050
100
3.4
19.24
34.81
33.'5
972
500
6.3
19.91
36.02
3.5.10
1051
150
3.3
19.26
34.85
33.99
973
600
6.3
19.91
36.02
35.10
1052
200
3.25
19.26
34.85
33.99
974
Øgsfjord.
195
0
2.06
19.22
34.77
33.92
1053
300
3.2
19.29
34.95
34.04
975
At the mouth.
20
2.2
19.24
34.81
33.95
1054
500
3.15
19.32
34.95
34.09
976
50
2.3
19.24
34.81
33.95
1055
Skjerstadfjord XIV.
400
400
3.05
19.32
34.95
34.09
977
80
2.35
19.24
34.81
33.95 i
10.56
5
Saltenfjord H.
320
0
3.2
19.33
34.97
34.11
978
100
2.35
19.24
34.81
33.95
1057
67»14'.5 N..
20
3.15
19.33
34.97
34.11
979
150
2.4
19.24
.34.81
33.95
1058
14026' E.
50
3.1
19.33
34.97
34.11
190
2.6
19.27
3486
34.(30
1059
60
3.6
19.54
35.35
34.47
9S1
23
Østnesfjord I.
27
0
2.1
19.22
34.77
33 92
1060
80
4.4
19.62
35.49
34.60
9S2
At the head of the
fjord.
Østnesfjord II.
20
2.35
19.24
34.81
33.95
1061
1062
100
120
5.0
5.9
19.73
19.76
35.69
35.75
34.79
34.84
983
135
0
2.3
19.22
34.77
33.92
10tj3
150
6.2
19.82
35 86
34.94
984
Between Vaterfjord
20
2.3
19.22
3477
33.92
1064
200
6.55
19.89
35 98
35.06
985
and Følstad.
50
2 5
19.24
34 81
33.95
1065
250
6.65
19.93
36.05
3.5.13
986
80
2.9
19.24
34.81
33.95
1066
320
6.65
19.93
36.05
35.13
987
100
3.45
19,32
34.95
34.09
1067
6
Foldenfjord I.
530
0
3.2
19.33
34.97
.34.11
988
130
.5.75
19.36
35.03
34.16
1068
67037' N.,
20
3.1
19.33
34.97
34.11
989
Østnesfjord III.
135
0
2.35
19.22
34.77
33 92
1069
1.502' E.
50
3.1
19.46
35.21
34.33
990
Abreast of Helle
?0
2.45
19.22
34.77
33.92
1070
80
4.2
19.46
35.21
34.33
991
50
2.6
1071
100
4.15
19.50
35.28
34.39
992
80
2.65
19.24
34.81
33.9".
1072
120
5.55
19.78
35.78
34.88
993
100
3.2
19.36
35 03
34.16
1073
150
6.4
19.91
36.02
35.10
994
130
4.4
1074
200
6.6
19.78
35.78
34.88
995
26
Orsnes.
105
0
2.8
19 39
35.08
3421
1075
250
6.6
19.82
35.86
3494
996
50
2.8
19.39
35.08
3421
1076
300
6.6
19.82
35.86
34.94
997
80
2.8
19.39
35.08
34.21
1077
400
6.55
1992
36.04
3.5.12
998
100
4.7
19..50
35.28
34.39
1078
500
6.55
19.85
35.91
35.00
999
Hennings\ær.
160
0
2.7
19.32
34.95
34.09
1079
7
Vestfjord.
315
0
2.85
19.31
34.94
34.07
1000
50
2.8
19.32
34.95
34.09
1080
Between Fladø and
20
2.8
19.33
3497
34.11
1001
80
2.8
19.40
35.01
34.23
1081
Skroven.
50
3.6
19.38
35.06
34.19
1002
100
4.3
19.46
35.21
34.33
1082
60
4.55
19.60
35.46
34.57
1003
140
4.65
19.54
3.5.35
34.45
i 1083
80
5.65
19.63
35.51
34.62
1004
Bålstad.
135
0
2.8
34.95
34.09
: 1084
100
6.4
19 63
35 51
34.62
1005
50
2.8
19.32
34.95
34.09
1085
120
6.45
19.83
35 87
34.9(>
1006
80
3.3
19.54
35.35
34.47
1086
150
6.45
19.85
35.91
35.00
1007
100
4.5
19.57
35.40
34.52
1087
200
6.5
19 90
36.00
35.08
1008
130
4.0
19.57
35.40
34..52
1088
250
6.5
19.90
36.00
35.08
1009
27
Reine.
170
0
2.55
19.36
35.03
34.16
1089
300
6.5
19.92
36.04
35.12
1010
50
• 2.8
19.40
35 01
34.23
1090
Hola.
1.50
0
2.95
19.25
34.33
33.97
101 1
80
2.9
19.40
3.5.01
34.23
1091
At Svolvær.
10
2.55
19.25
34.33
33.97
1012
100
4.6
19.54
35.35
3447
1092
20
2.5
19.32
34.95
34.09
1013
1.50
6.3
19.75
35.73
34.83
1093
50
2.5
19.34
.34.99
.34.12
1014
30
T.andeiro
450
0
3.25
19..57
35.40
34.52
1094
80
2.75
19.25
34.83
33.97
11115
67''2:i' X.. '
50
3.95
19.50
35.27
34.39
1095
100
3.95
19.51
35.30
34.41
lOlh
3019' K. ' 100
3.65
19..54
.35.S.-1 :U.47
l(J9b
120
4.95
19..57
35.40
34.52
1(117
i 120
4.3
19.64 ; 35.;^:5 , 34(14
1097
1 1.50
5.85
19.78 1 .3.5.80 1 34.881
B. Remarks on the Observations.
a. The Vest Fiord and the Coast Sea.
The observations, made in the Vest Fiord in January 1899,
proved that at that time a comparatively high temperature prevailed
oil the surface of the water.
At Høla, near Svolvær, the surface temperature was S^.s C.
on January 11th, halfway between Grøtø and Skroven 4.4 was
i-eaistered on the surface and between Helligvær and Værø on the
13th of the nionth 4.6. About 4.0 was the surface temperature in
Moskenstrømmen, and on the fishinggrounds beyond Reine, Stam-
sund and Henningsvær.
The highest degree which was registered in January, and in
fact the liighest surface temperature which was registered during
tlie whole winter by this expedition was 5.9 (^Vj) beyond Vester-
aalen, 40 miles NNW of Gaukværø.
Further, as a result of the observations in the Vest Fiord, it
is found that in the majority of places the maximum temperature
is not reached at the bottom. At the station in the middle of the
fiord between Grøtø and Ski-oven ("/i) the maxinmm (6.9) was at
a depth of 100 meters.
At the station at Helligvær ('-/i) tiie maximum (7.6) was
reached at a depth og 140—150 meters, and at the station between
Helligvær and Værø the maxinunn 7.2 — 7.6 at a deptii af 120—150
meters.
In tiie Lofot tishhigbanks too, there was a less clearly defined
maximum, for instance at Stamsund (^Vi) 6.9 at 120 m., and on
tiie same day 6.7 at 120—150 m. at Henningsvær. On .January
.•?lst, the minimum at Høla was 2..5 on the surface, and the maxi-
mum ().8 near the bottom at a depth of 150 meters. Corresponding
conditions were noticed on the same day in the Østnes Fiord (Li-
iaiids Bay, Følstad, Heilo).
Also at Skroven on Feliniary 41li tiie maximum (7.1) was found
at a iic]i1h of \W motors, tiic Imttom temperature being 6.3 (380 m.).
ill tiie (iceii oil' M'raiio tlic iiiaxiiiuuii (72) was reached about 150 m.
down, tiio l)Ottom temperatnrc lieiug (>.3 at 630 meters.
In Øxsund ("/a) the higliest temperature (6.9) was at a depth
of 150 meters, and here too tiic temperature at 630 meters was 6.,3.
Here arc some instances from the Lofot fishing banks: —
'V-.. 16 miles SSW of Henningsvær.
Surface temperature 2.6, maximum 7.0 at deptii of 120
iiitrs., bottom temperature (260 mtrs.) 6.6.
'"/;. 12 miles EtS of Reine.
Surface 2.7. max. (12() mtrs.) 6.5. Imttom temp. 6.2.
Hence it may be gathered that in tiie months of .Tanuary and
February, the maximum temperature was to be found at a depth
of 120 — 150 meters. Towards the end of February this maximum
will be found near the bottom over large portions of the flshmg
banks.
Observations on the Lofot banks in March show niinimuin on
the surface, and, as a rule, maxiinuni near the bottom at a de|)th
of 150—200 meters.
At greater depths in the fiords a less cleaily defined maximum
could at the same time be traced at a depth of 150—200 meters.
Measurements taken in April show a continued cooling of the upper
layers, with a surface temperature of 1 — 2 at Henningsvær, Stene
and Reine.
The section beyond Ingø ('-V4 1899) 71° 10' N. 23" 10' E'
showed minimum (3.2) on the surface, and maximum (3.8) at a depth
of about 100 meters.
But on the otlier hand, from observations made off Nordkyn
and Vardø (Vs) it was found that the temperature at these places
was evenly disposed from the surface to the bottom.
On the first days of May there was no indication of any spring
minimum, on the sea coast of Finmark nor in the Lyngen Fiord').
But when on May 5th I again took the temperatures at Høla near
Svolvær the surface showed 2.65 and minimum (1.9) tiiere had already
reached a depth of 20 meters.
To give an idea of the changes in temperature and salinity in
the course of the winter months, a talile of observations made at
Gaukværø off Vesteraalen is subjoined.
18/j 1899
680 35' N.
140 13' E.
11/4 1899
68» 34' N.
140 17' E.
Deptli in
meters
Temperature
CO.
Salinitv
"/oo"
Depth in
meters
Temperature
Salinity
"/go
0
4.1
33.50
0
2.85
.34.17
10
4.4
33.B6
20
2.66
.34.17
20
4.6
. 33.50
50
2.70
34.17
:}0
4,G
33.66
80
3.2
34.2,.
so
or.
34.04
100
4.0
.34.49
150
H.i>
34.27
120
4.4
.34.60
2.50
7.1
3433
150
4.G
34.74
200
5 06
34.7!)
2.50
5.2
34.86
1) At Lyngen III (cf. no. 87
deptli of 20 m.
Hvdiogrnpliy.
As (lie iilai'os at which thi'S(> ohscivalions woro made arc so
near oacli otlior that one iii,i\, wilhnnt any tVai' of making any
mistake worthy itt' the name, eoiisider them as one and the same,
it is made clear from this table tiiat iVom .lannaiy to April there is
a considerable decrease in the temperatuie, but an increase in the
salinity of the layers of water on the Noi-thcrn coast banks. We
see too that although at Vardø and Norkyn there was no indication
(if the spring mininiuin, yet on tlic sea coast off Vesteraalen the
minimum (2.65) was I'eachcd at a ilcptli of 20 meters as early as
April nth.
Here is a table of obsei'vations made ou tiie coast sea otf Senjcn.
-' , mm. The Senjen Sea, 12 miles
NWtW of Maanesodilen
•»/4 1899. The Senjen Sea.
Deptli in
meters
Temp.
C.
Salinity
"/oo
Depth in
meters
Temp.
CO.
Salinity
o/oo
0
a.3
3:!.i3
0
3 35
34.60
10
s..
3:3.13
20
3.45
34.60
20
;u
Xi 13
50
.5.1
34.97
40
;.{.ii
33.13
80
5.3
34.97
50
4.3
33.13
ISO
4.5
33.33
100
4.(;
33.33
120
4.4
33.33
'i'he comparatively high temperatures and salinity on 'V4 indicate
tiiat water from the south has displaced the Avater whose temperature
and salinity on "Vi is mentioned above. That the layers of water
on the banks of the northern coast are tolerable homogeneous in
the winter, was also gathered from the observations of previous
years.
Captain l^ie on '% 189'^ found the following conditions at a
station situated west of Søroen:
'V4 1897. 70» 45' N.. 20" 30' E.
Depth in
meters
Temperature
C».
Salinity
0
4.1
34.56
10
4i
34.56
20
4.1
34.64
50
4.0
34 54
80
4.0
34 56
120
4.3
34.61
In February 1897 I measured off Vesteraalen:
1" , l.S!J7. OS" .50' N.. 1 1" :!<;' K.
Depth in
meters
Temperature
Salinity
0/00
0
3.9
33.87
50
4.2
.33.92
100
4.35
33.92
150
4.35
33.92
170
4.35
33.92
When the salinity is as even as tabulated above, a fall in the
surface temperature caused by the giving of^' of heat to the atmo-
.sphere is easily balanced by the vertical currents. So as to give
a clear idea of the decrease of surface temperatures, I will now
compare ob.sei'vations made in tlic (Iccj) dlf Tiano Tlio Vest Fiord
— on Feb. (ith and March jr.th is'.i'.).
Tranødybct. 68" 15'.5 N., 15" 49' E.
■ — ==_^=_
'% 1899
"Va
1899
Depth in
meters
Temp.
Salinity
Temp.
Salinity
0
33.50
l5
3.3.68
20
2'
33.50
33.60
3.0
3.3.63
33.84
80
4.6
.3;i.74
42
34.03
100
34,16
4.2
34 03
1.50
li.o
34.89
6.6
.34.75
200
H.4
;35.03
6.4
34.94
250
«4
:J5.os
6.6
35.06
;500
:^r,.u
6.5
35.00
400
(>3
:35.i4
500
fi.3
;3.5.i4
6.3
35.00
(iOO
li.3
.35.14
6.3
:^5.„6
It will be noticed that the fall in temperature has principally
taken place in the upper 20 meters, which in the time mentioned
became about 1" coldei'.
The observations made along the Lofot fishing banks in March
1900 bear great resemblance to those in March of the year before.
Minimum (2 — .3) was found on the suifacc, and maximum at
a depth of 150—200 metei's.
This again proved that the maximum temperature is found at
or near the bottom in the majority of the fishing banks.
Measurements at Høla near Svolvæi' and in the Vest Fiord,
halfway between Skroven and Fladø (''A) proved that spring mini-
mum was even then beginning to be evident.
The salinity of the waters which covered the Lofot banks in
January 1899 was from 33—35 "/oo. The titration of the samples
taken in that month only rarely, however, show so high a saUnity as
35. The complete series of observations made on '7i on the sea
off Vesteraalen (40 miles NNW of Gaukvæi'ø) did not even reach
so high as 35 although samples were taken from the surface right
down to a depth of 1000 meters. But as this is an isolated case,
I will not give any particular weight to it.
During measurements in February, 35 "on was reached in some
"/2 1899, neai- Skroven 200 m. 35.08.
''/2 „ Oxsund 300 m. 35.08.
-V2 ,, Henningsvær III 200 m. 35.03.
"/2 „ Reine I 150 m. 35.08.
It will be found too that measuiements in the Vest Fiord in
March showed a salinity of about 35 at a depth of 200 m. and
the same holds good with regard to April. Neither was any ex-
ception to this rule discovered in the measnromcnts in the Vest
Fiord in March I'JOO.
If the salinity on different dates be compared, for instance that
at (Jaukværo (Gaukvær Island) on >7i and ''A 1899 and at Senjen
on -'Vi and "A it "^vill at once be seen tliat a considerable increase
has taken place.
So as to emphasize this fact still more, I will mention my
observations at Høla neai' Svolvær.
Høla uear Svolvær.
Depth in
meters
9/4 1896
"/a
1897
V3 1897
.0/3 1897
ii/i 1899
31 /j
1899
13'
1899
"-%
1899
^/4 1899
5/s 1899
=0/3
1900
'/4 190(J
T
S
T
^
T
s
T
S
1
T S
T
S
T
S
T
S
T
S
T
s
T
s
T
s
^
32.24
2.1
33.36
"4
2.3
33.68
3.3
33.16
2.1
33 25
1.3
33.48
1.0
33 46
0.8
33.72
2.66
33.73
j.„
34.02
2.95
33.97
10
9 0.
2 3
33.68
.3.5
33.16
2.5
33.25
2.66
33.73
(2.86
34.14
2.55
3.3.97
21)
3.67
33.27
3.6
33.16
2.5
33.26
1.5
33.48
1.2
33.63
1.0
33.58
1.9
33.73
2.9
34.14
2.5
34.09
30
3.70
33..19
2.3
3.7
33.16
2.6
33.25
2.45
33.92
40
3.93
33..58
3.7
33.16
27
33.25
50
2..^
.33.42
2.5
33.61
2.4
33.68
3.8
33.21
3.3
33.37
2.0
33.76
1.3
33.68
1.05
.33.78
4.5 134.30
2.95
3414
2.5
31.12
80
3.8
.33.21
5.2
33.72
3.45
.3387
4,0
34.03
4.1
34.23
5.35
34 65
3.4
34.28
2.75
33.97
100
4.95
33.98
4.2
33.80
2.7
33.68
2.5
33.68
4.6
33.21
6.4
.34.20
4.0
34.00
4.5
34.14
5.0
.34.60
5.5
34.65
4.05
34.29
3.96
34.41
120
4.7
33.92
6.7
34.46
5.1
.34.26
5.2
.34.40
5.9
34.79
5.8
34.78
4.6
34.41
4.95
34.52
130
4.7
84.11
4.0
34.11
6.6
34.30
!
loO
5.93
34.29
6.6
34.52
6 8
34.59
6.1
.34 69
65
.34 84
6.4
34.97
6.15 1 34.64
5.4
.34.66
5.85
34.88
Fi'diii tlic al>ove table it seems to be sufficiently clear that the
salinity of the layers of «ater increa.ses all through the months of
.January to April inclusive.
The reason for this is probably that the rainfall in the winter
months is less than in the autumn. The fall which takes the form
of snowis also at that time of year a factor which may be ignoi'ed.
A g-ood deal of influence on the salinity of the water in the winter,
is probably to be found in the fact that much fresh water is im-
pi'isoned in the ice, which is formed in the smallei' fiords and at the
ends of the ijreater ones.
fJenerally speakini;' it may be aftirmed that the surface temjx^-
rature and the surface salinity decreases the further in one goes in
the Vest Fiord, and the values are of coui'se least at the ends of
the branch fiords.
This will be made clear if one foUuws tlie results of the ob-
servations made, e. g. from Rombaken to X-æra and Røst. \Mth
regard to the factors mentioned, it may be said that the continental and
the oceanic powers oppose each other, and one would at once expect
to find that the oceanic influence would be more strongly felt in
])r(iportion to distance from the ends of the fiords and ince rerm.
While tlie temperature and salinity of the surface in the deep
offTrano (Tran Island) "'A 1899 was 1.5 and 33.58, the corresponding
fiyures at Værø wei-e 3.2 and 34.10 on the -ilst of the same month.
,\nd on the 22nd, there was found 35 pro mille water on the surface
(if the sea NW of .Røst and a tempei'ature of .5.05.
The ol)servatioiLs made there are of consi(h'rable interest.
-73 1899.
68« 3' N.
10''.05' E.
Depth ill
Temp.
Saliiiitv
metei'.s
C.
;«o
0
5.05
35.00
20
5.2
35.00
.50
6.0
35.09
80
6.4
35.24
100
6.4
3.5.31
120
6.4
35.31
1.50
6.3
35.31
200
6.15
35.31
250
5.8
.35.31
300
5.6
35 31
400
5.1
35.31
500
4.05
35.13
600
2..'-,
.35.13
700
1 ;i
35 ...1
900
1.1
35.,m
So that comjjarisons may be made. I also give Professor Mohx"
bsei'vations made at ;i neighltouring station in June 1877.
-"ir. 1S7 7. (is" 3' N.. 9" 53' E.
Depth in
Temperature
meters
C».
0
8.2
91
7.1
183
6.:!
366
5.3
549
3.6
732
- 0...
^•14
- 1.1
These observations are made with a Mileee-Csaella's deep water
thermometer, while I used Professor Petteeson's waterbottle, which
although it is an excellent instrument can hardly be depended upon
with respect to its isolating properties when the depths are as great
as from 7 to 9 hundred meters.
The observations made on -7':'. 1899 at any rate siiow that
35 pro mille Avater may oif the banks of Lofot — Vestcraalcn i-each
to a depth of at least 900 meters.
I>y eom])aring the measurements on the Rost Sea (--/s) with
those in tlie Tys Fiord (-"/.•;) very interesting results are obtained.
-'Vs 1899. The Tvs Fioi'd 1.
Depth in
Temperature
Salinity
meters
CO.
%o
0
0.75
r
33.58
50
2.3
33.79
90
4.4
34.28
100
5.6
34.54
120
6.4
34.67
1.50
6.4
.34.91
200
6.3
34.97
2.50
6.3
34.97
.3110
6.3
3.5.11
400
6.3
.3.5.11
Hydvdgi-ii
13
Till" tompeiiiturc values in tlic uppcM- layers show consklorahlc
(Ircrcase. while in the ilei^p a iiroixt eonstaney ]ircvails. P>ul un
the other hand, on the Kost Sea the npiier layei's show a coni-
jiaratively hig'h temperature.
At
hut
the
1.1 (1
) (leiith of !■_>() uietei's. tin
then there is a -real dill'
teuiiieratui'e falls from r,.-
uit in the Tvs KionI at Ih
tempeiature at hotli plaecs was
lenee het ween them. On the
to l.;i het ween 120 and 7(H)
same deiiths it only falls from
What eaii he
It will at nni
layers in the sea
ditl'ereuee is tound
eo.dini:- of the surf
stra
10 reas(m oi th
he nolieed that the
i-e pretty uuudi the sar
n the Tys l-'iord. At
e iiives rise to vertieal
dinai'y diHerenee?
:iliuity of the ditfcrent
■. w hile a, eonsiderablc
the former jilaee. the
■urreuts. wliieh in their
turn almost halanee the ditt'crcnec in tenii)ci'atuie.
In this way even a pi'ctty deep layer of water ma,\ exehaiii^e
heat with the atmos])hei-e. But when the eondition.s arc like those
in the Tys Finril. w here the salinity in the upper layers is so varied,
even a consideiahle deercasc of surface temperature will not distui'b
the ei|uilihriuui o\' the watei-.
As niiw the distrihutiim of heat through the water takes place
slowly, the result nuist he that the surface itself decreases consider-
ahly in temperature, and that it is only a comparatively thin layer
which exchang-es heat with the atmosphere.
So as to get an idea of the extent of the changes which take
jilaee in the upper layers, let us examine H. H. Gkan's observations
made in the Tys Fiord in the summer of ISDsM {Hydrographical
Tables s. XXVII).
1898. (>8» 1.5'.4 N., 16" "'.3 E.
Korsnes in the Tvs Fiord.
I)ei)tli in
meters
Temperature
C».
Salinity
"/oo"
* 0
13.„-
30.71
10
11. r,
33.(15
20
9.18
33.4S
m
7.118
33.112
40
fi.05
.33.84
oO
•n.n
33..S.,
As Gkan's station was close to the place where 1 made my ob-
servations (Ty.s Fiord I), the results may be compared.
We get the impression that the top layers are subject to great
increase of temperature in summer and g-reat decrease in winter,
and wee see too that the temperature at a depth of 100 meters on
the -'7- was 5.4 and 5.5 on the '-'Va-
lt is wellknown that the natural conditions in the depths of
the large tiords are tirmly established. The water in the deep fiord
basins is tolerably homogeneous, the temperature and salinity are
almost unvarying throughout the whole mass, and there are only
1) H. H. Gr.^n.
Ocean and the I'oasi
Investigations. Vol.
L.graiihioal, Biol
u-dlaiul. (Rejmi-
O. Nr. 5).
Atlantic
i Marine
very slight dilferenees in the course of a year. There are especially
two thiu-s which control this.
In the lii'st place, the topography of the bottom of the .sea is
of extreme importance, foi-, if for instance the deep part of the Tys
Fiord was lengthened out towards the ocean, the probability is tliat
conditi(uis would then be .somewhat different.
In the .second place, the supply of continental fresh water,
A\hich by weakening the surface layers forms these into an isolating
belt, is doubtless of great imjjortancc in connection with the stability
of the conditions in the depths of the iiords.
There is certainly every reason to believe that there is a thicker
layer on the sea which gives oif heat to the atmo.spherc than in
the tioi'ds, but this does not, all the same, explain the great iall
in temperature in the deep wliich takes place beyond the .sea boundary.
One can scarcely think that this is kept up in any other
way than by the How of watei- from colder regions. There must
1)0 a cold undercurrent in the ocean.')
b. The Fiords.
In the winter of 1899, I had an opportunity of visiting sevei'al
of the northern fiords, and as I was able to make two sets of
observations in some of these, 1 am in a position to give results
which make it possible to compare. I was however prevented from
making observations in the same fiords during the following wintei-.
i)Ut I had the pleasure of obtaining several observations in tlie
Skjerstad l'"iord, which presents many pecuUarities on account of
its considerable depth and its being so shut otf from the sea.
In the following pages, some details will first be given of each
of the fiords visited, then an attempt will be made to give a gene-
ral characteristic, by help of which the similarities and dissimilarities
in physical conditions will be made clear.
Sandhorno (o-island) which is situated S. of Bodo on the south
side of the Salten Fiord is separated from the mainland by two
.smaller fiord.s. Jietween Gildcskaal and Sandhorno we have Mor s-
dal Fiord (also called S. lieier Fiord and Sund F'iord) and on the
opposite side Ave have N. ] Jeier Fiord. In these two small fiords
di'edgings were made "/a 1900.
The farm Sund lies at the point of Gildeskaal peninsula.
Here dredgings were made at a depth of 50 — 150 meters, and in
the adjoining fiord just inside Kvarsnes at a depth of 50 metei's.
Neither of the.se tiords seemed to be very deep.
The Salten Fiord is the tolerably broad fiord arm which
runs into the land near Bodii. The islands Stromo and GodO se-
parate it from the Skjerstad Fiord, which farther in is also cal-
led the Saltdal Fiord. The Salten and the Skjerstad Fiord are con-
nected by three comparatively shallow sti-eams, of which the cen-
ti'al one, the famous „Saltstrom" is a rival to the Moskensti'om in
bulk and force. With regai'd to the depth of the Salten Fiord,
two soundings are marked on the sea chart about half A\ay be-
tween Sandhorno and the peninsula on which Bodo is situated, the
one states a depth of 131 f. (246.60 m.) the other 112 f. (210.84
m.). A little further in, 1 sounded .380 meters but it was from a
depth of .•i20 m. that the samples of water wei-e taken (Salten-
fiord II).
1) Cf.
nouniphical Hesnlt.s
of 1900. N. Mag.
u
O. Nordgaard.
Thus it appears that the bed of the Salten Fiord, Avhieh has
a maximum depth of at least 380 meters, slopes fairly evenly out-
Avards, but someAvhat steeply inwards; for at the outer end of ^alt-
strommen 40 m. was reached and at the inner 60 m.
It is said that in the most sliallow pai-t of the stream tlie depth
is only about 20 meters.
.Several soundings were taken in the Skjerstad Fiord, by means
of which a very good idea of the depth can be formed.
If not othei'wise specified, it may be taken for granted that
the soundings were made in the middle of the fiord. At the end
of the fiord (Skjerstad Fiord I) the bottom was reached at 30 — 50
m. About 1.5 miles out (S. II) the depth was 100 — 185. S. Ill and
S. IV lie in the outer half of that part of the Skjerstad Fiord
which runs southwards, and the depths here were respectively 230
and 330 meters.
Opposite Kvænflaaet (S. V.) I sounded at -120 m., and in the
arm of the fiord close to Fauske (S. VI) at 100 — 150 m. ; while
the depth in the middle of the fiord opposite Fauske (S. VII, VIII) was
470 — 490 m. Just off the coast of Skjerstad in the direction of the
Misvær Fiord the depth was 80—50 m. and at the mouth of the
Misvær Fiord (S. X) 10 — 30 m., while a little further in the same
fiord the depth was 50 m. (S. XI). On the other hand, the depth
in the middle of the Skjerstad Fiord just opposite the church (S. XII)
was 515 m.
A little further out (S. XIII) strangely enougli it was only
110 m. deep, and from here the bed again sinks to the greatest
depth sounded in the whole fiord, viz. 518 meters.
Then it again inclines evenly upwards, for at the following
stations in the direction of Saltstrommen (S. XIV, S. XV, S. XVI)
the respective depths were 400, 380, 330 m. Measurements taken
in the middle of the fiord from the end to the inner part of Salt-
strommen give the following figures: 30, 50, 100, 185, 230, 330,
420, 470, 490, 515, 110, 518, 400, 380, 330, 40 m.
How far the rise from 110 to 515 and 518 is an isolated
I)oint, or whether there is a ridge stretchhig across tlie fiord, I am
not able with certainty to decide.
It will be seen from the foregoing that tiie Skjerstad Fiord is
considerably deeper than the Salten Fiord, and that the greatest
depth sounded in it up to the present time is 518 meters.
Observations in the Skjerstad Fiord gain increased interest as
the Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition in 1877 had a couple of
stations here.')
Temperature i-ogistratioiis are liere given for the sake of com-
pai'ison.
'■'A 1877. Tile Skjerstad Fiord.
Doptli ill
meters.
Temp.
CO.
0
:i -j:!
'Vs 1877. The
Skjerstad Fiord.
Depth in
Temperature
meters.
CO.
0
11.4
18
8.7
.37
7.8
.55
7.5
73
H.7
91
5.7
110
5..I
128
4.0
146
3.2
Kio
3.1
183
3.0
20\
3.2
219
3.1
238
33
457
34
494
3.2
Now I will compare tliis table with one from my series of
obsei'vations.
V4I900. The Skjerstad Fiord XII.
Depth in
Temperature
Salinitv
meters.
C.
"oo-
0
2.3
33.73
20
2.7
33.73
50
3.45
33.aR
100
3.4
33.95
1.50
3.3
33.99
200
3.25
33.99
300
3.2
34.01
500
3.15
lU.o.,
These last two tables resemble each otlier in so far as in both
of them the physical conditions from a depth of 150 m. down are
seen to be pretty much alike, and this can hai'dly be looked upon
as due to chance.
The Skjerstad Fiord is a typical shut in basin, so tiiat there
can be no I'enewal of the water in its bottom from any under-
current.
The temperature \\aves must come from above downwards,
and according to what has already been mentioned one must be
able to conclude that, e. g. the distribution of heat in the deep
is in a high degree prevented by the mixing of fresh water with
the surface layers. There are also signs which seem to indicate
that the changes in degrees of heat take i)lace exceedingly slowly
in the water at considerable depths.
Reference has already been made to the conditions with regard
to the maximum of temperature in the month of March in the Lofot
i'anks. P>ut if one looks over the measurements in the Skjerstad
l-i'iord in the beginning of April, it will be seen that even so late
as that the maximum has not got very far.
Hydrography.
15
Thus -4 .S. ir. so
- , N. V. so
111. ■"!..") I max. I
.ludying- IVom tlie liirui'es just uotcd for ■* i S. .\ll. it iiuiy also
hv concluded that the maximum lies between 50 and loo in. Hut
this again shows that the changes in temperature take place veiy
slowly. In the ISalten Fiord, where the ocean water has free access,
there was no sig-n of the maximum at a depth of 80 ni., the autumn
maximum had entirely disappeared and the hiirhest temperature was
reached at the bottom at a depth of 320 ni.
.See the foIlo\\iiii;- table.
1900. The .Salten Fiord 11.
Depth in
Temperatm-
Siiliiiitv
nietors.
C'\
"'«•
0
3.2
34.11
20
3.15
34.11
oO
3.1
34.11
HO
3.0
.34.47
80
4.4
34.00
100
.5.0
34.71.
120
.5.0
.34.,s4
130
6.a
34.'i4
200
6.65
.3.5.00
250
6.05
.35.1:!
If the above table be compared to that of the section S. XII
(^.4), a striking- difference will at once be noticed. Not only is the
bottom temperature in the .Salten Fiord much higher than in the
Skjerstad Fiord (.3°.5 difference) but the salinity on the surface of
the former is even a little higher than at the depth of 500 m. in
.S. Xll. That such decided differences in the hydrographical con-
ditions of the Salten and Skjerstad Fiords, as shown by tempera-
ture and salinity, also cause biological differences, is a foregone
conclusion. This subject will be dealt \\-ith further on in this
treatise.
From the Folden Fiord, 1 have only one sounding (74 1900
Foldenfj. I; taken halfway between Hjerto and the south mainland.
The depth was 5-30 meters. From the hig-h temperature and sali-
nity of the water from the bottom (Vide no. 1067—1078) one
may conclude that the ocean water is not prevented from floning
into, at any rate, the outer part of the fiord. It should be added
that there is another Norwegian fiord which bears the name of
the Folden Fiord, it is in the county of North Trondhjem, just
south of the 65th degree of latitude. In the old days, the Kristi-
ania Fiord also used to be known by this name.
The Ox Sound and the Sag Fiord.
One of the entrances to the Sag Fiord from the Vest Fiord
is formed by the Ox Sound (between Hammero and LundO).
While in the sea chart for that part of the Vest Fiord which
is beyond the Ox Sound the depth is given as 211—252 fathoms
(397.21—474.38 m.) we took in the Ox Sound the following depths
from the mouth inwards: 455, 450, 630, 620, 620 meters. So
that this short, narrow sound (the length is about 5 miles, and
the breadth about 1 mile) has a maximum depth of 630 meters. I
believe this is the one single case in the whole of Norway.
Respecting temperature and salinity, attention is drawn to the
tables (nr. 351—362).
It will be seen that it is especially from the upper 20 meters
that the accumulation of the summer heat is given off to the atmos-
phere. It may probably also be stated as a fact that the less salt
surface layers serve as an isolating belt, by means of which the
loss of heat fi-om the layers beneath is to a great extent prevented.
In the Sag Fiord proper, only a couple of soundings were
taken in the inner end outside Furrunes (Sagfj. I, II). The depths
here were respectively 210 and 315 m. From the high temperature
and salinity of the water at the bottom {Vkh nr. 363—368) I
conclude that this inner part of the fiord is not shut off by any
ridge from the rest of it.
The innermost parts of the Vest l''iord and of tJie Tys Fiord
are very interesting on account of their great depths. The greatest
depth in the Vest Fiord is found north of TranO, for the sake of
brevity 1 refer to this as the Trani3 deep (Tranodybet). On the
old sea charts soundings are not marked beyond a line Kjeo-
Trano, but I have taken many soundings from here, from which it
is made clear that the great fall of 5—600 m. and more contiines
almost up to Baro.
Halfway between liani and Rotvær 280 m. were sounded, from
here in the direction of Tranii the following depths were noted:
324, 570, 608, 610, 630, 620, 535. In a straight line across the fiord
from Offerso in the direction of Tiltvigtind the following were sound-
ed: 250, 630, 680, 640 m. and from Offerso to the mouth of the
Tys Fiord: 485, 580, 585, 320, 465 m. Thus it will be seen
that there is a rise directly outside the mouth of the Tys Fiord.
After this rise there is again a fall in the bed of the Tys
Fiord, for soundings taken in a straight line from the centi'c of the
mouth of the Tys Fiord to the inner half of Skårberget gave the
following figures: 615, 630, 615, 725, 725 m. This great depth
is almost without variation right up to Skårberg.
As far as I knoAv, 725 m. is the greatest depth reached in
any fiord north of Trondhjem, and I take the Uberty of calling
the great basin which stretches from Korsnes to Skårberg, the
Tysfiord deep. The innermost boundary for this basin I am unable
to give precisely; the last sounding at 725 m. was taken a little
further in than Skårberg, and here dredgiligs ^\-ere made and samples
of plankton and water taken (Tysfiord 1).
A sounding between Ulvo and the Northern mainland gave a
depth of 230 m., while tJie depth at the station Tysfiord II, which
is a little further in than Tysfiord church, was 409.
A little further in, in the same arm of the fiord, the bottom
was reached at 130 and 140 m. respectively.
That there is no high submarine ridge between Tys Fioi'd
church and the mouth of the fiord, may be seen by comparing
the observations made at the two stations {Vide nrs. 651 — 672).
The observations made in the basins of the Tys Fiord and Tranii
show a great similarity. There is reason to believe that the bot-
tom temperature at the places mentioned remains for years at 6 — 7,
with a salinity of about 35. The animal and plant existences in
the basins, thus live in physical conditions of remarkable constancy.
The Vest Fiord is continued in the Ofot Fiord, which again
has several important arms. Of these, the .Skjomen Fiord and
the Rom bak Fiord were vi.sited in 1899.
There is a rise in the bed a little west of Baro, which is
again succeeded by a fall towards the Ofot Fiord. Between Baro
and Tjelodden 545 m. were reached, and opposite .Skarstad 550.
Then there is a rise; for opposite Havnes the depth was 360
(Ofoten 1, '/■. 1899) and between Bogen— Ballangen (Ofoten II, 'h.
1900) 258 m. There are considerable depths also in the Rombak
<,rcVa
Fiord, a little further in than Oijord 310 m. was sounded (Rom-
baken III, Vo 1899). Furthest in at Rombakbotnen the depth was
only 40 m. (Rombaken I) and opposite outer .Sildvig- 110 m. (Rom-
baken II, Vide nrs. 302—311). At the station .Skjomen lat the
end of the Skjomen Fiord near Elvegaard the deptli was also only
■10 m. (nrs. 322—324).
In the middle part of this fiord (Skjomen II) the depth howe-
ever was 150 m. (nrs. 325 -329) and the same depth was sounded
just a little further in than the mouth, while a sounding taken in
the mouth projjor gave only .S5. Moreover, judging fi'om the figu-
res giving the temperature and salinity at the station Skjomen I and
II, it may be concluded that this fiord is shut off by a submarine
ridge from any floM- of warm, salt ocean water.
Thus we have
V2 189». Skjomen II.
Dejith in
T
umperature
Salinity
meters.
C'O.
"Zoo-
0
1.8
33.50
20
1.8
33.37
50
1.8
33.37
100
1.7
33.37
150
1.7
:!3.4o
Generally there is ice on the Skjomen Fiord in the winter.
Similar physical conditions are found in Rombakbotnen, which
is connected to the Rombak Fiord proper by a shallow stretch
known as .,StrOmmen" (The current). On the other hand, obser-
vations in the outer Rombak Fiord (R. Ill, 72 1899, nrs. 312—321)
show that the warm, salt ocean water has been able to get access
to this place. From the measurements taken in February in 1897
and 1899 in the Ofot Fjord, it is made sufficiently clear that the
surface layers of the fiord in question gave off much more heat than
is the case in the Lofot fishing grounds, and the loss of heat is
still greater in the smaller fiords which adjoin the Ofot Fiord.
The Ogs Fiord is shut ott' from the Vest Fiord by innumer-
able .small islands and holms, but the Kanstad Fiord has a more
direct connection with the principal fiord. When we visited the
Kanstad Fiord on "/.i 1899 its inner part M'as covered with ice,
(lur first station (K. I) thus being just beyond ,,Str()mmen" Avhich
connects the inner and outer half. The depth here is only 30 m.
I'^uither in than Kvalo 84 ra. was reached. Just beyond KvalO
outwards there is a rise in the bed which is called ,,the ridge"
(revet). From this point onwards to just opposite Nes the follow-
ing depths were reached: 4(J, 75, 95 ni.
About halfway between Offersii and liarO the de])tli was found
to be 215 metens.
On 'V3 1899 the temperature inside „tho ildge" at a depth
tif 90 meters was 1.6 and the salinity 33.48; outside at the same
depth the temperature 4.4 and the salinity 34.06. It may also be
gathered fi'om this that tiic outtM- i)art of the Kanstad Fiord is
connected witJi tJic Vest liord by an unbi'okcn cliannol. while the
ridge prevents the Avarnier bottom water fnim pcnctratinL'- into tiie
inner pai't of the fiord.
Outside the mouth of the Ogs Fioid, there is a stretch of
water, which is nearly free for islands and holms, which is called
..Flaket''; and here I have sounded from 175—220 meters. This
comparatively open stretch of water continues towards Pundslet-
vaagen and Aarstenen.
ObserA'ations made on '% 1899 however (nrs. 455 — 463) give
such low temperature and salinity that one must conclude that
,,Flaket" is pretty much shut off. At a depth of 220 m., for
instance, the temperature was 1.7 and salinity only 33.4o.
On the inner part of the Ogs Fiord there is ice in the winter.
Station I ("/s 1899) was just on the border of the ice. The depth
here was 100 m.; temperature 2.1 from the surface to the bottom,
but the salinity varied from 32.54 — 33.10 (nrs. 522—525). Station
IT ("A 1899) was situated near Halvorso towards the mouth of the
Ogs Fiord. The depth here was 207 m. As several observations
were made here, I adjoin the various results for the sake of com-
The Oi;s Fiord II.
Depth in
Tei
iperature
Salinilv
meters.
C».
«Zoo-
0
1.3
32.05
20
1.6
33.28
50
1.7
33.33
100
1.5
33.33
150
01 11 1
1.4
33.33
On -'-'/i 1897 I also had a station not far from Halvorso')
(Hydr. Tables p. 16).
Then the following results were obtained:
Depth in
Temperature
Salinity
meters.
CO.
°/oo-
0
1.4
33.26
10
2.1
3.3.49
50
2.3
33.40
100
2.G
33.61
145
2.7
;33.6:
At the same place on ■'■'/■j
obtained :
illowing results were
Depth in
Temperature
Salinity
meters.
CO.
"/go-
0
2.06
33.92
20
2.2
33.05
50
2.3
88.06
80
2.3.^,
33.05
100
2.36
33.06
150
2.4
33.96
190
2.0
34.00
It will he seen from these observation tables that the hydro-
graphical conditions in the Ogs Fiord vary in no small degree from
year to year. One might almost bo tonipted to say that more of
') H.10RT, Gran and NoRDOAAnn. Kh
gatious 1895—97. Bergen 1899.
Norwegian Marine Inv
Hydrography.
17
I ho salter water floAvs in one year than another, which ap'ain one mig-ht
;K-L'Ount for, as tlie curve for ."54 pro niilio in tiio corresponding- part
of tiie Vest Fionl reached iiiiilier one year tiian tlie otiier. How-
ever nothing certain can be said on tiiis point.
There is another tiord, the Ostncs Fioid. w hidi from the Vest
Fiord goes into Ostvaagii. and this liord is of far more importance
economically speaking tliaii tlic two Hords just mentioned on Hinno.
Tn the 0)stnes Fiord there is ol'tcii very good cod fishing.
The greatest depth which was measured in isii'.i was 140
meters just opposite lleUc in the oiitei' part of the tiord. Respec-
ting the hydrographieal conditions refer to the tables nrs. 207—234,
iiSl— li;)4.
The Kirk Fiord stretches in to Moskeueso from the Vest
Fiord. The greatest depth we measured on 'Va 1S99, a little
way from the mouth of the Vor Fiord inwards, was 130 meters.
From 0—100 m. here the temperature rose fi'om 2.0 to 2.7, while
tile salinity increased from 33.lti to 33.48.
At Station II in the inner half of the tiord tiic rise in tem-
perature and salinity was respectively (from 0—50 m.) 1.5 — 2.5 and
32.95-33.40. Ville the tables nrs. 420—425. In the Vest Fiord
at the same time (11 miles iSE of Reine) the temperature at a
depth of 100 m. was (;.5 and salinity 34.52.
In the Mai ang Fiord, I have only observations from the
deepest part between Senjen and Kval(3. But I have two sets of
observations taken on -7i and '-/4 1899 respectively.
It is interesting to compare these, nrs. 182—195, 757—767).
In this fiord just as at several other places in the month of
.January, there was on -"/i a homogenous layer from the surface
to a depth of 100 m. with a temperature of 2.9 and a salinity of
33.92. From 120 — 350 m. the temperature rose from 3.0 to 5.5
and salinity from 33.97 to 34.52. On ^'A the conditions were con-
siderably altered. As one would expect, the cooling of the surface
layers was still farther advanced. The upper 50 m. had a tempe-
rature of l.H, which is equal to more than one degree's fall.
There is nothing remarkable in this, but more unexpected was
ir to find that the temperatuix> at a depth of 350 m. had fallen
from 5.5 to 4.1.
Such a considerable change of temperature at such a great
depth has not previously been observed in our fiords.
Neither can it be explained as the result of a cooling process,
by which the layers of water have given off heat to the atmosphere.
Tlie most likely solution of this problem is that this change is
occasioned by an undercurrent from the ocean. A hint in this
direction is also given by the fact that tiie salinity was also some-
what higher.
Measurements in the Lyngen Fiord (-'/i and ^5 1899) also
furnish interesting examples of a considerable change in hydro-
graphical conditions. AMth regard to tiic deptJis in this fiord it
should be mentioned that we sounded lis — 125 m. opposite Ski-
botten; 250 m. outside the mouth of the Kaa Fiord; 200 m. op-
posite Spokenes, and 320 m. between outer Gamvik and the north
]ioint of Ulo. Thus it appears that Lyngen, like the majority of
tlie northern fiords, is deepest in the outer part.
Observations made on -"/i (nrs- 155 — 162) at station L. II
show a remarkable uniformity from the surface to the bottom.
At the next station the state of things was still more remark-
able (nrs. 163—173), as the temperature decreased from the sur-
face downwards. This is exactly contrary to what is usual in the
fiords in the winter, and I therefore call it the reversed win-
ter state. At station L. Ill too. there was an indication of some-
thing similar, the temperature at a depth of 150 m. being 3.4 and
at 200 m. 2.9 (nrs. 174-181). But on the other hand on "Vr, the
state of tilings in the same liord was altogether different. On this
date at station L. I there was an inequality, both in temperature
and .salinity (nrs. 861—860), and at st. L. II the usual winter
state, with quite an even rise in the temperature from the surface
downwards (nrs. 868-875). The same conditions were also found
at St. L. Ill') (nrs. 875—884). The question now arises how can
the unusual distribution of heat which was found at st. L. II on
^7i (tlie reversed winter state) be explained. As, however, tiie
case here nieiitioned is not an isolated one, I will not give my theory
to explain it. until 1 have described the other similar cases. In
the Kvænang Fiord we took soundings between LokO and P.ry-
nilen at a depth of 150 m., between Spilderen and the south main-
land at a depth of 180 m. Between Spilderen and the north main-
land 343 m. was sounded, and it is probable that this is tiie grea-
test fall in the bed of the Kvænang Fiord. Further in the fionl
near the island Noklan the depth was only 90 m., and in the JOkel
Fiord which joins the Kvænang on the north 110 m. were reached
on the border of the ice right in at the end of the fiord close to
the glacier. This depth was also reached just outside the Tver
Fiord. Measurements on =Vi 1899 at K. I and II (nrs. 135 — 154)
showed a remarkable uniformity in the temperature and salinity of
the layers of water. This uniformity was also found on '"A- To
verify this the values are compared in the following table. It
should be noticed that K. I on -Vi = K. I on *74-
Kvænangen 70" 1' N., 21° 28'.5 E.
Between Spilderen and the southern mainland.
-*/l
1899
...
1899
Depth in
meters
Temp.
Salinity
Temp.
■ Salinity
«/oo
0
2.0
33.87
0.73
34.21
10
2.6
33.87
0.75
34.21
20
2.6
33.87
0.75
34.21
30
2.0
33.87
0.70
34.21
50
2.0
33.87
0.75
34.21
SO
2.0
33.87
0.75
34.21
100
2.0
33.87
0.75
34.21
120
2.0
33.87
0.73
34.21
150
KiO
33.87
0.75
2.0
34.21
34.49
ISO
H.
33.87
From this table it will be seen that from -\ i to the '''/4 there
was a cooling in the upper 120 m. of nearly 2°, and that during
the same period the salinity increased.
The slight irregularity found in the observations on '-'A (nrs.
803 — 810) is probably to be accounted for by some process of mix-
ing. On the other hand, the physical conditions in the Jokel
Fiord are particularly uniform (nrs. 794—802) with a low temjie-
rature and a rather high salinity.
The depths in the Porsanger Fiord are well known, as it
has been sounded long ago. According to the sea chart the maxi-
mum depth 150 f. (282.37 m.) is reached in the mouth between
Sværholtklubben and Heines on Magero. Hence and inwards to
Stoi'e Tamso the depth is about 200 ni. or more. Depths of about
200 m. have also been sounded further in than the island mentio-
ned; but the Porsanger Fiord on the wliole may be said to be
comparatively shallow.
According- to dr. Hjort') a remarkably low temperature -f-
1".15 C. was registered, at a depth of from 90— 100 meters, in the
summer of 1900, by the „Michael Sars" expedition.
Further out in the tiord at a depth of 200 m. a tempei-ature
of 3°.(> C. was measured. When we visited the Porsanger Fiord
at the end of April 1899, the whole of the inner part of the tiord
was covered vith ice, but, as the observations made on ■''—^^/i
(nrs. 833—846) show, a temperature so low as 0^.2 C. was taken
between Store and Lille Tamso at a depth of 200 m., and this is
the lowest temperature jwhich has ever been registered in any
Noi'wegian fiord at such a great depth. And the tempei'ature
H- f.is C, which was registered by the „Michael gars" expedition
ill the summer of 1900, is the lowest which has been found at all in
any Norwegian fiord.
The temperatures noted in the Porsanger fiord give similar
results to those already kno^\■n from the Lyngen Fiord. There is
a fall in temperature from the surface do\\-nwards (the reversed
winter state).
At the mouth of tlic Porsanger Fiord on -*/4 1900 the follow-
ing conditions were noted:
Depth iu
Temp.
Salinity
meters
CO
°'do
0
2.26
.H4.54
20
2.25
34.54
50
2.15
1.4
s:;
150
1.4
;i4 54
From the surface down to 200 m. the salinity is fairly uniform,
liut the temperature falls from 2.25 to 1.3. On the other hand,
along the bottom at a deptli of 250 m. a flow of warmer and
.■waiter water has jieuctratcd (2°.75 C. and 34.78 %o). ISctween
Store and I^ille Tamsii where observations were made on -74 1899
we noted the following:
Depth iu
Temp.
Salinity
meters
C
%o
0
1.06
34.00
20
1.05
.54.00
50
1.0
.34.07
80
1.0
34.07
100
0.05
34.00
120
0.95
34.07
150
0,75
34.07
200
0.2
34. 1H
M (T. ILion-r, Fiskeri Of^ Hvalfangst, (iiero-en lil
Mulluskeii cler er.sten Nordmeerfahrt. (Bergens mn?
There is reason to lielievo that the ..reversed winter state"
describes conditions which are ea.sily disturbed. It is true I had
no opportunity of repeating the vertical section at any other places
than those in the Lyngen Fiord, but thei-e it was found that the
usual winter conditions were again prevalent on the Vo- When
giving oneself the task of judging concerning these peculiar con-
ditions, it is helpful to remember that nothing corresponding has
been noticed in the western fiords (vestlandske fjordc) where we
have for several years taken measurements also in the winter. To
settle the hydrographical conditions, in any single fiord for instance,
several factors may have to be reckoned with. That the tempera-
ture of the atmosphere plays an important one, is clear, and by
comparing the results obtained in the northern and southwestern
fiords, as I have done, I have come to the conclusion that the fall
of rain is a factor which must be considered.
From Mohn's rainfall-charts ') it will be seen that the fall is
most uneven in the different parts of the country. Although there
has of course been some slight variations in the fall in one and
the same place from one year to anothei-, yet on the whole it is
seen that the distribution has been fairly uniform during the period
that these measurements were made. It is another matter that
there may pos.sibly be something periodical in the distribution of
the fall.
It may thus be stated that there is a greater fall in the we-
stern fiord districts than in the fiords of TromsO and Finmark, and
it is reasonable to suppose that this circumstance must have some
influence both hydrographically and biologically speaking. I will
now only allude to the hydrographical part of the subject.
One must expect in the Finmark fiords, where there is less
fall, to be able to trace a rise in salinity, especially as so much
falls in the form of snow so that it does not at once make its
influence felt. Besides this, in the northern fiords large quantities
of fresh water is retained in the layers of ice in the inner parts
of the fiords. Fi'om these circumstances one might attempt to ex-
plain the greater average salinity of the surface layers of the nor-
thern fiords in winter as compared to the fiords in the west country
(vestlandske f^jorde).
On account of the slight flow of fresh water into such a fiord
as the Kvænang, in the course ol' a winter a great uniformity in
salinity may be established, and ( ]"nlc obsei-vations) just for this
very reason the cooling of the atiimspliere will exert a great in-
fluence on the cooling of the layers, the vertical current taking
with it the water with its low temperature (which it has reached
by being cooled by the atmosphere) from the surface downwards.
The observations made furnish sufficient proof that in the
coui'se of the winter a gi'cat levelling in temperature and salinity
goes on. and tluTc are instaiircs of complete iinilbniiity from the
surface right down Iu the bottom, llowevei', it is pos.sible that
these conditions may be disturbiMl hy warmer coast water being
driven into the fiord by the wiml. .\nd in such a case the „re-
verscd winter state" would be lound, the original fiord water having
it settles under the inflowing coast water,
diiilitly salter. After all, this is only a pa-
lic ..Xonlliav" (the North Ocean) where the
V lidin iiioro .southerly regions settles above
water «liich ciiincs from the north.
cooled so much that
even if the latter is
rallel case to that in t
warm salt ocean \\at(
tile cold and less salt
c. Hydrographical CharaclerisLie of Ihe Fiords
of Norlhern Norway.
It is a woll known ffaturc in tiu' western (vestlandske I tiorils
that the niaxinnnu depth is found in the inner pai-ts, but several
(if the northern fiords are found to be ditt'ei'cnt in this respect.
It is true that the greatest depth (about (ioO ni.) in the Vest Fiord
is fui'lher in than Ti-ano (Ti'ano-dee])! and in the Varangrer Fiord
the Lireatest depth I li't ni.i is just otV the Rot;- Fiord (in the middle
part of tile tiordi, but it may be slated liiat the maximal depth is
found in the outer half of many of the fiords.
In file following table I have i^iven a special name to the
place where the greatest depth is found.
Fiord
Max. depth
Situation
Malanos dnep
4.33 lu.
Just opposite Stonnesbotn.
m<'33' X., 1800' E.
Lyngen
Gamvik deep
320 m.
Between outer Gannik and U16.
69054' N., 20027' E.
Kvænang
Kvænangs deep
343 m.
Between Spildereu and the northern
mainland.
7002'.3 N., 21041' E.
Porsanger
Porsanger deep
Between Sværholt and Heines.
700,58'.5 N., 26025' E.
Lakse
Sværholt deep
A little inside the mouth.
70056' N., 26053'.5 E.
Tana
Tana deep
318 in.
Just off the Tv Fiord.
70050' N., 28136' E.
Vai-anger
Varanger deep
424 m.
Just off the Bog Fiord.
69056'..', N.. .30010' E.
1 owe the majority of the above data to the general charts of
Geographical Survey. I have relied on my own measurements,
which are on the whole not a large number, with regard to the
Lyngen and Kvænang fiords.
A little beyond the mouth of the Salten Fiord inwards I have
sounded .'^so ui.; liut this depth is less than may be found in the
Sk,jei-stad Fiord which is still further in. I reached a depth of 518
m. a little out.side Skjerstad church. It is ([uite remarkable in the
district between the Skjerstad and the Ofot Fiords how many
depressions there are, as will be seen from the following table.
Fiord
Depth
Situation
Sk,jerstad
Skjerstad deep
518 m.
A little beyond Skjerstad church.
Folden
Hjertii deep
530 m.
Betwfi'U Hjertii and the southern main-
67037' N., 1502' E.
Fiord
Max. depth
Situation
O.NSUIUI
0.xsund deep
630 m.
Between Hannnerii and Lundii.
6801' N., 15«I8'.s E.
Tvs
Tvsfiord deep
725 m.
A little inside Skårberg.
68012'.5 N., 16012'.5 E.
Ofot
Skarstad deep
n.->0 m.
Just opposite Skarstad.
m02H.r, N. 16017'.', K.
This series of greater depths lies between <>'" and fi8030' N.
The powers which combine to form fiords must have been exer-
cised in an unusually large degree in this district, and it is probably
very difficult to find any parallel instance of such depths in such
a limited area.
It will 1)0 found on careful consideration of the observations
taken that a great many of the fiord deci)S arc very uniform with
regard to temperature and salinity. So as to make this clear at a
glance the following tabulated observations have been inserted.
Fiord
Locality
Date of
observa-
Soun-
dings in
Depth
measured
Temp.
C»
Salinitv
Salten
67014'.6 N.
14026' E.
= 4 1900
380
320
6.65
35...
Folden
67037'
1.502'
% 1900
530
.500
6.55
35.00
O.xsund
«'^"1' i >7o 1899
15018'.5
630
630
6.3
35.08
Tys
68012'.5 L/3 1899
16012'.5 ' '
725
700
6.3
35.11
Vest
68015'.5 „ ^ igyg
15049'
630
630
6.3
35.14
Ofut
"'";-;' ^1^»^'
550
550
li.3
35.U
Observations made at different times of the year have proved
that a considerable constancy in temperature and salinity prevails
in these fiord deeps. Another set of fiords shall now come into
consideration.
Fiord
Locality
Date of
observa-
tion
Soun-
dings
Depth
measured
m.
Temp.
CO
SaUnity
Malang
69033' N.
1800' E.
=7i 1899
433
350
5.5
34.52
Lyi'gen
69054'
20027'
% 1899
320
300
3.(i5
34.84
K~....'™:r;
s'/j 1899
343
340
2.3
34.40
0. Nortlgaanl.
Fiord
Locality
Date of
observa-
tion
Sonn-
ding
m.
Depth
measured
m.
Temp.
CO
'salinity
0,
Porsanger . . .
700o8'.5
26025'
28/4 1899
282
250
2.75
34.78
Tana')
70047'
280.30'
-V^ 1878
232
232
2.3
Varanger-) . .
69056'5
30O10'
Aug.1875
424
424
■
3.1
jV special characteristic of the ijlaccs above meutioucd is that
tlie temperature was below 6° C. and the salinity less than 35 pro
mille. There is also reason for supposing that these two factors
are more subject to change here than in the fiords mentioned in
the former table. For instance, in the Malang Fiord on ^Vi 1899
tlie temperature was 4.1 and the salinity 34.67. There are also
many smaller fiords, which show similar conditions. Instances of
this are tabulated in the following list.
Fiord
Locality
Date of
observa-
tion
Soun-
dings
m.
Depth
measured
Temp.
CO
Salinitv
Skjerstad....
S. XII
*/4 1900
515
500
3.15
34.09
Skjomen
S. II
=/„ 1899
150
150
1.7
33.42
Kanstad
K. III
",'3 'S99
94
90
1..
33.48
Ogs
0, II
■"/s 1899
207
200
1.4
33.33
Kirk
K. I
^, 18!I!)
KIS
100
.h;j.48
The fiords above mentioned are certainly connected with those
wliich have a bottom temperature of 6° — 7°, and a salinity of about
35 0/00, but submarine ridges prevent the warm bottom water from
flowing in. Tiie heat which the Gulf Stream brings with it does
") The N.:
■-) Profess.
th Atlantic E.xpeditiim, II-
I- MOHN.
not exert any influence worth considering on the deeper layers of
water in these fiords, and the condition of things in the depths is
determined by the local meteorological factors in a special degree.
A few examples, showing the loss of heat caused -«'here a fiord
is shut off by a submarine ridge, will be of interest. On March
10th 1899 at a depth of 200 meters in the Ogs Fiord the tem-
perature was 1.7 and the salinity 33.40 0/00. On the same day at
the same depth in the Vest Fiord outside the temperature 6.7 and
the salinity 34.87; there thus being a difi'erence of 5° C. in tem-
perature.
On April 4th HiOU at a depth of 200 meters in the Skjerstad
Fiord, the temperature was 3".25 C. and the salinity 33.99 7oo,
while in the Salten Fiord the figures were respectively 6°.55 and
35.06; there thus being a diiference of 3°.3 in temperature.
It is not to be wondered at that these ditt'erences evidence
themselves in the distribution of fauna.
As a result of the observations and particulars detailed in the
preceding pages it would seem reasonable and natural to divide
the northern fiords into two groups') as follows: —
1. Fiords in which the bottom temperature is a" — 7° C. witli a
salinity of about 35 7oo in the water at the bottom.
(Examples: The Salten, the Folden, the Tys, the Ofot
and the Vest Fiord).
2. Fiords in which the bottom temperature is less than G" C. and
the salinity at the same depth is less than 35 °/ou.
(Examples: The Malang, Lyngen, Kvænang, Porsanger,
Tana, Varanger, Skjerstad, Skjomen, Kanstad, Ogs and Kirk
Fiords.)
The Malang Fiord is a kind of connecting link between
the two groups. It must also be mentioned that the Skjer.stad
Fiord, for instance, belongs to the second group on account of its
being shut off by a submarine ridge which prevents the inflow of
the ocean water; while the Lyngen and Porsanger Fiords for in-
stance, on the other hand, must clas.sify under the second group
on account of their being situated so far north that -the ocean
water has been considerably cooled and their salinity has been
reduced by mixing with fresh water.
Later on we shall show that the distribution of fauna and its
character in the two groups are so ditt'erent. tiiat the above classi-
fication of the fiords is justifiable also for that leason.
1) Cf. Nordgaard: Some Hydrographical Results. (Bergeus museum
bog 1899, p. 23).
II. PLANKTON.
NOTES.
In my plankton tables the marks have the following signification:
r r = very scarce,
r = scarce,
+ = somewhat numerous,
c = common,
cc = very common.
A. T\w groater Forms of animal Plankton.
a. Plankton Stations 1899—1900.
Depth in metre
Corresponding
samples in the hydr
I tables
1899
Helligvær, 10 miles NW of H
Vestfjord I, between Helligvær and Væro
Vestfjord II, nearer Væra
Moskenstrommen
Heine. 8 miles SE of E
Stamsund. 8 miles SbE of S
Henningsvær, 7 miles S of H
Yttersiden. 23 miles NW of Gaukværø
4(1 miles NW of Gaukværø
Senjeu. 12 miles NWbW of Maanesodden
Tronisosundet
K\ ænangeu I, between Lege and Brynilen
Kvænangen II, between Spildern and Kvænangstinderne
Lyngen I. off Slubotn
Lyngen II. off Kaafjord
Lyngen III, off Spokenes
Malangen, between Lysbotn and Støunesbotn
Folstad, Ostnesfjord
Helle, Ostnesfjord
Hola, Svolvær
Henningsvær, 8 miles SbW of H
Vestfjord, 8 miles SSE of H
Skroven. 4 miles S og S.-
Raftsundet, off the Troldfjord
Eaftsund II. li.twrin Aaistenen and Ulvaag
Skroven. 5 ijnh - i;si; ,,| S
Trauodybet. Iiuiwr^n 'irmo .■ind Lødingen
Ofoten I. betwcLii Ilaxncs and Ramsund
Ofoten II, between Bogen and Ballangen
Eombaken I. at the head of R
Eombakeu II, off ytre Sildvik
Eombaken III, inside Øijord
Skjomen I, at Elvegaard
Ofotenf jord, off Skarstad
Skroven, r, miles SWbS of S
Strømmen I, at Henningsvær
Strønmien II, at Henningsvær
Mouth of the Raftsund
Øxsund, between Hammerø and Lundø
Sagf jorden I. inside Furrunesvæggen
Sagf jorden II, outside Fun-unesvæggen
Henningsvær 1. 4 miles SSW of H
Henningsvær IH, 16 miles SSW of H
Evenstad I, 7 miles SE of Lofotodden
Evenstad II, 10 miles SE of Lofotodden
Moskenstrommen
Kirkfjord I, inside Vorfjorden
Reine I. 1 1 miles SE of R
Ure I. 9' „ miles SSE of U
Henningsvær I, 6 miles SWbW'/oW of H
Raftsundet
Risværflaket, outside the Øgsfjord
Kanstadf jord III, inside the ridge
Øgsfjord I, at the head of the fjord
Øgsfjord II, at Halvarso
Tranedybet, between Trano and Lødingen
Tranodybet
Hennintrsvær II. 6 miles SbE'/oE of H
Væro, 7 miles SbW of Maahomet
Rosthavet, 60 miles NW of Rost
Rost I. outside E
Rost II. outside R
0— .50, 0—250
0—50, 0—100, 0—180
0—50, 0—100, 0—200
0— .50, 0—100
0—150
0—50, 0—100
0—50. 0—180
0—50, 0—110
0—50, 0—100, 0—700
0—5. 0—50, 0-130
0—5
0—5. 0—50. 0—140
0—5, 0—50, 0—180
0—5, 0—50, 0—115
0—50, 0—100, 0—250
0—50, 0—200
0—100, 0—300
0—50, 0—135
0—50, 0—150
0—50, 0—150
0—50, 0—100
0—50. 0—200
0—300
0—50
0—10(1. n 21111, 0—260
300—350, 0- Inn. (i I'lin. o -300, 0—380
0— 50. n 1 1 II I. (I L'iKi, 0—630
0—100, 100 - 20U. 200 300. 300—3.50
0—100, 100—200, 200—2.50
0—40
0—100
0—100, 100—200, 200—300
0—40
500—550
0—50. 0—100, 0—200, 0—250
0—30
0—275
0—100. 0—150. 150—250, 250—350, 350—4.50.
450—5.50, 550—620
0— .50, 0—100. 0—200
0—300
0—85
0—100. 0—200' 0—250
0— .50. 0—1.50
0—100. 0-200
0
0—100
0—50, 0-1.50
0—100. 0—200
0—100, 0—140
0—45
0— .50, 0—150
0—90
0—90
0-200
0— .50. 0—100. 100—200, 200—300, 300—400,
400—500, 500—600
0
0—100, 0—280
0—100, 0—170
0—100. 0—900
0—120
0—100
28—40
41—52
53—63
66—70
73—80
81—86
89—90
91—97
10.5—121
126—1.33
134
13.5—144
145—1.54
1.5.5—162
163—173
174- IHI
1 Hi!- 194
214—223
224-234
196— 2(J6
235—240
241—245
246—250
251—2.58
282—292
293—301
.302—306
.307-311
312-321
322-;i24
339-349
363— .368
377—385
405—411
412-419
420—423
426-435
436—443
444—450
479—481
455—460
488
522 -.525
.526-531
532—542
544
579-589
596-603
6()4_filS
623—628
631—633
Nr.
Date
Xame
Depth in metres
Corresponding
samples in the hydr.
tables
63
1899
=%
?
Vi
13 v*
-V4
2!^
-''/4
V5
V,
1900
20/
^U
^'4
3/^
"/i
■4
0—150
0—100. 0—700
0—100, 0—400
0—50, 0—100, 100—200, 200—300, 300—400,
400—500, 500-600, 600—700
0
0-3
0-3
0-3
0—3, 0—150
0-3, 0—150
0
0—3, 0-250
0—100, 0—380
0—3
0—80
0-3, 0— 50, .50-100, 100-200, 200-300, 300-380
0—50, 0—160
0-90
0—3, 0—50, 0—100
0—90
0-100, 100—200, 200—300
0—8
0—6
0-100, 0-300
0-3
0-10
0—75, 100-200
0—200
0—100
0-2.00
0-300
0-1.50
0—50, 0—140
0—50, 0—100, 0—400
0—50, 0-100, 0—200
0—60
0— .50, 0—100, 0—200
0-110
0-600
0-25
0-130
0-130
0—100
0-130
0-150
0-25
0-100, 0-180
0-330
0-420
0—490
0—50, 0—100, 0—500
0—25
0-20
0-50, 0-330
0-.530
0—100. 100-200, 200—300, ,300—400. 40(1— .50(1
0— .50, 0-315
64
651—663
65
66
Tysfjord 1 . . .
67
Lille Molla .
68
Følstad, Østnesfjorden
688-689
692-693
682—683
697 70''
69
Helle, Østnesfjorden....
70
Brettesnes II .
71
Skroven ...
73
Hola, at Svolvær
Stene in Bo, Yestnraalen
703—709
74
Gaukværo II, Vesterarden
748 756
75
Malangen, off Stounesbotn
76
Stønnesbotn . . .
'
Senjenhavet
77s)
78
Malangen
773 78'-'
79
Kvænanoen I, betw. Spilderen and Kvænanostinderne
783 789
80
Kvænangen II. off Noklen island ....
790 793
81
Jøkelfjord, at the head of the fjord
82
Jøkelfjord m, off the Tverfjord
7qc) gfjO
83
84
Kvænangen, between Spilderen and the northern mainland
Hammerfest harbour
803—810
85
Troldfjord, in Eolfsø
86
Ingohavet
811 8'53
87
8.30—8.32
Repvaag harbour. Porsangerfjord
89
Porsangerfjord
833 840
90
Vardø
91
L-\Tigen I, off Skibotn . .
861 866
92
Lyngen II, off the Kaaf jord
867 874
93
Lyngen III, between Gamvik and Ulø
875 884
94
Hola, Svolvær
885 893
95
97
Henningsvær, 2^/4 miles off H
914 921
98
Stronnnen at Henningsvær
929 931
Bålstad I
101
102
Østnesfjord I, at the head
981 982
103
Østnesfjord II, between Vaterfjord aud Polstad
104
Østnesfjord III, off Helle . . .
989 994
UV)
106
107
Ørsnes
Bålstad . .
Reine
995-998
1004-1008
Vestfjord
110
111
Skjerstadfjord V
Skjerstadf jord VU
113
Skjerstadfjord XII
114
115
Seivaagen, Salteufjord
116
Saltenf jord II
117
UK
Foldenfjord 1
ii;i
Vestfjord, iM^tw.-.-n Fl;id.. aii.l SkroMMi
1(17H— 1089
b Plankton tables.
Depth in inetves
Vestfjord I
)— 50;0— 100 0— 180
0—50 0—100 0-200
Moskeii-
strømmeii
Stamsuiitl , Hciiiii
0—50 0—100 0—150
0— 50|0— 180 0—50 0—110
Fish eggs
Pasiphæa tarda
Xyctiphanes nonrgiea
Boieophaiisia inei mis
Thysnnoissa veglecta
— longkawlata
Boreomysis nniica
Hemimysis ahyssicola
Eggs and Lnrvæ of Schizopoilii . .
Parathemisto ohlima
Eiithcmisto compressa
XaupUi and Cypris of Cinipedia
Coiichoecia sp
Calamts fiiimarJncus
— hypa-horeus
Fseudocal. elongahts
Ckiriduis ariimtns
— feiiuisphms
Eudueta novveyica
ScholccithriceUa mhwr
Temora longicornis
Mdridin hums
— ''"'»"
Phnromamnia rohuxta
Heternrhnbdus norvegicus
Candacia armata
Acartia sp
Oithona siiiulia
— plumifca
Microsetella atlantka
Onaea conifcra
Young and Larvæ of Copcpoda .
Lhnadna haha
Larvæ of (rastrnpoda
— - Fdccfipoda
Oikoplcura sp
FnfiUaria sp
CypJtOHanks
Larvæ of Eddnodcrmata
— - Polydur-fa
Cliafognata
Bolina sp
Arddinactis albidn
Cnpxdita sarni
]'h;isnphora borealis
0. Nordgaard.
Date
Station
Depth in meters
Fish eggs
Pasiphæa tarda
Nyctiphanes norvegica
Borenphausia incrmis
Thijsannesm ncglecta
— loufficnudafa
Boycomi/sis arctica
Scmiim/sis ahysskola
Eggs and Larvæ of Sckizopoda .
Parathemisto oblivia
Eidhemisto comjjresm
Xmiplii and Cypris of Cirripedi
Conchoecia sp
Calartns finmarehicus
— hyperboreus
Pseiidocal elongatus
Chiridius armatus
— ■ teniiispiniis
EiicJicefa noi-vegica
Scokcifhricella minor
Teiiiora lo7Ujicorms
Metridia Inceiis
— longa
Plmromamma rolmsta
Heterorliahdiis nnrvegicns
Candacia armaia
Acartia sp
Oithona similis
— - 2)lu)nifera
Microsetella atlantica
Ovcrea conifera
Young and Larvæ of Copepoda .
Limadna balca
Larva? of Gastropoda
— - Pfkcyjjoda
Oikoplcura sp
Fritillaria sp
Oyphonaidcs
Larvæ of EchiiKdermata
— - Polycha'fa
Cluslognata
Boliwi sp
AraclmacHs alhida
Ciipulita sarsii
Physojihora horcalis
Troms
osund
Kvænangen II
0—50 0—100 0—700
0—5 0—50 0—130
0—5 0—50 0—100 0—140^ 0—5 0—50 0—
0—5 0—50 0—115
27
Lyngen II
0—50 0—100 0—250
+ 1 +
Lyngen HI
0-50 0-200
Malanijen
0—50 0—135 0—50 lO— 150
Henningsvær
Vestfjord
Skro-
ven
0. Xordgaard.
Depth in meters
0—100 0—200 0—300 0—380
0—50 0—100 0—200 0—630
100— 200— 300—
200 300 350
,100— 200
200 250
^l.i|.ll.r„ fi.rda
uirlijjiancs nm-regica
liinnphiiusia inerniis
lu/sanoessa nrgleda
— longicaudata
hreoniysis arctica
Temimysis abyssicola
!ggs and Larvæ of ScMzopoda .
^arathemisio oblivia
^jvfhemistn cnmpressa
.''ini Hi nnd Cypris of Cirripedia
'nil, liiu'iia sp
'alaiius finmarcliiais
— hyperborens
''seudocal. elongaius
Vdridius annatns
— tenuisjnmiK
Mehceta norvegka
'colecithrieella minor
^emora longir.ornis
Tetridia liicens
— longa
'leuromamma robusfa
Teterorhabdus norvegkus
'andacia armatn
cartm sp
lithona similis
— plumifcra
licrosetella atlantica
hicæa conifera
oungs and Larvæ of Copepoda
åmacina. balea
arvæ of Gastropoda
— - I'rJccypoda
HIinplnra sp
y'ii"'"-'<" -l'
',ll,hn,.:ntlrs
arv;t- of Kchitiodermata
— - I'oJgchrcta
'hætognat t
'olina sp
raclinactis nlbida
'upulifa sarsii
liysoplwra borealis
+ I +
rr rr
Rombnkeu in
Skjom.] Otb-
I t.Mlf.j.
I I
0—50 0—100
II
0—30
II :,() (|_lfH)IO— 2(K
+
+ I
rr
rr
rr
+
+
+
c
+
+
+
+
+
^
^
rr
4-
,.
P
c
c
+
c
c
rr
0. NordoaanL
Depth in meters
Fish eggs
Pasiphæa tarda
Nyctiphanes norvegica
Bore.ophausia inermis
Tlii/sanoessa negleda
— longkaudata
Boreomysis arctica
Hemimysis ahjssicola
Eggs and Larvæ of Scldzopoda . .
Ptirathemisto ohliiia
Ejithemisto enmpressa
NaiqMi and Cypris of drripedia
Conrkoeda sp
Calamis finmarchieus
— hyperboreus
Pseiidocal. elongatus
Chiridms armatus
— temtispinus
Euchæta norvegica
Scolecithricella minor
Temora longicornis
Mctridia hicens
— longa
Plewomamma rolmsta
Hehrorhabdus twrvegims
Candacia ormata
Oithona similis
— plumifcra
Microsetella aflaiitica
Oncæa conifcra
Young and Larvæ of Copepoda
Liiiiaiina balea
Larvæ of Gastropoda
- Pdecypoda
(likopleitrn sp
FritiUaria sp
Cyphonautes
Larvii: of Echimidermata
— - Polyrhadn
( lin'tdgnatn
BoUtia sp
Arachnactis nlhida
Cupidita sarsii
Pliysophora borealis
Sagfj.
II
Hen-
nings- I Henningsvær HI
vær I
0—100 0—200 0—250
0—10010-200
Mo-
sken-
strøm
Kirk f j
I
0—50 0—160
Henningsvær
0—100 0—140
Raft-
sund
Trauødybet
0—50 0—150 0—90
0-50 0—100
100— 200— 300— 400— 500-
400 500
0—100 0—280 0—100 0—170 0—100 0—900 0—120
0. Noi-dgaai-d.
Tysfjord
Tysfjord II
Tysfjord I
Lille
MoUa
Føl-
stad
Bret-
HeUe tesnes
Depth in meters
0—100 0—700 0—100 0—400 0—60 0—100
100— 200— 300— 400—
200 300 400 500
Fish eg-gs
PfimpliKa tarda
Xi/cfiphanes novegica
Boreopliausia inennis
Tlii/sanoessa negleda
— longicauåata
Bnreomysis arclica
Hrmimysis abyssicola
Eggs and Larvæ of Schizopoda . .
Parathemisto nblivia
Euthemisto compressa
Xanplii and Cypris of Cirripcdia
Coiichoecia sp
Cahmus finmarchims
— hypiTbornis
Pseudocal. elongatus
Chiridius armatiis
— tcnuispinus
Euchæta norvcyka
Scolecithricella minor
Tcjiiora longicornis
Miiridia lucens
— longa
Pkwomamma rohuKta
Hdernihahdm norvegicus
Candacui armata
Acartia sp
(lithnna similis
— jilumifera
Microsetella attantica
Oncii-a conifcra
Yniing and Larvæ of Copeixida .
Limacina. bnlea
hm-væ of Gastropoda
— - Pdecypoda
Oiliopkura sp
FriliUari,, s],
< 'ypIio>iautcs
Larvæ of Echinodermnta
— - Polychæta
Cliætognata
Bolina sp
Arachnactis albida
Cujmlita sarsii
Pliysophoia borealis
0—3 0—250 0—11)010—380
Malnnjren
60— 100— 200—
100 200 300
KvaMiangen
I
0_oO 0—160
Kvsen.
II
0—3 0-50 0—100
O. Nordgaard.
Jøkel-
fjord
III
Ham-
mer-
fest
Trold.
f j ord
Porsangerfj
Lj'u-
gen I
Deptli in meters
0-100 100- ^00;
0—1000—300
Fisli eggs
Pasiphcea tarda
yi/ctiphanes norcegica
Borcophausia inermis
Thysanoessa neglecta
— hngicaudafa
Bo) fomysis arctica
Ilemimysis abysncola
Eggs and Larv;e of Schizopoila . .
Farathemisto ohliria
Euthemisto compi-essa
Xauplii and Cypris of Cirripcdia
Conchoecia sjj
(-'alaniis finmarcldciis
— hyperhoreus
Psettdocal. elongatus
Cliiridius armatus
— tenuinpinuH
Kucluvta norregira
ScrAecitliricclla minor
Ti'inora loiigicoriiis
MeMdia lucmx
— hnga
Pleuromanima roJmsta
Hctcrorhfihdus iwrrcyicus
(atidacid ar innta
Acartia sp
Oitlioiia similis
— plumifern
Minosetdla atlaittlca
Oncæa cnni/cra
^'oinig and Larvaj of Copepoda .
Limacina balca
I-iirv:i' of Gastropoda
- Pelecypodn
Oilwplnira sp
FritUlaria sji
Cgphdiiautes
Larv:i' of Ediinodmiiafa
— - Polgchæta
Cliætngnata
Bnlbia sp
Araclinactis albida
Cupidita sarsii
Physophora borealis
I»'/., 1900
"Vs
-:,
=«/.■,
■"'/■,
^■'•1
■"'/;,
■-■ 1
Hala
Skroven
HeiinbigsviLi-
Sivom-
men
Bålstad I
Roiue
JliUl».
(lybet
Østnesfjord
I 11 III
Ørs- Bul-
lies 1 stad
Reine
Vesttj.
Sk.JL-rstail a
0-n>i
0-140
0—50
0—100
0—400
0—50
0—100
[)— 200
0-BO
O-oO
3—100 0—200 0—110
1
0— HOO
0—25
0-130
0—130
)— 100
0-13O 0-150
0—25
1
0— lOOiO— 180
r
+
+
n-
+
+
+
IT
r
+
v
+
+
+
+
+
1-
+
IT
+
+
+
•
-!-
+
+
+
+
'
+
+
+
r
rr
+
+
+
-1-
,.
,.
,.
-U
r
1-
+
ir
+
+
,.
c
+
<•
+
c
+
c
+
+
+
r
v
•■
+
'■
^-
-f
^-
-•
<■
-r
c
+
+
>■
+
r
c
+
+
+
+
+
+
c
r
+
r
.■
■•
1
>•
+
+
+
>■
IT
Skjer-
stadfj
IV
Sel-
vaag
tenfj.
Foldenfj.
Depth in meters
0—50 0-100 0—500 0—25
0—50 0—330
100— 200— 300— 400—
200 300 400 500
0—50 0—315
Fish egfrs
Fasiphæa tarda
Ni/ctijihayies norvegica
Boreophausia inermis
Tlii/aannessa neglecta
— longicaudata
Boreomysis avdica
Hemimysis abyssicola
Eggs and Larvæ of Schizopoda
Parathemisto oblivia
Euthemisio compressa
Å^miplii and Cypris of Cirripedi
Conclwcda sp
(Manus fivmarchiciis
— hyperhoreus
Pseudocal. elongatus
Chiridivs armatus
— tenuispinws
Euchæfa nnrvegica
Scolecithricella minor
Tcmora longicornis
Metridia lucens
— longa
Flem-nmamma rohusta
Hrternrhahdtis norvegicus
Cnndacia armata
Acarfia sp
Oithona similis
— plumifera
Microsetclla atlantica
Onccea conifera
Young and Larvæ of Cope])oda
Limacina halea
Ij;irv;e of Gastropoda
— - Fclecypoda
Oiknpleura sp
Frililkiria sp
( 'gplionautes
L:irv;i' of Ecliinodermatn
— - Fniychæta
Cha-toynatn
Bolina sp
Arachnact.is alhida
Cnjndita xarsH
r/u/soplinra horralis
Remarks on some Plankton Forms.
Pisces.
Egg's and Larvae.
hi Marrli ami A|iiil is'.iCi. lisli spawn was reg-ularly , found
ill the plankton on tin- 1-ot'oton liaiiks. That the «rreater part of
this hclon-vd to cod was. t considor. niKincstionablo. In 1897, fish
spawn was also noticed from '' ■• to 'i 'l. In 1899, a con.siderable
(piantity of tisli eggs was to be seen in the sea at Vest Lofoten,
on Mai'ch 20tli and on April 1st a mass of fish eggs was seen on
the East I^ofoten banks. Also in 1900. fish spawn was noticed in
the latter half of the month of March.
Tartienlarly in 1897 several samples containing- spawn were
examined. Various sizes were found, right up to a diameter of
•2..-> mm.; hut the diameter of the majority was about 1.3 mm., which
means that most of it was cod spawn. We also got a few cod
larva' in the tow net. as for instance on 'A 1B97 on the fishing-
ground at Keine. The characteristic pigment bands left no room
for doubt that we really had caught larvæ of cod — their length
was about .3.5 mm. It was quite remarkable how seldom one came
upon a sterile egg. One cannot, however, because of this fact con-
clude that fertilization was carried out in a particularly effective way,
indeed one can hardly exercise any control over this in the open
sea. For cod spaAvn is doubtless subject to the same law as for
instance, salmon spawn, which dies pretty quickly if it has not been
fertilized. (Some cod eggs were put into a glass of sea -w^ater,
and it was seen that the eggs fell to the bottom as soon as they
died. In the open sea also, the dead eggs without doubt sink to
the bottom, so that it is not possible to gain a correct idea of the
effectiveness of fertilization by counting the eggs capable of devel-
opment which are found in the water.
Respecting the spawning of the skrei {Gaihis mllarias L.)
reference should be made to Hjokt's book „Fiskeri og Hvalfangst"
(Fishery and AMiale Catchini;). page 37 ei scq.
Deeapoda.
Pasiphæa tarda, Keoyer.
By tow-nettiiiL:-. I have only obtained young individuals of this
species, (^uite rarely, single specimens have been found.
Thus 'A 1899. Ofoten I, 300—3.50 mm., 1 specimen, length 27 mm.=)
■■'/\i 1899. Tys Fiord I, 200—300 m., 1 specimen, length 26mm.
74 1900. Skjerstad Fiord V, 0—420 m., 1 specimen, length
33 mm.
=-'^,',1 1902. The By Fiord, Bergen, 2.50—1.50 m., 1 specimen,
length 12 mm.
I made the following notes about the specimen from Ofoten: —
Body, quite transparent, brown eyes and a reddish tail appendix.
In „Bidi-ag til Kundskab om Christiania Fjordens Fauna" (Con-
tribution to a Knowledge of the Fauna in The Kristiania Fiord)
M. iSars describes the young of this species (p. 56 — 63, fig. 81 — 90).
These were taken near Skroven in Lofoten by G. O. S.^rs and the
smallest was 10 mm. in length.
1) Cf. NoBDGAARD, „Contril)uti<)ii to tlie Study of Hydrography and Biology
on the Coast of Norway". Tables 2, 4 a. 4 b.
^ Measured from the point of the rostrum to tlie tip of the tail.
As far as 1 can see, (1. O. Saks was the fir.st to observe the
pelagic habits of this species. In ,,Crustacea II" from the Norw.
North Atlantic Expedition (1876—78) he .says (page 11): „Mean-
while, though the specimens in (luestion all came up in the trawl
from very considerable depths, reaching 17()0 fathoms, yet the animal
may, considering its obviously pelagic habits, have entered the trawl
in some of the higher strata, during the upward passage of the
apparatus.'" Tlic cxiicdition above mentioned also took its .speci-
mens of I'asqilian with a trawl at the stations 33, 213 and 295.
Of these stations 33 is in the southern part of the North Ocean,
213 about halfway between Jan Mayen and Norway and 295 (Lat.
71" 59' N., Long 11° 40' E.) is somewhat further north and east.
It is easier now with the improved apparatus for pelagic fishing to
catch the animal. It appeared in considerable numbers in the North
Ocean'). With regard to the distribution of this species in the fiords of
Norway, it may be mentioned that it has been found from The
Kiistiania Fiord up to Lofoten, but its distribution is now^ known to
be extended over a larger area. In April 1899, I took specimens
with a trawd in The Malang Fiord from a depth of 380 m. There is
no doubt that it is rather common in certain other fiords. For in-
stance, I have often seen it in the stomach of Macrurus rupestris,
Spinax niger and Gadus rirens fi-om The Herlø Fiord near Bergen.
The young individuals of this species mentioned as being taken in
The Ofot, Tys and Skjer-stad Fiords were all caught in the months
February — April. Althoug-h it is not stated, it is likely that G. O.
Sars took the yomiL' staL'-es on which M. Sars has based his de-
scription, also siiiihtiiii,' ihiiiiij the early spring months, for G. 0.
Sars was, in the \ rars nitiitiouiMl. making winter researches in Lofoten.
One would be inclined to think that about the middle of the
winter is the time of propagation for this species. It is, however,
reasonable to suppose that the propagation stretches over a period
of several months. In the stomach of Spinax niger from The Herlo
Fiord, I found 'Vt 1897 a female with large eggs attached.
Another Pasiphæa female with eggs was found in the stomach
of a Gadm virens from The Herlø Fiord 'Ve 1902.
Kroter based his original description on specimens from Green-
land, and the species is also said to be found on the east coast
of North America.
Sehizopoda.
Nyctiphanes rwrvegica, M. Sars.
As is the case with Pasiphæa tarda, this is a plankton form,
which it is difficult to catch in small tow-nets. A large number
of my specimens have been taken in a trawl. Here is a list of
the various places in Avhich they have been found.
1% 1897. Sunderø (Vesteraalen), several specimens in the stomach
of Gadus rirens.
"A 1899. Helle (Ostnes Fiord), 0—120 m. 1 jun. (tow-net).
'Vo — Raftsund 0-275 m. rr —
"A — Følstad, (Ostnes Fd.), 0 -135 m. rr —
>) Cf. H.70KT, ,,Fiskeri
valfangst" (Fishery and Whale Catching), p.
38
""li 1899. In Sea N. W. of Røst, 0—500 m. i' (trawl).
"/4 — Gaukværø II, 0— -250 m. rr —
21/4 — Kvænangen 0—3^0 m. rr —
2^4 — In Sea off Ingo, 0—300 m. rr — j
I have specimens from tlie following places on the west coast |
of Norway: — j
^74 1897. The Fiord outside liergen in the stomach of Gadus tirens. [
-7i 1899. Hei-l0 Fd., 0—400 m. jun. rr (tow-net), j
271 — On the coast off Herlo. 0—150 m. — ""' 1
-1/9 — TheNorw. Channel off the I j
Kors Fiord. )
'75 — The Herlo Fioi-d, in the stomach of Gadus i-tims. \
179 — The Hjelte Fiord about 100 m. rr (tow-net I.
'7n — Henno in the ,,skjærgaard" beyond Bergen in the sto-
mach of Gadus virens.
On Nansen's .,Fram" expedition, a single specimen was taken
on May •22nd 1894. M
On the Norw. North Atl. Exp. (187(3—78) this species was
noticed at most of the stations.
G. 0. Saes writes'-): „The present beautiful species was obser-
ved on the expedition in several localities, at a considerable distance
from the coast, swimming about on the surface of the water, as a
rule, however exclusively young indinduals. At one of the stations
(St. 75) west of the Namsen Fiord, the animal occurred in such
profusion that the sea in some localities had a peculiar brownish
tint." Professor Saes also mentions the species from the Kristi-
ania, the Hardanger and the Vest Fiords.
AuEiviLLius^) has observed it in the surface layers of the
Skagerack in August, and in the (Julmar Fiord towards the end
of November. In the months of August and September, the spe-
cimens he obtained were generally found rather deep down.
The species is distributed from the Arctic Ocean to the coast
of Portugal, and from Greenland to Massachusetts Bay.
C. KoELBEL'*) states the length of the largest specimen caught
at Jan Mayen to be 36 mm. My largest specimen, taken in the
sea off Ingø in Finmai'k, has precisely the same length; the largest
specimen from the Herlo Fiord, near Bergen, was 32 mm.
Burcojiliaitsia Inermis, Krøyek.
This species constitutes, as is well known, the pi'incipal food
of the coal-fish and plankton eating whales. I \\i\\ therefore give
a complete account of the observations I have been able to make
respecting the distribution of this animal.
'7^ 1897. Svolvær (Lofoten), in the stomach of Gadus caUarius +
'Vi — 0gs Fiord, 0—150 m. (tow-net) r
— — Between Barø and Lødingen, 0 — 200 m. (tow-net) r
7» — Svolvær in the stomach of Gadus callarias c
Va — Ostnes Fd. at various places, 0 — 120 m. (tow-net) +
— — Raftsund, Ti-old Fd., Grund Fd. — r
-"A — Reine, in the stomach of Gadus callarias -\-
'7i 1899. Reine, (Lofoten), 0—150 m. (tow-not) rr
'Vi — 8 miles S. E. of Reine — rr
-7i — Lyngen HI, 0— 200 m. — rr
•■'7i 1899. Helle ( Ostnes Fd.), 0— 50 m. (tow-net). .
V2 — Vest Fiord, 0— 50 m.
72 — Raftsund, 0—200 m. —
V4 — Stene, (Lofoten) 100—200 m. —
174 — Malang Fiord, 0 m. —
"/4 — Stønnesbotn 0— 3 m. —
-74 — Sea off Ingø, 0—300 m. (trawl)
73 1900. Henningsvær I, 0—140 m. (tow-netl jun.
^73 — Beier Fiord, 0—150 m. (trawl)
The contents of the stomachs of coal-fish which were caught
in the Porsanger Fiord') in the summer of 1898, were for the most
part composed of this species.
The presence of Boreophausia incnnis along the coast of Ber-
gen is also satisfactorily ascertained, a large quantity having been
found in the stomachs of young coal-fishes caught off Henno on
'7ii 1902.
But it is not certain if the species is to be met with animally
on this coast.
AuEiviLLius mentions the species in the Skagerack, and Nok-
MAN-) gives Banff, Shetland, Moray Firth and Clyde district as
places whei'e it is found. The species is observed from Spitzbergen
to the Skagerack and England, as well as from Greenland along
the east coast of North America to about 42° N. The largest
specimens I have found (in the Malang Fiord) were 25 mm. long.
Boreophausia raschi, M. Saes.
This species is distinguished from the foregoing by a toothlike
projection on the sides of the carapace. The dorsal tooth, however,
in front of telson is missing in raschi.
I have only found this species once, and that was at Hellc in
the Ostnes Fiord, (Vs 1897, 0—120 m.).
1 It is known from the Kristiania Fiord (SI. and G. O. Saes).
j The latter also mentions having ocasionally found the species on
the west coast of Norway. It is also known from Greenland and
Great Britain, a list of places where it has been found has been
given by Noeman') and T. Scott.*)
Thysanoessa negh'cta, Keøyek.
There was no example of this species among the specimens
taken in 1899—1900, but on '"1^ 1897 I found it in the Ostnes
Fd., plankton 0—60 m. It was also found in the stomach of ocean-
cod {sTirei) which was fished at Svolvær '73 1897.
G. O. Saes mentions having taken the species in the N'aran-
gci' Fioi'd.
I luiv(! the following notes tVoni the west coast of Norway.
•'7i 1900. The Hjelte Fiord, 0-220 m. tow-net rr
'7io 1902. Manger, in the stomach of Clupea harengus r
'7ii 1902. Hennø, in the stomach of Gadus virens jun. r
The species is known from Greenland, (H. 1. Hansen) the
Siberian coast (J5eandt), N. E. America. (S. I. Sjiith), besides
Norman and T\ T. ScOtt have mentioned several places on the
British coast where it has been found.
1) G. 0. Sabs, Crustacea, p. 13. Thr Norw. North Polar Expod. 189.-i— 1896.
2) Crustacea II. The Norw. North Atl. Exp. 187ti— 78, p. 12.
^) Die Plankton Fauna des Hkayeraks, p. 74. K-l. Svenska Vet. Akad.
Handl. 30, N. 3.
••) Die Oesterri'ichische Pularstation ,Jan Mayen. Reobactnni)s-Kroebnisse,
III B. p. 48.
') Sparre-Schneider have taken specimens at Kvænangen.
'') Briti.sh Schizopoda of Families Laphogastrida' and Ephansiida'. Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist., S. (1 Vol. IX, p. 4til.
•') British Schizopoda, p. 462.
■•) On the Distribution of Pehi-ic Invertebrate Fauna of the Kirth of Forth
and ils \icinit.v. I'nrI III. Sixtwntli Annual liujiort of tlie Fishery Board for
ikton.
39
llii/fanocssa lomjicaudata, Kkhyei!.
Witli tow-iiets, tliis species has only been eaui^lit at tlio follo-
viim- places: —
'•V) 18!)9. The Vest Fiord 1. (> loii ni. rr
7s — I'rc I, 0- 100 ni., (I •_' n. rr
My specimens were it) li' mm. Uiiil;.
On Naxskn's Frnm-expedition siiiijle spciimciis were taken at
four difterent places in tiie Airtic Ocean; ami Sai.'s mentions the
Varanger Fiord and tlie i<ea between Norway and .Ian ^layen
(Xorw. North Atl. Kxped.) as otiier places where it has been found.
Aeeordini; to Noh.man') this species together with Nijctiphanes
iiornyica was ,,trown up in enormous quantity in St. Andrew's Bay,
April •22nd ISSll". It is also known from Greenland (Hansen)
and P. T. Clivk-') has i;iven a list of places where it has been
t'oiiiiil ill recent years from 48" — (>7" N.
^(jrcoiiiyaid arctica. Ivuovkh.
As far as 1 know, this is the tirst time this species has been
inckideil in any account of plankton organisms.
There can. however, hardly be any room for doubt that it has
planktonic habits, as it has several times been taken by townetting'.
As, for instance on
'^4 1S99 in the Malani;- Fd.. 300 -3S0 m. rr
From the western tiords of Norway 1 have noted the follo-
wini;': —
-77 1898. The Herlo Fiord, in the stomach of J\Jacruni!< rupestris -\-
'Vio — The Herlo Fd.. 0—400 m. tow-net rr
'V, 1901. The Herlo Fd., 0—400 m. — rr
•-Vii 1902. Fiord off Bergen, 250—450 m. — rr
This species, which was tirst described by Kkoyee as being
found in Greenland, has by G. O. Saks been taken in the Kristi-
ania. Hardanger and Vest Fiords.
It has not yet been observed on the British Coasts.
Hi'mimi/sis alnjssicola, G. O. SArs.
This species also seems to be a bathy-planktonic organism,
it was at any rate found in the tow-net on ^2 1^99 in the deep
off Trano, 0 — 630 m. ; both as adtilta and jnniores.
In the western tiords it has never been seen in plankton but
has been found in considerable quantity in the stomach of Macnirus
iKjiestris from the Herlo Fiord, 'Vt 1898. Boreomysw arctica was
also found in the same place.
G. 0. Sars has taken this oi'ganism in the Kristiania and
Hardanger Fiords and at Lofoten. It has not yet been included in
the British fauna.") Nukman has caught it in the Trondhjem Fiord.
Ei;t;s and Larv:e of Schiiopoila.
As the Schuopoila i)Iay such a vei-y important part in the
economy of the northern seas, I will mention some observations
made in the northern tiords.
'74, '74 1899. The Malang Fd., 0— 3 ra. +
'-'74 — Ingo 0—300 m. r
"/4 — The Porsanger Fd., 0— 75 m. r
Vs — Vardø, 0—200 m. c
1) British Scliizopoda, p. 463.
-I Th.' 8.-as..nal Distribution of Atlantic Plankton Or^'auisnis, p. 31, 32.
^J C£. NoRMA.\, On British Mysidæ, p. 146. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. S. 6,
vol. X.
1900. The Østnes Fd.. 0 130 m. +
- 4 Tlie Skjei-stad Fd.. o 330 m. -|-
The Feiden Fd.. 0 100 m. r
The majority ef lliese |ii'(iliaiily beloni^cd tn the species Borro-
liliaiisi(( 'uicrmif^.
Cumacea.
I'.-cudiiciiiiia l(iii(iic iiiiis. SI'. j'.A-n;.
Uii '■"■'/: I'S97 1 not a specimen of this sjiecies in the liarbour
at Hrettesnes in Lofoten, the animal was swimmiiiL;- ahunt on the
surface.
T. Scott'- has on the other hand, several times caught it by
tow-netting in the T'lrth of Foith. SeAiuiE-ScHNEiDEU has observed
this species at Ililleso in the Malaui; Fiord, which is the northein
limit for it.
With I'egard to its disti'ibutioii cf. Di'. ('.\ni, Zi.m.mku.-j
Amphipoda.
['ardUti-misto ohllcia. Kriivek.
This species is also, -w-ithout doubt, one of the important orga-
nisms in the economy of the sea. 1 have specimens from a great
many stations both in the northern tiords and on the west coast
of NorAvay. Is is distributed from Greenland {Kr()Yek, Hansen)
to 45" N. 50" W. (Cleve)') and from Arctic Ocean, where it was
taken by Nansen at 12 different stations, to The British Isles.
AuEiviLLius has found this species in the Skagerack, but it has
not up to the present time been noticed in the fiords of Sweden
and southern Norway. The most southerly place at which I have
taken this species was off Stavanger (58° 59' N. 5" 21' W.l. where
I found juiiiores in plankton on 7-' 1896.
In the plankton which I had under examination from ..Heim-
dals'' section between the Sogne Fiord and Iceland about the middle
of May 1896, I constantly came across jnniores from the surface
layers, both from the region of the Gulf Stream and in the arctic water.
Likewise juniurea and sometimes adidta were observed in the Pudde
Fiord (Bergen) from the middle of November 1890 to February
1897, 0—8 m. In the plankton material which the seal catcher
Capt. H. Andresen collected for the biological station, a consider-
able number of P. obliria were found, among them also a large
number of jimiorcfi from the sea north of .Ian Mayen (.lune and
July 1S97.7
I'aratliouisto is characterized by 11. H. Gkax'^) as an arctic-
oceanic organism, and the same author mentions for instance: —
„Iin Mai 1901 hatte z. B. P. oMiria von ihrem Verbreitungs-
centrum im Eismeere bis zu Lofoten eine zusammenhiingende Ver-
breitung an der Oberfiadie." In another i)lace (p. 95) numerous
specimens of young Parathemisto are mentioneil in May as one of
the tirst appearances of the tlouiishing spring plankton.
Tn the North Ocean the months of May and June appear to
be the most impoi-tant time for the devcloinnent of this species;
although I have, on the other hand, obsei-ved young indi\'iduals in
1) The Distribution of Pelagic Invertebrate Fauna of Firth of Forth, p. 167.
2) Die arktischen Cumaceen (Fauna arctica), B. I, p. 428.
3) The Distribution of Atlantic Plankton Organisms, p. 33.
*) Cf. KOHDGAARD, Contributions to the Hj'drography of the North Ocean.
Berg. Mus. Aarb. 1901, No. 2, p. 29.
5) Das Plankton des norwegischen Nordmeeres. Report on Norwegian Fishery
and Marine Investigations. Vol. IT, No. .5, 1902. p. 83.
40
(). Nordgaard .
the months from November to May in the neighbourhood of Ijergen.
In the Arctic sea, Parathemisto is of great impoi'tance as food foi'
phinkton eaters.
I have seen it in the stomach of Gadus vircns both from Bergen
and from Vesteraalen; and in March 1897 I noticed it also in the
stomach of Gadus callarias, caught near Svolvær in Lofoten.
Euthenmtu compressa, Goes.
G. O. Sabs') gives the following distribution for this species: —
Davis Strait, East coast of Greenland, Jan Mayen, Hasvig (in West
Finmark). Norman'-) states that near Redcar from 10th to 12th
of February 1892 there was a vei'y rich Crustacean plankton, which
was eagerly sought after by Bissa ttidaetijla. This plankton con-
sisted chiefly of Euthemisto compressa which at tliat time was new
to the British fauna, and there was also Nematoscelis megalops and
Thysanoessa longicaudata. From the Firth of FortJi T. Scott^)
refers to this animal as occuring in February and November 1892
and in November 1893.
My observations are the following: —
7-2 1897. Sunderø (Vesteraalen), from stomach of Gadus rivens.
^Vi 1899. Kvænangen I, 0—140 m. tow-net. 1 9.
22/3 — The Rost sea, 0—700 m. —
Euthemisto bispiiiosa, Boeck.
V2 1897. Sunderø (Vesteraalen) from stomach of Gadus virens.
G. O. Saks states the distribution of this species as follows: —
Greenland, Spitzbergen (?) off Novia Scotia, Sørvær and Hasvig
(in West Finmark).
AmathiUa homati, Fabk.
AiJuIta, but still more juniores were noticed on '% 1897 in
the surface water at Sunderø in Vesteraalen. Also in the sea
beyond the belt of skerries (Skjærgaard) off Bergen on -% 1900,
0 — 5 m., young of this species were observed. Development would
thus appear to take place in the winter and spilng.
Cirrlpedia.
Lepas dnatifera, Linn.
A splendid bunch on a glass ball (from a tishing not) drifted
aslioro in March 1899 on the outer side of Moskeneso in Lofoten.
Nauplii and Cypris of Cirripedia.
At certain times larvæ of Cirripedia may be found in large
numbers in plankton. Amongst those I have myself noticed I will
mention for instance those seen in April 1896 at Bålstad in Lofo-
ten, and in April 1897 at Røst. At the latter place, I also on
March 24th 1899 noticed a number of these larvæ (Røst I, 0—120
m.), and about the middle of April in the same year they were
numerous just beyond Vesteraalen, in the Malang Fiord, at Kvæn-
angen, the Trold Fioi-d, at Vardø and at Høla near Svolv;pr.
Ostraeoda.
While arranging the specimens which have been collected, I
have not in every case classilied them according to species, but
have grouped them as Conchoecia sp.
Single specimens have been classified, some by Prof. G. O. Sars,
and I have identified some others by reference to Professor G. W.
Muller's article in ,,Nordisches Plankton". The following species
have been found.
Conchoecia elegaiis, G. O. Sars.
This species is, comparatively speaking, common in the Vest
and adjoining fiords, as for instance the Ofot Fiord and Ox Suiid,
and is found rather deep down. In the Ofot Fiord on February
9th 1899, I took up a quantity of a species of Conchoecia in a
closing net, a blueish light gleamed from the forepart of its body.
Unfortunately, I was not, then and there, in a position to decide
whether the flash of bluelight came from horealis m eleijnns or
perhaps fr'om both.
Conchoecia horealis, G. 0. Sars.
j This species too has been observed in the Vest and adjoining
Fiords, e. g.
*J2 1899. Skroven I, 0— :300 m.
73 — Tranø dybet 0 — <i:30 m.
Vo — The Ofot Fiord I, :S00— 3.50 m.
'"A — Oxsund, 450—550 m.
Conchoecia ohtusata, G. O. Sars.
Among the specimens which I took at Reine in Lofoten ('Vs
1896, 0—130 m.) were a few conchoecia, which Sars declared to
belong to this species.
It is very likely that there were examples of this species in
the collection made in 1899. but I can not state this with ceitainty.
1) An Ac(^i)unt of tlie Crustacea of Norway, vol
') British Schizopoda. Auu. Mag. Nat. Hist., s.
3) The Distribution of the Pelagic Fauna. 16th
for Scotland. Part III, n. 176.
13.
1. IX,
Kep.
1). 4f)3.
if th,. Fishery
Fhilonii
hrenda, Baird.
On April 20th 1899 I took a specimen of this species in
the .Jøkel Fiord, and it was by G. 0. Saes declared to be a male.
Sparre-Schneider has noticed this species, both in the Kvænang
and Malano- Fiords.
Cladoeera.
Lradne iiordmanni, Loven.
.\s far as my experience goes, it appears that Claduccra is
very seldom seen in the winter plankton on our coasts, and the only
species I can with certainty say I have noticed is E. nordmanni.
There were single .specimens in the samples from Lofoten, April 1896.
Copepoda.
(^ftlanus fiiitiiarrliiriis. Gvnnerits.
in his important work ..Das Plankton des norwegischen Nord-
meeies" (p. 5ii— (Wl) Dr. M. 11. (in.\s has given an exhaustive
biological accnunt of this sjjocies, and to this account I refer. On
page 64 Dr. (inAN says: ..Cahinus finmarchicus hat cine fur jedes
41
Gebiet bostinimte Fortpflaiizniiiiszoit. nud
dir Tliiciv stclhcn ab,
naclKlom sio sit-li cinmal fortwprtaiizt lialn
n. Die I''(ii1plan/,unirs-
seil ist an Ni>i'\\eL:i'iis Nordwcst Kfisti' A pi
il Mai; die Thicre kon-
iK'11 walii'sclit'iiilich liici' iliic i^aii/.c K\\\\\
ckhniu- in einoni .laiirc
vollciuU'11."
(i KAN calls tliis ;i workiiii.'- hyiiothcsis.
and as such it is very
iiitiTi'stiiiL:-. and fntnrc rxaniinaticms nnisl p
■live hdw lai- facts bear
out the liypothesi.s.
Gran's remarks coneorninL:- the vertica
uiovcuicnts ol' this spe-
eies are of special iiiteiTst (p. (14 ). .,Die Thiere kiiiuien bechnitende
vertikale Wanderunwn unterneiiincn, uamentlieh suehen sie im
ypatherbst die Tiefe und koninien im Friihlini; wieder herauf; ira
iSommer sind die .lunueu hauptsachlich in den obereu, erwarmteii
Hchichten /.u findeu. wiiiirend die altcron oft in dei' Tiofe umher-
schwimmen."
I have also noticed the vertical ..wanderiuijs" and I believe
that we hei-e have a very important factor to deal with.
For it will probably be jiroved that the movements of herrings
ai'e ati'ected by the vertical alterations in the places where C', fin-
marchicm is to be found at dittei'ent times of the year.
Tt will be seen in my plankton-tables too that this species
in the winter shows itself in the upper layers of water, quite
thinly spread in the surface layers, while the majority is in much
deeper water. But some exceptions from this state of thing's have
been noticed, and these deserve attention. For instance, on Janu-
ary •24th 1899, there were quantities of these animals at Kvænan-
gen no deeper than 0 — 5 meters, and the same was seen to be the
case on the 27th of the same month in the same year in the inner
iialf of the Lyngen Fiord. To this striking biological phenomenon
a parallel peculiarity is e\idenced in the physical conditions of the
layers of water, these being altogether unvarjing both with regard
to temperature and sahnity (ef. nrs. 145—154, 155—162).
And in this fact there seems to lie an explanation for the
appearance of herrings at times in the winter so far up near the
surface in some of the northern tiords that they can be caught
with nets.
To give an idea of the distrilnition of this species deeper down
in the winter, in those tiords into Avhich the ocean water Hows,
the following list of observations made is useful. Dr. Petersen's
closiuL'-net. with an aperture of about 0.09 sq. m. was used.
Ciila)uis finman-liiCKs.
1K99. I^)mbaken III.
Dcptli.
Nnint)«i-.
n lon
10
100—200
n2
'iOO— 300
«77
llnni .ilii ni
V2 1S99. Oxsund.
Depth.
111.
Number.
0-100
424
0-150
520
150—250
260
250—350
148
350-450
41
450-550
32
.O.50-H20
18
Bottom 630 m.
These figures speak for themselves. In February 1899 the
numbei' of C', finmarehims reached the maximum at a depth of
200— .300 m.
It will also be seen fiom these observations that in the
Avinter a really considerable immbei' of this important plankton
form may be found in the basins of the fiords, as that it may truth-
fully be said that there is food there for eventual winter herring
shoals.
Again it will be noticed on reference to the table dealuig with
Oxsund {'V2 1899), that C'. /?)M)««rc/iic!(s is only found very spar.sely
distributed at the gi-eater depths of 400—600 m. Tliis is still
further emphasized in the following figui'es.
is'.cj. Oioti
Depth,
m.
Xninber of
specimens.
0-100
10.-.
100—200
474
200-300
930
;i 10- -.xvi
77-J
llottdni .'jrid in.
Depth.
111.
Nuinl),'.- nf
specimens.
0-100
(it
100—200
10.il
■Jliii — -J'>il
]."i7.">
Bottom 258 m.
•73 1899. Tranodybet.
Depth,
m.
Numher.
0—100
211
100-200
9
200-300
9
300-400
10
400 -.500
6
500— tJOO
2
Bottom 640 m.
-Vs 1899. The Tys Fiord I.
Depth.
NiDiiber.
0- 50
55
0-100
110
100—200
15
200—300
2
300-400
1
400-500
1
500-600
1
«00—700
1
■/o 1899. Ofoten II.
Bottom 72.") 111.
At the two iilaces last iiKMitioned. however, the maximum
proved to be in the upper 100 meter.s, while their appearance in
the lower layers was very seldom.
These observations tend to show that even in winter there is
no accumulation of C. fimnarchicioi in the greater depths in our
fiords (400 mtrs. and more). One is tempted to ask whether the
vertical movements previously mentioned are active or passive. It
may be replied that the vertical currents, which are caused by the
cooling- of the surface during- the winter, must necessarily influence
the movements of the plankton and have a share in their down-
ward course. If the movements of the animals arc active, these are
ill this case assisted by the current in the water.
— It is not so easy to determine the spawning time for those
species in which the ovisack is wanting. But even here there are
interesting things to be noticed which have some connection with
spawning, as for instance the fastening of spermaphores to the
genital segment.
I have only a time or two observed females of C. finmurrlticus
with .^pei'maphores aflixed. rrt. on ",•. 1809 Ofoten TI, •200—250
m. anil on ''/-j isii'.i Oxsund. o 15(i in.
('(tl(l)ins lll/l)r)lioiri(s. KuilVEH.
I have found single s]»ei'im('iis of this organism in tlie depths
of our fiords, and in the < )fot Fiord in tlie winter of 1K99 they
were sufticicntly numerous to deserve to be (Minsidered of importance
as food for plankton-eating fish.
I will g-ive a series of observations made of the iminbers taken
at different depths with Dr. Pktkkskxs closing-net. whicii iiad an
openiuL:' whose surface measiire was about (i.u'.i m.-.
'h 1899. Ofoten I.
l)«l,tlj.
m.
Number of
females.
Number of
male.s.
Total.
0-100
100-200
1
1
200-300
29
29
300—350
'-t
S
so
Number of
males.
0—100
1
100-200
200-250
■5
1
!'
JJottom
25.S 111.
Oxsund.
Depth.
Nutnber of
females.
Number of
males.
Total.
0-150
1
1
1.50—250
3
3
250—350
24")
3.50-450
281)
450-550
17
4
21
,-,.-,0-C,20
2
4
IJottoin (i;i(t 111.
Vz 1899. Tranodvbet.
De|,th
Number of
Nu
mber of
iiales.
Total.
0-100 ;
100—200
20;j— 300
11
1
12
300-400
5
5
400—500
6
2
8
550-(i00
4
4
Bottom 040 111.
1899. The Tvs Fi(
Depth,
m.
Number of
females.
Number of
male.s.
Ti.tMl.
0- 50
11
jwiiorcs
0—100
14
jutnore»
100—200
15
200-300
8
300-400
25
500— (iOO
8
liOO- 700
1
Bottom 72.5 m.
1.-!
Tlu'sc tables sliow tile (listrihiitidii of this ctiin'iiod in tlic
(Icptlis (if the iKirtlin-ii lionls. 'I'lic iiiiinlicr >.tiii,s to reach its
iiiaxiiiiimi at a dcptli of .Jou 4i»ii met res, dci-roasiiii; botli at greater
ami It'sscr (Icpllis. It is of special interest that jtiniores may be
seen in tlu- layei's of water no ileepci' tlian 0- 50 m. (cf. =7,i 1899.
Tile 'I'ys Fioril i i. In tills way the sujijily can he replenished in
liasiiis which are siiut oil' hy coiiipaiatively hi-li suhmarine ridg'es.
It is a matter of importance to he uhle to determine tlie propaga-
tintr time for planlitoii organisms, so I will mention some of the
observations wliicii I have made and whicii will serve as helps to
determine this matter as far as C'. Iii/pcrliori'its is concerned.
As the foregoing tables show, there are many moi'e females than
males. Then ai:ain. at certain times of the year, not a single
male is to he seen. It would seem that, exeeiit Just at spawning
time, hardly any fully developed males are to be found; or at any
rate, only as a very great raiity. In plankton samples from the
sea in the neigbourhood of Jan Mayen (-76 1897) I have, for in-
stance, found hnndreds of females, bnt not a single male.
As 1 mentioned previously, the development of spermaphores
may he considered as a proof that spawning time has come.
Speiiiiaphorcs affixed to the first abdominal segments of females
have thus been observed by me in specimens from the following
places: —
'■/o 1899. Tranodybet, 0— ti.Sd m.
72 1899. Ofoten II, -iOO— 2oO m.
1"'. 1899. Oxsund, i.50— 550 m.
Ill one single instance I have observed that a spermaphore
had almost left the spermaphore-duct through its opening on the
left side of the first abdominal segment, the fifth leg on the left
side being at the same time inclined towards the spermaphore so
as to be able to seize it (74 1900. The 8kjerstad Fiord II, 0—
180 m.). In several cases I have observed eggs in the oviducts
on their way towards the genital segment, and this too is a sure
sign that spawning time has come. Dates for such observations are,
among others, 'h 1899. Ofoten I; ^'/o 1899 Oxsund; -/i 1900.
The Skjerstad Fiord IV.
The eggs, Avhich lay in a row in the canal leading from the
ovary, were of a yellowish colour and were placed like beads on
a string. These yellow strings of beads could be seen with the
naked eye.
There is another thiuLi, wliich in all probability has some pur-
pose to serve at spawning time. I have noticed at such time, and
as far as I remember only then, two red spots on the ventral side
of the swollen srenital segment in the females of ('. h//perhoreu>^.
If these spots are not .seen at other times, one has every reason
to think that they arc intended to serve some special purpose at
that particular time, and it is natural to conclude that they are
for the guidance of the males, possi])ly ti
spermaphores should be deposited.
>u\ the liords mentioned, so
I «lietlier propagation con-
conclude that they
show them were the
Jlllliorrs 1
'• .. 1S9'.).
-7:i 1899.
7.5 1899.
-"/:, 1900.
-'-'/:, 1900.
'''i lilOO.
From the forevoiuL:- statements it \
time for ('. hi/inilur' ii.-< in the iKirlherii
the months of Februniv. March and .\i
lave been fre(|iiently
ibserved. as. fo
Oxsuml.
;?5n-45() m
The TVS Fiord 1
0 50 m
Hola,
0-150 111
ykroven.
0 loo 111
Tranoilvbet.
0 — coo 111
The F^ildeii Fidi'd. 1
■■)00 -500 111
instance, on
oiild -eeiii that propagation
lioi'ds may be taken to be
lil. 1 have no observations
that 1 am unable 1,, >ay aiiyllilii'.'
tiniies after .\prll.
There Is no doubt thai this aiclle enpepdil iiropagatcs in our
tiords. but as ynmiL' hive been found In the iipjier layers (0—50
m.) there .seems to lie notliliii.'- unlikely in presuming an inflow,
also in those basins whieb are shut olV by submarine ridges.
I'sr,nl„rnhutn.< rh,n,,(il„s. Uukck.
.\ i^laiice at plankton taides will cnnvliiee us that this is one of
the 111
tioi-ds.
ipepoU
ikton
the northern
It Is easier to determine the propagating time for this species
than for the two i)reviously mentioned, as the females carry their
eggs affixed to the genital segment. 1 have, however, only a few
observations from the northern fiords, as for instance on '"J-i 1900
when I saw females with eggs in the Ostnes Fiord and again on
74 in the same year in the Skjerstad Floi'd. Hut tVora the skjær-
gaard off lierg-en, I have observed such females from Februaiy to
the bei;innlnt^' of May. It is jiossible that propagation continues after
this time.
('Ill r id i us aiVHltus, IJoKCK.
PL II, Fig. 14.
Amoii!.'- the many samples of plankton from the northern fiords,
I have only noted this .species as beiiiM found at tlie following
places: —
7-. 1.S99. Skroven I, 0—380 m.
^'/2 1899. Oxsund, 450 — 550 ni.
'74 1899. The Malang Fiord, 0-380 m.
'74 1899. The Malang Fiord, 200—300 and 300-380 m.
G. O. Saks') has found this species from the Kristiania Fiord
up to the Vest Fiord, which was its noi'thern limit as fai- as was
previously known. Now this limit can be extended to the Malang
Fiord.
(.'hiriiliKs li')it(isphius. III. O. Sars.
PI. II. Fig. 13.
Tills arctic copeimd has only once been tbuiul in Norway. I
counted every copepod in the samples from Ofoten I (7-' 1899),
300—350 m. and found among them only one specimen of this spe-
cies, a female 3.5 mm. in length.
Eiirlincfit noniu/ii-a. I'.dkck.
This .species is a giant one among copepoda. I have measured
sevei-al specimens of females which have reached a length of 8.3
mm. lielow are some particulars which will give an idea of the
distribution of 1-J. ii^niyira at various depths.
■/■■ 1H99. Ofoten 1.
Deptli.
m.
Number of
females.
Number ..f
males.
Total.
0—100
100-200
3
2
5
200-300
9
300 - .'^.-lO
n
') ('rusta<-.-;i of Norw:
'"A 1899.
Øxsund.
Depth.
Number of
females.
Number of
males.
Total.
0-150
1
1
150—250
5
2
7
250-350
3
3
6
350-450
1
2
3
450-550
^
3
550—620
Bottom
"A 1899.
(■.;30 m.
Trauødybet
Depth.
Number of
females.
Number of
males.
Total.
0- 60
2
2
0-100
1
1
100—200
2
2
200—300
2
2
300-400
400—500
1
1
.500— «00
2
'>
IJottum <;iii 111.
In 1899 juniores were observed in the plankton from January
to April inclusive, and during the .same time I have notes of many
specimens of females Avith ovisacks. In some of them the bent
ovarial tubes were seen to be full of the blueish eggs which shone
through the body so that tlie blue ovarial tubes could be seen by the
naked eye. In this species too, I noticed two red spots on the
ventral side of the genital segment in females. I liave suggested
the hypothesis that these are for tlie guidance of tlie males when
they deposit spermaphores.
It has been found on examination in the southern herds that
tlie .spawning time for this species also takes place at other times
than mentioned above, but I suppose that in the northern fiords
the special time for spawning is during tlie first few months in the
year, from January to April.
This species is one of the few jjlankton organisms, which I
have found in the stomach of Lofot cod.
Sfolccitliricclla m'nior. I)Kaiiy.
This species was very rai(
ikt(
tViini the northern
liorr
G. 0. Hars') mentions having come across it from the Kristi-
jinia Fiord right up to r^ofoten. I have found it in Gxsund {'"A
1899, 0—100 m.) and in Kvænang ('-'A 1.S99, 0— KiO m.) Miiich
must be taken as the most northernly place where this species has,
up to the present, been observed.
1) Crustacea of Norwiiy. Vol. IV. p. 5(i.
Cenfyojiai/cs hamahis, Lilljeborg.
A single specimen of this species was found in a sample from
Røst (Lofoten Islands) 'A 1S97, and this was a female.
Tcmorn luinjicoiiils. 0. F. Muller.
This species provides a considerable amount of food in our
waters for plankton-eating fish. As, however, on the south west
coast it is particularly prominent in the summer and autumn months,
it was not to be expected that it would often be met with in
samples from the northern fiords, which were taken in the months
of January, February, March and April. 1 have only noted it
from Moskenstream ('Vi 1899, 0— lOo m.). On the contrary it
has frequently been referred to as being found in several of the
northern fiords in the autumn of 1898 and 1S99 by Dr. Gran.')
Professor P. T. Cleve'-') fixes the nortliern limit on the Norwegian
coast at 70" N. for tliis species.
MrtrUTiii lucens, PjOECk.
Off tiie coast of Bergen this species is at times so plentiful
that it becomes of importance as food for plankton eaters. I have
for instance found large (luantities in the stomachs of young „sei"
(coal-fish).
By a look at the accompanying plankton tables it will be seen
that this species is very generally distributed also in the northern
fiords of Norway in the winter, but it is not seen in large numbers.
The following table gives the result of examination in this
respect of the samples from Oxsund: —
'"A 1^<99. Oxsund.
l)L-plll.
Number of
females.
Number of
Total.
0—100
1
1
0—1.50
9
9
150— i'50
2
2
2.50-3.50
4
4
350-450
450-550
5.i0— 620
The
is Kvu'iia
and so dt
specle^
l)lncc at which 1 have found this species
it ciiiits a blui'ish liglit during preservation,
next to bo considered.
This species is a typical deci» water form in the fiords. The
following tables give an idea of the ([uaiitities in which it is found
at the various depths.
45
'h 1899.
Ofoten I.
Dui.tl. in
inetei-s
Number of
females
Number of
males
Total
0—100
100-200
200-300
10
:<(iii :i-,(i
1.-.
HiittcMU MW III.
V2 1S99. Ofoten II.
Depth iu
meters
Number of
females
Number of
males
Total
0—100 1
100—200 1 7
1
8
, ' ..
liottoin -iSs 111.
»72 1899
Oxsund.
Depth in
meters
Number of
females
Nuiii1j,.|- of
males
Total
0-100
0—150
3
3
150-250
8
8
250—350
13
13
350-450
4
4
450—550
2
4
6
550—620
1
1
iottoiii (;.)() Ill
PJcKromnmma rolmsta, Dahl.
!>;. II, Fi.r. 1- ll^
In samples fi'om The Vest Fioi-d (Skroven I, "'2 1899. 0—300 m.)
1 found one sinirle female specimen of a Pleuromamraa, which I at
first mistook for a P. (thcloinhiali.^.
But on closei- examination, I found that the first pair of an-
tennae were without the peculiar hooks which specially distinguish
the latter species. Then I continued my examination on the lines
laid down by Dr. Giesbhecht in his tables'), and came to the
conclusion that my specimen was identical with the form described
by F. Dahl found in the Atlantic, r/>. P. robiisfa. As there were
no drawings nor detailed description of the latter, I decided that
I Avould treat my .specimen very thoroughly and examine it still
more closely, and then I prepared detailed drawings.
1) Copepn.la (in ,I)as Tierreidr). \,. lUit.
Meanwiiile, G. 0. Sars's excellent drawings and desci'iption')
Mere puhlisheil. .so that my work became superfluou.s. I have, nevei--
tlicless. hail my sketclies reproduced, as the place where my speci-
men was found is cMiisidrnibly liirllirr north than there the ones
lireviiuisly iiicntioiied have been louml. My sketches may then be
used as proofs that it was really a P. ruhushi I secured at Skroven
in The Vest Fiord. Its length was ;3.7 mm. According to G. O.
Saks this species was taken by Dr. H.jout on the „ Michael Sars"
expedition, somewhat north of The F;eroe Islands (stat. 9) and in
The Stor Fiord in Sondmore (stat. 4).
Hdcrorhnhihts norregicits, Boeck.
I have sjH'cinieiis of thi.s .species from The Ostnes Fiord, The
Vest i'^ioid I Skroven. Tranodybet), Oxsund, The Ofot Fiord, The
Tys Fiord, The Folden Fiord and The Skjerstad Fiord. It was
only found in small quantities at all these places. There were a
few fully developed males in addition to the more plentiful females.
With respect to propagating time, it may be mentioned that juniorcs
were noticed '/■, 1899 1 Ofoten I, .300— .•5.50 m.). '",, 1899 (Oxsund,
350—450, 450 — 550 m.) and again "4 1900 (The Folden Fiord,
200-300, 300—400, 400—500 m.).
Sars has found this species at various jilaees from The Kri-
stiania Fiord right up to Lofoten.
Candncia armata, Boeck-).
In The Vest Fiord (V2 1899, Skroven I. o-.-jso m.) 1 took a
single female specimen of this species, length -Ifi mm. This station
at Skroven is the most northerly place where this species has, up
to the present, been noticed.
Acartia clansi, Giesbhecht.
Under Acartia sp. in the tables, both daidi and lungiremis
are included. The form which was seen about the middle of January
1899 (12th— 18th of .Tanuary! was principally chms'i.
Acartia lonyin
LiLLJEBOEG.
This .species was found occasionally among the samples, but
never in any (quantity worth mentioning.
Oithona similis, Claus.
Even if there should be no other jilauktou copepod to be found
this species, however, is usually present, at any rate one may almost
certainly find a few specimens, and, on account of its very general
appearance, this species must be reckoned among the most unportant
copepoda with regard to its ecological worth.
I have noticed females cariying their eggs in every month of
the year in the fiords in the neighbouihood of Bergen.
Oithona plioiiifcra, P)A1kd.
As the tables show, this species was found at many places,
but never in any quantity. It was also found off Ingø (-■•/4 1899.
Ingehavet, 0—300 m.), and this is its northernmost limit as far as
is now known. The geographical position of this station is: 71°
10' N., 23" 10' E.
') Crustacea of Norway. Vol. I
-) G. O. Sars. Crustacea of N.
PI. 78, 79.
. IV. pag. 135
O. Nordoaard.
MicrosetMd ntlanticn. Bkady it Hub.
A glance at the tables will suftice to convince one that this
species is one of the most important plankton copepoda. Propagating
at any rate I have
.Inlv in the fiords
time is extended over a great part of the year,
noticed females with ovisacks from Februaiy t(
in the neighbourhood of Bergen.
Oncæa eonijera. Giesbrecht
This easily recognized form was only rarely seen in the plankton.
It was found in The Vest Fiord. The Jøkel Fiord and the Kvænang.
Pteropoda.
Limacina balea. ]\I()ller.
This species, which may sometimes be found in lai'gc quantities
the autunni, wcvc only rarely found in the plankton. Vide tables.
Appendieularia.
FritiJlaria horeaUs. LoiniAN.
What was found of Oikopleam, I iiave not been able to identify,
but, on the other hand, the specimens which in the tables are
classitied under IrltiUuyia sp. are without doubt F. horenlis.
Bryozoa.
Ci/plionautcs.
The larval form, which at times is tolerably general in the
tiords in the neighbourhood of Bergen, can only with certainty be
mentioned as having been found by me at one single place, viz.
Raftsund. {",'2 1899. Raftsund II, 0—260 m.).
Chætognatha.
Sagitta hiimnctata, Quoy & Gaimard.
Under tlie designation Chætognatha two species, (rlc. this and
th(^ following) will bo found in my tables.
Meanwhile, howevci', I have noticed sevoi'al places whei'e 5'.
hqjunctata has been found, e. g. '7» 1899, Tranødyb, 0—50 m.;
-"/a 1899. Henningsvær II, 0—100 m.; -V» 1899, Tysiioi'd I,
0 — 100 m.; '7i 1899, 40 miles NNVV of Gaukværø, 0—100 m.
As far as my experience goes, this species on our coast is only found
hi the upper layers of water, but SpafMla hamata is almost without
exception found in samijlos taken from docp watoi-. The species
last mentioned has been found by me in ([uantities in the stomachs
of Youni;' ,,sei" caught on the coast nil' liergeu.
SjiiiilrUa liiimiila. M("iiiU's.
I have found this si)0cic.s in large ((uantities in samples taken
fi'om deep water. Among the many places where it has been found,
1 may mention The Vest Fiord, Øxsund, The Ofof Fioid, The Tys
Fiord'. The Folden Fiord. The Skjei'stad Fioi'd. S:v. 1 have taken
it both.
Øxsund.
with townet
I counted the sjjecimens from
'/2 1899. Oxsund.
Depth
Number oi
m.
specimens
0—100
2
0—150
2
150-250
1
250—350
3
350-450
2
450—550
1
550—620
2
Bottom
630
m.
As before mentioned, this species as a I'ule is found at greater
depths, but I can mention one exception. In the Skjerstad Fiord
{% 1900, Skjerstad fj. VIII, 0 m.) several large specimens were
found swimming about in the surface water. This circumstance
may perhaps be accounted for when the peculiar hydrographical
character of The Skjerstad Fiord is remembered. The length of
the fully developed specimens was 30—35 mm.; while those from
Skjerstad Fiord were about 40 mm.
In samples from The Vest Fiord ('Vs 1899, Tranødyb, 300—400,
500—600 m.) there were specimens with eggbags. The hindei'part
of the side fin was bent downwards, thus forming a hollow in which
the eggs lay tightly pressed together.
In samples from the same place taken at a depth of 400—500
m. there were quantities oi juniores (2—3 mm. I of a chætognath,
which most probably was S. hamata.
Similar young individuals were also found, e. g. in The Tys
Fiord (-73 1899, Tysfd. I) in samples taken at a depth af 3()()— 500
m. but they were especially numerous in samples taken from a
depth of 500—600 and 600—700 m.
Ctenophora.
Lulnui 'lufuudthnJam, Fauk.
Prof. Chux has identitied B. norvcglca M. Saks with this
species. Chun writes'): — „Falls die von Mertens (1833) aus der
Bering-Strasse beschriebcne B. septentrionalis mit unserer Art iden-
tisch ware (was atis dei' Abbildung nicht ohne weiteres hervorgeht),
so durfte audi /.'. nifundilndum eine circumpolarc Verbreitung auf-
wiesen. "
This lobate Cteuoi)liorc has been noticed by me in the Jokel
Fiord (-"/4 18i)9) as well as in the sea at Hammerfest i-"-'/4 1899).
Unfortunately I did not succeed in preserving any specimen. C.
VoGT observed this beautiful form in 1861 in Lofoten.
Anthozoa.
Amchaadt^ allnda. M. Sahs.
Sevei'al spcciiiu'iis of this species were found in the suifacc
water of Moskeuslroniinen on March ist 1899.
') On the whole I have seen several of the hirger plankton turnis in (he
triiwl, e. ii. Calanus hi/pcrboreus, Eiichæta norvegica, Parathemisto oblivia, etc.
-) Die Bezielinngen zwisohen dem arktischen und antarktischen Plankton
(Siutt;iarl, mn). V. 22.
Siphonophora.
DijiJll/rs iin-linl. ClirN.
It is very iiitcivsIiiiL; to l>c alil<' In class this ai-ctic siplioniiiiiHir
ainoiiu- tliu Norwf.i^'iau fauna, as it is IooUihI upon as l)i'iii^- a tvpical
or leadiiitr ort-anism of tlie cold curroiits'i.
C. Ciirx writes in tiiis connection: ..I)ii)lii/c)< (irrlien is{ c'uw
liocinionlisciie i-'oiin. welciie in alien wannen Stromgebicten fehlt
und i^fiade walnend der kiiltesten .ialn-es/.fit (von .laniiar bis Miliz)
in der iiaftins-liai liiiutitr erscheint."
A ei)n)i)iete list of the distribntion of this sjiecies as far as
tiien known is dven by V\ !\(imi:u-'|. i5oth UiijiEU and Ciius liavc
specially emphasized the fart that this species is not found on the
Scandinavian coasts, lint this is no longer a fact; for in the winter
of liMKi. 1 foiniil F.iiAoxia arctica at the followiiiL;- places: —
■. I'.MKi. The Skjerstad Fiord \'ll. o I'.iii m.
" i — The Folden Fiord J, ;iO()— 400 m.
1 availed myself of Prof. Chin's excellent descriptions and
drawings, in ..Die .Slphonophorcn der Plankton-Expedition" (Se Tab.
I, Fig. (i), when identifying these specimens.
Tlie bracts were of precisely the same shape, and there was
the same arranii-ement of the canals, but there were no eggs in the
gonophor. So L think that there can be no doubt that Diphyes
areti-ii also belongs to the Norwegian fauna; this does not, how-
ever, necessarily weaken Chun's opinion with regard to the zoo-
gcograpliical character of this species. True the temperature at the
l)lace where I found it in T'he Folden Fiord w^as Q°.(i C. and salinity
about ;!.") pro mille, liut so many of the relict organisms from the
glacial period liave adapted themselves to the physical conditions
in which they tind themselves in a corresponding manner to the
case here under considei'ation.
Vtipulita sarsi. Haeckel.
Agah)ioi)si>i ihijnns, M. Sars (pavt), Fauna littoralis Xurvegiae (1846). Part 1.
p. 32, pi. V, figs. 1— (), pi. YI.
CKpnlitn Kfirsi, Haeckel, Siphonophora (1888) Challenger Eeport, Vol. XXVIII,
p. 2.34, .8(i7.
— K. T. Browne. The Fauna anil Flora i>f Valencia Harbour.
R. I. A. Proc. Sev. III. Vol. V, p. (178.
Agalmripnis ckycnis, Nordgaaed, Some Hydrograpliieal Eesults. Berg. Mus.
.\arbog 1899, no. VIU, pag. 25.
.\s is well known Michael Sari»; in 1840 gave a detailed
desciiption with drawings of Siphonophora collected at Floro (61"
;iO' N.I including Ai-inhvuims elegans. Concerning this Haeckel
writes in isss- ). ..The genus Agalmopsh was de.scribed very accu-
rately by Saus in 1S46, and illustrated by excellent figures. The
North Atlantic Agalmidæ, however, which are represented in his
pis. V and VI, belong to two (or even three?) dittcrcnt genera.
The tirst foi'm, figured in pi. \'. has simple terminal tilaments of
the tcntilla. and belongs therefore to the genus CujniJita.
The second form, i-epresented in pi. \'I. has tricornuate tentilla,
with an odd terminal vesicle and two jiaired lateral horns. This
form may i-etain the original name Ai/idmops/s rhy/oix and lepresent
the type of this genus.''
After a careful examination of the description and drawings
given by Michael Sars of Agalmopsis elegans one will certainly
egi-ee that Haeckel is right in dividing into two genera. P.ut, on
') Die Siphonophoren der Plankton-E.xpeditiou, p. 20.
-) Die Siphonophoren (Fauna arctica, II B., p. 174).
•') Challenirer Report. Vol. XXVIU. p. 2:!4.
the other hand. I have come to a ditferent coiiclMsion with rcL'ard
to SAii>'s li-iircs ,is applieil to the two genera.
On Saks's pi. V the W'.'s. o and 0 represent tentilla .,\vith a
spiral cnidoband. enveloped by a cainpaniilate involu(Te'"), and these,
as well as tig. 1 show that the tentilla have simple terminal fil-
aments, con.secpiently they iilu.strate a .sjtecies of Cupulild. Hut pi. V,
tig.s. 7 and H represent tentilla with a terminal anipnlia and two
horns, .ind tlie.se are characteri.stic of tlie genus Agahnoiisi»: Neither
can il be correct as Haeckkl mentions (1. c. p. 3(>7) that pi. VI
hi Sai;s'> work, rejircsents Agnlvwiifi.s ilvgans.
(In pi. VI fig. I the tentilla arc drawn partly with, and jiartly
without terminal tilaments. FiL'. 10, on the .same pi. gives a detailed
drawing of the laller kind. ,iiid this has given lise to the thoiiglil
that Sars possibly had a lliird genus under examination when pre-
paring his aeeount. Thei-e is. however, no Ioniser any rca.son for
this supposition. In li^''. I llio tentilla without leiniinal filament are
drawn smallei' than those which are furnished with the terminal fil-
ament, and it is reasonable to conclude that the former represent
them in course of development, if one compares pi. VI fig. 10 in
Saks s work with pi. II fig. S in Fewkes'-) a .striking re.semblance
will be noticed. Fkwkes describes his fig. as representing an ..em-
bryonic tentacular kiud)" of Ciqmlitu ( Ximumia) cant, A. Aoassiz.
It may surely be eoiisidored certain that Sars's fig. 10 repre-
sents a corresponding condition in Ciijnilifu xtiitii. This must be a
Ciipulifa and not an Agalniojinis, for the tentilla which are developed
are furnished with a terminal filament.
Thus il will be soon that Sai:s's docriptions and drawings
almost exclusively are of I he organism which Haeckel das desig-
nated Cupulita siirt<i, as only iil. V, figs. 7 and s can be considered
as representing Agubnopsh elegans, M. Sars.
According to E. T. Uhown C. Snrsi is found on the west coast
of Ireland (Valentia Harbour). As before mentioned, Saks made
his collection at Floro.
I have observed this sjiecies in Moskenstrommen ('A 189it)
in Tromso Sound (-'Vi 180!)). at Lyngen II (-'"/i 1899), at Kvæn-
angen 11 ('''4 iso'.ii. in the .lokel Fiord (-"A 1899), at Kvænangen
(■-'/4 ismi) in llaninierfest Harbour (--/4 1899). At all the.se places
they were found in great numbers neai' the surface of the water.
Hammerfest is as far as is now known, the northernmost limit for
Cupiilitd sarsi.
The (|uestion naturally suogcsts it.self as to whether ('Kjndita
sarsi and ( '. fara are one and the same.
To throw liLiht on this point. I have compared both M. Sarss
and Fewkks' (1. c. p. iM-! l'l':'.. pis. 1. II. IIII) descriptions and
drawings. There is a considerable coincidence w itb regard to figures
representing general appearance (Fewki> jil. I. Saks pi. V fig. 1
and pi. VI fio-. 1).
There is similarity with regard to the a|)i)earance of the adult
tentilla ( F. pi. II ivj. '•• and S. pi. 5 fig. 5, 0) and the resemblance
between the embryonic tentacular knobs (F. pi. II fig. 8. S. pi. 0,
fig. 10) I have already mentioned. On the other hand, the tasters
(hydrocystæ) ajipear to differ. Fewkes describes them (1. c. p. 218)
as follows: — „They (the tasters) ari.se directly from the stem, and
are destitute of a basal jjeduncle. The distal extremity is closed."
PL II W'j:. 7 answers in every detail to this description. On com-
paring with this S. pi. 5 fig. 2, .3, where the tasters are described
•) Haeckel (loco citato p. 233).
=) On certain Medusæ from New Kngland 1888. Bull. Comp. Zool. (Ha
vard, Mass.), V.il. Xlll.
48
as „lange Elaschen" (distinguished by the letter e), it will be seen
that they are furnished with a basal peduncle, and that the top of
the taster is somewhat extended and pointed. In his description
of the tasters, Fewkes says that ,,the most marked peculiarity in
their anatomy is the existence of an ,,oil globule" near their base."
'i'his „oil globule" is drawn by the wiiter mentioned and will be found
on pi. n tig. 7. Nothing corresponding to this is found in Saes's
pi. o tigs. 2, .3. To discover if any such „oil globules" exist in
Cupulita sarsi I examined the remains of a specimen from Tromsø
sound. It was at once evident that while the majority of the various
organs as usual fell to the bottom of the glass, there wei-e a few
•small bits which remained on the surface of the preserving fluid (for-
malin). On closer examination, it was found that the little pieces
floating on the surface were tasters M-hich had risen to the top on
account of their oil globules. Here too, there appears to be a ditte-
rence between the two species under discussion. While the oil globules
of C. rcira according to Fewkes are sessile, those of C. sarsi are
provided with a short peduncle. It is possible that the reason,
w liy the oil globules do not appear on Sars's pi. 5 flgs. 2, 8 is
that they so easily burst on being touched. Saks has, however,
given a drawing (pi. (5 fig. 11) of a taster with oil globule, which
he considers to be „eine seltene Form der ovalen Blaschen", while
the oil globule itself is described as „Kugeliger Anhang". These
oil globules are most likely intended to act as a kind of hydrostatic
apparatus.
As will be seen from the foregoing, differences can clearly be
pointed out between C. cara and C. sarsi, and it is probable that
they represent two diiferent species which are, however, very similar.
The fact of C. sarsi being found in large quantities in the winter
in such fiords as Lyngen, Kvænang and .Jøkel would seem to indicate
that it is an arctic form, but one cannot be sure of this until its
distribution is more clearly defined.
Plujsophora horcall-^. M. Saes.
PI. IV, Figs. 1, 2.
In The Mosken current (^loslcciisd'ommen) several specimens
of a Physophora were found sw innniiiu iiliout near the surface, on
March 1st 1899. On comparing ^[. .Sauss drawings and descrip-
tions'), I was convinced that it was his species which I had found.
It has been thought that horealis was identical to Physophora hydro-
statica of the Mediterranean, but this is, however, not altogether
so sure as to be beyond doubt. If this should be proved to be the
case Sars's name; would have to give way foi' the older one. liyilro-
statica, Forsk.
M. Saks himself had an oi)portunity of comparing the Meditei'-
ranean form with the one he describes (1. c. p. 33) and it seems
tiiat he was acquainted with Claus's, Gegenbaur's and Kolucker's
reseai'ciies and examination of the former species. And as lie still
maintained that they wer'c dittei'ent, there is evci'v i-eason to be
wary before one concludes that they are not so.
M. Saks says, on page 40, „None of the urticary knobs ob-
served by me shewed more than .'j spii-al coils; bul ("i.ais (1. c.
p. 26, fig. 26)-) in P. hyilrustatica delineates '.) — 10 of them, and
1) Fauna littoralis Norvegiæ, li. ;i. p. 32, pi. V, VI figs. 1—8.
-) TJeber Physophora hydrnstatka nebst Bemerkuiigen uebev aiulei-e Siplioiio-
en. Sep. Abdruck aus Zeitsclir. l', wiss. Zoologie. 10 B.
Gegenbaue remarks that the spiral in the most perfect urticary
knobs becomes decomposed and lies twisted together in irregular
coils, which is also apparent in some of the specimens brought home
by me from the Mediterranean."
In horealis too during the development of the tentacular knob,
a dissolution of the spiral coils of the enidoband takes place, after
which they are reformed into irregular coils.
On PI. IV fig. 1 in the present work a tentacular knob with
spiral twisted enidoband Mill be seen, while fig. 2, depicts a later
stage, the spiral being unwound. I have observed intermediate
stages between these two.
A thoroughly developed tentillum is depicted on Saes's pi. VI,
fig. 7.
If it is a fact that the Coil unwinds itself in P. hydrostatica,
then the figure given by Claus (pi. 26, fig. 26) cannot designate „ein
vollkommen entwickelter Nesselknopf". But even if on this point
there is a similarity, there would still remain the dissimilarity that
during development the spiral twist in the tentacular knobs are more
numerous in hyiho^inticit than in horealis.
Craspedota.
(Notes and identification aie due to Di-. Edward T. Browne,
University College, London I.
Aeqiiorea sp.
V<; 1S99. Moskenstrommen o. m.
This is probably a new species.
Aijhmthd diyitnlis. Mvllee.
--/a 1899. NW of Kost (Lofoten), 3 specimens.
This is a northern species. Recorded from (jreenland, Norway,
Faeroe Channel and in the North Atlantic by the „National" Plank-
ton Expedition. There is no evidence that it has been taken south
of al)out latitude .58".
Aijlautha rosea, Foebes.
"A 1900. The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 0—330 m., 1 siiccimen.
— ., — ., V, 0—420 m., 1 specimen.
This medusa got mixed up with A. digitalis until I found out
(1898) that it Jiad eight sense organs. {A. digitalis has only four).
Recorded tVoui The British Isles and Hehgoland.
Ptychogastria polaris, Alman.
74 1900. Folden Fiord, 3 specimens.
74 1900. The Skjerstad Fiord IV. 0—330 m., 1 specimen.
74 1900. .. — „ VIL, 0—490 m., 2 specimens.
This medusa was taken in Discovery Bay in Grinnel Land, up
Smith Sound on tlu' west side of Greenland. (Pectyllis arctica from
(ireeniand and off Jlalifax-CiinllonL'or Exped.).
J-fomi)ociii-iiiit idatygoiwii, Maas.
74 1900. The Skjei'stad l-'iord V, 0 — 420 m., 1 specimen.
74 1900. „ — ,, VII, 0—490 m., 2 specimens.
H. platygonon was taken by the „Nationar' Plankton Expedition.
The station is omitted in the Report.
B. Protistplankton.
By E. Jm-geuseu.
a. Plankton tables.
In tlic following- tables r siii'iiities rare, it very rare (only one
or very few specimens seen), r-j- less rare, -|- frequent, +i" less
fi-equent. +c rather common, c common, cc very common, ccc in
large quantities.
The method used for collection and examination only allows
reliable conclusions as to the quality, not as to the quantity. From
the signs used to indicate the more or less common occurrence it
shoidd, however, be evident which species are common or go to
make up a considerable part of the plankton. It is, however,
always to be remembered that the signs are only based upon a sub-
jective judgment, not upon exact counting.
As a general characterization of the plankton — which for all
stations, the sea off Vesteraalen (Yttersiden) perliaps excepted, is to be
considered more or less unmixed coast plankton (neritic p.) — it may
be stated that the Peridinæa in the winter season are predominant
in (luantity, together with Halosphæra, while the Diatomaceæ and
likewise the Tintinnodea are of less frequent occurrence. This state
is at once changed in the spring (about 'A 1899, in 1900 "A),
when a few species of Diatomaceæ suddenly appear in large quanti-
ties, and remain for a considerable time at least more than one
month, how long cannot be seen from the samples collected, as it
was too early in the year, when the last samples were taken. During
this time the other plankton is very much reduced in quantity,
excepting Phæocystis, which species seems to have its optimum
just in this period. The Peridinæa occur far less abundantly than
earlier, not only in relation to the large masses of Diatomaceæ, but
also absolutely.
This phenomenon, that might truly be named the inflow of
Diatomaceæ, is a well known phase also in the development of the
more southern coast plankton (see L. (= Literature, at the end of
this essay) 1). Ostenfeld and Gran (L. 2 and 3) have also men-
tioned it, and try to explain the causes. It is an interesting fact
that most of the leading species are identical, both in the northern
and in the southern intioAV of Diatomaceæ, on the extensive coast
of Norway. Yet there are some few species characteristic of the
northern, that seem to be entu-ely wanting in the southern, especially
Fragilaria oceanica, partly accompanied by F. cylindrus, and Chceto-
ceros fureellatus (besides some other, less predominant species).
As to quality the northern plankton is decidedly poorer than
the southern, especially is this the case with the Tintinnodea.
Jørgensen.
Year 1899 Month
.'^g
I SO
"/l
Depth (meters)
0—100 0—150
Salinity (O/qo)
33.60-
34.67
88.39-
84.40
83.33-
33.39
33.33-
33.74
Temperature (Cels.)
I. Bacillariales.
(Diatomaceæ.)
Ehizosolenia alata Brightw. forma curvirostr
Biddulphia mohiliensis Bail
Chætoceros borealis Bail
C. 6. var. solitaria Cl
C. convolufus Caste
C. atlanticus Cl
C. decipiens Cl
C. diadema (Ehkb.) Gran
C. curviseius Cl
Act'mocyclus Ehrenbergii Ralfs
Roperia tesnellata (Rop.) Gkun
Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehrb
C. I'meatus Ehrb
C. curvatulus Grun
C. stellaris Rop
C. radiatus Ehbb
C. subbidliens Jørg. ii. sp
C. centralis Ehrb
C. concinnus W. Sm
C. nitidus Greg
Jlyalodiscus stelliger Bail
Asteromphalus hcptactis (Brkb.) Ralfs
Thalassioth-ix longissima Cl. et Grun
T. Frauen feldii Grun
T. F. V. nitzschioides (Grun.) Jøro
Pleurosigma ttnenmi Jørg. n. sp
Euodia gibba Bail
('I'he following are doubtful aa plauktonfor
fi.xed species or such from the ground).
Paralia sulcata (Khrb.) Cl
Actifiopti/chus undulatus (Bail. V) Ralks
Stirirdla lata W. Sm
Campylodi-scus Tliwcfi't Bréb
//. Peridinialcs.
(iJinofiagellata.)
Prorocetitrum micans Ehrb
Dinophysis acuta Ehrb.. Jøro
D. norvegica Clap, et Lachm., Jøro.
D, rnttmdafa Clap, et Lachm
D. komuvculus Stkin
i-+
r+
v+
r+
!•+
Protistplaiikfon.
Year 1899. Month
January
bo »
8»
a :=
2 « a
£ SO
Date
Depth (meters)
Salinity (»/oo)
Temperature (Cels.)
Podolampas palmipes Stein
Pt/roj)haciis horohgium Stein
Protoceratium reticulatum (Clap, et Lachm.) BrTscm.i.
Diplopsalis lentmda Bergh
Perkliniwn depression Bail
P. octanicum Vanhofp
P. divergens Ehrb. (IP. leiificidare (Ehrb.) .Jorg.)
P. cnnicum (Gban) Ostenf. et Schm
P. paUidum Ostenf
P. Steinii Jørg
P. ovni'.m (PorcH.) Schutt
Ceratitim h-i/)os(O.F. Mull.)Nitzsch. (a halticum Schutt.)
C bturphalui» Cl
C. macroceros Ehris
C. intermedium (Jørg.)
C. i. forma gracilis Pocch., Jorg
C. longipes (Bail.) Cl
C. furca (Ehrb.) Urj
C Uneatnm (Ehrb.) Cl
C. ftmts (Ehrb.) Duj
///. Pterosperinatacese.
Pterosperma Miibii (Jørg.) Ostenf
P. Vatihoffenii (Jørg.) Ostenf
P. didyon (Jørg.) Ostenf
IV. Halosphæraceæ.
Hakif^phæra viridis Schmitz (incl. H. minor Ostenf.) . .
V. Silicotiagellata.
Disteplianus specidum (Eurb.) Støhr
Diciyorha fibula Ehrb
VI. Radiolaria.
I. Spuinellaria.
Hexncontium pachydermum Jørg
Erhinomma trinacrium Hck
E. leptodermum Jørg
Drymynmma elcyans Jorg
33.39-
33.46
33.39—
33.46
33.39-
34.40
4.1-
4.7
4.2—
7.1
r+
+c
r+
+c
r+
r+
+c
+
+c
+c
r+
+c
+c
+c
JørgensFii.
Year 1899. Month
January
> .Sft*
■S 'i "^
^-k
^%
"/i
Depth (meters)
0—100 0—150
Salinity ("/oo)
33.39—
35.11
33 60-
34.57
33.39—
33.40
33.39-
34.40
33.33-
33.39
33.33—
33.74
Temperature (Cels.)
Chromyomma boreale (Cl ) Jørg. . .
Bhizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Jørg. . . .
Stylodidya tenuispina Jørg. n. sp.
Spnvgodisms favns Ehhb
LithelhiH minor JøKO
Fhortichim iJyloniuni KCK.? Cl. . . .
SorolarcKS cij-cmnle.rtns Jørg
2. Nassellaria.
Plaguicantha arachnoides Clap, et Laohm.
Plectacantha oikiskos Jørg. n. sp
CampijlacanilM cladophora Joufi. n. s]). . .
Phormacantha hystrix (Jørg.) Joro
Peridhim longispinum Jøkg
Profnxrrnvmi simplr.r (Cl.) Jørg
Cfc(?o.sr,„;,f),/ l,ir,.li,him (HcK.?) Jørg....
Dictgiiiiliiiiiii.s (_'lrn-i Jørg
Litliomelissa selnsa (Cl.) Jørg
X. hystrix Jørg
Acanthocorys umbellifera Hck
Dictyoceras acanthicum Jøbo
D. .riphrphnrvm Jørg
('lollii-iii i/rl,is 1 1 'isjiidota (Jørg.) Jørg. ...
AmlracyiUis guniplidnycha (Jørg.) Jørg...
.4. amblycephalis (Jørg.) Jørg
Stkhocorys seriata Jørg. n. .sp
Gonosphæra primordinlis Jorg. n. sp
.7. Phæodaria (Tripylea).
Cnmiosphæra lupta Jorg
C. genmetrica Borg
Protocystis xiphodon (Hck.) Borg
J'. Harstoni (Murray) Borg
P. tridens (Hck.) Borg
Challengeron dwdon Hck. (C. Iietercicanthum Jørg.) .
C. armaUim Borg
Medusetta arcifera Jørg
GazdkUa pe.ntapodium Jørg
VII. Tintinnodea
Tintinnus acuminatus Clap, et Lachm.
T. a. var undata Jørg
r+
Protistplankton.
Year 1899. Month
January
Locality
! lill
1 1'^i
, a
ii
-Ol
II
00
fl
l!
Sas
II
1'^
-^2
£ 2 «i
111
li
I-S
S'5
Date
'\
"/.
"/i
*%
"/i
»/i
"/i
.T/j
17'
"/,
"/i
»%
'«A
"/,
"/.
Deptli (meters)
0—50
0-250
0—50
0—180
0—50
0—100
0-150
0-50
0-100
0-50
0-180
0-50
0—110
0—50
0—700
Salinity (« oo)
33.39
33.39—
35.11
33.50
33.50-
34.57
33.39-
33.46
33.39-
33.46
33.39-
34.40
33.33—
33.39
33.33—
33.7*
33.39
33.50
34.38
34.38-
34.38
Temperature (Cels.)
4.3 —
4.4
4.3—
7.3
4.6—
4.9
4.0-
6.5
4.1—
4.S
4.1-
4.7
4.2 —
7.1
3.9-
4.3
3.9-
5.6
4.2
4.1-
4.7
5.9-
6.4
5.9—
3.6
Amphorella guadrilineafa (Clap, ct Laphm.) Joro
A. Steensfrupii (Clap, et Lachm.) Dad
rr
r+
rr
r
r
r
r+
r+
+
rr
r
r
+
1-+
r
+
r
r
r
rr
+
r+
+
r
r
+
r+
r
••
+
r+
r
+
r
ir
+
r
rr
+
r
r
rr
Pti/cJioci/lis unuila (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt a major Jorc.
+
P. «. V. digitalis Acriv. . ...
T. n. V. si7mata (Brandt)
T n. V oi'alis Jørg n var
Codonella lagmula (Clap, et Lachm.) Estz. v. ovata Jørg.
Cijttarocylis denticulafa (Ehrb.) Pol. a typica Jørg
C. d. V. gigayitea (Brandt) Cl
Dictiiocysta temnliim Hck. .
r-|-
Indella caudata (Ostenf ) Cl
Year 1899. Month
Depth (meters)
1 '^ ^
io§ §^
2'/i ^/i
33.82
34.C
Ti-raperature (Cels.)
I. Bacillariales.
(DiaLmaccce.)
< Biddulphia aurita (Lyxgb.) Bréb
■ Chæioceros borealis Bail
C', decipiens Cl
Actinocydus JEhrenhergii Ralfs
A. siMilis (Greg.) Kalps
Roperia tessellata (Rop.) Grun
Coseinodisciis exeentricus Ehrb
V C. decipiens Grun
• C. cut vatidus Grctn
C. stellaris Rop
C. radiatus Ehbb
C', subbullienn Jørg. n. sp
C. centralis Ehrb
C', concinrms W. Sm
C', nitidus Greg
Euodia gihha Bail
Hi/ahdiscits stelliger Bail
If. subfilis Bail
Asteromphalus heptactis (Bréb.) Ralfs
Tli(dassiolhri.r Inngissima Cl. et Gkun
T. Franoifddii Grun. v. mtzschioides (Gedn.) J»i
Pleurosigma tenerum Jørg. n. sp
3.6—
3.9
r+
+ 0
Actinoptgchus imdulatus (Bail.?) Ralfs
Vunipi/Iodiscits Jhuretii Bréb
C. angidaris Greg
Khabdonema arcuatum (Lyngb.) Kutz. .
Pleurosigma naviculaceum Bréb
//. Peridiniales.
(DinofiageUatce.)
Dinnjihysis aaita Ehrb., Jørg
D. iwrvegica Clap, et Lachm., Jørg
D. ncmninata Clap, et Laoiim., Jørg
D. roiundata Clap, et Lachm
Pi/yojilinrits horologium Stein
Gonyaulax spinifera (Clap, et liACiiM.) Dies
Diiplopsalis lenticula Bergh
Peridinium depressum Bail
P. oceaninan Vanhøk
P. divergens Ehrb. (P. lenticulare (Ehkb.) Jørg.)
+0
H-0
+c
I c
+c
I'rotistplanktiin.
Year 189». Montli
Locality
Juiiuary
•I E'
S C I B
i ^ OF
: = £
y
Deptli (metei's)
Salinitj' (« ,
Temperature (Cels.)
Peridinium coiiiaim (Gran) Ostenp. et Schm
P. palUibiin OsTENF
P. S/eiHii JURO
vP. ovatiini (Pouch.) Scbutt
Ceralium tripos (0. F. Møll.) Nitzsch. (a haltkum Schutt.)
C. buceplialum Cl
C. maa-oceros Ehrb
C. intenncdimn (Jørg.)
C. longipes (Bail.) Cl
C. furca (Ehrb.) Dim
C. lineatwn (Ehrb.) Cl
C. fusus (Ehrb.) Dctj
///. Pterospermataceæ.
Pteiosperma Miihii (Jørq.) Ostexf.
P. Vanhiiffeni (Jørg.) Ostexf
P. dictyon (Jørg.) Ostesf
IV. Halospbæraceæ.
Halnsphæra ririiUs Schmitz. (incl. H. minnr Ostexf.)
V. Silicoflagellata.
Dislephanus Kpecidum (Ehrb.) Stohr
DictyocJui fibula Ehrb
VI. Radiolaria.
I. i^ituiiiella
Hexaconfium enthacanthm Jøkg.
H. pachydenmtm Jørg
Echinomma trinacriwn Hck
E. leptodermum Jørg
Brymyomma elegans Jørg
Chromyomma boreale (Cl.) Jørg.
Rliiznpleyma boreale (Ol.) Jørg..
Phorticium pylonium Hck.?, Cl..
Lithelius minor Jørg
L. spiralis Hck
+c
r
+
r
r
+
+c
c
c
c
c
+c
+c
+c
+c
+c
+c
+c
+
+c
+c
+c
r+
r
+c
+ c
-l-c
+0
-f-
Jorgen
Year 1899. Month
Deptli (meters)
0—180
Salinity C/oq)
,87 33.87
33.82-
34.08
Temperature (Cels.)
3.G—
3.9
2. Acantharia.
Rodiosjjhæm anacanthica Jørg. n. sp. ...
3. Nassellaria.
Playiacantha arachnoides Clap, et Lachm.
Plcctaeantha oikiskos JØEO. n. sp
CampylacantJia cladophora Jøeg. ii. sp. . .
FIwrmacantlM kystrix (Jørg.) Jørg
Peridmm longispinum Jørg
P. muiutum Cl
Chidosceuium trkolpmm (Hck. ?) Jøeg. ...
lUcil/ophiiiins Clevei Jørg
Litliomclissa setosa (Cl.) Jørg
L. hystrix Jørq
Acanthocorys umhellifera Hck
Didyoceras acantldcum JsSrg
D. xiphephorum Jøbo
Clathrocydas craspedota (Jørg.) Jørg. . . .
Sfichocorys seiiata (Jørg.) n. sp
4. Pbæodaria (Tripylea).
Canvosphæra c/eometrica Bohg
Protocystis tridens (Hck.) Borg
P. xiphodon (Hck.) Borg
Challengeron diodon Hck. (C. hcteracaiithum Jørg),
McdiisMa ardfera Jørg
GazellfUa penta podiitm Jørc;
VIL Tintinnodea.
Tirdimms aaiminatus Clap, et Laciim
Ptychoeylis urnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt (a nuijc
Jørg.)
P. u. v. minor Jørg
/'. u. v. suharctica Jørg. n. var
Tintinnopsis nitida Beandt
T. n. v. ovalis Jørg. n. var
Cyttarocylis denticulata (Eheb.) Fol. (a typica Jørij.)
C', d. v. cylindrica Jørg
C. d. v. giyantea (Brandt) Ci
C. d. v. robusta JøE(;
C. d. v. elongnta JøE(i
Dktyocysta templum Hck
D. t. v. disticha JøiKi
r+
>•+
r+
Protistplanktc
Yoiii- 18HS). Jlontli
Dei)tli (meters)
Salinity {"j^)
Temperature (Gels.)
/. Bacillariales.
(Diatomaceæ).
lihizosoletiia semisjiiiia Hens
Biddulphia mobilieims Bail
Chætoceros borealis Bail
C. atlauticHS Cl
C. (kcipieus Cl
C. Schilttii Cl
Actbwajdus Ehrenhergii Ralfs
A. Ralfsii (W. Sm.) Ralps
CoscinodiscHS excentiiais Eheb
C. radiatus Ehrb
C. centralis Ehrb
Hi/alodisctts stelliyer Bail
H. subtilis Bail
ThnlassiothrLf longisshna Cl. et Ghun. .
F. Fraucnfeldii Grun
T. F. V. nifzschiolden (Gri-n.) Jync
PlcHrosiyma teiierum Joeg. n. sp
Surirella lata \\. Sm
CampiiludisrHS Thwctii Breb
C. angtdaris Greg
Striatella MUimndnta (Lyngb.) Ac;
Gh/pkodesiiiis WUIiaiiisnnii (\V. 8m.) Grun.
II. Peridiniales.
(DinofliigeUata).
Diiwphysis acuta Ehrb., Jdrg
D. norvegka Clap, et Lachm. .Jorg. . . .
D. rofundata Clap, et Lachm
I'l/rophanis horologmm Stein
Diplopsalis lenticula Bergh
Peridinium depression Bah
i', oceanicum Vanhof
P. dirrrgeiis Ehrb. (P. lenticidare. (Ehbb.)
J()RG.)
P. conk-um (Gran) Ostekk. et Schm. ...
P. pallidum Ostenf
P. Steinii Jørg
P. ovatum (Pouch.) Schctt )
Ceratium tripos (O. F. Mull.) Nitzsch.
(i halticum Schutt)
J2.C0-
33.87
33.92-
34.62
33.26-
33.58
"A I
33.26—133.26—33.25—
34.69 1 33.37 34.59
0—150 0—100
5 s a s!
0-200 0—300
^2 i Igss
0— 100]0-26O
33.87-
34.40
r+
>■+
r+
!■+
1-+
+C
Year 1899. Month
Deptli (meters)
0—100 0— «60
Salinity ("/oo)
32.00-
33.87
32.60-
33.94
33.25-
34.62
33.25-
34.69
33.26-
33.37
33.42-
35.03
33.30-
33.42
33.37— 33.37—
34.40 34.70
Temperature (Cels.)
1.8-
3.4
2.7— I 9.7-
6.2 6.(
C. hucephalum Cl
C. macroceros EHRri. . . .
C. intermedium Jøeg. . .
C. longipes (Bail.) Cl...
C. furca (Ehhb.) Duj. . .
C. lineatmn (Ehrb.) Cl.
C fiisus (Ehkb.) Ddj. . .
III. Pterosperniataceæ.
Pterosperma Miibii (Jørs.) Ostenp. . .
P. Vanhoffenii (Jørg.) Ostenf
I', dicli/on (Jøro.) Ostenf
IV. Halosphæraceæ.
Hulospliæra viridis Schjiitz (incl. H.
minor Ostenf.)
V. Silicotiagellata.
Bistephanus speculum (Ehrb.) Støiir .
Dictyocha fibula Ehrb
VI. Radiolaria.
I. SpumcIUiriit.
Ecldnomma trinacrium Hck. . . .
C', leptodermum Jøeg
Drymyomma ele.gans Jøro
Chromyomma boreale (Cl.) Jørg.
Rhizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Jøbg. .
Lifhelius minor Jørg
Phortieium pylonium Hck. r, Cl. .
Sorolarcus circumte.rfus Jøkg. . . .
2. Nassellaria.
Playiacantha arachnoides Clap, et Ijac
Campylacantha cladopihora Jørg. n. s
Plectacantha oikiskos Jørg. n. sp....
Phnrmacantha hystrix (Jøro.) Jøro.
Gonosphæra jmmnrdialis Jøro. n. s|i
Ceratospyris hyperborea Jørg. n. sp.
+c
+c
1-+
+c
+c
Protistplankton.
Ibiii). MouUi
Depth (meters)
Salinity ("/qo)
Temperature (Cels.)
I ll
33.a3-
34.62
33.25— 33.26-
34.69 33.37
2.1-1 2.1-
6.7 3 3
33.«-
34.50
February
0—200 0—300
33.42-
35.o;
33.30—
33.42
2.7—
6.2
) 0— 260
33.37—
34.70
2.7 —
6.6
Peridium longispimtm Jøro
Eusceniuin corpiephonim Jørg
Cladosceiiium tricolpmm (Hck.?) Jøro..
Behtluihis histrkosn Jøro. n. s])
Duti/oplnmus Clevci .Jørg
Lithomelissa sefosa (Ci,.) Jorg
L. Iii/strix Jørg
Acanthocorys umbellifera Hck
Dktyoteras xiphephorum Jøkg
CMhrocyclas crnspedota (Jørg.) Jørg. . .
Aiidrocyclas gamphonycha (Jørg.) Jørg..
3. Phæodaria (Tripjrlea).
Caiuwspliæra geonietrica Borg
Pi-ofocystis xiphodon (Hck.) Borg
P. Harstoni (Mcrray) Borg
P. tridens (Hck.) Borg
Challengeron diodon Hck. (C. heteracan-
thum JØRG
Gazelktta pentapodium Jøeg
VII. Tintinuodea.
T'mtlnnus acumivatim Clap, et Lachji. .
T. a. V. umdnta Jørg
Amphm-ella ampla Joeg
Ptychocylis wnula (Clap, et Laciim.J
Brandt a major Jørg
P. u. V. minor Jørg
P. ti. V. subaretica Jørg. 11. var
Tintinnopsis nitida Brandt
Cyltarocylis denticulata (Ehrb ) Fol. . . .
C. d. V. cylindrica Jørg
C. d. V. gigantea (Brandt) Cl
C. d. V. elongata Jøro
C. d. V. snbiotundata Jørg
Didyocysta templum Hck. c. disticha
Jørg
I'ltdelln cuudafa (Osteni'.) Ci
>■+
r+
Year 18H9. Month
Locality
Date
Depth (meters)
Salinity (O'qo)
Temperature (Cels.)
I. BacillarialeS'
(Diatomaceæ).
Bhizfisoknia styliformis Bright w
BithMpUa mirita (Lysob.) Beéb
B. mobiliensis Bail
Chætoceros bor talis Bail
C', convoltchm Caste
C. (lecipims Cl
C. contortus SchCtt
Ditylium Brighhvellii (West) Grdn
Tlialassiosira grai'ida Cl
Coscinosira polycliorda (Gran) CJran
Adinocyclus Ehrmibergii Ralfs
Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehrb
C. decipiens Gkun
C. Uneatiis Ehrb. var
C', stellaris Eop
C', radiatus lOimn
C', centralis Ehrd
C'. co)iciniius W. Sm
C'. snhhiiUietis Jpro. n. sp
Ili/alodiscus stdUyvr Bail
Tlinlassiothrix longissima Cl. et Grux. . .
r. Frauenfeldi Grun
r. 2''. V. vitzschioides (Grun.) J øko
T. F. V. »i. forma airvata (Castr.) Jprg.
Asterionella Bkakdeyi W. Sm
j4!«'tc«to compilexa (Greg) De T
Plcuroslgma feiicniiii. .lnKfi. n. sp
Paralia sulcata (lOiiui;.) Cj.
Aclinoptyckus nndulatus (Bah,.?) Halfs..
Surirella lata W. Sm
Campylodiscus Thurelii Bréb
C', angxilaris Greg
lilKihdoncma arcuatmii (Lvxgb.) Kutz....
//. Pcrulininles.
Il)m„lhiii,-Unta).
Dinophiiais acuta Euiiii., .li)U(i
I>. riorvcglca Clap, et liACiiM., Jøkg
1>. rotrmdafa Clap, et Lachm
&= H'
S ^ = 3
^te
I S'
300-
.350
0—20010—630
33.50-
35.03
300-
350
200-
250
34.89-
34.96
0—100 0—100
33.18-
33.25
33.30-
34.01
200—
300
34.70— II33.37-
34.82 ,i 33.4:
500-
550
33.61-
33.56
33.01-
3o.of
>■+
ProtiRtplankton.
Year 1899. Month
Locality
Date
Depili (metevs)
Salinity (» ,„)
Temperature (Cels.)
Pip-nphacus horologium Stein
Di/jlnpsalis Imfkida 13ekgh
PeiiiUniitm dejremtm Bail
P. oceanintm Vaxhøf
P. diverges Khrb. (P. lai'iciihi (KiiKU.) Jonc;
P. cnmawi (Gran) Osten f. et Scum
P. paliidum Ostexf
P. Steinii Jørg
P. oratitm (Poich.) Schctt
Ceratium tripos (0. F. MCli,.) Xitzsch. (a hnlt-
aim ScHi'TT)
C. bucejilialmi Ci
C. maavceros Ehbb
C. iiifermeditim (.)(>rg.)
C. hnijipes (Bail.) Cl
C. /inert (Khrb.) l)ij
C. lineatum (Ehrb.) Cl
C. fxisus (EuRB.) Dim
///. Pterosperiiiataceæ.
Plerosperim Mlibii (Jøno.) Ostenf
P. Vanhoffeni (Jørg.) Ostenf
P. dictyon (Joro ) Ostenf
IV. Halosphæraceæ.
JTnlospliana viridin Schmitz (incl. H. miiw
Ostenf.)
V. SilicoHa^ielhitn.
Distephamts spetnhim ( Khrb.) Stohk
Diitijorha fibula Ehrb
VI. liadiohiria.
1. Spuinellaria.
Hrjaconliiim cnthmanthxim Jørg
H. pachydermnm Jøkg
Eddnomma triiincrium Hck
E. lepiodermttm Jørg
Drymijomma eleyans Jørg
CItrnmyomma hmnk (Cl.) Jør<;
0— 2U0;0— 6au,|«— I OIJ
I
33.60- (33.60— 1 33..10-
35.03 35.14 34.08
+c
rh
up— I
2.6— 2.6-
6.4
+c
v+
>•+
m m
lU" 'oxri U— 40 1)— |IJO«— irjoi
III
+c
34.81
1.5—
ti
II
•o
" 2
»/.
550
0-60
0-260
■..-.,14
33.<.i-
33.M
33.ei-
35.08
U.S I U.a II 4.8
II ^•'' I •' II
+c
+0
1 ''
••+
+
+c
>■+
c
c
' +
+c
+c
+
+
+
r+
H-
+c
r+
+
c
+1=
c
r
+
c
c
c
+
c
+
+
+c
r
'•+
+
cc
cc
cc
+
c
+
f+
+
••
r
>■
c
c
^
+c
+c
-H
E. Jørgensen.
Year 1H99. Month
5S S
■SI'S
Depth (meters)
300-
350
Salinity {%,(,)
33.30-
34.08
33.30-
34.21
34,89-
34.96
Temperature (Cels.)
2.5—
2.8
1500—
550
33.18-
33.26
33.25-
33.37
- 33.37 —
33.42
33.61—
35.08
Rliizoplegtna boreale (Cl.) Jøro
Lithelkis minor Jørg
Phorticium pyloniwn Hck.? Cl
Sorolarcus circumtexfus Jørg
2. Nassellaria.
Plagiacantha arachnoides Clap, et Lachm
Camjnjlacantha cladophora Jørg. n. sp
PlecfManffia oikiskos Jørg. n. sp
Phormacantlia hystrix (Jørg.) Jørg
Gonosphæra primordialis Jørg. n. sp
Peridium longispinum Jørg
Cladoscenium trimlpium (Hck.)? Jørg
Hdotholus histrkosa Jørg. n. sp
Dktyophimiis Clevei Jørg
Lithomelissa setosa (Cl.) Jørg
Dictyoceras onpliephormn Jørg
Clathrocyrlas a-aspedofa (Jørg.) Jørg
Androcyclas gamphonycha (Jørg.) Jørg
A. amUycephalis (Jørg.) Jørg
Stichocorys scriaia (Jørg.) Jørg
3. Phæodaria (Tripylea).
Protoeysiis onphodon (Hck.) Borg
P. Harstoni (Murray) Borg
P. tridens (Hck.) Boro
Challcngeron diodon Hck. (C. Jietcracmithum
Jørg.)
Medusetta arcifcra J org :
VII. Tintinnodea.
Tintinnus acuminatus Clap, et Jjachm
Lcprotintinnus pellueulns (Cl.) Jørg
Plychocylis xirnula (Clap, et Ijaciim.) Brandt
a major Jørg
P. u. V. minor Jørg
P. u. V. digitalis Auriv
P. u. V. siibarctica Jørg. n. var
Tintinnopsis nitida Brandt
Cyttarocylis denticulata (Ehrb.) Fol
C. d. V. elongata Jørg
C. d. V. subrotundata Jorg
C d. V. siibedenfata Jørg. n. var
TJndella caudata (Ostenp.) ('i
+c
+c
>■+
+c
+c
I ..
r+
r+
Protistplankton.
Yenv 18S9. Month
February
- i ■*
tm
-'■hj
Depth (meters)
0-80
8alinity C',
33.00-
33.74
0-275 0—100
33.56-
34.42
"/«
34.94-
35.0S
0-200 0—300
33.48-
34.10
^%
33.48-
34.89
133.52 ,
I 34.02 I
34.06-
34.21
33.80—
34.97
33.10-
33.48
Temperature (Gels.)
2.8-
6.6
/. Bacillariales.
( D'tat.muceo?).
B'uhhdphia aurita (Lyxgb.) Bréb
B. nwbiliaisis Bail
Chætoceros borealis Bail
C. atlantiais Cl
C. (lecij'iens Cl
C. debilis Cl
Thalassiosira grarida ('l
Coscinosira pnhjchorda (Gran) Gran
Actinocyclus Ehrenhcrgi Ealfs
Roperia tessdlata (Rop.) Grix
Coschwdisais e.rcnitricus Ehrb
C. lineatuii Ehrh. v.-u-
C. stellniis Eoi'
C. radkdus Ehrb
C. subbldticns Jprg. n. sp
C. centralis Ehrb
C', coiieiiinns W. Sm
Hi/alodiscus stelliger Bail
Tlialassiothrix longissima Cl. et Gritn
T. Fratienfelnii Grun. v. vitzschioides (Grcn.)
J0RG
Plciirosigma kneritm Jorg. n. sp
Acfiiwpfgchus undxdntus (Bail.?) Ealfs
Ski irella lata W. Sm
Campglodiscus Ihuretii Bréb
C. angidaris Greg
Grammatophora oceanicn Ehrb
Rhabdonema arcKatum (Lyngb.) Kctz
Auliscus sculptus (W. Sm.) Ralfs
//. Peridiniales.
(Dinofiagdlat(i).
Dinophysis acuta Ehrb., Jørg
D. norvegica Clap, et Lachm., Jørg
D. rotundata Clap, et Lachm
D. r. V. lævis (Clap, et Lachm.) Jørg
Diplopsalis lenticida Bergh
Peridinium depresswn Bail
F. oceanicwn Va.nhof
P. dire>-gens Ehrb. (P. kntindare (Ehrb.) Jørg.)
r+
!•+
Year 18a9. Month
F,d.ruary
March
Locality
^ ". X - .,
p
= i £ "H
IIP
ill
IP
|ll
iii'ifji' ij
Date
-.. II ^^k
'"/2
'"/s 1 ^Vo "A.
18/j,
18/^
'«/2
-/. i, -/.
^'3 1 ^/3 ,; ^,3 ^/3 1 "Vs
Depth (meters)
0-80 i 0-30
11 1
0-275
„ 250-1550-
"^^""l 3.50 1 620
0-50
0-200
0-3OO 0-85 p-250
'l
0-50 0-20010-100
0-50 0—150
Salinity ("/oo)
33,56 -J33.5.,—
.33 74 1 33.42 .
-53.23-
.34,19 j
34.94-
35.08
35.08
1
33,48 —
34.10
33.48—
34,89
33.5.-I
34.02
33.52—
35.03
34.06-
34.21
33.80—
34.97 j
33.16-33.54—
33.48 j! 33.61
33.64—
34.70
Temperatm-e (Cels.)
H7,--
6.4 ' (15
2.7—
6.1
6.4
1
2.0- [ 2.6—
4.2 [^ 6.6
3,9-!
4.3 1
2.8-
6.6 1
2.0— ,1 2.1-
2.7 il 2.5
2.1—
6.7
Peridmium conicum (Gran) Ostenf. et Schm. .
..
r
+
,.
+c
+
,,
■■
,.
..
r
+
IT
+1-
r
r
,.
J.
^
+
J.
1-+
J.
i-f
,.
Ceraiium tripos (O.P. Mull.) Nitzsch. (a halticum
SCHTJTT.)
0
+c
c
c .
+
r
+
c
CO
c
c
c
c
c
C. bucephalum (Cl.) Cl
c
c
c
c
+
1-
+
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
C. maa-oceros (Ehrb.) Cl
+c
+
r
+c
+
+
+
+
c
0
c
c
+
c
+
+1-
c
r
+c
-|-
4-
c
+
c
c
c
c
c
C. Imigipes (Bail,) Cl
+c
c
v+
r
+
c
c
J.
+
+
+c
-j-c
+
+
+
+
+0
^
+0
+c
C'. Unentum (Ehre,) Cl
1-
J,
+
^
+c
c
p
J.
^
III. Pterospermataceæ.
Pterospenyia MiMi (.Jørg.) Ostenf
v+
r
r
r
r
r
r
1^+
r+
r
1-
P. Vanhnffeni (Jørg.) Ostenf
>•+
'■+
r
r
r
r
r+
+
r+
!•+
+
1'+
+
+
r+
r
r
r+
1+
+
c
C
c
IV. Halosphæraceæ.
Hahisphæra ririili'i Schmit/. (incl. If. iiiinnr
+
+
+
+c
+
V. Silicoffagellata.
VI. RadioJaria.
X. Spiimellaria.
Ilcracontium enthmnnthum JøiiO
r
Kchinomma trinacrmm Hck
..
rr
V
E. leptodermum Jørg
v
r
r
r
r
r
Litheliits minor Jørg
'■
r
V
Phortieium pylonium Hck.v, Cl
r
I-
1 ..
r
Protistplankton.
Year 1899. Month
Depth (meters)
Salinity («/oo)
Temperature (Cels.)
0—80
33.66-
33.42
s .?! i g
34.04-
35.08
33.48-
34.16
33.48-
34.8»
33.62-
34.02
i; .- J > -, J I
34.06-
34.21
0-200 0-100
33.80—
34.07
2.8—
6.6
33.16-
33.48
2i-
6.7
2. Acantharia,
liadiospha-ra anacanthica Jwhg. n. sp
3. Nassellaria.
riayiacantha avachnohks Clap, et Lachm
Campylacantha claAophora Jørc n. sp
Plcdacantha oikiskos Jwrg. u. sp
Plwrmacnntha hyslrix (Jøro.) Jorc.
GonosplKera priniordialis Jørg. u. sp
Fn-idium longispi7ium Jørg
Cladoscenium trkolpium (Hck. ?) Jørg
Helofholus histricnsa Jørg. n. sp
Didijophhnus Clevei Jørg
J), histricosus Jørg. n. sp
Lilliomelissa setosa (Cl.) Jøeg
Dicfi/oceras acanthicum Jørg
Clallirori/rlas cnnijicdoia (Jørg.) Jørg
Andniei/rliis ijniiiplioin/cha (Jørg.) Jørg
A. amhhjaphdis (.Ji)RG.) Jørg
Sfkhocnrt/s serinfa (Jørg.) .Jorg
4. PhsL'odaria (Tripylea).
Cnniwsplwm hpta Jorg
Protncijstis xiihndnn (Hck.) Borg
r. Harstoni (Mlrray) Borg
P. tridexs (Hck.) Borg
ChaUoiqeron diodonHcK.(C hetcyacaiitlinm Jøiii; )
VII. Tintinnodea.
7i:itinmis aaimbiahis Clap, et Lachm
Ptijchocijlis urnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt
V. minor Jørg.)
Tiiitimiopsis nitihi Brandt
Codonella lagenxda (Clap, et Lachm.) Entz. v.
(ivata Jørg
Cijttarocylis deniiadnta (Ehrb.) Fol
C d. a fi/pirn JpRG
('. d. V. ryUiidrica Jøhg
C. d. V. elovgata Jørg
C. d. V. sicbrofundata Jorg
LHctyncysta femplum Hck. v. disfichn Johg. . .
T^ndeUn candafn (Ostenf ) Cl
Year 1899 Month
PI
■ s-^
^'/3
Depth (meters)
0—200 0—140
300—
200
0—170 0—100
Sahnity C/oq)
33.54-
34.53
33.21-
33.59
Temperature (Cels.)
I. Bacillariales.
(Diatomaeeæj.
Chætocerus borcalls Bail
C. denms (Cl.) Cl
C. atlant uiis Cl
C. decijiiens Cl
C. contortus Schutt
Dityliim Brighticellii (West.) Grun
Act'mocyclus Ehrenbergii Ealfs
Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehrb
C curvatulus Ubun
C', stellaris Rop
C. radiatus Ehrb
C. sitbhidliens Jørg
C. cent) alts Ehrb
Euodia gihha Bail
Hyalodiscus stelliyer Bail
Tlmlassiothrix Fiauevfeldii Grun. v. mtzschiokles (Grun.)
Jørg
Fleurnsiyma tnrcrum .Jorg. n. sp
Faralin sulcata (Ehrb.) Cl
Actinoptychus uiidtdatns (Bail. ?) Ealfs .
Campylodiscus Tliuretu Buéb
C. avgularis Gheo
Rhabdonema minutum KiJTZ
Striatella umpunctata (Lyngb.) Ag
Anlisnis sndptus (W. 8m.) Ralfs
II. Peridiniales.
(D'moficujdlata).
THnophysis acuta Khrb., Joro
r>. iiiiyn'iiira (;lap. et Lachm., Jøkq
II. roUitidala Clap, et Laohm
I'y) ophacus horologiiim Stei.n
Gonyaulax spinifera (Clap, et Lachm.) Dies
JJiploi salis le.nticula Bbrgh
Peridinium depressum Bail
i', oceanicum Vanhof
FeridhiiuiH divergens Ehrb. (P. lentkulare (Ehrb.) Jørg.)
P. conicum (Gran) Ostenf. et Schm
+ 0
33.21-
33.35
32.95-
33.33
33.41-
33.84
+ 0
••+
67
Year 1899. Montli
Date
Depth (meters)
Salinity Coo'
Temperature (Cels.)
P. pallidum Ostekp
P. Steiyiii Jørg
P. ovatum (Pouch.) Schott
Ceratium tripos {O.F.JivLh.)'Snzscn. (a halticum Schutt.)
C. bucephalnm Cl
C', niacroceros Ehrb
C. intermedium (Jørg.)
C. longipes (Bail.) Cl
C. arcticum (Ehrb.) Cl
C. furca (Ehrb.) Dr.!
C. liueatum (Eurb.) Ci
t', fusus (Ehrb.) D[;j
III. Pterospermataceæ.
Ptcrosperma Miibii (Jørg.) Ostenf
i'. Vanhii/fcni (Jørg.) Ostenf
P. dictyon (Jørg.) Ostenf
IV. Halosphæraceæ.
Hnln.tjihæva vhidis Schmitz (iiicl. H. minor Ostenf.) .
V. SilicoSagellata.
Distephamis spcndum (Eurb.) Støhr
Dictyocliti fibula Ehrb
VI. Radiolaria.
I. Spumellaria.
Hexacontium entliacaiithum Jørg
H. pachydermum Jørg
Echinomma leptodermum Jørg
Chromyomma boreale (Cl ) Jørg
Rhizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Joro
Stylodictya validispina Jørg. n. sp
S. aculeafa Jørg. u. sp
S. tenuispina Jørg. n. sp
Spoiigodiscus famis Ehrb .*. .
Lithelius minor Jørg
Phorticium pylonium HcK. * Cl
^'/a
0—200 0—140
33.54-
34.53
33.21-
33.59
32.54-
33.10
0-50
33.41-
600—
500
0—280 0—170 C
2.1—
6.2
1.7—
6.66
3.2-
6.8
>■+
r+
+c
+<:
r+
+c
+c
r+
Jørgensen.
Year 1899. Month
Depth (meter.s)
Salinity ("/qo)
Temperature (Cels.)
0—200 0—140
33.21-
33.59
33.21-
33.35
32.54- 32.95-
33.10 33.33
33.41-
33.84
^Va i
'-Is
'%
300—
200
35.00 -
i34.io-
35.oe
35.00
35.00-
35.00
1.7—
6.65
3.2—
6.8
2. Nassellaria.
Plagiacantha arachnoides Clap, et Lachm.
CampylacantM dadopliora Jørg. n. .sp. . .
Flectacantha oikiskos Jørg. n. sp
Phonnacantha hystnx (Jørg.) Jørg
llictyocii-cus dathrahis Jørg. n sp
Feridium longispinum Jørg
Euscenmm corynepkorum Jørg
Cladoscenium tricolpium (IIck.?) Jørg. . . .
Helotholiis histricosa Jørg. n. sp
Dicfyophinms Clevei Jørg
Lithomelissa setosn (Cl.) Jørg
L. hystrix Jøeg
Dktyoceras xipliepliomm Jørg
Claflirocyclas craspcdota (Jørg.) Jørg. . . .
Androcyrlas (i<iwphomjclia (Jørg.) Jørg...
A. amhhjcephalh (Jørg.) Jørg
Stichocorys seriata (Jørg.) Jørg
3. Phæodaria (Tripylea).
Protocystis xijjhodon (Hck.) Borg
P. Harstoni (Murray) Borg
P. tridens (Hck.) Boro
Cliallmgeron diodon Hck. (C. hetcracanthum Jørg.) .
Gazelleita pentapodium Jørg
■Cad'mm mdo (Cl.) Borg
VII. Tiutinnodea.
7'iiiliiitnis acuminatuH Clap, et Lachm
I.eprotbttinmts pelluddas (Cl.) Jørg
Ptydiocylis tinmla (Clap, et Lachm.) Bkamdt a nirijor Jørn
P. u. V. minor Jørg
P. u. l', digitalis Alriv
Thitbmopsis nitida Brandt
Ci/ftarocylis deritiadata (Ehrb.) Ful
€. d. V. cyliwh ica Jørg
C. d. V. gigantea (Brandt) Cl
C. d. V. elongata Jøro
€'. d. V. subrotundaia Jørg
C. d. V. suhedeiitata Jørg. n. var
jyicfynryxt/i fcmiiJum Hck. v. disl'tdin .Iorg
!■+
Protistplnnkton.
Year 1899. Montli,
April
°1^
'SI,
Depth (meters)
Salinity («oo)
Temperature (Cels.)
0—700 0-100
34.42-
34.00
33.68-
34.84
33.66-
34.64
33.05—
35.11
33.72-
34.92
0.75—
5.5
1.1—
6.6
/. Bacillnriales
(Diatomaceæ).
Bacterosira f'im/ilis (GRA^) Gran
Uhizosolenm obtitsa Hexs
Biddulphia awita (Lyngb.) Bréb
Cluetoceros boreaUs Bail
C. deitsus (Cl.) Ci,
C. daniais Cl
C. convohifHS Castr
C. atlanticus Cl
C. decipiais Cl
C. teres Ci
C. laciniosus Schutt
C. breris SchCtt
C'. Millei Gran
C. diadema (Ehrb.) Gran
C. debilis Cl
C. socialis Laitd
C. furceUntm Bail
Ditylium Brightwellii (West) Grun
Scdetonema costatnm (Grev.) Cl
Thalasaioshn Xordeiiskjoldii Ci
T. (ji avida ('l
T. hi/alina (Grun.) Gran
T. gclatinosa Hens
Porosirn glacialis (Grun.)
Coscinnsira poli/chorda (Gran) Gran
Actinocychis Eliroibergii Kalfs
Cosdnodiscus excentricits Ehrb
C. airrattdus Grun
C. stellar'is Rop
C. radiatus Ehrb
C. subbtdlievs Jørg
C. octdus iridis Ehrb
C centralis Ehrb
C concinnus W. Sm
Mtodia gihba Bail
Hijalodiscus stelliger Bail
Nitzschia seriata Cl
X. lanceolata W. Sm
N. delicatissinm Cl
X. longissima (Bréb.) Balfs
Thalmsinthrix Franaifddxi Gri'S
+c
+c
+c
+c
+c
+c
r+
+c
+c
E. Jørgensen.
1899. Month
1#
II
^"/a
Vi */4
Deptli (meters)
0—700 0—100 (
300-
200
0—3 ,0—1.50
34.42-
34.eo
.33.!
35.11 34.64
Temperature (Cels.)
83.72-
34.92
1.66 —
5.76
Thalassiothrix Frauenfihlu ! int-S(hwiihi (Giu n ) Jouo
Fragilaria oceanica Cl.
F. cylindrus Grun. ...
Navicula septentrionalis Ofstr
A'. Vaiiho/frui Gran . .
jN'. pdagica Cl
N. direcfa W. Sm. . . .
y. kwiana Grun
Adinoptychus undulatm (BmlO R
Auliscus sculptus (W. Sm ) Rvlfs
Campylodiscus angidarh Gun.
Grammatophora oceania >hkh
Rhabdonenia minnium Kit/
Ætzschia spathulata Bum
K. bilohata W. Sm. . . .
X. Closterium W. Sm.
Glyphodesmis Williamtojiu (\\ S-
Cocconeis scutellum Ehrh
C. costnia Greq
Pleurosigma Xormanni JUips
P. fasciola W. Sm. ...
Schizonenia Gn villei Ai,
Pinmdaria quadratarea \ '^c IIM
II. Pcrulinialef.
( Dniofliiijdiatn)
Dinophysis acuta Ehri! , Iprc,
Diplopsalis lenticula BuK.ir
Peridinium depressum li\ii
P. oceaincum Vanhof.
P. divergens Ehrb. (P lenhculmi (I iirh ) Ji)R( )
P. pallidum Ostenf. .
P. Steinii JøRO
P. omtwn (Pouch.) S( hltf
Ceratium tripos (0. F, Mi 1 1 ) Nn/<-(n (a halticum *>tni tt)
C', bucephalum (Cl.) Ci
C. macroceros (Ehrb.) ( l
C. intermedium (Jørg,)
C. longipes (Bail.) Cl
C. furca (Ehrh.) Duj.
C. fusus (J]hrb.) Duj
r+
+c
+0
r+
+c
Protistplankton.
Yeai' IS»!). JlontI»
it a n
''■tit
Deptli (meters)
0—7000—100
34.<2-
34.00
33.68— .33.06—
35.11 I 34.51
38.72—
34.92
Temperature (Cels.)
1.55—
5.76
///. Ptcrospermntiiceæ.
Pttrosperma Mobii (Jøro.) Oste.sp
P. Vanhiiffem (Jøro.) Ostesf
P. dklipn (.lORO.) OsTEXi-
IV. Halosphæraceæ.
Halosphæra vhidis Sch.mitz (incl. H. mitinr Ostenf.)
V. Flagellata.
Plueocystis Pimrhefi (Hah.) Lagerh
VI. Silicotiagellata.
Dixtephaimn speculum (Eurb.) Støhr
Gymnaster pentashrias (Khrb.) Schi'tt
VII. Radiolaria.
1. Spumellaria.
Hi'-racnntium entlincanthum Jørg
H. pnchydermum Jørg
Echinomma trinacrium Hck
E. leptodermum Jørg
Drymynmnm elegavs JORO
Chromyomma boreale (Cl.) .Jørg
Eliizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Jørg
Litlielius minor Jørg
Phorticium pylomum Hck. ?, Ci,
Snrolarciis circwntextus Jørg
2. Nassfllaria.
Plagktrnniha arachnoides Clap, et Lachm
Campylacanfha cladoplwra Jørg. n. sp
Pledacantha oikiskns Jørg. n. sp
Phormacantha hystrix (Jørg ) Jørg
Gonosphæra primnrdialis Jørg. n. .sp
Perulium longispinum Jørg
Ensceninm corynephnrum Jørg
Cladoscenium tricolpium (Hck.?) Jørg
r+
+c
E. Jørgensen.
Year 1899. Month
Locality
Date
Depth (meters)
Salinity ("'(„)
Temperature (Cels.)
Helotholvs histricosa Jørg. n. sp
Lifharachnmm tentorium Hck
Didyopliimiis Clevci Jørg
Lithomelissa setosa (Cl.) Jørg
L. hystrix Jørg
Didyoceras acanthicum Jø rg
D. xipliepliorum Jørg
Ciuthrocyclas craspedota (Jørg.) Jørg
Androcydas gamphonydia (Jørg.) Jørg
A. amblycephaUs (Jørg.) Jørg
Stidiocorys senata (Jøro.) Jøbg
J. Phæodaria (Tripylea).
Cunnosphæra lepta Jørg
Protocysds xiphodon (Hck.) Borg
I'. Harstoni (Murray) Borg
P. tridens (Hck.) Borg
Challengero^i diodon Hck. (C- hetcracantlmm Jørg.)
VIII. Tintinnodea.
Ptydtocylis wnula (Cl.\p. et Lachm.) Brandt ....
Cyttarocylis denticulata (Ehrb ) Fol
C. d. v. elongata Jørg
C. d. v. subrotundata Jørg
'''. d. v. subedentata Jørg
Undella caudata Ostenf
^V3
0—100 0—400
300-
200
0
33.63
33.68-
34.54
33.68-
3.5.11
33.65— |3.B.65
34.54 35.1
33.72-
34.92
0.75-
6.3
1.56— 1.55-
5.76 6.3
Pnifistplanktdi).
Yerti- IHMH. Month
Deptli (iiieteis)
SHlinity C/oo)
Temperal ure (Gels.)
/. BiiciUariales
(Dintomaccæ).
Bacteiosdra fmgilis (Gran) (Iran
Corethron hystri.r Hens
lihiznsnleiiia nlata Brigiitw
R. ShrubsoU Cl
7i*. setigera Brightw
Bidditlphin nurita (Lyngh.) Bréb
Chn'toceros liorealis Bail
C. (lensus (Cl.) Cl
('. cottrnhitun Castr
C. atlanticiis ('l
C. decipiena Cr
('. teres Cl
('. conlorhis Schutt
r. similin Cl
(\ lacimosim SchCtt
a WiUei Gran
('. lUndemn (Eiirr.) Gran
('. debilin Cl
C. socitdis Laid
C'. furceUutMs Bail
Difi/lium Bnyhlwellii (West) Grcn
Srcletnnema cosfafum (Grev.) Cl
Thtda.ssiosira Xm detiskjiildii Cl
r. qreiridn Cl
T. lii/alina (Ghln ) Gran
T. ijclntinom Hens
Coscinosira polydwrda (Gran) Gran
Pmosira glacmlis (Grun.)
Actinocychis Khrenhergii Ralps
CoscinodiscHs ejccenfyicus Ehub
C. cuirrifulus Grin
C. radiatiis Khrb
C. suhbullims Jørb. n. sp
C. centralis Ehrb
r', conciiimm W. Sm
C. bioeiUntus Grcn
Hi/alodixcus sfiiliger Kail
Xifzuchifi iv) iafn Cl
N. di'UinfisniiiKt Cl
J\' loiigissim^i (Bréb ) Ralks
34.17-
34.86
2å$
0-250 0—100
'%
1.6-^
2.15
33.08-
U.67
+c
+f
+c
(34.67)
(4.1)
+<:
må
5l|3
+c
34.21-
34.29
0.86-
1.0
34.86-
34.86
0.80—
1.4
E. Joriieiisen.
Locality
Date
Depth (meters)
Salinity (O/æ)
Temperature (Gels.)
Thalassiothrix Fraiienfeldii Grdn
T. F. V. vitzschioides (Gron.) Jørg. f. currata (Gastr.) Jørg.
Fragilaria oceanica Ql
F. cylindrits Grdn
Achnanthes tosniala Grun
Navicida septentrioi alts (Oestr.) Cl
N. Vanhbffmi Gean
N. pelayica Cl
N. kariana Grun
N. direda W. Sm
Actinojitijchus undulafus (Bail.?) Ealps
Mtzschia Closterium W. Sm
Ch-ammatopliora oceanica Ehrb
Rhahdnnema arcuatmn (Lvnob.) Kutz
Pleurosiqma fasciola W. Sm
//. Peridiniales.
(Dinofiagellata).
Dinnphi/sis acuta Eiirb., Jørg
Gonijdidii.r siiiiiifrni (Clai'. et Lachm.) Dies
Peridhiiiiiii fl,'j,i . ,-Mo» Bail
P. divciqiiifi Euiiii. (P. leniiailare (Eurb.) Jørg.)
P. pallidum OsTENF
P. (jlohulns Stein
P. omtnm (Pouch.) Schutt
P. Steinii JØRG
Ceratium tripos (0. F. Mull.) Nitzsch. (a halticum Schott) .
C. bucejihal'um (Cl.) Cl
C. maa-oceros Ehrb. (Cl.)
C', longipes (Bail.) Cl
C', fm ca (Ehrb.) Duj
C'. fusuK (Eurb.) Du.i
///. Pterospermataceæ.
Plernnperma Miibii (Jøro.) Ostenf
P. Vanhrijfeni (Jørq.) Ostenf
P. dicti/on (Jørg.) Ostenf
IV. Halosphæraceæ.
Halonphæra viridis Schmitz (incl. H. minor Ostenf.)
^s-a^:
"/4 ."/4
'^U
0—3 0—250 0—100
"/4
2%
200—
300
34.17 -
34 se
33.96—
34.67
34.21-
34.29
34.36-
34.36
34.60—
34.49
1.05—
1.2
1.96—
2.2
+c
v+
+c
r+
!•+
r+
Year 1899. Mon I li
Depth (meters)
Salinity (0/^)
Temperature (Cels.)
April
»/4
0—250 0—100
34.17-
34.86
33.90-
34.67
"/«
34.60-
34.97
(34.67)
(4.1)
34 21-
34.29
34.29-
34.85
34 86— 34.60—
34.36 34.*9
1.05— 1.95—
1.2 2.2
V. Flagellatii.
riiæoci/stis Pottchiti (Har.) Lagekh
VI. SilicoBagellHta.
Disfephamis speaihtiu (Khrb.) Stphr
Dktyocha fibula Eubb
VII. Radiolaria.
1. Spumellaria.
Echinomma leptodcnimni .Torg
2. Aassellaria.
Campijlacantha clnilophora Jokg. n. sp
Fhormacantha hystrix (Jøhg.) Jøro
Peridium kmgispinum Jøkg
Lifhnmelissa setom (Cl.) Jørg
VIII. Tintinnodea.
TiiifituiHs anoHinatus C'L.iP. et Lachm
TinlinnnpsiK nUiilii Braxdt
Ci/ttiniii-i/lis ili'iiliii Ifita (Ehrb.) Fol. v. xHlicdcvfata .Ior
Year 1899. Mouth
May
I >^ s
Depth (meters)
200—
100
0—200 0—100
Salinity ("/oo)
Temperature (Cels.)
34.86-
35.18
34.86-
3.5.
34.60—
34.67
34.48-
34.60
34.72-
34.66
34.17-
34.3(
34.17—
34.47
134.17-
34.84
33.73—
34.84
3.2—
3.46
1 .OS-
LO
0.20-
0.95
6.15
/. Bacillariales.
(Diutomacece).
Baderosira fragilis (Gean) Gran
Rhizosolenin alata Beightw
R. obtusa Hens
B. semispina Hens
Bidihilphia aurita (Lyngb.) Bréb
Eucnmpia groenlandica Cl
Chætoieros boreaUs Bail
C. crinphUuti Castr
C. convohitus Castr
C. atlanticus Cl
C. decipiens Cl
C', teres Cl
C cnnfortus SchStt
C', mriatridus Gran
C. Indninsus Schutt
C. diadema (Eheb.) Gran
C. scolopendra Cl
C. debilis Cl
C. sociahs IjAud
C. furcellatiis Bail
niii/!hiii, r,rhihf>rdr,i (west.) grun
S<rlrlniini,„ ,<,sl,ifnin (GrEV.) Cl
Thalassinsira. .\nnlniskjoldii Cl
T. gravida Cl
T. hgalina (Grun.) Gran
T. gclatinosa Hens
Coscinosira polychorda ((Jran) Gran
I'oroshii uhidaViK (GuuN.)
Adiiiiiniihis Khrndieryii Ralks
Cosciiiodim:ii>; ladiiitus Eiirb
C. centralis Ehrb
C cnndnnus W. Sm
C. bioadatus Geun
Nitzsdda seriata Cl
N. delicatissima Cl
N. friyida Grun
jV. lonyissima (Bréb.) Ralfs
Thalassiothrix longissima Cl. et Grun
T. FraxieftfeMii Geun
Fragilaria oceanica Ct
F. cylindrus Grdn
r+
+c
v+
+c
+c
+c
-fc
cc
+
+c
r+
Piotistplankton.
Date
Depth (meters)
Salinity («/qo)
Temperature (Cels.)
Achna)ifhes Iwniata GRfx
Pleurasigma tninitm Jøro. n. sp
Naricula septenfrioiinlis Oestr
N. Vanhbfftni Grax
K. pelagka Cl
X kartana Gkux
ActiiiopUjchus nndulatus (Bail. ?) Ralfs
Pletirosigma fasciola W. Sm. (incl. P. tetmirostris Grun.)
Bhoicomgnia artticu))! Cl
II. Peridiniales.
(DinoflageUata).
Diiiojiligsis acuta I^urb., JOrg
D. ttorcegica Clap, et Lachm., Jorg
D. rotundata Clap, et Lachm
Pa^idhnum depressum Bail
P. diingens Ehrb. {P. ienticulare (Ehkb.) Jdrg.)
P. pallidum OsTENF
P. ovatum (Pouch.) Schctt
P. Steinii Jørg
Ceratiutn Inicephahim (Cl.) Cl
C. tripos (0. F. MiJLL.) Nitzsch. (a hnltuum Schdtt.) ..
C. macroceros (Ehrb.) Cl
C. lonyipes (Bail.) Cl
C. furca (Ehrb.) Duj
C. fusus (Ehrb.) Dij
///. Pterosperinataceæ.
Pterospenita Vanhii/fhii (Jørg.) Ostexk
P. dictyon (Jørg.) Ostenf
IV. Halosphæraceæ.
Salosphæra viridis Schmitz (incl. H. itibinr Ostenf.) . . . .
V. Flagellata.
Phæocystis Foucheti (Har.) Lagerh
April
200—
100
0—200 10— 100 0—260 0
34.60-
34.67
34.48-
34.60
34.72—
34.gs
34.17-
34.30
34.17— 134.17-
34.47 34.84
1.06 —
1.0
0.20-
0.96
2.0-
2.26
1.7-
2.3
1-+
E. Jorgenspn.
Year 1899. Month
April
May
Locality
1
ti
1
1
1"
1
ll
II
1"
>
1
K ?
Date
"-%
^A
^V4
2%
^V4
^«/4
-A
■2~/^
Vs
%
^/s
'U
%
Depth (meters)
0—8
0—6
0—100
0-300
0-3
0—10
0—75
200-
100
0-200 0-100
0-250 0—300
0—150
Salinity {'>'^)
34.86-
35.18
34.86-
35 24
34.64
34.60-
34.67
34.48—
34.60
34.72-
34.65
34..-
34.30
34.17-
34.47
3417-
34.84
33.73-
34.84
Temperature (Cels.)
3.2-
3.8
3.2—
3.46
1.7
1.06—
1.0
0.20-
0.95
2.0—
2.25
1.7—
2.3
1.1-
2.85
1.35-
3.6
2.65-
6.15
VI. Silicofiagellata.
r
r
'•
..
r
r
!•+
^-
•
VII. Tintinnodea.
Ptychoci/lis urnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt v. minor Jøer
P. u. V. digitalis ådriv
r
v
+
C. dentiadata (Ehrb.) F.il
rrotistplankton.
April
C 03
V QQ
t 2
ll
5S
"Va
DepDi (meters)
0— 400 k»— 200
0—110 0-600
0—130 0—130 0—150
lini'.v Coo)
3-t.02-
34.14
34.oa-
34.65
34.14-
34 21
34.11-
34.21
34.11-
35.18
34.09-
34.52
34.16-
34.83
Temperature (Cels.)
2.75-
2.85
2.66-
6.3
/. Bacillariales
(Dhdomaceæ).
Bacternsiru frai/ilis ((Jran) Gran
Corefhron hystrir Hens
Bhizosoleiiia nlata Brigdtw
B. Shnibsnlii Cl
Biddulphia auiita (Ltngb.) Bkéb
Chætoceros borealis Bail
C. densiis Ol
C. densus v. rudis Cl
C. daniais Cl
C. convolutus Castr
C. atlanticus Cl
C. decipieiis Cl
C. contortus Schutt
a similis Cl
C. laciiiiosits Schutt
C. TT i«ei Gran
C. diadema (Ehrb.) Gran
C. currisetiis Cl
C. debilis Cl
C. socialis Laid
C', furcellatus Bail
Bitylium Brightwellii (West) Grun. . . .
Sceletonema cosfatum (Gre\'.) Cl
Tlialassinsiin Xordeiiskjoldii Cl
T. gi avida Cl
T. hi/alina (Grun.) Gran
T. gelatinosa Hens
Coscinnsira polychorda (Gran) Gran . . .
Porosira glacialis (Grun.)
Actinocychts Elircubergi Ealps
Coscinodiscus excentricus Ehrb
C. stellaris Rop
C. radiatus Ehrb
C. subbullims Jørg. n. sp
C. centralis Ehbb
C. condnnus W. Ssi
C. biocidatus Grun
Euodia gibba Bail
Hyalodiscus stelliger Bail
Hitzschia senata Cl
N. delicatissima Ci
■•+
>•+
+c
+0
+c
+c
r+
+c
+c
E. Jørgensen.
Year 1900. Month
Depth (meters)
0-200 0—110
SaUnity (C/oo)
34.02-
34.14
34.U-
34.21
34.14-
34.91
34.11-
34.21
34.11-
3.5.18
34.09-
34.21
33 92-
33.95
34.09-
34 62
34.16—
34.83
Temperature (Cels.)
S.85-
5.4
3.05-
6.6
2.96-
4.2
Nitzsclda recta Hantzsch
N. hi/hridn Grun
N. frigirhi Grun
N. hngissima (Bréb.) Ralps
Tlialassiothrix nitzschioides Geun
Fragilaria oceanica Cl
F. ci/lindrus Geun
Achnnnthea tæniata Grun
Pleurosigma Shucbcrgi Cl
P. fasciola W. Sm. (inch P. tenuirostris Grun.)
Naviada Vnvlioffmi Gran
N. directa W. Sm
X. kariana Grun
Amph'iprora (Tropidtmeis) pnrallda Jørg. n. s])
Actinoptychus undulatus (Bail?) Ralfs
Aulisc'is sculptus (W. Sm.) Ralfs
Campi/lodisais Tliuretii Beee
C. imgidaris Greg
SwircUa lata W. Sm
Glyphiidenmh Williamsoni (W. Sm.) Grun
Rhabdonana arcuatum (Lyngb.) KiJTz
Cocconeis scuteUum Ehrr
Rlioieosigma arcticum ('l
//. Peridiniales.
(Dinoflagellata).
DmiiphjiHh acuta Ehrb., Jørg
D. nnrvtyica Clap, et Lachm,, Jørg
D. rolwidaia Clap, et Lachm
Podolaiiijian palmipi-s Stein
Pnitnirrafium retictdaium (Clap, et Lachm.) Butsciii
Gmiyaulax spinifera (Clap, et Lachm.) Dies
Diplopsalis knticula Bergu
Peridm'mm depressum Bail
P. divcrgi-im Ehrb. (P. lenticulare (Ehrh.) Jørg.) . . .
P. ccmicum ((Iran) Ostenp. et Schm
P. pallidum OsTENF
P. Steinii Jørg
P. ovatum (Pouch.) Schutt
Ceratiuin tripos (0. F. Mull.) Nit/.sch. (a haltkum Schutt)
G. bucephalum (Cl ) Cl
C. b. V. heterocampta Jørg
r+
+>=
■•+
+ 0
+=
Protisljjlankton.
Year ISJOO. Month
April
Locality
Date
Depth (meters)
Salinity ("/qo)
Temperature (Cels.)
Ceratmm macrocei-os (Ehrb.) Cl
C. ititermedium (Jørg )
C. hngipes (Bail.) Cl
C. furca (Ehrb.) Duj
C. Uneatum (Ehrb.) Cl
C. fitsuH (Ebrb.) Ddj
///. Pterosperinataceæ
Pterosperma Miibii (Jørg.) Ostenf
P. Vanhoffetii (Jørg.) Ostenf
P. dkii/on (Jørg.) Osteni-
IV. Halospbæraceæ.
Halospliaera nridis Schmitz (incl. H. minor Ostenf.).
V. Flagellata.
Phaocystis Poitrheti (Har.) Laoerh
VI. Silicoflagellata.
Distephanus speeuhmi (Ehrb.) Stohr ....
Dictyocha fibula Ehrb
VII. Radiolaria.
I. Sputnellaria.
Hexacontiwn enfhatanfhum Jorg
H. pachydermum Jørg
Eckinomma leptodermimi Jørg
Chromyomma boreale (Cl.) Jørg
Rhizoplegma boreale (Cl.) Jørg
Lithelius minor Jøro
Phorticium pylonium Hck. ?, Cl
2. Acantharia.
Radiosphæra anacanthica Jørg. n. sp
I ft o
S
s iir^ ii^i
I ii I; I n
2 » Si I « 'C
CO
Is
I'S
0—400 0—200
0—200 0— 110 0—600
34.02—
34.14
34.02—
34.65
34.14-
34.21
34.14-
34.91
34.11-
34.21
34.09-
34.21
34.09—
35.10
34.09-
34.82
34.16-
34.83
2.86-
6.0
+c
+c
+c
+c
.. I
+c
+c
+c
+c
+c
Year 1900. Month
Locality
Depth (meters)
0—400 0—200
0-200 0-110 0
—130 0—160
Salinity ("/oo)
34.14-
34.21
34.14-
35.15
34.14-
34.91
34.11-
34.21
34.09-
34.21
34.09-
35.10
34.09-
34.62
34.1
33.73-
33.99
Temperature (Cels.)
2.76—
2.85
3.06—
2.9
3.05—
6.6
2.35-
4.4
2.55—
6.3
5. Nassellaria.
rachnoides Clap, et Lachm
Campylacanth dadophm-a Jøkg. n. sp
J'kctacantha oikiskos Jøeg. n. sp
Phormacavtha hystrix (Jørg.) Jøeg
Gonosphæra primordialis Jørg. n. sp
Peridium longispmum Jøko
Cladoscenium tricolpium (Hck.?) Jørg
Lithomelissa setosa (Cl.) Jøeg
Dictyoceras acanthieum Jøkg
Clatkroeyclas crnspedota (Jørg.) Jørg
Androcydan gamphonyeha (Jørg.) Jøeg
A. amblycephalis (Jøeg.) Jøeg
SHchncorys seriata (Jøeg.) Jørg
4. Phæodaria (Tripylea).
Cannosphæra lepta Jørg
Pi-otocysiis ociphodnn (Hck.) Borg
P. Harstoni (Murray) Boeg
P. tridens (Hck.) Boro
ChallengeroH diodon Hck. (C. heter acanthum Jøeg.)
Medusetta arnferci Jøeg
VIII. Tintinnodea.
Tiiitinnus acuminahis (Jlai». et Lachm
Ptychocylis urnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt v. minor
Jørg
Tintinnnpsis nitida Brandt
T. campanula (Ehhb.) Dad
Codovella la,genula (Clap, et Lachm.) Entz. v. ovata Jørg.
C. ventricosa (Clap, et Lachm.) Fol
Cyttarocylis denticulata (Ehrb.) Fol
C', d. a typica Jøeo
C', d. V. elongata Jørg
C. d. V. subedentata Jøeo. n. \ar
C. serrata (Mob.) Brandt
Dictyocysta templum Hck. v. disticha Jørg.
Undella caudnta (Osteni\) Cl
+c
+c
+c
+=
Protistplankton.
VeHf 1»UU. MouUi
IS
I?
Depth (meters)
0—330 0—530 0—100
500—
400
33.73-
33.85
34.11—
35.13
,54.11-
34. St
34.94
34.1
Temperature (Cels.)
3.2—
3.16
3.8-
4.16
/. Bacillariales.
(Diatomacece).
Bacterosira fraqilis (Gran) Gran
RMzosolenia alata Brightw
Biddidphia awita (Ltngb.) Bréb
B. niobilienm Bail
" CJuetoceros borealis Bail
' C. densus Cl. v. rudis Cl
C. danicris Cl
V C. convolutus Castr
^ C. aflariHcus Cl
' C. decipiens Cl
" C. teres Cl
■ C. contortus SchCtt
• C. ladtiiosus Schutt
C. h-evis ScHCTT
C. Willci Gran
■ C. diadema (Ehrb.) Gran
C. debilis Cl
I C. socialis Lacd
P. furcdlatus Bail
Ditylium Brightwellii (West) Gkun. . . .
Sceletonema eostatum (Grev.) Cl
Thalassiosira Nordenskjoldii Cl
T. gi avida Cl
T. hyalina (Grun.) Gran
T. gelatinosa Hens
Coscinnsira polychorda (Gran) Gran . . .
Porosira glaciolis (Grun.)
Adinocyclus Eliretibergi Ralfs
A. suboceUahis (Grun.) Rattr
Coscinodiscun excentriciis Ehrb
C. lineatus Ehrb
C', curvatidus Grun
C. stellaris Rop
C. radiatus Ehrb
C. subbtdliens Jørg. n. sp
V C. centralis Ehrb
C. concinnus W. Sm
C. bioeidatus Gri-n
Hyahdiscus stelliger Bail
\Nitzschia seriata Cl
>•+
r+
r+
+c
r+
+c
r+
+c
+c
r
+
r
+c
^+
+
f+
r
r+
+c
r+
Year 1900. Month
Localitv
Date
Depth (meters)
SaUnity ("/oo)
Temperature» (Cels.)
Xitzschia delicatissima Cl
K frigida Grun
K. hi/hrida Grux
JV' recta Haktzsch
X longissima (Breb.) Ralfs
■ Thnlassiothrix nitzschioides Grctn
T. n. Grun. f. curvata (Castr.) Jørg
>Fragilaria oceanica Cl
F. ri/lind) us Grpn
F. islandica (Jrun
Aclinanthes keniata Grltn
Plcwosigma Stuxbergi ('l
P. fasciola W. Sm. (in.'l. P. trindrosh-is Grun.)
Naviada Vaidioffi ni Gran
A', pehigka Ph
iV. directa W. Sm
.V. lairiana Grcn
AmpMprora (Tropulmins) parallela Jørg. n. sp
Actinoptychns utululatun (KAir-O Ralfs
Campylodiscus Thwetii Breb
Surirelln lata W. Sm
lihabdonema arcuatum (Lynob.) Kutz
Bacillaria socinlis Grbg
Pleurosigma angulatum W. Sm
P. Nornianni Ralfs
lilioiconigma, arcticimi Cl
II. Peridiniales.
(Dmofliifjellata).
Dimiphysis acuta Ehrb., Jørg
T). norvegica Clap, et Lachm., Jørg
1). aaiminata Clap, et Lachm., Jørg
D. rotundata Clap, et Lachm
Podolampas palmipis Stein
Oxytn.ium diplnroiiun Stein
Pyynphnnifi liiiriihui'nim Stein
Pro/di'iiiiHiiiii rrlirrlahiw (Clap, et Lachm.) Butschli
Govijnuhi.i siiiiiifir/i (Clap. et. Lachm.) Dies
G. polyedra Stein
Peridinium depressum Bail
P. divergens Ehrb. (P. lenficulare (Ehrr.) .Iøro.) . . . .
P. conicum (Gran) Ostenp. et Schm
n
I »A
0—330 0—420 0—480
0—330 0—530 0—100
300—
200
500—
400
33.86-
34.04
34.11-
35.13
34.11-
34.3!
34.94—
34.88
34.07—
34.19
2.3—
3.46
3.2 —
4.15
+0
ProtiRtplnnkton.
Year 190U. M.mfh
Depth (inett-rs)
Salinity {O/^)
Temperatuie (Gels.)
April
11^.
11 I ll
2^
330|W— 4a0| 0— 4hu|| U— 60
33.86-
34 04
1
33.73-
34.00
= c s
'hi
0—60 0-33010— 63O:|0— 100
34.1I-I
35 IS
|34.ii—
34.sa
3.2-
4.16
500—
400
34.07—
I 34.19
Peiidiiimni pentwjonnm Gkan
1' pallillum OSTENK
P. onUum (Poi'CH.) SchCtt
Ceratium tiipos (O. K. MCli,.) Nitzsch. (a baltiriini Sci
C. hucephaliim (Cl ) Cl
('. 6. V. hefemcampta .løRo
Ceratium maooci-ros Ehbb. (Cl.)
C. intermedium (Jyuo )
('. longipes (Bail.) Vi
C', fwca (Ehrb.) Dim
C'. ftlSUS (E.IRB.) DlJ
III. Pteiospcrmatiiceæ.
Plerospet-mn Miibii (Jøro.) Ostexf
P. Vanhoffeni (Jørg.) Ostenf. . . .
P. didi/oti (Jøro.) Osten f
IV. Ilalo.sphæraceæ.
ll'doxphceiti lii-idis Schmitz (incl. H. minor Ostexf.).
V. Flagellata.
PhæOCyStis /'..prh.li llI.AR.) liACiEKH
VI. Silicofiagellata.
DisteplKnms speculimi (Kurb.) St()hr
Dictt/oclKt flhiihi Kiiiui
VII. Radiolarh
I. Spumellaria.
Hrxacontium eutlidcanthum Jøro
H. parhydermum Jøro
Eehinomma leptodermwii Jøro
Rhiznplrgma boreale (Cl.) Jøro
Litlielius minnr Jøro
2. Aainthnria.
Radidxpliæra anoriintliiin JøR<i. n. .«p.
+c
I
E. Jorgensen.
Year 1900. Month
'S-å'
It
'S "
Depth (meters)
0—330 0—420 0—480
0—830 0—530 0—100
300-
200
500-
400
Salinity (O/qo)
34.H-
35.13
34.11-
34.39
34.94-
34.SS
35.00-
35.12
34.07-
34.19
34.07—
35.12
Temperature (Cels.)
J. Nassellaria.
Plagiacantha arachnnides Clap, et Lachm
Campylacantha cladnphora Jørg. n. sp
Plectacantha oikMos Jørg. n. sp
Phormacantha hysirix (Jørq.) Jørg
Gonospliæra primordialis Jørg. n. sp
Peridium longispinum Joro
Cladoscenium trkolpium (Hck.?) Jørg
Lithomelissa sefosa (Cl.) Jørg
L. s. V. helonoplwra Jørg
Litharnchnium tentorium Hck
Didyoceras acanthimm Jørg
Clathrocydas craspednta (Jørg.) Jørg
Androcydas gamphonycha (Jørg.) Joru
A. amhlycephalis (Jørg.) Jørg
4. Phæodaria (Tripylea).
Cannosphæra lepta Jørg
Protocystis tridens (Hck.) Borg
Challenqeron diodon Hck. (C. heteracaiithiim Jørg.) . . . .
VIII. Tintinnodea.
Tintmnus aaiminatus Clap, et Lachm
LeprotintinnuB pellucidus (Cl.) Jørg
Ptyrhocylis urnula (Clai'. et Lachm.) Brandt v. sub-
nrdica Jørg. n. var
Tinthmopsis nitida Brandt
Cyttarotylis dentimlata (Ehrb.) Fol
C. d. V. swbeckntata Jørg. n. var
TJndella caudata (Ostenf.) Cl
+c
+c
+c
Protistplaiikto
b. Remarks on the Plankton.
I p. 491. ail evolution of lar^c
cs |)l;u-c early in the sprintr.
have called, the inflow of
the wave of diatoms; Gkan:
As iiieiitioiuMl ill the iiitroiluctio
masses of diatoms in the plankton t
Tliis very conspicnous plicnomenoii
diatoms. (OsTKXKKi.n: diatomébidi;-e
Diatomeen-woliic. )
To exphiin ..the large wave of dialdiiis. w hieli every spring
rolls over the North Atlantic", Ostknfeld (L. 112, p. 65) suppo-
ses tiiat the currents have been in close proximity to the shore,
for he considers that the evolution of the diatoms is enhanced, when
such is the case; although he does not give his reasons for so
thinkiiiL:. As, however, this explanation will not do for all cases,
he meiilions that tlie same quickening force, as that of the shore,
is found ill the houndary lines ..where different currents glide past
each othei
{t1!A>
in his late.'
work, has examined into the same pheno-
menon, more in detail. On the whole, he appears to agree with
OsTEXFELD, at anv rate in so much as that the boundaries of cur-
rents and also coast water are necessary for production in large
quantities, but he goes a step further and suggests a case for the
eftects observed.
He applies the theory recently advanced by Brandt, and con-
siders that the explanation is to be found, either in the fact that
in the open sea „there is a constant state of famine, as the supply
of nourishment principally comes from the coasts; or else that
there is a more active decomposition of nitrogeneous elements in
the warmer waters of the Atlantic".
As to which of these causes is the more decisive, Gran does
not give any definite opinion. But he seems most to incline to the
famine hypothesis, for, from this starting point, he shows how the
boundaries of the different currents must act in the same way as
coast lines, by reason of the nourishing matter, which they biing
with them, from the rivers of Siberia and the arctic coasts.
In connection with the foregoing, I will give a brief account
of the opinions I have formed after my examination of the coast
plankton; I will at the outset meation that 1 have had little or
no personal experience of ocean plankton.
1 also long since came to the conclusion that it is probable
that the evolution of the large quantities of diatoms depends upon
the mixing of the waters. On the whole, I am of the same opi-
nion as Gran, as expressed in the quotation first given from his
book. 1 must, however, make exception to the famine hypothesis,
which appears to me to give altogether too hopeless a view re-
specting pelagic animal life.
When Gran, however, considers the resting spores (endocysts)
left behind in the shallow coast water as the i-cal explanation of
the phenomenon, my experience makes it impossible for me to agree
with him; in spite of the great attractiveness which at first attaches
to this hyiHithesis. As is so often the case, so here, the same
conclusions ai'e often arrived at from widely differing hypotheses.
After Gran's theory the neritic diatoms with resting spores
(in contradiction to the oceanic, Avhich have none) leave behind
these spores in the coast water after a short period of vegetation.
When now the spores sprout, in the following spring they cause
the production of the large masses of diatoms.
What 1 most ob.ie<-t to is, tliat if tliis tjieory Ije correct there
would be good reason to concluiie tiiat the .,inflow of diatoms" is
a local pheiumienon, at any rate in the fiords. One ought then to
be able to conclude tiiat the plankton which flourishes in one tioni
would be considerai)ly different from wliat is to be seen in another
and distant one.
It would, moreover, be reasonable that the large evolution would
occur in one fiord essentially earlier or later than in ad.jacent ones,
according to the different local conditions, which might tend eitiici'
to ha.sten or hinder the development of diatoms.
But evciyoiie who has carefully examined the make-up of the
plankton at the time mentioned will have particularly noticed that,
taken as a whole, there is a remarkable uniformity in the plankton.
Of course, thei'e are variations, but these appear to l>e caused
more by differences in time than place.
It .should, however, here be remembered, that the jdankton
during „the inflow" is very rich also as to (juality, and contains —
especially that of the northern inflow — so many forms difficult to
determine (small and with thin walls imperfectly silicated) that it
must still be considered too little known.
In spite of the large number of species, and notwithstanding
that there doubtless are sfill many unknown ones, it seems to me
that there is such remarkably great uniformity that it is difficult
to think of the phenomenon as a local one.
As mentioned at the commencement, however, there is some
ditt'erence between the southern and northern inflow; and this ditte-
rence would seem to be constant in the ca.se of a few species. It
is highly probable that there is a much greater ditt'erence in the
quality than can now be seen; for, as before mentioned, the number
is large of those species which it is difficult to determine. If,
however, considerations be confined to the predominant species, it
will be found that there are some which have hitherto only been
found in the noiihern, and not in the southern plankton. For in-
stance. Gran long since emphasized the fact that Cha-toceros furcelln-
tiis ,,is entirely absent south of »Stadt, and (\ cincfiis takes its place."
It is also remarkable that the phenomenon occurs simultane-
ously at ditterent places. If the inflow is seen in one fiord, it will
also as a rule be found everywhere in the district. It is indeed
quite difficult to decide whether it has come from the south or the
north, that is to say, whether the inflow is at the same time ob-
servalile in places to the south, and not in places to the north, or
vice versa.
Here let me call attention to the rapidity with which the in-
flow sets in — for thi.s 1 consider to be an especially noteworthy
and important circumstance. There is no clearly defined time when
the change takes place in the plankton and the inflow is prepared
for, but it all happens, so to say, with a bound.
The species which form the bulk of the inflow are. — as pre-
viously stated by Ci-eve and Gkan — for the most part ([uite
ditterent ones from those which arc generally found in the plankton,
and most of them are arctic forms. This — in addition to several
other circumstances — is the reason why Cleve has supposed that
there is a current of arctic water along the coast of Norway, right
awav down to Skageiak and Kattee-at.
E. Joi-gensen.
According to Gran's theory, the foreign arctic forms must be
considered to come from the resting- spores which have been de-
posited, and so must not be looked upon as foreign, but as species
which now on our coasts have an unusually short period of vege-
tation in the spring, remaining otherwise in rest at the bottom as
spores.
It will clearly be seen, from the tables of the species which
have been found in the plankton here dealt with, that a large
number of foreign species occur during the period of the inflow,
par'tly being decidedly high arctic, at any rate as far as their di-
stribution is now known. Of such species, I would particularly
mention Th' I lassiosirahyalina, Fragilaria cylindriis, „NavicuIa" Van-
hoffeni, Coscinodiscus hioculatus, Pleurosigma Stuxhergi, Nitzschia
frigidu and Chætocerns fiircellatus.
These two thmgs — the great uniformity and the foieign cha-
racter — taken in connection with each other seem to me most
natui-ally to give rise to the supposition that those species, which
foi'm the bulk of the plankton at the time when the masses of
diatoms appear, are brought in from the ocean by arctic water,
and that they are — perhaps by mixing with the waters of the
Atlantic — brought into better conditions of existence and there-
fore multiply by division. This way of generation will of itself —
that is to say when such division is not only the exception —
easily lead to production e n m a s s e, as one has good opportunities of
seeing during the development of diatoms, when artificially cultivated.
What constitutes the improved conditions of existence, is another
question, and there is no reason foi' me to deal with this matter
here, as I have no observations to fall back upon, but there cannot
be very many factors to take into consideration. Gean supposes
that the rich supply of nourishment is its cause fcfr. the foregoing.)
In this connection, I will only observe that froin his standpoint
Gran explains that the reason why the development of the large
masses stops of itself, and why the masses disappear, is that the
nourishing matter has been quickly used up. According to my
experience light plays an important part in the culture of diatoms,
their development being greatly assisted by a certain degree of light,
while a somewhat greater degree has precisely the opposite effect.
One might, therefore, perhaps find a reason in this fact for the
disappearance of the masses, in as much as long periods of sunshine
might destroy the assimilating powers of the chromatophores.
It is highly probable that the phenomenon is due to botli these
causes.
Tiiis disappearance of tiie masses of diatoms may, however, be
local, and be caused by the rushing in of other water (cfr. the con-
cluding remarks on the Baltic current.)
I have called the phenomenon the inflow') of diatoms, partly
because it conveys the immediate impression of an inflow from out-
side, and partly because I really consider that it is caused by the
lu'inging in of foreign forms. It is, however, only necessary to consider
that the germs for the evolution of the masses of diatoms are thus
brought in, whether it be light, temperature, nourishing matter, or
most likely all three factors combined, which further their deve-
lopment.
As already mentioned, the southern inflow appears always to
contain some species which arc not found in the northern, so it
would seem likely that the western coast of Norway partly receives
1) It is useful in the remarlvs i
natu this period.
a sjjecial name to desig-
water from anothei' (juarter than the northern coast. Gran appar-
ently considers Stadt to be the bouudary lino for some of the cha-
racteristic species.
This, I think, makes it clear, that it is of some importance
to tiy to discover whether there is really any variation or not year
after year in the species found in the inflow of diatoms. On the
whole, it seems to me that the great difference of, and changes in
the interpretation of the plankton at least show that it has not yet
been sufficiently studied to make any quite reliable basis for hydi'O-
graphical conclusions.
As is the case with the majoiity of biological phenomena, the
development and changes in plankton are of such a complicated
character that a knowledge of many factors which work together,
and which as yet we are partly quite unacquainted with, is neces-
sary, so that to get a clearer conception and better knowledge of
the many remarkable phenomena, which are to be found in our
coast plankton alone, will give enough work for many years.
Before I leave this subject, I think I ought to better explain
my position with regard to the hypothesis of resting spores, which
at first sight, it must be confessed, seems to give an attractive
explanation of many phenomena.
When Gean considers the neritic species to be characteiized
by resting spores, in contradiction to the oceanic species which
have none, this distinction seems to me in a sense to follow of
itself, but contains no proof of the „over summering", by resting
spores on the bottom. I look upon these spores as a means by
which the individual diatom attempts to escape from unfavourable
surroundings, as the specific weight increases. So far, I agree
with Gean. His supposition that they often sink to the bottom is
doubtless also correct in very many cases, in fact I think this is
finally most often their fate in the coast water. But I think it
is just as certain, in the majority of cases, that the individual to
begin with is only forced into underlying water of a greater specific
weight. What its further fate will be, depends entirely upon cir-
cumstances. If it thrives, it will live on, and possibly multiply.
If, however, it does not tlnive, the tinai result will be that it
reaches the bottom. Then, as a rule, it will be altogether played
out, at the most, it niiglit be included in a preparation of bottom
material.
In an earlier paper (L. 92) I have suggested that the thick-
ening of the horns in certain Chætoceræ (e. g. C. conroUihis, C. eon-
turtus and many others) might be a biological phenomenon corre-
sponding to the formation of resting spores, although the latter are
undeniably more ett'ective.
In his last work. Gran also mentions (L. 7(), p. 129—130)
numerous dead cells and resting spores tVom a deep water sample
(The Stor Fiord, Søndmøre, stat. 3, 200—530 m.), these consisting
partly of species which had disappeared from the surface. How
these could — even if they remained alive — again come up from
such great depths, is really difficult to explain, unless too arbitrary
suppositions be resorted to. Besides, the greater depth, imphes
little light, but light is an absolute condition of vital importance
for the diatoms. The fact that bottom samples from deeper than
50 m.s show a very poor diatom life, is very instructive in this
connection; while a very rich diatom flora may be found at lesser
depths. At depths of under 100 m.s the bottom flora of diatoms
consist only of empty valves of pelagic species plus some other
matter, also a few diatom valves, which has been washed down
from the shore and here too resting spores are found in varying
89'
■re. diu' miulit in the sufceediiii;'
■^pofics which were mmiorou.s in
(■(iiiilitions wliii'ii are subject
w liicii do take place, occur as
It at ieiiLith a point is reached
(|uantitirs. Such lias at any latc hccn my cxiicriciice. On the
otiicr iiMiid 1 have never seen any lai'L.'c iiundicr of rcstiiii;- spores
in shallow walci'.
If tliey survived the suuiuier I
year to find (luantities of the same
the pi'eeediuL;- one; and consequently a considerable uniformity year
after year. But, accordiiii;- to my explanation, one would expect
greater variation.
The oceanic species live und
to but little chanw. The chaii-c
a rule slowly and ijradually. so t
A\hen it is a question of whether or not.
If, on the other hand, an oceanic species comes into coast
water, or into a boundary district between two curi-ents a formation
of resting spores might take place, if the species in question had
the requisite power. But in such cases, Gran does not consider
it to be an oceanic species (but a neritic one). In this way, one,
of course, gets as clearly defined a distinction, between oceanic
and neritic species, as can be wished for; but such a distinction is
at any rate highly artificial and seems to me to be of little use, if
Gbax's interpretation of the resting spores is not correct. Besides,
I think that the most important question is, whether a given spe-
cies can pi'opagate and thrive in the open sea, and this may be the
case even if it is possessed of the power of forming resting spores.
According to my opinion with regard to them, it might in some
cases just be the coast water which is an hindrance, and the oceanic
water which is furthering.
At any rate, it ought first of all to be clearly proved that the
resting spores are deposited in large quantities at the bottom of
shallow water, and this should not be a very difficult matter. Deep
water can scarcely be taken into account, nor yet those spores which
have been washed further ■ down than about 50 m.s beneath the
surface, to mention a figure which would seem to suit. There must, !
I take it, be great quantities of resting spores present to explain
the sudden appearance of large masses of diatoms.
My experience — as mentioned above — goes to prove that j
it is just only in deep water that large quantities of resting spores j
are found, and here, as explained above, one must expect to find j
them. I have not, however, by direct experiments, become convin-
ced that essential quantities of them do not occur at the bottom of
siiallow w^ater, and I will, therefore, in this connection, mention
that it is quite likely that the usual method of preparing bottom
samples gives a negative result, even if they do contain such spoi'es.
When I above threw out the suggestion, that the hea\4er
spores serve to force the individual into deeper water, I do not
wish to be understood to mean that their special or only purpose
is to make the individual diatom heavier. It is also reasonable to
suppose that the formation of resting spores may be a reaction to
plasmolysis, caused by salter water. This thought, would, it seems
to me, explain certain phenomena of the plankton, although I will
not now at present venture to say that this reason is the more
decisive. I have not yet sufficiently studied this subject (the for-
mation of resting spores).
As it is always unsatisfactory to attack a given hypothesis
— especially one such as this of resting spores which seems to
rejoice in numerous adherents — unless another be offered in its
stead, I will now mention how I consider the inflow of diatoms
occurs.
If I have undei'stood hydrographers correctly, there is, on the
surface during the winter months, a tongue of salt watei-, Aviiich
flows northwards, fairly parallel to the coast of Norway from the
passage between the Fa^'oe Islands and iShetland. This tongue
seems to be comparatively nai'row, especially a little to the north
01- north east of the passage, and it expands northwards, until at
its most northerly end — in the neighboui-hood of Bili-en Eiland —
it divides into two or more arms.
On the right of this tongue of ocean water, there is the coast
water oft" the coast of Norway; on its left, there is the arctic water
(nearest to the Faeroe Islands it is the East Icelandic Polar Current).
This (easterly) tongue of ocean water is displaced and forced in
different directions by the water from the arctic regions, now nearer
to the coast of Norway, then in the contrai-y direction; and it
varies in its distribution northwards (or is mixed in diffoi'ent pro-
portions with the arctic water).
In the spring months, there appears to be a rich diatom plank-
ton just in the boundary line between this arctic water and that
of the Atlantic. This phenomenon may partly be caused by a
purely mechanical crow^diug where the velocity of the current is
lowest; but it is also very likely that the .somewhat higher tempe-
rature of the mixed water may promote the evolution of the diatoms.
In Gran's last work (L. 70, p. 158, 160) one learns from the
expedition of S/S Heimdal, in May 1901, that there w^as found in
the southern section of the „Gulf Stream" (the previously mentioned
tongue of ocean water from Faeroe— Shetland northwards) a rich
diatom plankton on both sides of the stream, especially on the
western towards the Icelandic polar current. Traces of a similar
state of things were found in the second section, much more nor-
therly, but it was here little noticeable (at that time of year).
Gean himself mentions that |on the western boundaiy of the-
Gulf Stream, a rich neritic plankton consisting of diatoms was found,
and this he considers to have been brought hither by the current,
probably from the Faeroe Islands. He also mentions that the same
state of things has several times previously been noticed at about
the same place and time. With regard to the northern section, he
hints at an exceedingly long transport of the same neritic forms-
northwards to the corresponding boundary line there.
In this connection, it would be of importance to know whether
such an evolution of masses of diatoms takes place in other places
on the boundaries between the atlantic and arctic waters, (at a time
which is favourable to the development of diatoms, probably ex-
cluding the winter months of December, January and February,
and perhaps partly also March) or if this production en masse is
confined to those places where coast water is present. It is quite
likely that the latter is the case, but one can hardly say that it
has, as yet, been clearly proved.
If such mass development should be found in the boundaries
as a whole, one of the principal reasons would disappear for con-
sidering as neritic such arctic diatoms as have been found repeatedly
in large numbers in samples of plankton which have been taken far
from the coasts.
As the tongue of ocean water above mentioned is narrow and
varies in its situation and expanse, it is reasonable to conclude
that, occasionally during the spring months, the arctic waters wash
over it, and become in this way transferred to the coast of Norw^ay,
To judge from the occurence of the diatom inflow, this would
seem to happen regularly at the end of March. (In 1598 parti-
cularly early, namely in tlie middle of the month, or perhaps still
earliei-. )
E. Jorgens
By assistance of Mr. Noedgaaed I have been aware that such a
washingover by the arctic waters across the Gulf Stream has really
been observed by the Swedish hydrog-raphers (Petteeson, L. 119), and
that just in the year 1898 the East Icelandic Polar Current by a
broad zone went across the Gulf Stream towards the Norwegian
coast. The Swedish hydrographers also suppose the arctic water
to force its way beneath the surface all into the Skagerak and
Kattegat, and Cleve thus explains the appearance there of arctic
planktonforms. They appear here earlier in the year than at the
Norwegian coast.
When the arctic water reaches the coast, we find at once
the masses of (hatoms, which have already been developed on the
boundaries.
As the preceding remarks will show, the southern inflow of
diatoms, according to my opinion, is especially due to the East Ice-
landic Polar Current, which under favourable circumstances advances
in the direction of somewhere near the Sogne Fiord. (As previously
mentioned, Gean makes Stadt the limit for some of the arctic
diatoms, which in this connection are of special importance). It is
possible that a similar washingovei- occurs regularly (by a very
broad wave?) further north on the coast of Lofoten (to the south
or north). Here, at certain times, a tongue of arctic water also
seems to be pushing its way across the Gulf Stream.
I think it very possible that the specific northern forms in the
•northern diatom inflow may, in this way, be brought in with water
from about the latitude of Jan Mayen. It is, however, also quite
likely that it is the pre^^ously mentioned tongue of arctic water, trans-
versing the Gulf Stream at its narrowest part, which alone gives rise
to both the northern and southern inflow.
If such ■ be the case, one might expect that the southern one
would expand southwards, and the northern northwards. There
would still be nothing to prevent the slight differences in their
components, as the noi'thern part of the current could bring with
it the specific northern forms, if from land, then from Jan Mayen
or perhaps East Greenland.
The abundant material for observation which Cleve has collected
in his splendid work on the distribution of plankton organisms in
the Atlantic, (L. 40). makes it possible for one to get a view of
the distribution of the species. The specific northern forms may,
in accordance with the information there given, be supposed to
come from East Greenland or Jan Mayen.
If tiie northern diatom inflow be due to the rushing in of a
noitiiein tongue of arctic water at Lofoten or thereabout (probably
in a wide expanse) one might expect the inflow from here to
stretch southwards on the one side, and in a north easterly di-
rection on the othei-. There was indeed, in the plankton examined,
a I'cason for the suggestion that the diatom inflow extended in an
easterly direction in the most northern part of Norway.
Following close upon the inflow of diatoms, there is, on the
south west coast of Norway in the neighbourhood of Bergen, a very
sudden transition to much fresher water, containing a rich and
peculiar plankton of pi;rulinæa, which quickly takes the place of
the masses of diatoms. (Cf. E. Jøegensen L. 91)
This is due, as far as I know, to the Baltic current which
now rushes in and sweeps the masses of diatoms out from the coast
and northwards. Therefore, it is reasonable that the characteristic
northern species cannot penetrate so far as to the latitude of
-Bergen.
[n the above mentioned southern section of the Gulf Stream,
during the expedition of S/S Heimdal in 1901, there were also
masses of diatoms on the boundary towards the oceanic water in
May, just at the time when the Baltic current has swept away
the diatom masses from the coast near Bergen.
There is a certain correspondence between the characteristic
northern forms in the northern diatom inflow and the species which from
Geunow's and Cleve's works are known from the Kara Sea and
the north coast of Siberia. This might mean some kind of connection
between these seas, and one might easily be tempted to conclude
that water from the north coast of Siberia finds its way to the
north coast of Norway.
In Gean's last work, a plankton sample is mentioned as taken
during the expedition of S/S Heimdal in 1900 in the Barents Sea,
west of Waigatch, and which contained several of the peculiar forms
found in the northern diatom inflow.
Gean has kindly placed this sample at my disposition, and
after a thorough examination of it, I can affirm, that it contains a
large number of our northern plankton diatoms. On the other hand,
there are also so many foreign elements that it is scarcely Likely
that water from this district flows to our coast during the period
of the diatom inflow. On the contrary, everything (also the date
^Vo) suggests that the masses of diatoms from the coast of Norway
(or the same inflow which gives rise to the northern inflow with
us) extend further eastwards (perhaps to the Kara Sea).
The species found in plankton, and their distribution (prin-
cipally in the nearest seas) and remarks on the new or
critical forms.
I. Bao±lla.nria,les.
(Didtornaceæ).
The suggestions which have hitherto been made as to a natm'al
classification of diatomaceæ are all more or less unsatisfactory. In
the following pages, I have principally availed myself of the system
used in Van Heueck's „Traite des Diatomacées" (L. 89); but in the
larger groups I have made some changes which I have found to be
necessary.
A more complete list of literatui'e will be found in my pre-
vious paper (E. Jøegensen: Protophyten und Protozoen aus der
norwegischen Westkuste) (L. 91). Here I have only more com-
pletely cited the literature for the forms which ai-e not referred
to there.
a. feiitrifæ Schitt.
Coscin odisceæ.
Under the heading „ distribution'", 1 have used the ordinary
expressions «oceanic", and „nei-itic" forms (= sea and coast forms).
As long as one (for diatomaceæ) does not know anything definite
about any rest period at the bottom, these expressions are far pre-
ferable to „holo"- and „meroplanktonic".
In accordance with my opinion as stated above respecting the
inflow of diatoms in the spring I consider a large part of our
plankton species to be brought in from outside.
There ai'c others which occur all the year round on our coasts,
although these of course also follow with the vai-ious currents.
Protistplankton.
91
Such species are noted as native, or sonietinies as .,stationai'y", on
our coasts.
So as not to ditler more tiian necessary from tlie expressions
commonly used, I iiavc called boreal those coast forms which are
stationary on our northern coasts, as well as those which, according
to my opinion, come to us from the northern, but not exactly the
arctic, districts. (This expression — boi-cal — was first used by
Cleve, and later by both Gkan and Ostenfeld with a similar
meaning). Moreover, 1 have, as Gran has done, widened this
expression to include certain oceanic forms, which are found in the
northern Atlantic outside tiio arctic water proper. After my view,
such forms will for the most part be those which thrive in the
boundary lines between the ai'ctic water and that of the Atlantic,
and which are well able to bear the latter (up to a certain degree
of salinity and temperature).
That it is often difficult to decide whether arctic and boreal
(I would prefer to call the latter subarctic) forms are neritic or
oceanic, is something which is a necessary result of my opinion
that they thrive well and may give rise to evolution en masse
in the boundaries between the arctic and Atlantic waters. It is
this fact which has also been referred to by some authors when
saying, that these boundaries to some extent play the same part as
the coasts.
Co^einodi><<>iiK Ehrb.
It will be seen, from the various plankton tables which have
been published, that this difficult genus has given rise to much
confusion. The names which are used in many cases evidently
mean quite diffei-ent species. As there, however, in our latitude,
does not appear to be very many species in the plankton, it ought
to be possible to arrive at comparative clearness concerning them.
It is probable that in reality there are many more species than
have up to the present been found : but there are only a few which
occur frequently.
I -nill here give a brief survey of the species which I have
mentioned in the plankton tables.
Key to the .■specie» of CoscnioiViscn^.
Valve flat or nearly so (sometimes suddenly descending at a nar-
row zone of the outmost margin).
Marginal apiculi present (always distinct).
The characteristic structure of
C. curvatulus: valve by (somewhat
curved) radii di\1ded into a con-
siderable number of sectors; mar-
kings (areoles) in each sector in
rows parallel to the one limiting
radius (or somewhat convergent to-
wards the border) C. curvatulus.
The characteristic structure of
C', lineatus: markings arranged in
more or less straight rows (in 5 or
6 directions) across the valve .... C. lineatus.
(et var.)
The characteristic structure of C.
excentrieus : markings in 7 fasciculi,
forming distinct secondary curves,
concave towards the border C. excentrieus.
Fine radiating structure with
more or less distinct and numerous
fasciculi C', hioculatus.
No marginal apiculi.
Structure of the valve rather
coarse, more or less distinctly radi-
ate (only near the border with more
or less visible fasciculi, consisting
of rows converging towards the
border, sometimes apparently inordi-
nate); markings near the border sud-
denly much smaller C. radiatus.
Valve decidedly convex (in C', decipiens witli liiL'h
broad marginal zone, then flat).
Valve without close markings all ovei' tlie
surface, only with distant jiuncta. C', nitidus.
Valve with close (more or less distinctly
polygonal) markings.
Fine structui'e (fasciculi) ; around
the centre of the valve a con-
spicuous star consisting of about
5 coarse marks C', stellaris.
Structure similar to that of C'.
excentrieus, but with more quickly
diminishing markings and long mar-
ginal apiculi C. decipiens.
(= Thcdassiosira gelatinosa).
Structure radiate, with more or
less branched radii. No coarse
marks ; marginal apiculi (when pre-
sent) short and small.
2 comparatively large (short
linear) asymmetrical and
numerous small marginal api-
culi (which are often very
inconspicuous or apparently
wanting).
Fine struetui-e. Smooth
central space or large
central rosette of se-
veral times larger are-
oles. Valve thin C. eoneinnus.
Coarser structure. At
the centre a definite
central rosette of doub-
ly large areoles. More
strongly siliceous C. centralis.
No marginal apiculi.
Valve veiT thick.
Coarse structure; are-
oles of very varying
size on one and the
same valve, from -/s
of the radius some-
what smaller. Com-
paratively broad, co-
arsely striated, border C', siibbxdliens.
E. Ja -gens
C. exceutriciis Ehkb.
The form which occurs in the plankton fi'om the northern
coasts of Norway, is the typical one which is figured in Schmidt's
atlas, (L. 128), pi. 58, f. 49.
Distribution: Appears to be a northern temperate oceanic
form. On the west coast of Norway it is found all the year round,
but only occasionally in somewhat greater number. The same seems
to be true of the northern coasts, at any I'ate in the months
February— May. Othenvise widely distributed along the coasts of
the Atlantic, the North Sea and Skagerak right up to Greenland and
Jan Mayen. Has, according to more or less reliable statements, a
nmch wider distribution and is perhaps cosmopolitan.
C. lineatus Ehrb.
The easily recognizable form which is figured by Van Heueck
(Synopsis, L. 88) t. 131, f. 3, I hardly think occurs on our coasts.
But rarely one finds a form with fine structure and moi-e or less
straight secondary curves, which I have entered in the plankton
tables under the name of C. lineatus var. I am, however, partly
inclined to think that the specimens I have observed may be forms
.of (Joscinosira fokichorcla Gran. Cfr. remarks concerning this species.
Distribution: The genuine C. lineatus Ehrb. is perhaps only
found fossil and in the warmer seas.
C, decipiens Grun.
Vide Thulussiosira gcJatinosu.
C. ciirvatiilus Grun.
Rare on the coasts ot Noiway, occasionally more frequent in
the northern coast plankton.
Distribution : Occurs in many forms, which taken as a whole
have a wide distribution. It seems to be frequent on the arctic
coasts. (Greenland, Jan Mayen and Franz Joseph's Land). Is
pciiiaps an arctic and boreal oceanic form.
C. stellaris Hop.
Rare on tlie northern coasts of Norway. Does not appear to
belong to the diatom inflow, ami is mostly found singly in deep
water samples.
Distribution : Rare on the coasts of the Atlantic and the
arms of the sea in connection with it. On the west coast of
Norway most abundant in the winter. Also known from the Me-
diterranean. The appearance of C. stellaris in the north, suggests
tiiat this species is a tempei'ate Atlantic one (and probably oceanic.)
Note. C. si/mbolophorus Guitn. (L. 83, p. 82, pi. 4, f. 3—6)
is a very nearly related species with considerably coarser structure
and difi'erent distribution. According to Rattray (L. 124, p. 493)
transitional forms to C. stellaris occur. C. symbolophorus is an arctic
and antarctic species (also known from several fossil deposits), which
occurs on the west coast of Norway during the inflow of diatoms
together with arctic species. In the northern plankton I have also
seen it once: "A 1900, Foldouijord, 0 — 100 m.
C. biocitlatus Uuun.
Gkfn. I.. 83, p. 55, pi. 3. f. 30. Cleve I.. 26, p. 10, t. 2,
f. 13. Thalassiosira b'weulatu (Ghun.) Ostenfeld L. 116, p.
504, f. 120, 121 (?).
This beautiful species, which does not seem to have been found
before on the Scandinavian coasts, occurred in several of the samp-
les, especially in 1900, sometimes rather numerous. It is only found
during the inflow of diatoms in the spring months.
It is probable that this is the same species which is mentioned
by Ostenfeld from the Faeroe Islands (1. c), and which he has
found in chains similar to those of Ihalassiosira, for which reason
he refers the species to this genus as a new subgenus, Coscinolau-
deria.
I have not followed Ostenfeld's example, partly because the
genus Thulussiosira is getting to be rather heterogeneous and unnatural
on account of the newer elements which have been added to it, so
that there will soon be nothing left as a reliable distinguishing
feature except the mucilaginous thread; partly too because I have
not met with any such chains in my material, in which the species,
however, never occurred m any important quantity. Perhaps we may
be speaking of two different species, although Ostenfeld's figure
considerably resembles our species. (The only thing which seems
foreign to it, as far as I can see, is the apiculi which are closer
and smaller than in our form, and also the lower cells, as I have
only seen high ones).
Distribution: Arctic and boreal, according to Cleve (arctic)
neritic species, known from the coast of North Siberia, ice near
Novaja Zemlja, Greenland, the Faeroe Islands (April— May rare,
Aug.— Sept. 1902 numerous, according to Ostenfeld, 1. c, who
also mentions it from several places in the N. Atlantic).
Note. Coscinodiscus polyacanthus Geun. (L 48, pi. 7. f. 127)
is a little known and somewhat doubtful species, which occurs on
the North Siberian coast and at Franz Joseph's Land. In a sample
from Folstad, *U 1899, 0—3 m., I found very sparingly a species,
which in every i-espect seems to agree with authentic specimens of
C. iwlyacanthus from Jamal (Swedish expedition to Jenessey 1875,
slides in possession of the Riksmusæum, Stockholm I. (Cfr. under
Coscinosira polychorcla).
C. polyacanthus Grun. var. intermedia Grun. (1. c. p. 81, pi.
3, f. 25) is probably another species, if it does not belong to C.
curratulus (it has, like this species, interfascicular apiculi). Speci-
mens quite answering tn the figure and description of Grunow were
found sparingly in a sample from Skjerstadfjord XII, ""A 1900,
0 — 500 m. Known from Cape \\'ankai'ema.
C. radiatns Ehkb,
Exceedingly variable. Theie are, however, certain distinctive
marks by which all forms belonging to this species can be recog-
nized. Gran (L. 70, p. 166) has already well characterized this
form: — low („coinshaped") cells, flat valve, markings near the
border suddenly voi y smnll.
■ The larger lonns have a distinct central rosette and often
areoles, which increase in size nearly up to the border, and are then
C. oculus iridis. Ehbb., as this very much disputed species has been
described by Grunow and Rattray. From these forms (cfr.
Schmidt's atlas, (L. 128) pi. 63, f. 6., which form, however, has
larger marginal areoles than usual) there seems to be every transi-
tion to the ordinaiy C. ruil'ialus witJiout the central I'osette and with
markings which aic of about the same size nearly up to the bor-
der. Grunow (L. 83, p. 25) also observes that C radiutus passes
into C. oculus iridis, but it must be mentioned that he seems to
give little or no weiglit to the convexity of the valve (when this
is not particularly conspicuous), and therefore he classes together
93
forms wliic'li are alike in struetiii'o only, wliile they, in other le-
spects, eaii lianliy he emisidered to belon;;- together.
When thus (Jitrxow i'urther remarks tliat there is the most
complete ti'ansition between C. K!<tcro))ii>liali(s antl ('. oniltis iridis
anil further to C. iKdiatiix, antl wlien on tlie otiier hand lie h)oks upon
t', irutralis as a vai'iety of C. itxti'i-oniitlKdns. lie has surely «.^onc
too far.
On the other haiul, there are thick walled, small, coarsely
sti-uctured foi-ms, which have quite a dittcrent appearance to the
ordinary C. rndidfun. and yet which must also be entered under
this species. Such forms are C. dcriun A. Schm. (L. 128) pi. (io,
f. 1—4 = C. radintus f. minor A. Schm. (L. 127, pi. 3, f. 34.)
I have, stransre to say. never yet seen any really jrood drawing
of this characteristic species. As it is, however, - ;» indeed is
the case with all sjiecies of Cosc'moiViscm — very difficult to figure
properly, I must at present give up the thought of giving any
figure of it.
Cleve's meaning with regard to C. niduttus is not quite clear
to me, as he (L. 40, p. 321) refers to Schmidt's atlas pi. 60, f. 9,
which does not appear to be at all a characteristic figure of C.
nidiatu.-', as this species is looked upon by Grax and myself. Cleve re-
fers too to Giuxuws remarks in Diatomeen from Franz Josefs Land
(L. 83, cfr. above) and mentions in Phytopiankton {L. 27, p. 23)
that C', radifttus is scarcely more than a little form of C. oculus
iridis. Cleve's opinion of the latter species does not, however,
coincide with Grunow's and Rattray's. For further particulars
see C'. siililiiiHit'iis.
Rather common. More abundant in deep water samples than
on the surface.
Distribution : Ratiier common all the year round on the
coasts of Norway, both the western and northern. Also widely
distributed on the European coasts of the Atlantic and its arms,
right lip to the arctic coasts (GJreenland, Jan ^[ayen. Spitzbergen
and Franz .losephs Laud.)
C. centralis Eiiitu., Rattk.
(PI. VI, tig-. 1).
Rattk. L. 124. p. 555.
This species is very easily recognized, but has been confused with
C', onihci iridis and C. concinnus. It is sometimes not so easy to
distinguish it from the latter species, and it is possible that one
will not be able with certainty to keep them separate; but the
ditt'erence from C. ocnlus iridis in {Grunow's meaning) as Avell as
from C', radiatus is vci-y considerable.
The characteristic marks of the species are tiie following:
Valve considerably convex (pi. VI, f. 1). Structure radiate with j
dichotomously branched radii and rather coarse structure (though
finer than that of C', radiutus). The markings from a rather large
central rosette of even size to "A radius, then gradually somewhat
smaller (not suddenly small near the bordei'). Near the margin j
numerous fine apiculi (in a single row) and with about 120°s space
between them. F.esides two much larger, short linear, unsymmetrical,
margmal ones.
Varies considerably in delicacy of structure and so often clo-
sely resembles C', conciimus, in common with whicli species it has the
2 characteristic unsymmetrical marginal and the numerous small
«ubmarginal apiculi. These latter may be indistinct, and sometimes |
(hut rarely) not t<t lie found at all. es|ieeially when the structure
is rather coarse.
(^i,Kvi;, who also occasionally mentions C. n-ntralis na occurring
in the jdanktoii, seems to regard this sjiecies as a less distinct form,
as a transition between -f. rourinmis and C. ocnlus itidis. As a
type for the latter species he quotes (L. 40, p. 319) C'. asU-rom-
plutliis riir. Iii/lridu iinvs. Franz .lo.sephs Land (L. 83) t. 3, f. '.).
This may perhaps show that Ci.eve considers tho.se forms of V.
centralis which are without distinct marginal apiculi and are of a
coarser structure to lie C. orulis iridis.
In the important work before mentioned on the distribution of
species of plankton in the Atlantic (L. 401, the name C'. mitniUs is
omitteil, the coarser forms probably being reckoned as C', oculus iridis,
and the finer, with marginal apiculi. as C', concinnus.
With respect to difference from C', concinnus, reference is made
to this species, where the structure is more particularly mentioned.
Moreover, there appears as a rule to be great diff'erences between
the two species in the living plankton; C'. cojicniMTi.v developes cells,
which are high with very thin walls and consequently very ea.sily
altered in shape, and with a strongly convex marginal zone, while
C. centralis has rather low, thickwalled, firm cells, more flatly ascen-
ding towards the centre.
As before mentioned, it sometimes - but only .seldom, judging
from my experience — seems to be difficult to discern between
C', concinnus and C. centralis, and Grax (L. 70, p. 167) seems
to suppose that the difference depends upon variation hi salinity
and temperature. My impression is, that they are two comparati-
vely young species, but that they have already sufficiently distin-
guishing characteristics to enable them to be dealt with a.s specific-
ally ditt'erent forms.
This species and the C', radiutus are the most freriuent of this
genus with us.
Distrihidion : Appears to be widely di.stributed along the
northern F^uropean coa.sts of the .\tlantic and its arms. Rather
coninioii on the coasts of Norway, both on the west and north.
Occurs right up to the arctic coasts but appears chietly to be a
temperate species.
C. concinnus \\ . Sm.
The characteristic form of the living cell is illustrated by
OsTEXi'EM) (L. 116, p. 566). Its structure is always very fine,
much finer than usual in C. centralis. The central rosette has very
large areoles.
As a distinguishing feature from C', centrulis the areoles in the
central rosette are several times larger than the others, those in
C. centrdlis being only twice as large, or sometimes but very little
larger. I am. however, not sure if this ditt'erence is always to be found.
Besides, the areoles in C', concinnus are „little marked" (cfr. Grax
L. 70, p. 168) with comparatively broad hyaline spaces between them,
and from the mai-ginal apiculi thei-e are similar rather broad, hyaline
stripes radiating inwards at some length on the valve. These
hyaline radii give the valve a highly characteristic appearance, which
C. centralis does not possess.
Distrilnttion : On the whole, the same as that of C', centralis, but
seems to be still more extended. Seems to be rare on the arctic
coasts. On the west coast of Nonvay frequent in spring and
autumn, especially in the spring inflow. On the northern coasts of
Norway rare, at any rate in the months January — May.
i. Jørgensen.
C. subbulliens n. sp.
(Pl. vr, fig. 2.)
Form: — The valve is clearly convex, with an evenly rising
marginal zone. Seen from the side, its contour is almost straight
with an angle of between 30 and 40°. The central part (to V, or
'A of the radius) almost flat or often somewhat depressed.
Margin : — Clearly defined, broad and sharp, with coarse stripes.
Structure: — No central space. Generally either without or
only with a slight indication of central rosette, consisting of a few
larger polygons, without any regular arrangement in rosette shape.
On larger specimens, a more distinct rosette with five larger areoles,
hanng their narrower ends directed inwards.
The majority of the areoles increase slowly in size from the
centre (outside the few larger central areoles) to Vs — Vo of the
radius where they are largest. From here they suddenly become
much smaller (although not very small) and are about of equal
size right out to the margin. All over the valve — both in the central
part and further out — smaller areoles are strewn between the
larger ones, and this often strongly I'esembles the structui'e of C.
Jnilliens A. Schm. (hence its name).
Markings polygonal, tMck walled with very plain „papillæ".
(Structure irregularly dichotomously radiate: From the centre
numerous radii diverge, generally 2 or more being parallel. In the
spaces between such rows of rays, new radii spring out, the first
areole often being small. Where the cells have reached their greatest
breadth, two new rows often spring out. Here and there, close to
the margin, short new rows again fill up the intermediate spaces.
Skc: — Rather small, considerably smaller than C. centralis,
aViout equal to a little C', radiatuf in size. Diameter usually .50 —
l(K) n.
The living cell is of medium heiglit, higher tlian in C. rrt'Hatus
and generally much lower than in C. ^■oncinnus.
The central areoles, when they are found to be well developed,
ai-e 3x4 ])..
The areoles outside the central rose
3,5 |). broad, 2—2,5 \>. at the border,
smaller areoles, 1,5^2 ])..
At the border 5'/2— 6 stripes on 10
same number of areoles). The margin
being nearly cubic-cylindrical).
This species, which, judging from my experience, is well de-
fined and easily recognisable, resembles the C. radiatus most nearly,
and may, unless great care be taken, be confused \\ith it; tlio con-
vex valve and the absence of the very small areoles neai- tlic mar-
gin will, however, at once show the decided difference.
Tills species is also Grax's C. ocuIus iridis after his inter-
pretation of this species in Plankton des norwegischen Nordmeeres
(L. 70, p. 168), as I have had an opportunity of being convinced
of, on comparing some of his plankton samples.
Cleve's C. oculus iridis appears to consist in a great measure of
this species, judging from his plankton lists, but as he — as above
mentioned — refers to Grunow's figure of C. asteromphcdiis var.
hijhr'tdK, which is hardly specifically diff'crent from what Gkunow
considers to be C. centralix Ehkb., it seems to me that Cleve's
species must consist of forms which are specifically different from
each other.
Grunow's C. centralis, which he considers a variety of C. asterom-
phalus, is not so well characterized as Rattray's C. centralis, but
4 on 10 1)., the
Here and there
largest
much
|). (coiresponding to the
3 'J. broad (the areoles
must, I think, be reckoned as belonging to that species. Grunow's
C. asteivmphalus also belongs to it, answering as it does quite well
to the coarser forms of C. centralis (Rattr.) having, as a rule, in-
distinct marginal apiculi. Grunow expressly mentions (L. 83, p.
27) the convexity, while C. sudbidliens has a gradually descending
marginal zone and therefore is less noticeably convex towards the
margin.
Ostenfeld, again, considers C. ucidus iridis not to be specific-
ally different from C. radiatus and therefore does not enter it se-
parately from the Faeroe Islands (L. 116, p. 566).
Other authors on plankton have, in their lists, given very various
names from districts where, at any rate, partly the same species
are hkely to occur, from which it will be seen that there is a
considerable difference of opinion with regard to C. oculus iridis,
C. aster omphalus, C. radiatus and C. concinnus (C. centralis is not
generally mentioned).
As the species here mentioned as C. subbulliens does not cor-
respond well to C. oculus iridis, as one has reason to believe this
species was originally looked upon — large, with large central rosette
and thus differing from C. radiatus — and as there is such a
great difference of opinion with regard to the correct meaning of
this name, I have thought it best to determine the characteristics
of the species, and to use a new name for this form, which is
easily recognized. I have not been able, in spite of careful com-
parisons, to identify it with certainty with any of the species hithei'to
described. Of names which might be taken into consideration, I
will particularly mention 6'. heteroporus and C obscurus. The latter,
especially, has many points of similarity with my species, but it
does not seem possible, however, from the figures which have been
given, to consider them as being identical.
On the other hand, there are certain forms which have been
referred to C. radiatus, which surely belono- to my species. I will
for instance, specially mention tab. 60, f. 14 in Schmidt's atlas
(0. ohversus Rattr.) which fairly well answers to many forms which
do not specifically differ from my C. subbulliens. As I, however,
principally base the right of specific rank upon the peculiar con-
vexity of the valve, (in side view), I cannot, for the sake of perfect
clearness, very well use Rattray's name, which represents a spe-
cies, which is but little known.
It is not to be expected that there can be absolute agreement
as to the use of Ehrenberg's names C. oculus iridis, C. centrali-^.
C. radiatus and many other. But one might perhaps more easily
agree as to the meaning of the original name, C', radiatus, which
is already by most authors used as I do here, excepting that, to
some extent, other species are also occasionally included thei'ein.
If the name C. radiatus Ehrb. be retained, there can hardly be
any reason for not attaching to it the meaning above mentioned.
It is quite anothei" matter, that there are perhaps those who mean
that there still are included in this species others, which in the
future will have to be culled out.
Further, there can hardly be different opinions with ivgard to
Rattray's C. centralis, unless that some may consider the limits
of his species to be too confined, while others may find those of
mine to be too wide. At present, it appears by many — as above
mentioned — to be looked upon as belonging to C', concinnus
W. 8.M., and 1 have previously also been of this opinion.
On the other hand. I think that C. oculus iriilis must be
sacrificed (as a species), while ( '. subbuUivus, which is certainly
PiKtistplanktuii.
!»5
dirtcrent to liotli ( '. rniluiltis ami ('. cixtnilis may lu' rescued from
cliaos.
The two ijioiuineiit author.s Ckiniiw and Ivatthay, who liave
given extensive and tlioi'oui;h monoirraphs on the difticnlt genus
Co!>ci7todiiicug, have in their exceedingly exact dcscrii)tion of the
differences in the structure of the valve omitted other iiniioitant
distinctive features, especially the shape of the valve in sidi' view.
Both of them, especially Rattray, indeed often particularly refer
to the convexity, but not by any means in every instance, and they
often include forms which correspond in structure, but differ cou-
sidcralily in convexity, in the same species. This circumstance,
unfortunately, makes Grunow's work, which in other respects is
so exceedingly thorough, some^\■hat incomplete and \\aiiting in
clearness.
As far as my experience goes, the convexity of the valve is
precisely a very certain distinctive feature, and comparatively easy
to apply to living species in the plankton. It is even, as far as
I can see, the only guiding thread which will sei-ve to lead us out
of an otherwise hopeless and interminable maze. Only it must
always be remembered that this — just as is the case with regard
to structure — is only one distinctive feature, and may lead to the
same unnatural piecemealing which the structure has caused; but
that both distinctive features in conjunction can give good results.
What I have, in one instance, in the tables called C. ocuhcs
iridis, is the above mentioned coarser forms of C. centralis.
DMiilndion: Appears to be an arctic and boreal oceanic
species, which is rare with us. It is found scattered at several
places on our northern coast, especially in deep water.
Appears to extend along the northern, especially the arctic
coasts of the Atlantic (Jan Mayen and Spitzbergen, in E. Jokgex-
SEx L. 92 named C. or»/»s iridis) and in the districts where the
arctic and Atlantic waters mix.
t', nitidas Gkeg.
Greg. L. 74, p. 499. pi. 10, f. 45. A. Schm. L. 127, p. 94,
pi. .3, f. 32, L. 128, pi. 58, f. 18.
Only found singly in two of the samples, from the \'est Fiord
I. 0—50 m., '/'i 1899. and from Senjeu '-'/i, 0 — 130 m.
Probably only come in by chance and really a bottom form»
as it is frequent in bottom samples. (Cfr. under that heading.)
F.iioflia
{Hcmidisciis Wallich.
E. ^ihha Haii
Haii.. in Pkit(!1. L. 123, p. 852. pi. 8, f. 22. Hemiiiscus
aineiformis Wallich L. 137, p. 42, pi. 2, f. 3—4.
Very rare with us, in deep water, probably come in with At-
lantic water. Hitherto hardly found so far north.
Distribution: Chiefly a subtropical and southern temperate
Atlantic form, according to Cleve (L. 40, p. 330) rare north of
50" northern latitude.
Known both from the European and American side of the At-
lantic.
Aotinocyrlii» Khbb.
A. Khrenhergi Ralks.
Fre(iuent in the plankton.
Tiiis species is difticult to distinguish from those closely re-
lated to it, and seems to vary 8onsideral)ly.
Distrihidion : .Seems to occur all the year round on the west
coast of Norway, and probably also on the north coast, here at
any rate in the months January— May. Otherwise widely distri-
liuted around the European coa.sts of the North Atlantic and its
arms. Occurs exceptionally right up to Greenland, but is not an
arctic form. iScems to have a much widei- distiibution, judt-'ing from
the statements in De Toni. (L. 50).
A. Ralfsi (W. S.M.^ Hai.1'8.
This .species seems to be much rarer on our coasts, both on
the west and north, than the preceding one.
Reference should be made to the chapters on bottom samples,
where it occurs somewhat more frequently. It is, however, cer-
tainly a genuine plankton form, and not a bottom form.
Distrihditn : .Seems to have a more southerly distribution than
the foregoing species. Like the latter, it has also been found at
Greenland.
.1. siihtilis (Greg.) Ralks.
Ralfs in Pritchard L. 123, p. 835. Van Heueck SjTiopsis
(L. 88), p. 216, pi. 124, f. 7. Eupodisnts suhtilis Greg. L. 74,
p. 501, pi. 11. f. 50.
Very rare. Occuired very scarce in the plankton from Kva-n-
angen -*/. 1899, 0— Ho m.
Distrilndion : Known from the coasts of England, Spain, The
Mediterranean, The Azores and The Pacilic Ocean.
Note. A. sparsus (Greg.) Rattk. seems to occur in the plank-
ton from the northern and western coasts of Norway; but as it is
difticult to discern between this species and A. Ehrcnbeiyi, I have
not included it in my tables. Besides, another form occurs, which
certainly is specitically different from A. Ekrenbergi, and is perhaps the
same as the genuine Eupodiscus crossus W. Sm. Earlier, I took
it to be A. crassm VH. but have later become somewhat uncertain
respecting this species, whose description (by De Toni and Rattray)
does not agree well with Van Heurck's drawing. In spite of
considerable labour, I have not yet been able to come to any de-
tinite conclusion, so that I have not tabulated this form either.
For further particulars, reference should be made to the chapter
on bottom samples.
A. subocclliitus (Gri-n.) Rattr.
Rattr. L. 125. p. 145. Cosci)>odiscHs curvatulus var. siiboccl-
lata Grcn. L. 83, p. 83, pi. 4, f. 15. Actinoeijchis ciirvatuhis
Jan. in. A. Schmidt L. 128, pi. 57, f. 31.
This beautiful diatom is verj^ like Ccscinodiscus citrratulus and
is probably often mistaken for it. Possibly, therefore, it is not
quite so rare as it seems to be.
Hitherto only found in a few plankton samples of 1900 (The
Skjerstad Fiord, V*, B', V and XII; The Salten Fiord "A).
Distribution : Certainly not sufficiently known. Judging from
the available accounts, only found fossil and at various places in
the Ant-arctic regions.
2. Melosireæ.
Tliala8sio!!iii-a Cl.
T. Nordenskioldi ( l
Occurs iu i;Teat quantities in April (fi-oni tlie end of Mai'ch '
into the month of May) during the inflow of diatoms, both along i
the western and northern coasts. '
Distribution: Arctic and boreal species, occurs in the winter
tolerably far south along the Eui'opean coasts of the Atlantic and
its arms (at least as far as The English Channel). On the west
coast of Norway and at the Færoes in quantities in the months of
March — May, strangely enough in both localities in August with a
less marked secondary maximum.
T. gravida Cl.
(PI. VI, tig. 4).
Like the preceding species in almost every respect. Occurs of-
ten together with it. Endocysts frequent in April.
Distribution: On the whole the same as T. Nordenskioldi, but
perhaps less decidedly arctic.
T. hyalina (Grun.) Gran.
(PI. VI, fl;^. 5).
Gban L. 65, p. 4. 7. Clevei Gkan L. 64, p. 29, pi. 4, f.
60—62. C. hyalinus Grun. L. 48, p. 113, pi. 7, f. 128; L. 83,
pi. 3, f. 28. Vix CoscinodiscHs knjophilus Grun. L. 83. pi. 3,
f. 21.
Gran remarks (L. 65 p. 4), that he had at first suspected his
new species, T. Clevei, to be identical with Grunow's Coscinodiscus
krijophlliis, but that he had not then seen the structure of the valve.
Later, by the help of material from the Karajak Fiord (Greenland)
he felt sure that the species were identical. As, however, Cleve
(cfr. Gran) calls attention to the identity of C. hyuUnus Grun. in
Arctic Diatoms (L. 48) with T. Clevei, Gran has altered the
name.
That T halassiosira Clevei Gran and Coscinodiscus hyalinus
GiiuN. are identical, is quite certain. The only objection, which
might be made to this, was, that in Grunow's figure of Coscino-
discus hyalinus no asymmetrical marginal apiculus is to be seen.
By the kind permission of the Riksmusæum in Stockholm 1 have
been enabled to compare the slides (of mud from the Kara Sea) in
which Grunow found C. hyalinus, and I can affirm that there is
always a well marked asymmetrical marginal apiculus, larger than
the others. That this is not to be seen in Grunow's figure is
evidently (as is also the reason in the case of Porosira glacialis
and others) because it may so easily be mistaken for a foreign body
(dirt) which is only there as a matter of chance. (The preparations
referred to were, in fact, rather dirty.)
The specimens of C. hyalinus from the ivara Sea altogether
plainly showed that this species is identical with tlu^ one which
occurs on the northern coasts of Norway in the Spring.
On the contrary, it seems to me to be open to considerable
doubt as to whether C. hyalinus Grun. and C', kryophilus Grun.
are identical. It is quite strange that Grunow, in an exceedingly
careful and exact monograph on the family in question, should illu-
strate and mention these species as different ones without hinting at
any connection between them. Certainly he considered the asym-
metrical apiculus to be characteristic of the one species only, C.
kryophilus: but thei'e is, nevertheless, a great ditt'ereuce in the fi-
gures, both with regard to structure and the marginal apiculi.
These latter are particulai-ly small in C. kryophilus, while in C.
hyalinus they are very plain and comparatively large. The struc-
ture too of C. kryophilus is considerably coarser than that of C.
hyalinus, even if one does not put too much weight on the fasci-
culi, which in the figure of C. kryophilus are very clear and regu-
lar, while in C. hyalinus they are indefinite.
In material from Cape Wankarema (Vega Expedition) — ^hich
material was also kindly lent to me by the Riksmusæum, Stock-
holm — I really found a Coscinodiscus which seemed in every re-
spect to correspond to C. kryophilus. It had just that characteristic
form of the asymmetrical apiculus, which is figured by Grunow,
and also the very small marginal apiculi, which are much less
conspicuous in comparison to the asymmetrical apiculus than is the
case in C. hyalinus. (PI. YI, f. 6, a, b.)
Distribution: On the arctic coasts of Greenland, Fi'anz Jo-
seph's Land and Jan Mayen. On the northern coasts of Norway,
here only observed during the time of the inflow of diatoms, when the
species occurs in large quantities. Towards the south, it has been
found at Ona in Romsdal (in the Spring, not rare; cfr. Gean L.
70, p. 170).
Seems not to occur with us in the months of June — February.
If it does not then — as Gran supposes — „over-summer" at the
bottom by the help of resting spores, it must — if it is actually
found wanting in the other months of the year than just the Spring
ones — every year be brought in from outside.
T. decipiens Grun.
(PI. VI, fig-. 3).
Coscinodiscus decipiens Grun. in Van Heurck L. 88, pi. 91,
f. 10 (from Lamlash Bay). A. Schmidt L. 126, pi. 3, f. 38.
Thalassiosira gelatinosa Hensen L. 87, p. 87. Orthoslra angulata
Greg. L. 74, p. 498, pi. 10, f. 43 and 43 b.
As it seems to me beyond doubt that Grunow's Cose, decipiens
is the same species a.s Hensen's Thalassiosira gelatinosa (as this
species is understood by Cleve and others), I have found it neces-
sary to alter the name, the more so as Hensen's description is very
incomplete.
I 'have not had any opportunity of making comparisons with
Grunow's work (Algen und Diatoraaceen aus dem Kaspischen Meei'e
in Dr. O. Schneider: — Naturwiss. Beitr. z. Kenntniss d. Kaukasus-
lander, Dresden 1878); but as Grunow himself figures a specimen
from Lamlash Bay in Van Heurck's Synopsis, I have thought that
I could keep to this figure, which undoubtedly represents the
same species which Cleve, and others after him, has called T.
gelatinosa Hens. Grunow remarks that the species is identical with
Orthoslra angulata Greg.
Gregory's description (L. 74, p. 498) does very well too for
our species, less the drawing. It is interesting that Gregory has
found the species occurring in chains. His opinion, viz. that these
chains are constructed similarly to those of Melosira (where the
links touch each other), may no doubt be accounted for by the fact
that the long marginal apiculi in a side view may so easily produce
the same image as the cells.
In the plankton from the northern coasts of Norway, this spe-
cies appears to vary considerably. Two principal series of forms
occur, the one with numerous marginal spines and a not very plain
exeentric structure, but plain fasciculi; the other with fewer mar-
I'lotistplankton.
ijinal spines and plainer excentric secondai-y curves. Tlie figures
referred to above belong- to the latter form. There appears, how-
ever, to be so much variety, both in tlie nunibei' of tlie spines and
tlicir distance from each othci-, and in the numbei- of the fasciculi,
that it does not seem adviseablo to look upon the two series of forms
as bcin<;- specifically different.
As the species does not always appear to be riirlitiy under-
stood, I iiavo added a few remarks on its structure.
Around a central areole there are, as in t', cxcciitrinifi, 7
areoles forming, in conjunction with the central areole, an indistinct
central rosette. From here the areoles decrease in size (|uickly and
evenly right out to the margin. The secondary curves near the
margin are nearly straight, often neai'ly to "A of the radius reckoned
from the margin inwards, but further in, towards tlie centre, de-
cidedly concave outwards, as in C. excentricus. The valve is de-
cidedly convex on account of the high and abrupt marginal zone,
and is thus easily discerned from C. excentrimis, which is nearly
quite flat. Besides Thalassiosini decqAens always has the very long,
bent marginal spines. An odd, asymmetrical, spine is always
present.
In side view the chains may very easily be taken for T. Nor-
dennholdi, whose structure, however, is altogether different.
Only observed during the inflow of diatoms, at which time it
was abundant and frequently (especially in 1900) in large quantities.
Distribution: Seems to be the same as that of Thcdassiosira
JS^rdeiiskioldi and T. yravida, and is often met with in their com-
pany. Yet, the secojidary maximum in August is wanting (on the
west coast of Norway and the Faeroes), and the species is, on the
whole, very rare except at the time of the Spring inflow.
Co!!ieiiiowira Gean.
C. polycborda. (Gran) Gran.
As I have mentioned in an earlier paper, (L. 92, p. 24), this
species may easily be confused with Coscinodiscus lineatm, as the
characteristic transverse processus are often difficult to discover,
and it seems possible that thy may be altogether wanting. The most
frequent form with 6 fasciculi corresponding to 6 transverse pro-
cessus •uill, thus, on the whole, have the same structure as Cose.
Vineatus, only much finer. The specimens -which I have tabulated
as Cose, linmtiis var. from a few places, are perhaps such forms
of Coseinosira poJyehorda where the transverse processus are wanting.
Marginal apiculi, granules and various other processus on the
valves of diatoms seem to be rather inconstant, or at any rate very
varying, which probably is owing to theu- being more or less in-
completely silicated.
Very rare, except at the time of the inflow of diatoms, when
it is abundant.
Distribution: On the whole, the same as 2 halassiosira Nor-
denskioldi and T. grarula. It appears to occur all the year round
on the west coast of Norway, where it has, at any rate, been found
in most months; but it is common only during the inflow in the
Spring.
Poro»«ira n. gen.
Structure of the valve is in the only known species very fine,
in other respects as Podosira hormo'ldcs. Over tiie whole surface.
thickest along the margin, scattered pores which probably are the
perforations of more or less plain short, hollow spines. Such ai-e
seen near tlie margin after destruction of the organic matter by
burning.
Inside tiie margin at one spot on the surface, a large, strong,
odd (asymmetrical) spine. The connective zone is apparently for-
med of numerous rings, which, owin-j- to their delicacy, arc rather
indistinct.
Forms chains, of two or a kw links, in which the latter are
joined jtogether by a short, and very thick, central mucilaginous
band, in wiiich one may with some difficulty discover fine threads.
The band seems almost to be structureless and is as good a,s in-
visible in water, but is easily seen on colouring with various dyes
e. g. methylene blue and gentian violet.
Chromatophores, on the whole, the same as in Coscinodiscus,
polygonally roundish discs scattered along the valves and the con-
nective zone.
It seems to me to be somewhat unnatural, like Gkan, to refer
the following species to the genus Lauderia. I think it would be
best to limit that genus to those species only which form stiff
chains of links which touch each other). On the other hand, the
difference between this species and Thcdassiosira is so great that
it should scarcely be considered as belonging to this genus either,
notwithstanding that the chains, generally speaking, are similarly
formed. There is too, according to my opinion, another important
difference in the structure of these genera, wliicii 1 hope to be
able to explain more fully on a later occasion.
The genus Podosira forms stipitated chains (of 2 or a few in-
dividuals). Perhaps it will, however, prove not to be possible to
carry out a systematic classification based upon such principles, al-
though it would seem to be an important considei'ation, in a natural
system, whether a chain colony is swimming freely about (plantonic)
or is fettered. On the other hand it may perhaps be found that
several species of Coscinodiscus with scattered dots on the surface
wiW find a more natural place in my proposed genus Porosira.
P. glacialis (Grun.)
(PI. VI, fio-. 7).
Podosira hormoides var. glacialis Grux. L. 83, p. 56, pi. 5,
f. 32. P. glaeialis (Geun.) Cl. L. 27, p. 24. Lauderia glacicdis
(Geux.) Gran L. 68, p. 111.
Out of tlie pores of the valve extend fine threads, which are
only seen with difficulty, in a very thick, short mucilaginous cy-
linder, which connects both valves. Probably similar threads ex-
tend without this cylindei".
There are also near the margin, long fine, mucilaginous threads
which extend obliquely outwards and downwards, and probably
serve as a floating apparatus. Precisely similar threads are found
in Thalassiosira gravida, whose structure is remarkably like tliat
of the above species.
Very scarce except during the inflow of diatoms, but then
very frequent and often in great quantities, especially in 1899.
Distribution: Yet unsufficiently known, but probably, on the
whole, the same as Thalassiosira Nordenskioldi. Also found in the
Kara Sea. Numerous in the year 1900 during the inflow of dia-
toms in the Spring on the west coast of Norway.
13
Kreletoiienia costatum (Greg.) Ci,.
Distribidion : Very frequent on the west coast of Norway,
often in lai-ge quantities. Occurs all the year round, but varies
very much in quantity. On the north coast April— May ; here too
there are very great variations in quantity. Also more or less
frequent on the northei'n European coasts of the Atlantic and its
arms. Known too from a few places on the tropical coasts (Ben-
gal, Java, Hongkong, The West Indies) and from Japan.
Paralia sulcata (Kbrb.) Cl.
Hardly a true plankton form, at any rate not with us. Is
vei-y frequent in bottom samples (cfr. the corresponding chapter)
from Nordland and Finmarken. The few specimens which have
been found in plankton samples, especially from deep water near
the bottom, have probably come there quite by accident. The numer-
ous valves which are found in bottom samples, cannot be considered
to come from plankton, for then one would expect to find the
species, at any rate occasionally, numerous in plankton samples,
which is, however, as far as my experience goes, never the case,
at least with us. Nothing is proved either by the presence of a
few solitary individuals in samples taken far from the bottom, as
such individuals may have been bi-ought there with algæ which
have been torn away or — when they are found in diatom slides
— may have been swallowed by Crustacea or similar small animals.
Distrihut'wn : Frequent on the northern coasts of the Atlantic
(on the American side from the coast of Central America) right up
to Greenland and Franz Joseph's Land. Mentioned as occurring
(February 1903) now and then in abundance in surface samples
from the English Channel (L. 18).
Il>alodlsoii!« Ehkb.
H. scoticits (KiiTZ.) Grun.
No true plankton foi'ni. Frequent in bottom samples (cfr. the
coi'i-esponding cliapter).
H. siihtilis liAti..
liAih. L. 8, p. 10. f. 12.
In a plankton sample from Malangen '"A 1899, 0—300 m.,
a few single specimens were found which seemed to belong to this
species.
Hardly any true jjlunkton form.
H. stuinger Baii,.
Doubtful as a true plankton form. Neither is it frequent in
bottom samples. Perhaps come in with algæ.
Distribution: The northern European coasts of the Atlantic
and its arms.
On the west coast of Norway found all the year round in
plankton, but always in small quantities. Mentioned from the
English Channel in surface samples, occasionally numerous (especi-
ally in February 1903), often together with Paralia sulcata.
3. Eupodisceæ.
Roperia Ghun. in Van Heurck.
(L. 88. pi. 118).
R. tessellata (Rop.) Gruj
-7. Eujiodiseus tcssellatus Rop. L.
Adinocydus tessellatus Ralfs in
Geun. 1. c. pi. 118, f. 6-
126, p. 19, pi. 3, f. 1 a, b.
Peitch. (L. 123) p. 835.
Peculiar structure (cfr. Van Heukck's Synopsis). It seems,
however, that it may well be included, at any rate as a subgenus,
in the genus Adinocydus.
This beautiful species occurs only singly and rarely in the
plankton, in deep water samples in 1899: — 'Vi The Vest Fiord
I, 0—180 m.; "/i Senjen, 0—130 m.; ^'A Henningsvær, 0—250 m.
Distribution: Occurs, according to Cleve, on the coasts of
Scotland. Scarcely a literal, but certainly a true plankton form.
Also known from the coasts of France and England. It has most
Ukely been overlooked, and is probably more frequent than the
few places mentioned would indicate. Also occurs on the west
coast of Norway, but seldom (Feb. 1899). I have also seen it in
oceanic plankton samples outside the noi'th west coast of Norway
(S/S Michael Sars 1901).
Judging from its occui'rence with us, it gives the impression of
being a temperate, Atlantic, oceanic species.
AuliHcniii Ehrb.
L. .54, p. 270.
A. sculptus (W. Sm.) Ei
pi. 6, f. 3. Van Heueck
zulptus W. Sm. L. 134, I,
Ralfs in Peitch, (L. 123), p. 845,
L. 88, pi. 117, f. 1 — 2. Eujwdiscus s,
p. 25, pi. 4, f. 39.
No true plankton form. Frequent in bottom samples, both
from the northei'n and western coasts of Norway. (Cfr. the corres-
ponding chapter.)
4. Asterolauipreæ.
Artiiiopt.^'diiis iiiiiliilatiis (Bail. y) Rai.ks.
I am not sure if this species really is a tiue plankton form.
It occurs especially in deep water samples and always very scar-
cely. It is not numerous in bottom samples either.
Distribution : Has a wide distribution on the northern Euro-
pean coasts of the Atlantic and its arms, and is found right up to
Greenland. Is not considered by Cleve and Ostenfeld to be a
genuine plankton form.
Is mentioned (L. 18, IV) as occasionally frequent in surface
samples from the English Channel (Feb. 1903). In the same
samples, other doubtful plankton forms, such as Paralia sulcata
and Byalofliscus sMUiicr, also occur more or less frequent.
AKtoi'»lil|>liallis hvptactis (Bhéb.) Ralfs.
Very rare: January 1899, especially in deep water samples.
Distribution: With us a southern, oceanic species, which is
Protistplanktc
99
very rare liotli on the west and north coast, and especially (only?)
oexjurs in the winter months. According' to Cleve (L. 40, p. 284)
widely distiibuted in the teinpci-ate part of the Atlantic.
5. Biddnlphieæ.
Riddiilpliia (iitw.
B. atirita (I
.) liUÉU.
Occurs vei-y larely in .lanuary and February, but much more
frequently during the period of the diatom inflow, and then oc-
casionally in larger quantities.
Distribution : On the northei'n coasts of the Atlantic and its
arms, right up to the arctic regions. (Greenland). Arctic and
boreal species, on the west coast of Norway and otf the PaerOes
only found in the months of Spring.
B. mobiliensis Bail.
Very rare and only singly.
Distribution : Appears to be a southern form, which is not found
all the year round on the coasts of Norway. On the west coast,
it is most frequent in February and November. According to Cleve,
in large quantities on the coast of the British Isles.
February 1903 in abundance in the English Channel (L. 18, IV).
Kncampia groenJaudica Cl.
(PI. VI, tig. 8).
Only found twice: Brettesnes, V4 1899, 0—3 m., Ingohavet
■*/4 1890, 0—300 m.
Distribution: Arctic coa.st: Bafflns Bay, Da\is Strait, Green-
land. Also found, single specimens, on the coasts of Bohuslan
(Sweden) and Scotland.
6. Chætocereæ.
Detoiinia conferracea (C'l.) Uran.
Lauderia confer vacea Cl. L. ■2ti, p. 11, pi. II, f. 21. Detonula
conferracea Gkan L. 68, p. 113.
Specimens, which seemed to belong to this species, were seen
singly in one of the samples: — Folstad V4 1899, in a surface
sample (0—3 m.).
Distribution: Baftin's Bay. A closely related species, D.
ci/stifera Gran 1. c. p. 113, pi. 9, f. 15—20, has been found in the
Lim Fiord in Denmark, in the Avinter.
Bactei-osira Gran.
L. 68, p. 114.
B. fragilis (Gran) Gran 1. c.
Laiuleria fragilis Gran L. 65, p. 115, pi. 1, f. 12 — 14.
Occurs only during the inflow of diatoms in the spring months.
Very frequent from the beginning of April, often in great quantities.
Distribution: Does not occur on the west coast of Norway.
Decidedly arctic species. Found earlier by Gran on the coast of
Nordland and Finmark (April 1901.) Also known from Greenland,
the sea west of Novaja Semlja (S/S Heimdal, May 1900, cfr.
Gban L. 70, p. 170), several places on the north and west coasts
of Iceland and Greenland (May and June 1898, cfr. Cleve L. 40,
p. 331) and right up to Spitzbergen and the sea between Spitz-
bergen and Iceland (May and July 1899; cfr. Cl. 1. c.)
I>it.vliiini Ilriglitwclli (West.) Grin.
Rare and scarce.
Distribution: According to Cleve (L. 40, p. 325) very fre-
quent in the English Channel, the North Sea and Skagerack, only
scarce in the Atlantic. Can hardly be considered as native on the
west coast of Norway, but is found here in small numbers in most
months of the year. Numerous in February 1903 (scarce in May
of the same year, L. 18, IV). Probably comes to us from the more
southern coasts.
Rhixofsoleniu Eiirb.
R. alata Briohtw.
Very rare and only scarce.
Distribution: Widely distributed in the southern and northern
temperate districts of the Atlantic. (Cf. Cleve L. 40, p. 337).
In the English Channel occasionally frequent in February 1903
(L. 18, IV). Hardly to be considered native on the west coast of
Norway, but found in small numbers m nearly all the months of
the year. Comes to us as a southern oceanic form. Also known
from Mediterranean, the Indian and the Pacific Ocean.
R. stylitormis Briohtw.
Only once found: — Skroven 72 1899, in a deep water sample,
scarce.
Distribution: Widely distributed from the wanner districts of
the Atlantic right up to Greenland and Spitzbergen. On the west
coast of Norway most frequent in the summer months. The same
at the Faeroe Islands. Comes to us as a southern oceanic form.
Also known from the Mediterranean, the Indian Ocean and the
Pacific Ocean.
R. ShrubsoU Cj
1899 Malangen
Only found scarce in two samples: —
0—100 m., and -'/s 1900 Bålstad, 0—50 m.
Distribution: Distributed over the temperate European coasts
of the Atlantic. Occurs on the west coast of Norway and at the
Faeroe Islands all the year round, most frequent in the summer
months. According to Gran (L. 70, p. 173) at Ona (Romsdalen),
occasionally, from May to October. It would thus appear to be
stationary on the west coast of Norway, but not on the north coast.
Quite exceptionally found northwards right up to Greenland. Also
known from the Mediterranean, the Indian Ocean and Japan (cf.
Cleve L. 40, p. 348).
R. semispina Hens.
Very rare and only singly.
Distribution: Occurs as an oceanic form in large numbers in
the arctic waters and in the boundaries of the arctic and Atlantic
waters. Not frequent on the coast of the Faeroe Isles, nor on the
west coast of Norway, where it is, nevertheless, found in most
months, most frequent in November (1898). According to Cleve,
also known from Hudson's Bay.
R. setigera Brightw.
Only once found: — '■'A 1899 Malangen, in a deep water
sample.
Distribution : Neritic species, scarcely to be considered native
to the Norwegian coasts. Known from the coasts of France, Eng-
land and Scotland, as well as from the Skagerack and the west
coast of Norway. Gives the impression of being brought to the
latter from the southern coasts in the autumn, but also occurs in
the winter and spring months, but always in small numbers. Has
therefore probably also a (smaller) northern area of distribution. (Is
reckoned by Cleve to be a southern and northern ueritic species).
C'oi'l'tliroii liystrix Hens.
Very rare and only scarce.
Distrihution : Comes to us as a southern oceanic form. On
the west coast of Norway also very rare (1898). Rare too near the
Faeroe Isles. Distributed in the Northern temperate Atlantic up
to Iceland and East Greenland.
C'liwtoeei'os Ehrb.
C. horealis Bail.
Occurs in numerous samples, but always in small numbers.
Didrihut'ion: Arctic and northern temperate, oceanic form,
wliich often occurs in very large numbers in arctic waters and in
the boundaries between these and the Atlantic. On the west coast
of Norway, 1898, more or less frequent in most months, especially
in May — July. A similar state of things was found at the Faeroe
Isles.
C. deijsus Cl.
Does not seem to he fi'e([uent. Is, however, perhaps often
mistaken for othei- forms.
Distrihution: Appeal's to be a southern form.
C. dcnsus
rudis ('l
The form entered in the tables for 1900 under this name is
uKcc^rtain. Although in side view as well as by its unu.sually coarse
and coarsely dentate awns recalling the illustration of Chaetoæros
hoycidis var. rudis in Cleve's Phytoplankton (L. 27) pi. 1, f. .5, it
diti'ers in some other points; neither do I know the shape of the
terminal awns nor their direction in Ceeve's species.
It is, at any rate, very improbable that my species is the same
as C. coarctatus Laud., which Cleve (L. 4(i, p. .306) mentions as
being the right name for the foini which he previously called C.
horealis var. rudis.
C. danivits (Jl.
Very rare and only scarce. Only found in a few samples:
*li 1899, Helle, 0—3 m., -7:) 1900, HOla, 0—50 m. and the Sal-
ten Fiord, V4 1900.
Distrihution: The noilhern European coasts of the Atlantic
and its arms as far as the Baltic. On the west coast of Norway
it is found most montlis, but most fi-equeutly in the summer.
C, criophilus Castr.
Cfr. E. Jørgensen L. 92.
Only once found: '-■'A 1899, in the sea off IngO.
Distribution : Appears to be a decidedly arctic species, wliich
often occurs in very large quantities in the arctic waters and in
their boundary towaids the Atlantic. Its distribution is, howevei-,
not sufficiently known, as it has been confused with the following
species.
C. coiirolutus Castr.
Cfr. E. Jørgensen L. 92.
Frequent during the inflow of diatoms in spring, often rather
numerous. Otherwise scarce.
Distrihution: Appears to be an arctic and boreal species,
which often occurs in large quantities in the arctic waters and then-
boundary towards the Atlantic (Jan Mayen 1897). On the west
coast of Norway found all the yeai- round, but always in small
numbers. It may be possible that this species is neritic rather
than oceanic. Frequent in May 1903 in the English Channel
(L. IS, IV).
C. atlanticus Cl.
Frequent, but only as an exception somewhat numerous, gener-
ally only scarce.
Distribution: Ai'ctic and boreal oceanic form, often occurring
in vei'y large quantities in the arctic waters and their boundary
towards the Atlantic. (Cfr. E. Jørgensen L. 92). On the west
coast of Norway found in most months, but, as a rule, scarce.
Common off the Faei'iies in spring.
C. dcciph-ns: Cl.
Frequent during the diatom inflow in spring, otlierwise rare
and scarce. Decidedly more frequent in the samples of 1900 than in
those of 1899.
Distribution: Arctic and boreal oceanic form which seems to
bear the change from the arctic to the Atlantic watci-s particularly
well. Often occurs in abundance in the boundary waters. On the
west coast of Norway, rather connnon, reaching its maximum in
Api'il (1898). This also the case at the Faeroe Islands. Also
very abundant on the west coast of Norway in the montlis July —
September (1898).
C. teres ('l.
Frequent in the samples, but always in small numbers.
Distribution: Arctic (oceanic?) and boreal form, . which only
as an exception appears to be found more numerous. On the west
coast of Norway very scarce, though found in most months. Near
the Faeroe Islands frequent in the months March — .liuic, at other
times rare. At Ona (cfr. Gran L. 70, p. 178) fi'oni March to
July, most frequent hi April.
My opinion is that this is an oceanic species I'ather than a
neritic one, and is hardly native on our coasts. (Has been repeat-
edly found with endocysts, therefore, according to Guan, neritic,
hut a hinii which may often drift far out into the open sea).
ProtiHtpliinktii
( . CDtitortiis Sem IT.
Generally speakiiiL;- rare ami seaire. only oceasiunally imuierous
(luiini; the diatom intiow in the sprin? of 18'.)5).
DiatrihKt'wn: More or less frequent on the noi'tliern Hnrojtean
coasts of the Atlantie and its arms. On the west coast of Norway
frequent, often numerous; most likely here native.
\'ery scarce (iu thiec samples) and only singly.
lUiitrUmtion : On the west coast of Norway somewhat fre-
quent, especially at the beginnin.<;' of the diatom inflow (March 1898).
Does not occur iu all the inonths of the year here neither. Off
the Facroe Islands not vnw in the months of Auo-. — September
1902. otherwise only once in March 1901 (cfr. Ostenfeld L. 116,
p. 573). According to Gkan L. 70, p. 179 on the north east coast
of Iceland, scarce. Otherwise found more or less scarce on the coasts
of the Noi'th (Sea and Skageraek.
AccordiuiT to Gran, this species is neritic (endocysts being
found). My opinion is that it is probably neritic. but not likely to
prove native with us.
r. constrictus (Iran.
Very rare and scarce, only found twice: -■'A 1899, in the sea
off IngO, 0—300 m.; Vo 1899, VardO, 0—200 m.
Distribution : Occurs on the northern coasts of the Atlantic
on the American side, off Iceland, the Faeroe Islands, Great Bri-
tain and the coasts of the North tSea. On the west coast of Nor-
way found in 1898 nearly all the year through, most numerous in
April and November. Does not appear to be native on the nor-
thern coasts of Norway.
C. laciniosus Schl-tt.
On the whole rather rare and scarce, although occasionally
more frequent in the month of May 1899.
Distribution: Northern temperate coast form. On the west
coast of Norway frequent; occurs during most months, but seldom
numerous. Rare round the Faeroe Islands. At Ona in Romsdalen
March— October, reaching its maximum in May. iCfr. Gean L. 70,
p. 178).
C. brevis Schitt.
Cfr. E. .JoRGEXSEX L. 91. p. 12 and Ostenfeld L. 114,
p. 295.
Very rare and scarce, only found in two samples: V* 1899,
Helle, 0—8 m.; 7* 1900, the Folden Fiord I, 0 — 100 m.
Distribution : Not sufticiently known, as this species has been
confused with the foregoing one. Rare on the west coast of Norway,
and generally found singly; noticed in the months of August, No-
vember and December. In the English Channel in May 1903,
scarce. Does not appear to be native on the northern coasts of
Norway.
C. Scliiittii Ci..
Very rare and scarce, only found in two samples: Lyngen,
■Vi 1899, 0—50 m.; Malangen =7i 1899, 0—300 m.
Distribution: Southern form, distributed along the coasts of
the North Sea. Rather rare on the west coast of Norway, (1898: j
Augu.;— September, November— December). Often found iu the [
open sea. Hound the Facmc Islands, both in an ea.sternly and wcst-
ernly direction, at considerable distance out. in quantities in .May
19n:{ (!,. is. |\'). [^cems to come to us as a .southern oceanic
form.
C. WilUi GriA.N,
Raie and .scarce, only found in a few samples. Most likely
the same form which is mentioned by Ostexfei-u from the Faeroe
Islands (L. IKi, p. 573) as an intermediate form between C.
Schtlttii and C. WiUci.
Distribution: Freiiuent on the west coast of Noruay and
probably native here. Distributed along the coa.sts of the North
Sea, and extends farther northwards than the foregoing species.
Does not. however, appear to be native to the northern coa.sts of
Norway.
C. diadema (Eiihu ) (;ra.s.
Conmion and in 'jn-at (juantities during the diatom intiow in
spring; at other times rare and singly. < )ften found with end-
ocysts.
It is possible that there aix'. in this species, still included spe-
cifically different forms.
Distribution: Arctic and boreal coast form. Rare round the
Faeroe Islands. Found in most months of the year, but as a rule
not numerous, on the west coast of Norway. Very frequent at Ona.
in Romsdalen, in March— April, less so in June— July. (Grax L.
70, p. 179).
C. furcillHtiis li.Mi..
In large quantities during the diatom intiow in the spring of
1899, less abundant in the samples of 1900. May easily be con-
fused with other species, when its characteristic endocysts are
wanting. In 1900 they were mostly absent.
Distribution: Arctic coast form, widely distributed from the
coasts of Iceland right up to the arctic regions, both on the Ameri-
can and European side. Wanting on the west coast of Norway
and round the Facroe Islands. Frci|uent in March — April at Ona
(Gran L. 70. p. Iso).
Very rare and scarce, only found in two of the samples, Hel-
ligvær, '-/il899, 0—50 m., and Bålstad, ='/3 190n, 0—50 m.
Distribution: Southern coast form from the temperate, Euro-
pean coasts of the Atlantic, northwaids to Skagerack. the North
Sea and the west coast of Noi'way. On the latter coast, frequent
in nearly every month of 1S9S, most numerous during the .summer.
Ona: March. July— August, occasionally (Ghan L. 70, p. 179).
Very seldom noticed as far north as Spilzbergon. Not men-
tioned from the Faeroe Islands.
C. dehilis Cl.
Frequent during the diatom intiow in spring, often in large
quantities; at other times very scarce.
Distribution : Distributed along the northern European coasts
of the Atlantic, the North Sea and Skagerack. On the west coast
of Nonvay and round the Faeroe Islands very frequent, with maxi-
mum twice a year, in the spring months and in August. Also
found near Greenland.
E. Jørgensen.
C. socialis Lai u.
In large quantities dm-ing the diatom intiow in spring. Endo-
cysts very frequent.
Distribution: Arctic coast form. Occurs in quantities also on
the west coast of Norway during the diatom inflow in spring.
Only occasionally round the Faeroe Islands.
I b. Peniiatæ.
7. Synedreæ-
Tlialassiothrix Cl. et Grin.
T. lonøssinia ('l. et Grun.
In 1899 rare and scarce, in 1900 not observed.
DistrUmtion : Oceanic species, distributed over the northei'n
part of the Atlantic from the American to the European side, right
up to Spitzbergen. On the west coast of Norway in 1898 found
during most months of the year, but always scarce. Very rare
round the Faeroe Islands.
T. nitzscbioides Grun.
(PI. VI, tig-. 11).
Gkun. in VH. Syn. (L. 88), pi. 43, f. 7—10.
(In the tables T. Frauenfeldii and T. Fr. var. nitzschioides).
This species is certainly the same as the one wliich, in nearly
all plankton tables, is called T. Frauenfeldii. Strangely enough,
Cleve refers (L. 40, p. 356 & 357) to VH. Synopsis pi. 37, f. 11—
12 and, for „the variety" javanica Grun., f. 13. The species which
corresponds to figures 11 and 12, and which I know from the
Indian Ocean, is, however, very different from the one which is so
frequently seen in the coast plankton in our latitudes. The „variety"
javanica Grun. does corre.spond better with regard to the closeness
of the puncta, but, in other respects, differs so much that it can
hardly be considered to be the same as our common plankton spe-
cies. On the other hand, it is also in structure so different from
what is taken to be the main species that it cannot be united with
it unless, (as perhaps is the case, although I have never seen any
mention of such) there are a number of intermediate forms.
But our plankton species, as far as I can see, corresponds in
every respect to 'Thalamothrix? nitzschioides Gnvs. It is true that
this species does not answer well to the characteristics of the genus
Thalassiothrix, but is yet so different in important points from the
genus Synedra that I think it should better be referred as a sub-
genus 7 haJassionema (Grun.) to Thulussiothri.r rather than be re-
tained in the genus Synedra.
1 have earlier thought, from the description given by De 'Joni
of the structure of these forms (L. 50, p. 672 — 673), that all three
{T. Frauenfeldii, T. javanica and 7'. nitzschioides) should be con-
sidered as one species (cfr. E. Jørgensen L. 91, p. 22), but
have since not found, after my own experience, any definite reason
for so doing.
More or less frequent, especially during the diatom inflow in
the spring of 1900, but never noticed in such large quantities as in
more southerly samples.
Distribution: This species is ceilainly neritic, but the genuine
T. Frauenfeldii is probably oceanic. Is widely distributed along
the coasts of the northern Atlantic and its arms, northwards as far
as Greenland. On the west
quantities in the spring.
coast of Norway common, in large
Fragilaria Lyngb.
F. oceanica Cl.
Cl. L. 22, p. 22, pi. -1, f. 25 a, b. Gran L. 65, p. 8, pi. 1,
f. 6-9.
In large quantities during the diatom inflow, at other times
absent. Strange to say it appears all at once in large quantities.
Distribution: Arctic coast form. According to Ciæve also
found in Hudson's Bay. Is not found so far south as Bergen, on
the west coast of Norway. At Ona frequent in March — April,
according to Gran (L. 70, p. 180).
JF. cylindrus Grdn.
(Plate VI, fig. 9).
Gbun. L. 83, p. 55, pi. 2, f. 13. Gran L. 65, p. 8, pi. 1,
f. 4—5.
Occurs together with the preceding species in large quantities
in spring.
Distribution: On the coast of North Siberia, Frantz Joseph's
Land and Greenland; in quantities in May in Davis Strait (Cleve
L. 26). Probably a neritic arctic species. Not mentioned before
from Norway. In the Barents Sea, 71" 48' n. lat., 49" 38' e. long.
'Vs 1900, numerous together with the preceding species.
F. islandica Grun.
(PI. VI, fig. 10).
Grunow in VH. L. 88, pi. 45, f. 37.
In some few samples from 1900 during the diatom inflow in
spring a species was observed, which I think is identical with
the one above mentioned. It occurred sparingly, but in rather long
chains. I have not, however, succeeded in seing it in valvar ^iew.
Distribution: Jan Mayen (1. c.) By Cleve also once observed
numerous in the North Sea (L. 27, p. 3), together with northern
neritic species.
8. Plagiograinineæ.
<•!> |ilio(l<'siiiis Williams
(W. Sm.) Grun.
Hardly a genuine plancton form. Here, as on the west coast
of Norway, probably brought in by (or torn ott' from) species of
fixed algæ (sea — weed).
g. Tahellarieæ.
€iraiiiiiiato|thora Ehrb.
G. islandica Ehrb. and G. oceanica Ehrb.
Not genuine plankton forms, only torn off from algae, or car-
ried on with them.
ItliailMloiit'iiiii KiTZ.
R. miinitum Knz , K. iircimtuiii (I.VNOii.) Kit/, iin.l K. iiilriiiticiim KiTZ.
Nut tri'uuiiie plankton I'onns. most likely by iiceidunt brought
alonsr tVom tixeci al^ae.
Striatflla unijniueUitn (Ly.nob.) Ao.
Very rare and scarce. The Vest Fiord '/a 1H99, 0—200 m.,
the Ogs Fiord II, '^3 1899. (i— 200 m., and the Skjerstad Fiord
V, 'A 1900, 0-420 in.
Hardly a genuine plankton fonn, by chance brought in from
fixed algae.
D'lstr'iliui'niH : Widely distributed along the temperate coasts
of the Atlantic. .\lso mentioned from Finmai'k, where it, however,
to judge from the bottom samples, api)ears to be rare.
JO. Nitzschieæ.
Raeillariii sucialis Greg.
Greg. L. 75, p. 8u, pi. 1, f. 45. VH. Synopsis (L. 88), pi.
61, f. 8.
(Wrongly entered in the tables as B. paradoxa).
Not a genuine plankton form. Only very sparsely and quite
exceptionally noticed in the plankton. Frequent in the bottom
samples.
Diatribtition : The coasts of the Atlantic from Portugal to the
arctic regions (Sea of Kara). Also mentioned from the Baltic and
the Antilles.
\it7,!iicliia Hass.
N. seriata Cl. (includinj; A', frandulftita ('l.)
Only found during the inflow of diatoms in spring, then almost
always frequent, and often numerous.
Distribution: Arctic and boreal species. It seems to be a
neiitic species, which may perhaps be native to our west coast
where it is found more or less abundantly during most months (of
1898), often in quantities, most numerous in May— June. Ofif the
Faeroe Islands generally very sparsely, but numerous in June 1898.
Also known from Greenland, Spitzbergen and the Barents Sea
(S/S Heimdal 1900, -'A, 71" 48' n., 49" 38' east, sparsely). Cfr.
Ci-EVE L. 40, p. 335, where he mentions the species as being
specially distributed between Scotland, Iceland and Greenland. He
also (1. c.) mentions that var. fraudulcnta is known from the
Mediterranean. It is therefore probable that there are two species ;
the one, N. fraudulentn Cl. having a southern distribution and
being probably oceanic, while the other is neritic and arctic.
A', delicatissima Oi,.
Cl. L. 27, p. 24, pi. 2, f. 22.
This species is so small, more particularly so narrow, that it
must be supposed as a rule to go through the net. In the plank-
ton material at my disposal it has certainly in the majority of cases
been retained by the colonies of Phæocyctis.
Like the preceding, only found during the inHow of diatoms
in .spring, then fre(|uent, and in all probability much more so than
would appear from the tables.
Distrihutiou: Probably, like the preceding sjiecies, really an
arctic, neritic species, which, however, seems to thrive in the water
mixed with the warmer Atlantic .\lso, like the preceding species,
found off the Faeroe Islands. Known too from Spitzl)ergen and
Skagerack where it occurs in winter. At Ona (cfr. (Jhan I^. 70,
p. 181) frequent in June— July 1900.
N. hyhrida «bin.
(PI. VI, Hk. 12).
('i,, and (iui N. L. is. p. 71i. pi. .■), f. '.t5. \'ll. Synopsis (L.
8H) pi. (iO, f. 4-5.
I have included, undei- this heading, a number of forms which
frequently occurred during the inflow of diatoms in the spring of
1899 and 1900, although generally only in small numbers. They
are not in every instance entered in the tables, and are consider-
ably more frequent than would appear from them. Seems to be
a genuine plankton form. I have illustrated some of these forms
(PI. VI, tig. 12). Figure 12 a represents those wliich are most fre-
quent, but they are most often less distinctly constricted in the middle,
often of an even breadth.
Strise I have only seen on the one illustrated by flg. 12 e (about
27 on 10 iJ.) which differs considerably from the ordinary form, also
in the number of puncta on its keel (13 on 10 |i).
The closely allied species A', (lu/hrida var. ?) peUucida Grun.
has the puncta on the keel somewhat closer (13-14 on 10 |i) but
in otliPi- icspects it answers better to the forms which I have ob-
served.
Geunow mentions (1. c.) that there are a number of intermediate
forms, which it is difficult to define, between .V. hilohnta and -V.
hyhrida. All my forms have the keel puncta more widely separa-
ted in the middle; they are often comparatively long and there
is a decided trace of a central nodule. The keel appears to be
very eccentric — 1 have, however, only in a couple of instances
seen the species in valvar view, cfr. fig. 12 d — so that there
seems to be a connection with the forms which are related to A'.
duhia W. Sm.
Seems to be a genuine plankton form. It is (with us I only
slightly siliceous and often occurs in pairs, (juite rarely also in short
chains of several links.
Distribution: Aictic and boreal coast form. Known from
Greenland, Spitzbergen, the Barents Sea, (S/S Heimdal 1900, ",;.
71" 48' n., 49" 38 east, in small numbers, the same form as with
us) and the Kara Sea. Cfr. 1)k Toni (L. 50, p. 513) who men-
tions it as occurring also on the coasts of Great Britain.
N. hilohata W. Sm.
W. S.M. L. 134, p. 42. pi. 15. f. 113. VH. Synopsis p. 175,
pi. GO. f. 1.
Occurs very seldom and only singly. Hardly a true plank-
ton form.
Distrihittion : Widely distributed on the temperate European
coasts of the .\tlantic.
iV. frigida Grit;.
Cl. and Gkln. L. 48, p. 94, pi. 5, f. 101.
Rather rare and always in small numbers, there is a form
104
which coi responds to the illustration mentioned whei-e there is ijixeu
a front view of this species. Besides typical forms, others also
occur which are hardly any broader in the middle.
I have not seen this species in valvar view. It seems unlikely
that my species should have the characteristic form of valve as
illustrated by Oestrup, L. 1.38, pi. 8, f. 99 a— e.
Distribution: Arctic, neritic form, known from Greenland, the
Barents Sea and the Kara Sea.
N. arctiea Cl.
(PI. VI, fig. 1.5).
Cl. L. 26, p. 21, pi. 1, f. 21. 22.
Rather frequent, but always in small numbers, there occurs a
species wliich it has been difficult to determine with certainty.
It was noticed both in 1899 and 1900, but only during the
inflow of diatoms, and is only entered in the tables for 1900, under
the name of N. recta Hantzsch, which is, however, a wrong' one.
I thought afterwards that it might perhaps be a straight form of
the high arctic species N. lævissimu Grun., but finally held to the
designation ^V. arctiea Cl.
I have also here observed a number of forms which are more
like each other- than the corresponding ones of N. hyhrida.
The keel is very eccentric, the puncta very Uttle lengthened
in width, 7V2— 10 on 10 |i, the two in the middle being more widely
separated and there is a ti-ace of a central nodule. The valve is narrow
lanceolate, acuminate.
The cell in side view is long and narrow, linear, somewhat
broader in the middle, with truncate ends. The connective zone
longitudinally striated.
Varies much in length, 60—100 ij., the cell is 7—12 \i. broad
in side view, the valve 4—5 |j. broad.
Strangely enough no striæ were to be seen. All the specimens
I examined were, however, thin walled.
Seems to be with us a true plankton foi'ui.
Distribution: On the north east coast of Siberia (Cape Wan-
karema) and Da\1s Strait. Probably an arctic coast form.
N. angularis W. Sm.
(PI. VI, fig. 14).
\V. Sm. L. 134, pi. 13, f. 117. VH. L. 88, p. 177, pi. 62,
f. 11-14.
Not a true plankton form. Cfr. the chapter on bottom samples.
Rare and scarce dui-ing the diatom inflow a little form occurred
(PI. VI, flg. 14, a, b), which answci's well to A^. angularis
var. karlana Grun. (L. 48, p. sy, pi. .5, f. 100). Length 36—
54 |i..
(Lille Molla, 'A 1899; Seivaagcn, Vj 1900).
A'. spalhtilatH Breb.
Lkki;. in W. Sm. L. 134, I, p. 40, pi. 31, f. 268. VH. Synopsis
(L. 88), p. 177, pi. 62, f. 7 — 8.
Very rare and only singly.
Not a genuine plankton form. Occasionally found in bottom
samples. fCfr. the cori'csponding chapter).
N. lanceolata W. Sm.
W. Sm. L. 134, I, p. 40, pi. 14, f. 118. VH. Synopsis (L. 88),
pi. 68, f. 1—4.
Like the pi-ecedinff species.
PI. VI, fig. 13 represents a very small form, which answers
very well to A'. lanceolata var. p/jgmaea Cl. L. 45, p. 481; L.
26, p. 22, pi. 1, f. 19, 20.
Length 30 |j., breadth 4 [i.. The keel puncta are small and
close together, about 14 on 10 |jl, the two middle ones more vndely
separated, with a trace of a central nodule between them.
Tills form which occurred '/* 1899 Lille Molla can, however,
hardly belong to N. lanceolata on account of the keel puncta being
so close together and also because of the distinct trace of a cen-
tral nodule. Cleve mentions this form from Cape Wankarema and
Davis Strait.
N. longissima (Breb.) R.^lfs
Rai-e and occurs only in small numbers.
N. closterinm (Ehrb.) W. Sm.
Of very rare occurrence in the samples.
It does not seem possible always with certainty to distinguish
between this species and X. longissima.
Hardly a genuine plankton form.
Distribution: Common temperate coast form, widely distributed
on the coasts of Europe.
N. Mitcbelliana Greexl.
Greenleaf L. 73, p. 107.
Only noticed a couple of times.
Not a genuine plankton form.
II. Siirirelleæ.
^inriri'lla Turp.
S. tastiiosR Ehrb. and S. lata W. Sm.
are not genuine plankton forms. Cfr. the chapter on bottom samples.
CampylodiMciiK Ehrb.
C. Thuretii Breb. and C angularis Greg.
occur frequently in plankton samples and now and then not in
small numbers, but they must, nevertheless, without doubt be looked
upon as 'being accidentally brought in, as they are rather com-
mon in bottom samples.
C. Ealfsii W. Sm. is also rather often found in plankton
samples.
12. Cocconeideæ.
<'0<M'OIIt'lx EllRB.
C. .«iciitellnm Khrb., C. pinnata Greg, .ind C. costata Greo.
occni' only seldom and singly in plankton samples, and are probably
accidentally brought in from fixed algae.
(Refer to bottom samples).
ProtUtplankton.
105
13. Achn.nitlicæ.
AcliiiHiitlieM I'
Wrongly entered in tlie tables as .1. Urniat^t Gkin.
.1. tæniiita (Jkax L. i;:,, p. >). pi. 1, f. 10?, non (Juis. [.. 4S,
p. 22, pi. 1, f. 5.
In long, very compact chains, which strongly remind one of
Fi-agUaria oceanica and also show a similar comparatively coarse
striation in side view.
I have only once succeeded in seeing the valve from above,
and then it was very evident that the species must be another than
(iRUNow's, the distinct striation being also a proof of this.
A. tæniafa in the various publications on plankton seem to be
ditferent species, and one of them is probably the same as the one
I have found. As I have not clearly seen the otiicr valve, 1 will
not venture to settle the species more definitely.
The genuine Achnanthes tceiiiata Grun. is, however, ([uite
another species. By the kindness of the Riksmuseum in Stock-
holm. I have been enabled to examine the original preparations of
bottom mud from the Kara Sea (cfr. Gruxow 1. c). I have also
had an opportunity of finding the species in some of the mud
collected, and in this way I have become convinced that the spe-
cies really does — as mentioned by Clevk — form long, compact
chains (PL VIII, fig. 27).
Grunow's illustration, which is very correct, very considerably
resembles Navicida Vanhoffeni Gran.
There are, doubtless, here very closely related species, but they
form probably two, perhaps even three, quite distinct series. In
this case, as so often, a remarkably large quantity of species is found
in the arctic diatom plankton.
There are at least here four Achmoithes species wliich must
be kept distinct. Fh'st we have Grunow's Achnanthes tceniatu,
which is comparatively thick-walled and strongly siliceous, and can
therefore, hardly be the same as that which Oestrup mentions and
illustrates (L. 139, pi. 2, f. 15) his being exceedingly thin-walled. Then
we have the closely allied species A. (tæniata var.?) hyperborea
Grcn. L. 83, p. 50, pi. 1, f. 4, 5. As far as I can see, this is
the same species as I have illustrated pi. VIII, f. 28, from 71"
48' n. lat., 49" 38' e. long. "'A 1900 (Barents Sea, S S Ilcimtlal,
a sample kindly given me by Dr. Gran).
To these must be added the form which I have found in our
northern coast plankton and Oestrcp's from Greenland.
Rather rare, but occurs in very long chains, only found durinir
the inflow of diatoms in spring.
JJistribution: A. tæniata is an arctic, neritic species (Green-
land, Spitzbergen and Kara Sea), which also appears to occur
occasionally in large numbers in the Baltic Sea.
14. Naviciileæ.
>'avii'iila KoKY.
A', directa K.m.ks.
A. ScHM. L. 128, pi. 47, f. 1—.").
Rather frequent durint;- tJie inflow of diatoms in spring;
but seldom occurs in any (luantity. Is most likely a genuine plank-
ton form.
Distribution: Widely distributed in various forms on the coasts
of tiie Atlantic, right up to the arctic region.s. Also on the west
coa.st of Norway (spring, I'.iou).
N. karianit (!hln.
(IM. VII. tit'. '■i\).
Ci-. and (iRiN. L. 4s. p. .{'J, pi. 2, f. 44.
Under this name, a .species is entered in the tables which
occurred fre([uently both in 1H99 and 1900, but only at the time
of tiie inflow of diatoms, and seldom numerous.
It is very thin walled, and most likely is a genuine plankton
form. It has the usual two chromatophores, one on each side (jf
the connective zone, .symmetrically situated.
This form does not, however, answer well to the |trincipal
species and the illustiation referred to, but very much better to
N. frigida Grun. L. 83, p. 51, pi. 1, f. 25, which Cleve (L. 25)
considers to be a variety of X. kaiiana.
The form which I have observed is, at any rate, closely allied
to N. kariana. The same form occurred in the sample before
mentioned from Barents Sea, S/S Heimdal, 1900, (cfr. under follow-
ing species) in which the more thick-walled forms answered very
exactly to N. frigida. Such a form is illustrated in pi. \'ll,
fig. 21.
Distribution: N. kariana seems to be an arctic, and boreal
neritic form, which also occurs in the North Atlantic. It is known
fiom Greenland, Jan Mayen and the Kara Sea. The same form,
which was found in the plankton from the northern coasts, also
occurred in the spring 1900 on the west coast of Norway.
I have a few times noticed delicate chains of a diatom which
is probably a Navicula, and very likely the species .just mentioned
(N. frigida). The chains were much twisted. (Fl. VII, fig. 21 f)..
N. Vanhoffeni (iRA>.
(IM. VII, ti'r. 22).
N. septentrionalis Cl. L. 40, non Oestb.
Frequent during the inflow of diatoms in spring, occasionally
in large numbers. Otherwise absent.
I should think it rather certain that this species is not a
genuine Naiicula. As I cannot, however, at present find any better
place for it, I have entered it under its usual name. In the tables,
I tried at first to distinguish between N. feptentriounlis and N.
Vanhoffeni, as these are ordinarily understood, but I had to give
it up later, and this is the case in the tables for 1900.
At any rate, there is only one species in the plankton under
consideration. It is narrow boatsliapcd ; but as the connective
zone is very slightly siliceous, it does not stand being treated with
acids (but very well being ignited on cover-glass) and it is, there-
fore, very difficult to get a valvar view of it.
As Gran (1. c.) mentions two species and under A', septentrio-
nalis remarks that it may easily be recognized in side view by
the plain stauros, it seems to me that the central nodule here sug-
gests the possibility of a stauros, which perhaps does not exist.
Gkan does not illustrate any central nodule in side view in his
figures of N. Vanhoffeni (f. 32 b). This nodule is, however, plainly
to be seen on specimens in my material, which in every respect
(when seen as chains) answer so remarkably well to N. Vanhoffeni
that I have not the least doubt that they really belong to this
species. With regard to the spaces between the links of the
chains, tliey are, to be sure, most often seen in specimens, pro ■■ •
14
ion
rgen<eii.
ved in formaline, wiien tliey liave not been ignited on cover-glass;
but tliey may be wanting and sometimes be alsp very distinct in one
and the same chain. It appears to me, however, that they become
smaller and may even disappear altogether during the process of
igniting. They are, howevei', also often wanting in specimens pre-
served in formaline.
It has not hitherto been possible to see any definite structure.
Cleve, who considers this species to be identical with Osteup's
X. fcidentnoncdis. has also mentioned that he has not been able
to dissolve the structure. I have examined numerous specimens,
most of them in side view, and have noticed a narrow linear stau-
roslike marking, which, however, was very indistinct, but I have
not been able to discover anything further.
Rather freijuent during the diatom inflow in the spring, some-
times numerous; otherwise wanting.
Distribution: Arctic coast form, known from Greenland and
the Barents Sea (Heimdal 1900, cfr. Gran L. 70, p. 182). Accord-
ing to Gran (1. c.) N. Vanhuffeni was very frequent in the Siger
Fiord in Yesteraalen "A 1901. Not observed on the west coast of
Norway. According to Cleve (L. 40, p. 333) also found in the
r.altic.
N. pelagica Cl.
(PI. Xn, fig. 23).
Cl. L. 26, p. 11, pi. 1, f. 9.
Was not so very I'ai'e in the plankton 1899. Only found in
1900 in one of the samples: The Salten Fiord, V4, 0—330 m.
I have never succeeded in finding this species in material pre-
served in alcohol oi' formaline. I only know it from slides, where
it has been ignited on cover-glass, and have never seen it in valvar j
view. It answers fully to Cleve's description and illustration, so
that there can hardly be room for any doubt as to its being cor-
rectly determined.
The peculiar „hairs" are, according to ray opinion, fragments
of the complex connecting zone and probably appear only after
being ignited on cover-glass (or treated with acids, which, however,
seems to destroy the cells). Is certainly very closely related to
N. Vanhoffeni.
Distrihutiun : Arctic species, probably, like the foregoing, a
coast form. Hitherto only known from Baffin's Bay, Davis Strait
and the J3arents Sea (S/S Heimdal ''A 1900, r).
Ktanroiieiis septentrionalia Gkun.
(1=1. vir, fij.-. 24).
Geunow L. 83, p. 53, pi. 1, f. 48. Navicula septentrionalis
Oestk. I^. 139. p. 317, non Cl. L. 40; nee Cl. L. 48, p. 3, De
TuNi 1^. 50, p. 126, A. Schmidt L. 128, pi. 6, f. 37. Lihellus?
seytentnonalis Oestu. L. 138, p. 439, pi. S, t'. 97.
This species does not occur in our noi'tliorn plankton. As be-
fore mentioned, the species which Cleve several times (e. g. L.
40) mentions as Navicula neptentrionalis Oeste., is identical with N.
Vanhoffeni Gean, at any rate, in part. Judging from his remark
on the contents of the cell (L. 65, p. 9) it would seem that Gean
also considers a form whicii is closely related to A^. Vanhoffeni to
be N. se}Aentrionalis Oeste., as he describes the contents of the
cell in both cases as being the same. Stauroneis septentrionalis
Gkun. has, however, quite another inner construction (v. below).
As mentioned under the foreg-oing species, I earlier also conside-
red a form to bo Xaricula septentrwnal'is, which I afterwards found
impossible to definitely distinguish from N. Vanhdffmi. Prepara-
tions ignited on cover-glass (not treated with acids) always answer
well to the description of N. sejjtentrionalis, as the central nodule
then becomes very distinct, and the spaces between the cells — as
before mentioned — generally disappear.
A careful examination of the ends of the valve — cfr. pi.
VII, fig. 22 and 24 — will show that there is, however, here a
question of two very ditferent species, for Oesteup's illustration never,
in this respect, corresponds to the appearance of N. Vanhoffeni.
as I have had ample opportunity of seing in numerous preparations
of the latter.
It is easily explained that Oesteup's species might be confused
with i\'. Vanhoffeni. as he — although very much in doubt, as he
has himself observed — refers the species to the genus Lihellus.
Soon after he changes the name of the genus, probably because
Cleve in the meanwhile (L. 26) has referred it to Xavicida.
Oesteup neither illustrates nor mentions the connecting zone as
being complex. As, however, the almost simultaneously discovered
N. Vanhoffeni has a distinct complex connective zone, and was
also found to occur as a pelagic species in long chains, it was very
easy to confound these two species.
For the first time I was aware that a species exists, which
answers very precisely to Oesteup's drawing, by the pi'eviously
mentioned plankton sample from the Barents Sea (S/S Heimdal,
"/o 1900). Gean mentions this sample in his last work (L. 70,
p. 147 j and enters both K. Vanhoffeni and A. septentrionalis
Oeste. from this place. There was, however, in this sample, a
larger species with the same characteristic chromatophores as in
N. Vanhoffeni and also with a distinct stauros, which was easily
seen in watei'. As far as I can see, this must be a new species,
which I have described below.
That the species represented on pi. N'll, f. 24, is the same as
Stauroneis sepAentrionalis Geun., I see no reason to doubt, the
more so as they were both found in the same waters. (Geunow's
species was found on the ice on the west of Novaja Semlja). The
species seems to have a partiality for the neighbourhood of ice.
As it has not previously been found as a pelagic species in
chains, I adjoin the following short description.
N'alve linear, more or less distinctly cuneate towards the ends,
which are either broad and rounded or almost square. Length
22—27 II., width 4—51/2 \^.
Thei'e is a distinct central stauros, \\hich does not reach right
out to the sides of the valve, bounded by two lines, which are
parallel nearly out to the edge, where tliey ai'e clearly divergent.
Between them near the margin are 1 — 2 short, coarse striæ, simil-
arly radiating. The rest of the valve is transversely striated; the
striæ, however, are only seen with difficulty, with the exception of
those which are more widely separated in the middle. Forms long,
firm chains where the cells lie very close to each other, also at
the corners. On being ignited on cover-glass the chains break and
the ends of the cells become slightly separated from each otiicr.
(Cfr. pi. VII, f. 24.)
Contents of the cell: As far as can be seen from the pre-
served specimens, from the central ])rotoplasm mass in which the
imcleus lies extend upper and lower arms (probably 4 in all. 2
upper on either side and two lower). Whether these unite to form
the usual chromatophores A\liicli ai'c found on the connecting zone
in the genus Navicula, I have not been a1:)le to decide. But the
Protistplanktoii.
remarkable eoiitents of the cells of .V. ]'ii)ihoff'ciii are at any rate
not found here.
Achnanthes hypeiborea Grun. is a puzzlingly similar species.
(^RiNow mentions too that Stanroneis scptentrioiialis mi^fht pei'haps be
the lower valve of an Achnaiithes. It appears, however, that he, both
in this instance and with regard to Achnanthes tæniata, at once
came to the correct conclusion.
As before mentioned, Achnanthes hyperhorea was also found
in the sample from the Barents Sea, but only in small numbers.
.Tudginy' from my experience, it would seem possible that there
is yet another species, answeriHg to N. septentrionalis Oestk., to
be found in the bewildering wealth of species in the arctic, neritic,
diatom plankton. As, however, the ditference between Oesteup's
species and Stanroneis septentrionalis seems to be so slight, I have
thought it best at any rate for the present, to consider tiiem to be
synonymous.
Stanroneis Grant Jorg. n. sp.
(PI. VII, fio;. 25).
Forms chains in which the cells touch each other except to-
wards the ends, where the cell in side view appears to be narrowed
off uniformly (outlines arched).
On being ignited on cover-glass, the connection is still further
severed, so that the cells only touch each other in their middle
half (more or less). The ends are sharply bent so that the cells
of the chains in material preserved in alcohol look as if the ends
were cut off in a straight line by a sharp knife.
There is a small central stauros, bounded by two parallel lines.
No other structure was seen on the valve.
The connecting zone complex as that of Xnrirula Yanhoffcni.
As in the latter species, the connecting complex membranes are
seen between the ends of the cells. They are, however, as a rule
rather indistinct.
The contents of the cell are generally speaking the same as
in Xavicida Vanhoff'eni, with which species Stmroneis Grani is
very nearly related.
Length .54—57 |i.
I have not been able to identify this species with any of those
hitherto known. It may perhaps be the same as that which
Gran L. 70, p. 147, mentions from the Barents Sea, ^'A 1900, as
Xaiiciila septentrionalis. It does not, however, appear to be iden-
tical with the one which he mentions from Greenland L. 65, p. 9,
as the above species is considerably larger.
Moreover, the only species with which, according to my opinion,
it would be possible to unite it, would be Statironeis pdlucida Cl.,
which species is mentioned by Cleve from Cape Wankarema (L.
45, pi. 35, f. 10). Cleve's illustration, however, resembles it very
little; the species is though, according to Oestrup (L. 138, p. 440)
exceedingly variable.
Occui'red singly in one sample: Poi'sangerfjord, -'ji 1899,
0 — 75 m.
Distrilmtion: Hitherto otherwise only known from the Barents
Sea, 71» 48' n. lat., 49» 38' e. long. (S/S Heimdal "'/s 1900). I
have also seen a short chain from the Kara Sea (the Swedish
Jenissei expedition, 1875). In this slide, tiiere was also a short
chain of the species which 1 have entered as Stanroneis septen-
trionalis (iiu-N.
Sriiiy.ononia (irevillvi An.
Only by accident brouglit in with liigliei' algae. Common
amonii' bottom algao on tiio west coast of Norway.
l*l<'iirwsiU'iiiii W. Ssi.
P. angulatum (Quek.) W. Sm. and P. Normanni Ralps (= P. affine Gkin.)
Not genuine plankton forms, only accidentally brought in.
The latter species is very frequent in l)ottom samples.
Also occur now and then singly in the plankton P. formosum
W. Sm. and P. balticum (Ehhb.) W. Sm.
P. tenerum Jorg. n. sj).
(PI. VII, rig-. 17).
P. Stiixbergi Cl. L 48, p. 54. pi. 4, f. 74 (?).
Under this name, a species is entered in the tables which cer-
tainly is a genuine plankton form, as in some of the samples
(Rombakeu 72 and Skjomen Va 1899) it was quite common, and
occasionally occurred in large quantities. It was also now and
then found durhig the inflow of diatoms in the spring, especially
in 1900, but then always in small numbers.
The species corresponds so well, in all important points, with
P. Stuxbergi Cl. and Grux., that I have been in doubt as to
whether or not it should be entered under that name. Finally 1
came to the conclusion that I ought to do so, as will be seen on
reference to the tables for 1900.
There were, however, chiefly three things which made me
provisionally enter it as a separate species. First, because it is
one of the few species of Pleurosigma which is really planktonic;
secondly, it is very thin walled and is easily deformed when ignited
(a fact not mentioned with regard to P. Stuxbergi) and Anally,
Cleve classifies his species under the di\1sion Ehoicosigma (L. 24,
p. 41), while I was convinced by examination of preserved material
that, seen in side view, it is not bent.
When ignited on cover-glass, it loses — as already mentioned —
its shape, and I have often seen specimens which, after being
treated in this way, give the impression of being a Rhoico-
sigmu.
Distribution of P. Stuxbergii: Greenlanil, Frantz Josepli's Land,
Kara Sea. Probably an arctic coast form.
P. delicatiilum W. Sm.
(PI. Vir, a-r. 18).
\'ery like P. kurianum Grun. L. 48, p. 50, pi. 3, f. (59,
wliicii is referred as a vai'iety to P. delicatulum W. Sm. by Gru-
Now with some doubt, and to P. elongatnm W. S.m. by Cleve. It
is also veiy like P. fallax (Grun.) Perag., which is considered a
variety of P. ehngatum both by Cleve and Grunow. These forms,
however, all ditfer from the one obsei-ved by me by the transverse
striæ being closer than the oblique ones, while the contrary is
rather the ca.*e in my form.
Very rare: *U 1899 Folstad, 0—3 m. \'ery closely allied
forms also occur, but always very sparsely (and only during the
diatom inflow I.
108
E. Joigen
P. tenitissimum ^^'. Sm. vav. byperborea Grin.
(PI. VII, fig. 19).
Geun. L. 48, p. 58, pi. 4., f. 77.
Answers well to Grunow's illustration and description, but is
also very like P. Spenceri W. Sm. var. borealis Geun. 1. c. p. 60,
pi. 4, f.'79.
Very scarce and i-are: Lille MoUa, 'A 1899, near the surface;
POlstad 74 1899, 0—3 ni.
Distrihutimi : The Kara iSea.
P. fasciola (Eurb.) W. Sm. ami P. teniiirostre Ghun.
Both these species, the latter of which is considered to be a
Ibini of the former both by Cleve and others, occur occasionally
during the spring diatom inflow, but alway.s very sparsely. It is
doubtful if these species really are plankton forms. P. tenitirostre
seems to be the more frequent.
Strange to say, 1 once saw oblique striæ very close to each
other (but only in one direction), closei- than the transverse striæ,
about 27 on 10 ix. The transverse striæ were only discernible near
the raphe, about 20 on 10 \i-. Longitudinal lines were only to be
seen at the ends, somewhat wslvj (PI. VII, f. 20).
Generally speaking, striæ were not seen in the specimens
(which were thin walled), so that I cannot decide whether the
difference mentioned bet\\een I\ fasciola and P. tcnuirostris holds
good with us or not. At any I'ate, the shape of the latter species
is very characteristic.
Distribution : P. fasciola is widely distributed on the European
coasts. P. teniiirostris is an arctic form, known from Greenland
and the Kara Sea.
P. uaviciilacemu ISrkd.
Not a genuine plankton form. Refer to bottom samples.
Rlioicosignia arcticum Cl.
Rare and scai'ce. Hardly a genuine plankton form. Seems to
be a fre(|ucnt bottom foi'ni on the west coast of Norway, and pro-
bably also iin tiie north coast. Refer to bottom samples.
Auricula complexa (Gueg.) De T.
Only once found, singly: Rombaken "/■• 1899, 0 — 40 m.
Distribution: Tlic coasts of Great Britain. Rare on tlie west
coast of Norwav. Also mentioned from Barbadocs.
11. IE>e3r±ca-±i3_±ales.
I. Proroccntraceae Sikin.
Proroceiitriiiii micnns Kiiun.
Only once found, very scarce: Henningsvær, '"A 1899, 0—
180 m. On account of its small size it goes through the net.
Distribution: Probably a coast form from the temperate
European coasts of the Atlantic and its arms. Known from the
North Sea, (from the English Channel, not rare. May 1903 L. 18,
IV), Skagerack, the Baltic and the west coast of Norway, here
rather scarce. Probablv brought to us from southern coasts.
IkiiiopliyMis Ehrb.
D. acuta Ehrb., .Jorg.
.TuKG. L. 91. p. 28, pi. I, f. 2.
Rather common in the samples, but always rather scarce.
Distribution: Seems to be a northern, but not an arctic, form,
which is frequent both in the open sea and on the coasts. Kno\\n
from the watei-s between Norway, Scotland, Iceland and Greenland
as well as from the North Sea, Skagerack and the Baltic. It
appears to be stationary on the west coast of Norway and near the
Faeroe Islands and Iceland, probably also on the northern coasts
of Norway, where it has been found at several places by Gkan
in the summer and autumn months. (Cfr. Gran L. 67).
D. uorregica Clap, et Lachm., .Jorg.
JuRG. L. 91, p. 29, pi. 1, f. 3—6.
Occurs in many of the samples, but always in small lunnbers.
Distribution: Not sufficiently known. The species, however,
appears mostly to have the same distribution as D. acuta. Seems
to be a northern form. Known fi'om the North Sea (from The
English Channel, r May 1903), Skagei'ack and Cattegat, Scotland,
Jan Mayen and the west coast of Norway, where it is found, but
only sparsely, during nearly all the months of the year.
D. acuminata Clap, et Lachm., .Jorg.
J(')EG. L. 91, p. 30, pi. I. f. 7—9. D. Vauhoffhii Ostenf.
Very rare and scarce.
Distribution: Not sufficiently known. Seems to be a northern
form, but scarcely native with us. Rather frequent on the west
coast of Norway in the summer and autumn (of 1898), but gener-
ally scarce. Also known from Greenland, Iceland, the Faeroe Is-
lands (very rare) and the Baltic Sea (Levandee).
Perhaps it comes to our west coast from Iceland.
D. rotuitdata I'lap. et Lachm.
D. Michaelis auct p. p.
Rare and scarce. Found in small numbers by Gran (L. 67)
at several places on the nortiiern coast of Norway in the mont lis
of July— Octobex 1898—99.
Distribution: Seems to be a northern, oceanic form. KnoA\n
from the North Sea (southwards to the English Channel, r in I'c-
bruary and May 1908), Skagerack and also mentioned from tiie
Baltic. On the west coast of Norway in the months of April — De-
cember 1898, always in small numbers.
D. bomunculus Stein.
Stein L. 13.'), pi. 21. f. 1—8.
Only found in one of the sanii)ics (two indi\'iduals). Helligvær
1-/, 1899, 0—50 m.
Distribution : Widely disti-ibuted in the warmer parts of tiie
teiii|ieriite Atlantic, and only occasiunally and cMcptionallx carried
as lar north as Lofoten.
Docs not occnr on the west coast of Noi'wav.
l*«Ml«tlaiii|»a>> ji:ilmii,cs Stkin.
Very rare and only singly: The Vest Fiord I, '',i 1S99
0—50 m. and 0—180 m.), Tranodybet -/z 1900, 0— (i(iu m. and
The Folden Fiord "/-i l^'OO, 0—530 m. With us a foi'ni which is
only accidentally and exceptionally broui;ht in from the south.
Disiribittioii : Oceanic form, widely distributed in the tropical
and temperate parts of the Atlantic, northwards in the summer
(cfr. Clevi: !,. lu, p. 27r,) right up to near Iceland. On the west
coast ot Norway very rare and only singly. Seems to be cosmo-
politan in all the warmer seas, as it is also mentioned from the
Mediterranean, the Ked >Sea. the Indian Ocean and the Pacific
Ocean.
Oxvtoxi
diplocoitns Stei.n
Only one specimen found (therefore determination not fully
reliable): The Skjerstad Fiord V, '74 1900, ti — 420 m.
Like the foregoing, an accidental southern form.
Distribution: Southern oceanic form, from the warmer parts
of the temperate Atlantic. On the west coast of Norway also only
once found in 1898.
P.vi-opliarn.>< horologium Steix.
Kare and scarce; found, however, in several samples. Seems
to be entirely absent during the spiing diatom inflow; then it was
only found in one deepwater sample from one of the flords: The
Folden Fiord 7* 1900, 500—400 m.
Distribution : Southern form, according to Cleve, properly a
tropical oceanic foi-m. Probably has a wide distribution in the
warmer temperate waters of the Atlantic. As it is easily over-
looked, its distribution is hardly yet quite sufficiently known.
Its comparative fi'equency on the coasts of Norway might sug-
gest either that it is able to thrive well in the coast waters at
our latitudes, or that thci-c are two diti'erent species of which the
one is a tropical oceanic one not occui'iing with us.
<Mon.vanlax spinifera (Dies.) Clap, ot Lachm.
Very rare and scarce, only found in some few of the samples:
The Ogs Fiord, "A 1899, 0—90 m., in the sea off Senjen 1^4
1899, 0—80 m.. Hola =73 1900, 0—50 m.; Bålstad I, ='/:. 1900,
0-50 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord XII, 0—500 m.
Distribution : Is considered by Cleve to be a neritic species.
There seems to be, judging from Cleve's accounts (L. 40,
p. 249), two different species, a boreal or ai-ctic species and a more
southerly one, which is probably oceanic. Its occurrence on our
northern coasts also suggests that our species is oceanic.
Grax (L. 67) mentions Gonyaidax spinifera as occurring in
small numbers in the Eids Fiord (Nordland) in the months of
July— September 1898—99.
Two species occur also on the west coast of Norway (cfr. E.
Jokuensen 1.. 91, p. ;J4). The lesser of these is al.so found in the
Baltic.
l'loto«-<>i'aliiini rttiviihiUim {Va.sv. .t Laciim.) Bltschi.i.
Very rare and genei'ally in small nnmheis. As it is, however,
so small that it is not retained by the net, it is probably found
more frequently than appears.
Was found in 1900 principally in deep water samples.
Distribution: Not sufficiently known. Is considered by Cleve
(L. 40, p. 277) to be a neritic northern or arctic form. It is found
most frequently on the American side. On the west coast of Nor-
way in 1898, generally A-ery scarce.
i>i|>lo|>Nalis Icnticitla liKm.ii.
Rather fre(iuent, especially in tolerably deep water, often i-ather
numerous. Seems to be altogether absent during the spring diatom
inflow. Gran (L. fi7) found it at several places on the northern
coast of Norway in the months of .July— October 1898—99, but
generally in very small numbers.
Distribution: According to Cleve, a southei-n oceanic species,
widely distributed in the warmer parts of tlie temperate Atlantic.
Also known from the North Sea (from The Enghsh Channel, Feb. and
May 1903) and the Cattegat. Rather frequent on the west coast
of Norway (1898).
Peridiiiiaiii Ehub.
P. depressiun Bail.
Very frequent, often in quantities. Much scarcer during the
.spring diatom inflow. Grax found it at Bodti and in the Eids
Fiord in the months of July— October 1898—99 frequently.
Distribution : Seems to be an arctic and boreal neritic species,
which is stationary both on the noith and west coast of Norway.
Widely distributed in the colder pai't of the northern Atlantic,
chiefly on the coasts, from the American side, to Greenland, Ice-
land, (Faeroe Islands, the North Sea), NorAvay and right up to
Spitz-bergen and Novaja Semlja.
P. oceanicum Vami()f.
Surely a good species.
Was not so rare in 1899, but always in small numbers. Not
noticed in 1900. Absent during the spring diatom inflow.
Distribution: Southern oceanic species which, according to
Cleve is widely distributed in the warmer part of the temperate
Atlantic, and penetrates northwards right up to Greenland. Very
rare and scarce round the Faeroe Islands and on the west coast
of Norway. Also known from the Red Sea and the Indian Ocean.
P. divergens Ehbh.
P. knticitlare (Eiirb.) Jurg. L. 91, p. 37.
As this .species is now in most works on plankton mentioned
under the name of P. divergens Ehrb., I have, at any r^te pro-
visionally, found that I ought to use this name instead of the more
explicit one, P. hmticidar.'. I hope in a later Avork to be able to
110
give a more detailed description of tlie species of Pendimm which oc-
cur on the coasts of Norway, but as this work is, as yet, only in its
beginning, I have tried as far as possible to use the accepted names,
even if I do not always agree with them.
Common, often in quantities, except during the spring diatom
inflow, when it is rather rare and scarce. Gban found it at several
places on the northern coasts of Norway in the months of July-
October 1898—99.
Distrihution : According to Cleve, this is a southern, oceanic
form, widely distributed in the warmer part of the temperate At-
lantic, northwards to Iceland, Scotland, the North Sea, Skagerack,
Cattegat, the west coast of Norway and (sometimes) I'ight up to
Spitzbergen.
It is stationary on the whole of the coast of Norway, and
especially on the west coast frequent in the summer and autumn.
P. conicum (Gran) Ostenf. et Schm.
OsTENF. at ScHM. L. 117, p. 174. Gkan L. 70, p. 189, f. 14.
P. divergens var. conica Gran L. 67, p. 47. P. lenticulare v.
Michaelis (Eheb.) Joeg. L. 91, p. 37.
Undoubtedly a good species.
Occurs in rather a large number of the samples, but quite
exceptionally in any quantity. Gban found it in the Eids Fiord
(Nordland) in rather small numbers in the months of July — August
and October 1898—99.
Distribution : Gkan (L. 70, p. 190) considers it to be a tem-
l)erate Atlantic oceanic form, which also seems to agree to my
material. On the west coast of Norway it is found all the year
round, but generally only in small numbers. Found in the English
Channel (February and May 1903), off Scotland, in the North Sea,
the Skagerack and Cattegat and the Baltic, as well off Beeren
Eiland (very sparsely).
P. pentagonuiu Gran.
Gran L. 70, p. 191, f. 15.
1 know this form very well from the west coast of Norway,
where it occasionally is abundant, but I have been in some doubt
as to whether it should be looked upon as a young, undeveloped
form or a special species.
Occurs rarely and in small numbers, but is possibly overlooked.
Distrihution: Not sufficiently known. Gran is probably right
in considering it to be a northern form. In 1898, it was occasion-
ally abundant on the west coast of Norway.
P. pallidum Ostknf.
Ostenf. L. Ill, p. «(i; L. IKi, p. 581, 582, f 130. 131.
P. pelhicidum (Bergh) Jorg. L. 91, p. 38. Gran L. 70, p. 186.
I agree with Ostenfeld in considering this species to be dif-
ferent from the following one but not with respect to the use of
the name P. pellurAdum (Bergh). As it is, however, excellently
described by Ostenfeld (]. c), it will be most practicable for the
present to use the names he does.
Rather frequent, but generally in small nunibei's. Found by
Gran at many places on the northern coast of Norway in the
months of July— October 1898—99, but only in small numbers.
Distrihution: Arctic and boreal (properly neritic?) species,
known from the North Sea (from The English Channel, frequent
in May 1903), Skagerack and Cattegat, the west coast of Norway,
Scotland, the Faeroe Islands, Iceland, Greenland, Jan ^Mayen and
Spitzbergen. Stationary on the west coast of Norway, especially
numerous in the summer months.
p. pelluciduiu Ostenp.
OsTENF. L. 116, p. 58, f. 129.
There are several species which are more or less allied, whicii
may easily be confused with this form. Besides, on account of its
minuteness, it easily, passes through the net, and is therefoi-e not
specially tabulated.
It was, however, only occasionally found in the samples.
Distrihution: Seems to be an arctic and northern temperate
(boreal) species, which is by Ostenfeld considered to be neritic.
According to Cleve L. 40, p. 268, it has been found at many
places on the American side up to Greenland and Spitzbergen.
Occurs also on the west coast of Norway (in April and May 1901).
P. pedimctilatum Schutt.
(PI. VIII, Hg. 29).
Shape: In dorsal view the upper half is broadly conical, with
a rather long cylindrical apical tube. The lower half is broadly
conical, the outlines showing a shallow sinus on each side and at
the lowest part. In side view the upper half is still conical, the
outlines of the lower being rounded, and then evenly narrowed,
most clearly on the posterior side, towards a broad, rounded lower
part. The dorsal half is larger and more prominent than the ven-
tral. The excurrent basal spines are somewhat nearer the ven-
tral side.
Girdle: The girdle in side view is almost in right angle to
the longitudinal axis. On the venti-al side the left end lies lower
than the right, about as much as a piece equal to the height of the
girdle. Definite radial rays (thickenings).
Basal spines: The basal spines are directed somewhat for-
wardly (towards the ventral side), especially the left one. Both
broadly alated, the ventral wing being all at once broader towards
the base, so that its contour turns almost at right angles to the
direction of the spine (as is the case in Podolampas palmipes). In
this way, in certain positions, the species appeai-s to have a short,
broad winged „foot" between the two others.
Contents of cell: The same in colour as in P. pidlidum.
Dimensions: Width 47 ii, heiglit 51 [i.. liasal spines 17 |i.
prominent.
As yet, I have only seen few specimens of this species. Nei-
ther am I sure that it is identical to Schutt's, so that I have
given a description, which, howevci', should only be taken as a
preliminary one.
The peculiar suddenly broadened wings at the base of the ven-
tral side of the basal spines are only seen with difficulty, but tlie
one which belongs to the left spine is easily seen when the spe-
cies lies on its ventral side with .the apical tube down (and the
spines up). As far as I have been able to see this wing on the
left spine is du-ected out towards the right, on the right one, on
the contrary, but little to the left, almost forwardly (ventrally).
The long apical tube has a vei'y characteristic form in Schutt's
figure. '^Phis form is also found in my specimens, but is due to
seams, not to the actual contour.
It may be a question as to whctlicr my specimens belong to
P. tristylum Stein, a species wlucli 1 do not know, but which, at
Protistplankto
111
any rate, cannot l)o iilcntical to P. iiclhic'uliDii |',Kii(iii. as nicntio-
irmI liy r.iTsciii.i (L. 111). /'. tnsli/hiiii r. tjnilu .Sciimiii. is lui-
donljtodly another speeies.
Very rare and very scarce; occmrrd tn-ctlicr with dccanic and
sontlicrn forms in Traniklybct ■■/■., 1!)00, 0 (iou ni. Tiio same form
is very rare on the west coast of Norway: The Jiy Fiord of Ber-
>ren '7i 1901, O-iOO m.; Tlie Oster Fiord, % 1901, 25—50 m.,
1(1(1 •_'(!(• in. 1 liave also seen it IViim the Stor Fiord in Sond-
moi-f (S y Miciiael Sars I'.Mio. st. ;!. KK) .'id uw.
F. iwdiiucidatuni is, accordinij- to Ci.kvio, a sontliern tempc-
lato, oceanic species, distributed in the Atlantic from rather far
sDuth northwards to the neio-hhourhood of Iceland (rarely).
P. Steittii Juno.
.I.iuc. 1.. 91. p. .-JS. /'. Mirhaclis .Stein L. 135, p. 9, f. 9 —
11. non EnHii. Ci,. L. 40. p. ■2GS.
Occurs in ([uite a larire number of the samples, but always
sparsely. The species seems to be absent during- the spring diatom
intiow. Accordini!' to Gran (L. G7) in small numbers in the Eids
Fiord and Ofoten in the months July — August 1899.
In the tables it is reckoned together with another smaller form,
■w liicli is probably speeitically ditferent from the genuine P. Ste'mii,
and seems to have a more northern distribution.
D'tstribxition : Southern oceanic form, which, according to
Cleve, is widely distributed in the warmer (eastern) part of the
tempei-ate Atlantic, northwards to Greenland, Iceland and towards
iSpitzbergen. Very scarce round the Faeroe Islands. Also rare on
the west coast of Noi'\\-ay. where there occurs (at least) two diffe-
rent species.
P. ovatiun (PorcH ) Scbi'tt.
Fre{iuent, often numerous. Found by Gran on the northern
coasts of Norway, rather numerous at sevei'al places in the months
of . I uly— September 1898—99.
Distribution: Seems to be an arctic and northern temperate
(boieal), cliiefly neritic (?) species, which is known from the coasts
of Western Europe, the North Sea, Skagerack, Cattegat, the Baltic,
the west coast of Norway, the Faeroe Islands, Iceland, Greenland
and Spitzbergen. Stationary on the coasts of Norway, being es-
pecially common on the west coast in the months of April and ]\Iay.
Ccratinni Schrank.
As most of the easily recognized forms of C. tripos are now,
by almost all plankton investigators, mentioned as distinct species,
I have thought it best to do so too, as far as possible. I am, how-
ever, inclhied to think that by so doing we get a basis which is
ratiier uncertain. On tiie other liand, it seems that one really goes
too far when one considers all ,, forms" of Ceratimn tripos (e. g.
balticum and macroceros) as one species. As, however, the so-cal-
led species are very difficult to characterize well (naturally), the
result will be that there will be numerous species, and one gets
into a hopeless chaos, as we have already seen in the case of one
author. According to my opinion, therefore, the only practical so-
lution will be to set up as few „species" as possible, but to clas-
sily the divergent forms as „varieties". It will, I think, for the
sake of clearness, also be necessary to arrange the varieties in
groups, as more new forms are apjjcai'ing.
C. trii)os (0. K. !VIi;i.i,.) Nrrzsin.
('. I. 'J. hidfinnn iSciiirr.
Coinnion and generally in large quantities; durini.' the .spring
diatom intiow, iiowever, very much scarcer than at other times.
Found by Gran at several places on the north coast in the months
of July— October 1898-99, dually numerous.
/>i.'<fn/iiiliijn : According to ('levk, widely distributed in the
w aimer i)ait id' the temi)erate Atlantic, from whence it extends
noithwards. V'eiy fVeiiuent on the coasts of the North Sea, Skage-
rack and Norway; as an exception, as far north as Spitzbergen.
Stationary on the coasts of Norway.
The form which is found in the Baltic is, according to Ostex-
FELD, L. IIG, p. 58.3, 584, f. 132, 1.33, 134, somewhat different
to the North-Atlantic one.
(". Inicephalum (('r..) Cl.
('i,. L. 40, ]). 211. C', tripvs ntr bticephaJus Cl. !.. 40. p. .■i02,
f. 5. ('. f. (ircuatum (Gouiik.) Jorg. L. 91, p. 44. pi. 2. f. II,
non C. (iriuutum GocRR. L. 63, p. 25, pi. 2, f. 42.
Seems to be a well characterized and little varying form, which
without (lifticulty can be considered as a separate species. Occurs
together with the preceding, and almost exactly corresponds to it
in freijucncy.
Distribution: In all important respects, hke the preceding
species; but appears to be more westerly. Seems to be absent
round the Faeroe Islands, and is much loss frequent on the west
coast of Norway than the preceding species.
C. bucepbalum (t'L.) Cl. rar. heterocampta Jokg.
C. tripos t arcuatutii formu heterocampta Jorg. I^. 91. p. 44,
pi. 2, f. 12. C. tripos rar. ariefinum Cl. L. 3G, p. 13, pi. 7, f. 3.
Not noticed in the samples from 1899; in .several .samples from
1900 and occasionally rather numerous.
Distribution: Southern oceanic species, according to Clevk
(L. 40, p. 209) widely distributed in the warmer part of the
Atlantic and also known from the Indian Ocean. Frequent on the
west coast of Norway in 1898 in the months of September— De-
cembei'; singly in February.
C. macroceros (Khhb.) Cl.
Fio([neiit and numerous (less so during the spring diatom iiiHow),
but much .scarcer than the t\\o foregoing species. Found on the
northern coast together with them during the summer and autumn
1898—99 by Gran.
Distribution: In the Atlantic, in all important respects like
C. bucqjhalum. Has not been found either round the Faeroe Is-
lands. All the year through on the west coast of Norway, but
much less frequent than C. tripos (maximum in summer). Occasion-
ally noticed at Spitzbergen (in the warmer waters). Also known
from the Indian Ocean.
C. intermedium (Jorg.)
C', macroceros fortna intermedia Jorg. L. 91, p. 42, pi. 1, f. 10.
C. tripos var. scotiea Ostenf. L. Ill, p. 57, nou ScHtJTT. C. hor-
ridum Gran L. 70, p. 194, non C. tripos var. horrida Cl. L. 46,
p. 302, f. 4.
112
There is already a considerable accumulation of names (and
correspondiug- confusion?) in connection -with this form, which -will
be difficult to keep separate from the foregoing, as it, as mentioned
in a previous paper (J(')kgensen L. 91, p. 42), varies consider-
ably.
I cannot help discussing here once more, whether the names
above mentioned are justifiable, as the last change of name will
easily give rise to a state of chronic confusion.
I believe everyone except perhaps Ostenfeld, agrees that
Schutt's name ought not to be used. Even if the illustration re-
ferred to by Ostenfeld be taken as the principal figure (Schutt
L. 130, p. 70, f. .35, IV), it must not be overlooked that Schlttt
has in the same work at another place (p. 28, f. 20, IV c) illu-
strated the foregoing species as v. scotica. It was this circumstance
which made me decide to keep my own name instead of the one
already published by Ostenfeld.
Also Cleve (L. 40, p. 301) and Bruno Schr()der (L. 129,
p. 15) look upon Schutt's var. scotica as I do.
There must either be a printer's mistake in one or other of
iSchutt's two illustrations, or the name scotica must be used in
reference to a large series of forms.
In L. 112, p. 56, Ostenfeld enters Cerat. tripos r. horrida
Cl. as a form under C. t. v. ,.scotica Schijtt". He remarks that
its straight (not curved) apical horn brings it close to this variety,
and that the presence or absence of spines is a very varying and
unreliable character.
With this latter remark, I agree entirely (cfr. L. 91, p. 42
under C. t. m. f. intermedia). Judging from my experience, it seems
that car. horrida Cl. can hardly be kept distinct as a variety, and
it will be seen (L. 40, p. 227) that Cleve too has come to the
same conclusion. But Ostenfeld's reference to the straight apical
horn, must arise from some mistake (which I confess I find it
difficult to explain), as Clevf's figure (L. 46, f. 4) clearly shows
the curved horn which is typical for C. loiujipes Bail. (= C. t. r.
ti'i-gestina Schutt, cfr. under C. longipes).
All the forms illustrated by Ostenfeld, L. 110, p. 585, f.
136 — 139, belong to my C intermedium, as was my earlier inter-
pretation of this form as a variety (1. c. where the forms are of
(Mjual value to the varieties in this paper, and the varieties equal
to the species here). C. intermedium in the tables is also taken
in this meaning, and includes all Ostenfeld's forms.
Strange enough, the same mistake is also repeated by Gran
(L. 70, p. 195) matters being brought to a head by the use of
tiie name C. horridum for the whole series of forms.
Cleve (L. 40, p. 225), on tlie contrary, enters rar. horrida
under C', t. var. longipes Bail.
Is the series in question to be considered as one species —
which, as mentioned above, will perhaps not be realisable — I
cannot see but tliat the name C. intermedium must be resumed.
Clevh (L. 10, p. 225) evidently considers the forms in ques-
tion to I)elong under C. maeroceros (in agreement with my previous
opinion).
On the whole, very frequent, almost precisely coiTcsponding
in fre([uency to C. marroceros, tliough sometimes a little scarcer.
Very scarce during the sprini
in 1899.
Distribution: Appears in
same as that of C', mucrucerus.
diatom inflow, altogether absent
all important respects to be the
In the Norwegian Ocean, however,
not noticed (by me, at any rate) so far north. Frequent on the
west coast of Norway.
C. longipes (Bail.) Cl.
C', tripos c. tergestiiia Schutt. Incl. C. tripos r. horrida Cl.,
non C', horridum Gean.
As mentioned in an earlier work (L. 91, p. 43) Bailey's
Peridinium longipes seems to answer best to Cleve's C. tripos v.
horrida. This variety is quite typical in the Arctic Sea, but at
lower latitudes appears to pass entirely into C. tripos v. tergestina^
From this cu-cumstance, I cannot either see any reason why Bai-
ley's name for the whole series of forms should not be used as
in fact it now is by almost all authors on plankton.
This form also varies so much that it will be difficult to limit
it. Cleve still enters it in L. 40, p. 225 as C. t. var. longipes.
Very frequent, often in large numbers, more frequent than
C. maeroceros and intermedium, about the same as C. tripos; in
February — March and during the diatom inflow more frequent than
the latter species. Also found by Gran, rather numerous, in the
months of July — October 1898 — 99 at several places on the north
coast.
Distribution: Northern temperate form, which is especially
found in the coldest part of the northern Atlantic and in the con-
fines towards the arctic waters, as well as in the north eastern
arms, the North Sea (frequent in the English Channel in Feb.
1903, less so in May), Skagerack, Cattegat and the Baltic. Fre-
quent between Greenland, Iceland, the Faeroe Islands, Scotland
and the coast of Norway to Spitzbergen (cfr. Cl. L. 40, p. 225)
and Jan Mayen. In these northern waters the form horrida Cl.
appears to be most frequent. Common on the ^\•est coast of Nor-
way, especially in the spring months after the diatom inflow (April —
June 1898).
C. arcticiiui (Ehrb.) Cl.
Very rare, only found in two samples:
Strommen II, (Henningsvær) ''/2 1899, 0—30 m., r; Sea ott'
Rost (Vesteraalen) "h 1899, +•
Distribution: Arctic species, ncritic and oceanic, especially
frequent at Spitzbergen and Greenland and in the boundaries be-
tween the arctic and Atlantic waters (cfr. Gran L. 70, p. 50 — 52
and L. 69, p. 10).
Occurs in the sea between Norway and .Ian ^layen, but only
occasionally comes near the coast, mostly in deep water. Accord-
ing to L. 18, IV singly in the North Sea and ott' Scotland, May
1903. Absent round the Faeroe Islands. It is also wanting on
the west coast of Norway (only on one occasion observed ott the
north western coast, as far down as the Sond Fiord.
C. fiirca (Eiinn.) Dim.
Very frequent, usually rather numerous (the frequency varies
considerably from r to c), nmch scarcer during the spring diatom
inflow. Found frequently at several places on the iioi-th coast in
the months of July— October 1898—99 by Gkan.
Distribution: Temperate oceanic form, extending from the
warmer part of the Atlantic, the North Sea, Skagerack, Cattegat,
the Baltic, the west coast of Norway, Scotland, Iceland to the
most northern part, (not in the ai'ctic waters). Common on the
I west coast of Norway, often in quantities in late autumn. Rather
Protistplauktoii.
scarce oil' the Faoroo Islands. Also kimwii iVimi the I'arilic Ocean.
Ilu' liuliaii Ocean and the Red Sea.
C. liiirntinii (lliiitn.) Cl.
Is undoubtedly a Kood species.
ivare and scarce, almost entirely absent (hiiiiiL' the diatom in-
tlow in the sprini;-.
Distrihiifion: Oceanic I'onn. principally distriluited in the war-
nier part of the temperate Atlantic, northwards (in the auluuni, ac-
oordinsr to Clevb) to Icelaml and (.'reenlaiid. Very rare round
the Faeroe Islands. Often rather fre(|uenl on the west coast of
Norway. Also known from thi' Ked Sea and the Indian Ocean.
In the north eastern Atlantic found as far as the sea between
Tronrsd and .Ian .Mayen (J.)I!(;i:nskn L. ;il>. p. .-ii;, rr).
C. fnsas (KuRii.) Ur.i.
\"ery fri'ipient and often in ([uantities, only less numerous dur-
ing the spriuii diatom iuHow. Found by Gkan frequently at several
places on the north coast in the months of July— October 1898—99.
Distribution : Temperate, oceanic form, widely distributed from
the southern part of the temperate Atlantic to the North Sea,
(rather fre(iueut in the English Channel in the months of Febru-
ai-y and May 1903) Skag-erack, Cattet;at, the lialtic, the west coast
of Norway, Scotland, the Faeroe Islands, Iceland and right up to
Hiiren Eiland and Spitzbergeu (1900). Rather common round the
Faeroe Islands. Numerous on the west coast of Norway, especially
in late autumn.
HI- iPtearros^jenrma-baceae.
Pterospernisi Poi cb.
These remai'kable organisms arc probably, as Clevk and others
have suggested, resting stages. As far as I know, no one has up
to the present found anything to indicate where they really belong.
With us. there are others (occurring sparsely) besides the three
mentioned below, but I have not entered them.
P. Mobii (.JOKG.) OSTENI'.
OsTKNF. L. 117, p. lot. Ptrrosjihivm MiJbii Ji'mon^sEV h. 91,
p. 48.
Rather frequent, but generally sparsely.
Bit-tributioii: Not .sufficiently known. Seems to be a tempe-
rate Atlantic form. Very rare round the Faeroe Islands. Also
rare on the west coast of Norway.
P. VanhiSffcnii (Jurc.) Ostenf.
OsTEXF. L. 117, p. 1.51. Ptciosphæm V. .Ioegensex 1. c.
Rather more fre(|uent than the foregoing, and often rathei- numerous.
Distribulton : Like the foregoing. Seems to be an oceanic
form. Very rare on the west coast of Norway 1898.
P. dictyon (J org.) Ostenf.
Ostene. 1. c. I'trrosphwra dictyon Jciiu;. 1. c. As a rule the
most frequent form, though often occurring in smaller quantities
than the forcijoinu- one.
Dlslnlinln.i
■ritic form,
id thi' Faen
il<e lli(! foregoing .species, but perhaps rather
ueiit on the west coast of Noi'way, very rare
X'V- I3:a/losi>li.ae3raQeae.
llahtMpliJi'ra virjilis Sciimit/..
Inch //. uuiior OsTKNE.
In his last work (Jk.vn (I^. To, p. 12-l(;j has subjected this
species to a thorough, comprehensive treatment. I agree, on the
whole, with his conclusions, as they — as far as I am able to
judge — corre.spond very avcII to my own observations. I am also
on account of his statements convinced that the large, inner body
previously referred to by me (L. 91, p. If.) and which 1 with some
doubt took to be the nucleus, is only an accidental formation, caused
by imperfect preservation and treatment (plasmolysis).
Unfortunately, I have not later had any opportunity of exami-
ning the moving spores, as the large (piantitics of Hulosplwra which
were met with near P.orgen in 189s have not since leappeared (as far
as I know).
Common, often in (pumtities, scarce dniing the spring diatom
inflow, especially in 1899.
Distribution: Temperate and tropical oceanic species, widely
distributed in the warmer part of the Atlantic and especially (cfr.
Gean 1. c.) in the eastern part of the Gulf Sti'cam from the
Faeroe — Shetland channel to the far north of Xoi-way and I'idit up
to Baren Eiland.
According to Ceeve also west of .\meiica. in the .Mediterraneau
and the Indian Ocean.
iTlagella-ba.
PliatMK'.ystis Pouvhvti (II.'
Only noticed during the diatom inflow, then often in large
quantities, although very variable with i-egard to frequency.
Distribution: Arctic, oceanic (?) and boreal, neritic .species,
which developes in masses in the mixing-belt between the arctic
waters and those of the Atlantic.
Known fi'om Greenland, Iceland, the Faeroe Islands (very fre-
quent during a few months of the year), the North Sea, (numer-
ous in the English Chaimel in May 1903), Skagerack and Cattegat.
On the west coast of Noiway in large masses in the mouths of
March—May 1898.
"VI. S±l±co£lagellata-
<ii,Viiiiiilst4'r jH'Titasterias (I-Iiirb.) Schutt.
Is this really a dinotlagellatc as Schutt means? Occurs fairly
often in bottom samples and certainly is due to a plankton form.
Also occasionally found in slides from plankton preparations; but
114
E. Jørgenseu.
as this organism is so minute, it cannot be expected that it should
be retained by the net.
I have never succeeded in seing- anythins' but tlic siliceous
skeleton, notwithstanding that the species on our i\est coast docs
not seem to be so very rare.
Distribution: Very imperfectly known. Cl. L. 40, p. 2hi) men-
tions it from Uvo places near tlie American coast.
Wi««tepliann8 speculum (Ehkb.) Stohr.
Generally speaking, rare and only singly; more frequent,
occasionally numerous, during the diatom inflow in spring.
Is so small that it easily goes through the net. Its compara-
tive frequent occurrence during the diatom inflow may be partly
caused by its being retained by the diatom masses, but at any rate
plainly proves that at this period, it is of frequent occurrence in
the plankton.
Dibtrihiitiun : Judging from its distribution, it appears to be
partly of southern origin, coming rather sparsely (?) to the
north Atlantic as a southern oceanic species, partly too of northern
origin, coming from the northern or arctic coasts. According to
Cleve, distributed over the temperate northern Atlantic; also known
from the English Channel (February and May 1903, occasionally
numerous), the North Sea, Skagerack, tlie Baltic, the west coast
of Norway, the sea between Norway and .Jan Mayen (in arctic
waters, frequent, cfr. Jokgensen L. 92, p. 36), Gi'eenland, .Tan
Mayen and the sea towards Spitzbergen.
I>iof,vo«'lia fibula Ehkb.
Cleve (L. 40, p. 154) considers it to be doubtful whether this
genus belongs to the SilieofldycJIatd or to the Eadiolaria.
Rare and scarce. Occurs mostly in deep water samples.
Distribution: Temperate oceanic form. Occurs in the Atlan-
tic, The English Channel, the North Sea, Skagerack, Cattegat, the
llultic and the west coast of Norwav. evervwiiere in small numbei's.
Spherical shells, with several (more than 6)
main spines.
3 sphei'ical shells, with broad
3-edged main spines and
similar or smaller simple by-
spines on the outer shell . . Echinommn.
3 spherical shells, with nai-row
branching byspines on the
outei' shell Dri/mi/onnna clcgcnis.
4 spherical shells, with delicate
outer shell, which is pierced
by broad 3-edged main spines
and similar or smaller byspi-
nes from the next one Chromyechinxs boiralis.
Spongy outer shell, which length-
ens out along the main spines
as interwoven pyramids. . . . Rhizoph'iima horrale.
Circular discs, with porous plates above and
below Stylodictya.
Biconvex, spongy lens SiMngodiscus fxrus.
Outer shell imperfectly closed, with con-
centric belts and large openings; inside,
a double inner shell Phortioium jn/Ionium.
Outer shell with broad porous plates, which
coil themselves into a double spiral round
an inner shell; numerous, long, naiTow.
subulate spines Larcospira minor.
Shell of irregular construction with strong,
long protruding radial main spines
(about 12) Streblacdntliri circitmterta.
1. Ciibo!i«])liæri(la Hck.
A'cry sparsely represented (unless one includes Blii^oplnium
Jiorcdiri.
"VII. IEia,<a-±ola3r±a.
YII a. Si»iinieIIaria.
'I'lie small number of species which have been observed all
belong to the deep water fauna, and usually occur rarely and sparsely.
'I'hcy all appi'ar to 1)0 contined to the warmer, salter Alantic wa-
ters, and are perhaps all of them temperate oceanic. As a rule^
they are only found at places on the outer coast near the sea,
single specimens, however, have lieen found farthci- in at deep
places in the fiords, and these have probably been lii'ouglit in by
the water from the sea.
During the period of the spring diatom iiitldw. they appear
to be absent except in the inner tiord dejitlis. where they may
still be found in a few .scattered specimens.
Concerning the distribution cfr. farther below umler NasscUaria.
Key to tlie genera of Spumellaria.
Spherical shells, with (about) (j I'adial main spines in pairs pei'pendi-
cular on each other Hcxacontitim.
(Spongy outershell which length-
ens out as pyramidal scaftblds
along the main spines l-ihizoplcuwu borculc).
j Hexaroiitinin entbacantum Jorg. and H. pacbydermmii Josn.
.IOrgensen L. 91, p. 52—54, pi. II, f. 14.
These species, which I at first thought very ditferent, agree so
remarkably in some respects, that now I consider it by no means
unlikely that B. enthacantlmm is a young state of H. puchydcrmuni.
The points of agreement are chiefly in the second shell and in all
probability also in the inner one, which is, however, more difficult
to examine carefully, as it cannot be seen well unless the outer
shells are removed. It is however difticult to obtain this without
destroying the inner shell.
The points of disagreement are in the outer ball and ai-e so
evident in most instances that it will hardly be reconunendable, at
any rate at present, to consider the two species as identical. The
outermost shell does, nevertheless, appear to vary considerably, both
in diameter, the thickness of its wall and its pores, while the middle
one varies remarkably little.
I have in exceptional cases found specimens of H. cntluicanthiiiu.
where there were signs, of byspines on the outermost shell (they
are easily broken ott'), but have however, never met with any in-
stance of doubt as to whether a given specimen was H. enthacun-
thim or H. pcichydermum, when only the outer shell was present.
Whether there may possibly be several species or not, 1 have
not been able to decide, as both those above mentioned occur too
Protistplankton.
liucly in my niatciinl. \rt. I linvr the impii'ssioii that it is only
a (luestioii of dirt'crciit loniis. not of (iilt'crcnt spfcics.
When the outsido siioll is wanting — 1 look ujjon such forms
a-s younir specimens — I am, however, ([uite unable, at present, at
any rate, to decide whether tiie specimen l)clou<;s to tlic one or the
other of the species above mentioned, (t'fr. pi. VI II. f. :i2, a, b).
H. cnthaviinthiim jrnic.
(I'l. VIII. f. :!"■).
1 will only add a (^^w remarks to the detailed description given
1. c. (,l(')U(iKxsi:N L. 1)1, p. 'y2).
This species diHers from tlie foilnwiiiL'- in liavinu- a delicate
outer shell with comparatively narrow walls hot ween the pores and
no byspines.
As in the followiui;- species, the pores on the outer shell are
different in size, from 6 — 10 |i, most of them being S |i., although
they arc not strikingly unlike.
The pores of the middle shell in both species arc also alike,
there is a slight variation in the size of them on the same shell,
they average 4 — .5 \i (seldom as little as 3 or as much as 7). The
pores on the two outer shells are about equal in number on
the radius. But the inmost shell differs considerably in this re-
spect, the pores here being comparatively much larger and conse-
quently much fewer in uumbei-.
On young specimens, where only the two inner shells are de-
veloped, one may often see transverse processus on the radial spines
where the outer shell is found later on, these processus forming the
intermediate walls of those pores in the outer shell wdiich are
situated nearest to the main spines. On still younger specimens,
however, these processus are also wanting.
Such forms (cfr. pi. VIU, f. 32) may easily be mistaken for
species of the genus Hexnlonche. If one considers the coincidence
in dimensions and construction of the inner shells of Hexacontium
enthacantlutm and H. pitch ydennum, it would, however, seem most
reasonable to look upon them as being forms of these species.
The outer shell varies in its development from very thin to
moderately thick. The pores on the thicker shells seem to be
rounder and to have wider walls, which are more plainly widened
out in the corners.
I have very rarely seen specimens witii a trace of byspines
(conically heightened parts) in the corners between the pores.
Tiiese traces of byspines appear, however, to denote that the limit
in the direction of H. iMchijdannum is not certain. The common
name ought in this case to be H. pitch ijih-rmmn. which would then
represent the grown form.
The number of the main spines is usually fi, and sometimes 7,
but very seldom more. These spines are usually about equal in
breadth inside as well as outside the outer ball.
Ocean forms, of which I have seen a few, seem to diverge
somewhat (both in this and the following species). The specimen
illustrated pi. VIII f. 30 for instance, had a rather strong outer
shell with main spines, which, as is the case with H. pachy-
dei-miim, were considerably narrower inside the shell than outside.
The inmost shell too was more solid than usual, and had compara-
tively more pores and with stronger walls (clr. tig. 30 b.).
The dimensions of outer and middle shells on 7 individuals (the
6 from the west coast of Norway):
Outer shell
wanting
wanting j wanting
62 |.
78
73
90
Middle shell
34
33
32
32
33
34
34
Thus it will be seen that llir dianwlrr oftlH- middl.' shell varies
remarkably little, while that of the outcsr one varies considerably.
Rare, in deep water samples, always in small numbers.
Distribtttion : Temperate oceanic form, which with us is only
found in deep water, especially at a depth of 300 m. or more.
Somewhat more frequent on the west coast of Norway. Also known
from scattered spots in the sea beyond the coast of Noi'way and
from the Faeroe and Shetland Isles northwards.
H. pachyderniiini JiJi»;.
(PI. VIII, i. :il).
The byspines on the outer shell vary considerably in length.
They are found in all corners where the pores meet, so that each
pore is surrounded by several byspines (generally .5 or 0).
The pores on the outer shell are more or less round, the inter-
mediate walls being on the whole broader than in the preceding
species, answering to the development of the outer shell which is
altogether stronger in this species. This shell is especially thick.
The length of the main spines varies considerably.
The byspines on the middle shell are little conspicuous, and may
be easily overlooked (as in the case of the preceding species).
The innermost shell is here seen less clearly than in H. enth-
acanthum, unless the thick outer shell be removed. One may,
therefore, easily mistake this species for a Hexalonche. by over-
looking the inside ball. I have, however, repeatedly convinced
myself on breaking the outer shells, that it is alwayå present. Its
construction is the same as in the preceding species.
No important difference in dimensions between this species and
the precedmg one seems to be found, and this is a very important
factor when considering the question as to whether these supposed
species arc specifically different, or only constitute different forms
of one and the same species. Here too the outer shell varies in
size, but the middle and inmost ones are remarkably uniform in
this respect and resemble those of H. enthacanthum.
The ocean forms, however, appear to diverge essentially. I
have not had an opportunity, though, of studying them more thor-
oughly in richer material, so that I cannot yet give a definite opi-
nion as to the probability of separating new species. This, however,
does not seem unlikely.
For such a strongly developed ocean form from the sea beyond
Sondmore (in February 1901, S/S Michael Sars, a sample kindly
given me by Dr. Gran) was found:
Strong, long main spines (most of them broken off"). Numer-
ous byspines (4—6 round each pore), long, needle shaped, 40 \i.
long (nearly *ii of the radius of the outer shell). Outer shell very
thickwalled (6—7 |jl thick), pores almost even, + 8 |j., very broad-
walled, round, a little broader than the walls. 7 main spines, much
narower between the outer shells than outside the outmost one.
The diameter of the three balls 108 is 39, 19.
Occurred like the preceding species rather rarely and sparsely
in deep water samples, though perhaps somewhat more frequently.
As a rule it is found in deep water samples from such outer pla-
llfi
E. Joi'oensen.
ces whei'G the .sea water lias easy access. During- the spring
diatom inflow, it seems generally to be absent, except at greater
depths in the inner fiords, where scattered specimens occur. This
also seems to be the case, on the whole, with regard to the other
SpKinelhtria.
Disfrihntio'ii : Chiefly the same as in the preceding species, often
toiicther with it.
VII A. 2. Aiiitrofiipliærida H( ic.
Krliinoniiiia leptoderiuiiui Jokg.
(PI. VIII, r. :«).
.JOEGENSEN L. 91, p. 57.
This species is at once recognized by having more numerous
and shorter radial spines, larger and more uneven pores on its out-
side .shell, as well as by its irregular (deformed) middle shell. It
is also in other respects very ditt'erent from the two preceding
species.
The outer ball thinwalled (the walls broader than they are
thick). The pores polygqnally roundish oval, very uneven in size,
7— 25 |i, with intermediate walls (2— i |j. broad)-, which arc much
broader towards the corners (lumen rounded off).
The middle shell moderately thick (the intermediate walls being as
thick as they are wide, about 1 ^'2 i)-), rather angular and irregular,
a little larger than in Hexaconfium enthacanthum ; diameter about
40 |).. The pores somewhat uneven, roundish, 4 — 7 |j.. The inter-
mediate walls solid, not particularly broader in the corners.
It is difficult to see the inmost shell, which possesses solid
beams (about equal in thickness to those of the middle .shell), but
rather few polygonal, mostly pentagonal or hexagonal pores, about
8 ]>.. The diameter of the inmost shell about 15 \>- (or a little more).
About 15 main spines, about equally broad inside as outside
of the outmost shell, not long. They seldom protrude farther than
to a length equal to the distance between the two outer shells,
often less, and vary in development. Between the two inner shells,
the radial spines arc very narrow and in fact hardly widei- than
the beams of the inmost shell.
The byspines on the outside shell are in appearance like the
main spines, but not radially lengthened inwards, with a wide base
oil the outer shell (like the main spines) and very unevenly devel-
oped in size, although generally protruding less than the main spines.
Variable in number; although, as a rule, not many, far from being
devcdoped in all the corners, only here and there.
The number of the main spines is variable, often only about
10, though oftene.st about 15. They are .3-edged as in if r.x« (■•«/(/»;;/
purhijdfnii 11)11.
The nearest relation to this .species is, without doubt, K. Irin-
acri/nii Hck., which .species, however, to Judue from Hæckel's illu-
stration and description ■ (L. 84, p. 441, pi. 24, f. 6-— 8) is well
distinguished by the construction of the inside ball, as well as by
several other, less important, characteristics (as the number of the
pores and spines).
As in HcxnconfuDii juirln/ilrniuiiH and //. ciillKinnillniui. tliei'e
are forms without outer shells, but thi.'i'e is generally a trace of
these in transverse processus on the main spines. These may, hoA\-
evei', also be entirely absent. Such forms, of which one is illu-
strated on pi. VIII f. .33 c, might equally well he i-eckoned as
belonging to the genus Aclinommit (without bvsiiines on the third
shell), respectively Haliommn (with only two shells), if their di-
mensions and other characteristics were not completely correspond-
ing to the above species. Cfr. Jobgensen 1. c. p. 58.
This .species also varies a good deal. When the outside shell
is thin-walled, the pores and intermediate walls are of a more
uneven size. The by.spines are in such cases slightly developed or
(as yet) wanting.
It is likely that these divergences may be accounted for by a
difterence in age. A moi'e important difference is the number of
main spines, which seems to be able to vary from 10 to 16.
Comparatively frequent, though, like all radiolaria with us,
always present in small numbers. It occurs, however, decidedly
more frequently and in larger numbers than the two Hcxacontiam
species.
DisirihiifKiii : The same as that of Hr.iuconlinm enthacanthum
and H. parliyilciinau/. Frequent also on the west coast of Norway
and in the Norwegian 8ea.
E. trinacrium Hck.
The forms which I have tabulated under this name are some-
what uncertain. They are distinguished from the foregoing species
by a strong, rather thick outer shell, more numerous and stronger
byspines, as well as by a different construction of the inmost shell,
which is in most respects like the middle one.
There is nevertheless on the one side a considerable agreement
with Chromyechinus horcnlis, only that the outside shell (the fourth)
is wanting, on the other side a considerable resemblance to younger
forms of Drymyomma elegans, where the characteristic branched
byspines are still wanting or are branchless needles. To this must
be added that different forms of E. leptodermum may also have rather
strong outer shells and more numerous spines.
As a rule, though, the forms of Cliromyccliinu.^ horealix may
easily be recognized by the transverse processus on the radial spi-
nes, which here, as in E. Icptodermum and Hexacontimn enthacanttnnn
suggest the beginnings of the still undeveloped outer shell. The
forms of Drymyomma elegans have characteristic long slendei- main
spines and narrow byspines. Yet, I am not sure if there be not
still another species, most nearly answering to E. trinacriuvi, but
with long, narrow principal spines and byspines. the latter always
being branchless.
It is difficult to examine the imnost shell. I have not yet
succeeded in ascertaining with certainty whether such a firmly con-
structed inner shell with which E. trinacrium is depicted by
Haeckel (L. 84, pi. 24, f. (>— 81 is also characteristic of Chro-
myechinus horealis and Uryiiiijiiiiinia (d'ljmis. T have, howev'cr, seen
such a .shell.
As 1 have already suggested in a jircvions paper (.lnudioxsKN
L. 91, p. 57) it is not impossible that what I have called E. tri-
nacriuiii may be certain young forms of Chromyechinus horealis,
whci-e the above mentioned transverse processus on the radial
spines are wanting. On the other hand, it is just as likely that
there may bo with us another species differing from both Drymy-
omma elegans and Echinommn trinacrium, to which the supposed
intermediate forms belong. This species would be coinparativcly
frequent on the northern coasts of Norway.
I'ntil this is made evident, it will be best to keeji to the spe-
cies which arc always ea,sily recognized, viz. Echinommn leploili'r-
mum, Chniiiiycchiiiiis horealis and Drymyomma elegans.
Occin's in the plankton like the foi'egoing species.
Protistplanklon.
ir
l>r.> ■■■> 4>iiiiii]i flt')i:tns Jintd.
JoKtiEXSEX L. 91, p. 58.
This species, wiicu fully (levcloped, is very easily reeot-nized
by its liranched byspincs on the outside shell.
The outside shell is strou.iiiy deYj?loped, thick' walled, diameter
_:_ s.') |i. The poi-es are roundish with broad intermediate walls,
unevenly developed, thoui^h not so nnich so as in Cliromi/echinu.i
bi/r<:iilis. on an avera,<rc about the same size or perhaps most of
them a little smaller.
The two inner shells seem in all important respects to answer
to those of the following species, Chromi/echimis boredis. Still, I
nnist call attention to the fact that I have had very little chance
of examiniuii- them more tliorouijiily. as the species occurs so
spai'sely.
The number of the main spines seems to vary (?) from about
lo up to about 20. The largest are beautifully developed, long,
slendei' and always branchless, a few of the smaller ones seem,
on the contrary, occasionally to have a single needle shaped side
bi-anch, like the corresponding one in Chromyechinus borealis.
Of byspines there are some resembling the main spines, only
smaller and especially narrower. From these .3-edged spines there
seems to be every transition to numerous narrow needle shaped ones
without distinct edges.
^lost of the byspines, especially the narrow ones, carry in
tlieii- upper halves from 1 — i obliquely diverging narrow branches,
some of these again carrying a similar, but shorter, side branch.
There seems to be a regular transition from the more delicate
radial spines to the more sti'ongly developed, 8-edged and branch-
less, byspines.
It is, however, as above mentioned, probably not quite certain
that the previously mentioned Ecliinomma-f orms with long, slen-
der main spines and byspines, should all be included in this spe-
cies. These forms occur, with us, much nioix- frequently than the
fully developed Drymyommu clcfinus.
Rare and scarce, only found at a few places in 1899: Sea
otf GaukværO, "A, 0—700 m., Senjen, 'Vi, 0—130 m., the Vest
Fioid, V-.s 0—200 m.. Skroven, V=, 350—300 m.. the Tys Fiord I,
^%, 0—700 m.
DiMr'ibutwii : Very rare also on the west coast of Norway,
only in deep water. Also kn()\\n from the Norwegian Ocean oif
Sundmore and from the Vest Fioi-d. Feb. 1901. (Cfr. Guan L. 70,
p. 150—151).
Chroni:»'ecliinn!>> borealis (Cl.)
tPI. VIII. f. 3.t: pi. IX. fig. 3()— 37).
Actinomma boreale Cl. L. 30, p. 20, pi. 1, f. 5 c (vix a, b).
Chromyomvm boreale (Cl.) .Turu. L. 91, p. 59.
This remarkable species is ea.sily recognized by its four shells,
of which the outside one is exceedingly delicate and very differently
developed. This outside shell is very often wanting, but there are
usually — as before mentioned — indications of it in tlie trans-
verse processus on the radial spines.
On the outside shell there are — but only i-arely in the ma-
terial which I have examined — nai'row bysjiines, few in number,
-which most often form more oi- less oblifiuely (not straii'Titly ra-
dially) i)roti-uding extensions of the walls between the pores. They
may also sometimes be seen as bristle-shaped branches extending
obliquely out tVom the main spines. They arc^ thus not radial by-
spines, althoui;h they have uii(l(iiii)tc(||y the same bioloL-ical value
as these.
On account of these spines, it will. I think, be most correct
to enter the species as a Cliraniyrrlninis, es]iecially as, on the shell
next to the outside one. thei'e are both main spines and byspincs
(both having the same appearrancc) in the same sense as in Eclii-
nomma trhiacrium.
It is quite remarkable to what variations this species is sub-
jected, even in the matter of dimensions. 1 have found the follow-
ing dimensions on the three outer shells, for 0 specimens:
Outside shell
96 |x
114
100
118
121
116
Next to the outside one
77
83
83
83
89
86
Next til the inside mw . .
34
:;.>
37
.3(1
40
30
It will be seen that the dimensions of the shell next to the
inmost one diller only a little from the corresponding ones in Hex-
acontiuvi enthacanthum, H. pachydermum and Ech'inomma leptocUr-
iiium (as well as in E. trinacrium and Drymyomma elcynns). The
third shell too corresponds, on the whole, well to the third one in
the species mentioned.
This is a very interesting phenomenon, seeming to indicate a
development of all these forms from a common, comparatively young,
principal form, the balls being probably formed centrifugally, at
any rate, after the second. It may, on the other hand, perhaps
be the case that the less developed inmost shell is formed later,
centripetally. I mean that I have seen traces which lead me to
conclude that its connection with the second ball is not merely a
prolongation of the radial spines.
In this species, it seems to be possible to distinguish between
two series of forms, which in their extreme forms are so different
that one would not hesitate to class them as distinct species, if
there were not so many variations within each series that as yet
it does not seem able to fix any certain limit. It is not unlikely
that really here exist several closely allied .species.
The one series of forms (cfr. pi. VIII, f. 35) has shorter broader
spines, not very different in development, on the whole very similar
to those of Ech'momma trinacrium Hck. The outer shell is very
delicate, closed.
The othei- series has longer, moi'e slendei" spines, varyini;' con-
siderably in size. The outer shell is of firmer construction, and
always seems to be open on one side (not complete). Here the
radial spines and the byspines arc particularly long, and this cir-
cumstance together with the large hole in the outer shell causes a
foreign appearance, something like in certain .species belonging to
the Nassellaria and Phacodaria groups.
On strongly developed forms of this second series, there are
also sometimes seen „ false" byspincs, as described above, at any
rate in the form of side branches on the largest radial spines on
the open side of the outer shell.
On those forms too where the outer ball is closed, there often
seems, however, to be a comparatively .strong development of the
spines on one side of the shell.
lis
The pores on the outside shell vaiy considerably in size and
shape, both on one and the same individual and on different ones.
They range from quite tiny, circular shaped, to large, longish holes.
Also the width of the intermediate walls between the pores
i> very variable; on the other hand, then- thickness is never great.
The shell next to the outside one is always strong, thick-wal-
led, with very uneven pores, roundish and oblong, most of them
being 10 — 16 |j., although sometimes considerably smaller or larger.
The ball next to the inside one answers in all important re-
spects to the corresponding one in Echinomma leptodermitm.
The inmost shell is difficult to see. Its diameter is abouth 16 \k
I have not succeeded in getting it out uninjured when breaking
the outer balls, so that I cannot give a good drawing of it.
Cleve's Actinomma borealis is undoubtedly the same as this
species. He seems, however, to go too far in his opinion of the
variations in the radiolaria, as will be seen on reference to his
illustrations fig.s a and b (1. c, pi. 1, f. .5 a and 5 b). He looks
upon them as young forms of the same species which he illustrates
in tig. 5 c. I think that f . 5 b = Echinomma lejitodermvm, f . 5 a
is probably the same species (too few main spines depicted on the
illustration?) without a developed outer shell.
Rather frequent, both on the north , and west coast, though
rai-ely at all somewhat numerous. As is the case with the other
SpimieJIaria with us only found in deep water.
Distrihiition: The same as that of Echhiovima leptodcniuou.
Found by Cleve in deep water samples from the sea west and
south of Spitzbergen (L. 30, p. 26). Also known from a few pla-
ces in the North Ocean as well as (efr. Cleve L. 40, p. 136) a
couple on the American side of the Atlantic, near the surface.
Rhizoitleg'iiia boreale (Cl.) JOrg.
(Pl. IX. f. 38, pl. X. f. 38 e— f.).
Hcxadorua hvrealis Cl. L. 30, p. 30, pl. 2, f. i, a, b, c.
Rhizoplegvia boreale (Cl.) Jorg. L. 91, p. 61.
Easily recognized by the characteristic interwoven pyramids
around the main spines (pi. IX, f. 38 b).
Haeckel depicts similar pyramids for Rhizople(jina hjchiiospha-ra
(L 86, pi. 11, f. 5).
The inside shell is irregular, not quite round; sometimes re-
sembling a cube in shape, sometimes it is more hke an octahedron.
The pores ai'e uneven, irregular, polygonal, averaging about 10 [a.
The intermediate walls between the pores are not broad, differ-
ently developed, but never having the distinct broader corners which
correspond to the rounded lumen of the pore. A few small, short,
needle-shaped byspines are found hei-e and theic on the beams,
but not regularly in the corners.
The main spines are long and strong, often 8 in number (ac-
cording to Haeckel's system answering to an inner cube), although
also often only 6 (answering to an octahedron) or 7. A larger
number may sometimes be found (cfr. pi. X, f. 38, c— f.) The
main spines have 3 strongly developed edges wiiich luu■l■o^^• off too-
wai'ds both ends. On these edges there are transverse branches
diverging at right angles and these, together with the correspond-
ing ones on the othei- edges of the same spine, form a very vari-
able number of verticils of threes.
The spongy, loose and very irregularly consti'ucted network,
which forms the outer shell, arises from the lowest 2 — 3 verticils
on the main spines, but has the appearance of being lengthened
out a good way up along the radial spines, on account of the
thin connecting beams, which unite the different verticils parallel
to the direction of the spine (fig. 38, a, b).
Also on the outside of the outer spongy .shell (network), there
are some few scattered short and fine, needle-shaped byspines.
The ocean forms seem generally to have 6 radial spines.
There seems to be a slight difference between the regular foi'ms
which have 6 radial spines, and those which are more frequently
found in the coast water and which have about 8. The former seem
to have a smaller inner shell with distinct byspines. I have, how-
ever, not discovered any definite difference so as to make it necessary
to divide them into two or more species.
Young forms (cfr. pi. X, f. 38, e — f. and Cl. 1. c. pi. 2. f.
4 a) are rather unrecognizable, as both the interwoven pyramids
and the spongy outer shell are absent.
The construction of this species i-esembles greatly that of
Mhizoplecpna radicatum Hck. and JR. lijclinosphæra Hck. The inner,
fine, transverse branches on the radial spines in the space between
the outer, spongy shell and the inner shell are, however, wanting.
These transverse branches are by Haeckel the characteristic of
the subgenus Rhizoplegmklium.
According to Haeckel's system, it might perhaps be a ques-
tion as to whether or not our species should be classed as belonging
to the genus Lychnosphæra, because of the byspines on the inner
shell. As these, however, are small and few in number, and per-
haps not even always present, this would not be recommendable,
and still more so as such a distinction between the genera seems
to be unnatural.
Haeckel's genus Hexadoyas has radial spines without side
branches, for which reason I still mean that the above species finds
a more natural place among the closely allied foi'ms of the genus
Rhizoplecpna, notwithstanding that there undoubtedly often occur
forms with 6 main spines.
Belongs to the most common radiolaria with us and is not rare
in deep water samples, although never numerous.
Distribution: On the west coast of Norway rather fre(|uent,
although rare in fully developed condition. Known from the sea
west and south of Spitzbergen (Cl. L. 30, p. 30) and from a feu-
places in the Norwegian Ocean.
VII A. 3. Porodiscida Hck.
St^'lodirtya Ehrh.. Hck.
iSpecics of this genus seem only to occur (juite exceptionally
with us. I have only seen a very few individuals, which appeal',
however, to belong to species hitherto unknown. All have more
or less distinct circular, inner rings, not spiral-shaped, and belong.
therefore, to Haeckel's subgenus StyJodictyon.
In deciding a species, it is of great importance to examine the
shaj)e of the disc in side view.
I have only included in my list those species in which 1 am
acquainted with this shape.
S. tenuispina Joro. n. sp.
(PI. X, f. 39).
Shape of the slnU in side view: ^\lmost linear, though some-
what thicker in tlic middle and slightly narrowed towards the ends
Protistplnnktoii.
which arc rounded off. A small portion nf tin' central part of the
shell is stronuiy convex, forming a pioliiHiiii- hail shaped cap on
either side (pi. X, f. 3!)c).
SijKtcm of Ehn/n: From an inner little spherical siiell 4 radial
lods extend in the form of a cross tn the 1st rin^', which forms
an irregular ipiadrani-ie with rounded corners. The radial rods
pass throuijh the middle of the sides. Beyond this rinj? thci-e are,
on the specimen illustrated, G — 7 rings, each joined to the one next
outside by a continually increasing number of radial rods. It is
likely that the number of the lings increases as time goes on. The
iinier rings are still somewhat angular, the outer, however, more
iei;ular. The outmost ones seem, however, again to show irregu-
larity, which perhaps, disappears with age.
Purf>:: The strougly convex central part, which corresponds
fairly well to the 1st ring, has iiuiisually large, roundish, hexagonal
pores, which are much broader than the separating walls. The
I'est of the pores are exceptionally small and uneven in size, most
of them being narrower than the intermediate spaces, or of the same
width as these, very little lai'gcr outwai'ds, -2—3 on the space bet-
ween two rings.
L'adial sjiiucs: Around tlie disc (in the imperfectly developed
individual, cfr. the illustration) a few very narrow, needle-shaped
radial spines protrude, apparently in no detinite order. Numerous
radial rods are to be found between the outer rings; some go
through two or more, others again only connecting two rings.
B/jsjiinrs: Very small, almost punctiform, short byspines, lar-
gest and closest together on the convex cential part, the others
being only scattered over the disc.
Dimensions: Diametei' of 1st ring 30 \>., of 2nd 42, of 3rd
39. of 4th 78, of 5th 98, of 6th 120, of 7th 144, 8th ring irregular
and as yet incomplete. The rings are thus somewhat broader ont-
A\ards. The large pores on the central part 5 — 6 m the small ones
only I V2— 3— 4 |i. The few piercing radial spines only protrude as far
as a distance equal to the breadth of the rings. The disc is 37 [j.
thick at the convex central part, outside this 30 11, only about half
as thick at the margin.
The specimen which is illustrated seems to me to suggest that
the few piercing radial spines are in reality radial rods which
penetrate several rings, similarly to those which are seen here and
there farther in between the rings. In this case, it is hardly cor-
icct to cousidei- them as the radial spines characteristic of the
Lienus Sti/lodictija. The above species might just as well, for that
matter, be classed as belonging to the genus Forodiscus (without
marLiinal spines); but as one cannot be sure whether there may not
be radial spines on the outside ring in the fully developed indivi-
dual. I have retained the species under the genus Stylodicti/a, where
it ^\ould at once be placed after a less critical examination. It is
certainly also closely related to the following species.
In structure it is very like Forodiscus orhiculatns Hck. (L. 80,
p. 492, pi. 29, f. 1), which, hoAvever, wants the very charac-
teristic, coarsely porous, central part. This has the appearance of
a spherical shell with a diameter greater than the breadth of the
disc, with a smaller sphere in the middle (this sphere is the inner-
most shell) and with equatorial rings outside.
Only twice noticed in 1899: In the sea otf (iaukværo, '7i,
0—700 m.; in the sea oft' Rost, --/;, 0 — 900 m. This makes it
very probable that it is an oceanic, deep watci- species, which only
exceptionally comes to our coasts.
S. validispina Jciito 11. «p.
(PI. X, f. 40).
The structure is, on the whole, the same as in the foregoing
species. The strange, peculiar, strongly convex central part is,
however, wanting (the disc is homogeneous) and the margin is fur-
nished with numerous stiong sjiines which are almost i-egularly di-
stributed.
Shit pi' of III,- slirll ,11 siilf ricw: Hi'oadly linear (the di.sc is of almost
even thickness) but little narrower at the margin than in the middle,
with sharp or obtuse corners, not clearly rounded otf at the ends,
but almost scjuai'e. There are short sitines scattered on the cen-
tral pait.
Thr si/slrn, of nniis: From the innermost little shell 4 radial
rods extend in the shape of a cross to the fir.st ring, as in the
preceding species. The ring itself is also here an irregular quadrangle
with rounded corners. Outside this ring, there are three others,
connected to each other by radial rods Avliose number increases
outwards. In the prolongation of the 4 primaiT radial rods (from
the inmost shell) may be seen, more or less clearly, some similar
ones which arc rather crookedly placed, aud these conjoin to form
4, more or less definite, zigzag rods, which go through the whole
system of rings. On the outside ring there are numerous (21)
equatorial, narrowly conical, marginal .spines.
Pores: The pores in the centre are very small, punctiform,
very scattered ANith wide intermediate spaces, gradually larger out-
wards, on the two outer rings about 2 on the space between the
rings, uneven in size, up to 4 \>. or a little larger. Between the
pores on the central part very small, punctiform byspines are .scat-
tered, which may easily be overlooked.
Radial spines: Numerous, narrowly conical (subulate), strong
radial spines of ditterent lengths, the longest being little more than
V2 of the radius of the disc. Some project out from the i-ing next
to the outside one, several too from the one next to the inmost
one, and yet a few from the innermost one.
Byspines: A few scattered ones, very short and vei-y small,
needle shaped, extend from the central part of the disc.
Dimensions: The diameter of the inner shell 14 |i., of the first
ring 34, of the second 60, of the third «4. of the fourth l(t2. In
thickness 24 |)..
The specimen illustrated appears to be almost fully developed.
Probably only the small portion of the outer rinn which is not
seen in the illustration, is all that is wanting.
This species exhibits a certain amount of agreement with S.
stellata Bail. (L. 9, p. 6, pi. 1, f. 20), which has, however, fewer
and broader spines, and also diifers in other respects.
Only once found: Sea off ROst, "A 1899, 0—900 m. (together
with the preceding and the following species).
S. aculeata JijRc;. n. sp.
(PI. X, f. 41).
This species corresponds well in structure to the foregoing
one, but differs in a marked degree with regard to its radial spines,
which are particularly numerous, and are more irregularly placed,
not all lying at the same level, that of the disc, but pointing ob-
hquely beyond and beneath it.
Shnpe of tlie shell, in side riew: Broadly linear, with rounded
corners and ends. From the centre to near the margin, there are
small scattered punctiform byspines.
120
E. Jørgensen.
System of ring!;: On the whole hkc the preceding-, only the
ring-s are more irregular in shape and width.
Outside the fourth ring- there seems to be traceable the be-
dnning of a 5th which is as yet not formed.
Poi-ps : On the whole like those of the preceding. Very large
pores here and there on the edge of the disc, which would pro-
bably have formed several smaller ones later on. The byspines are
very scattered, fewer in number than in the preceding species, but
distributed over a larger part of the disc.
liadial spines: The rings are united similarly to those in the
preceding species, but the number of radial spines around the disc
is larger, more than 30. The spines are narrower and more
irregularly developed, some being a little bent, turned outwards
and obhquely upwards, not all at the same level, equatorial, but
distributed over the broad, rounded margin of the disc. The length
of the spines is about the same as in the preceding species.
Byspines: Very similar to those of the preceding species, but
more scattered and distributed over the whole of the disc nearly
out to the margin.
Dimensions: The diameter of the inmost shell 12 ij., of the hrst
ring about 38, of the second 54, of the third 85, of the fourth 110.
Pores uneven, most of them being 2—4 ij-. The spines protrude as
much as to 30 [k The disc is 28 \>. in thickness.
This form appears to ditfer considerably from the other spe-
cies on account of the irregularly placed marginal spines. The
specimen illustrated is probably not quite fully developed.
Note. Sfyloiliefya aspera .TiiRH. (L. 91, p. (il) is a fourth
species.
VII A. 4. Spongodifscida Hck.
Spongodison»'! favns Ehrb.
Ehbb. L. 53, p. 301. Hck. L. 86, p. 577.
A species, which on the whole corresponds fairly well to the
description given by Haeckel of this species, was twice found to-
gether with Stylodidya tenuispina (cfr. under this heading).
No inner rings w&tq seen. The disc was shaped like a
little thick, biconvex, lens. Towards tiie margin there were fine
radial spines here and there, some of these were a little protruding ;
but the disc did not appear here to be fully developed. The pores
towai'ds tlic mai'gin much larger than in the middle. Diameter
180 |)..
Distribution: According to Haeckel, the North Atlantic,
Greenland, FaerOe Channel (Murray), surface.
VII A.
Irregular Spnmellaria.
Tlie tliree foi-ms mentioned below of irregular Wpumellaria
are difficult to trace and explain, and have given mc a great deal
of work and taken a lot of time. Foi' each form I have briefly
mentioned the results I at last -arrived at; but there is still a good
deal of work left before a full light with regard to their structure
can be claimed.
VII A. 5. Pjioiiida Hck.
I'liorticiniu pyloninm (Hck.?) Cl.
(PI. X, f. 42, a-d: pi. XI, f. 4-2, e— f., f. 43—45).
Cl. L. 30, p. 31, pi. 3, f. 2 a, b, c. Hck. L. SG, p. 709,
pi. 49, f. 10? Tetrapylonium Clerei Joeg. L. 91, p. 64.
This species was first classed as Phorticium pyloninm Hck.
by Cleve, 1. c. Judging from his illustrations, the innermost shell
was not noticed, which would allow of the species being classed
as Phorticium pylonium, a form A\hich is probably little known.
As I, however, found such an innermost shell, and apparently
3 systems of girdles, I concluded that I should refer the species
to the genus Tetrapylonium, as T. Clevei Joeo. n. nomen. Cleve
has, in a later work accepted this name and remarks that the spe-
cies is not identical to Phorticium pylonium Hck., probably because
he has also seen the innermost shell.
After much fruitless labour, I at last succeeded — as far as I can
see — in getting a glear idea, in all important points, of the struc-
ture of this interesting species, and I have found it to be as described
below. As will be seen, it is quite different from that of the genus
Tetrapylonium and — as far as I can see — of all the others
mentioned by Haeckel. This would necessitate a new genus, if
there were not a possibility that the species is, after all, identical
to Haeckel's Phorticium pylonium.
The genus Phorticium is too vaguely described by Haeckel
to be recognized, either after the desei'iption he gives or his illu-
stration. As, however, Haeckel speaks of P. pylonium as a very
frequent species of very varying appearance, there may be, as al-
ready suggested, a possibility of my species, after all, being found
to be the P. pylonium.
The structure is principally as follows (cfr. pi. X, f. 42*):
On the most perfectly developed specimens there is on the very
outside a largest, lateral girdle, a broad oval or almost a rectangle
in shape, with rounded corners. (Cf. Cl. 1. c. fig. 2 a). Generally,
only the sides of this girdle, nearest to the transverse girdle, are
present. This outmost lateral girdle is seen in profile in a dorsal
view, looking perpendicularly towards its level (when the belt itself
it seen from the narrow side). Cleve's fig. 2 a gives such a dor-
sal view.
Right in tlie middle of this girdle and placed perpendicularly
on it, dividing it into two equal parts, we find a second girdle de-
veloped where it must be shortest, namely, on a plane parallel to
the shortest side of the rectangle. This is the transverse girdle (the
designations correspond to Haeckel's). It is seen from the front
in the dorsal figure (pi. X, f. 42, a, b) and from above in the
apical one (pi. X, f. 42 c, d). In the lateral figui-e (pi. XI, f. 42, e, f)
the sidepieces of the girdle are seen from the front; they coincide
with the corresponding parts of the lateral girdle.
Across this girdle a new one is similarly developed at the
shortest distance, perpendicular to both the former ones. This is
the sagittal girdle. It is seen in ])rolih' in the lateral figure (the
sagittal section) and from above right against its wide side on the
apical one (the transverse section).
Again, perpendicular to this sagittal girdle and to the pre-
ceding one, and also where the distance is least, yet another girdle
is similarly developed, thus forming an inner lateral one parallel
to the outermost one. which is (lie largest.
Protistplnnkton.
Ill this way tlio dnilcs continue inw.nils. until their arc :}
iatt'ial. :! transverse and -i sairittal imes. In tiie ijorsal view ithe
lateral section' there will, therefore, be seen 2 coiieentrie, some-
what oval, inner shells eneircleil by a broail cross ginllc and a
lateral airdle, which is still broader and more or less completely
developed and is seen in profile (f. -12 a, b.) In the lateral view
(on the sairittal section) will also be seen two inner shells, both
iihloni^-rectaiiL'iiiar. Thi' iiiiieriiinst diie is coniiectrd with the
next one. by a more or less clearly disceiiiihie i;inlle, the inner
lateral jrirdle. Inside the innennost one, there are traces of yet
another smaller one. Outside the outermost one, will be seen the
more or less complete broad lateral girdle (f. 42, e. f.) In the
apical view (the transverse section) may also be seen two inner
shells, almost square with curved sides. The middle one is joined
to the outer transverse girdle by another girdle which is not very
broad — the sagittal girdle. Round the figure the transverse girdle
is seen in profile (f. 4:2 e. d; the eiidiiieces of tiie lateral girdle
are here undeveloped).
It must not be understood that the ghdlcs are developed from
the outside inwards, in the order in which I have described them.
(.Ml the contrary, it is probable here too that the formation of the
skeleton is centrifugal, the innermost portion, perhaps, excepted.
The most important ditference between the structure of this
species and that of Tetraiiifh}niim Hcic. is that in this latter genus
(according to Hck.) 3 separate trizonal shells are developed one
outside the other. In the form here described, on the other hand,
it will be more or less arbitrary to distinguish between several shells
on account of the connecting belts which in themselves constitute
a clear structural plan.
There is, too. a number of radial spines, which are especially
detinite and strongly developed in two diagonal planes, and here
form 8 protruding spines at the coniei's, as in Ociopijle ocfosti/le
and several similar forms.
There are, also others, apparently irregularly scattered, which
support the outside lateral girdle.
Finally, a rather large number of byspincs occur on the outer
part of the shell, short, needle shaped and with a broader base.
The pores are uneven, somewhat larger on the outer lateral
girdle, roundish, oblong and polygonal ; with strong separating walls,
\\lien they are fully developed. On the transverse girdle, the pores
are smaller, roundish, very uneven, with wide separating walls.
The girdles are all rather irregularly developed, not symmetri-
( il. Neither are the radial spines symmetrically placed.
As already mentioned, it cannot be seen from Haeckel's de-
Miiption, what is the actual structure of the genus Phm-ticium. I
have, therefore, refrained from proposing any new name, until
Haeckel's species Phortmitm pi/hinnm is more clearly defined.
To the form here described belong also the majority of Octo-
j';/lr octosti/Je HcK. /'. mi)ior Joeg. 1. c. p. 64. These foi'ms are
Ir-s developed than Tetrapylonium Clcrei, but seem, generally speak-
iiiL'. to belong to the same species. To the same forms too, the
I'li'Jiik-iinii jiijloiiiioii illustrated by IIaeckel would appear to
lirlollg.
It is. however, quite likely, that at least two species are con-
it ahvavs in small
luuibei
deep
Rather frequent,
water samples.
Disirilnif'ion : Not unfreipient on the west coast of Norway, also
in deep water samples. Cleve has found it in samples from deep
water from the sea west and south of Spitzberiren, as well as in
surface samples from the American side of the North Atlantic.
Also known from a few places in the Norwegian Ocean.
IIaeckel designates Fliurticita» p;/lonium as cosmopolitaii
(Mediterranean. Atlnntif. I'ficili.- etc ..surface and in various
de|)ths".)
VII A. «. IJllioliilH. lIcK.
■jHr«-OM|>ira minor (.hiw..)
Liflicliun miliar .Iiihg. J^. <)1, p. (Jo, p|. .5, f. 24.
This species has a very dirterent appearance, according to tin-
position in which it is seen.
In one position it has an appearance corresponding to tin; illu-
stration referred to, and which caused me to consider it as a Li-
thelius with a double spiral.
On being rolled under the microscope it has, in another posi-
tion, the appearance of 3 distinct (concentric) shells, one outside
the other, the innermost being somewhat oblong, the other two
rounder.
In this last position, an iudefinite contour of an inner, smaller
shell is seen in the innermost one.
From which one may probably conclude that the innermost of
the three shells is double, Larnucilla-shnped or trizonal fac-
cording to Haeckel's designations). I have not, however, succeeded
in seeing this clearly.
Form this shell there extends, on both sides, a transverse
girdle, which winds itself into a spn-al about the largest axis of
the inner shell, the longitudinal or principal axis (after Haeckel).
These two spirals give rise to the appearance of a LifhÆus with
a double spiral, when looked at from above (transverse section, after
Haeckel apical view).
In a certain, a little oblique, position one gets again a more or
less indefinite impression of a single spiral.
In each spiral there is only a little more than one tuin.
Pores somewhat uneven, not large.
Numerous, long, narrow, needleshaped radial spines. (Cfr. also
JORGENSEN 1. C. 1.
One of the most frequent radiolaria in the north, sometimes
also rather numerous, especially in ocean samples.
Distribution: Also rather frequent on the west coast. Known
too from a few places in the Norwegian Ocean, where it occurs
together with southern forms.
Note. \Miat is in one instance in the tables entered as Lithelins
spiralis Hck. is very uncertain, and it is probably only a form of
LurcospirK minw, which, as already mentioned, in certain positions
gives the appearance of a single spiral. The same is the case with
regard to L. spiralis .Tiikg. L. 91, p. <w;.
VII A. 7. Strebloiiida Hck.
Ktrt'blacuntliu circumtexta (Joni;.)
(PL XI and XIl, f. 4li).
Sorularciis circumtextus Jorg. L. 91, p. 65.
This is also a very difficult form to define, and I have not yet
succeeded in getting a clear insight into its structure. It can, how-
ever, not belong to the genus Sorolarcus Hck., as I at first thought.
IH
122
E. Jørgen
There appear to be about 12 strong radial spines, of the same
shape as those of Phorticimn pyloniiim Ch., but protruding much
further. They are more or less round, not three edged.
The outline of the shell in most positions is a broad oval, in
a few, almost round. Some optical sections show inner spirals, then
a double spiral as in Larcosinra minor, other sections show at
least 3 shells one outside the other, perhaps with several chambers
(only indistinctly seen).
On the smaller and simplerer forms (cfr. PI. XI, f. 46, c, d;
pi. Xn, f. 46 k, 1), which I have taken to be specimens in an
early stage of development, a single central chamber and spiral
twists, which appear to form a snail spiral, may be seen.
On the whole it seems to me at present, that this species
may best be placed in the genus Strehlacanfha Hck.. though it may
prove not to belong to this genus either.
The outer shell shows a more or less irregular structure and
vei-y uneven pores, from rather small to large ones and large holes.
On the outside of larger imore developed) forms there are also more
or less well developed byspines, very various as regards length and
development, from small subulate ones with a rather wide base, to
long, narrow needles. When more developed, these byspines are
more or less connected through fine branches to an outer, spongy
case immediately outside the outer shell. This spongy case is,
however, rarely much developed, and seems then to be confined to
■ — or at any rate most developed at — the one end of the shell.
Cfr. also JoEGENSEK 1. e.
Rare, and generally only singly, the small, younger individuals
rather more frequent: The Vest Fiord 1, "A, 0—180 m.; Hen-
ningsvær, "A, 0—180 m.; the sea off Gaukværo, 'Vi, 0—700 m.;
Skroven, V2, 0—300 m., */■:, 350—300 m., V4, 0—150 m.: The
Eaftsund, ■' 2. 0— 26n ni.; Tlie Tys Fiord I. "Vm, 0—700 m.
YII B. Aeanthaiia.
Of this group there were only exceptionally small forms with
skeletons which seemed to be quite in the wi-ong place and were,
on tlie whole, very imperfectly developed.
Acanthoma echinoklef; too, which is frequent on the coasts of
Nor^\•ay during the summer, was entirely absent.
I have only entered a peculiar form Avithout any skeleton,
whicli does not seem, up to the present, to have been met with
anvwherc else.
Hailio>>|»li:cra n. <,'eu.
I have several times, but only in conserved material, come
across an organism which appears to be a skeleton-less radio-
laria of the division Aeantharia. It possesses, namely, the peculiar
])lasma products which Haeckel calls myophrisca, and wiiich he
describes as characteristic of this group.
For this species, I have had to coin a new iianic and have
■called the genus Radiosphæra.
R. anacantliica JiiRc. n. »p.
(I'l. XVU, fi.;. 105, lOfi).
Central capsule sjjlierical, filled with numerous small and lai-ge
balls (alveoli?) the majority, small. Spines and skeleton wanting.
Kegularly distributed outside the central capsule, there are several
bundles of myophrisca, probably 20 in number. They are short,
linear, rather glossy, and are about even in size. In every bunch
6 — 8 of these bodies. These bunches (or bundles) lie in the outer
part of the calymma which forms a structureless mass of slime
(jelly), wliich is only Aåsible on being coloured.
The diameter of the central capsule is 65—70 |i.
Rare and scarce, is. however, easily overlooked: -'Vi 1899,
Kvænangen, 0 — 50 m.; Vs Evenstad I, 0—50 m. , "Va 1900 Bål-
stad I, 0—200 m.; "A the Skjerstad Fiord IV, 0—300 m. and
the Skjerstad Fiord V, 0—420 m.; V4 the Skjerstad Fiord XII,
0—500 m.; «A the Folden Fiord I, 500—400 m.
From the above, the species would seem to be oceanic, uncer-
tain whether it is temperate or boreal.
VII C. Xas!i$ellaria.
Of this division there was a comparatively large number of
forms iu the plankton examined and also on the west coast of
Norway; and, among these, there were a good many which, on
account of their slightly developed skeletons, were at a low point
of evolution. These proportionately simple forms are very interesting,
in as much as they seem to be able to furnish valuable information
with regard to the oi'iginal str-uctural type for the corresponding
divisions, as well as \\"ith regard to the phylogeny of the whole
class.
H.4Eckel's splendid work on Radiolaria (L. 86) is on the
whole admirable for its clearness and the ingeniousness with which
apparently unimportant details are fitted together to make up a
wonderful and consistently worked out system. If it had not been
for this immortal work of Haeckel's, the immense material, which
the Challenger and other expeditions provided, would have waited
long before it could have been made useful to science to any great
extent. There may be differences of opinion as to the justification
or appropriateness of the genera and families erected by Haeceel;
it is impossible, however, not to admire the immense amount of
valuable observations which are so plainly and clearly set forth
in his extentive work.
As far as XasseUaria are concerned, Haeckel's system does
not seem to be quite successful; but this di\ision is, as he himself
mentions several times, particularly difficult, and can hardly be dealt
with satisfactorily in any other way than by starting from the
simplest forms. These simple forms are, however, small and in-
conspicuous and may therefore easily be ignored for the beautiful
and wonderful forms of which there are so many illusti-atidiis in
Haeckel's famous work.
It is just for these simple forms that it seems to be imjjossible
to use Haeckel's classification. After mucli groping and maii\
fruitless attempts to arrange the Nassellaria, which I have fouml
in my material, according to Haeckel's system, I have at length
felt compelled to get out of the difficulty by erecting several new
genera.
Unfortunately the Nassellaria in my material — as is the case
with Radiolaria on the whole — never occur iu any important
numbei-s, but often only singly. I am, however, more and moie
convinced that certain simple structural conditions, which seem to
have been partly overlooked, partly considered to be of little im-
portance by Haeckel, who does not use them in his classification,
recur as the uround i)lan of a large number, ])robably the majority,
if not all. of foi-nis of ya.'^rllaria.
Protistplankton.
123
Mori'ovtT. I liavc bcni cniililtMl, l)y kiiiil assistance from differ-
riii (|iiart('rs. to obtain soiiic ricluT nulioiaria samples — most of
tlifiii. luifortuuateiy, of fossile species — , which, althoufrh 1 have not
yet hy far been able to work them tiirougii, as far as I can see, show
that my opinion of the strnctnre of this division of NasseUaria is
on the wliole correct. 1 iiope in the futnre in a more detailed
work to be able to eive more exact leasons for my opinion, and
try to apply it consistently to the more important i:enera of ^V^s-
scllariii.
My remark, that Hakckel had to some extent ijruored certain
piimary skeleton parts, which I consider to be the principal type
fur all the forms which I have examined, may give rise to some
niisnnderstandiny. Haeckel several times draws special attention
to the ..basa'l tripodium" as a ground plan, from which a large
number, perliajis all. of the forms may be developed. This triradial
iiTonndplan also lies at the bottom of certain classitications in his
system. According' to my opinion, thei'e is something wanting
here — of which more further on — which is of gi-eat import-
ance. Thus I found, quite at the beginning of my work with
XasseJlaria (.IihuiExsEx L. 91 1 that Claparede's genus Playiacantha
was of lUfferent structure than Haeckel (and Clapahede) had de-
scribed, and, unfortunately, proved to have the same structure which
Haeckel describes as characteristic for other genera (Plagonidium
HcK., Plagiocarjya Hck., Peripleeta Hck.).
This peculiar structure is, however, not contined to radiolaria
beloHL^'ing to the genera mentioned, but is common to the whole
division, \\-itli variations in development in ditferent directions (see
below).
This circumstance of itself makes it impossible to retain Haeckel's
g"enera in their original detinition.
Whoever has tried to use Haeckel's system of classification
of Xassellariu foi' other divisions, as, for instance, the large one
C'l/rtoiden, must certainly have found that the genera and divisions
of his system are, at any rate in part, unsatisfactory and prove not
to be so well limited as to be of practical service. In several
instances, certain secondary structural conditions of comparative
insignificance are taken to be a basis for division, as also, in not
a few cases, accidental and passing stages of development are
used as distinctive characteristics. Especially in several of the
( 'l/rtoi(Jca in my material there are — and must be according to
my oiiinion — real radial apophyses, which are not found in the
corresponding genera according to Haeckel, so that they would
have to be classified under quite different divisions in his system.
On this account, I have been obliged to start new genera
here too.
It seems to me that taken as a whole, Haeckel's system as
regards the XanseUaria, — at any rate, large portions thereof —
must be entirely reconstructed. It will then be possible to retain
a large number of Heackels genera, but with different definitions.
Haeckel mentions several times that the Xassellaria can
monophyletically be traced from an oi-iginal ground form, but that
great difficulties are met with when one tries to put this into practice.
He states that „the basal tripodium" or a sagittal ring or a ce-
phalis may be looked upon as such a ground form. He seems,
however, to consider the tiipodium as the most natural starting
point, as there are traces of such a tripodium to be met with in
the ring species and Ci/rtoidca (..cortinar feet" in Cortimi and Cor-
tiniscus, „cortinar septum" in several Ci/rfoidea).
This tripodium corresponds best also to my ideas.
As a foundation for the detailed desciiptidn which follovFs, I
have, had to coin various designations which arc most easily ex-
plained together when giving a comparative treaty of the whole
group. Then too, I will explain my ideas with regard to the re-
lation one to another, and the origin, of the g-enera found in the
material under examination.
Pliylogeny of the genera mentioned.
As an original gi'ound foi'm, 1 take oni; which is similai' to
Plagonidium Hck. (and Plagiocarpa Hck.) and which has four
spines, extending in twos divergently from the ends of a short
central rod. 'Vho plane thi'ough two of them, the sagittal plane,
is perpendicular to the plane through the other two.
With a change of direction, an apical spine, A, and .3 basal
ones will soon appear. These basal spines are one of them dorsal^
D (fig. I) and two lateral, Lj. (right) and Lj (left).
This seems to be a natural
form for the skeleton, con-
sidering the position of the
central capsule. (Cfr. below,
concerning the position of ba-
lance in the water).
These 4 primary spines
are, as stated in my previous
paper (L. 91), the same as
constantly occur in the Xassel-
laria which I mentioned. There
they were called : Der primare
Mittelstachel (= D), der Vor-
derstachel (^ Li) and der
Hinterstachel (= Lj.). :My
reason now foi' changing the
names is that the designations
used will continuallv recur in
., . , , . ,.' , . , Fig-. I. The ground form: lateral view, per-
the special descriptions, which ^ ,. , „ , ,. „ „ ,, » „ .
' ^ ' spectively. Schematically, as the foUowiiis.'
it would not be at all easy to " figures,
understand unless I gave these
spines their special names, so that it was important to choose
suitable ones, and such as agree as far as possible with the designa-
tions used by Haeckel, whereever these latter could be retained.
If the skeleton be placed so that the central rod is horizontal
and seen from the ventral end, the sagittal plane being vertical
and the apical spine directed upwards, then the primary dorsal,,
basal spine D will be directed backwai-ds and downwards, the
apical spine A somewhat backwards and upwards, the left, lateral
spine Lj (from the ventral end of the central rod) downwards,
forwards and to the left, and the right, lateral spine L^. downwards,.
forwards and to the right (fig. II and fig. HI).
Now there arises. a verticil of 3 branches on each main spine,
and so we have the Plagiacantha type, as it is found in the spe-
cies P. arachuoides Clap, (not the genus Plngiaeantha Hck.).
The apical spine is here rather small and has (generally?) only
two branches.
ily reason for considering the apical spine, nevertheless, as be-
longing to the primary skeleton, is that I have never come across-
124
E. Jørgensen.
any form in ^\'hieh it was wanting. Its comparatively weak de-
yelopment, in many cases, may tlierefore be due to retrogression.
vVt any rate, it would have to be looked upon as a spine which
appears at a very early stage of development, so that, in the case
in question, it will only be immaterial whether it is considered as
being formed at the same time as the 3 basal ones, or as having
u
7ig. II. The ground form ;
ai)ical view.
Fig. in
Tlie same; ventral
D
A
been formed later. In other words, Haeckel's basal tripodium may
be a more original form; but the ground form with 4 spines which
I have chosen as a starting point, is the common type for all the
forms which I have found.
This primary verticil of branches is found, more or less di-
stinct, in a series of forms, which appeal-, therefore, to originate,
mure or less directly, from the Plagiaccmiha type.
There is a peculiarity with regard to the verticil, whicii plays
an important part when examining the skeletons, as it makes it
easier to trace the corresponding parts and makes clear the rela-
tion between certain forms.
The branches of the dorsal spine, D,
are placed one dorsally, two ventral-later-
ally. (Here we only regard the projections
of the branches on a plane perpendicular
to the direction of the main spines. The
actual direction of the branches is deter-
niinod too liy tliat of the main spines, so
that it will be, respectively, dorsally up-
wards and ventral -laterally downwards.)
On the right lateral spine, the direc-
^. ,,, „„ ,„ . „ , tioii is almost corresponding, that is with
Fig. IV. The Plagiacantha tvpo; ^ •"
transverse section of the basal One branch outwards (away from the cen-
•spines. tral 1-od, cfr. fig. IV), while the verticil
of the left lateral spine is turned so as
to take the position as denoted on tig. 1\'. 'I'he edges liave also
tlie same position, where they occur, as well as the secondary
spines.
In this Avay, tlie plasmatic body will be more perfectly jiro-
tected, than would be the case if all three verticils were in the
i-egular positions.
A development in two directions now takes place. I'here
appears a oth, important, spine, the ventral sagittal one (in my
A-
1,.
X
pre^^ous paper, .Ioegensex L. 91, designated as ,.der secundilre
Mittelstachel"), and the primary connecting arches appear.
The ventral sagittal spine extends from the common starting
point for the two lateral spines (the ventral end of the central rod)
and is also basal (directed downwards and for'i\-ards). On those
skeletons which are less richly developed, it is easy to i-ecognize
it as a less strongly developed spine of later origin.
The primary arches are developed between those primary
branches of the basal spines which are nearest each other, and
are, therefore, three in
number: (1) The left la-
teral arch. l!i tig. V, bet-
ween the left branch of
the dorsal spine. (1| and
the inner branch, Ijj, of the
left lateral main spine;
(2) the ventral arch. 1^^.
between 1^
branch, 1^.] >
lateral main
(3) the right,
B„ between
branch,
h'd.
and the left
of the
right
spine
and
lateral
arch,
the
lorsal
of the
right
ioht branch of the dorsal one. d„
- de-
being
lateral main spine and the
Thus, the ventral arch and the left, lateral arch run together
to a point on b-, and consequently have a corner in common which
is suspended under the left, lateral main spine.
If one no\\- supposes the formation of a more complete net-
work through tlie addition of secondary meshes and spines, in
basal direction, on the sides of the pyramids, one has, in all
important respects, Plectamntha oUaslvs.
On the other hand there is — as above mentioned
velopment in another direction, the ventral sagittal spine, V
formed.
iV simple form
which belongs here
is Cuvqijjluraufhn
cladophora. In its
most simple state
(young forms?) it
consists of the 5 s])i-
nes D, L,. L]_ A
and V (cfr. lig. VI
and lig. Vll). The
most fully developed
individuals seem be-
.sides to have Iwd
secondary latfi'al
spines, directed la-
teral-dorsally and
basally, 1,, and 1], ex-
tending fniiii the
ba.se of the apical
spine. (These spines,
1, are perhaps only
ProtistplaDktoii.
1 bi-aiiclios of tlu'
(luito eonTs|H»ii(l ti
rhuloiihoni).
(hirsa
Ihcii-
CIV.
full her
iiKk-i
(//(//
Fig. VII. The Cam]
.strongly bent towards ea
opines unite at tlio [loint.-
Ill ('iiiiijii/hifKiitliii. the
primaiv verticil of braiidics
is wanliiii;. lii.stoad of this,
.seeoiulary branches (spines)
are (leveloped on the 3 cdfres
of the main sj)incs. It seems,
therefore, most natural to
derive Campylavaiiiha from
the common yi'onnd form, as
a parallel form to Phijjia-
(■(iiitliii. It is, however, also
possible that the verticil of
branches is transformed into
the scattered, strong spines
on the edges, as this primary
verticil appears to occur on
the apical spine (?).
The two basal sagittal
spines. 1) and V, are in Cam-
I (itlicr. Let us suppose that
and we siiould have a sagit-
2)!/lac(iiitliii
these two
tal ring.
It would be interesting if the ling forms (Steplwidea Hck.) as
a whole could be derived in a similar way; but I am as yet un-
able to judge if this be so, as my personal acquaintance with these
forms is too deficient. In the material under examination, only
one of these forms occurred, Dictyocircus chtthrafus, and even that
was very sparsely represented. It seems, however, to me that this
form most naturally may be derived in the manner mentioned. Such
a derivation seems to be natural for the division Semantida Hck.
I think, however, that the whole division Stephoidea Hck. requires
a thorough revision.
By help of the secondary lateral spines 1, (cfr. fii;-. VT and
fig. VII) it seems that Dictyocircus dathratus may be quite natur-
ally derived from Campylucantha cladophom. (Cfr. further under
Dictyocircus). In this way too the long, protruding free spine, the
apical one A. which is not seen in IIakckkl's rin;:- forms, is ex-
plained.
We also lind a clear and easy transition from Dictyocircus to
Ceratospyris hypertiorea, additional meshes appearing on both sides
•of the ring. The transition here is so evident that — as mentioned
under Ceratospyris — there may be some reason to suppose that
Dictyocircus is but a young form of Ceratospyris.
That the network in Dictyocircus develops into the two lateral
■domes of Ccratosiiyris, seems ([uite natural. Several of the most
important meshes are directed oblicjuely outwards from the ring
(cf. under Dictyocircus). The additional growth therefore at first
causes the network to be widened laterally. Later, byspines will
be formed on the sides, and these will converge towards the open
central space, for the direction of the byspines is generally such
as to cover uni)rotected places. Thus the netwoik of the sides
converges and the shell is finally closed.
My opinion, therefore, is that the ring in Dictyocircus is basal,
not apical, as in similar foi'uis accordin:: to Haeckel's interpre-
tation.
In the second scries, there is after Plictacantha the develop-
ment lit a ventral .sagittal spine. 1 think I have seen a form which
would beloiiL.'- Iierc, very similar to I'lcclunnitha oikishos. but having
a ventral sagittal spine; but, as the study of the stuctiire of these
forms has taken a great deal of time, [ have been obliged, for the
present, to give up the thoutriit of attaining definite clearness with
respect to the limits for the dilVerent sjæcies. it would al.so have
proved impossible to di.stingiiisli with certainty between young ftmiis
of ditlerent .species and genera, unless the most important structural
conditions had first been settled.
Krom the /'Icrtucantlui type, there is a further development
to J'hormacanllui liystri.r. a venti-al, sagittal spine a.s well a.s .several
ai'ches being (leveloped. These arches arc apical, extending from
the apical spine to the three ba.sal ones or to the primary basal
arches. I have not found time to study the course of these apical
arches more closely; but there regularly appears to be one from
the dorsal branch of the apical .spine (d,| lig. V) to the dorsal
branch of the dorsal main spine, one from the right branch of the
apical sjiine to the right lateral arch, l^^ as well as one from the
left l)i;nicli u\' the apical .spine (here the apical spine has the
piimary verticil of branches) to the left latei-al arch, ]{|.
Besides these, there are al.so secondary apical arches outside
the primary ones, distally, or between them.
It is interesting to note that Phormuranthit hystrix shows the
same course for the primary branches and the primary arches as
Flectacantha oikishos. Only in the case of Flwnmumitha. the for-
mation of arches has reached a further stage and the tips of the
branches have mostly disappeared (the branches have become parts
of the arches). Similarly, the outer branches of the primary ver-
ticil of the lateral main .spines are retrograded and on well devel-
oped individuals transformed into short spines. The ventral, sagittal
spine is bent more downwards than the lateral ones, these being
dii-ected more forwards and the apical one more backwards. Thus
is formed an interesting type, which in one respect exhibits a re-
markable likeness to the Cludosccnium type, while it is, on the
other hand, difficult to separate with certainty fiom H.\eckkl's
group Movocyrfida.
The spine which H.\eckel, in Cladoscenium and the whole
group Monocyrtidu, calls the apical spine (apical horn) is the same
which I have called the dorsal, basal spine, I). Closer considera-
tion will prove that this opinion is Justified (cfr. under Phonn-
acanthu, Cladoscoiium. Peridium and LithomeUssa). Similarly to
the foregoing ought, therefore, Cladoscenium and Mmiocyrtida, as
well as the other Cyrtoidcu. to be placed in the contrary position
with the .,ce2)halis" (Hck.) downwards, and not a-s IIaeckei, has
done, with the rephalis upwards and the ..thorax" and the ..alidomcn"
downwards. One would get the same relationship between the
groups if one retained Haeckel's method of placing them for
Cyrtoidcu, but turned the preceding ones over .so that the three
spines (Haeckel's .,basal tripodium") turned upwards, and one
— according to the above designation the apical one — downwaids.
In this way, the network in Plerturunthu and Phormncuutlui slmulil
be considered as apical, not biisal.
If, however, one goes in the natnial order from the simi)le
forms, without a network or with a very incomplete one. to such
ones as the Cyrtoidcu, it seems most natural to consider the three
spines — as above — to be basal, not apical.
On the whole, perhaps this is the right place to say a few
words about the natural position of balance in the water.
12 6
E. Jørge
Haeckel considers those forms which have a marked principal
axis to be „monostatic", supposes that they swim in one definite
position of balance. As the skeletons of Nassellaria with their
substantial spines and net walls must be considered decidedly
heavier than water, their plasmatic parts are most probably lighter,
in order that the form may be able to float in smooth water, when
no selfmotion is supposed.
It is another matter, whether it follows from this that tliese
forms are monostatic, as Haeckel supposes. It seems, however,
natural to conclude that the plasmatic parts support the skeleton
and not the reverse, so that it would appear most likely that the
central capsule is situated under, not over „the tripodium" (in those
forms which have an imperfect skeleton).
If, however, the centre of gravity of the plasmatic parts is
under „the tripod", it is not impossible that the centre of gravity
of the tripodium, by which, naturally, the basal position is deter-
mined, may coincide with that of the plasmatic parts, and thus
the balance in the water be indifferent.
One would think that such a position of balance would provide
important advantages and would safeguard against a separation of
the central capsule from the plasmatic parts of the skeleton.
There are, moreover, several details concerning the different Nasael-
hirin skeletons which seem to suggest that the centre of gravity
of the skeleton is very near that of the plasmatic parts. Thus the
substantial „tophorn" (Hck.) which is found in numerous forms of
Cjjrtoidea may be mentioned as an instance of this. It is especi-
ally this solid tophorn which makes it appear not improbable that
the centre of gravity of the skeleton, if it does not coincide with
that of the plasmatic parts, even might well be nearer the cephalis,
so that the form when thoroughly balanced ^\■o\M swim witli the
cejihulis and the tophorn downwards.
In this connection, it is an interesting fact that the central
capsule in several Cyrtoidea — e. g. Clathrocijdas, Corocalyptra,
Dicfi/ophlinits (cfr. Haeckel, L. 86, pi. 60, 61) is lobed, and has
a small part in the cephalis, while four long, widened bags extend
thi'ough a large part of the thorax. If these bags are lighter than
water, their natural position in the heavier skeleton will be up-
wards (although the species, of course, would also swim steadily
with the cephalis upwards, if only the centre of gravity of the
skeleton lies under that of the plasmatic parts).
Here I will not omit to add that this peculiar condition of
tile central capsule in Gyrtoidea suggests an original placement in
till' cephalis, while later on it has got its greatest volume in the
thniiix. Tills again points decidedly to the probability that those
forms wliicli have an imperfect skeleton are to be considered as
Munocyrtida with an imperfectly developed cephalis (and no thorax).
The apical arches and their secondary arches in Phormacantha
form a continuation of the net work up over the sides of the
a I ileal spine A, thus causing an enclosed dorsal spine, i. e. a ,,col>i-
iiirlla" (HcK.), as in Euscenium Hck. and Cladosceniuni Hck. The
(vlionella is as yet only partially embodied in the skeleton. At
tlie same time a further development of the opposite part takes
place, a rather complete wall being formed outside the ventral arch,
below the ventral sagittal spine, if this is considered as directed
downwards. Probably this is to prevent that the centre of gra\ity
of the skeleton shall be moved to one side.
The genus Cladoscenium, as it is represented by C', trirolpium,
with an almost central columella and even development of the
skeleton all around it, may quite plainly be derived from an
figure) and finally .3 arches bet- t
ween the nearest branches of
1,
k.L\Å
Fig. vin.
obli(
interesting, simple form, Protosceninm, which can again be traced
back to the Plagiacantha type. We may imagine the original type
with the four main spines developed evenly, and having the
primary verticil of branches on each of them placed in regular order.
(Cfr. fig. VIII). If one now imagines 4 basal arches formed between
the nearest branches of the dor-
sal spine, D, on the one side,
and each of the lateral spines,
L, on the other (cfr. the lines
.... on the figure), 2 similar ./ ^^ / ^.
arches between the nearest / Å n \.
branches of the apical spine. / / \ ■
A, on the one side, and the / ...--■■.•' ■■■••■•... \
dorsal spine on the other (cfr.
the lines — — — - on the
■ ^'^ L
_ .jj. . _-.e Protosren'ui,m-{\\w.
the apical spine and the lateral oblique apical view
ones, (cfr. the lines — — —
on the figure) one has the Protoscenium type. Here there is an
almost central columella, which naturally presents itself as an „ apical
spine" in contradistinction to the other three, which are all about
equally developed and want the outer branch in the primary verticil,
while in the columella all three branches are well developed.
The columella, however, also here corresponds to the dorsal
spine in the foregoing species. This will also be seen if we regard
the natural position of the central capsule, between D, L and Li
From Protoscenium simplex to Cladoscenium tricolpium, we
have again a very plain transition. The branches of the primary
spines lose their tips and become parts of the arches (as in Phorm-
acantha). The three branches from the spine D are the verticil
on the apical spine (after Haeckel). A ventral sagittal spine is
also developed, and in this way, perhaps, a counterbalance is formed
to the net work at the spine A.
From the Plectacantha type a series of forms may again be
traced. The net work closes at the base (cfr. corresponding process
in Ceratospyris) and we have the genus Peridium, which always
seems too to have the ventral, sagittal spine whicli often is, how-
ever, but weakly developed. One can here, partly because of the
meshes round the dorsal spine, more especially because of the
characteristic peculiarity in the position of the ventral and left
lateral arch, (suspended from a common, basal, primary branch
from the left lateral spine, cfr. Pkctacanthai be convinced tliat
Haeckel's ,,apical spine" corresponds to tlie Imsal dorsal spine, D,
in the genera with imperfect skeleton. ( )ir' linds also in Peridium
several of the characteristic peculiarities of Plertacantha oikiskos,
e. g. the larger, secondary meshes with their conspicuous byspines.
If the connection with Plectacantha oikiskos may be taken as
certain — there is, perhaps, an intermediate form, the one already
mentioned which resembles Plectacantha oikiskos, but has a ventral
sagittal spine — the connection between Peridium and Cyrtoidea
is at any rate quite as certain. Here, however, as mentioned above,
the ,,cephalis'' corresponds to the basal network of the simpler
forms. One can plainly see in young Cyrtoidea, where it is prin-
cipally the cephalis, which is fully formed, how the thorax is devel-
oped betAveen the outward pointing- liysjiiucs on the ininiaiy and
secondary arches of the cephalis.
j In Lithomelissa setosu, whicii can quite naturally be derived
1 from Peridium, the spine A luns inside the thorax, wliich it then
Protiiitplanktoii.
pitM'ces ill a direction obliquely ilownwanls. In this way it un-
doubtedly takes an iuipoitant part in the foiniation of the thonix.
partly with brandies, partly witli arches to the other primary spines.
The spine I) runs nearly in the cephalis wall, oblitjuely upwards,
as an apical horn - .,topliorn" (IIok.) — which is but little con-
spicuous, while the spines l^^. iinil l.| pierce tlie tlmnt.r in, or a
little below, tlie ..neck". Tlie ventral sa-iltai spine protrudes
obliiiuely from the region of the neck as a lower ..frontal horn"
(HcK., in contradistinction to the „apical spine" as a ..hitrher
occipital horn").
The peculiar swellings seen in tlie reL;ion of the neck in
Lithomdifsa getosa and similar forms, will tind a natural explaiiatiuu
throutrh the above mentioned process of formation of the thorax,
and this also gives an explanation of the indistinct outer boundary
between the ct'iihulis and the thorax. The i)roper liouiidary is to
be found near the primary arches, where it is dclined liy internal
lists („cortinar septum" as IIck. mentions in some species). These
are not in the same plane, just as in Phrtacaiitha and Perklium.
As the secondary spines on the left and right lateral arch through
additional secondary arches now form the adjoining part of the
thorax, two crimpings on the sides about the spine D will be
caused at the boundary between the cephalis and thorax.
In Cyrtoidea there is also developed an inner spine, which
extends from the central rod through the thorax. It appears to
be very variously developed, and is sometimes branched. It always
seems to extend from the ventral end of the central rod, at the
-same point which is also the starting point for the primary, lateral
spines and the A'entral sagittal one, and it extends in a direction
contrary to the cephalis. Its object seems to be to protect the
large opening, which is the weak point, or perhaps it is to act as
a support for the lobes of the central capsule. As a rudimentary
spine, it can be traced right back to Phorjiiacantha.
The more richly developed the Cijrtoidea forms become, the
more it seems that the original spines and arches are retrograded.
The four primary spines, as well as the ventral, sagittal spine can,
however, be clearly recognized in every instance, as far as my
experience goes. In the genera Helotholus, Androcyclas and Clathro-
cijclas, perhaps also Sticlwcori/s, 3 of these spines, A, Lj. and Li,
are found as simple, protruding spikes. In the genus Androcyclas
the spine D forms the large, substantial „to])horn" (llcic). Sim-
ilarly in Clathrocyclas. where the other ..tophorn" is formed by the
protruding ventral sagittal spine.
The consecutive links of the many linked Cyrtoidea are formed
out from the cephalis as may easily be proved in young individuals.
Such forms as Lithomelissa will, therefore, when young resemble 1
Peridium, Clathrocycla." and Androcyclas and be similar to Dicyrtida
(instead of Tricyrtidn) etc.
The genus Amphimelissa (Botryopylc si'tosa ('i..) seems to
have a structure which is considerably ditferent to that of Litho- 1
melissa, with a fuller development of the primary skeleton parts
of the cephalis. If I have understood it rightly, it would seem |
that its thorax is formed from the cephalis by secondary spines on
the secondary arches, that is with the starting point higher up on
the cephalis, while the thorax of Lithomelissa and similar genera
are chiefly formed from the i)rimary arches and their byspines. The i
result is therefore, that Amphimelissa has a broader cephalis, which [
is more enclo.sed, or even entirely so, and which does not distinctly
appear to be separated from the thorax. (Cfr. further under Am- |
2)hivtelissaJ.
The genealoLncal tree for the forms which
will, after the foregoing, be as follows:
Sliclwcorys
ccur in my mateiial
Dictyoceras
Amphimelissa
\
Dirtyophvnins
Androcyclas
Helotholus
Litho
Pteroscenua
Cladosceni/
Phormacantha
Ceraiospyris
\
Peridium Dicti/ocircus
/ /
Plcctucantka /
Camp])lacantha
iToundform with 4 primary spines
In the following paires. I have for practical reasons preferred
to retain (at any rate preliminarily) Haeckels method of placing
the Cyrtoidea, where therefore the ..apical spine" is the spine D,
and the „dorsaI one" the spine A, while further the right and
left lateral spines change places. Where, however, letters are
used, I have applied them as above.
W"\{\\ regard to the distribution of the species of Xasstlhiri<(
which 1 liave observed, I will add a few remarks, and these will
also, as a whole, be applicable to the above mentioned species of
the division Spumellaria.
It is difficult, from the material treated, to come to any re-
liable conclusion as to whence the various species really come, and
this indeed is the case with most of the plankton species which
occur in my material. \\'c know very little indeed about the di-
stribution of these radiotaria. for the majority of the species found
are cither quite new or had only previously been known from the
west coast of Norway. But, fortunately, Cleve has also observed
some of the species in question (especially from the sea near Spitz-
bergen), so that the distribution of just these species can be rather
more completely stated. It has also been of great service to me
that Dr. ILjout and Dr. Ghax have kindly favoured me with a number
of plankton samples for examination which were taken on S/S Mi-
chael Sars' expedition in the Norwegian Ocean. I have, however,
not yet been able to find time to work through the whole of this
material, which, having been collected from settled places in the
most inq)ortant currents, will supi)Iy valuable information with i
128
E. Jorgensen.
speet to tlie dependeuce of the radiolaria ou temperature and sali-
nity. Unfortunately, there are no samples from deeper water.
It may, nevertheless, be concluded with certainty that all the
species here mentioned of the divisions SpumeMaria and NasseUaria
are oceanic species. There may, however, be diiferences of opinion
as to whether they are northern or southern forms. Cleve states
(L. 40) that some species which belong here (from the Northern
Atlantic) must be considered to be derived from the Northern Pacific
by way of the Northern Arctic basin. He comes to this conclusion
partly because several of these species have been found in the
northern part of the Pacific, and partly because they do not occur
in samples taken farther south than 40 " n. lat.
Gran (L. 7(). p. 149 — 154) considers these species to be of
southern origin.
As far as I can gather, Clbve's statements are generally based
upon examinations only of surface samples. My impression is that
the majority of these radiolcma come from the northern part of
the Atlantic, where they appear to occur in the mixed Atlantic
waters. In the deeper waters of the Norwegian Ocean, thei-e are,
perhaps large numbers of these northern species. In a deep
water sample from the sea between the Faeroe and vShetland Isles,
which was taken by Mr. Clark and kindly placed at my dispo-
sition for examination, I found a comparatively large number of
those species which occur on the coasts of Norway, and some of
these species were numerous.
It appears to be certain that ocean water of between 34 and
35 "/oo salinity contains many species of these radiolwia. Perhaps
here too they oceui' for the most part in the deeper layers.
On the other hand, there appears also to be species (of those
mentioned in this paper belonging to Spiimclhiria and XasseUaria)
which belong to the salter, warmer waters of the Atlantic, but
their number is comparatively small.
Key to the genera of NasseUaria. i)
Shells with plainly latticed cephalis and thorax, or
more joints.
More than 3 joints; rather narrow sliell
with no Ol' inconspicuous spines
3 joints (cephalis, thorax and abdomen).
I'horax with 3 long protruding
spines, each with a bi'oad base;
no broad tophorn
Thoi-ax with 3 to 4 slender
and short spines which may easily
be overlooked.
2 diverging, 3-e(lge(l
tophorns; broad thorax:
short, expanded, l)iini-
shaped abdomen
1 conspicuous, 3-edged
tophorn ; thorax narroAver.
not brim-shaped
2 joints (only cephalis and thoi'ax).
Cephalis rudinuMitary; largo
thorax LUhurach
Stichocoru^-
Dictyocerm.
Chdhroriicliis.
A)>>lrori/rlfi
(Inly to
le (let(;rminati
Thorax little developed with
narrow spines which form <i or
more „basal feet" Aennfhocorys.
Thorax with piercing, 3-edgcd
spines or with 3 regular liasal
feet Didyojiliimus.
Thorax with piercing, slender
spines without conspicuous edges.
Thorax broad and low,
campanulate ; cephalis \\ith
numerous spines Helotholus.
Thorax narrow and high.
Cephalis very
broad, not plainly
constricted from
the thorax Amplihnellssa.
Cephalis nar-
rower than the
thorax, easy to
distinguish Lithomelissa.
Only cephalis, plainly latticed.
Cephalis with a sagittal I'ing (bilocular) Cerafospyris.
No sagittal ring.
5 long, 3-edged spines, one of
them forming a nearly central
columella with an inner verticil of
3 branches and protruding above
as a tophorn Cladoscenhmi.
The same, but the columella
wanting the inner verticil of bran-
ches Euscoiium.
No broad, 3-edged spines.
No columella Fcridiiini.
(Incompletely latticed
shell with indistinct, margi-
nal columella Phormncanflia).
More or less incomplete skeletons, not plainly latticed.
A strong sagittal ring with spines and
some few meshes Dictyoc'urus.
No sagittal ring.
The ventral sagittal s]iine is
present.
Rather well doveloped
network (at last with
numerous slender ai-i'lios
and spines at the outside) Phormacantha.
No network, only strong,
bent spines with nnmei--
ous scattered branches . . Campyhicdiitlm.
(5 strong, sti'aight. 3-
edged spines Ensceniuni).
The ventral sagittal spine is
wanting.
A very incomplete ce-
phalis with very I'ew.
large meshes and nrai-ly
central columella Protuncenium.
No columelhi.
Protistplanktou.
129
Only two pent-
ai;oiis witli a side
in common and
tlic opposite cor-
ners connected
throutrli a poly-
i!onal beam; long-
spines in tlie
cornel's
Jlore or less
developed net-
work, formint;- a
conical cephalis,
open below ....
Only the 4 main
spines with a ver-
ticil of 3 branches
ou each of them;
no or but few^
connecting- ai'ches
developed
Gunospha-ra.
Pledacantha.
Plagiacantha.
VII C. 1. Plectoidea HcK. (Plagonitla and Plectanida).
Plagiaeantlia arachnoides Clap.
Jørgensen L. 91, p. 72.
In a previous paper (Joegensen 1. c), 1 liave in detail de-
scribed the structure of this species and shown that, from this
structure, it would have to be classed as belonging to Haeckel's
genus Plafjiocarpa or — the form which is furnished with connecting
beams — to Perijjlecta Hck. At the same time too is mentioned that
this structure — as it is explained in the foregoing pages here —
is the ground type for a large series of forms.
It is likely that still other species are included in the above
name. Haeckel's Plectophora aradmoides can, however, not be
distinguished from Plagiacimtha arachnoides.
In the present material, this species was found only rarely
and in small numbers, generally in deep water samples, up to 50
ni., only exceptionally near the surface. Almost entirely absent
during the diatom inflow.
Distribution: According to Cleve (L. 40, p. 180) a northern
form, belonging to Tricho- and Chætoplankton. Frequent on the
west coast of Norway, seems also there to be absent during the
diatom inflow. In August 1903, numerous between the Faeroe
and iShetland Isles and in the sea north of them, near the surface
(L. 18, 1903—1904, nr. 1).
The species would thus seem to belong to the noi'thern part
of the Atlantic, and especially to be abundant in the North Sea
and north of Great Britain during the summer months.
Canipjlafantiia n. ^^in.
Has tile four pi'imary spines, D, L^., I^i and A, as well as
the ventral, sagittal one, V. Tlie dorsal, sagittal one, D, is bent
strongly downwards. The lateral, basal spines, L and L[, are
also bent downwards, beini;' as usual directed half forwards and
half sideways (so as to be ventral lateral). The ventral, sagittal
spine is rather thin, almost straight, bent strongly downwards and
converges distinctly towards the dorsal, basal spine, 1).
The principal ditt'ercnce between this and the previous genu.s
lies in the ventral, sagittal spine.
The primary verticil of branches (cfr. the introductory remarks
under Xassclhtria) appears only on the apical spine, which is with-
out any other branches.
C. cladophora .hmc. n. sp.
(PI. XII, tij,^ 47).
The sagittal, basal spine is best developed, very strong-, long,
strongly bent, gradually narrowing ort" into a long fine point, like
all the stronger main spines and branches three-edged. One edge
is dorsal, the others lateral. On these three edges, there are strong,
expanded, narrow pointed branches, several in a row along the same
edge, rather scattered and not clearly forming verticils when com-
pared to the branches on the other edges. The branches become
shorter towards the end of the main spines. The larger branches
are in their turn furnished with similar squarrose branches.
The basal, lateral spines are also strongly developed, although
not quite so much so as the sagittal, dorsal one, in other respects
corresponding precisely in form and arrangement of branches.
The apical spine is much less developed, having only a verti-
cil of three branches on the corresponding place to the verticil of
Plagiacantha, outside this being thin and unbi-anched.
The ventral, sagittal spine is thin and unbi-anched, almost
straight, pointing obliquely dowmvards between the latcial spines
and being somewhat shortei- than these.
In addition, in well developed foi-ms, there appears to be two
strong, lateral arched branches extending from the basal, dorsal
spine at the base of the apical spine. These arched branches form
a pair of secondary, lateral spines, Ij. and Ij, in form and arrange-
ment of branches corresponding to the primary, lateral spines, only
less developed. In those individuals where a smaller numbers of
secondary spines were developed, they -wei-e not visible. But it
must be remarked that the species is very brittle, so that the
branches are easily broken ott'.
This species is especially interesting, as it seems to show the
evolution of the ring species. Cfr. above and under the follo\\-ing
species.
Rare, always in small numbers, only in deep water samples.
Seems to be boreal oceanic.
Disfriljiition: Otherwise only observed on the west coast of
Norway: Tiie Oster Fiord, very scarsc. in deep watei-.
\ II C. 2. Ntephoidea lie k. (Ntcplianida and
Seiiiantida).
Diotyocircns n. !,^en.
(Cfr. pi. XIII, f. 48).
A strong, sagittal ring, one side, the doi'sal, being less bent
than the other, the ventral. (This peculiarity of the ring species
is also mentioned by Haeckel). This ring is in the following de-
scription supposed to be placed downwards, not upwards as by
Hakckel.
E. Jørgensen.
Ring- and
view (f
Dkfi/ocircns :
leshes f, apiea
leniatically).
On the dorsal side of the ring-, there is a long spine, pointing
obliquely backwards and upwards, the apical spine. A, in the plane
of the ring-. On both sides of this apical spine, there are two
lai-ge, pentagonal meshes, diverging at right angle on each side,
both in the same plane perpendicular to the plane of the ring.
These are the right and left transverse meshes, a^, and aj. These
meshes are again both in a dorsal and ventral direction joined to
two similar pairs of meshes, the dorsal lateral meshes, f and fj,
situated in a dorsal direction from the transverse meshes, and the
ventral, lateral meshes, bj. and bj. These lateral meshes point ob-
li(iuely outwards from the plane of the ring. They are thus not
in paii'S in tiie same plane, but the plane of the right one forms
an angle with that of the left one, both being turned from a po-
sition perpendicular to the plane of the I'ing in a direction away
from the centre (tig. IX).
In a ventral direction from the pair of
meshes b, ."3 — 4 more or less complete pairs
of meshes follow, c to e: in a dorsal direc-
tion, however, there ai-e only three protruding
spines, g, the middle one being in the plane
of the ring, the other two pointing obliquely
outwards and downwards. Himilar protruding
spines are found at several points (cfr. the
description of the species).
Although I am but imperfectly acquainted
rtith this form, havhig only seen a couple of
individuals, I have endeavoured to trace its
structure as complety as possible, as it is a very
interesting form, which seems to be well suited to throw light upon
the connection between the ring forms of Nassellaria and the group
F/crtoidcu HcK. on the one hand and the group Zygospyrida Hck.
on the other.
The connection with the latter seems to me to be quite evident,
leaving scarcely no doubt that such forms as Ceratospyris are
evolved from a ring like Dictyocircvs with a further development
of meshes on both sides outside those described, until there is on
either side formed a closed network. The conspicuous narrowing in
Ccrdtospyrts at the sagittal ring corresponds very beautifully to the
right and left meshes which extend forwards from the ring, e. g.
in the pair of meshes b and f.
The connection with the group Flectoidea is less clear. On
this point, however, the genus Campylacantha seems to furnish
valuable information. As above mentioned, I consider the sagittal
ring to be formed by the connection of the dorsal and ventral sagittal
spines (or of meeting branches). Further, I consider the branches
lij,, li| between the meshes a and b to correspond to the ventral,
lateral spines in Campylacantha, and the branches i , ij between
the meshes a and f to correspond to the dorsal, lateral ones. In
this way too, the large transverse meshes a, diverging at right
angles, situated between the dorsal and ventral lateial spines in
Campjylacantha, are explained, as well as the centrifugally directed
pair of meshes b and f, formed by the partly forward pointing
ventral, lateral spines, and the partly backward pointing dorsal,
lateral ones.
/). clathratus Jiirg. n. sii.
(I'l. XIII, fig. 48).
To the description above, I will add the following, which
applies to the individual illustrated:
After the pair of meshes a and b, there follows in the same
direction (ventrally) two strong, but smaller meshes, c, one on each
side. In the corner between bi and Cj there is a secondary, smaller
mesh. After Ci there follows yet another mesh, d|, while the cor-
responding one on the right side is wanting, but there is a trace
of it in the shape of a protruding spine. (This mesh is probably
developed in elder individuals). Then comes a pah- of strong,
obliquely diverging spines, k, and then two similar ones, g, with
an intermediate one in the plane of the ring, which spine might be
considered to be the protruding point of the primary dorsal (basal,
sagittal) spine. Following this bundle of three spines there are.
in the same direction, the two large meshes f, which again stretch
up to the pair of meshes a.
On the strongei' branches, there are several protruding spines,
which generally point obliquely outwards from the plane of the
sagittal ring, in a direction away fi'om the centre. Besides these,
there are three spines protruding in the plane of the ring, the
apical spine, the protruding, dorsal, basal, sagittal one at g, and
the protruding, ventral, sagittal one between the meshes b and c
(broken off on the specimen illustrated).
In addition to these, we have some secondai'y spines, as for
instance the conspicuous twins on the outer side of a|. The two
meshes b^. and bj are connected by an arched (ventral) beam which
is bent outwards, and carries in the middle a I'ather strong, se-
condary spine pointing outwards.
The sagittal ring and all the stronger bi'anches and spines ai-e
three edged.
The diameter of the ring is about 50 |j..
The individual described was probably not fully developed.
Judging fi'om the many surprises which have met me with regard
to imperfectly developed radiolaria, I cannot but remark that it
is perhaps not altogether impossible that the Dktyocircus clathratus,
here described, is a young form of Ceratospyris or a similar spe-
cies of the group Zygospyrida.
This species does not answer well to Haeckel's system, so 1
have been obliged to classify it as a separate genus. It would have
had to be classed as belonging to the group Semantida Hck. in
which there are species which in structure in important respects
undoubtedly agree very well with the species here described. It
especially answers well to the genera Semantid'nim Hck. and
Semantiscm Hck., both of these having the three large pairs of
meshes corresponding to a, b and f. These genera have, however,
not the long apical spine.
Very rare and only singly: Henningsvær, '-'"/s 1899, 0 —
28(1 m.
VII C. li. Zyje^ospyrida Hck.
C«'rato><|>} riN Hik.
1 do not consider this genus to be well characterized by H.veckel;
but it is, at any rate, easily I'ccognized.
In the material examined, I have only found one species be-
longing to it.
C. hyperborea Jorg. n. sp.
(PI. xm, fig. 49).
I have only seen very few individuals of this species. Its
structure seems to be of precisely the same type as that of Dictyo-
Protistplanktc
131
riir-iis datliratiis, only tliat, on liotli sidrs of llir sauittal rin^"-,
tlicro is a further dovclopmeiit ol' tlic net wmk. wliicli lias become
two I'oiuplcte domes, one on each side.
Till' primaiy pores (nearest tiie sa::iltal rini;) are polytzonal,
the otliers beinif irregular roundisli and oblons^' and varying consi-
derably in size. The scparatinu' walls arc stionj,'-, with here and
tliere narrow, protruding points which form obli({uely diverging
narrow spines. There is also a rather plentiful number of similar
byspines.
All the spines arc little prominent, to ', i — '/:■ of the diameter
of the sagittab ring.
The species does not appear to be identical to any of Haeckel's.
\'ery rare and only singly: The \'est Fiord 'j 1899, 0—
•200 ni.
DititiihHtion: In the warm, .salt waters of the Atlantic beyond
.Sondmore (S/S Michael Sars, -/■i 1901, between stations 4 and 5,
in the surface; cfr. (Jran. L. 70, p. 14D), very sparsely; the
Oster Fiord neai- llergen, at a great depth, here too only singly.
VII C. 4. .llonocyrtida Hck.
The genera Plechuanthd and PhonnacimtJui. as also the genus
Frofoscenium, should properly be referred to the group Plectoidea
Hck. (in account of their more or less incomplete skeletons), but
is placed here in order not to break their natural connection with
the following genera.
Plertaraiitlia u. geu.
(PI. XIII, f. .50— .58).
Has the foui- primary spines, the sagittal, dorsal, basal one, D,
the two ventral, lateral, basal ones L and Lj, as well as the sa-
gittal, apical one A. Besides there are, between these, three pri-
mary arches developed, one ventral, B^,, between the ventral, la-
teral spines, and two lateral V,^. and Bj, between the dorsal, basal
spine and the right and left lateral one. In this way, 3 large,
pentagonal meshes are formed, the piimary ventral mesh, the pri-
mary right lateral and the primary left lateral meshes.
Ås mentioned above in the general remarks on the N'asselluria
group, the ventral mesh and the left, lateral one have as a side
in common a short branch which descends from the under side of
the left, lateral spine, while, on the other side, the right, lateral
mesh and the ventral mesh reach immediately up to the right, la-
teral spine.
There is no ventral, sagittal spine extending from the common
.starting point for the two ventral, lateral main spines.
In addition to these primary spines and arches, secondary ones
are also more or less developed, and form a comparatively rich
network, which is, however, open, or very imperfectly closed
beneath.
P. oikiskos JiJRO. 11. nomen.
(Pl. Xra, figs. 50—57).
Periplecta intricata (Cl.) JoRfr. L. 91, p. 73.
Peridium (?) intricatum Cl. L. 30, pi. 2, f. 8 a, b?
Pcridium (?) la.rnyn Cl. 1. c. pi. 2, f. 9 a, b?
The primary verticil of branches of tiic apical spine has (ge-
nerally?) only two branches, pointing upwards and outwards in the
angle between the dorsal, basal spine and the lateral ones. These
two branches together with the protruding middle stem form three
undivided spikes, about e((ual in length.
The left, latei'al spine, L[, has the primai-y verticil complete.
Of these three branches, however, the inside one (l.j in fig. \ , p.
124) is — as previously mentioned — transformed into a shoit,
strong arch, pointing downwards, at the end of which the left,
lateral arch and the primary, ventral one meet. The two other
branches form with the protruding middle stem, three, diverging-,
long, single spikes, pointing obliquely outwards and to the sides.
By these thi'ee long, protruding spikes, the left, lateral spine may
always be easily recognized.
The right, lateral .spine has only retained one branch of the ver-
ticil in its original form, the other two being branches for the two
corresponding, primary arches, one belonging to the ventral arch,
the other to the right, lateral one. There are consequently here
two long, simple spikes, about e(iual in length, the outer brancli
in the primary verticil and the protruding, middle stem.
The dorsal, basal spine has only one simple branch of the
verticil, pointing outwards and upwards (dj in fig. V, p. 124), the
two others being strong, arched branches, diverging- nearly at right
angle on both sides.
One of these branches forms the right, the other the left la-
teral arch. The middle stem of the basal spine is here branched,
there being one or two similar secondary arches outside the pri-
mary, lateral ones. The dorsal, basal spine, therefore, only shows
one simple, protruding spike, A similar, smaller byspine is gener-
ally to be found farther out.
The dorsal spine is the longest and strongest, the apical one
is shortest and weakest.
Outside the primary meshes, secondary ones are developed
more or less richly, varying considerably in size. These unite to
form a „network" which is generally rather imperfect, but would
seem, on older individuals, to be made more complete by the ad-
dition of connecting beams across the larger, secondary meshes, so
that these meshes finally are smaller in size and more in number.
Generally speaking, the network is conically expanded downwards,
and seems, in the case of older indi^iduals, finally to be imperfectly
closed beneath by the development of a few, fine, long, transverse
beams. In the material examined specimens with such nearly closed
network were always rare.
(Jf the more important byspines and secondary meshes, 1 \\ill
only mention the following which seem always to be present, and
may serve to help in identifying the species. Under the protruding
right lateral spine a large, secondary, pentagonal mesh will be
found. The left, lateral arch has a strong byspine in the middle,
pointing outwards and upwards, and under it, there is a large, se-
condary mesh. On both sides of the dorsal spine, outside the pri-
mary, lateral arches, on the left side will be found two secondary
meshes, and on the right side one; the latter being the largest,
but it is perhaps later on divided into two.
iloreover, on all the stronger arches, there is a more or less
rich development of byspines, pointing outwards and upwards, some-
times twins, directed upwai'ds-outwards and downwards-outwards.
The beams are thin in young individuals, especially at the
13:^
E. Jørgens
outer secondary meshes; they are much stronger on older indivi-
duals.
The length of tiie basal, dorsal spine is + 55 [i..
Cfr. JOEOENSEN 1. C.
I considered this species first to belong to the genus Perq^lecta
HcK.; but as I later on found that what with Haeckel charac-
terises this genus is also characteristic of all closely related ge-
nera, as I am acquainted with them from plankton samples (not
di'awings), I have been obliged to change the name of the genus.
I at first considered this species to be Cleve's PeruJium infri-
€atum, and this may be correct, but it cannot be proved to be so
from Cleve's illustration nor from his description. As it is, more-
over, quite as probable that Cleve's Peridium (?) laxum also belongs
to this species, I consider it best to retain the manuscript name I
originally had given the species before Cleve's work was pubhshed.
Not rare, but always in small number.
Distribution: Not rare on the west coast of Norway, always
scarce. Probably boreal oceanic.
P. trichoides J org. n. sp.
(PI. XIII, f. 58).
Peridiimi (?) huum Cl. L. 30, pi. 2, f. 9 a, b?
I have only an imperfect knowledge of this species, as I
have only seen a few specimens, and at first took these to be-
long to the preceding species.
It has the same primary spines and primary arches ; but there
appears to be the important difference that the ventral, primary
arch and the left, lateral arch both extend to the left, lateral spine,
not to a common basal branch from the latter. On the other hand,
there is a strong, secondary arch between the left, latei'al one and
the nearest side of the primary, ventral one.
In outer appearance, this species is very different from the
foregoing one. Instead of the numerous secondary meshes, long
connecting arches are developed, which form together a longish,
ovate, very imperfect network of long, fine arches. The largest
and strongest of these run between the two lateral arches and form
a vei-y large, ovate mesh, pointing downwards. On its sides, espe-
cially in a ventral direction, similar large meshes are developed,
bounded by fine arch branches, which run from the primary arches
to tlie said large, secondary one, or between secondary arches. On
these; arch branches, very fine spines are scattered, these probably
latei' on being developed into arch branches between the secondary
arches. It is likely that a network wil appear which is imperfectly
closed beneath by basal, secondary arches, on elder individuals.
On the primary, basal spines, short byspines are also found
on the pieces inside the primary arches.
This species is undoubtedly different from the foregoing. It is
not certain whether it should be reckoned as belonging to the
same genus; but it wants, as does the foregoing one, the ventral,
sagittal spine.
Very rare and scarce, though certainly to some extent over-
looked: '7i 1899, 40 miles N. W. of Gaukværo, 0—700 m.
Distribution: .\lso on the west coast of Norway, but only
occasionally and in small numbers.
I'lioi-iiiiicaiitlia a. gen.
Has the same four primary spines and the same three primary
arches as Plectaecmtha. There is, however, also a ventral, sagittal
spine, which is less strongly developed than the others („der se-
candare Mittelstachel", Jorgensen L. 91, p. 77). The netwoi'k,
as in Plectaecmtha, is at a late stage and only imperfectly closed
beneath.
P. bystrix (Jobg.)
(PL XIV, figs. 59—63).
Pmdiiim hystrix Joeg. L. 91. p. 76.
The primary spines and primary arches as in Pkctacantlta
oikislxs. The venti-al arch and the left, lateral one also here run
together to a strong, basal arch bi'anch from the left, lateral main
spine.
Outside the ventral, sagittal spine, there is an extended net-
work of numerous, secondary meshes, which both below and on
the sides are connected by fine transverse beams to a correspond-
ing one on the sides of the dorsal sagittal spine. In this way a
network is formed, wliich is imperfectly closed beneath.
There are numerous byspines. Between these and the lar-
ger beams more or less numerous and mostly thin, arch-shaped,
connecting beams are extended, which are in their turn here and
there connected by similar, arched, fine beams, which at a later
stage of development are provided Avith numerous, fine spines.
These are, possibly, later, at any i-ate to some extent, developed
to similar fine connecting arches, which more or less completely
envelope the network.
The development of the arches is here further advanced than
in Plectacantha oiJdskos. From the three branches of the apical
spine, arch branches extend, the apical arches, one to the dorsal,
basal spine, and two to the primary, latei-al arches. These apical
arches may at the corners, as well towards the apical spine, as
towards the dorsal one and the primary arches, be enveloped by
similar arches.
Cfr. also Joegensen 1. c. p. 77.
At a younger stage, this species strongly resembles Plectacantha
oiMskos. The ventral, sagittal spine, however, makes it easy to
distinguish between them. At an older stage, they are so different
that they can hardly be confounded.
It is likely that there is moi-e than one species which belongs
here.
This form is very interesting, clearly being a connecting one
between the groups Plectoidea and Monoeyrtida. I formerly' con-
sidered it to belong to the genus Peridium, and there is hardly
any great or important difference in the structure of the genera
Peridiam and Phormacantha. It seems, however, most practicable
to separate the imperfectly latticed forms from those which have a
regularly developed lattice work which is closed beneath.
On the other hand, this genus — as more fully explained in
the introductory remarks to Nassellaria — forms clearly a transition
to the genera Euscenium Hck. and Cladoscenimn Hck. When the
apical arches are further developed, an enclosed spine will result,
a „columella".
T'he larger forms have a ,,network'', which is about 70 \>. in
height.
Ivathei' freciuent, though never numerous, in deep water samples.
Distribution : The same as that of Plectacantha oilcishos.
<wOiiosi>li»'ra JuRG. n. gen.
The very peculiar, little species which belongs here, seems to
be constructed in the following way:
Protistplankton.
'I'liorc arc two ratlK-r n'L'ular jiciitaiions. liaviiii^- one side in
(■umiiioii. 'riioir i)laiu'.s funn an aiiLilr of almnt 120". At the four
corners there ;ire long- spines, pointing obliiiueiy outwards in differ-
ent directions. Between tlie fifth corners, one in each pentagon,
opposite to their connnon side, there is a tiirec-jointed connecting
arch, bent outwards from both the pentagons. This arch carries in
tlie two corners wiiicii do not lie in the oi-iginal pentag-ons (but
farti\cst away from tiicni). two long, diverging spines.
G. pritiiordialis JoK(i. a. sp.
(I'l. XIV. Hg-s. (34— (i8).
1 will add a few remarks to the description already given of
the genus. In most positions, this species will have the appear-
ance of a more or less distinct pentagon, with long spines at the
corners, and also a connecting arch with three similar spines.
Looking straigiit towards one of the two pentagons (with a side
in common), the connecting arch with its spines, will look like two
long spines, connected by a short cross beam.
I cannot say where this species really belongs, but judging
from the skeleton and the position of the central capsule, it would
seem to belong to the Katssellaria. I have, however, only once
seen the plasmatic parts. The species does not seem to be so very
rare, but is easily ovei'looked on account of its small size.
Found in i-ather many samples from deep water, always in
small numbei-s.
Distrlhuf'iou : Also on the west coast of Noi'way. Probably
boreal oceanic.
Protosceninni n. gen.
PI. XV, fig-. 69.
With regard to tiiis interesting form, reference should be made
to the introduction to the group Nasucllaria. In the following, it
is placed as Cladoseeiiium and the species belonging to the Cyrtoidea
gioup, with the spine D upwards and the spine A downwards.
The expression, ,.tiie apical spine" therefore here has the same
meaning as with Haeckel, but is the same as the spine D in the
foregoing.
Further, in the following L^. denotes ,,the left'', Lj „the right"
lateral spine, cfr. above.
The usual four, primary spines ai'e present, all about equally
developed, the apical one (D), however, perhaps best. The basal
spines form a very flat pyramid; they are most distinctly directed
downwards at the free ends.
The primary verticil with three brandies on each main spine
is well developed, on each of the three basal ones, however, the
downwards pointing (outwards pointing) bi-anch is wanting, while
the two others everywhere point regularly upwards and outwards.
On the apical spine (D) all three branches are well developed and
lie about parallel to the basal spines. All the main spines have
also a protruding middle stem, which is about equal in length to the
primary branches.
Between sets of two of those primary branches which are
nearest and belonging to different main spines, a strong, connecting
arch is developed near their ends. Of such arches, there are alto-
gether 9, 3 basal and 6 apical ones.
Of the three basal ones, one runs in a ventral direction, be-
tween the ventral branches of the lateral spines, the two others
laterally, between the dorsal branches of the lateral spines and the
corresponding branches of the dorsal spine (A). From the dorsal
branch of the apical spine two apical arches extend to tlie right
and left branch of the dorsal spine, and in the same way, two
apical arches from the apical spine's (D) right lateral branch to the
two branches of the right, lateral spine, and two apical arches
from the left, lateral branch oi the apical spine to the two branches
of the left, lateral spine.
These arches all meet in twos the branches at the same point,
at a short distance from tlicii- end. There may also be found a
weaker, secondary arch branch extending from the same points of
the primary branches, but connecting together in twos the bran-
ches of the same main spine, or connecting these branches with
the protruding middle stem. In this way, a network which is,
on the whole, very open, is formed of very large meshes and thin
beams with 9 short spikes protruding from a regular verticil of
three branches (the G spikes being basal, the 3 apical) and 4
longer simple spikes (3 basal, 1 apical).
This is an interesting species which, as proved in the intro-
ductory remarks, may be considered to be the original type for
the genera Euscmium Hck. aud Clndoscciiiiim Hck., with a nearly
central columella.
P. simplex (Cl.)
(PI. XV, fig. 69).
Plectaiiiuiii simplex Cl. L. 30, pi. 3, fig. 3.
Cfr. the description of the genus and the introductory remarks.
Each of the primary branches of the main spines has, as al-
ready mentioned, near their end, a verticil of 3 branches, of which
the two are the connecting arches mentioned above, the third bemg
a short spine about equal in length to the free end of the branch.
This spine may — as above mentioned — be connected %nth one
of the approximate corresponding ones, or with the protruding part
of the main spine, by exceedingly fine arches.
Here and there on the outer arches fine byspines are found,
which ai-e perhaps partly developed into such hair-like connecting
arches.
The species is no Pledcmium in Haeckels sense. Cleve
draws the apical spine as protruding from the common starting
point of the basal spines, and has, probably for this reason, classed
the species as belonging to Hck.'s genus Plectanium.
I have seen only a few individuals of tliis species ; but I have,
nevertheless, no doubt that its characteristic structure in all important
points is as above described. Older individuals have, perhaps, a
more richly developed network of added, secondary arches.
Rare and only singly: "A 1899, 40 miles N. \\'. of Gauk-
værø, 0—700 m. Is, however, easily overlooked.
Distribution: Only noticed by Cleve from two places: 78"
n., 3" w., deep sea haul; 56° n., 36" w. Pi-obably also boreal
oceanic.
Ensceninm corynepbortmi Joro.
(PI. XV, fig. 70).
JoRG. L. 91, p. 77.
Has the four primary spines, about equally developed, and the
ventral, sagittal one.
The main spines are broad, three-edged, broadest in the outer
half. On each edge there are from 3 to 5, oi' more, strong, slen-
134
Jorge
der pointed branches (spines), more or less distinctly scattered in com-
parison to those on the other edges of the same spine, only rarely
here and there in distinct verticils.
Between the neighbouring branches of the different main spines,
rather long and tine connecting beams extend, these being in their
turn again connected by numerous similar ones. Thus a more or
less perfect net is formed which is best developed between the
apical spine (D) and the ventral, sagittal one. This network forms
a rather imperfect lattice shell with meshes, very uneven in shape
and size, fi'om small, triangular and trapezoidal to very large, po-
lygonal openings. Also the inner branches (spines) on the same
main spine are connected, partly with the main spine itself, partly
■i\'ith each other, also by line connecting beams, parallel to the di-
rection of the main spine (as in the spines of Rhizoplegma hureale).
The meshes of the lattice shell strongly recall those of Cla-
doscenmm tricolpium. Very often (in young individuals) so little
of the network is developed that it would not be justifiable to
consider the species as a Euscenium, if one did not occasionally
tind a well developed latiee shell. Cfr. Joegensen 1. c.
This species is very different from Cladoseenium tricolpium,
and without doubt is more closely allied to those forms which have
an imperfect lattice shell (Plectoidea Hck.). It might be classed
as belonging to the genus Periplecta Hck., if it were not for the
distinct, ventral, sagittal spine. (This spine was previously over-
looked, and for this reason is not mentioned in my earlier description
of the species 1. c. p. 77). I prefer at pi'esent to let it remain
in the genus Eu.icenium, rather than to start a new genus, as the
genus Eiixceiimm Hck. certainly requires revision.
Cladoiiseeninin tricolpium (Hck.) JfiRa.
(PI. XV, figs. 71—73).
Euscenium tricolpium Hck. L. 86, p. 1147, pi. 5:3, f. 12.
Cladoseenium tricolpium, Jokg. L. 91, p. 78.
Here again we have the four primary spines and tlio ventral
sagittal one. The almost central columella corresponds to the
basal, dorsal spine, D, in Plectacantha oiMskos and Phormacantha
lujstrix. On the other hand, the connection with Protoseenium
simplex is evident.
From two, somewhat ui)wards ixtintiug, branches from each of
tlic left and right lateral spine four arches extend upwards and
miite in twos (those from the same main spine) to form a strong
ai)ical arch. These are the corresponding arches in Protoseenium
simplex, where they connect the branches of the lateral spines with
the corresponding two branches of the apical one (D). The tips
of these branches have disappeared in Cladoseenium, and the arches
pass gradually into the branches. The two corresponding ones in
tlie dorsal spine (A) are also found; but one of them is not parti-
cularly conspicuous as there are several similar secondary arches.
The lattice shell (cfr. .Torgensex 1. c. p. 78) is particularly
pci'fect between the apical spine (D) and the ventral, sagittal one.
There are, where the main spines protrude, I'atiier large, tri-
angular meshes formed by connecting beams between the larger
arches of the shell and the spines, two at the dorsal spine (A) and
the left, lateral spine (L,, ). three at tiie apical spine (D). It is
only in older individuals that tlic lonir, line downhanging spines are
formed on the basal arches (i. e. tlic arches between the basal
spines. A, \j and Lj^
There does not seem to be anything of impoi'tance to prevent
us from considering this species to be identical to Euscenium tri-
colpium Hck. It is true that, in Haeckel's illustration, the distinct,
ventral, sagittal spine is not present. There are, however, so many
details in the illustration, which answer remarkably well to this
species that it is highly probable that they are identical. The
reason why Haeckel refers the species to the genus Euscenium,
is that he considers the shell to be closed by the strong apical
ai'ches, (which are conspicuous in certain sightings of the microscope)
while it really extends farther up along the apical spine, to the three
connecting beams above mentioned.
My opinion therefore is still that the species is a Cladoseenium.
Haeckel mentions the completely corresponding upper arches in
Cladoseenium peetinatum Hck. (L. 86, p. 11.50, pi. 98, f. 2), as a
second verticil of branches of the columella.
Frequent, always in small numbers, in deep water, up to
100 m.
Distribution: Not rare on the west coast of Norway, here too
sparse, and only in deep water samples. Was found in surface
samples from the warmer and salter Atlantic waters V2 1901, in
the sea beyond Søndmøre, 'V2 off" Lofoten and Vs off Finmarken
(cfr. Gran L. 70, pp. 150, 151, 154). Mentioned by Haeckel from
a great depth in the Central Pacific. Cleve has found the species
at a great depth west of Spitzbergen and at some places in the
northern and north western parts of the Atlantic. Cleve (L. 40,
p. 161) remarks that the species, though often found together with
Styliplankton (tempei'ate oceanic), does not, however, appear to be a
Btyliplankton form. Cleve considers it likely, either that it comes
from the northern polar basin, or from the Northern Pacific. Cfr.
above, p. 128.
Cladosceniinii liuibatiiiu Jørg. 11. sp.
(Pl. XV, fig. 74.)
Resembles to some extent the foregoing species, and is, on the
whole, of the same structure, but, is nevertheless, quite different
through the following special characteristics:
The main spines are more broadly three-edged, each edge
having 2 to 4 diverging spines, which nearest to the shell are often
prolongated to arch-shaped fine, supporting branches, between the
shell and the main spine. Such arches are only seen from the one
or two innermost branches (spines) and most clearly on the upper
side of the main spines. Outside the basal arches, perhaps only
between the lateral spines, a brim-shaped continuation of the lattice
shell is developed. This bi'im continues a little way foi'wards along
the sides of the main spines.
There is a verticil of branches high up on the columella, as
in the foregoing species, but these branches are here almost straiglit
on the distance between the columella and the shell.
The network of the lattice shell is much more perfect than in
the foregoing species, mo.st of the meshes being small and more
or less distinctly square.
There is a trace of lattice wiims from the top liorn to the
basal spines, and for this reason the species, perhaps, should most
correctly be referred to the genus Pteroseenium- Hck.
The cephalis is 52 \>. in height, the width between the lateral
spines 56 [j.. The right, lateral spine is 68 \i. in length outside the
shell, the tophorn 50 jj.. The stronger, primary arches seem here
to become less conspicuous with growing age, so as to make the
network more even in development. Finally the pores seem to dis-
ProtistplHiiktoii.
appear. beiuL;- cldscd In" tliiii plates, so tliat tlicy are traiisl'ormed
into windows, not ojienini^s.
( )nly tuc) speeiuK'ns oliserved: '■' , is;);), -lo miles NW of (ianlc-
vuTo. ()- -Tno ni.
I*«>ri(liiiiii ll(K.
Has the four primary spines as well as the ventral, sagittal one.
I have i»rcviously (.IpiuiioNSEN L. 91, p. 75) expressed the
opinion that the L'enns Pcridiiim onght most naturally to be placed
npside (low n. with the ai'ehed dome (cephalis) downward.s and the
ojx'ninL;'. which is partly closed liy lattice work from the basal spines,
upwards. It is still my opinion that this is most correct aftci- the
analoary with Campylaeantha, Plectacnnilm and Plminacantha. Here
it may bo clearly proved that the apical spine in Haeckel's sense
ciiiiesponds to the dorsal, basal spine D in the genera mentioned.
\Nliile I, at the same time, considered the genera Euaccnium
and Cladoscenium to have apical netveork in contradistinction to
Pciidium and the group Pledoidea Hck. with a basal one, 1 have
later on come to the conclusion, after closer examination, that such
a dili'erence docs not exist. 1 have therefore retained Haeckel's
method of |)lacing so as not to bring Peridiiim in opposition to the
other genera of the group Ci/rtoidea Hck., for which 1 prefer from
practical reasons, at any rate foi- the present, to retain Haeckel's
method.
P. longispinum Jørg.
(Pl. XV, fig». 75—79; pl. XVI. fig. 80.)
Jørgensen L. 91, p. 75.
I am for the pi'esent not quite sure whether or not there are
at lca.st two ditferent species included under this name. What makes
it still more difficult is that young forms of Dict/rtida often have
the appearance of a Peridhim, so that it is necessary to be very
careful in the determination.
On older, well developed forms thei-e is a cephalis which is
broadest above the middle, then quickly rounded oti" upwards and
conically narrowed downwards. The lattice shell is well developed
and closed all round. The pores vary considerably in size, from
very small and round to large, oblong and polygonal.
The main spines protrude far out. The very long and very
narrow points seem only to occur in younger individuals. Large
byspines, strongly bent outwards, are found on the right and left
lateral arches. Besides, there are smaller, straight byspines scattered
over all the surface of the shell, stronger and fewer in number at
the basal opening, numei-ous and tine, narrow, needle-shaped on the
upper side of the cephalis.
Younger individuals (if these do belong to the same species)
with larger, more irregular pores, thinner beams, less perfectly
developed lattice shell and long and narrow main spines. The ce-
phalis in such forms is generally rounder, and often broader than
it is high.
Here again we find the characteristic course of the primary
arches, as mentioned under Pledacantha oikiskos. The larger se-
condary meshes and spines, which are mentioned at the same place,
are also present here.
Rather rare, in deep water samples, up to 50 m.
Listrihiition : Also on the west coast of Norway, rare. Occurred
too in two surface samples from the warmer, salter Atlantic waters,
'/■■ 1901, otf Sondmore, and "A otf Lofoten (cfr. above, under Clado-
sceniitm tricolpimn).
pi-esent, a-
P. uiimitntn Ci,.
Cleve L. ;!(), |). ;il, pi. .!. f. 1 a. b. c.
The forms wliieli I have lelerred to this .species, occurred rarelx
in my n)ateiial. They may at once be distinguished from the pre-
ceding .species on account of the ab.sence of the muneious. fine
byspines on the u[)per part of the cephalis.
VII C. 5. IMcyrtHla Hck.
l/itlioiii4>lissa KiiRK.
The i'oin' piimaiT spines, A, I). L and 1
well as the vcnti-al, sagittal one.
The apical spine, D, runs in the wall of the cephalis, and
protrudes like a needle-shaped tophoin, the lower part being iaside
the lattice shell. The dorsal, basal .spine. A, protrudes obliquely
like a simple spike (needle), rather far down on the thorax. On the
inside, it is propped up against the shell by arch-shaped supporting
beams (corresponding to the apical arches in Plwrmacantha hi/strh-).
The lateral spines pierce the thorax in its upper part and protrude
each of them as (one or?) two spikes.
The ventral, sagittal spine pi'otrudes near the region of the
neck (between cephalis and thorax), and is. in Lithomelissa setosa,
connected to the right lateral spine, Lj. l>y an inner, little lattice-
plate, whilst it is farther distant from the left, lateral spine. In
other words, it divides the angle between the lateral spines into
two very uneven paits, one small one to the right, and a larger
one to the left. By this feature, young forms of Lifhomelifsa se-
tosa are easily recognized, even if only the cephalis be developed.
The primary arches between D, Lj. and Lj are well developed,
and protrude on the inside like three archshaped ledges, running
upwards. By means of outwards and downwards bent byspines
from these primary arches, together with branches and arches from
the dorsal spine, A, and the lateral ones, the thorax is developed.
In the upper part of the thorax, there are, therefore, formed
three, more oi- less distinct swellings, a right one, beloAv the pri-
mary, right, lateral arch, a left one, below the left, lateral arch,
and a ventral one, below the primary, ventral arch.
Here too, as in all the forms of Cyrtoidea occurring in my
material, there is an inner axial spine, pointing downwards verti-
cally from the ventral end of the central rod, thus having the same
starting point as the ventral, sagittal spine.
L. setosa Juhg.
(PI. XVI, figs. 81—83; pi. XVIII, fig. 108).
JøkctEnsen L. 91, p. 91. nou Botryopijle setosa Cl. L. 30, p.
27, pi. 1, f. 10.
Compare above the description of the genus and of the structure
of the species in the introduction to the group Nassellaria. Cfr.
too Jørg. 1. c. where a detailed description will be found.
Of byspines, there are usually too strongly developed one on
the right, lateral arch, protruding in the form of simple spikes in
the upper part of the thorax, one or two similar ones on the left,
lateral arch, and a couple on the cephalis.
The spikes, which are seen in vai-ying numbers and differently
developed on the lower margin of the thorax are — at any rate
most often — only temporary formations. They disappear later on,
136
E. Jørgens
as the development of the thorax progresses, the meshes being
formed between these spines. Is is possible that var. belonophora
JøEG. 1. c, pi. i, f. 22, is the fully developed form, and that its
marginal spines are therefore permanent.
Frequent, mostly in deep water samples, sometimes — but rarely
— in the surface. Rarely at all numci'ous.
Distribution : Belongs to the most frequent Bad'wlarid on the
west coast of Norway.
L. laticeps Jørg. n. sp.
(PI. XVL fig. 84).
As yet, I am only imperfectly acquainted with this species
which seems related to L. thorncites Hck. and L. mediterranea J.
MtJLL. It differs from the preceding one in having a larger eephalis,
which is broader and more obtuse, and by the want of byspines.
Neitlier does there appear to be any other protruding spines than
the principal ones, with perhaps a couple of branches.
The thorax has no marginal byspines beneath. The pores here
on the lower margin are larger and the walls thinner, so that pro-
bably the individual illustrated is not yet fully developed.
Very rare and only singly: Sea off Røst, "/s 1899, 0—900 m.
Distrihution: I have seen it in a deep water sample from the
sea between the Færø and Shetland Isles (cfr. above, p. 128).
i. bystrix Jøkg.
(Pl. XVI, fig. 85).
Jørgensen L. 91, p. 8.3.
Cephalis not very high, finally, by the development of secon-
dary, outer arches in the region of the neck, a broad semisphere,
which is half of it sunk into the thoi-ax.
The thorax is above campanulate, below cylindrical, with two
distinct, lateral indentations in the upper part.
In the region of the neck in younger individuals, there are
large holes, which later on are, to some extent, closed, by the
development of outer arches between the lower part of the cephalis
and tlie upper part of the thorax. The pores outside this region
of the neck are roundish, of very varying size, being smallest on
tiie upper part of the cephahs.
On the whole, there appears to be the same spines as in L.
setosci, but fewer really protruding ones from the inner skeleton.
The thorax here too appears to be similarly formed to that of L.
setosa. from strong, obliquely downwards pointing byspines on the
primary arches. A number of such obliquely protruding byspines
ai'e also seen in tliis species in tlie region of the neck. In addition,
there are also numerous, needle-shaped byspines on the cephalis
and the upper part of the tiiorax, and these, on a broad part of
the shell, between the cephalis and thorax, dcvelope fine, connecting
beams, covering the large neck openings.
The region of the neck will here, in this way, be sin-rounded
by a covering which causes the cephalis finally to be half (oi'
wholly?) sunk into the thorax. This outer covering is chiefly
formed from byspines on secondary arches.
Cephalis 22 [j. broad, thorax 45—50 n broad, 'f he licJLiht of
the thorax in the foi'ms occurring in my material 34 — 40 |).. In
these forms, which most probably were not fully developed, the
brim of the thorax was provided beneath with short irregular
spines, which no doubt are flic walls of meshes in ])rof'css ol' devel-
opment.
It is a question whether this species should not be more cor-
rectly separated from the genus Lithomelissa. But as I have not
as yet had an opportunity of studying the inner skeleton more
carefully, I will, for the present, retain it in the genus in which
I originally placed it.
Very rare and occurs only sparsely: '''A, 1899. 40 miles
NW of Gaukværø, 0—700 m.; "Vs 1899, the Tys Fiord I, 0—700 m.
Distribution : Also very rare on the west coast of Norway.
Anipliiineli^sa Jørg. n. gen.
This genus in outward appearance is similar to Lithomelissa,
but its structure is principally different. It has the most important
spines of the Campylncnntha type, namely the four primary ones,
A, D, Lj. and Lj, one venti-al, sagittal spine, and two strong
lateral, dorsal ones, rising from the base of the spine D, which
here, as in Lithomelissa, appears as a protruding, apical spine.
The primary arches too are strongly developed, the veuti'al arch,
namely, as well as the right and left lateral arches (cfr. Plecta-
cantha) all as arches inside the cephalis. To these come a
couple of strong arches from the dorsal, lateral spines to the
primary, lateral arches, also situated inside the cephalis, near
its sides.
These strong inner arches are all connected outwards with
the lattice shell, by means of strong, supporting beams which, for
the most part, protrude on the exterior, as tine, long spikes.
This peculiar form is only distantly related to the others in
my material. In structure it is unmistakably similar to Phorm-
acantha hystrix; but there are, nevertheless, as far as I have
hitherto been able to see, important differences in the structural
type. The distinctly enclosed columella (the spine D) is charac-
teristic; it shows, from the dorsal side, two basal, obliquely down-
wards pointing side branches, the dorsal, lateral spines, and higher
up two obliquely upwards pointing ones, the usual primary branches
of the spine D. Probably the two strong arches from the dorsal,
lateral spines to the right and left, primary, lateral arches coi're-
spond to the comparatively strong apical arches, which in Phor-
maaantha hystrix extend from the primary branches of the apical
spine A to the lateral ai'ches. In this case, the dorsal, lateral spines
might be considered to be, centrally displaced, primary branches of
the spine A, and this answers to their direction.
The genus Amphimelissa then has an inner, incompletely
latticed cephalis, surrounded by a lattice shell, which immediately
continues downwards as a thorax.
The rather intricate course of these inner arehes and skeleton
parts here, as in the genera Lithomdissu and Acanthocurys, is diffi-
cult to trace in its details, as the outer lattice shell generally
conceals them. So there are in tliis genus, as in the other two
above mentioned, several structural details which require closer
investigation. So nmch is, however, certain, that no satisfactory,
natural system of classification i\n- the Cyrtoidea group can bo
formed, unless the necessary consi(l(>i-iition is paid to these inner
skeleton parts.
The genus Amphimelissa ought undoubtedly to be kept distinct
from the peculiar, irregular forms which form Haeckel's division
Botryodrii.
Protistplanktoii.
137
A. setosa (Cl.) Jori;. n. nom.
(Pl. XVIII, fig. Kiil).
Botnjopyle setosn Ci.. 1.. .!(». |». l'7. jiI. I, Hi;, in a. h.
The transverse scctiiMi is a short oval, witli the loni^itiulinal
axis in the direction of tlio central rod (.sa<,'-ittally). There arc
three lar.i;e swellinirs on the nppcr part of tlic slicll (the .,cephalis"'),
a dorsal one, between the spines A and D, and two lateral ones
on each side extending forwards to the ventral side.
I earlier confounded this species with Lithomelism setosu and
it is entered in the tables undrr this name. It seems however, on
the whole, to be very rare. It is interesting' that it seems to occur
dui-iny the .sprini;- diatom iiiHow.
Malang-en, -'■', , is;)'.», o— .lud m., Lille Molla, '/j ISO'.), in the
surt'ace.
T)istrihiiti(»i: Kai-c on the west coast of Norway. Mentioned
by Cleve from places in the northern and western Atlantic, as
far as to the west of Spitzbergen, hei-e at great depths (76"— 78"
N, 15° E — 3" W, deep sea hauls from 325 m. and more, Aug.
and Sept. 1898; 71"— 72" N, 21—22" W, hauls from 180 m.
and more, .July 1899; 45" N, 49" \\'. high salinity and temper-
ature, January 1S99).
Aeaiithofoi-ys nmbellifera Hck. (?)
(PI. XVIII, fig. 107).
Haeckel L. 84, p. 305, pi. 6, lig. 12.
Under this name I have entered a form which has the appear-
ance of a species of the division Dieijrtida, but is certainly not
fully developed. It is remarkable, as also Haeckel's illustration,
for a rather large cephalis and a short, bi'oad thorax. The spines
in the thorax, protruding from the free brim like long, tine spikes
are characteristic. Some of these spines are weaker than the
others and are branches of them. The cephalis is well supplied
with long, needleshaped byspines. There is also a similar apical
spine, which here, as in Lithomelissa, is the spine D and runs in
the wall of the cephalis, thus not forming any inner columella.
ily species ditters from Haeckel's only in the want of by-
spines on the thorax.
This species occurred very rarely and sparsely in the material
from the northern coasts of Norway: 'Vi 1899, 40 miles NW of
Gaukværø, 0—700 m.; =7i 1899, Malangen, 0—300 m.
JJhiril/utioii: More frequent on the west coast of Norway,
numerous in the Oster Fiord, near Hergen, at a great depth (up to
f.oi) m.), "A; 1900.
Cleve mentions the species from a few places in the Atlantic,
west of Ireland and more to the south, as well as from several
places far north, to the north west point of Spitzbergen. In these
northern places, the species was only found in deep water. Haeckel
mentions it from the Azores and the Mediterranean. Hence
Cleve coasiders the species to belong to Styliplankton. It seems,
however, .judging from the places mentioned where it has been
found, to have about the same distribution as Pkctacantha, and is
probably boreal oceanic.
It is, however, quite possible that Haeckel's is a distinct
species.
Helotholas Jøro. n. gen.
The four primary spines with the ventral, sagittal one. All
live protrude as single .spikes, the doi'sal one, A, down on the
thorax, (he ventral, sauittal • in the neck .stricture, the one
marked I), on tlir cc|ilialis as an apical spine.
The lower part of this latter spine is inside tin; wall of the
cephalis, while it a little higher up runs in thi^ very wall. It is
therefore no genuine columella.
There is also an axial spine, as in the olliei' .species here men-
tioned of the Ci/rtoldcd <;ronp. This axial spine starts as usual
fi-om the vential end of the central rod, in the interior of the
lattice shell, a little below the neck stricture, and is in elder indi-
viduals of J/rh,tliuliis Instricom divided in two.
The thorax is bi'oadly campannlate. nearly somispheiical.
H. histricosa Jøro. n. sp.
(PI. XVI, figs. 8(j— 88).
The ventral sagittal .spine about eipial in strength to the others
and is directed a little upwards. The primaiy, lateral spines are
nearly horizontal, bent slightly downwards; they protrude at the
neck stricture, rather far up. The dorsal spine, A. is directed
downwards and pierces the thorax rathei- far down.
Only the dorsal spine. A, runs for a short distance in the
very wall of the thorax, the others pierce only tiie wall.
The cephalis is semispherical, or a little higher, in cross sec-
tion circular. The thorax is broadly campannlate.
The pores are irregular in shape and size, most of them being
roundish or oblong, smallest on the cephalis (1 — 16 ;).), largest on
the thorax, especially down below on young individuals. Here the
brim of the thorax is furnished with numerous, irregularly placed,
short spines, which are not true byspines, but only the walls of
meshes which are not yet developed.
On the cephalis and thorax, nai'i-ow needle shaped byspines
are scattered, the longest being about e(iual in length to the dia-
meter of the cephalis.
I have not seen any individuals which could i)e supposed to
be fully developed.
The species does not answer well to any of Haeckel's genera.
From the genus Lithomelissa, as I have understood it in the species
L. setosa, there ai'e such important differences that it does not seem
reasonable to place these two forms in the same genus. It might
rather be united with the folloAving species. I have not, however,
done so, more especially as the definition of Haeckel's genus
Dictijophwms requires that there should be three thoracic ribs which
are lengthened out to „basal feet'", and this definition may at a
pinch be made to apply to the two following species, but not at
all to Hdotholus histricosa.
Rather rare, sparse, in deep water samples.
Distribution: Seems also to be a boreal, oceanic species.
DictyopliimnK Eiirb., Hck.
This genus is by Haeckel made to include rather highly
differentiated foi-ms, which probably ought to be kept distinct from
the species which I have here referred to it. There does not,
however, appear to be any great disadvantage in placing them here
preliminarily.
From these two species, the genus should be defined as follows:
The four primary spines ai-e present, as well as the ventral,
sagittal one. The three basal ones (L,., Lj and A) extend from
the central I'od to the upper part of the thorax, a little below
138
E. Jørgeus
the neck, hence running for a little way in the thoracic wall,
and then protruding either as ('thoracic „feet" (D. histncosus), or
leaving the thorax above its free brim.
The thorax is broadly campanulate oi' conical.
D. Clevei Johg.
D. yracilipcs Ci-. L. 3(i. p. 21). pi. 2. f. 2. vix Bail. D.
■Chvei Johg. L. 91, p. 80, pi. 5, f. 26.
The protruding part of all live spines of uniform breadth, much
broader than the inside part, with three distinct edges. In
young specimens, the three basal spines extend from the lowei' part
of the thorax. They are partly running in the thorax, but on
older individuals always appear to protrude above the free brim.
The irregular, small spines on the free brim of the thorax
arc here, as in the preceding species, only temporary formations,
which later on become intermediate walls between new meshes.
In the passage from the cephalis to the thorax, there are three
distinct swellings, two lateral, outside the primary, lateral arches
(P> and Bj), as well as a ventral one between the primary, lateral
.spines.
The thoi-a\ is wide, flatly campanulate.
Dictyoplihmig (jraeUijws Bail. (L. 9. p. 4. pi. 1, f. 8) does
not appear from the description to be this species („triquetrous;
three acute lidges prolonged into long acute basal spines").
Rare, in deep water samples.
Distrihiitiun : Rare on the west coast of Norway. Cleve men-
tions D. graciliijeti from a few places in the northern part of the
Atlantic up to the north west point of Spitzbergen, at the most
noithern places only in deep water. Bailey's species was found in
tlie Northern Pacific and Kamtschatka.
Probably boreal oceanic.
D. liistricosus JiiRg. n. sp.
(PI. XVI, fig. 89).
Cephalic semispiierical, thorax pyramidal.
The basal spines extend from the central rod (under the neck
stricture) to the thorax and continue in the thoracic wall to the
very mai'gin below where they protrude as „basal feet". The api-
cal spine, D, runs chiefly in the wall of the cephalis (as in the
two preceding species) and above is prolongated to a tophorn, which
is only very little different to the byspines in appearance. This is
also the case with the ventral, sagittal spine, which runs obhquely
upwaids and out through the neck stricture.
.Ml the main spines are narrow, not three-edged.
Cephalis and thoi'ax rather plentifully provided with narrow,
needle-shaped byspines, which are longest and most numei'ous on
the cephalis. The longest are as long, oi- even a little longci', than
the diameter of the cephalis.
The pores ai'e uneven in shai)o and size, varying from quite
small to 9 p., not much smaller on the cephalis than on the thorax.
Here too the three .swellings on the upper part of the thorax
between the main spines (fig. 89 b) are to be found.
The width of the lattice shell is 85 \)., its height (not includ-
ing the basal feet) 68 |i.. The cephalis alone is 34 \>. wide and
22 11. high.
Very rare and only singly: '"/i 1899, 40 miles NW of (iauk-
værø, 0—700 m.; Henningsvær, ^'/s 1899. 0—250 ni.
Distribution: Probably boreal oceanic.
liitharaehninni Hck.
Rudimentary cephalis, In the neck stricture, which here is near
the top of the lattice shell, the three primary meshes will be seen
between the three primary, basal spines. These spines are here very
much retrogi'aded and have only the appearance of walls between
the primary meshes. Both the apical spine, D, and the ventral,
sagittal one are wanting. Refei' for further details to Hck. L. 84,
p. 1163.
^'oung forms of Litharachiiiimi tentoriunt will appear as slen-
dei' pyramids and thus correspond to the genus Plcctoinjramis Hck.
Haeckel mentions and illustrates the three primary meshes
mentioned (his cortinar septum) but no cephalis. He too considers,
however, the jointless lattice shell to be the thorax, as he deflnitely
derives the genus from Dicijrtida by the loss of the cephalis.
My opinion therefore is that it would be most natural to i-efer
all the genera belonging here to Dicyrtida, not to Monocyrtidd.
In this species (and probably in most eases) a rudimentary cephalis
is also distinctly visible.
The genera which belong here according to Haeckel ought
undoubtedly to be subjected to revision.
L. teiitorinui Hck.
(PI. XVL figs. 90—91).
Haeckel L. 84. p. 281. pi. 4. flg.s. 7—10. L. 86. p. 1163.
The upper part of the lattice shell is slenderly conical, widened
out below to a broad brim which is at the ouLside edge bent again
upwards, giving the appearance of the brim of a hat. At the top
of the conical part, there is a tiny semispherical cephalis.
The pores in the upper part of the shell are small, round and
scattered; farther down they are lattice windows (as in the genus
Pledopyramis Hck.) and are moi'e I'egularly arranged in horizontal
rows. The shape gradually lengthens out horizontally, so that from
being round they become rectangular with rounded corners. Only
still farther down do the sti-aight ribs in the wall of the lattice
shell appear, and the pores now become regularly rectangular, and
are arranged in distinct i-ows, both radially and tangentially. ^\'lu■n
the radial pores have attained a certain size, new straight longitu-
dinal ribs appear in the wall of the lattice shell, pushed in between
the old ones.
The number of jirinciiia! ril)s in the well developed specimen
which is illustrated in fig. 90. was 32. Very numerous secondary
ribs, their number increasing in proportion to the distance from tiio
cephalis, were present between these 32. The diameter of the
brim 340 'x, of the cephalis only 8—9 |j.. The largest meshes (high
up) 9 |x, in the brim about 6 \i..
Notwithstanding that there are really great diflerences in
Haeckel's and my desci'iptions, it seems — on account of the
remarkable eoi'respondence in so many details with Haeckels
illusti-ation — that my species and Haeckel's are after all iden-
tical.
This species answers perhaps best in structure to the many-
jointed genera (division Stichocyrtida), and might be considered as
such a many-jointed form, where the strictures and annular septa
between the different joints have disappeared.
Very rare, only singly: Skroven. *U 1899, 0—150 m. ; thc
Folden Fiord, "A 1900, 300—200 m.
Dixtributiu'}i: In the sea between Norway and the Facroe
Protistplanktnii.
Isles (also inoiitioiK'il tVum licrr hy ("m;vk. L. Km. [''(hiikI by
IIakokel at Mt'ssiiia.
Seems to 1)0 a soutlicni. tciiipenile. ocoaiiic t'onn.
AiitlrocyclaM .jr.iu!. n. gen.
The four primary spines and the ventral sagittal one are pre-
sent. The apical spine, D, runs close to the cephalic wall, and
finally protrudes as a marginal topswoi-d. tliiclc and larpe. and fur-
uished with three broad edt;es. TIumv is. (■onse(iiu'ntly. no distinct
columella.
The three basal spines. A. \.^. and L| p rot I'ude from the upper
part of the thorax (the spine A lowest down) like fine needles,
wlueii pierce the wall, no part of them being enclosed in it as
..thoracic ribs". The ventral, sanltlal spine also protrudes like a
similar needle in the region of the neck.
There is also a long, inner axial spine, whicli reaches as far
down as to the upper part of the abdomen.
Cfr. the remarks about the i-egion of the nock, under the de-
scription of the species.
I refei-red the following species previously to the genus Fte-
rocorys Hck., but I now tind it necessary to separate it from this
genus which has strong side swords on the thorax.
On the other hand, there is probably no doubt that the genus
Theoconus Hck. to some extent corresponds to my genus Andro-
cyclcis. Thus, Theoconus joris Hck. (L. 86, pi. 69, f. 4) is undoubt-
edly of quite the same structure as Androcyclas gamphonycha, the
byspines on the abdomen of the latter only excepted. As, how-
ever, Haeckel's group Theocyrtida, to which Theoconus Hck. and
Theocalyptra Hck. belong, is defined as Tricyrtida without radial
apophyses, I have thought it most practical, to avoid confusion,
temporarily to erect the new genus Aiidroryrhis.
A. gainpbonj-cha (Jukg.)
(PI. XVII, figs. 92—97).
Ptcrocorys yamphonyxos Jorg. L. 1)1, p. Sd.
P. theoconus Jokg. 1. c. P. amblycephnlis .Jihti;. 1. c.
The region of the neck is very peculiar, not forming any di-
stinct stricture between the cephalis and thorax, but a zone where
these two .joints gradually pass into each other. This region
appears on the dorsal side to lie between two pair of branches from
the apical spine, D, namely two dorsal, lateral spines below (corres-
ponding to those in the genus AmplmneUssa) and the primary,
lateral arches above. These dorsal, lateral spines (from the base of
the spine A and the spine D) lie near the hind wall of the ce-
phalis. The lower part of the apical spine, D, is here a columella
in the region of the neck, but lying near the cephalic wall.
The length of the abdomen varies considei'ably, probably ac-
cording to age; this is also the case with the number of byspines.
It is not unusual to find comparatively well developed forms \\-hich
are apparently almost or entirely without the characteristic by-
spines, but which in other respects diverge so little from the ty-
pical forms that they can scarcely be considered to belong to any
other species. Therefore I now think that Pterocorys theoconus
must be looked upon as a form of this species.
The other, very short tophorn is very rarely seen distinctly
and is probably a more or less accidental formation. &!ometimes
strong siliceous edgings are developed on the ujjpei- part of the
cephalis, and these may bo protrudiiiL;- and in certain positions look
like a very broad, short spine.
Accoi'ding to my experience no limit either can be drawn be-
tween Pterocorys yamphonyxos and /'. amblycephnlis. The younger
forms seem to answer best to the latter, which is in appearance
so difierent to P. yamphonyxos that it is generally ea.sy to keep
them distinct. (This is done in the tables). The principal dilfer-
ence is that P. amblyccphaUs has a cephalis which is at the u|)per
part abruptly cut off and, at the very top, often open. This opening
is probably closed latei' on. The tophorn is i.'enerally .shorter and-
more weakly developed and the ahdonien short and broad, without
distinct byspines, all chai'acteristics which may be explaineil by
supposing that P. amlilyrephalis is the younger stage of development.
On inviduals which it seemed more coi-rect to i-efer to P. amhlycephalis
than to P. yamphonyxos, I have also occasionally seen short and
broad byspines in conjunction with a better development of the ab-
domen.
On the best developed specimens of .1. yamplionyclin. the ab-
domen is again narrowed below, the sti'ongest set of spines being
on that part which is broadest. The byspines are only slightly bent.
Frequent, in Tranødybet "A 1899, 0—630 m., numerous, other-
wise rather sparse and generally only in deep water.
Distribution : On the west coast of Norway, in deep water,
rare. Off the coast of Finmark 73 1901, in a surface sample (S/S
Michael Sars cfr. Gran, L. 70, p. 154). Perhaps a temperate oce-
anic form.
Clatlirocycla^ craspedota (Jorg.) Joro.
(PI. XVU, figs. 98—100).
Theocalyptra craspedota .Jukg. L. 91. p. 80.
The abdomen is a narrow, flat, projecting brim, on well devel-
oped specimens having two or three regnlai-, circular rows of meshes,
the inner row with small pores. The free side-walls of a I'ing of
meshes undei' development will have the appearance of a regular
circle of shoi't, radial spines on the abdominal brim.
The same spines are present as in the preceding genus. The
three basal spines pi'otrude similarly as fine needles in the upper
part of the thorax (the dorsal spine, A. farther down than the
others). The apical spine, D, also here piotrndos with a broad
three-edged topsword directed upwards and somewhat backwards.
The ventral, sagittal spine protrudes upwards and foi'wards (ven-
trally) with a similar, three-edged topsword, which is. however, a
little smaller and points obliquely forwards.
Refer for further details to Jobgexsen, 1. c.
As the incompletely developed abdomen often exhibits a mar-
ginal brim of regular, short spines like those Haeckel draws for
species of the genus Clathrocyclas. subgeiuis Clathrocycloma Hck.
(L. 86, pis. 08, 59), I have thought it best to I'efer my species to
this genus where it seems to have its natui-al place. In doing so,
I also think that Clathrocycloma Hck. will be found to have the
three basal spines pi-otruding from the upper part of the thoi-ax
like fine needles.
If these needles ai-o overlooked or absent, and no notice is-
taken of the spines on the brim of the abdomen, the species accord-
ing to Haeckel's system will be a Theocalyptra.
Hcdicalyptra '•! cornata I5ail. = Th-ocidyjitra c. Haeckel is
quite impossible to determine from the veiy imperfect illustration,
140
E. Jørgens
giA'cn by Baiiæy. After this drawing it has only cephalis and
thorax.
Frequent, though never numei'ous.
Distrihaimi : On the west coast of Norway, very rare. In
surface samples 7.; 1901, off Søndmøre, and "A oft' Lofoten (cfr.
<above under Cladoncenium trirolpium, p. 134).
If this species be Cleve's Theocalyptra cornuta, it has been
found at great depths at some places in the North Atlantic right
up to the north west coast of Spitzbergen, and at scattered places
in the western part of the North Atlantic. Most probably boreal
oceanic.
I>iftj oot'ras Hck.
D. acanthicum Joro.
(PI. XVII, fi<r. 101 a : pi. XVIII, fig. 101 b).
JORGENSEN L. 91. p. 84.
It appears very doubtful whether tliis species really is spe-
cifically different from the following one.
The only difference appears to be in the protruding basal
spines, which in this species are little more strongly developed
outside than inside the lattice shell, while they are transformed
into three-edged swords in D. xiphephornm. I retain, however,
I), acanthieitm preliminarily as a separate species, as it is, gener-
ally speaking, easy to keep it distinct from B. xiphei)liorum. If
they should pi'ove to belong to the same species, D. amnthicmn
would be the younger stage.
Rather i-are, always in deep water- samples, sparse.
Dlvtrihution : On the west coast of Norway rare. In surface
samples ^V^ 1901. off Lofoten, and '',4 oft' Finmarken (8/S Michael
Sars, cfr. above).
D. xiphcplioruui Jurr.
JOKGENSEN L. 91. p. 84. pi. V. f. 25.
Distrihntiori: Like the preceding one. 7- 1901. off" Sønd-
møre, in the surface (>S/S Micliael Sars, cfr. above).
Stiehocorj'S seriata (Johg.)
(PI. XVIII, figs. 102—104).
Euci/rfiduoii f<('iiritt(vi .Tiuui. in Gran L. 70. p. 150 (nomen
nu(him).
A many-jointed form. I'he uppermost joints are convex and
increase in size so that tlie diameter of the fifth is from three to
four times as great as that of the first. The lower part is more
or less distinctly cylindrical. On the cephalis, there is a short
broad tophorn. The pores below are roundish rectangular, in very
distinct, regular, horizontal rows.
The number of the joints varies, pi-obably according to age.
Uppermost there is a low, semispherical (oi- broader) cephalis, then
short joints, which increase evenly in width up to the fourth or
fifth, which is usually the broadest. From the sixth joint, which
is decidedly narrower, the width decreases, but very slowly, so
that the lower part is almost cylindrical, only a little narrower
below. I have not seen more than eight joints. These lower
joints in the cylindrical part are not plainly divided off from each other.
The upper part of the shell is shaped like a high cone.
There is a short, broad, three-edged (?) toijliorn protiuding
from an inner skeleton in the two upper joints.
It is not easy to see these inner skeleton parts which are, at
all events, in a high degree retrograded, for it is a difficult mattei-
to examine the shell from the open end, and the outer lattice shell
in side view hides the short, primary spines. So I have not been
able definitely to decide whether this genus has the same primary
skeleton parts as the foregoing ones. Neither have I been sure if
protruding basal spines exist in the two upper joints (the apical
spine only excepted).
The shape of the cephalis in some positions of the lattice shell
might suggest that also inner primary arches are to be found, and
not only the primaiy spines.
It is doubtful whether there is a protruding ventral, sagittal
spine.
On the other hand, a long, inner axial spine is plainly visible.
It seems to consist of three or more long, parallel branches, which
reacii down through more than half the length of the lattice shell.
The central capsule also reaches far down through the shell.
The pores on the cephalis are small, round, -widely apart and
scattei'ed. On the second joint, they are perhaps a little larger,
on the third somewhat smaller again, and from here they are re-
gularly placed in horizontal rows. From the fourth joint and down-
Avards, the pores become more irregular in form and size, from
quite small and round to rather large, roundish rectangular in shape,
although generally speaking they are small and always in regular,
hoi'izontal rows. On the cylindrical lower part, they are also placed
in more irregular vertical rows. The average size of the pores
does not increase, at any rate noticeably, from the fourth joint
d wnwards.
This species varies ratiier considerably. For instance, its grea-
test width may be either in tlie foui'th or fifth joint, and there are
often irregular contractions in the lower part. It is doubtful
whether any of the individuals illustrated are fully developed. On
the best developed specimen (fig. 102) the lower margin was re-
gularly dentate. Often young individuals may be found consisting
of only a few joints and entirely without the cylindrical lower part.
Height, up to 128 [j., greatest width 72 \l. Pores, up to 6 ix.
The species resembles the one illustrated by Cleve, L. 30,
pi. 2, figs. 5 and 6, which he calls Lithomitra australis Ehkb.
It is probable that the same basal spines are present in this spe-
cies, protruding as fine needles, as in Androcyclas gamxilionycha
and Clathrocyclas craspedota. Even if these spines are present,
Haeckel's name for the genus might in this case be retained with-
out any great disadvantage.
Rather I'are. always in small numbers and only in deep water
samples.
DiftriliKt'tou : In surface samples, -/-: 1901. ofi' Sondmore, '•'■_•
off Lofoten and Vs off Finmark (cfr. above).
Most probably a boreal oceanic species.
VII l>. Phaeodaria Hck. (Tripylea).
VII I>. 1. Caniiosphaerida Hck.
<^aiiiio»<|>liaera Hck.
C. gvonietrica Boro.
lioRGEKT L. 12, pi. 0. f. li; L. 14. p. 25. f. 25.
This species is smallei', but moi'e lobust than the following.
ypccinu'iis w liic'li seem to beloni;' Ihtc wcrt' IbuiKl vci'y spar-
sely in the plankton of 1890 from tlie followiiii:- places:
In the sea 4() miles N'W of Gaukværø, '7i, 0—700 m.;
KvuMiangren I. -'Vi. o— llo ni.: the Vest Fiord 'A, 0 — 200 m.;
(Skroven '/•.., (i — .'UXi m. The speeies appears with us only to occur
in deep water.
Disfril)iitiu)i : Hitherto only found in the Irminyer yea, south
west of Iceland, n. lat. (iO" :?', w. lonir. 27" (Borgekt, 1. c).
Certainly an oceanic form, perhaps from the northern part of the
Culf Stream.
C lepta JoRG.
(PI. XVIIL fig. 110).
JORGENSEN, L. 91, p. 89.
Is a larger, weaker species. There is particularly great di-
vergence in the radial beams, which in this species are generally
thin threads, while in the foregoing one, they are strong, thick
beams. The species varies, however, considerably. As a rule only
broken species are found, as it is easily destroyed on being
touched.
Was very rare and sparse in the samples of 1899, in 1900,
on the contrary, not unusual. Genei-ally only in deep w^ater, yet
up to .50 m.
Disfriliiifioii: Previously only known from the west coast of
Norwav. but not rai'e here in 1898. though alwavs in small numbers.
VII D. 2. Challengerida Hcic.
Protooystis Wall. (Challengcria Mirr.).
P. xipbodon (Hck.) Bokg.
Challengeria xiphodm Hck. Profoci/dw riphodon (Hck.) Bok-
GEKT L. 14, p. 27—28, f. 28.
Rather frequent, but always sparse. Always in deep water
samples.
Distribution: A temperate oceanic species, distributed from
the tropical part of the Atlantic to the north coast of Iceland
(Cleve, L. 40, p. 147). On the west coast of Norway, very rare
(1898). In the North Sea at several places in deeper water in
May and August 1903, especially in the northern opening towards
the Norwegian Ocean (L. 18, 1903—1904, nr. 1). According to
BoRGEET 1. c. also known from the East and the West Greenland
Cuirent, the Labrador Current and the Mediterranean.
p. Harstoni (Murr.) Borg.
BoROERT L. 14, p. 28, f. 30. ChaUenijma Harstoni Murr.,
Cfl-. JORGEXSEX L. 91, p. 90.
Rare and sparse, always in deep water.
Distrihntion : On the west coast of Norway also rai-e, in deep
water. Also found in the northern part of the Gulf Stream at a
few places, up to south and west of Spitzbergen, also in deep
water.
Is probably an oceanic species, perhaps boreal, or at any rate
belonging to the northern part of the Gulf Stream. Also found
in the northern part of the Pacific, at great depths.
/'. tridcns (IIuk.) Bono.
Borgekt L. 14, p. 29, i'. 32. ('lutllriuirria triilms Hck., cfr.
.JoRGENSEN L. 91, p. 90.
Frequent, though nevei- runnerous, as a rule only in deep
water, up to ."lO in.
Distrihution : FiXMiuent on the west coast of Norway, in August
1903 in large numbei-s in deep water oti' the coast of Bei-gen (]j.
18, 1903—1904, nr. 1).
Also found many places in the North Sea and the northern
part of the Gulf Stream, as far as south and west of Spitzbergen.
According to Borgert 1. c. also known fiom the East and the
West Greenland Current and the Laluadoi- Current. Probably a
northern temperate oceanic form.
ClialU'iiift'i-oii diodon Hck.
Borgert L. 14. p. 30, f. 34. Cfr. .Jørgexsex L. 91, p. 91.
Challey,geron hderacanthum Jørg. 1. c.
On more weakly developed (probably young) specimens, the
characteristic byspines are wanting. It is therefore centainly most
practical to do as Borgert has done and consider as one species,
ChaUengeron diodon, C. heteracanthnm and C. Natliorsti Cl.
Not particularly frequent and as a rule very sparse, always
in deep water.
Distribution: On the west coast of Norway, frequent, but
always sparse. Found at a few places in the North Sea (May
1903 at a great depth, according to L. 18) and the northern part
of the Atlantic up to the west of Spitzbergen, in deep water.
According to Borgert 1. c. also found in the Labrador Cui-rent,
the more southerly part of the Atlantic and in the Mediterranean.
Accoi'ding to Haeckel, ChaUengeron diodon has been found in the
south eastern part of the Pacific, at a great depth.
C. Channeri (Mlrr.) Hck.
(PI. XVIII, fig. 111).
ChaUengcriu Channeri Murray L. lot;, p. 22(5. ])1. A. fig. 12.
ChaUengeron Channeri (Murr.) Hck. L. 8(3, p. lGo8. Borgert
L. 14, p. 32, f. 38.
I have only seen one individual which I have supposed to
belong to this species. Its shell was circular in outline, strongly
compressed, with 16 marginal spines, all more or less broken oti'.
Also the teeth of the peristome wq\-& broken otf.
Diameter, 165 [j..
In the sea 40 miles NW of Gaukværo, '7i 1899, 0—700 m.
Distribution : In the sea south west of the Faeroe Isles, and
the southern parts of the Atlantic (Borgert 1. c). On the
American side of the Atlantic (48° n., 42° w. according to Cleve
L. 40, p. 147, very rare). The Northern Pacific, at a gi'eat depth
(Haeckel 1. c).
C armatum
(PI. XVIII, fig.
112).
Borgert L" 14, p. 33, f, 39. C. WiUemoesii Hck. L. 86,
p. 1659, pi. 99, f. 13?
Only one individual observed, this one also from the sea 40
miles NW of Gaukværo, >'*/i 1899, 0—700 m. Unfortunately I
missed this specimen before I had finished my examination and
drawiuf of it.
U-2
E. Jørge
Distrihiition : Northern branch of the Gulf Stream and the
more southerly parts of the Atlantic, according to Boegert 1. c.
According- to L. 18, 1903—1904, nr. 1, also west of the Paeroe
Isles, August 1908, in deeper watei; r.
VII D. 3. Mednsettida Hck
llednsetta arcifera Jørg.
JøEfiENSEN L. 91, p. 93, pi. 4, f. 23.
Closely related to J7. parthencjpam ]')Oe,g. \j. 13. p. 243,
pi. 11, f. 5.
Very rare and only singly, 1899: Henningsvær 'Vi) 0 — 1*^0 m.;
Senjen ^'A, 0 — 130 m ; Ofoten II, Va, 250—200 m.; Reine "A,
0—150 m. Only in deep water.
Distrihution : Fui'ther, only known from the west coast of
Norway, whei-e it is not so rai-e. Most probably a temperate form.
The closely allied species, i[. paythenopæa Borg., is found at
Naples.
CiJaif.t'l letta pentapodium Jørg.
Jørgensen L. 91, p. 94.
Very rare and only singly, 1899 : Moskenstrømmen "A, 0 — 50 m.;
8enjen ^Vi, 0—50 m.; the Vest Fiord 7=, <•— 200 m.; Henningsvær
-%, 0—280 m.
Distribution: 8amc as the preceding.
VII I>. 4. Cadiida Borg.
Cadinni inelo (Ci,.) Borc.
(PI. XVIII, fig-. 113).
Borgert L. 14, p. 50, f. 58. Beroetta melo Cl. L. 30, p. 27,
pi. ), f. 8. Cfr. Jørgensen L. 91, p. 92.
Only one specimen noticed: Sea off Røst, 60 miles NW of
Røst, 'Vs 1899, 0—900 m.
Distrihution: Seems to be an oceanic form from the northern
part of the Atlantic. Only found alive in the By Fiord at Bergen
(Jørgensen L. 91, p. 93), 0—200 m., ri-, and at a great depth
west of Spitzbergen (Cleve 1. c).
■Vni. T±i3.-bi -n -n ocLea,,
Tiiitiniiii^ acuminatiis Clap, pt Lachm.
(Mr. .Jørgensen 1j. 90, p. S, and pp. 42 — 43.
Frequent, but always in small numbers. Seems to be most
frequent in latlier deep water (which is Avarmer and has a higher
degree of salinity).
Distrihution: Seems to be an oceanic form tVoiii the Northern
Atlantic, perhaps also nci'itic, tempci'atc and boreal. According to
Cleve (L. 40, p. 121) it has its „principal area of disti'ibution in
the Irminger Sea".
Var. undata Jørq. L. 91, p. 9.').
Very sparse in three samples: Helligvirr '
and 0—250 m.; Malangen =7, 1899, 0—300 m.
1899. 0—50 m.
I^pprotintiiinns pellucidus (Cl.) Jørg.
(Pl. XVIII, fit;. 114).
.Jørgensen L. 92, p. IS. Tintinnus pellucidus Cl. L. 30,
p. 24. pi. 1, f. 4. Tintinnus hottnicus Brandt L. 16, p. 53, pi. 3,
f. 11, non NoRBQUisT L. 110, p. 126, f. 5. Lcprotintinmts hottninis
(Nordq.) Jørg. L. 90, p. 10.
Concerning Cleve's remark (L. 4o, p. 123) as to the cor-
rectness of the genus name Leprotintinnus. ]-efcrence should be
made to Jørgensen L. 92, p. 19.
I have seen individuals with very few foreign bodies on their
houses, but I have never seen perfectly smooth specimens. It is
however very seldom that one meets with such well covered indi-
viduals as the one represented in figure 114.
Very rare and sparse, only found in three samples: Rombaken
I, 72 1899, 0-40 m.; the Ogs Fiord I, "A 1899 0—90 m.; the
Skjerstad Fiord IV, V4 1900, 0—330 m.
Distribution: On the west coast of Norway, very rare. Also
found near Greenland, Spitzbergen and the Arctic Ocean noi-th of
Finland (August 1903, occasionally numerous, according to L. 18,
1903—1904, ni-. 1). The species is, therefore, certainly a northern
one, perhaps boreal oceanic and neritic arctic.
Aniphorella Dada;.
A. quadrilineata (Clap, et Lachm.) Jørg.
Cfr. Jørgensen L. 90, p. 12.
It is highly probable that Cl.vpartide's species, Tintinnus
amphora, is the same one as is in the same work mentioned as
T. quadrilineatus. The latter name must, however, be looked upon
as the safer. It ought to be preferred if it were not for the com-
plication caused by the use of the name Tintinnus amphora (Am-
phorella amphora) by Entz and Daday for the species here being
considered, and by the use of the other name by Dadat in another
sense (= A. Dadayi Jørg.). Under these circumstances, it would,
after all, perhaps be better to use the name A. (tmphora (Clap, et
Lachm.) Entz, as Cleve does (L. 40, p. 99).
Only found in one sample, sparse: Henningsvær 'Vi 1899,
0—50 m.
Distribution: On the west coast of Noi'way, rare and spai'se.
According to Cleve (L. 40, p. 99) widely distributed in the eastern
part of the Atlantic from the tropical zone to Iceland. Also known
from the Mediterranean. Is undoubtedly a southern (ti'opic and)
temperate oceanic form.
A. Steenstrnpii (Clap, et Lachm.) Dad.
Cfr. Jørgensen L. do, ]>. 15.
Also only once found, in small numbers: The Vest Fiord I,
'Vi 1899, 0 — 50 m.
Distrihution: On the west coast of Norway, rather rare.
Undoubtedly, a temperate, southern, oceanic form. According to
Cleve (L. 40, p. 100) the species is widely distributed across the
whole of the Atlantic, especially between 40" and 50" N. Also
known fi'om tlie ^reditorranoan.
A. ampin Jørg.
Jørgensen L. 9o, p. 17, \)\. 1, f. 4, a, b.
Protistplanktoii.
Vorv rare and scarce, only in 2 samples: llenninirsvær '7i
18!V.). ()— ISO ni.; the \'c>st Fionl. ' ■.. IS'.)!), n— -joo ni.
DixtrUndiou : Only known fnmi I lie west coast of Norway,
where it is very rare. I'robaMy a lcni|ieiate, oceanic species.
TiiitiiiiioitMiw Stein.
T. nitida Uraxdt.
Ukani.T 1.. l(i. p. "iS. pi. .-!. f. 1.
Very tVei|Mcnt. dl'ten nnnierons. Seems to iirel'er water of a
low salinity.
The species varies considerably. 1 have to some extent in tlie
tallies made a di.stinction for one form. viz. ntr. oniUs, which is,
however, more frequent than wonld appeal' from them.
Distribution: Further, only known from the Kava.jak Fiord,
Greenland, ilost probably an arctic, neritic species.
Var. oralis .Jokg. ii. var.
(Pl. XVIII, tig. 115).
The house is brimless, in the most distinguished form narrowed
towards the moutli. The lower part is evenly rounded off. The
greatest breadth of the house is a little above the middle.
A strong, compact covering of shining small paiticles on the
house, as in the main species.
This vai-iety is more frequent than appears from the tables,
as it is mostly included under the principal species.
Often forms may be found which are intermediate between
this one and the main species; such an one is illustrated by Beandt
1. c. As a rule, the principal species is very different in shape
from the variety, through a trace of a brim at the mouth, an
almost cylindrical upper part and a bluntly pointed lower part.
Forms without any trace of a brim at tlie mouth are. however, of
freijuent occurrence.
The Norwegian species seems generally to be somewhat smaller
than the Greenland one, about 70 ii in length.
Var. sinuata Brandt.
(PI. xvm, fig. 116).
Tintinnoyiils shmata Branbt Ij. 16, p. 58, pi. 3, fig. 2.
Considering that the species Tintlnnopsis nitida varies exceed-
ingly, I think that is hardly possible to look upon T. sinuata as
a distinct species. In the course of development both the spreading
brim at the mouth and the shape of the house vary considerably.
AVe have as extremes, on the one hand, rar. ovalis, without a brim,
01- with only a very indistinct one, and an evenly arched contour
in side view; on the other, var. sinuata, with a distinct brim and
a contour which is narrowed in the lower part and bluntly pointed
(at the end square).
The individual illustrated, which must undoubtedly be reckoned
as a Tintinnopsis sinuata Beandt, is not so conspicuously different
from T. nitida as Brandt's Jigure, but the characteristics are
plainly seen which are mentioned as separating between T. sinuata
and T. nitida. Intermediate forms between the one illustrated and
the principal form also occur.
Distrilndion : As the principal species. Individuals which
decidedly belong here were only seen in one of the samples:
Moskenstrommen, 'Vi 1899, 0—100 m.
T. caiupamila (Kurd.) Dad.
CIV. .louiiiiNsEN L. 90, p. 21 and p. 42.
Only in two samples and only singly, 1900: Tranodybet "/s,
0— (100 m. and the Skjærstad Fiord II -'/i, 0— IHO m.
Distribution: Frequent on the west coast of Norway, but
seldom numerous. Also known from the Mcditei'ranean, the North
Sea, Skagerack, the Baltic ami the r.erniudas. In August 190.3,
numerous in the English Cliannel (L. is. 1903—190-1, nr. 1).
According to Cleve, it is hai-dly found in the open sea. Undoubt-
edly a temperate, neritic species.
C'odonc'lla Hck.
C. ventricosa (C\.i
Lachm.) Fol.
Only once observed: Tranodybet --"A 1900, (j— (iOO m., rr.
Distribution: Neritic species, northern temperate. Probably
the southei'n form (from the Mediterranean) is different fi-om the
northern one.
C. lageiiula (Clap, et Lachm.) Entz. var. ovata .Jørg.
(Pi. xvm, fig. 117).
Is probably specifically different from the species which is
considered to be the main one.
Rare and scarce.
Distribution: Fi'cquent on the west coast of Noi'way, but
always in small numbers. Most probably a temperate form. The
principal species, which is very rare in the neighbourhood of Bergen,
is, according to Ci-eve (L. 40, p. 10.3) a tropical and southern
temperate oceanic form.
PtychocjlLs urniila (Ci.
Lachm.) Brandt.
Cfr. JøBGENSEN L. 90. p. 18.
The principal form (a major Jørc;. I. c.) not fie(|uent. ahvays
iu small numbers.
Distribution: More frequent on the west coast of Norway.
Neritic form, which appears to be less northerly than the foUomng.
V. minor Jouo.
•Jørgensen 1. c.^ p. 19, pi. 1, f. 9.
Frequent, sometimes numerous.
Distribution: Most probably a northern temperate and boreal,
neritic species. Is found all the year round, more or less numerous,
on the west coast of Norway.
T. digitalis Auriv.
P. Drygalskii Brandt L. 1(1 p. 59, pi. 3, f. 14. Cfr. Jør-
gensen L. 92, p. 17.
Very rare and scarce, 1899: The Vest Fiord I, '7i, 0—180 m.;
Ofoten II, V2, 0—100 m. and 250—200 m.; Rombaken, V2, 0—40
m.; Rombaken II, Vs, 0—100 m.; Tranodybet, '«A, 0—50 m.;
Henningsvær, -%, 0—280 m.; Hola, Svolvær, Vs, 0—150 m.
Distribution: Seems to be an arctic neritic and (boreal?)
oceanic form. Known from Greenland, the Labrador Current, Jan
Mayen and the sea between Jan Mayen and Tromso. The closely
related P. obtusa Brandt, which is considered bv Cleve also to
include P. Drijgalslii. is also an arctic form, which has been found
at several places near Spitzbei'gen and Greenland.
V. subarctica Jørg. n. var.
(PL XVIU, fig. 118).
The house is broadest at the foremost thickened ring, which
is very pi'ominent. The width at the second ring is a little less,
decreasing evenly and gradually to the third ring. Behind this, it
becomes quickly rounded off nearly spherically (though slightly
narrowed off conically nearest the last ring). The wall is very
much thickened at the foremost ring. The distance between this
and the next ring is equal to, or a little less than, the half of the
distance between the two last (so that the two foremost )ings ai'e
comparatively near each othei-).
Teeth small, about 36 — 40.
Length (of the individual illustrated) \)i> \>-, width of 1st ring
76 [i, of 2nd 71, of 3rd 56 \>..
The difference from P. aretica Brandt (L. 16, p. 60, pi. 3,
f. 17) is only slight. My form is smaller and is rather different
in appearance at the hinder part. The mouth is also quite different
and the teeth much smaller. On the other hand, there is a remark-
able agreement in the very prominent foremost I'ing and its distance
fi'om the second.
I dare not, at present, declare my form to be identical with
Brandt's, with which I am as yet too imperfectly acquainted.
Very rare, only found sparsely iu 6 samples: Lyngen I,
0—115 m., Lyngen II, 0—250 m.. Lyngen III, 0—50 m., "A
1899; Malangen, -7i 1899, 0-300 m.; Tranødybet, ^2 1899,
0—200 m.; the Midvær Fiord % 1900, 0—25 m.
Didrihution: The very closely allied P. aretica has been
found in Davis' Strait, the Labrador Current, near East Greenland
and in the sea west of Nowaja Zemlja (Cleve L. 40, p. 1 18).
Undoubtedly an arctic species, hardly native with us.
C.yttai'oey«'lis fol.
C. norveøcn (Dad.) Jørg.
Cfr. Jørgensen L. 9o, \). 28.
Only once found: Hola, Hvolva^i-, "/.', 1899, i-athei' numerous.
Slips easily through the net.
Distribution: Rather I'are, always in small numbers, on the
west coast of Noi'way. This form and tho.se closely allied to it,
C. gracilis (Brandt) and C', minuta (Brandt), are kno^\'n from
West and East Greenland, the Ijabrador Current, Jan Mayen,
Iceland, Baren Island and Spitzbergen. Arctic (and boreal?)
species. Its distribution is probably insufficiently known, as it is
so small that it only occasionally is retained by the net.
C. serrata (Møii.) Brandt.
(July onc.i^ found : Tnuiodybet, '-'-'A 1900, 0--600 m., vv.
Didiihntion: Fi'cquent on the west coast of Norway, in the
summer and autumn. Also found in the summer on the north
coasts of Norway (Tromsø, Aurivillius). According to Clevk (L.
40, p. 113) a southern noritie form, disti'ibutcd from the Cape of
Ciood Hope to Scotland.
C. denticulata (Ehrb.) Fol.
Cfr. Jørgensen L. 90. p. 31 and L. 92, p. 4 etc.
Many forms occurred, the most important of which are entered
in the tables. As a whole, the species was very frequent, often
numerous; only, at the peiiod of the diatom inflow, very scarce or
entirely absent in the outer districts.
Distribution: The majority of the numerous forms which belong
here seem to be oceanic, arctic and boreal. The species is widely
distributed over the northern part of the Atlantic, in the Arctic
Ocean and on the arctic and northern temperate coasts. Frequent
in the sea on the north coast of Scotland, August 1903 (L. 18,
1903—1904, nr. 1). According to Cleve (L. 40, p. 109) also in
Behrina' Sea.
a typica Jørg.
Jørgensen L. 90, p. 31, pi. 2, f. 13, 15.
This form, which is the most frequent on the west coast of
Norway, was not often found in the present material.
Distribution: Perhaps a neritic, northern temperate form.
Most frequent in the summer and autumn on the west coast of
Norway.
var, gigatitea (Brandt) Cleve.
Rare and scarce.
Distribution: Possibly a boreal (and arctic?) oceanic form.
Known from the northern part of the Atlantic to Greenland and
Spitzbergen. Also mentioned from the Labrador Current.
Tar. robusta Jørg.
Jørgensen L. 92, p. 13, pi. 3, f. 22.
Only once found: Kvænangen, "Vi 1899, 0 — 140 m.
Distrihution : Only found in the sea between Norway (Tromsø)
and Jan Mayen, in small numbers. Possibly boi'eal. Perhaps rar.
gigantea (Brandt) p.p. also belongs here.
var. suhrotiiiulata Jørg.
.Iøugensen L. 90, p. 34, pi. 2, figs. 20, 21.
Rare and scarce.
Distribution: Not so rare on the west coast of Norway in
the summer (1898). Possibly a neritic, northern temperate species.
rar. eylindrica Jørg.
Jørgensen L. 90, p. 33, pi. 2, figs. 17, 18.
Rather rare, iicvei' numci'ous.
JJistriliiilioir. Not rai'c on the west coast of Norway in the
suumuT anil autiuun. Possibly iiciitic, northern temperate species.
tar. elongata Jørg.
Jørgensen L. 92, p. 14, pi. 3, tigs. 23, 24.
Rather rare, almost always in small numbers.
Disiriliittion: Known from the sea between Tromsø and Jan
Mayen (numerous, 1898). Seems to be a boreal, oceanic form.
Protistplankli
var. subedentata Jone. n. vnr
(PI. XVIII, figs. 119, 120; 1.1. XIV, fij;
121).
The lioiisc as usual .soinewliat dilntcd a littlf lichiw tlic mouth.
.111(1 then sliiihtly, or imperceptibly, iiaiidw ini^. In the lowest V4
latiier ([uickly narrowing- lo a rather short tip. Thu side contour
here shows a louir, rather even arcli. Teeth rather small, about
.i.")— 3.S. may also be wantiuir. Areolcs as usual hcxayoiial, tliin-
walii'd. medium sized (about 2 'A- on 10 nl.
Tills variety is reckoned tog-ether witJi oc typica in the tables
for the first half of the year 1899. Its place is between that form
and r(tr. obtusangula (Ostenf.) Jørg. and C. edentata Er.\ndt,
most near the two latter; it is, however, so different from them
that it oug-Jit not to be considored rig-ht away the same as mr.
ohtu^mifjula.
The length of the tail tip as usual varies considerably. The
relation between length and breadth generally lies between 2.5
and 3 (the tail tip excluded).
Fig. 119 is a smaller, more divergent fonn.
Numerous and frequent, as a whole, in the present material,
the most frequent form of the species. Occurred also, though in
small numbers, during the diatom inflow. It is more frequent than
appears from the tables, as it was not entered separately from the
lirst, but is included under „Cyttaroe!/lis denticulata" .
Undcllai candata (Ostknp.) Cl.
Tiuttninis nniilnhis ( Istknfki,!) L. 1 l;j, p. 4:i7 (Coi). [J,uMla
2)dluriila .Jøec. I,. <)(), j). 41, pi. 1, (io-.s. 7, S.
Rather fret] nent, but always in small numbers.
/>istriliiitio)i: Tcmi)erate, oceanic .species, according to Clkve
(L. Hi. p. 1241 distributed far southwards in the warmer part of
the Atlaiific. Rare cm the we.st coa.st of Norwav-
I)i<-(.VO<>.VMta templiim IIck.
The, i)iiiicipal
around the mouth
0—50 ni., r.
ies, witii ■ a sing
the house, verv
c row of large windows
rai-c: Sen.jen -'/i 1899,
•ar. disticha .JoRO.
.Jørgensen Ij. 90, p. 4o.
With two rows of windows.
More frequent, in a good number of samples, but always scarce.
Distribution: Cleve's D. clegans Ehek. which also includes
the two forms mentioned, is widely distributed from the warmer part
of the Atlantic to beyond Iceland (Cleve J^. 40, p. 114). Accord-
ing to Cleve, also known from the Mediterranean, the Red Sea
and the Indian Ocean. Rare on the west coast of Norwav.
Errata et Addenda.
Pag. 96, col. 2, line 28, for T. decipiens Grun. read:
T. decipiens (Grin.).
Pag. 10.5, col. 1, after line 2 add
(Plate VII, fio'. 2(5).
Pag. 108. col. 1. before 11. E'ex'±ca-±n±ales add:
Tropidoneis parallela Jprg. n. sp.
(Plate Vir, fig. 16).
In the plankton tables Amphi2}rora parallela n. sp.
Shape of the cell in side view: Linear, or slightly oblong, not
constricted in the middle, narrowing off a little towards the rounded
end.s. Central nodule rather indistinct; terminal nodules, however,
very conspicuous.
Vahe: Linear-Lanceolate, ends subiostrate (truncate). Median
line straight, central. Central nodule small, terminal nodules close
to the ends.
The median part of the valve seems to form a rather high,
linear keel, about so broad as Vs of the valve.
Stnicfare: Fine transverse striæ, not distinctly punctate, 17 on
10 :j..
Dimensions: Length of the valve 67 — 70 'i-, breadth 12 i^.
Breadth of the cell (frustule) 18 \y..
This species resembles Amphoropsis recta Gkun. (Van Heueck
L. 89, p. 266, tig. 55) and Amphij^-ora plicata var.? suhplicata
C4run. (L. 48, p. 65, pi. V, fig. 88). It diifers from both in having
the frustules quite inconstricted in the middle. On the contrary,
the cell is often somewhat broader (higher) here. Besides, 1 have
never seen an asymmetiical valve, like that characteristic of Am-
phoropsis recta. I have, however, only once succeeded in getting a
valvar view of it (tig. 16 b), as in the preparations it is nearly
always found lying on its side.
Cleve refers (L. 24:,i).2H)AmphiprorajiHcata\fiv.'^sut)pUeata
Grun. as a variety to Amphoropsis recta (Tn/pidoncis recta Cl.)
without mentioning the shape of the valve.
The above species seems to be a true plankton form. It has
very thin (slightly siliceous) valves which easily are deformed on
being ignited on the cover-glass. It generally occurs solitary or by
twos, very seldom forming a short chain of some few individuals.
On the whole rare and sparse, only observed during the
diatom inflow in liJOO: Høla, Svolvær, -"/■■„ 0—140 m.; Østnes-
fjord 1 and III, "Vs, 0—25 and 0—1.30 m.; the Vestfjord, =7:i,
0—25 m.; the Skjerstadfjord IV, V4, 0— 330 m., and XII, 0—500
m.; the Seivaagen, V*, 0—20 m.; the Saltenfjord II, ^4, 0—50 m.;
the Foldenfjord I, "A, 0—100 m. Also in P.aront's Sea, 71° 48' n.,
49" 38' e., S/S Heimdal ^'/s 1900.
Undoubtedly an arctic species.
Page 100, add:
C. scolopendra Cl.
As endocysts, resembling those of C', cinctus, are found, the
older name for the latter species, C incurvus Bail., cannot be used.
Very rare and sparse: Sea off Inge, ^V4 1899, 0—300 ra.; the
Porsangerfjord, -V4 1899, 0—75 in.
Distribution: More frequent on the west coast of Norway.
According to Cleve a northern (boreal) neritic species. Only once
(in October 190(>) found near the Pærø Isles. (Ostenfeld).
Page 105, after Naviculeæ add:
Pinnnlaria quadratarea (A. Schm.) Cl.
Cl. L. 25. p. 95. Naricnla quadratarea A. Schji. L. 127,
p. 90, pi. II, f. 2(;. N. pinnularia Cl. L. 28, p. 224, pi. IV,
fs. 1—2.
Occui's only accidentally. No true planktonform, but rather
frequent in bottom samples from both the west and the north coast
of Norway.
Page 99, before B. stijUformis, add:
R. obtusa Hens.
Hensen L. 87, p. 86, pi. V, f. 41. E. idata rar. truncafa
Gran L. 64, p. 6, pi. IV, f. 67.
Not always easy to disthiguish from B. aliita (cfr. Ostenfeld
L. 116, p. 569).
Very rare and sparse, only in 3 samples: Stene in Bø, '%
1899, 0 m.; the Porsangerfjord, ^'A 1899, 0—75 m. and 200—100 m.
Distribution: According to Cleve, Gban and Ostenfeld a
boi'eal oceanic species, occasionally numerous round the Færøes,
Iceland and in the Norwegian Ocean, up to the north of Spitz-
bergen. Is wanting on the west coast of Norway (1898). In large
numbers in arctic water between Tromsø and Jan Mayen 1897,
also numerous round Jan Mayen 1897—1898, and near Spitzbergen
1899—1900 (Jørgensen L. 92). Seems to me to be an arctic
(oceanic) rather than a boreal species.
Page 104, col. 1, line 10, for PI. VI read PI. VIL
Pag-e 105, col. 1, hue 2, add: (Piate vii. tio-. at;).
Page 109, col. 1, line 36, for (Dies.) Clap, et Lachm. read
(Clap, et Lachm.) Dies.
Pag. 119, col. 1, line 49, for SO read 86.
For Midva-rfjord everywhere read ilisvanfjord.
Bibliography.
1. L. <il. pp. 4—5.
•2. L. 112, p. (Jo.
3. L. 70, pp. 112— IIG.
4. ArKiYiLLirs, C. W. S., Das Plankton der liaftins Bay und
Davis' Strait. Upsala 1S96. Festskrift for Lilljeborg, p. 181.
5. The same, Vergleichende thiergeographische Untersuchungen
liber die Plankton-Fauna des Skageraks. Kongl. Sv. Vetensk.
Akad. Handl., vol. 30, no. 3. Stockholm 1898.
8. Bailey, I. W., New Species of Diatomaceæ. Quart. Journ.
of Microsc. Sc, vol. 3. London 1855.
9. The same, On Microscopic Forms in the Sea of Kamtsehatka.
Americ. Journ. of Sc. and Arts, (second series) vol. 22, 1856.
12. BoEGERT, A., Vorberieht iiber einige Phaeodarien-Familien
der Plankton-Expedition. Reisebeschreibung der Plankton-
Expedition, p. 184. Kiel und Leipzig 1892.
13. The same. Die tripyleen Radiolarien des Mittehiioeres. Mit-
theilungen aus der Zoologischen Station zu Neapel, vol. 14,
1901.
14. The same, Die nordischen Tripyleen-Arten. Nordisches Plank-
ton, hrsg. von Prof. Dr. K. Brandt, XV. Kiel und Leipzig,
1901.
K;. Bkaxdt, K., Die Tintinnen. Zoologisehe Ergebnisse der von
der Gesellschaft filr Erdkunde zu Berlin unter Leitung Dr.
VON Deygalski's ausgesandten Gronlandsexpedition nach Dr.
Vanhoffens Sammlungen bearbeitet. Bibliotheca Zoologica,
Heft 20, Lfg. 2. 1896.
18. Bulletin des resultats acquis pendant les courses périodiques
public par le bureau du conseil avec I'assistance de M.
Knudsen. Conseil permanent international pour I'exploration
de la mer. Amiée 1902—1903, nos. 1—4; 1903—1904, no. 1.
19. BuTscHLi, O., Protozoa. Abtheil. I— IIL Dr. H. G. Bkonn's
Klassen und Ordnungen des Thierrcichs, Bd. I.
52. Cleve, p. T., On Diatoms from the Arctic Sea. Bih. till
Kongl. Sv. Vetensk. Ak. Handl., vol. 1, no. 13. Stock-
holm 1873.
li — 25. The same, Sj'nopsis of the naviculoid diatoms. Kongl.
Sv. Vetensk. Ak. Handl., I vol. 25, II vol. 27. Stockholm
1893—96.
26. The same, Diatoms from Baftins Bay and Davis Strait, liih.
till Kongl. Sv. Vetensk. Ak. Handl., vol. 22, III, no. 4.
n. The same, A Treatise on the Phytoplankton of the Atlantic
and its Tributaries and on the Periodical Changes of the
Plankton of Skagerak. Upsala 1897.
18. The same. Svenska och Norska Diatoméer. Ofvers. af Kongl.
Sv. Vet. Ak. Fcirh. Stockholm 1868.
The same, Plankton collected by the S\vcdish Expedition to
Spitzbergen in 1898. Kongl. Sv. Vetensk. Ak. Handl., vol.
32, no. 3. 1899.
The same, Notes on some Atlantic IManktoii-Organisms. Kongl.
Sv. Vetensk. Ak. Handl., vol. 34, no. 1. Stockholm 1900.
The same, The seasonal distribution of Atlantic i)lankton
organisms. Gøteborg 1901.
The same. Diatoms, collected during the Expedition of the
Vega. Vega-Expeditionens vetenskapliga iagttagelser, vol. III.
Stockholm 1883.
The same. Report on the Phyto-Plankton collected on the
Expedition of H. M. S. «Research", 1896. 15th annual
Report of the Fishery Board of Scotland, part III, no. X.
Cleve, P. T. and Grunow, A., Beitrage zur Keinitniss der
ai-ktischen Diatomeen. Kongl. Sv. Vetensk. Ak. Hand!., vol.
17, no. 2. Stockholm 1880.
De Toni, I. B., Sylloge Algarum. ls94.
Ehuenberg, C. G., in Monatsber. d. k. piouss. .\k. d. Wiss.
zu Berlin, 1861 (p. 301).
The same, in Monatsber. d. k. pi-euss. Ak. d. Wiss. zu Iterliii.
1843 (p. 270).
Gourket, p., Sur les Peridiniens du Golfe de Maiscille.
Annal, du Musée d'hist. natur, de Marseille, Zool., vol. I,
no. 8. Marseille 1883.
Gran, H. H., Diatomaceæ, Silicottagellata og Ciliotlagellata.
Den norske Nordhavsexpedition 187(i — 78. Botanik. Kri-
stiania 1897.
The same, Bacillariaceen aus dem kleinen Karajaktjord.
Bibliotheca botanica, heft 42.
The same, Hydrographic-biological Studies of the North
Atlantic Ocean and the Coast of Nordland. Repoi-t on
Norwegian Fishery- and Marine-Investigations, vol. 1, 1900,
no. 5.
The same, Bemorkungen iibcr oinigc Planktondiatomeen. Nyt
Magazin for Naturvidcnskabei-ne, vol. 38, h. 2. Kristiania
1900.
The same, Ueber die V^erbreitung einiger wichtiger Planktou-
forraen im Nordmeere. Petermanns Mittheilungen, Bd. 47,
p. 79.
The same, Das Plankton des Norweg-ischeu Nordmeeres von
biologischen und hydrographischen Gesichtspunkten behandelt.
Report on Norwegian Fishery- and Marine-Investigations, vol.
II, 1902, no. 5. Bergen 1902.
Gkeenleaf, r. C, On a new species of Nitzschia. Pi-oceed.
of Boston Soc. Nat. Hist. 1865, p. 107. Boston 1865.
Jørge
74. Geegory, w. M. D., On new forms of marine Diatomaceæ
found in the Firth of Clyde and in Loch Fyne. Transact,
of the Royal Hoe. of Edinburgh, vol. 21. Edinburgh 1857.
75. The same, On the Post-Tertiaiy Diatomaceous Sand of Glen-
shira, part II. Transact, of the Microsc. Soc. of London,
vol. V, n. s., p. 67. London 1857.
83. Grunoav, A., Die Diatomeen von Franz Josefs Land. Denk-
schriften d. math.-naturw. Classe d. kaiserlich. Akad. d.
Wissenscli. Wien 18S4.
84. Haeckel, E., Die Radiolarien. Berlin 1862.
86. The same. Report on the Radiolaria collected by H. M. S.
Challengek. Report on the scientific results of the exploring
voyage of H. M. S. Challengek during the years 1873—76,
vol. 18.
87. Hekskx, V., Uebei' die Hestimmuug des Planktons. 5ter
Bericht d. Kommission zm- wissensch. Untersuchung d.
deutschen Meere. Berlin 1887.
88. Heurck, H. van, Synopsis des Diatomées de Belgique.
Anvers 1885.
89. The same, Traité des Diatomées. Anvers 1899.
90. Jørgensen, E., Ueber die Tintimiodeen der norwegischen
Westkuste. Bergens Museums Aarbog 1899, no. II.
91. The same, Protophyten und Protozoen im Plankton aus der
norwegischen Wcstkiiste. Bergens Museums Aarbog 1899,
no. VI.
The same, Protistenplankton aus dem Nordmcero in den Jahren
1897—1900. Bergens Museums Aarbog 1900, no. VI.
Murray. J., Report on the scientific results of the exploring
voyage of H. M. S. Challenger 1873—76, vol. I: Narra-
tive of the cruize, first part. London 1885.
110. NoRDQUisT, 0., Bidrag till kannedomen om Bottniska N'ikens
och Norra OstersjOns evertebratfauna. Meddel, af Societ.
p. Fauna et Flora Fennica, 17. Helsingfors 1890.
111. Ostenfeld, C, lagttagelser over Overfladevandets Tempei'atur,
Saltholdighed og Plankton paa islandske og grønlandske Skibs-
router i 1898, bearbeidede af Martin Knudsen og C. Osten-
FELD. Kjøbenhavn 1899.
112. The same, lagttagelser over Overfladevandets Temperatur,
Saltholdighed og Plankton paa islandske og grønlandske Skibs-
router i 1899. bearbeidede af Martin Knudsen og C. Osten-
KKLi). Kjøbeidiavn 1900.
114. The same. lagttagelser over Plankton-Diatomeer. Nyt Magazin
foi' Xalurvidenskaberne, vol. 39. Kristiania 1901.
116. Tlic same, Phytoplankton from the sea around the Færøes.
1900. P.otany of the Færøes, II. Copenhagen 1903.
92.
106.
117. The same and Schmidt, Johs., Plankton fra det Røde Hav
og Adenbugten (Plankton from the Red Sea and the Gulf of
Aden). Yidenskabelige Meddelelser fra den naturhist. Fore-
ning i Kjøbenhavn, 1901.
118. Peeagallo, H., Monographic du genre Pleurosigma. Le
Diatomiste 1890—91.
119. Pettersson, O. and Ekman, G., Die hydrographischen Ver-
haltnisse der oberen Wasserschichten des nOrdlichen Nord-
meeres zwisehen Spitzbergen, Grønland und der norwegischen
Kuste in den Jahren 1896 u. 1897. Bih. till Kongl. Sv.
Veteusk. Ak. Handl, vol. 23, II, no. 4. Stockholm 1898.
123. Pritchakd. a., A History of Infusoria. London 1861.
124. Rattray, John, A revision of the genus Coscinodiscus Ehrb.
and of some aUied genera. Proceed. Royal Soc. of Edinburgh,
vol. XVI, p. 449. Edinburgh 1890.
125. The'same, A revision of the genus Actinocyclus Ehrb. Journ.
of (^ueck. Microsc. Club. London 1890.
126. Roper, F. C. S., Notes on some New Species and ^'al•ieties
of British Marine Diatomaceæ. Quart, .louin. of Micr. Sc,
vol. 6, p. 21.
127. Schmidt, A., Die in den Grundproben dei' Nordseefahrt 1872
enthaltenen Diatomaceen. Jahresbericht d. Comraiss. z. wis-
sensch. Untersuchung d. deutschen Meere in Kiel fiir die
Jahre 1872 — 73, IV.
128. The same, Atlas der Diatomaceenkunde. Aschcrsleben 1874
— 1904.
129. Schrøder, Bruno, Das Phytoplankton des Golfes von Neapel
nebst vergleichenden Ausblicken auf das des atlautischen
Oceans. Mittheilungen aus der zoologischen Station zu Neapcl.
vol. 14. Berhn 1900.
130. Schutt. f., Das Pflanzenleben der Hochscc. Ergebnisse d.
Plankton-Expedition d. Humboldt-Stiftung, vol. LA. Kiel and
Leipzig 1892.
134. Smith, W., Synopsis of the i'.ritisli Diatouiacfa'. London
1853—56.
135. Stein, F. von, Der Organismus der Infusionstiiiere, lille
Abtheilung. Leipzig 1878—83.
137. Wallich, G. C, On the siliceous organisms found in tlie
digestive cavities of the Salpæ. Ti-ansact. of the Microscop.
Soc. of London, vol. VIII, n. s., p. 36. London 1860.
138. 0STRUP, E., Marine Diatoraéer fra Østgrønland. Meddelelser
om Grønland, Hefte 18, p. 395. Kjobenhavn 1896.
139. The same, Kyst-Diatoméer fra Grønland. Meddelelser om
Grønland, hefte 15. p. 305. Kjobenhavn 1N9S.
Index
(not including the tables).
122
A.anthOLOrys luiiliullifeia HCK. (pi. XVIII, «if. 107) 137
Aclinantliew 105
Achnanthes hijperhnyea Gru.n. (pi. VIII. tig. 28) lO.o, 107
— sp. (pi. VII, fig. 26) 105
— tæniata Grun. (pi. VIU, fig. 27) 105
Aitinocyclus crasstts V. H 95
— Ehrenbevgii Ralfs 95
— Ealfsii (W. Sii.) Ealfs 95
— sparmis (Greg.) Battr 95
— ^ subocellalus (GRnN.) Eatte 95
— subtilis (Greg.) Ralfs 95
Aitinomma bot-ealis Cl. = Chromyechinus b 98
Aotinoptychus undulatus (Bail.?) Ealfs 98
Amphimelissa setosa (Cl.) Jøeq. (pl. XVUI, fig. 109) 127, 128, 136
Aniphiproia parallela J0RG., ^ Tropidoneis p 146
Amphorella ampla J0EG 142
— quadrilineata (Clap, et Lachm.) Jørg 142
— Steenstnipii (Clap, et Lachm.) Dad 142
Androcyclas J0RO 127, 128
amblyceplialis (Jørg.) Jørg. (pl. XVU, figs. 94—97) 139
— gamphonycha (Jørg.) Jøeg. (pl. XVII, figs. 92—93). 127, 128, 139
Abteiompbalus linptaetis (Bréb.) Ralks 98
Astrosphærida Hck 116
Auliscus sculptiis (W. Sm.) Ealfs 98
Auricula comple.xa (Greg.) De T 108
Bacillariaxes 90
Bacillaiia socialis Greg 103
Bacterosira fragilis (Gran) Gran 99
Beroetto mein Cl., = Cadium m 142
Biddiilpbia auiita (Lyngb.) Beéb 99
— luobiliensis Bail 99
Kiddalphieæ 99
Bolryopyle stiosa Cl., = Amphimelissa s.
Cadjida Borg 142
Cadium mel.» (Cl.) Borg. (pl XVIII. fig. 113) 142
Campylacantlia Jørg 124, 125, 127. 128
— cladopliora Jørg. n. sp. (pl. XII. fig. 47) 12H
Campylodiscus angulaiis Greg 104
— Balfsii W. Sm 104
— Thuietii Bréb 104
Caiinosphæra geometiica Borg 140
— lepta JØRG. (pl. XVIII, fig. 110) 141
Caniiosphivrida Hck 140
CeTa-trlcae SchCtt 90
Ceratiuin aicticum (Ehrb.) Cl 1
— arcuntum Vanh. = bucephalum 1
— arietinum = bucephalum v. heterocampta Jøna 1
^ — balticum (Schutt), = tripos a 1
— bucephalum (Cl.) Cl 1
— fuica (Ehrb.) Dim 1
— fiisus (Ehrb.) Dij 1
Ceiatium heterncaniptum, = bucephalum var III
— Iwrridum 111. \\\i
~ intermedium (Jørg.) Jørg Ill
— lineatum (Ehrb.) Cl 113
— longipes (Bail.) Cl 112
— macroceros (Ehrb.) Or 111
— scoticum (Schott) 111
— tergesdnmn (Schijtt) 112
— tripos (0. F. Mull.) Nitzsch 111
Ceratospyris byperborea Jørg. n. sp. (pl. XIII, fig. 49) .... 125, 127, 128, 130
Chaetoeereæ 99
Chcetoceros atlanticus Cl 100
— borealis Bail, et var 100
— brevis ScHtJTT 101
— constrictus Gran 101
— contortus ScHiiTT 101
— convolutus Castr 1 00
— crioi)hilus Castr 100
— curvisetus Cl 101
— danicus Cl 100
— dehilis Cl 10!
— decipiens Cl 100
— densus Cl. et var 100
— diadema (Ehrb.) Gran 101
— furcellatus Cl 10!
— laciniosus Schutt 101
— Schiittii Cl 101
— scolopendra Cl 1 46
— similis Cl 101
— socialis Laød 102
— teres Cl 100
— Willei Gran 101
CkalUnycna BIleh., = Protocystis.
Challengei-ida UO
Challengeron armatum Borg. (pl. XVIH, flg. U2) 141
— Chamieri (Murr.) Hck. (pl. XVHI. fig. 111) 141
— iliodon HcK. (= heteracanthum Jørg. and NathorM Cl) 141
— Willeinoesii Hck., = armatum Borg 141
Chromyechinus boreaUs (Cl.) JØRG. (pl. VHI. fig. 35; pl. IX, figs. 36—37) 114, 117
Chromijomma boreale (Cl.) Jørg., = Chromyechinus b.
Cladoscenium Hck ., 125. 127 128
— linibatum Jt>rg. n. sp. (pl. XV, fig. 74) 134
— tricolpium (Hck.) Jøbg. (pl. XV, figs. 71—73) 134
Chathrocyclas craspedota (Jørg.) Jørg. (pl. XVII, figs. 98—100). 127, 128, 139
Cooooneideæ 104
Cocconeis costata Greg 104
— pinnata Greg 104
— scutellum Ehrb 104
(Jodonella lagenula (Clap, et Lachm.) Entz. et var. (pl. XXIII. fig. 117)... 143
— veutricosa (Clap, et Lachm.) Fol 143
Corethroli hystri.v Hens 100
Coscinodi^ceæ 90
150
E. Jørgensen.
pag-
Coscinodiscus bioculatus Geun 91, 92
— centralis Ehrb., Ratt. (pl. VI, fig. 1) 91, 93
— concinnus W. Sm 91, 93
— curvatulus Geun 91, 92, 97
— decipiens Gkun., = Thalassiosira d 91, 96
— excentricus Ehrb 91, 92
— h-yopMlus Geun., = Thalassiosira k.
— lineatus Ehrb. et var 91, 92
— nitidus Greg 91, 9.5
— ocuhis iridis 93, 9-t
— polyaeanthus Grcn. et var 92
— radiatus Ehrb 91, 92
— stellaris Eop 91. 92
— subbuUiens JøRG. n. sp. (pi. VI, fig. 2) 91, 94
— symholophorus Grun 92
Coscinosira polychorda (Gran) Gran 97
Cnbosphærida Hck lU
Cyttarocylis denticulata (Ehrb.) Eol. et var (pl. XIV, fig. 121 ; pl. XVIII,
figs. 119-120) 144, 14.5
— gigantea Brandt, = denticulata var.
— norvegioa (Dad.) Jørg 144
— serrata (Mob.) Brandt 144
Detonula confervacea (Cl.) Gran 99
Diatomaceæ, = Bacillarlales.
Diotyoceras acauthicum JØRG. (pl. XVH-XVIII, fig. 101) 127, 128, 140
— xiphephoruni JøRG 127, 128, 140
Dictyocha fibula Ehrb 114
Dictyocircus clatliratus Jørg. n. sp. (pl. XIU, fig. 48) . 125, 127, 128, 129, 130
Dictyocysta templum Hck. et var 145
Diotyophimus Clevei Jørg 127, 128, 137, 138
— graeilipes Cl., = Clevei.
histricosus Jørg. n. sp. (pl. XVI, fig. 89) 138
Dicyrtida Hck 135
Dinoflagellata 108
Dinopliy.sis acuminata Clap, et Lachm,, Jørg 108
— acuta Ehrb.. Jøro 108
— homunoulus Stein 108
— Michaelis, = rotundata.
— norvegioa Clap, et Lachm., Jørg 108
— rotundata Clap. et Lachm 108
— Vanhoffeni Ostenf., = acuminata.
Diplopsalis lenticula Bergh 109
Distephanus speculum (Eheb.) Stohr 114
Ditylium Brightwellii (West.) Grun 99
Drymyomma elegans Jørg. (pl. VIII, fig. 34) 114, 117
Kchinomma HcK 114, 1 l(i
Kchinomma leptodermum Jørg. (pl. VIJI, fig. 33) 1 Ki
— trinacrium HcK 1 1 1>
Eucampia groenlandica Cl. (pl. VI, fig. 8) 99
Euetjrtidium seriatum Jørg., = Stichoconjs s.
Euodia gibba Bail 95
Eapodii^ceæ 98
Eusceniuni corynepliorum Jøeg. (pl. XV, fig. 70) 133
— tricolpium Hck., = Cladoscenium t.
Flagellata 113
I'ragilaria cylindrus Grun. (pl. VI, fig. 9) 102
islandica Grun. (pl. VI, fig. 10) 102
— oceanica Cl 102
Gazelletta pentapodiuni Jøro 142
Glypbode.smis Williamsoni (W. Sm.) Grtjn 102
Gonosphæra primordialis Jørg. n. sp. (pl. XIV, figs. 64—68) 129, 1.32, 133
Gonyaulax spinifera (Glap. et Lachm.) Dies 109
Grammatophora islandica Ehrb 102
— oceanica Ehrb 102
Gynmaster pentasterias (EhrB.) Schutt 11.3
Halicalyptra cornuta Bail 139
Halosphæra minor Ostenf., = viridis 113
— viridis Schmitz 113
TTpk\ osgla-geiraoeae 113
Helotholus histricosa Jørg. n. sp. (pl. XVI, iigs. 86—88) 127, 128, 137
pag-
Hemidiscus ameiformis Wall., = Euodia gibba.
Hexacontium enthacanthum Jøeg. (pl. VIII, fig. 30) 114, 115
— pachydermum Jøeg. (pl. VIII, fig. 31) 114, 115
Seæadoras borealis Cl., = Rhizoplegma h.
Hyalodiscus scoticus (KtJTz.) Geun 98
— .stelliger Bail 98
— subtilis Bail 98
Larcospira minor (Jøeg.) Jørg 114, 121
Lauderia confervacea Cl., = Detonula c.
— fragilis Gean, = Bacterosira f.
— glacialis (Grun.) Gran, = Porosira g.
Leprotintinnus bottnicus (Nordq.) Jørg., = — jielliicidas.
— pellucidus (Cl.) Jørg. (pl. XVIH, fig. 114) 142
Libellus septentrionalis Oeste., = Stauroneis s.
Litharachnium tentorium Hck. (pl. XVI, figs. 90—91) 138
L.ithelida Hck 121
Lithelius minor Jørg., = Larcospira m.
— spiralis Jørg 121
Lithomelissa hystrix Jørg. (pl. XVI, fig. 85) 136
— laticeps Jørg. n. sp. (pl. XVI, fig. 84) 1 36
— setosa Jørg. et var. (pl. XVI, figs. 81—83: pl. XVIII, fig. 108 126
127, 128, 135
Lithomitra australis ('l 140
Medusetta arcifera Jørg 142
— parthenopæa Borg 1 42
Mednsettida Hck 142
Ilt'lOKirow 96
Moiiooyrtida Hck 125, 131
ISTasselXairla 122
Navicula directa Kalfs 105
— frigida Grun. (pl. VII, fig. 21) 105
— kariana Geun 105
— pelagica Cl. (pl. VH, fig. 23) 105
— sepienirionalis Oestr 105, 106
— Vanbiiffeni Gran (pl. VH, fig. 22) lOo, 106
JTavienleæ 105
Nitzschia angularis W. Sm. et var. (pl. VI, fig. 14) 104
— arctica Cl. (pl. VII, fig. 15) 101
~ bilobata W. Sm Iii3
— closterlum (Ehrb.) W. Sm 104
— delicatissima Cl 103
— fraiidulenta Cl 1 03
— frigida Geun 103
— hybrida Geon. (pl. VI, fig. 12) 103
— lanceolata W. Sm. et var. (pl. VI, fig. 13) 104
— longissima (Bréb.) Ralfs 104
— Mitchelliana Geeenl 1 ut
— recta Jørg., = arctica Cl.
— seriata ('l 1 03
— spathulata Bréb Io4
NitKseliiea' Kt.i
Orhi/u/lr .iilnsiijh' JoRO., = Pltorticium pylouium.
Orllinsini <ui,iidal(t Oreg. = Thalassiosira decipiens.
Oxytiixnni diploi'onns Stein 109
Paralia sulcata (Eurb.) Cl 98
Fe-n -n a-tae Schutt 102
I>©3ric3.iixial©s 1 OS
Peridinium conicum (Gran) Ostenf. et Schm 110
— depressuni Bail 1 09
— divergens Ehrb 109
Icnticularc (Errb.) Jørg., = — divergens.
— Michaelis Ehrb., = — conicum (Gran).
— Michaelis Stein, = — Steinii Jøeg.
— oceanicum Vanhofs 1 09
— ovatum (Pouch.) Schutt Ill
— ))alliduni Ostenf 1 1<>
— pedunculatum Schutt. (pl. VIII, fig. 29) 110
— pelluoidum Ostenf 110
— pentagonum Gran 110
— Steinii Jørg 111
Bibliography.
Peridiniuiii liL^tiiliim Stein et var 1 1 1
I'l'iidium hi/sfyU- JoRu., = Phoniiacantha li.
intriiatum Cl 131
lajtim Cl l;tl, 132
loiifjispimim Jokg. (pi. XV, tiRs. 75— 7!l: pi. XVI. fig. 80) 12«, 127
128, 135
iiiiimtum ('L 135
J'rrijiUrta iutricnta Joro., = Plectacantha oikiskns.
riiæooystis rouohetii (Har.) Lagerh 113
:Plieeo(ia.3ria 140
Phoniiacantha liystrix (Jørg.) Jøro. (pl. XIV, figs. 69—63). 125, 127, 128, 132
Phort iciiim pylonium (HckV) Cl. (pl. X— XI, figs. 42—45) 114, 120
Piiinularia qiiadratarea A. SCHM 146
lM.iu:iacaiitlia ai-acliiioides Clap, et Lacm 123, 127, 129
Plai£ioi;ranini(>æ 102
Plngonida 129
Plectacantha oikiskos Jørg. n. nom (pl. XIII, figs. 50— .57) 124, ]2(), 127, 128, 131
— trichoides Jørg. n. sp. (pl. XIU, fig. 58) 132
Pleotanida Hck 129
Plectauiiiw simpler Cl., = Protosceniniii s.
Plectoidra Hck 129
Plcctophora atnchiwides Hck., = Plagiacdntha a.
Pleuiosigma affine Grun., = Normarmi Ralfs.
— angulatum (Quek.) W. Sm 107
— balticum (Ehrb.) "W. Sm 107
— delicatulum W. Sm. et var. (pl. Vil, tig. 18) 107
— elongntum W. Sm 107
— fallajc (Gron.) Perao 107
— fasciola (Ehrb.) W. Sm 108
— forniosmn W. Sm 107
— naviculaceum Bkéb 108
— Normanni Ealfs 107
— Spencei i W. Sm. et vav 107
— Stuxbergi Cl 107
— tenerum Jøhg. n. sp. (pl. VII, fig. 17) 107
— tenulrostre Gruk. (pl. VII, fig. 20) 108
— tenuissimum TV. Sm. et var. (pl. VH, fig. 19) 108
Poilolanipas palmipes Stein 109
Podnsira cjlncialis (Grcn.) Cl., = Porosira g.
Porodii^cida Hck 118
Poiosira glacialis (Grcn.) Jørg. (pl. VI, fig. 7) 97
Proroeentraocæ Stein 108
Prorocentrum niicans Ebeb 108
Protoceratium reticulatum (Clap, et Lachm.) Bctschli 109
Protocystis Harstoni (McRK.) Borg 141
— tridens (Hck.) Borg 141
— -xiphodon (Hck.) Borg 141
Protoscenium simplex (Cl.) Jørg. (pl. XV, fig. (>9) 12t), 127, 128, 133
Pterocorys amblycephalis Jørg., ^ Androcyclas a.
— gamphonycha Jørg., = Androcyclas g.
Pteroscenium 127, 134
Pterosperma dictyon (Jørg.) Ostenf 113
— M.ihii f.TORG ) Ostenf 113
— Vanli.'.ftVni (JøRG.) Ostenf 113
IPterosijenacLa-taceæ 113
Pterosphæia Jøbg., = Pterosperma.
PtychocyUs aatta Brandt, = — urnida.
— arctica Brandt 144
— Di-ygahVii Brandt, = — urmda var.
— obhisa Bran-dt 143
— urnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt et var. (pl. XVIII, fig. 118) 143, 144
Pylonida Hck 120
Pyrophacus horologiuni Stein 109
Eadiolaria 114
Radiosphæra auacantliica JøRO. n. sp. (pl. XVII, fig. 105 -KW) 122
Rhabdiinema adriaticum KiJTZ 103
arcuatuni (Lynob.) Kutz 103
— niinutum KiJTz [ 03
Rhizoplegnia boreale (Cl.) Jørg. (pl. IX— X, fig. 38) 114, 118
Rhizosolenia alata Brightw 09
— obtusa Hens 141;
— seniispina Hens 99
— sctigera Brightw |oo
Shn.hsoli CL 99
— stylirmiiiis BuuniTW 99
Rhoicosigma arcticinn Cl [og
Roperia tessellata (Kop.) Grun 98
Sceletonema costatum (Grev.) Cl 91^
Scliizonema Grevillei Afi 107
IMoiiiaiitida Hck 129
Silicof lagellata 113
Sorolarcu.s circunife.itus Jørg., = titreblacantha c.
Sstpongodiscida Hck i^o
Spoiigodiscus favns Ehkb 114, |y()
Sx>TJ-Tn ellajTia 114
Stauroneis Grani Jøro. n. sjj. (]>!. VII, fig. 25) 107
— pellucida Cl 107
— septontrionalis Gbun. (pl. VU, fig. 24) 106
$$t('|»liaiiida Hck 1 29
8teplioidea Hck 129
Stichocorys seriata (.Jørg.) Jørg. (pl. XVIU, figs. 102—104) 127, 128, 140
Streblacantha circumtexta (Jørg.) Jøeg. (pl. XI— XU, fig. 46) 114, 121
$!itrebloiiida Hck 121
Striatella unipunctata (Lyngb.) Ao 103
Stylodictya Ehrb II4, 1I8
— aculeata Jørg. n. sp. (pl. X, fig. 41) 119
— aspeva Jørg 1 20
— tenuispina .Iøkg. (pl. X, fig. .39) 118
— validispina Jørg. (p). X, fig. 40) 119
Surirella fastnesa Ehrb 104
— lata W. Sm 104
!§inrirelleæ 104
Synedrcæ I02
Tetrapylonlum Clevei Jørg., = Phorticium pijlonium.
Thalassiosira biocidata (Gritn.) Ostenf., = Coscinodisais b.
— Clevei Gran., = — hyalina.
— decipiens (Grun.) Jørg. (pl. VI, fig. 3) 91, 96
— gelatinosa Hens., = — decipiens.
— gravida Cl. (pl. VI, fig. 4) 9(i
— hyalina (Grun.) Gran (pl. VI, fig. 5) 96
— kr\ophila (Grun.) Jøro. (pl. VI, fig. 6) 96
— Nordenskioldii Cl 96
Thalassiothrix Frauenfeldii et var 102
— longissima Cl. et Grun 102
— nitzschioides Grun. et var (pl. VI, fig. 11) 102
Theocalyptra aaspedota Jøro., = Clathrocyclas c.
Tin-txi-i -n odea 142
Tintinnopsis campanula (Ehkb.) Uad 143
— nitida Brandt et var. (pl. XVIU, figs. 115—116) 143
— sinuata Brandt, = — nitida var.
Tintinnus acuniinatus Clap, et Lachm. et var 142
Tripylea, = Pliæodaria 140
Tropidoneis parallela JORO. u. sp. (pl. VII, fig. 16) 146
Undella caudata (Ostenf.) Cr 145
Zygospyrida Hck 130
III. BOTTOM-LIFE,
NOTES.
Wlien dredgings have been made, soundings, both at the start and finish of the haul, have generally been taken. So that
when, for instance, Oxsund 450— «30 m. is noted, it is to be understood that the deptii was 630 m. where the dredge was thrown
out. and 450 ni. where the dredging was ended.
A. Results of Dreckiiiiis.
a. Dredging stations. 1899—1900.
Dept in
metres
Temperature
of the bottom
layer
C
Salinity of
the bottom
layer
«/oo
1900
^/3
Henniugsværstrønimen . . .
Liland, Østnesfjord
Langstrand
Skroven — Guldbrandsøeme
Brettpsnes— Skroven
Mouth of Eaftsund
Åt Ditjermulen
^sund
Jlorfsund I
JIoi tsund II
Mortsund III
Moskenstrømnien I
Moskenstroninien II
Kirkf jord I
Kiikfi.ird II
Kirkljonl III
Kivkljord IV
Reine I
Ure I
Henningsvær I
Ei-iværflaket
Ogsf jord I
Tranodybet
Tranodybet
Kanstadf jord, inside the ridge
Kanstadf,]ord,outsidetberidge
Eosthavet
Eøst I
Eøst II
Enst II
Tysfjord I
Stene
Eeine
Moskensti-ømmen
Gaukværø
Malangenf jord
Malangen II
Malangen Ul
Stonnesbotn
Kvænangen II
Jokplfjord I
[ .Jøkelfjord II
Jøkelfjord III
I Kvænangen
I Ingøliavet
I Troldfjordsund
Breisund
Repvaag harbour
Porsangerfjord
Porsangerfjord
Porsangerfjord
Lyngenf jord TI
Lyngen III
Østnesfjord I . .
Østnesfjord II. .
Østnesfjord III.
Bålstad
Landego
I Arnø
Sund harl)Our . .
20—40
30—40
.50—70
3.50-410
2.50-300
100—150
450-030
200
230
100-120
204
150
108—130
50
70—80
30-50
150
230
140
1.50-180
100
450—530
607-640
30-90
95
350-500
120
100
150
500
120—200
100
90
250
380
100-200
200
40—80
90
110
80
110
300-343
270—315
30-40
100
10
200
70
30 -.50
2.50
320
150-180
400
300— iOO
0
0 75
1.0
2.«6
3.65
6.2
6.55
35.08
34.89
35.03
34.97
34.40
33.48
33.40
34.70
34.97
34.52
35.06
33.48
34.06
35.13
34.60
34.79
35.11
35.11
34.99
34.42
34.29
34.86
34.67
34.54
34.21
34.29
34.36
34.49
35.2*
34.54
34.48
34.97
34.84
35.1.3
35.18
stones and Lithothammioi
Olav
Pebbles
Clay
Clay
Clay
Stones and sand
Clay
Clay
Clay
Sand and stones
Sand and clay
Shells and stones
Clay
Clay?
Clay and stones
Shells and clay
Sand
Clay
Eocky
Clay
Clay
Lophohelia
Clay
Sand, clay and stones
Rocky
Fragments of shells
Pebbles and fragm. of shelli
Fragments of shells
Lophohelia
Rocky
Rocky
Stones
Clay
Clay
(Jlay, Rocky
Clav, Eockv
Rocky
Clav, Stones
' Clav
Clay
Eocky
Clay
Rocky
Sand
Sand, Eocky
Sand
Clay, Rocky?
Eocky
Pebbles, Lithotliammia
Clay
Clav
Stones and Lithothammia
Between Øst- and Vestvaage.
Østvaago, Lofoten.
Østvaagø. Lofoten.
Ostlofoten.
0st|,,futHn.
Bitween Hinilo and Østvaagø.
In Raftsund.
Between Hamniero and Lundo.
At the inner end of Furunesvægi^en.
SE of Mortsund.
SE of Mort.sund.
SE of Mortsund.
Between Væi-o and Moskenesø.
Between Værø and Moskenesø.
At little inside the Vorfjord.
In the middle of (he Kirkfjord.
At Tennes.
In the Vorfjord.
11 miles SK of Eeine.
9i'„ miles SSE of Ure.
6 miles S\V b W'/o W of Henningsvær.
Outside the Øgsfjord, off the Pundsletvaag.
At the head of the fiord.
Between Tranø and Lødingen.
Between Trano and Lodingen.
At Hindo.
At Hindø.
68° 3' N., 100 0..V E.
Outside Røst.
Outside Røst.
Inside Røst.
Inside Skårberget.
Vestlofoten.
Vestlofoten.
Between Moskenesø and Værø.
68" .34' N., 14" 17' E.
Off Stønnesbotn.
Between Stonnesbotn and Lysbotn.
Between Stonnesbotn and Lysbotn.
At Seujen Island.
At Nøklen island.
At the head of the fjord.
At the head of the fjord.
Off Tverfjord.
Between Spildern and the northern mainland.
71" 10' N., 23" 10' E.
Between Ingo and Rolfsø.
Between Havø and Hjelniesø.
In Porsangerfjord.
Between Great and Little Tamso.
Between Great and Little Tamso.
Between Groat and Little Tamsø.
Off the Kaafjord.
Between vtre (iamvik and UI0.
At the head of the fjord,
liotveen Vaterfjord and Følstad.
(W Hello.
Rocky
San(i
14" 4' E.
140 2' E.
Mor.sdalfjord (S. Beierfjord) 50— 150 i
Nr.
Date
Name
Depth
metres
T emperature
of the bottom
laver
CO
SaUnity of
the bottom
Nature of the bottom
Remarks
1900
50
30—50
100-185
330
100—150
470—490
490
30—50
10—30
50
10-20
15—20
320-370
530
(i-24
3.35
3.2
3.15
3.15
6.65
6.65
33.99
33.99
.84.04
33.99
3.5.13
35.00
Fragments of shells
Sand, Clav
(Jlay
Eocky
Clay
Clay
Clay
Clay
Rocky
Lithothammion
Shells
Sand
Sand, Clay
Clay
(•lav
Sand
The head of Skjerstadfjord.
(if)
sk]i-i<tM(iriiii(i III
Sli l' 1 -1 i^llh '1 ^i 1 \'
(W
Sk r ■ 1 1 ■' W
At Fauske.
(>9
Sk |M -. mI 1 1 .1 il \'ll
Off Fauske.
70
71
Sk|.M.i,'nli|>>nl Vill •.
8kiHi-^t;Hllj,.r.i 1\
72
73
74
75
Sk.i.T.t.wlljnnl X
Skjt-i-st:Hlf,ior,l XI
Skjerstadfjord XVI
Saltenfjord I
Mouth of the Misværfjord.
Misværfjord.
Inside Saltstrømmen.
Seivaagen.
Inside the mouth.
7(i
Saltenfjord II
Foldenfjoid I ...
Between Hjerto and the southern niamland.
7.S
Grøtn
n tlie list of animals collected,
added the year (1894), after tl:
included some whii
lace, for all such.
trip to Finmark in tin
of August and September
b. Outcome of Dredgings.
Porifera. ')
W. LuNDBECx, Mag. seieut., Copenhagen, determ.
Ashestojduma ■pennatida, 0. Schmidt.
The Lyngen Fiord, 300 in.
Cladorhiza alysssicola, M. Saes.
The Salten Fiord, Skroven (Vest Fiord), 400 m.
Bnharis vermiculata, Boweebank.
Reine (the Vest Fiord), 150 m.
Styloconhjie horealis, hovim.
The Slijer.stad Fiord, 2:50 in.
Tentorium semisuherites. 0. Schmidt.
The Sicjerstad Fiord, 230 m.
Hllliontlliil irrficillatd. 15(t\VEItliANK.
Mosk(Histromnien, 200 in.
Triehosfcmnm licmisplw
The Lyngen Fiord, 250 in.
M. Saes.
Ti-tlu/fi h/vruriiivi, JoHNST.
The Porsanger Fiord. 2(io m.
Craviclld crunvum. MiTLii.
The Sag Fiord, 200 in.
1) Not manj' sponges were found, but tliose which were obtained were
classified at once by Mag. Lundbeck, tut'ether with material belonging to the
Danish Ingolfexpedtiou. Only a few species are noted here, the names of which
Mr. Lundbeck has kindly furnished me witli.
Hydrozoa.
Hydroida.
Miss Bonnevie, Kristiania, determ. Remarks by the author.
Corymorphu sarsi, Steexsteup.
Mehavn (1894).
Tubidaria mdirisa. Lin.
Svolvær (1894); Bålstad (1896); Breisund, 100 m.; the Pors-
anger Fiord, 200 ni.
Tuhulmia hiri/nx, Ell. & Sol.
Nordkyn (1894).
Tuhulmia variabilis, Bonn.
The Porsanger Fiord, 200 ra. This species has previously been
found at Rauberget in the Trondhjcm Fiord, and by the Norwegian
North Atlantic Expedition at stations 325 and 362.
luhdaria humilis, Allman.
Svolvæi' (1894); Nordkyn (1894).
rmigonimus rqwiis, WnumT.
lialstad (199G). Has been observed I'rom Bergen to Lol'oton.
I)icory)ic eouferiii. Alder.
Svolvær (1894).
Hydnwlitinid vclmudii, Flemming.
Svolvær (1894); Bålstad (1896).
Eitilendr'nim ritmcum. Pall.
The Østnes Fiord.
Fj(,lnidnmu nisnpir. IIincks.
Mdski'iistroiunu'u. (»iiiv colli'ctcil dii tlic Noi'wctriaii coast iu
Moskt'iistrimiiiu'ii.
Eii(l(ii(lriin)i triiflhnii. Ai.lman.
Moski'iistroiiiiiicii.
Hdleciuiii hiilcriiiuiii. LiN.
Napstrommcn (lS9iii: tlic Nortli Capo (ISsil).
Hithrutiii hihrosiiw. Aldek.
MoskeiistroiiiiiiPii: tin- Xoitli Caiio (18U4).
Hitbnnw tortilr. Bonn.
lialstad (1897). I'li to tlio present, only known tioni Bålstad
(Lofoten).
Hukrium scAtiim. Clakk.
The North Cape (18941; Nordkyn (1894).
HalccHim «•.->■//(', NoKMAN.
The North Cape (1894).
Hidcciuni t>cJmei<Jcr't. Bonn.
Nordkyn (1894).
Lufui'a scrjiciis. Hassal.
The Ingo Sea, 30() ni.; Nordkyn (1894).
L'//orW nlnrtinn. M. Saks.
Moskenstrommen; 15alstad (1S97); The Ingo Sea, 300 m.; The
North Cape (1894).
Liifofii finirill'nii/i. Aldek.
Bålstad (1897); The Ingo Sea. 300 ni.; Malangen 100—200 m.
Litfoi'd (hnriosn. Flejiming.
Hammerfest (1894).
Lafoi'U fruficosd. M. Saks.
Moskenstrommen; Bålstad (1897); Malangen, 100—200 m.;
Hammerfest (1894); Sværholt (ls94): The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
Lafoi'a si/iimwtrica. Bonn.
The Ingo Sea, 300 m. This species has been found, in addition
to the place here mentioned, at station 313 (The Norvv. North.
Atl. Exp.).
Camiinnabirkt verticulata, Lin.
Malangen. 100—200 m.; Hammerfest (1894); The North Cape
(1894); The Porsanger Fioixl; Nordkyn.
Campanuhiria f/oiiciilntii. MC'll.
Svolvær (1894); The North Cape (1894); Nordkyn (1894).
('(iitijKiiiiiltiria johnntoni, Aldek
i;alstad I1S97); llannnerfest (1H94); Mehavn (1894).
iliKNitliirid liiiir/is'i. Aldkh.
lialstad (18971
('(mt)i(tiiiiliin(i ntli/riildtd. IIincks.
The North Cajic (ls9n; Nonlkyii (1H94).
Cdviiidduldnd roldhilis, Lin.
Moskenstronnnen; I'.alstad (1897).
('diiipd)nildrin xi/rini/a, Lin.
Bålstad (1897).
Snidlitri'Ha poJyzonias, Lin.
Hannneil'est (1894); I'.reisund, 100 m.; The North Cape (1894);
Nordkyn (1894).
Serhddrclld trirusjjiddtd, Aldek.
Moskenstrommen; Hammerfest (1894); Ingohavet, 300 m.; Brei-
sund; The North Cape (1894).
iJijndmpnu pnmUd. Lin.
Malangen.
Ci:nii]id)idldriti dirli-jftind(, Lin.
The North Cape (1894).
Camjianidaria hijuUrid. Hincks
Bålstad (1897); The Porsanger Fiord. 200 m. Up to this time, '. Norw. North Atl. Exp,
IJipuirnvnu tdmdrisca, Lin.
Moskenstrommen; Svolvær (1894); Hammerfest (1894).
Thdidvid dhlvthid. Lin.
Moskenstrommen; Hammerfe.st (1894); Noi'dkyn (1894).
Thuiaria aryentm. Ell. & Sol.
The North Cape (1894).
Thdlnrni /ilicdld. Ell. it Sol.
Bålstad (1897); Breisund, 100 m.; The North Cape (1894);
Nordkyn (1894); Mehavn (1894).
TIriiidrid drficdlatd. Pall.
Malangen. 100—200 m.
Tlniidiid tlidja. Lin.
Svolvær (1894); Pirei.sund, lOO m.; The North Cape (1894).
HydndhiKinia fdlcdfd, Lin.
Svolvær (1894); The Kanstad Fiord. 20—90 m.
A(/Id(t]ilii)ild hde<ird. (j. (). Saks.
Ingohavet. 300 m.
A(jlaup}wn\a pourtdleai, N'ekkill.
Ingohavet, 300 m. The pi-eviously known distiibution extended
from Espevær to the Trondh.jem Fiord.
Antcnnuhtrla dutrnnina. Lin.
Ilainmerfcst (1894); P.reisund.
Paper.s about hydioids: Kkistine Bonnevie. Hydroida. The
the most northerly known limit was The Trondhjcm Fiord.
On )). 98 ('^«v/. of this work will be found a complete list of papers.
O. Nordgaard.
Scrphozoa.
Lucernaiia quadricornis, JIull.
Hammerfest (1894); Mehavn (1894); The Skjerstad Elord.
M. Saes has given a detailed description of this animal.*) He
notes the following' places where it has been found: Glesvær,
Solsvik, Florø, Kinn, all of these being on the Bergen coast. My
locality in the Skjerstad Fiord (S. XVI) lies just inside Saltstrømmen.
Here several specimens of Lucsrnaria were found on algae at a
depth of from 10—20 m.
Anthozoa.
Alcyonaria.
James A. Geieu determ. Remarks by tke author.
Alcyonium difjitatam. Lin.
The Skjerstad Fiord (.S. X), 10—30 m. The locality in the
Skjerstad Finrd is the northern limit for this species as far as is
now known. Its distribution, according to Dr. Walter May, is
confined to Noi'way and England.-)
Paraspongcdes fruticom. M. Saes.
The Skjerstad Fiord (S. Ill), -iSo m.; the sea NW of Rost,
700 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 2o0 m.
The species is common in the Ai-ctic Sea.
Panisponcjodes rosea, Dan. & Koe.
Bålstad, SO m.
Parumurlcca placoniiis, Lin.
Arno,. 300—400 m.
The species has not, up the present, been found north of this
place. In „ Beretning om en zoologisk Reise (1849)" M. Saes
mentions the following animals belonging to this group: Primnoa
lepadifera, Lin., from the 0x Fiord and Hammerfest, and Para-
gorgia arborea, Lin. from the 0x Fiord. The last mentioned species
has been taken at two stations (183—260 m.). in the Murman Sea
by the vVustro-Hungarian Expedition.")
Isidill.il llilijii/lis, (rUNNEEUS.
Tile Sag Fiord, 20(i ui.; Tranodybet, (107 — 640 m.; Oxsund.
600 ni.; Brettesncs-Skroven, 350—400 m.
Sjoem has caught this species in the Trondhjem Fiord, accord-
ing to (JEiEG''), and GuNNEEUs mentions it from Smølen. Under tlu;
name of Mopsea borealis it is fully described by G. O. Saes'') from
specimens cangth at tlie fisliing station Skroven in Lofoten.
I'l'iiHtdiila ncuU'/itit, Dan. it K(.)H.
At Risvær (Lofoten), 1.50—180 m.
Kojiliobeli'muon dcUÅfcrum, (). J<\ Mum,.
The Salten Fioi'd, 320-380 m., Landego, 400 in.
') Cfi-. Fauna littoralis Norvegiæ, Part I, pag. 20.
2) Ct. Walter May, Beitrage znr Sy.stematik und Chorologie der Alcyoiia-
ceeii, p. 104. Abdruck aus der jenaischen Zaitschrift f. Naturw. Vol. XXXIIl.
N. F. XXVI.
•■*) Cf. Stuxbero. Faunaen pa dcU kring Novaja Semi ja, p. \Wi.
*) Bidrag til kjend.^kaben om cle. nordiske alcyonarier, p. .5. Borg. Mus.
A arb. \m^.
'"') On Some Remarkable Forms ol' Animal Life, I, p. oO, pl. V, Hgs. 1—23.
According to Grieg'), this .species
Kristiania Fiord to the Trondhjem Fiord,
the Vest Fiord.
was known from the
Its northern limit is now
Cludisms gracilis, Dan. it Kor.
Tiie Skjerstad Fiord, 230 m.
Geieg mentions that the type-specimen was from Slotholmen
in Nordland (1. c. p. 18). The species has also been caught in the
Trondhjem Fiord by V. Stoem.
Zoantharia.
.Iajies a. Grieg determ. Remarks by the autlior.
riocgiifluis arrticiis, 'M. Sars.
The Salten Fiord. 320 m.; Landego, 400 m.; The Folden Fiord,
530 m.; Øxsund, 600 m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Mortsund, 20o
m.; Ure, 250 m.; Reine, 150 m.; The Lyngen Fiord, 300 m.
During his expedition in the summer of 1849, Michael SaRs
found this peculiar species in the Ox Fiord, and in the account
a short description was given of it. Later on, it was thoroughly
described.-) A contribution respecting its anatomy has been made
by Miss Emily Arnesen.') The Austro-Hungarian expedition collected
this species at two stations in the Murman Sea. (183 m., 230 m.).
LophohcJ'ia prolifcra. Pall.
Tranodybet, 4oO— 530 m.; The Tys Fiord (T. I), 500 m.
This species was seen in large quantities especially at the place
last mentioned. The Lophuhelia-reai at the mouth of the Tys Fiord
is, as far as I know, the most northerly which has hitlierto been
observed. Later on in this treaticc, I will refer somewhat more
in detail to this interesting formation.
Avtiniaria.
Dr. Carlgren, Stockholm, determ. Komai'ks by the author.
Prutanthi'ii ■•iiiiiplcr. Carlgr.
The Tys Fiord (T. 1) 5oo m. On fjipliohclia jirollfera, Pall.
Carlgren says, in a written communication to me, that Pro-
tanthea is only found in Bohuslen and on the Norwegian coast.
The distribution of this species hitherto known is Bohuslen — Lofoten.
Ediranlsia andrrsi. Dan.
The Lyngen Fiord (L. III). ;ioo ni.; The Skjerstad Fioi'd.
320 m.
It was caught by the Xorw. North .\tl. lOxp. at St. 253 (Tlif
Skjerstad Fiord, 481 m.).')
Paraedward-sia arenarva, Carliie. nov. gen. nov. sp.
The Skjerstad Fiord, 320 m.
The new genus ,and species will later on be thoroughly de-
scribed by Dr. Carlgren. [n a written communication to me he
says: — ..Paraedirardsia is chai'acterized by 8 comjilete mesenteries
like Pdinn-dsia. liut the sca[iiis in I'arardirardsat is furnished with
') Overvigt over Norges pennatulider, p. 16. Berg. Miis. Aarb. 18!U.
■^) Fauna littoralis Xorveyiæ. Part, 11, p. 73, pi. 10, figs. 18—27.
■') ]5eiti-;ige zur Anatomie und Histologie von Ulncyathus arctkus c\r.
Archiv f. Math, og Natnrv. Vol. XX. Nr. !».
'') (Jfr. Danielskn, Aetinida, ]). 111.
liMpilla like HalntmjHi, ami forc'iL;!! bodies (l
lasti'iK'il to these papilhe.
of .saml) arc
Bohccra tucdiae, Johnst.
Tlie Maiansren Fiord. 8S(i m.\ t^toiiiieshotn. 4n — so in.
TviiVki iMddouidrtif:) lufoteni<is, Dan.
Stonuesbotn, 4ii su in.; The O^s Fiord I. Kin
The Norw. Nortli Atl. Kxp. cani^ht this species in
III.
Salts
Act'iiiiisfiilii rallosa, N'ehk.
Stønnesbotn, 40—80 in.: Tiie .Tokel Fiord, 80— luit ni.
This species was also observed in several other tiords, but no
specimen was preserved.
Mftrnlluin iliiiuthuii. Ellis.
Kvaniaiiijen 11. '.mi in.
M. S.VKS in his account of his expedition in 1849 says that
this form was commonly found between the pebbles on the beach
in the Ox Fiord and at Hammerfest.
Chondiiirht'ni'tii dijiiffifii. (J. F. Mi'll.
The 0^'s Fiord, KiQ m.; Stonnesbotn. 40 — ^0 m.; Malangen,
100 — -2(10 m.: The .lokel Fimd 1. 100 in.; Tiie Porsanger Fiord,
200 m.
This form is very common in the fiords of Northern Norway.
Clw.ididcht'inht nodo.-ri, Fabr.
The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m. (.3 specimens).
This is surely the first time that this genuine arctic species is
noted from any Norwegian tiord. The Norw. North. Atl. Exp.
collected it at St. 290 (between Norway and Beeren Eiland. Daxiel-
sEx') mentions it under the name of Actinuuge ( Vcrrill) nodosa Fabr.
Carlgren says in a written communication that he has numerous
specimens of Fabricius' species from Greenland, Spitzbergen and
Beeren Eiland. At the same time, he gives the important infor-
mation that Aft'niida nodosa. Fabk. is not identical to the chief
variety of Act'niaugc. nodosa, Verrill. The latter has therefore
since been named Aet'niaiigi' verriUi. On the other hand, Carl-
GREN declares that Actinauge nodosa var. fuhc.rcalosa. Vekr. =
Chondrachtinia nodosa. Fabr., which species is also found on the
east coast of North America.
Epizoantlius erdnuDiiii, Dan.
Malangen, 380 m. ; Lyui^en 11. 2S0 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.;
Kvænangen, 300 — 343 m.
The Norw. North Atl. Ex]i. took this species at four different
places.
IsozoarttJius ( Ejiiioaalliiisi arl/oyesccns. Dax.
Mortsund I, 200 m.; Tranodybet, (507- G40 m.
Danielsex-) notes this species from St. 149 (The Vest Fiord).
Caelgrkx has classified Isozoanthus as a new genus, which difi'ers
from Parazoanthiis in wanting a riiiL'- sinus.
>) Actinida. p. A-2.
■-) Actinida. p. 129.
Crinoidea.^)
James A. Cirieg deterin.
Rhizoerinns lofotensis. M. .Sars.
Tranodybet, «40 m.; Øxsuiid, (JOO in.; The Sag Fiord, 200 ni.
Hrettesnes, 350—400 m.; Reine, 150 m.; Moskenstrommen. 200 m
The 1
III.; The Tvs Fiord. 500 m
Antedon tenella, Retzius.
Fiord, 30—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord, 330—490
Malangen, 100—200 m.
Ophiuroidea.
James A. Grikg deterni.
Opiiiara alliida, Forbes.
The Salten Fiord, 1.")— 20 m.; (iroto. 4 m.
30 m.; The Trold Fiord, 4u m.
The Ost nes Fiord.
Ophiura sarsi, Li-iken.
specimens both from the outer and innei
stricts, 30 — (idO m.. and on soft as well as hard bottom.
t
I^umerousi
fiord di-
Ojdi'nini robusta. .Vvres.
The Sk,jer.stad Fiord, on hydroids; The 0gs Fiord, loo m.;
The Kirk Fiord, 30 — 50 m.; The North Cape (1894).
Ophiura cur nea, M. Saks.
The Sag Fiord, 100 m.
Ophioch-n sericcum. Forbes.
Was seen at a number of stations, both out at sea and in the
fiords. 100—16(1 m.
Aiitphih'pis norregica. L.juxgmax.
Landego, 3ti0 — 400 m.; The Salten Fiord, 220—380 m.; The
Folden Fiord, 530 m.; Oxsund, 60(i m.; Brettesnes— Skroven, 350
—400 m.; Tranodybet, 640 m.
Ophlopholis aculcata, Lix.
Exceedingly common at most of the stations, 10 — 700 m.
()pdiiaca)itli(( hidcntata. Retz.
Commonly distributed. E.spceially numerous in the Ogs Fiord,
the Porsanger Fiord etc.
OpJuaciuitlia ahi/ssirola, (i. 0. Saks.
Sea NW of Rost, 300 — 500 m.
Ojdiiacantlia spectahilis, G. O. Sars.
Arno, 30(1—400 m.; The Tys Fiord, 500 m.; Tranodybet. 450
—530 m.
Rost.
Opliiotri.r frugilis. 0. F. Muller.
Ojihiosrole.r (jJacluUs, JIi'll. it Troscu.
The Skjei-stad Fiord, 470—490 ni.; The Salten Fiord, 220—
380 m.: Lande<;o. 200-^0(1 in.; The Folden Fiord. 530 m.; The
') (fr. Griec;, Overs
Mus. A arb. 19():i. Xo. I.
det nordlige Norge.s echiuodevnier. Berg.
0. Nonlgaai-il.
Sag Fiord, 200 m.; The Tys Fiord, 500 m.; Skroven, 200—400
m.; Kvænang-en, 300—343 m,
Oplimcolex imrpureun, Dub. & Kor.
The Tys Fiord, 500 m.
Gorgonocephalus lamarch, Mijll. & Teosch.
The Sea west of Ingø, 300 m.
Asteroidea.
James A. Grieg determ.
Pontastcy tann'ispinus, DCb. & Kor.
From a number of stations between Salten Fiord and INIalangeu,
100—640 m.
Plutonaster parelli. Dub. & Kor.
Bålstad, .150 ra.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.; Svolvær (1894);
Sværholt (1894).
Ctenodiscus crispatus, Retz.
Of very common occurrence on the mud in the basins of the
fiords betveen the Skjerstad and Porsanger fiords, 30 — 530 m.
Leptopdychaster arcticiis, M. Sars.
From numerous stations, 30—400 m.
Astropeden irnHiiilaris. Pennant.
Seivaagen (Salten Fiord), 15—17 m.
Psildster undiotiwla, Mull. & ^rRoscii.
The Beier Fiord, 50 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord, 30—50 m.;
Landego, 200—400 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.; Mortsund (Vest
Fiord), 200 m.; the mouth af Raftsund, 250—300 m.
Pi'iitafionastcf i/yfoiiihiris, Retz.
The Salten Fiord, 320—380 m.; The Østnes Fiord, 130 m.;
Reine, 100 m., Mortsund, 200 m.; Bålstad, 150 m.; Moskenstrømmen,
200 m.; Røst, 150 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; The North Cape
(1894); Sværholt (1894).
Hlppd^terias iilui/ijiana, Parelius.
The Skjerstad Fiord, 230 m.; Sværholt (1894).
Poraniamorpha rocca, Dan. & Kor.
The Folden Fiord, 530 m.
Solaster papposu,'!, Lin,
'I'he Skjei'stad P'iord, 10—30 m.
Solaster endecci, Retz.
IJalstad, 30—70 m.; The Østnes Fiord, 30 m.
Solaster syrtensis, Verb.
'I'he Bciei- Fiord, 50 ul
Pternster judriUus, M. Sars.
lJenning.svær, 150 m.; Sværholt (1894).
Pteraster militarin, O. F. Muller.
Tlie Tys Fiord, 500 m.; Tranødybet, 450—530 m.; Heine (Vest
Fiord); Sea W of Ingø, 300 m.; The Jøkel Fiord, 100 m.; Svær-
holt (1894).
CribreUd sanijuinohntd, 0. F. Muller.
Common, especially on the Lofoten banks, 30 — 300 m.
Pedicellaster tijpk-us. M. SaRS.
Bålstad (Vest Fiord), 80 m.
Stirhader roseiif:, 0. F. Muller.
The Østnes Fiord, 130 m.
Asterias glacialis, Lin.
Moskenstrømmen, 90 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30— 90 m.; Brei-
sund, 100 m,
Asterias iiiiilleri. M. Sars.
Occurs from a number of stations between The Skjerstad Fiord
and Sværholt, 10 — 250 m.
Asterias ]i)irki, Mull, it Trosch.
The Kanstad Fioi'd, 90 m.; The Jokel Fiord, (50—100 m.
Asterias rubens, Lin.
From several localities in Lofoten.
Brisinga coronata, (J. 0. Sars.
The Folden Fiord, 530 m.
Echhioidea.
.Tames A. Grieg determ.
Echinus norregicus. \)vb. & KoR.
Moskenstrømmen, 200 m.. Rost, 150 m.
Efhinus rh'gans, Dun. it Kor.
The Tys Fiord, 500 m.
Echinus esculrntus, Lin.
Malangen, 100—200 m.
Strong i/Iocentrot IIS ilrocbarhiensis, O. F. Mi'Ll.
From 13 places betAveen Skjerstad Fiord and Sværholt.
Echinocyamus piisiUns, O. F. Mitll.
Skroven (Vest Fioi'd). 200 — 400 m.; Moskenstrommcn 90 ni.;
Røst, 100 m.
Scliii-aster fragilis. Di'ii. it Ivor.
Landego, 300— 400 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.; The
Kirk Fiord, 70—100 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.
Spatangus purpureas, 0. V. MOll.
The Skjerstad F'iord, 330 m.; The Østnes Fiord; Moskenstrøm-
men, The North Cape (1884). Sværholt (1894).
Pchinocariliinii conlafuin. Pennant.
Sværholt (1894).
Echinocardiiiiii ftarescens, 0. F. Mi^LL.
The Salten Fiord, 15—20 m., Stene (Vest Fiord), 120-200 m.;
Troldliord.sund, 40 m.; Sv;i'iliolt (1894).
Holoth iirioidca .
Dr. Hjalmak OsTi;ui;ifi:x, Tpsiila, (Ictenn.'l
Sfichopiin trcmi(his^ (itnxervs.
The Salteu Fiord. 32ii .Jso m.; l,anile-o, 300— 400 in.; Bål-
stad, 150 111: lialstati ('-'j is'.iTl. in tlic stoniacli of cod lOadus
ciilhtruts).
BathjiphteH nutans. M. ,Sars.
Tlip Folden Fiord, 530 m.; Oxsuiid, (iOQ m.
Mesotburia inh'sfenarig, Ascanil's.
The Folden Fiord, 530 m.; Oxsnnd, 60(i ni.
Cueiimuria frondosa, Gunnerus.
Bålstad (1897); Reine, in the stomachs of cod (Gudns mUarlas):
Rost, in the stomachs of cod; Troldtiordsund, 30 — 40 m.
Cuciimarid Iiispiihi. Barrett.
The Salten Fiord, 320—380 m.; Landego 300—400 m.; The
Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Oxsund, 600 m.; Skroven, 200— 400 m.; Bret-
tesucs, 350—400 m.; Tranodybet, 607—640 m.
Phyllophorns peUiuidus. Fleming.
Digermulen, 100 — 150 m.; Kvænangen, 90 m.; Rost, in the
stomachs of haddock (Gadiis æglefinits).
Psohts plumtiipiis, Strussenfeldt.
The y. Beier Fiord, 30—150 in.; The Ostnes Fiord, 50—70
m.: Mehavn (1894).
Lapidopla.r hiiski, M'Intosh.
The Kirk Fiord, 50 m.
Mijriotrochns rinJcl, Steenstrup.
The Lyngen Fiord, 250 m. ; Kvænangen, 300—343 in.; The
Jokel Fiord, loo m.
Mijiiotrochus rItrt'Ks. M. Sars.
Brettesnes, 350—400 m.
Neniertinea.')
Dr. R. C. Punnett, Cambridge, deterni.
Linens scmidinaviemis, Punnett, ii. sp.
The Jokel Fiord, 100 ni.
Linaus cineieiis. Punnett, n. sp.
The Tys Fiord, 500 m., on Lophohelia.
Eiincmertes nordgaardi, Punnett, n. sp.
The Salten Fiord, 200 m.; Bålstad, 150 m.
Amphiporus pnsilhis. Punnett, n. sp.
Lofoten (exact localitv uncertain).
>) Cf. OSTERGREX, The Holothurioidea of Xortheni Norway. Berg. 3Ius.
Aarb. 1902.
^) A description of the new species liere mentioned will be found in Dr.
PrrrsETT's treatise, On the Nenierteans of Norway. Bergens Mus. Aarb. 1903,
Nr. 2.
Amphij)oru)< miigmis, Punnett, n. sp.
The Tys Fiord, ono m.; on LophoheUu jn-olifcra.
ADijihiponis tlioiiipsont, Punnett.
Bålstad, 5n iii.; The Por.sanger Fiord, 200 m.
Drcpliunopltorus boreaUs, Punnett.
The Lviii;en Fiord il. 25u m.
Annelida.
Folychæta.
0. BiDENKAP, Kristiania, and (J. M. J{. Levinsen, Copenhagen,
detenu. Remarks by the autiior,
H'inDotIwi' (iciilinarum, Storm.
Gaukværo, 250 in.
The species had previously been known as distributed from
Bommeloen to The Trondhjem Fiord.
Hiinnatlioi' mollis. M. Sars.
Reine (Vest Fiord I, 15» i m.
According to Bidenkap') this species is rare on the Norwegian
coast.
Hannothoii rarispina, M. Sars.
j The Skjerstad Fiord (S. XVI) ; Malangen, 100—200 m. ; Lyngen
i III, 300 m.; Kvænangen, 300 — 343 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 in.
Hannothoe proplnqua. ]Malm(;ren.
Henuingsværstrømmen. 20—40 m.
The northern limit for this s]iecies hitherto was The Trond-
hjem Fiord.
Harmothoe saråi. Kinberg.
The Sag Fiord, 200 m. ; Lyngen III, 300 m, ; The Jokel Fiord,
100 m.
Hnnnuthoi- nodosa. M. Sahs.
Malangen, lOn- 200 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord, 10—20 in.;
Breisund, 100 m.
Hurmothoi' ■ indiricafa. Lin.
Napstrommen (Lofoten); Troldtiordsund, Inm.; Sværholt (1894);
The Kjolle Fiord (ls94i.
Harmutlwe impar, .Johnst.
The S. Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord. 230 m.;
The Tys Fiord, 500 m.; Ingohavet (hav = seal, 30ii m.
Haniwtlwc claiigera, M. Sars.
The list of places where found is lost. The species has pre-
viously been caught near Christiansund by M. Sars and in The
Trondhjem Fiord by Storm. I caught specimens in 1899, my district
was then The Beier Fiord— The Porsanger Fiord. So that this
species is also found north of the arctic circle.
1) 0. Bidenkap, System, oversigt over Xorge^ Annulata Polychæta. Krist.
Vid. Selsk. Forh. 1894. No. 10.
21
162
0. Nordgaard.
Hannothoe asperrima, M. iSars.
Malangen, 100—200 m.
Hitherto the northern known limit for this species had been
Bodø.
Leindonotus squamaUis, Lin.
Svolvær (1894); Napstrommen (1897), 30—40 m.
Lcpldonotus cirrosu><, Pall.
The Beier Fiord, 50 m.; The Sag- Fiord, 200 m.
Leindonofus amondseni. Malmgren.
Stønnesbotn, 40—80 m.
The Trondhjem Fiord was previously the northern limit for
this species.
Aphrodite acidectta, Lin.
Moskenstrommen, 20u m.; Tranødybet, (507—640 m.
Laetmonice filieornis, Kinbkrg.
The Folden Fiord, 5-30 m.; Landego, 200—400 m.; Øxsund,
600 m.; The Satr Fiord, 200 m.; Tranødybet, 607— 640 m.; Gauk-
væro, 2.50 m.; Malangen, 100—200 ra.
Lecniira tetragona, Kinb.
The Skjerstad Fiord (several places); The Salten Fiord, 200 m.;
Landego, 200—400 m. ; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.; Risvær, ISO-
ISO m.; Malangen, 3S(» m.
Eumida sungulnm. Orsted.
The Skjerstad, 20 m.
Plii/llodoce ludciilatii, Lix.
The Beier Fiord, 3u — loo m.; The Skjerstad Fiord, 33o m.;
The Salten Fiord, 15 -2n m.; The Kirk Fiord, 7(i— 8() m. ; Sv;er-
holt (1S94).
Eteone depressa, Malmgren.
The Kirk Fiord, 70—80 m.
This species is not mentioned in Bidenkap's list of the Poly-
chæta of Norway. Later on, however, Bidenkap found a specimen
at Horsnes in The Lyngen Fiord.') It is known from Greenland,
Spitzbergen and Novaja Semlja.
^''eptJu/s mahngmii, Théel,
The Kanstad Fiord, 30-90 m.; Risværflaket, 150—180 m.;
Gaukværø, 250 m. ; Lyngen II, 250 m. ; Kvænangen, 300—353 m. ;
The Jøkel Fiord, 80 m.
KejMijs incisa, Malmgren.
Svolvær (1894); Malangen, 380 m.; The Jøkel Fiord, lOo m.;
Bidenkap mentions Lofoten as the northern limit, but this must now
be changed to Kvænangen and the Jøkel Fiord.
KciMys ciliala, Muller.
The S. Beier Fiord, 50 m.; Landego, 200—400 m.; Svolvær
(1894); The 0gs Fiord, 100 m.; The Kirk Fiord, 50—40 m.; Diger-
mulen, 100— 150 m. ; The Kanstad Fiord, 30 — 90 m. ; Stønnesbotn,
40—80 m.; Malangen, lod— 200 ul ; Kvirnangen, 300—343 m.;
The Jøkel Fiord. 80 m.
1) Lyngenfjordens evertebratfa
roiiiso Mus. Aarsh. 20,
Xcphtiji: coeca, Fabr.
The Beier Fiord, 30—150 m.; The Ogs Fiord I, 100 m.;
mouth of Raftsundet, 250— 300 m.; Svolvær (1894); Henningsvær I,
150 m.; The Kirk Fiord, 30—50 m.
Glycera capitata, Orsted.
The Skjerstad Fiord X, 10—30 m.; Skroven. 200—400 m.;
Rost II, 100 m. ; Sværholt (1894).
Stanrocephalus enicaeforniis, Malmgren.
Bålstad, 150 m.
Lumbnnereis fragUia. Muller.
The Kirk Fiord, 70 m.
Onuphis conchylega, M. Sars.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord I, 30—50
m.; The Østnes Fiord; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.; Lyngen III,
250 m. ; The Jokel Fiord, 100 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 70 m.
OnupMs quadricuspis, M. Sars.
Ure I (Vest Fiord), 200—250 m.
Hyalinoecia tuhicola, Muller.
Svolvær (1894).
Christiansund was the previously known northern limit.
Nereis pelagica, Lin.
The Skjerstad Fiord XIII, 110 m.; Troldfiordsund, 40 m.;
Breisund, loom.; Sværholt (1894); The Kjølle Fiord (1894); Nord-
kyn (1894).
Leodice norvegica, Lin.
The Beier Fiord, 50 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord, 30—50 m.;
The Tys Fiord I, 50o m.; Tiie Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.; Diger-
mulen, 100— 2oo m.; Henningsvær, 150 m.; Mortsund, 200 m.;
Bålstad, 150 m.; Røst II, 150 m.; Malangen, 100— 200 m.; Kvæn-
angen, 90 m.; Breisund, 100 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 5o m.
Leodice gunner i . Storji.
The Tys Fiord I, 500 ni.
Y Cirrahdiis ahnmcMatua. Ar. Hansen.
The Jokel Fiord II, 80 ni.
Arieia luppferi, Ehlers.
Landego, 200—400 m.
This species had previously on the coast of Norway only been
found in T'he Bergen Fiord.
Tro2)honia plmnosa, Mijller.
Glea (Rost) on the beach; The Øgs Fiord; The Folden Fiord,
530 m.; The Jokel Fiord; Kvænangen.
Brada rilhsa. Rathke.
The Skjerstad Fiord, 230 m.; The Salten Fiord I, 15— 2om.;
The Folden Fiord, 530 m.
Brada granulosa. Armauer Hansen.
Malangen, lOo— 200 m. ; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
The southern limit for tiiis species must thus, for the present,
ho considered to be Malansren. It is now for the fauna of Norway ;
tlio places at wiiich Tiio Nor\v. North Atl. iOxp. found it ali lie at
a considorablo distance from the Norwcc-ian coast.
Brada granidata, Malmuuen.
(ilea (RostI on the beach; Malang-en Kxi— 200 m.; Kvænan<ren.
Eiiphrosyue Jioretdif:, Orsted.
Malangen, 100—200 ni.
Spintlier oniscoides, Johnst.
The Porsanger Fiord, 220 m.
Accordinir to a written communication from Mr. Levinsen, S.
oniscoides, Johnst. = S. major Levinsen = .S', arcticus Armauek
Hansen.
Eumenia crassa, Orsted.
The Skjei-stad Fiord IV. 330 in.; The Skjerstad Fioi'd VII,
470—490 m.
Arvnicohi marhid, Lin.
Sund (Beier Fiord) in saud on the beach.
Cli/moie pmetermissn. Malmgeen.
The Kiik Fiord, 100 m.; in large ([uantities. According to
iL\LJH;REN, this species is common on clay bottom in Finmarken.
Xicomache lumbriccdis, Malmgeen.
The Skjerstad Fiord III, 130 m.; The 0gs Fiord I, 100 m.;
Stonnosbotn. 40 — 80 m.; Lyngen III, 300 in.: Kvænangen, 300 —
343 m.
Middane biceps, yi. Saks.
The Skjerstad Fiord III, 23n m.; Landego, 2oo— 400 m.
PcelbnAfiii hijperhorea, Malmgben.
The Skjerstad Fiord I, 30—50 m.; The Kirk Fiord III, 70—
80 m.; The Ostnes Fiord, The Ogs Fiord, luo m.; The Jøkel
Fiord, 100 m.
Pectinaria koreiti, Malmcjken.
Malangen, 3S0 m.
Bidenkap mentions tliis species only from the west and south
coast of Norway. The northern limit must now be moved much
highei-, viz. right up to Malangen.
TrrehelUdes strcimi, M. SaRS.
The Skjerstad Fiord, 230 m.; mouth of Raftsund, 250 m.;
Malangen, 100—200 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.; Kvænangen, 300—
343 m.: The Jokel Fiord II, 80 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 70 m-
Artacama prohoscidea. ^Ialmgeen.
Lyngen III, 300 m.
This species has not often been collected on the Norwegian coast.
Prof. EsMAEK found it at Nakhohnen in the Kristiania Fiord, and
G. 0. Sabs at Lofoten.
TheJepus circinnatiis. Faise.
The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 40—50 m.; The Kirk Fiord IV,
30— .50 m.; Napstrommen, 30 — 40 m.; Henningsværstrømmen, 20—
40 m.; Kvænangen, 90 m.; Breisund, 100 m.; The Porsanger Fiord,
200 m.
Aniphitrite eirmta, Mi'LiiER.
Kvionaniren, 90 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
Am pint rile ipvoiUnKlicK. iL\LMUKEX.
The .Jokel Fiord II, 80 m.
Bidenkap mentions that this species has rarely been found at
Vadso by M. Saes and G. 0. Sars. Thus it is new from Vest
Finmarken.
Terchella dchilis. Malmgkex.
The Ostnes Fiord (1894).
Enchonc jKijiillosa. M. Saks.
Kvænangen, 300 — 343 m.
Clto)ic iufundihuliformis, Kroyek.
The Salten Fiord I, 15—20 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.
Jjii.s//rIto)ic dab/elli. Kollikkh.
Kvænangen, 9(J m.
Bidenkap gives Bodo as the northern limit, this must now be
altered to Kvænangen.
Snhella paronia. Savigny.
The Sag Fiord, 2o0 m.; Gaukovær, 25n m.; Malangen, 100—
200 m.; The Jokel Fiord II. so ni.
Salielln fabricii, Kroyee.
Kvænangen, 90 m.
Potrimilla neijleclu. M. Saes.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord XVI, on
Hydroida: The Jøkel Fiord II, 100 m.; Breisund, 100 m.
The hitherto known southern limit on the Norwegian coast
for this species was Tromsø. It must now be changed to be Beier
Fiord.
Potamilla reniformis, Mullee.
Nordkyn (1894) in numbers.
Leptoclione steenstrupi, Kr()Yeb.
Svolvær (1894).
Filigrana implexa. Berkley.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord II, 230 m.:
Mortsund (Vest Fiord) lOO m.; Nordkyn (1894).
Pomatoceriis triqueter. Murch.
The Jøkel Fiord, SO m.
Common on stones and shells.
Hydroides norvcyica, Gunnerus.
Digermulen, 100—150 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.
Common on stones and shells.
Placostcyus tridentaixs. Fabricius.
Gaukværø, 250 m.; The Jøkel Fiord, 100 m.; Hammerfest (1894).
Bitrupa arietina, Muller.
Rost I, 120 m.; Bålstad, 150 m.; Stene (Vest Fiord), 200 m.;
Ure I (Vest Fiord), 200—250 m.; Svolvær (1894); Gaukværø, 250
m.; Sværholt (1894).
1G4
Stenia.'<pis foi<sor, Simpson.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.
This is a new species of Norwegian fauna. Levinsen/) who
has classified my specimen from the Beier Fiord, gives it the fol-
lowing distribution: Iceland, Greenland and North America.
Gephyrea.
Echiurus pallaxi, Guér.
Sund at the Morsdal Fiord, on tiie beach, several specimens
(Levinsen determ. I.
Bryozoa or Polyzoa,
Determ. by author.
Cheilostomata.
Gemellaria loricaia, Lin.
The Trold Fiord Sund, 30—40 m.; Nordkyn, 30 m.
Menlpea ternata. Ellis and Solander.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord II, 100
—185 m.; Bålstad (The Vest Fiord), 30—50 m.; Mortsund III
(The Vest Fiord), 100 m.; Henningsværstrømmen, 20—40 m.; The
Ostnes Fiord, 130 m.; The 0gs Fiord I, 100 m.; Stønesbotn,
40—80 m.; The Trold Fiord Sund, 30—40 m.; The North Cape
(1S94); The Porsanger Fiord, 70 m.
It was var. gyacilig which occurred at most of the above
mentioned places.
Menipea jeffreysi, Norman.
Mortsund III, 100 m.; Moskeustrømmen, 200 m.
Menipea normani. Nordgaard.
T^he sea NW of Røst, 700 m.
This species is easily recognized by the pedunculate avicularia
on the front wall.
Scrupocellarki scahra, I. van Beneden.
Bålstad, 30—50 m., Grøtø, G— 24 m.; The Kanstad Fiord,
30—90 m.; The Trold Fiord Sund, 30—40 m.; The North Cape
(1H94); Nordkyn (1894).
Cuberea dim, Fleming.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; Bålstad (The Vest Fiord),
30— 50 m.; Tire Østnes Fiord ; Malangen, 100— 200 m.; Stønesbotn,
40 — SO m. ; Kvænangen TI, 90 m.; Ingøhavet, 300 m.; Breisund,
lOo in.; Tiie Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.; Nordkyn (1894).
Bicellaria aldcr'i, Busk.
Moskcnsti'ommcn, 200 m. ; Reine I (The Vest Fiord), 150 m.;
Tlic Sea NW of Rost, 7oo m.
BiKptht clo)igahi, Norhgaard.
The P.cier Fiord, 50—150 m.; Røst II, 150 m.; The Kirk
Fiord III, 70—80 m.; Svolvær (1894); Malangen, 100—200 ni.;
Breisund, 100 m.; Mehavn (1894).
') Cf. Levinsen, Systematisk-geografisk ovevsigt over di' uortliske Annitlata,
Gephijrea, Chætoijnatld et Brilatwghssi. Viil. Blod. Nat. Foren. Kjolieiihavn,
1882 and 188.-5.
Biigiila pu)-jwrof'nicta. Norman.
Malangen, 100—200 m.
Bugiihi murragana. Johnston.
Pl. III, fig. 8.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m. ; Moskenstrommen, 90 m.; The
Kirk Fiord II, 50 m. ; The Øgs Fiord I, 100 m.; Malangen, 100
—200 m.; Stønesbotn, 40—80 m.; Breisund, 100 m.; The Trold
Fiord Sund, 30—40 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.; Nordkyn
(1894).
Kinetoshas smitti, Dan. and Koren.
The Ostnes Fiord; The Øxsund, 100 m.; The Sag Fiord,
200 m.; Tranødybet, 607—640 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.
Lofoten was the hitherto known northern limit for this species.
It must now be changed to Malangen.
CcUaria fistnlosu, Lin.
Moskeustrømmen, 90 m.; Malangen, 100 — 200 m. The northern
limit is now moved from Lofoten to Malangen.
Fhtsira caiiiat^ed. Ellis and Solander.
PI. IIL fig. 1.
Bålstad (The Vest Fiord), 100 m.; Svolvær (1894): Breisund,
100 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 ra.; Mehavn (1894).
Fhisfra secnrifrons, Pallas.
PI. Ill, fig. 2.
Rost II, 150 m.; Moskenstrommen, 90 m.; Mortsund (The
Vest Fiord), 100 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; Breisund, 100 m.;
The Porsangei' Fioi'd. 200 m.; Vardo (on Ferten IdamVicus).
Fhi^tra viemhranaceo-truneata, Smitt.
Pl. III, figs. 3, 4.
The Skjerstad Fiord XVI; The Skjerstad Fiord HI. 230 m.;
The Øgs Fiord I, 100 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.: 1'he Trold
Fiord Sund, 30—40 m.; The North Cape (1894).
Fhistra harleel. Busk.
PI. III. figs. n. (1
Rost II, 150 Ul.; Arno (The Vest Fiord), 300—400 m.
Fhistra ahgssii-ola. M. Sars.
PI. Ill, Fig. 7,
The sea NW of Røst, 700 m.; Reine (The Vest Fiord), 100
m.; Bålstad (The Vest Fiord), 150 m.; Mortsund (The Vest Fiord),
100 m.; Brettesnes— Skroven, 350—400 m.; The 0x Sund, 600 m.;
The Sag Fiord, 200 m.
MciiihrdtniKii-a'l pilosii. Lin.
Napstrommen (Lofoten), lo in.; Svolvier (on algae). Groto (on
algae); The Tiohl Fiord Siind (on algae).
Memhranipora memhranaeea, Lin.
The Trold Fiord Sund, 30 — 4o m., on algae; Nordkyn, on
Laminaria.
1) Norman, in bis work Notes on the Natural History of East Finmark
(Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Ser. 7, Vol. XF), has divided the genus Memhraniporci
into several others. \ li.-ive not yet had time, however, to form a definite
opinion about this division, so I prefer here to retain the old nomenclature.
Bottom-Life.
Mciiihmnipora Vincaia, Lin.
llanuiiorfest (1S1)4).
Moiiliranipora arctica, D'Okhic.ny.
Kvu'imnyeri, on alg^ac; The Nortli Cape (1894); Nordkyn (1894).
Mc»il»(i)iipurft crdticulit, Aldeh.
On an ascidian near Hammerfest (1894); The Lakse Fiord
(collected by Spakkk Schneider).
Mcmhran'tpora ri/mlKicfoiDiis, IIincks.
The North Cape (1894) on alirae.
Memhnmqmm infuluim. S. Wnon.
The Ostnes Fiord. 50 — 70 in.; Ditiormiilen, 100—150 m.;
Stoncsbotn. 40— 8n m.: The Jokel Fiord III, 100 m.; Hammerfest
(1894).
MrnihriDi'iiHim mlnu.r. Brsic.
I'l. Ill, fiu-. II).
Rost n, 150 m.. on Wahllicimid : Mosken.strømmen II, 150 m.,
on Wahlheiniia : Digermnlen. 100— loi» m., on stone; Malangen,
1011 — 200 m.. on WdhJIieimia.
Lepralia (Menihraniporella) nitida, .Johnston.')
Rost II, 150 m.; Nordkyn (1894).
Gcphyrotes (CrihnTum) nifido-p/mcfata, Smitt.
Moskenstrommen II, 150 m.; Nordkyn (1894). Loven had
specimens from Hammerfest.
Crihrilina c-ryptooecium, Noeman.-)
The K.jolle Fiord (1894); Nordkyn (1894).
Crihrilina aiiuulata. Fabk.
The North Cape (1894).
Microporella ciliata. Pallas.
Svolvær (1894), Sværholt (1894).
Microporella impressu, Audouin.
Inuohavet. 300 m., on stones; Breisund, 100 m.. on stones.
I)or//iiorclla^) spatulifera, Smitt.
Breisund, loo m.. on Ehijnchonella psittaæa. An excellent
illustration of tlie zooecia in this peculiar species, will be found
in ^^'Al•E^!s (liryozoa from Franz-Josef Land- Journ. Linn. Soc,
XXVIII, pl. 12. titr. 0).
Harnieria*) xcutulaia. Busk.
Nordkyn (1894), on stones.
TegMroiloma tjracile. M. Saks.
M(ntsund III, 100 m.; Digermulen, 100—150 ni.; The Sa,<?
Fiord, 200 m., on dead bi'anches of Mdella hippuris: Tranodybet,
607-640
100—200
on dead branches
luyohavet, 300 m.
)f Isidcllu liippurif: Malans/en,
1) Cfr. Norman, Finnmrk Polyzoa, p. 100.
2) Notes on the Natural History of East Finmark. Aun. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
.Ser. 7, Vol. XII, p. 102.
3) Norman, Finmark Polyzoa. p. lOH.
■•) NOR.MAN, Finmark Polyzoa. p. 107,
Farina tubitlosa, Nousian.
Hammerfest (1894); The Lakse Fiord (collected by Sparhe-
Schneidek).
Hipjjotlioa lii/aliiia, Lin.
Groto. <•>— 24 m., on akae; The Trokl Fiord Sund, 30— 40 m.,
on alyae; Breisund, 100 m.. on an a.^cidian. This species has some-
times been mentioned as a Sclii-oporella. sometimes as a Celleporella.
HijilKitlind (liraricata. LAMoritor.x.
Tromso (collected iiy Schneideu); The Lakse Fiord (collected
by Schneider).
Sclii-oporella ahlcri, Busk.
Moskenstrommen, 90 m., on stones; The Ostnes Fiord, SO-
TO m.; Hammerfest (1894); Ingohavet, 300 ra.; Sværholt (1894).
Schizoporclla s-iiiuosa, BrsK.
PI. Ill, flgs, 9. 10,
iloskenstrommen, 90 m., on stones and Waldheimia; The
Ostnes Fiord, 50—70 m., on stones and coal; Digermulen, 100—
150 m., on stones; Malangen, 100 — 200 m., on Modiola modiolus.
Operculum (cfr. fig. 10) presents a divergent appearance from the
genus Schi.:oporcJld. and the species sinuosa ought indeed to be
removed.
Schizoporclla linearis. Hassall.
PI, V, fig, 26,
Moskenstrommen, 90 m., on shells.
Schizoporella n)iicor)ii.s. .Iohnston.
PI. V, figs. 23—20, 27.
„Glea" (Rost), on the beach.
The specimens from Røst differ somewhat from those I have
collected in the Hjelte Fiord, near Bergen, but the variations are
not so great as to make a new species necessary. Besides tig. 23
agrees well with Hincks' figures in Brit. Mar. Pol.
On comparing opereula') of Schizoporella aiiicornis from the
Hjelte Fiord and from Røst, it Avas found that those from the
latter place were somewhat larger. (Cfr. tigs. 24, 27). The
zooecia in the specimens from Røst also had a rather wider sinus
on the proximal edge of the oral aperture. The species has a
\\-ide distribution and probably varies very considerably. Lofoten
is up to the present the northern known limit, both for unicornis
and linearis.
Schitoporclla Candida. Smitt.
Pl, IV tigs (>, 7.
Mollia rutf/aris. forma Candida. Smitt. Ofvers. Kgl. Vet.
Akad. Forh. 18G7 (Bihaiig) pp. 1C>. 107. pi. 25, fig. 83.
1) It is practical to measure the maximum breailth (Ij, pl. V, figs. 26, 27) and
the ma.ximum height (h), when comparing opercula. These measurements may
also be found useful in determining species, for, not taking their absolute value
into account, in some species b wU be larger than h (b ^- h), in others they
will be equal in size (b = h) and in others less (b < h). It is also somethnes
useful to take similar measurements of the ma.xinium breadth and height of the
mandibles.
106
O. Nordgaard.
Malaiiiren, 100—200 m., on stone; Hammerfest (1894) on stone.
1 have not had any opportunity of seeing Stimpson's work
(Invertebr. of Gr. Manan), so that I am unable to form any op-
inion as to the correctness of Smitt's conclusion that his f. Can-
dida is the form described by Stimpson as Lejmdia Candida. But
as Veeeiel*) classifies Stimpson's species as a Smittia, and also re-
marks that „this species has been entirely misunderstood by Smitt
and others owing to the imperfection of the original description",
it is certainly safest to give Smitt's form the designation which I
liave used here.
Schizoporella stor mi, n. sp.
PI. V, figs. 1, 2.
On a stone form the North Cape (1894), a Schizoporella was
found, which I suppose to be a new species. The zooecia, which
were rather broad in proportion to their length, had a single row
of pores along the margin, together with a few small pores on
the frontal side (cf. flg. 1). No ooecia were present in the colo-
nies, but large avicularia were found under and a little to the side
of the oral aperture. The mandible was very pointed. The sur-
face of the zooecia was finely granulated and had weak radial
stripes. The zooecia were separated by distinct lines, and it may
be mentioned as a peculiarity that there is a crossline (1, fig. 1)
by the oral aperture. I think the species will easily be kept di-
stinct from others on account of the distinct opercular ribs (o. r.,
fig. 2). I have this species both from the North Cape and Ham-
merfest.
1 have taken the liberty of naming this species after the
manaaer of the zoological collection, V. Stoem, in Trondhjem.
Schizoporella hexagona, n. sp.
PI. V, tigs. 12, 13.
Formed a little crust on stone from Kvænangen II, 90 m.
It is possibly this species which Smitt has illustrated on pi.
2.5, fig. 79-) under the name of Mollia vulgaris, forma ansata.
It is easily recognized by its six-sided zooecia whose frontwall
is punctured, but not perforated. The zooecia are separated by
distinct lines. On my specimen there were neither oociea nor
avicularia.
A characteristic feature of this species is the lai'ge proximal
lobe of the operculum (fig. 13). In the operculum b < h.
Srhizoporetla levinseni, n. sp.
PI. V, figs. 3, 4.
Kvamangen H, 90 m., on stone.
^rhe zoai'ium formed a crust on a stone. In a dried state, the
iiuijority of the zooecia were of a deep red coloui'. The zooecia
liavo a few pores on the frontal wall, and between the pores
tlicrc are hollows (reminding one of a thimble). The ooecia,
which are nearly ball shaped, are fui-nished with deeper hol-
lows, but are not pierced. There were no aviculai'ia on the
colonies which I have had an opportunity of examining. The
IJi'oximal border of the oral aperture is straight witli a marked
sinus in the middle.
The operculum has a lobe which answers exactly to tlic sinus
mentioned (fig. 4). In the operculum b > h.
•) Proc. U. S. N. M., Vol. II, 187!
-) Krit. Forteckn. Overs. Kg). Ve
p. 192.
Akad.
18»i7 (Bihang).
I have taken the liberty of calling this species after the In-
spector of the Museum in Copenhagen, G. M. R. Levinsen.
ScMzoimreUa reticulato-panctatn, Hincks.
PI. IV, figs. l(i. 17.
1867. Escharclla porifera, forma edentuta, Smitt, Krit. Forteckn.
etc. Ofv. Kgl. Vet. Akad. Forh. 18(57. (BihangI, p. 9,
pi. 24, fig. 39.
1877. Lepralia reticulato-punctata, Hincks, Polyzoa from Ice-
land and Labrador. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4,
vol. 19, p. 103, pi. 10, figs. 3, 4.
1884. Lepralia reticulato-punctata, Loeenz, Bryozoen von Jan
Mayen, p. 88.
1887. Escharclla reticulato-pimciata, Levinsen, Dijmplnia Togtets
zool-bot. Udbytte, p. 318, pi. 27, fig. 4.
1895. Smittia reticulato-punctata, Noedgaaed, Syst. fort., Berg.
Mus. Aarb. 1894—95, No. II, p. 27.
1897. Smittia reticulato-punctata, Bidenkap, Bryozoen von Ost-
Spitzbergen. Zool. Jahrb., vol. 10, p. 623.
1900. Schizoporella luirmsworthi, Watees, Bryozoa from Franz
Josef Land. Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool., vol. 28, p. 65, pi.
9, figs. 10—12.
1903. „LepraUa" reiiculato-punctata, Noeman, Notes on the
Nat. Hist, of East Finmark. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 7, vol. 12, p. 122.
Hammerfest (1894); the North Cape (1894); the Pors-
angerfjord, 200 m., Nordkyn (1894).
In my list of Norwegian Cheilostomata I entered this spe-
cies as a Smittia, but on closer examination it became clear that
the species cannot be left there. Neither can it be considered to
be a Lepralia, as Hincks does.
I at first thought of setting it up as the type for a new genus,
together with Smitt's Escharclla porifera, forma typica and the
one which I described as Smittia lineata, but on further consider-
ation, I have not ventured to start a new genus. In all three
species mentioned, there is a distinct sinus on the proximal margin
of the oral aperture, and notwithstanding that the opercula in
these tiiree species vary from that which is usual in the genus
Schizoporella, they have, however, at any rate a trace of a proxi-
mal lobe. Waters has described a form, ScMzoporclla harmsworthi.
from Franz Josef Land, which he has identified with S.mitt's
Escharclla legentili, forma prototypa. This can hardly be correct.
True, the mouth in young zooecia of forma prototypa may bear a
certain resemblance to the oral aperture in Watees' species, but
there is a groat ditt'ei'ence in the developed zooecia, harmsworthi
having a sinus on the proximal margin (cfr. Watees 1. c. pi. 9,
fig. 10), while forma jjrototypa has a mucro (cfr. Bidenkap, Bryo-
zoen V. Ost Spitzbergen, pi. 25, fig. 3, and also the present work
pi. IV, fig. 24).
Besides, in haniixicorthi the ooecia are pei'foi'ated (cfr. Waters,
pi. 9, fig. 10), wliile in f. prototypa they are provided with hollows,
reminding one of a thimble. On the other hand, there seems to
bo complete resemblance between harmsworthi and Smitt's Eschar-
clla p)orifera, forma edentata, but as this form was raised to the
rank of a species by Hincks in 1877, harmsworthi must give way
to reticulato-punctata which form I consider, as does also Watees.
to be a Schizoporella. In one specimen from the Porsanger Fiord,
I could plainly see the oral glands at the opening of the tentacular
sheath, as illustrated by Watees.
Schi^oporcUa porifmi. S.mitt.
I'l. \\ lig. iw.
EgcluDrUa porifmi. tbniia li/pim. Smitt. Krit. fOrteckn.,
OtVcivs. K.!.;!. Vet. Akad. I'Yuli. IS(;7 i l!iliaii-i, |k !1, pi. 24, fi-'s.
30— ;32.
As to other synonym.s, vU: Nokman, Notes on the Nat. Hist,
of East Finmark, p. 121.
Napstrommen (I^otbton). ;50— 40 m. ; Malangen, 100—200 m.;
The .lokel Fiord 11. Sn ni.; Hammerfest (1894); The Kjolle Fiord
(1894); Mehavn (1894).
Both the shape of the mouth and the opiTculuiii with its pi'oxi-
mal lobe, prove that there is a relationship to Sclu^opurdlu, (PI. V,
fig-. 32). It must, at any rate, be more correct to classify this
species as a Schizoporella than as a Smittina or Escharu (Lppralia).
The southern limit of the species which has been found up to the
present is Lofoten; its distribution is arctic.
Schizoporella lincata, Nokdgaard.
PI. V, figs. 33, 34.
1S95. Smitt'ia Uneata, Nordgaaed, System, fortcsin. Bersens Mus.
Aarb. 1894—95, nr. 2, p. 27, pi. 2, fig. 2.
1903. ..Smifthi" Ihieafn. Nokman, Notes on the Nat. Hist, of
East Finmark, Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. 12,
p. 122, pi. 9, tigs. 14, 15.
Nordkyu (1894).
Norman has taken this species in East Finmai'k, on
hWliaropsig rosacea, dredged off Vadsø. He remarks also (1. c.) : —
., Other specimens in my collection are one received from Smitt
taken at Spitzbergen, and named Escharella auriculata; others from
the Gulf of St. Lawrence (Whiteaves), and off Holsteinborg, Green-
laud, in 57 fathoms.'"
From this it will be seen that lincata has an arctic distribution,
<uid it is probable that what lias been stated to be Schizoporella
auriculata, Hassal from these latitudes should be transferred to
Uneata. The two species appear to be very closely allied, so that
it is easily explained that the arctic form (Uneata) is confused with
the more southern one (auriculata).
Leieschara coarctatu, M. Sars.
Moskenstrommen. 90 m.; Malangen, loo- -200 in.; Kvænangen
n, 90 ui.
Leieschara plana, Dawson.
The Jokel Fiord H, SO m.; Kvænangen, Sværholt (1894).
Norman') has made it clear that Myriozoum erustaæum, Smitt
= Lepralia plana, Dawson. Waters is-) probably right in placing
this species under the genus Scliizoporella.
Eiichara poUta, Norman.
Lepralia jwlita. Norman, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 3, vol.
13, p. 87, pi. 11, fig. 1.
Hammerfest (1894), on stone.
In his work on „the Polyzoa of East Fiimiai-k", iVora which
sevei-al quotations are taken in this paper, Norman lias given the
reasons for substituting Eschara for Hincks' genus Lepralia. The
synonyms for Lepralia polita may be found in my i)aper: — „Die
') Finmark Pol., \<. 110.
3) Bryozoa from F. Josef Land, p. 64.
Uryozoen des westliciicn Norweuens". Die Meeresfauna von Her-
gen, p. S7.
Eschara moskcnsi.H, n. sp.
PI. IV, figs. 3— .1.
Moskenstrommen 11, on .stone, 150 m.
Tiiis species is particularly noticeable on account of its laigc,
wide zooecia (fig. 3), which are scantily pierced with small holes
in the sides. The oral apertui'e is partly surrounded by 4—6 short
spines. On the surface of the ooecium (fig. 4) there are fine punc-
tures, but they are not pierced through. The operculum (fig. 5)
is quite solid, and the muscle insertions are very distinct.
It is probable that S:«itt') has this form in his paper of 1871,
under the name Discoporu meyastoma, for fig. 26 shows no slight
resemblance to the above mentioned species. I have, however,
given a new name, as I considei' that Smitt's Discopora metfastoma
includes two species, neither of them being identical to Lepralia
megastoma. Busk. (Cfr. Smitt's illustrations and description just
quoted with Ci-ag Polyzoa, p. 55, pi. 8, fig. 5).
Eschara nordlandica. n. sp.
PI. IV, tigs. 32—35.
Kvænangen II, 90 m., on stone.
The zooecia large, but not so broad as in the preceding spe-
cies. The front wall is perforated by conspicuous pores and there
are no spines on the edge of the oral aperture. Under the aper-
ture there is a protrusion (umbo). There are raised lines between
the zooecia (fig. 32) nearly all over. The ooecia are punctured,
but not perforated. The operculum is quite solid and has distinct
ribs (fig. 35). In fig. 33, it may be seen how these ribs lie against
the condyles of the oral aperture.
It is not improbable that this species is included under Smitt's
definition Discopora megastoma. In Smitt's paper of 1S71, the figs.
24, 25 show no little resemblance to the above mentioned species.
In his description (1. c, p. 1129), Smitt also mentions a protusion
at the front of the zooecium. But there are hardly sufficient grounds
for supposing that this species is identical to Lepralia megastoma,
Busk. His species has, for instance, „a single row of channelled
pores".") On the other hand, there is a stronger resemblance
between Eschara nordlandica and Eschara (Lepralia) pertusa. Esper,
according to Hincks' characterisation of this species in Brit. Mar.
Pol. (1888), p. 305, pi. 43, figs. 4, 5. But the shape of the oral
aperture seems to be different, as well as the puncturing of the
ooecia. I think it is quite justifiable to enter it as a new species,
for I share the opinion that less hai'm is done by introducing a
new name for a known species than by classing two diffei-ent
species under an old name.
The name Lepralia megastoma is used, in addition to the pla-
ces above mentioned, also by Lorenz'') and Bidenkap'*), the latter
also mentions the species as being a Mucronella. Hidenkap re-
marks that „die stark verkalkten Zooecien habeu die ganze Yor-
derseite mit grossen Poren durchlOchert", from wiiich it appeai-s
extremely likely that the species, which J^idenkap had before him
(from Spitzbergen) was E. nordlandica.
1) Overs. Kgl. Vet. Akad. Forh., 1871, p. 1129, pi. 21, figs. 24— 26.
2) frag Pol., p. 55. Cfr. pi. 8, fig. 5.
') Brvozoen von Jan Mayen. Beobachtungsergebnisse der ostreicli. Polar-
station Jan Mayen, III B., p. 89.
*) Fauna arctica (von EoMER u. Schacdinn), B. I. p. .521.
168
0. Nordgaard.
Escliara sincera, Smitt.
n. HI, figs. 12—14
Bålstad (Lofoten); The Østnes Fiord, 50—70 m., on coal;
Diaermuleu, 150 m., on stone; The Lyngen Fiord, 250 m.; The
Jokel Fiord II, 80 m.; The North Cape (1894); Mehavn (1894).
I have pre\iously classified this species as belonging to the
gcniLs Muaronella, and although, I now entei' it as an Escliara,
it is not at all because it can be said to be any typical form of
this genus.
Discopora (Llmhonala) rernicot<n. Espee.
In the beach at „Glea", Røst.
I have previously found this interesting foi'ra near Bergen.
The northern limit for the species is henceforth Lofoten.
Diticopora (MncroncUaj pavonella, Aldee.')
The Kirk Fiord, 100 m.; The Trold Fiord Sund, 40 m.; Svær-
iiolt vl894). From Spaeee Schneidee I have received colonies
which he took in the Lakse Fiord.
Porella miiiuta, Noeman.
Groto, (i— 24 m., on algae.
NiiE.MAN was the first to find this species in Norway, he took
it in the Bog Fiord and the Lang B'iord (East Finmark).
Pordla concinna, Busk.
J^i'eisund, lOu m., on Rhijnchonella ])siitacea; Mehavn (1894),
on shells.
Porella aperta. Boeck.-)
The Beier Fiord, 30 — 150 m., on Pexfen vitreus.
Porella acuilrostris. Smitt. ^)
Svolvær (1894), on coal from the bottom.
The species is a new one to our fauna.
Porella princeps, Noeman.
PI. IV, figs. 21—23.
1892. Monoporclla spinuliffra. var. praeclara. Hincks, „The
Polyzoa of St. Lawrence". Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist.,
ser. 6, vol. 9, p. 152, pi. 8, fig. 3.
1903. Porella princeps, Noeman, „Notes on the Natural History
of East Finmark". Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7,
vol. 12, p. 114, pi. 9, figs. 8—11.
In the work already mentioned of Noeman, he has availed
himself of the opportunity of describing „a Greenland Porella'\ to
wliich he has given the name above. This species has now also
licen shown to be European; for on looking through some dried
material from Mehavn (Finmark, 1 894), I found a little red colony
on Neptunea despiecta. There is perfect agreement with Nokman's
description, but so as to prevent any doubt with regard to identity,
1 have illustrated the characteristic operculum (PI. IV, fig. 21).
Below the oral aperture of the zooecium, a swelling is indi-
cated, both in HiNCKs' and Noeman's figures. P.clow the swollen
frontal wall is the chambei' of the avicularium. From this chamber
') Cfr. S. F. Harmer, On the Morphology of the Cheilostoumta. Quart.
Journ. Mic. Sci. Vol. 46, N. S., p. 296.
■2) Cfr. Norman, Finmark Polyzoa, p. 112 and Waters, F. J. B., p. 83,
pi. 10, figs. 6, 7.
3) Cfr. Waters, F. J. B., p. 83, pi. 10, figs. 1—5.
a passage goes to the lateral walls. (PL IV, fig. 23). The mand-
ible of the avicularium is very small. (PL IV, fig. 22).
This species has pre\iously been mentioned from St. Lawrence
(HiNCKs). Noeman speaks of it (1. c, p. 115) as being „taken by
the Valorous", 1875, off Holsteinborg, W. Greenland, ,,in 57
fathoms". Mehavn in Finmark now comes as a third locality. I
have also found a little colony on a stone from Hammerfest (1894).
Porella glaclata, Watees.
PI. V, fig. ,5—7.
1868. Escliara cervicornis, forma lepraliae, Smitt, Ofv. Kgl. Vet.
Akad. F8rh. 1867 (Bihang), p, 23, pL 26, figs, 136, 137.
1900, Porella glaciata, Watees, Bryozoa from Franz Josef Land.
Journ, Linn, Soc, Zool, Vol. 28, p. 78. text figure 2, 3,
Mehavn (1894), on Neptunea despecta.
As a synonym for his Porella glaciata, Watees adds, in the
work above referred to, the designation, followed by a note of
interrogation, Escliara cervircornis, f. lepraliae. Smitt.
Watees remarks (1. c. p. 78): — «The peristome is raised at
the side, the avicularian chamber is wide and distinct with the
mandible wthin the peristome, but on the top of a more or less
tubular projection." If this belongs to the description of glaciata.
it is not correct. But, on the other hand, this description is ap-
plicable to Porella propinqua. I have no doubt that Smitt's forma
lepraliae and Watees' glaciata are identical. It also seems to be
certain that it was glaciata which I took at Mehavn in Finmark.
Smitt's specimens were from Greenland, so that the distribution
of the species as at present known is: — Greenland, Finmark,
Franz Josef Land.
Porella strutna, Noeman.
Bålstad (Lofoten), 80 m. ; Digermulen, 150 m.; Malangen,
100—200 m.; The Jøkel Fiord, 100 m.; Ingohavet, 300 m.; The
North Cape (1894); The Porsanger Fiord, 70 m.
Porella lævis, Fleming.
PI. Ill, fig. 15.
Moskenstremmen, 90 m.; Bålstad, 150 m.; Mortsund III,
100 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m,; The North Cape (1894),
Porella saccata, Busk.')
PI. rn, fig. 16.
Breisund, 100 m.; The North Cape (1894); T'he Porsanger
Fiord, 200 m.
Porella propinqua, Smitt,
Pl. IV, figs. 18—20 b.
Escliara propinqua, Smitt (part.), Ofvers. af Kgl. Vet. Akad. Forh.,
1867 (Bihang), pp. 22, 146, pi. 26, figs. 126—129.
Lepralia propinqua, Hincks, Polyzoa from Iceland and Labrador.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. 19, p. 103, pi. 10,
fig.s. 5—7.
Smittia propinqua, Noedgaakd, Syst. fortegn, marine polyzoa. p.
27. Berg. Mus. Aarbog, 1894—1895.
Smittia piropinqua, Bidenkap, Bryozoen von Ost-Spitzbergen, Zool.
Jahrbucher, B. 10, 1897, p. 624.
Smittia propinqua, Bidenkap, Die Bryozoen, II. Theil. Fauna
arctica (von Romee und Schandinn), B. I, p. 518.
Hammerfest (1894), on hydroids and Bugula murrayana: The
North Cape (1894), on hydroids and Menipca: Mehavn (1894).
') Cfr. Waters, F. J. B. ; ji. 81.
1*59
lender the n.anie Eschara propinqiin. Smitt lias entered two
forms whicli undoubtedly are separate species. In the explanation
(if the illustrations it is mentioned that tius. 131 — 134 represent
zooei'ia of specimens found in Finmark on Flio^tra. These belontf
to the species which Hixcks later described as Porella probosriili'H.
hi the latter species, the zooecium is unpcrforated, while it has a
characteristic perforation (PI. l\'. tii;. "Jo bl in projunqud.
Tn ]injp'ui(jnii tiie peristome is very elevated on the sides of
the oral aperture, and the operculum has a characteristic shape
(■JO b). Another peculiarity of propiiujiio is the occurrence of small
perforations on the backside of the zoarium (tiir. 191.
The lateral wall of the zooecium has two multipored rosette-
plates.
Porella prohoscidea. Htncks.
PI. IV, fios. 8—11.
Eschara propinqiia. Smitt (part), ()fvers. Kg], ^'et. A kad. FOrh.
1867 (Bihang), p. 22, pi. 26, flg-s. 130—134.
Porella prohoscidca, Hixcks, The Polyzoa of the St. Lawrence.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 6, vol 1, p. 223, pi. 14,
tig. 4.
Porella proboscklea. Nokdgaard, Syst. forteg. marine polyzoa. Berg.
Mus. Aarb. 1894—95, p. 25, pi. 1, fig. 4.
Porella slenei. var. prohoseidea. Waters. F. .T. B., p. 79, pi. 11,
figs. 17, 18.
Hammerfest (1894); The North Cape (1894); Nordkyn (1894);
Mehavn (1894).
The avicularian rostrum is much larger in this species than in
the foregoing one. (Cfr. figs. 8 and 18).
The Zooecium is poreless, and so is the basal wall of the
zooecium.
The opercula are also different with regard to shape. Probos-
eidea is so different from slrnei that the former can scarcely he
considered to be a variety of the latter.
Pulmkrlliirid ukenel var. fridens. Busk.
PI. IV, fio. 12.
Mo.skenstrominen, 90 m. ; Malangen, 100 — 200 m.; The Pors-
anger Fiord, 200 m.
With regard to this variety. I beg to refer to my paper: —
Die Bryozoen des westliehen Noi-wegens. Meeresfauna von Bergen,
p. 89.
The operculum is, however, not very carefully illusti-ated there
(pi. I. fig. 14), for which reason I give another illustration here
(fig. 121.
Palmirellarin slrnei var. bicornu, Busk.
PI. IV. fi-. l.s.
Lepralia bicornis, Busk, A Mon. of the foss. Pol. of the Crag,
p. 47, pi. 8, figs. 6, 7.
The Jøkel Fiord III, 100 m.
I have also taken this variety in the Troiidhjem Fiord.
Escharopsis (Escharoides) mrsi. S.mitt.
Tromsø Sound, 70 m.
From Spakre Schneider, I got a colony which was 17..5 cm.
in length and 8 cm. in width.
The cavity of the colony served as a hidingplace for Ophio-
pholis aculeata, CribreUa etc. The colony itself was covered with
Thinaria thiiia and other hvdroids.
.Muskciisl
Kv;f
/'.'■•'(■harops-is rosacea, liusK.
PI. m, Hg. 17.
I. 00 ui.: Digermulen, loo l.')U ni.; .Malan-cii,
aiiL'-cn II. 1(0 III.: HrcisinKl. loo in.
/'sfinloflii.stra -soUda, Stimpson.')
Kvænangen 11, 90 m. ; The Porsanger Fiord. 70 m.
Monojiorrlla sjiimiltfcra, Hincks.-)
PI. IV, li^^s. u, m.
Forinn cilinta, forma dura, S.mitt, (Jfvers. af Ki:l. \'et. Akad. Fiiili.
1867 (Bihang) pp. 6, 61, pi. 24, ti-. 17.
Discopont cntratii. Smitt, Ofvers. af Kgl. Vet. .Akad. FOrli. 1871.
p. 1127, pi. 21, figs. 20—23.
In my list of the Norwegian Bryozoa (Bergens Mus. Aarb.
1894 — 95). I have entered this species as Mucronella cruenta.
Norm AX, as I, with Smitt took Norman's Lepralia cruenta to be
the same as Discopora cruenta. Smitt. I had, however, noticed
at that time that there was a resemblance between Discopora cru-
enm. Smitt and Mucronella spinHlifera, Hincks. The identity of
these two forms has later been confirmed by Hincks and Norman.
It must, however, be observed that Smitt both mentions and illu-
.strates a single row of marginal pores on the zooecia, while
Hincks'') does not even hint at their presence. In other respects
the resemblance is striking, and the only po.ssible explanation is
that Hincks has overlooked the marginal pores. On PI. TV, fig.
15 the arrangement of the marginal pore-chambers will be seen.'*)
The species is known from St. Lawrence, Greenland, Spitzbergeu
and King Charles' Land.') I found it to be quite common on stones
at Hammerfest in ls94.
EscharcUa immersa. Flemin(; = Mucronella (Lepralia) peachi,
.lOHNSTON.")
PI. IV. t\'i. -11.
Moskeastrommen II, 15o m.: Malangen, 100 — 200 m. (var.
oclodeniala).
Efclian-lla renfricosa, Hassall.
PI. IV, Hg-. 28.
Moskenstrommen II, 150 in.: SvoIv;er (1894), on coal; The
Ostnes Fiord, 50 — 70 m., on stone and shells, Hammerfest (1894)
on stones.
Escliarelln hupicafa. Noh.m.vn.
PI. IV. tiix. 29.
Moskenstrommen II. 15o in.; The Ostnes Fiord 50 — 70 m., on
stone; Malangen, 100— 2oo m., on stone, Hammerfest (1894).
LWIiarella ab//ssicola. Nou.m.vn.
Pl. IV, fi- .■ill
The Tys Fiord I, 500 in., on Loplwliclia prolifera; Kv;pnangen
II, 90 in., on .shells.
121)
1) Refer to Normax
-) Cf. Norman (1. c. p. 115).
^) The Polyzoa of St. Lawrence. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser.
p. 4:31. pl. 21, fig. 3.
■•) Cfr. Levinsen, Studies on Brvozoa, Vid. Med Nat. Hist. Foren
hagen, 1902, (Sep.), p. 10.
^) Cfi-. BiDENKAP. „Die Bryozoen". Fauna Arctica, B. I, Lief. :
") Cfr. Norman (I. c. p. 118).
22
in Copen-
170
O. Nordgaard.
Escharella labiata, Boeck.
Pl. IV, figs. 25, 26, 31.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Kirk Fiord III, 70—80
m. ; Svolvær (1894), on coal; Malangen, 100— 200 m., on Betepora
cdlulosa: The Jøkel Fiord 11, SO m.; Breisund, 100 m., on Bek-
2Jora cellulofsa: The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.; Sværholt (1894);
Mehavn (1894).
In this species the basis of the ooeeium is perforated (fig. 26).
Lahiata is different from ahyssicola in that it has several rows of
marginal pores (fig. 25).
The Norwegian species of this genus can fairly easily be dis-
tinguished by the help of the oral denticle, as this varies both in
form and size in the species which I have had an opportunity of
examining (figs. 27- 31).
Phjilurtclbi perisfonidta. n. sp.
PI. V. tiu>-. 28— .SI.
The Jokel Fiord II, 80 m., on Wahlheimia.
The genus Phylaciella was started by Hincks, and it is cha-
racterized as follows in the Brit. Mar. Pol. (p. 356): — „Zooeeia
with the primary orifice more or less semicirculai-, the lower margin
usually dentate; peristome much elevated, not produced or chan-
nelled in front. No avicularia. Zoai'ium (in British species) in-
crusting."
As belonging to the British fauna, Hixcks mentions three
species, lahrosa, collaris and eximki. Of these, lahrosa is stated to
have a porous front wall and a «triplet" of oral denticles. Collaris
has neither pores nor denticles, cxiinia is provided with marginal
poi'es.
On Wahlheiiiiia from the Jokel Fiord, a form was found which,
on account of its unusually elevated peristome, suggested FhylacteUa.
On most of zooecia there was a single row of marginal pores, and
it corresponded so far to eximia (fig. 28), but differed from it in
having quite smooth oociea (fig. 29). Further, the peristome was
elevated to the same height and thus was not provided with lateral,
triangular lobes as is the case in exhniu. The specimen from the
Jokel Fiord also had small avicularia with semicircular mandible
(fig. 30). On young zooeciea the avicularia are quite plainly seen
(fig. 29), but they are not so easily seen on older individuals wliich
have the large collar below the oral aperture.
According to the diagnosis of the genus made by Hincks,
there should be no avicularia, but as the resemblance between the
species from the Jokel Fioitl and the hitherto described PhylacteUa
species is striking in other respects, it is, I think, most practical
to extend the limits of the genus to include also those species which
have avicularia.
The oral denticle (fig. 31) is similar in shape to that of Escha-
rella lahiata (PL IV, fig. 31), but it is much narrower. Below the
oial apei'ture, tliere is a swelling for the avicularian chamber, which
is connected wilii the surface by help of a few pores (fig. 28).
Escharoides'^) jadsoni, Wateks.
PI. Ill, fig. li».
Muci-onella coceinia, Bidenkap, Bryzoen von Ost-8pitzbei-gen. Zool.
Jahrb. B. 10, p. 624, pi. 25, figs. 5, 6.
Smittia jaehoni. Waters, Bryozoa from Franz Josef Land. Linn.
Soc. Journ. Zoology, vol. 28, p. 87, pi. 12, lig. 18.
1) Cf. Norman, N,
ser. 7, vol. 12. p.
Nat. Hist, of East Finmark. Ann. Mag. Nat.
The Jokel Fiord III, 100 m., on Terebratulina: Kvænangen
II, 90 m., on stone and Waldheimia; Ingøhavet, 300 m.
I considei- that there are good grounds for distinguishing this
form from E. cocci nca, as VVatees has done in the work above
mentioned. The descriptions which? Bidexkap and Waters have
given of the jaclsoni species, answer perfectly for the specimens
I have found. In jaclsoni the zooecia are much larger, the mand-
ible too is rather different in shape (figs. 18, 19). It is new to
the fauna of Norway.
ISmittina^) reticulata, Macgilltvray.
Reine, 100 m.; Mortsund III, 100 m.; Henningsvær I, 150 m.
Lofoten is the hitherto known northei'u limit for this species.
Smittina trispinosa, Johnston.
(PI. V, fig. 35).
Bålstad (Lofoten).
Smittinu arctica. Norman.
1869. Escharella porifera, forma niinuseula, Smitt, Ofvers. Vet.
Akad. FOrh. 1867, Bihang, pp. 9, 73, pi. 24, figs. 33—35
(not forma majuscula).
1894. Smittia arctica, Noeman (part.), A Month on the Trond-
hjem Fiord. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. ser. G, vol. 13, p. 128.
1895. Smittia arctica, Nordgaard, System, fort, over Norges marine
Polyzoa. Bergens Mus. Aarb., 1894— 95, nr. 2, p. 27,
pl. 1, fig. 2.
1900. Smittia landshororii. var., Waters, Bryozoa from Franz
Josef Land. Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool., vol. 28, pi. 12. fig. 7.
1903. Smittia arctica, Nordgaard. Die Bryozoen des westhchen
Norwegens. Die Meeresfauna von Bergen, (ed. by. Dr.
Appeelof) p. 90, pi. 1, figs. 16, 17.
1903. Smittina arctica, Norman. Notes on the Nat. Hist, of East
Finmark. Ann. Mai;-. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol. 12. p. 121.
Moskenstrommen, 90 m., on shells; The Ostnes Fiord, 50—70
m., on stone; Malangen, 100 — 200 m.; Kvænangen II, 90 m.;
Hammerfest (1894); Breisund, 100 m.: Sværholt (1894); The Kjølle
Fiord (1894); Nordkyn (1894).
In the work above quoted, Norman has entered Smitt's forms
of Escharella -porifera (f. minuscula and majuscula) under the name
of Smittia arctica. During my excursion to Finmark in 1894, I
found numerous specimens of f. minuscula, of which I also found
some in the Lyse Fiord (59" 3' N.) in the winter of 1902. In the
course of investigations made in 1899 in northern Norway, I found
it at several places, and I also succeeded in one locality in obtaining
forma majuscula, on a stone in the Porsanger Fiord, 200 m. A
closer examination of the latter species has led to the conclusion
that it must be considered to be a distinct one. It is doubtless
most correct to retain Norman's designation, arctica, but this term
will now have a different meaning to that originally given to it by
Norman, as it will now only apply to forma minuscula, Smitt.
Smittina )iiujiisciil((. n. sp.
PI. IV, figs. 3ti— 38.
1869. Escharella porifera, forma majuscula, Smitt. Ofvers. etc.
1867, Bihang, pp. 9, 74, pL 24, figs. 36—38.
1888. Smittia landshororii, forma porifera, Hincks. Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist., ser. 6, vol. 1, p. 225, pi. 14, fig. 2.
1) Cfr. Norman. (1. c. p. 120).
17
The Porsanger Fiord, 200 in., on a stoiir.
S-MiTT (1. c, p. 751 call.s attention to tlir fact that the octocy.st
in zooocia and ooefia arc tiiinnci- than in the i'oreuoiiiL' I'oini.
In (irrtlni there are in the ooecia often tiansvei'se and loniri-
tndinal lines or sutnrcs. the.se too are mentioned by .S.\utt (1. e.,
\\. 74. pi. 24, tit;-. 331. Smitt also says that tliesc lines .sometimes
oeenr in the ooecia of wKJuscida. bnt I have not noticed them.
It is ea.sy to disting-nish between the two species. With regard
to size, it may be mentioned that tlie zooezia in arctka are 0.8 mm.
in length from the lower end to tlie tip of the oral denticle, and
tiie corresponding measurement in luajuxcitkt gives 0..5— O.u mm.
Ooecia in ardicn are rather oval, in mdjiixciila they are approxim-
ately ballshaped, in both species they are punctured like a thimble,
bnt this is coarser in niajuscula than in the other species.
The perforation in the frontal wall of the zooecia of majuscula
is closer than in arrtica. where it is. indeed, somewhat ditferent.
HiNiKs (I. c. pi. 14. tiLi'. 2) lias illustrated the oral denticle as
beiiii;- pointed, and 1 found some of them of this shape in the colony
which I liatl under examination.
( )perculuin in ardicu. I have not yet succeeded in isolating, in
mdJKsciilit. ou the other hand, it has a characteristic form, which
also differs from the usual one in the genus Smittina (fig. 37).
A very evident difference bet^\-een to two species is that the
zooecia in majuscula are plainly separated, \\hile in ardica they
more evenly merge into each other.
This species is most likely exclusively arctic. In addition to
the Porsanger Fiord, in Finmark, the following findingplaces are
mentioned, Spitzbergen, (Smitt), St. Lowrenee (Hixcks).
Smitthia smitti. Kirchexpauee.
PI. IV, fiK. 24.
The Ogs Fiord I. 100 in.
In „Bryozoen des westlichen Norwegens". I used a new name
for this form, Smittia leroiseni. as Kirchexpauer's name for Smitt's
Escharella Jegentilii, forma proiotijim had quite slipped out of my
memory, notwithstanding that I made a note of it several years ago.
NoRMAx') here too made the necessary correction. I beg reference
to NoRsiAx's list of synonyms, at the same time remarking that
Srhizoporella Hanmworthi, Waters, ought to be excluded fi-om it,
in accordance with what I have previously pointed aut, that this
must be = Scluzoporella reimiluto-[iundata. Hixcks.
Each zooecium has 6—8 lateral rosette-plates. As far as I
could see, the two upper ones were bi-pored aud the two next oues
tri-pored.
This species has not previously been found in Norway.
Smittina jeff'rensi, Normax.-)
The Porsanger Fiord, 70 m.
The species was not previously found iu Norway.
BhamphosfomeUa srnhm. (Fabk.). S.mitt.
(PI. v. ti<;s. 8—11).
1867. CeUepora scahra, Smitt (part.). Krit. fiiiteckn., p. 30, pi.
28, figs. 183—185.
1886. Rhamphostomella scahra. Lorexz, Bryozoen von Jan Mayen,
p. 93.
') Finmark Polj'zoa, p. 12.3.
3) Refer to synonym^ in ,.Finiiiar]i Polyzoa". p. 120.
Disjcnnulen. on st(nie. 15(i in.: The .lokel Fiord 1. lu(t m.;
The Porsanirer Fiord. 7i) in.
LuHKNz (li\ii|cd Smitts ( cUoiiurn Kcabra \n{Q two species, and
as for as I can jniigc this division is perfectly Justifiable. The
ditt'erence between them may be characterized as follows.
7i'. rostata has an oral denticle (pi. V, fig. 22) but in xcatmi it
is wanting. In costufn the avicniarian mandible is about half as
long as it is wide, while in .«nhi-a the heiLdit is only very little
more than the width.
The ooecia in rustata have usually more pores than those of
sndira have (cfr. figs. 9, 21). The rostrum in the latter .species is
shorter and blunter than in the former one. It is generally the
case too that the radial lines in costata are continued on the ro.strinn.
but this is not often so in the case of .scahra. Both species are
punctured on the basal wall of the zooecium ifig. lu) but more
closely iu scahra than in costata.
BidexkapM has found /.'//. st,il,ra in the Lyn-cn Fiord. So
that the species is now known from the coast id' l''ininaik to
Lofoten.
UhamjiJtostomella costata. Lorexz.
(PI. V. figs. 21, 22).
1867. CeUcjioru scahra. Smitt (part). Krit. fiirteckn., pai^-. :U\.
pi. 2s, tig.s. ISO — iss.
IScSG. Bhamphostomella costata, Lorexz, Bryozoen vou Jan ilayen.
p. 12 (94), pi. 7, fig. 11.
ls92. JihamplwstomeUa costata, Hixcks, Polyzoa of St. Lawrence.
Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 0. vol. 3. p. 426. pi. 21.
figs. 6—8.
1900. Rhamphostomella cosfatn. Waters, Bryozoa from Franz
Josef Land. p. '.il. pi. ll. fios. 26. 27.
Tromsø, Mehavn (1894).
Normax has taken this ibnii in the \'aranger Fiord, and
BiDEXKAP in Lyngen. The hitherto known southern limit for this
species is Tromsø.
RlaovjihostoweUa plicata, Smitt.
(Pl. v, lig-.s. 14, 15.)
1S67. Cellcpora scahra. forma plicata. S.mitt, Krit. fiirt.. p. 30.
pi. 28, figs. 189, 191, 195.
1S77. Cdlipora plicata. Hixcks, Polyzoa from Iceland and
Labrador. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 4, vol. 19, p.
100. pi. 11, figs. 3, 4.
1886. Rhamphostomella plicata. Lorexz, Bryozoen von .Ian Mayen,
p. 12 (94).
1900. Rluuriphostomclht plicata. Waters, Bryozoa from F. J. L.,
p. 92. pi. 11. figs. 28. 29.
Nordkyn (18941, on an annelid tube.
As is the case with costata. this species too has an oral den-
ticle, which is, however, longer aud narrower than in the species
mentioned.
The ooecium is as a rule provided with a few pores. I was
not able to discover any punctures on the back side of the colony.
It is therefore probable that Smitts fig. 190 does not represent
this species.
1) Lyngenfjordens evertehral fauna. Tromsø Mus. Aarb. 20, 1897, p. 92.
172
0. Norde-aard.
Bhanipiiostoniella rail'iatula, Hincks.
PI. V, fig. l«, 17.
1867. Cellepora smhru f. iMcata, Smitt (part.), Krit. toil. pi. 28,
fig. 193.
1877. Lepralia rudlatula, Hincks, Polyzoa from Iceland and
Labrador. Ann. and Mag-. Nat. Hist., ser. -4, vol. 19, p.
104, pi. 10, figs. 9—14.
1886. RhampJiostomella radiahda, Loeenz, Bryozoeu von Jan
Mayen, p. 13 (95), pi. 7, %. 9.
Hammerfest (1894); Tlie Trold Fiord Sund. 40 m.; The North
Cape (1894); The Kjølle Fiord (1894).
I found this species quite common on algae aud hydroids which
I took on the coast of Finmark in the autumn of 1894.
The zooecia are rather small, and the species is easily distin-
guished from the foregoing one, in that it wants the suboral ro-
strum and by the presence of the peculiar elevated peristome, about
■(\hich Hincks (1. c, p. 104) very appropriately remarks that it has
„a very fantastic appearance".
The species is now known from Labrador, Iceland. Spitzbeigen,
Jan Mayen and Finmark.
li.JinmpJwsteUa eontigua. Smitt.
Pl. v, fig.s. 18—20.
1867. Cclk'jjom ramtdosa, forma mntiyud, Smitt, Krit. fiirt. p.
31, 189, pi. 28, figs. 198—201.
The Østnes Fiord, 50—70 m., on stone; Hammerfest (1894),
on stone; Breisund, 100 m., on a gastropod shell; Mehavn (1894),
on BalariHS.
The species of the genus Cellepora have characteristic opercula
with a more or less distinct proximal lobe as in the SclikoporeUa
species.
The shape of the operculum in the above mentioned species
proves that it is quite impossible to look upon it as a variety of
C. ramulosa, it can, indeed, not be considered to belong to the
C'ellqmra genus. Neither is it a typical JRhampodomeUa, but I
retain it for the present under that genus, as I do not now know
any more suitable place for it.
The surface of the zooecia are quite even, occassionally there
is a suggestion of radial stripes. The young zooecia have as a
rule 4 spines on the distal side of the oral aperture. The oper-
culum is more solid than in the other Rhampostomella species. The
mandible of the avicularia is not of the same shape either as is
characteristic of the other species which belong to the same genus.
Vi'Ucporu tidjerusa, D'Okhki.nv.
1867. Cellep)ura ramulom, f. tiilierosa. Smitt., Krit. fOrt. pp.
31, 191.
1903. Cdlepora tuherosa, Nobdgaaed. Die Bryozoen des west-
lichen Norwegens, p. 69, pi. 2, figs. 28—34.
Moskenstrømmen ; The Østnes F'uml, 50—70 m.; The North
Cape (1894).
Respecting this species, I beg to I'efer to what I have previ-
ously said in the paper written by me, which is quoted above.
Cdllepora nodulosu, Ijokknz.
PL 111, figs. 21— 1!4.
1867. Cellepora ramulosa, f. avicularis. Smitt (pait.). Krit. fOr-
teckn., p. 32, 194, pi. 28, figs. 207—210.
1886. Cellepora nodiilosa, Lorenz, Bryozoen von Jan Mayen p.,
14 (96), pi. 7, fig. 14.
Kvænangen II, 90 m.; The Jøkel Fiord II, 80 m.; The Jøkel
Fiord III, 100 m.; The North Cape (1894); The Porsanger Fiord;
Sværholt (1894); The Kjølle Fiord (1894); Mehavn (1894).
The specimens from the places above mentioned answer, on
the whole, well to Lokenz's illustrations and desciii)tion of C. no-
didosa.
The mandible of the avicularia (fig. 24) had a row of fine teeth
in the distal mai-gin, and in the operculum b was > h (fig. 23).
On examining some old material of Cellepora specimens, I found
that the fonns which I entered as C. pumicosa from Finmark in
my list of Norwegian Cheilostomata were really young colonies of
nodulut:((.
I am afi-aid that Norman and Waters have been guilty of
the same mistake, when they mention pumicom respectively from
Finmark and Franz Josef Land. I do not think that pumicosa
occurs in Finmark. In addition to the places already mentioned,
I have determined specimens of C. nodalosa from the North Ocean
Expedition st. 223, 273, 363.
BiDENKAP has taken it in the inner part of the Lyngen Fiord.
Cellepora ventricosa, Lorenz.
Pi. Ill, figs. 26—29.
^^'hen I was working out the Bryozoa from the North Ocean
Expedition, I treated ventricosa and incrassata as being the same,
as I supposed that the difference between the forms lay within the
limits of variation for the one species. After I had got more ma-
terial, however, I found that they must be treated as two separate
species, and this opinion is shared by Waters in his treatment of
the Bryozoa from Franz Josef Land.
I have a typical C. i-entricosa (fig. 26) from Breisund in
Finmark.
The zoarium probably never attains to such a decided bran-
ching as is the case in C. incrassata. The two species can be
distinguished at once by the naked eye, as incra.-isata is compara-
tively smooth on the surface, the zooecia not reaching so far foi--
ward from the colony as in ventricosa.
There were no vicarious avicularia on the specimens of C.
ventricosa which Lorenz and Waters had at their disposal, but
they were present (fig. 29) in my colony from Breisund. They are
different from those in C. incrassata, the greatest width of the
mandible of ventricosa is about double that at the hinging joint,
while the corresponding mandible in incrassata is more evenly wide.
(Cfr. Waters, Bryozoa, from F. J. Land, pi. 12, fig. 13).
The mandible in the oi-al avicularium is semicircular also in
ventricosa (fig. 28), but it is considerably larger than in incrassata.
C. ventricosa is new to Norwegian fauna.
Cellepora incrassata, Sjiitt.
PI. Ill, fig. 2.").
Hammerfest (1894).
Waters has called attention to the fact that Cellepora incras-
sata, Lamarck and C. incrassata. Smitt are not identical. The
former is found in the MeditciTanean and is supposed to be the
same as C'. eoro7iopus, S. ^^'ooI), while C. incrassata. Smitt hus
proved only to have arctic distribution. It occurred in the material
which Mc Andrew collected in Finmark in 1856 and the species
173
is eiitfird by Hisk under tin- iianir ('rllt'i>oni cerrironiis.') Watkrs
duos not, lioweviT, adopt this name, because a larire number of
forms liave been uiven tlu' name CcUcjiunt cerriconti-" and hlsclmm
ceirirunii.-i.
I believe I have ideutilied the follo\vin<r Cellcpora species on
the Norwegian coast: — puniicosa, rnmidosu, iuherosa, didwtoma,
unculuris. nothilosa, costazi, vtntricosa and hurasxitta.
lietepura hcaniana. Kin(;.
luist ill, ino m.; Moskenstrømmen I, 200 ni.; The Kirk Fiord
111. 70— S(i m.: P.alstad; Mortsuud III, 100 m.; Ure I, 200—250
m.; The Ostucs Fiord, 130 m.; The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.;
Dis-ermulen, 100—150 m. ; ytonesbotn, 40—80 in.; Malaucen, 100—
200 m.; Ilanunerfest, Tni;ohavet, 300 m.; l>rcisund, 10(i m.; Me-
ha vn (IS!) 1 1.
Si'fepora cMulosa, Lin.
Malang-en, 100—200 ra.; Hammerfest (1894); The North Cape
(1894); The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.; Sværholt (1894).
This species has not hitherto been found by me south of
Malangen.
Rdeporn irallkhuma. Ih*sK.
IM. Ill, fig. -^0.
The Beier Fiord, 50— 150 m.; Bålstad; .Stonesbotn, 40 — 80 m.;
Malangen, 100—200 m.; The North Cape (1894); Nordkyn (1894).
1 have also found this form in Radosuud, a little north of Bergen.
The species is arctic in its disti'ibution.
Cyclostomata.
Cnxhi ehunint. Lin.
Moskenstrommen 1, 200 m.; The Kirk Fiord IV, 30—50 m.
Crisia (Jciiticidata, Lamaeck.
The Kirk Fiord, 100 m.; Malangen, 380 m.
TuhuJlpora liliacea, Pallas.
n. III. %. 30.
The Sag Fiord, 200 m. ; on dead branches of Isidella hippuris;
Malangen, 100—200 m.
Tulndiporu iicnicUUtta '^, Fabr.
PI. Ill, fig. 31.
The North Cape (1894); Mehavn (1894).
Idmonra uilunticu, Forbes.
PI. Ill, fig 32.
The 8ea N. W. of Rost, 700 m.; Moskenstrommen I, 2(i() m. ;
The Kirk Fiord, 30—50 m.; The Beier Fiord, 50— 150 m.; Reine,
100 m.; Bålstad, 30—50 m.; Mortsund I, 200 m.; The Østnes
Fiord, 130 m.; The Jøkel Fiord 1, 100 m.; Breisund 100 m.; The
North Cape (1894); The Porsanger Fioi-d, 7o m.
Diastopnru patina, La.m.\rck.
Malangen, 100— 20() m.
1) Ann. and Mag. Nat.
Diasliijxini ohfiia, .Idhns'ion.
Moskenstrønanen, 9U m., on Walillwimiu; The Kirk Fiord 111,
70—80 m.; Digennulen, on .stone, 150 m. ; The Tys Fiord I. on
Luphohdia, 500 m.; Malangen, lOti — 200 m.; Ligohavet, on s]jon-
ges, 30(1 m.
Ji'cticiilipora iiihii-Kria. y.Mri'i-.
Sværholt (1894).
Hvrwra lichenoides, (Pontoi'.), I^n.
PI. Ill, tig. 33.
Røst II, 150 m.; Moskenstrømmen, 90 m.; Reine, 100 m.:
Mortsund II, 100 m.; Stønesbotn, 40—80 m.; Malangen, 100— 200
m.; Kvicnangon IT, 00 m.; ^lehavn (1894).
Hunirra nohum. ^\. Saks.
Malangen, 100—200 m.; Malangen, 380 m.
Lirlit'iiopura hispida, Fleming.
The Kirk Fiord, 100 m.; The Tys Fiord I, on Lophohclia.
500 m.; ;Malangen, 100—200 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
Liclicnupwa rcrnn-aria. FAHKirifs.
Grøtø, on algae, (i— 24 m.
Doinopora stellata, Golbfcss.
PI. m, fig. 34.
Reine (Lofoten), 100 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m., Malangen
indicates the northern limit of the species.
iJefrancia lucernaria, M. Saks.
The Kirk Fiord, 50—80 m., both living and dead colonies;
The Ogs Fiord I, 100 m. (dead colony); Kvænangen XL 90 m.;
The Jøkel Fiord I. lOo m.; The Jøkel Fiord II, 80 m.; The Pors-
anger Fiord, 70 m.
Ctenostomata.
Alcijonidiain (jelatinusidii. Lin. 'l
Malangen, 100—200 m.
Alcyonidium diseiforme. S.mitt.
PI. Ill, fig. 35.
Lyngen III, 320 m.
This peculiar species had not previously been found on the
Norwegian coast.
Flitvtrdla hitipida, Fahkicius.
The North Cape (1894), on Fucus sermtus ; Nordkyn (1894),
on Facus serrntu!<. Norman has found this .species at Svolvær,
Lofoten.
Flastirlla. corniculata, (S.MriT.
PI. Ill, fig. 37, 38.
1871. Alrijonidium cornirulatam . Smitt, Krit. forteckn. ets. Ofvers.
Kgl. Vet. Akad. Forh. 1871, p. 1123, pi. 20, tigs. 10—16.
') Alri/onifUnm hirsutum. Flem. has beon found by Normak on Fttcus at
Svolva-r. Lofoten.
174
0. Novdgaai-a.
1886. Flustrella cornirulafa, Lorenz, Biyozoeu von Jan Mayen,
p. 99.
1897. Fhistrella coniieidafa, Bidenkap, Bryozoen von Ost-Spitz-
bergen. Zool. Jahrb. B. 10, 1897, p. 634.
1900. Flustrella cornintlata, Bidenkap, Die Bryozoen von Spitz-
bergen und Konig Karls Land. Fauna arctica, Bd. I,
p. 5.31.
1900. Alcyonid'unn cerriconiis, Alice Robertson, Paper from
the Harriman Alaska Expedition, Bryozoa. Proc. Wash.
Acad. Science, vol. 2, p. 330, pi. 21, figs. 14 — 17.
1903. IlmtreJla corniculata. Norjiax, Xotes on the Nat. Hist,
of East Finmark. Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist., ser. 7, vol.
11, p. 576.
Svolvær, Lofoten (1894), on algae.
Norman was the first to find this species on the Norwegian
coast. He found it li\ing between tidemai'ks at Vadsø. It is
interesting that this form which had previously only been found in
the arctic regions can exist as far down as Lofoten. Smitt has de-
scribed the species from Spitzbergen, where it has later been taken
by KiJKENTHAL and Walter, as well as by Rc)mer and Schalidinn.
(Cf. Bidenkap, 1. c).
Miss Robertson has described a species fi'om material from
Alaska, under the name Alcyonidumi cervieornis. which is probably
the same as Smitt's species. The only tiling which might suggest
a difference, is that the aperture of the zooecium in cervieornis is
mentioned as being circular, while in corniculata (as in hispida) it
is a fissure which is provided with two lobes. In preserved mate-
rial, however, these facts may easily be wrongly interpreted.
Tlie characteristic, branched spines (PI. Ill, figs. 37, 38), which
are situated one at each corner between the zooecia, from which
they are separated by an intermediate wall, seem to be alike in
tlie two forms. They appear really to be identical. Both in his-
jiidii and rurnicii/ntii. there are two semicircular shaped thickened
lilaces neai- at the oral aperture, these probable serve the same
purpose as the operculum in Cheilostomata.
BoirerbanMa inihricata, Adams.
PL III, fig. 3<i.
Nordkyn (1894), on Laminaria.
I have a specimen from the North Ocean Expedition, st. 343,
in which several colonies have grown together, forming comparati-
vely thick brandies (PI. Ill, fig. 36).
The foregoing list of Bryozoa from the northern part of the
Norwegian coast is not complete, but it is my opinion that it is
fairly representative. The number has boon incroased by the ad-
dition of several species.
Of those forms described by S.mitt from tlie numerous Swe-
dish arctic expeditions, there are now ouly exceedingly few which
liave not been observed by me on our northern coast. The Bryo-
zoan fauna from Lofoten to the Varanger Fiord proves to contain
more arctic elements than was previously supposed.
Brachiopoda.
Herman Friele and J. Sparre Schneider doterm.
Remarks by the author.
Crania anomala, Mull.
The Kirk Pioi'd II, 70—80 m.; Mortsund (Vest Fiord), 200 m.;
Digermulen, 100—150 m.; Hammerfest (1894).
G. O. Sars^) mentions The Komag Fiord in Vest Finmarken
as the northern limit for this species. Hammerfest is a little further
north.
Bhiinrho)iella psittacea, Chemx.
^Malangen. 10(i — 20o m.; Kvænangen II, 90 m.: The .Tokel
Fiord III. 1011 m.; Breisund. 100 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
The southern limit for this species is The Malangen Fiord.
Terehratullyia rapiit-serpentis. Lix.-)
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 in.; The Tys Fiord, 500 m.; The
Kirk Fiord II, 70—80 m.; Mortsund II (Vest Fiord), 200 m.; The
Ogs Fiord I, 100 m.; Malangen, 100— 200 m.; Stønnesbotn, 40—80
m., Kvænangen II, 90 m. ; The Jøkel Fiord III. 100 m.; Hammer-
fest (1894); Ingøhavet, 300 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.; The
KjoUe Fiord (1894).
Tercbratullna se.ptciitrionalis. Couth.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord III. 280
m.; The Salten Fiord II, 320—380 m.; Bålstad (Vest Fiord). 150 m.
WnJdhvimin craiiiuiu. Mull.
The Skjerstad Fiord III, 230 m.; The Tys Fiord, 500 m.;
Røst II, 150 m.; Moskenstrømmen, 90 m.; Reine (Vest Fiord),
100 m.; The Kirk Fiord IV, 30—50 m.; Bålstad (Vest Fiord),
Mortsund II. 200 m.;' Stene (Vest Fiord), 100 m.; The Ostues
Fiord; Digermulen, 100—150 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m. ; Kvæn-
angen II, 90 m.; Hammerfest (1894); Ingohavet. 300 m. : The
Kjølle Fiord (1894).
Pelecypoda.
Herman Friele and J. Sparre Schneider determ.
Remarks by the author.
Anoniui ephippium, Lin,
Bålstad, 80 m.; Digermulen, 100—150 m.; Malangen, 100—200
m.; Kvænangen, 90 m.; The North Cape (1894); The Porsanger
Fiord, 70 m.
aciih'Kta. Mi'LLER.
The Skjerstad Fiord UT. 23() m.: The Sag Fiord, 200 m.;
The Kirk Fiord, 70 ni.; Stonnosbotn, 40— so m.; Malangen, 100—
200 m.; The Jokol Fioi'd. loo m.
PiTtcu islandirus. Mcller.
Tiio 15oior I'^iord. 50—150 ui.; The Skjerstad Fiord X (Mis-
vær Fiord), 10—30 m. ; Moskenstrømmen, 90 in.; The Ostues Fiord;
The Kanstad Fiord, 30-90 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; Kvæn-
angen II, 90 m. ; Breisund, lOo m.; The Poi'sanger Fioi'd, 50 ul
j The largest specimen from The Skjerstad Fiord X was SG mm.
in height and 84 mm. in length.
Pcctrii aratiis, GMELi>f.
Moskenstrømmen, 90 m.; Bålstad (Vest Fiord). 150 m.
1) MoUusca Eegionis Arcticæ Norvegiæ, p. 8.
2) Some of tlie places here mentioned doubtless have reference to T. sep-
tentrionalis, Schneider having considered it to be a variety of caput-serpentis
but Friele has treated it as a separate species.
175
The spociiiieii from ^roskcnstroiiinu'ii was 15 iiiiii. in lioij.dit and
I 1 mm. ill itMii:tli.
'IMie nortiieni limit I'oi' tliis spt'cios is Lolotcii.
I'rcfni sei)tr))i)V(liiitus. Millkr.
The Beicr Fiord, 5(1—150 m.; (1 spec, 11 mm.); Tlie Sa^--
Fiord. 200 m. (s)'); Malang-en, lOo— 2(t0 m. (s); Gaukværo, 25(t m.
The laruest .specimen from Gankværo was 32 mm.
At Tromso. Schxkideii only found sljclis, but botii M. and
(i. O. Saks coilected tlie sjiecies in tlie Varanyer Fiord.
Ptctcn fiiirimif. Mi-i.i,i:ii.
The Ostncs Fiord.
This species was pi-cviously know n rvj\\{ n\\ to The North Cape.
NoRM.vx in 1890 took it in Tlie Iaxuh i-'iord (.South Varanger)-).
Pcetcn stridttis. Mru.EK.
Stonnesbotn. 4(i — sn m.
Havosund ( Finmark i is the nortiieiii limit for this species.
Ffcfeii iiironijKtraliiHi^. Kisso.
The Ostnes Fiord. 30 m.
Lofoten is tlie northern limit for the species.
Pcden imJnifvr. LovÉx.
Malangen, 380 m. ; Kvænangen II, 90 m.
Fectcn rltreus, Chemnitz.
The Beier Fiord. 30—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord III, 230
m.; The Tys Fiord, ooo m. (in quantities on Lophohdia prolifera);
The Ogs Fiord I, loo m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.
Peeten ahyssorum. Loven.
The .Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m.; Brettesnes
400 m.: Malanaen. 380 m.
-Skroven. 350-
Preten similis. Laskey.
Moskenstrommen I. 20o m.; Bålstad (Lofoten), 150 m.
Peeten groenlandicus, Sowerby.
Lyngen II, 250 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m. ; Kvænangen. 300 —
343 m.
The southern limit for the species is Tromsø.
At St. Lyngen II several specimens were taken, the largest
measured 22 mm., thus being very nearly as large as the specimens
from Spitzbergen which are given as being 24 mm.
Lima excacata, Fabr.
Arno, 300—400 m.; Tys Fiord I, 50o m.
The largest specimen measured 135 mm.
G. 0. Sars has caught this species at Skroven (Lofoten).
According to Sars^) the species is mentioned from Finmark by Mr.
Andrew, but is has, however, not been taken there later.
Friele and Grieg^) give the distribution of this species to
the depths between The Hebrides end The Faroe Isles, Portugal,
The Azores and Senegambia. On our coast the species is limited
1) (s) means that only empty shells were fniind.
2) Notes on the Natural History of East Finmark. Ann. Mag. Xat. Hist.
7, vol. X, p. .357.
*) MoUusca Regionis arcticæ Norvegiæ, p. 24.
■») Jlollusca in, p. H. The Norw. North Atl. Exp.
I to the great fiord depths with tlieir particularly constant temperature
! and .salinity (0 — 7" C, about 35 7oo).
As The Vest Fiord is the most northern of the principal fiords
where these physical conditions prevail. I am inclined to think that
the mention of this species from Finmark must be a mistake.
The northern limit should be looked upon as Lofoten, until
there is definite information that it is di.stributed still further nortli-
wards.
Liniil hjscomlii. SoWKRBY.
Moskenstrommen. '.to ni.
G. 0. Sars has found shells df this species at Skroven. My
catches in Moskenstrommen prove that the species still exists at
Lofoten, which must therefoi'c be considered to be its northern limit
on our coast.
ituin
sn, Forbes.
Moskenstronmiei
Miltdiis nluUs. Lin.
Nordkyn (1S94). Common other places too.
Motlioht m(Mltoh<s. Lin.
The Skjerstad Fiord X. 10— 5() m.; Hammerfest (1894); Trold-
fiordsund. 40 m.; Nordkyn (1894).
Modiola phaseolina, Phillippi.
Moskenstrommen, 200 m.; Eeine I, 150 m.; ?.alstad. .stene,
120—200 m. ; Henningsvær-Strømmen. 2o— 40 m.: The Sag Fiord,
200 m.; ^lalangen. loii — 2o0 m.; Tioldtiordsund. 40 m.: Breisund,
100 m.
Durri/diiivi ritreum. Møller.
Ure I (Vest Fiord), 2o0— 250 m.; mouth of Raftsund. 250—
30o m. ; The Ogs Fiord I. 100 m.: Malangen. 3.su m.; Lyngen II,
250 m.
CreneUa decussata. Mont.
The Skjerstad Fiord II. loo— 185 m.; Gaukværo IL 25 m.;
Hammerfest (s).
Modtuhiiiii Jo^riijuta. Grav.
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 15o m.: The Ostnes Fiord. 20 m.; Brei-
sund, 100 m.; The North Cape (18941.
The Beier Fiord is the southern limit foi' this species. I (col-
lected a small specimen here.
Modiolaria niijra, Gray.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; Ihe Kirk Fiord II, 50 m.;
Mortsund III. 100 m.; Gaukværo. 250 m.; .Stønnesbotn, 40— 80 m.;
The .Jokel Fiord 1. 100 m.; Troldfiordsund. 4o m.
XucitJa inmidula. Malm.
The Skjerstad Fioi'd IV, 330 m.; The Skjei'stad Fiord VII,
490 m. ; The Salten Fiord II, 320—380 ni.; Brettesnes— Skroven,
350—400 m.; Ti'anodybet, (107 — 640 in.
Nucida tenuis. Mont.
The Skjerstad P'iord VII. 490 m.; The Ogs Fiord I, 100 m.
(s); The Jøkel Fiord, loo m.
170
Leda pernula. Muller.
The Skjerstad Fiord IIT. 230 m.: The Kirk Fiord II, 50 m.;
Svolvær, 150 m.; The Østnes Fiord. 30 — 40 m.; mouth of Raftsund,
250—300 m.; The Øgs Fiord I. loo ni.; Tlie Kanstad Fiord, 30
—90 m.; Gaukværø II, 250 m.; Malangen, 380 m.; Stønnesbotn,
-10—80 m.; Kvænangen II, 90 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
Lc(hi iiiinuid, 0. F. Mullee.
The Beier Fiord. 50 — 150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord III, 230
hl; Kvænangen II, 90 m.; Digermulen, 100 — 150 m.
Porttandlu lucula. Loven.
Tlie Skjerstad Fiord II, 100—185 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord VII,
490 m.; Øxsund, 600 m.; The Kii'k Fiord II, 50 m.; Mortsund I,
200 m.; Ure I (Vest Fiord), 200—250 m.; Risværflaket, 150—180
in.; mouth of Raftsund, 250—300 m.; Malangen, 380 m.
Porflaiidin iiifrriiu'dia. M. Sårs.
The Porsanger Fiord, 20u m.
This species was first caught by M. Såes in The Varanger
Fiord. The Norw. North Atl. Exp. caught it at St. 260 (The
Porsanger Fiord), 261, (The Tana Fiord) and 262 (off The Var-
anger Fioi'd). Hitherto it has not been taken further westwards
and southwards on the Norwegian coast than The Porsanger Fiord.
PorUandla tenuis. Phillippi.
The Beier Fiord, 50-15O m. : Tlie Skjerstad Fiord VI, 125 m.;
1'he Skjerstad Fiord VII. 49o m.
Puiilandia knticula. Møllee.
The Beier Fiord, 50-150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord, 100—185
nu; The Skjerstad Fiord VI, 125 m.; The Kirk Fiord IV, 70—80
in.; Mortsund I, 200 m.; The Ogs Fiord I, 100 m.; The Kanstad
Fiord, 30— 90 m.; Malangen, 380 m.; Stønnesbotn, 40— 80 m.; The
Jøkel Fiord II, 80 in.
Porthdidia frii/ida. Torell.
Risværflaket, 150—180 m.
Yoldia Umatula. Say.
The Kirk Fiord, 70-80 m. ; Svolvær, 150 m.; The Ostnes
Fiord, 30—40 m. (several specimens, the largest being 3() mm.);
Stønnesbotn, 40-80 m.; The Kjølle Fiord (1894).
The soutlicrn limit for tlie species is Lofoten.
M<dU'tui ohtiim, M. Saes.
MoskenstromMicii 1. 200 m.; Rrcttesnes — Skroven, 300—400
m.; Ti'aiiodybot, r>40 in.
'i'lio iiortlicni limit I'or this species is Lofoten.
Area jiertinifuloideft, ScACCHi.
M'iu! licier Fiord, 50 — 15o m. ; (var. septentrionaPif;) ; Tlie Slcjer-
stad Fiord 111, 230 m. ; (var. septcntrionalis); The Skjerstad Fiord
VI, 125 111. (var. aeptentrmialis, the largest specimen 9.5 mm.);
The Øxsund, 600 m. ; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Moskenstrømmen,
200 m.; Ure I, 200—250 m.; Mortsund I, 200 m.; Brcttesnes —
Skroven, 300-400 m.; The 0gs Fiord I, 100 m.; mouth of Raft-
sund, 250—300 m.; Tranødybet, 640 m.; Gaukværø II, 250 m.;
Malangen, 100 — 200 m. (var. septeidrionalis): Malangen, 380 ni.;
The Jøkel Fiord III, lOo m. : (var. septeufrionalis); Kvænangen,
300—343 m. (var. septeiitno)ii(lis).
The typical form extends to Malangen, or, at any rate, to
Lofoten; var. septentrionalis is limited southwards in the Beier Fiord.
Area glaclalls, Geay.
The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
According to G. O. Saes, this species has been cauglit at
Magerø by Veekritzen. Further westwards and southwards this
species has not liitherto been noticed on our coast.
Liniopsis minuta. Phil.
The Salten Fiord II, 320—380 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.;
Landego, 200—450 m.; Øxsund, 600 m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.;
Moskenstrømmen, 200 m.; Bålstad, 150 m.; Stene (Vest Fiord),
120—200 m.; Ure I, 200—250 m.; Skroven, 200—400 m.; The
Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.
Friele and Grieg mentioned that this species was taken by
The Norw. North Atl. Exp. at St. 290, which is situated about
half way between Norway and Beeren Eiland, which is the most
noi'therii place where it is known.
Cardium iiodosum, Tuet.
The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 in.
Carilltnii echiiudiim, Lin.
The Salten Fiord I. 15-20 in.
Cardium faschition, Mont.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m. (s); She Skjerstad Fiord IX,
80 m.; Tlie Salten Fiord I, 1.5—20 m.; The Kirk Fiord II, 50 m.;
Napstrømmen, 40 m. ; Henningsværstrømmen, 40 m. ; The Østnes
Fiord; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.; Malangen, 1(»0— 2oo m.;
Stønnesbotn, 40—80 m.; Troldfiordsund, 40 m.
Cardluni inivimum. Phil.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Slgerstad Fiord IX, 80 m.;
The Salten Fiord II, 320—380 m.; Moskenstrømmen, 200 m.; Ure I,
200—250 m.; Mortsund. 200 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.;
Gaukværø II, 25o ni. ; Malangen, 380 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.
Cijpihia ishmd'icd. Lin.
The Salten Fiord 1, 15 — 20 in.; Napstronnnen, 4o in.; Stene
(Vest Fiord), 120—200 in.; The Østnes Fiord. 4o m.; The Ggs
Fiord I, 100 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30— 9o m.\ Troldfiordsund,
40 m.; The Kjollc Fiord (1894).
Ashoic horerdis. Chemn.
Troldliordsuiid. 40 in.
Ashirtc hcmlm, Leach.
<A. compressa, Mont.).
id, 50—150 ra.; The Salten Fiord I, 15—20 in.;
rd I, 30—50 m.; The Ostnes Fiord. 30 m.;
0 111.; Hammerfest.
The P.eier Fi(
The Skjcrstiid Fi
StoniieslKitii. 40-1
Astaiie sulcata, ija Costa.
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 150 m.; The Salten Fiord II, 320—380
in.; Røst II, 150 m.; Reine I, 150 in.; Bålstad, 150 m.; Mortsund
III. 100 m.; lire I, 200 250 in.; Svolva-r, 150 m.; Digermulen,
150 in.; Malangen, lOo— 200 m.; The Kjølle Fiord (1894).
Astarte compre.ssn. Lix.
(.4. rUeptica. BudwnI.
The Heipi- Fiord, on ni.; The Ostnrs I'^ionl, W m.
Aslurh' crciKitti. Gkay.
^1. orbricoiitata, Foebf.s).
The Skjcrstail Fiord II. 185 in.; The Si<,j('r.stad Fiord HI,
230 m.; The Skjerstad Fionl VI. li'.") in.: iJost II. l.^x» m.; The
Kirk Fiord. 70 — luo m.: .Mortsuud 1. li n.; Steiie (\' est Fiord)
120—200 m.; Risværttaket, 180 m.; The Ggs Fiord I, 100 m.
ilalangen, 100^200 m.; Lyngen II, 250 m.; Kvænangen, 300—
343 m.; Kvænangen, 90 m.; The Jokcl Fiord II, 00 in.; The Por.s
anger Fiord. 200 m.; The Kjolle Fiord (1894).
The specimens from 'i'he Kirk Fiord showed no signs of de
formity. The largest were 34 mm. in length and 80 mm. in height,
Tills species has not been observed on our coast further south than
'i'lie Skjerstad Fiord.
Venus giillina, Lix.
Tlie Salten Fiord I. 15—20 m.; The Salten Fiord II, 320—
380 m.
Several shells were found on the beacli at Væro on '^A 1896.
VeiiKs oritta, Pknnant.
Rost II. loll m.; Mortsund III. 100 in.; Svolvær; Malangen,
100-200 m.; Sværholt (11H941.
Litcrna hormllx, Lin.
Napstrommen, 30—40 m. (s); Svolvær (1894).
Shells belonging to this species were found on the beach at
Væro the '73 1896.
Axlnus flexuosus, Mont.
The Skjerstad Fiord H, 185 m.; Landego, 200—450 m.; The
Kirk Fiord, 40—100 m.; Risvær, 150 m.; Malangen, 380 m.
Axiniis mrsi, Phil.
Risværflaket, 150—180 m. (s).
A.r'nnts rroulinotsis. .Jeff.
The Skjerstad Fiord IV. 330 m. Is); The Skjerstad Fiord \^I,
490 m.
Kriru'lla wilians. Phil.
Mouth of Raftsund, 280—300 m.
This form has not been caught alive on the Norwegian coast
north of Raftsund. According to Schneider') shells have been
found at Tromso by Dr. Krause.
Muntaeuta suhatriatn, Mont.
Grieg ^) mentions that this species has been found on several
of Spatangus piirpiireiin.
Muctra eUiptica, Brown.
Rost I, 120 m.; Stene (Vest Fiord), 120— 2n(i m.; Ilennings-
værstrømmen, 20— 4o m. ; Troldtiordsund. 40 m.; The North Cape
(1894).
') Tromsosundets Molluskfauna. Ti-oniso Mus. Aarsli. VIII, p. 85.
^) Oversigt over det nordlige Norges echinodenner, i>. 3cJ. Berg. Mus.
Aarb. 1902. No. 1.
Si/ndosmi/ri olhn. Wudi).
The Snltcii Fiord I, 15—20 m.
Si/H(liiyi)u/,i loui/iridHs. S(:a(;chi.
The Salten Fiord II, 320— :{Ko m. (s); Tiie Folden l-'lord,
530 m.; Landego. 2oo -45o m.; .Moilsmul I, 20o m.; Skroven,
200—400 m.
Si/ii<l(jsmi/n iiifiiht. Mtllek.
Mortsund I, 2oo m.- Tranodybet, 640 m.; rraukværø II, 250 ul;
Malangen, 38(t ni.
Ti'iriuii (Mitcomii) ndriirUt, Ciik.mn.
Kvænangen II, Oo in. (s).
Solen jidlucidiis, Penn.
The Salten Fiord I, 15—20 m.
The northern limit for this species is Lofoten.
Nvd'Kt arc-tiri(. .M. Saks.
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 80 m
Friele and Grieg 'j mention that this species was only known
from one place on the Norwegian coast, viz. Vadsø (Varanger Fiord).
Ncæni uhrsii. Lov.
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 150 m.; The Salten Fiord II, 320—380
m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 in.; Øxsuiid, 600 m.; The Kirk Fiord
IV, 30—50 m.; Mortsund I, 200 m.; Brettesnes— Skroven, 350—
400 m.; Risværflaket, 150— 180 m.; The Kan.stad Fiord, 30— 90 m.;
Tranødybet, 640 m.; Gaukværø II, 250 m.; Malangen, 380 m.;
Lyngen III, 300 ra.
Ncitra oliexd var. (jlariuli-:, G. O. Sars.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.
In my collection there were most likely several forms of this
variety which have been classified under the chief form. ^V. ohesa,
Lov.).
Neæm suhtorfa. G. O. Sars.
The Sk,jerstad Fiord VI. 125 m.; The Jøkel Fiord, 100 m.
The Skjerstad Fiord is the southern limit for this species, as
far as is now known.
Xed'm rosfratri, Spengel.
The Salten Fiord II, 320-380 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.;
Landego, 200 — 400 m.; Brettesnes— Skroven. 350—400 m.
This is one of the southern forms, which (J. O. Sars has found
at Hasvik on Soro.
Vrrøa cuft2)l(1atti. Olivi.
The Skjerstad Fiord VI, 125 in.
Poromf/a yrunulatct. Nyst.
Malangen, 100—200 m.
Curhiilii gihiiii, Olivi.
The Østnes Fiord, 20 m.
') MolluscH III, p. 39.
0. Nordgaard.
Saxicara arciica. Lin.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The .Skjerstad Fiord HI, 230 m.;
The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m.; The Sag- Fiord, 200 m.; Bålstad,
150 m.; Ure I, 200—250 m.; Svolvær (1894); Digermulen, 100—
150 m.; The 0gs Fiord I, 100 m.; Malangen, 100-200 m.; The
North Cape (1894); The Kjølle Fiord (1894).
Zirphcea crispatu, Lin.
On the farm Sund in The Beier Fiord, ou the beach.
This is one of the mussels which are used as bait.
Scaphopoda.
Heeman Friele ane I. Spaeee Schneidek determ.
Remarks by the author.
Dentalium entale, Lin.
The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 80 m.; Røst II, 150 m.; Svolvær
(1894); Digermulen, 100—150 m.; Sværholt (1894).
Bcntalium occidentale, Stimpson.
The Kirk Fiord II, 70— 80 m.; Brettesnes— Skroven, 350-400
m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.
Dentalium ac/ile, M. Saes.
Landego, 200—400 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.
Lofoten is the northern limit for this species.
Si])honodentalium vitreum, M. Sars.
The Skjerstad Fiord II, 185 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330
m.; The Skjerstad Fiord VII, 490 m.; Malangen, 380 m.; Lyngen
II, 250 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.; Kvænangen II, 90 m.; Kvæn-
angen, 300—343 m.; The Jøkel Fiord I, 100 m.; The Jøkel Fiord
II, 60 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
This arctic form has not hitherto been noticed south of The
Skjerstad Fiord.
SipJionodentalium quinquangulare, Forbes.
The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Øxsund, 600 m.; Mortsund I, (Vest
Fiord), 200 m.; Brettesnes— Skroven, 350—400 m.
PJacophora.
Herman Friele and I. Spaere Schneider determ.
Remarks by the author.
Hunleijia lumleyi, Bean.
The Kirk Fiord IT, 50 m.; Malangen, 100-200 m.
Leptuchifon ccmcellatus, Soweuhv.
The Sag Fiord, 200 ra.; Kvænangen 11. no m.
Leptockiton einerens, Lin.
Henningsværstrømmcn, 20 — 40 m.; The Østnes Fiord, 30 m.,
Digermulen, 100 — 15o m.
Trdchjidcrmon exaratus, G. 0. Sars.
The Salten Fiord II, 320—380 in.
Trachydermon (dims, Lin.
„Glea" (Røst); Digermulen, 100—150 m.
Trachydermon ruber, Lowe.
Troldliordsund, 40 m.
Tonlcelki murmorea, Fabr.
The Kirk Fiord IV, 30 — 50 m.; Henuingsværstrommen, 30 —
40 m.;'The Østnes Fiord 1, 30 m.
Gastrovoda.
Herman Friele and I. Spaeee Schneider determ.
Remarks by the author.
Patella vulgata, Lin.
Several large shells belonging to this species were found on
the beach at Værø (^-k 1896).
This species is found as far north as Raftsund (Lofoten) on
the inner coast, according to G. 0. Sars. Along the outer coast,
Schneider') mentions that it is found up to the 70th degree of
latitude (Vandø, NW of Tromsø).
Patina pelhmda. Lin.
Svolvær harbour; Sværholt (1894).
Schneider mentions that the species may be found right up
to Vardø.
Acmaia testudhialis, Mull.
„Glea" (Rost); The Kjolle Fiord (1894); Sværholt (1894).
Tectura rubella, Fabr.
In a bottom sample fi-om Hammerfest (s). The southern limit
for the species is Tromsø.
Tecfnra ririjhiea. Mull.
Henningsværstrommen, 20 — 4o m.; The Skjerstad Fiord U,
30—50 m.
Tectura falva, 0. F. Mi^ll.
Skroven, 200—400 m.
Lepeta coeca, 0. F. Mtjll.
The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 30—50 m.; The 0gs Fiord I. loo m.;
The Jøkel Fiord I, 100 m.; The Porsanger Fiord.
PaiictnreUa noachina, Lin.
The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 80 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.;
Røst II, 100 m. ; Mortsund III, loo ni.; in a sample of bottom from
Hammerfest (s).
Einaryinnltt /issura. Lin.
The Østnes Fiord, 20 m.
G. 0. Saes mentions Hammerfest as the northern limit for the
Scissurella crispata, Flem.
Mortsund I, 200 m.
Margarita hdicina, Fabr.
„Glea" (Rost), Øxsund, 600 m.; Kvænangen, 300—343 m.
Troldliordsund, 40 m.; Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
1) Trunisøsimdets Molluskfauna, p. 101.
Bottom-Life.
17!
^[(trgantd jiroeiihmilira, Chemn.
The Heicr Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Salten Fiord I, 15— 20 m.;
Bålstad; Heniiini;sværstroiimieii, 20 — 4n m.\ yvolvær, Risværflaket,
150-180 m.: The Ostnes Fiord; .Stonnesbotn, 40—80 m.; The
Jolid Fionl. l(i(t 111.; ITaiiiiiicrfost; Troldliordsund. H) m.; The K, jolle
Fidid (IsiM).
Minjiatila cinerea, Corxii.
Tlio Kirk Fiord IV, 30-50 m. (s); The .lokel Fiord III, 100
111.; Haiiiiiicrfest (1894) (s).
MacliaTO))hix obscma. Coith.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m. (s); Stonnesbotn, 40—80 m.;
Kvænangen II, »<• m. (si; Ti-oldfiordsund, 40 m. ; Hammerfest
(1894) (s).
U'lhhula cbivyariK. Lix.
The Salten Fiord I. 15—20 m.; The Salten Fiord II, 320—
380 m.; The Kirk Fiord III, 70—80 m.; Bålstad, 10—35 m.;
Svolvær (1894); Risværflaket, 150 — l8o m.; The Kanstad Fiord,
30—90 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.
(rililiuld tiiwiihi. Mont.
The Salten Fiord I. 15 — 2(Mii.; Heniiingsv:erstrommen, 20 — 40
m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 3u-H(i m. ; Kvænangen II, 90 m.
Trochus occidentaUs, Migh.
The Beier Fiord, 50— 150 m.; Reine, lOOm.; Bålstad, 10—35
m.; Malangen. 100—200 ni. : The Jokel Fiord I, 100 m.; Hammer-
fest (1894) (s); Breisund, ino ni.; Ingohavet, 300 ni.
Comilus iiiiUegranus, Phil.
Digermulen, 100 — 150 m.
The noi'theru limit for this species is Digermulen.
Capidus hi(n</aricii-'<. Lix.
Røst II, 150 m.
I collected two dwarf-like specimens at Røst, which is the most
northernly place where the species has been observed alive. The !
Norw. North Atl. Exp. only found shells at stations 192 and 195.
Veh(fi)ta hcvigahi. Penx.
Svolvær (1894); Breisund, 100 m.
Vehttina flexiUs, Moxt.
Breisund. 100 m.
Lnmplhma hitem. 0. F. MtJLL.
Arno, 300—400 m.
A gigant specimen, about 50 mm.
Marseiiid jirodita, O. F. Mull.
Mortsund III, loo m.; Sværholt (1894).
Onchidiopsi.s glacialis, M. Sars.
Tys Fiord, 500 m.
r- Amanropsis islandiea, Gmelin.
The Beier Fiord, 50— 150 m. (s); Malangen, 100— 200 m. (s);
Hammerfest (s); Troldfioidsund; Breisund.
Xdtifii (LiDKiti'i) iiiont/igiii. Fabh.
The Kirk Fiord 111. 70 ho ui.; Bålstad, 10-35 m.; .Mort-
sund I, inii in.; Tlic Ostnes Fiord; Digermulen, lOO — 150 m.; Tiie
Kanstad Fiord, ;ii) !mi hi.; Malangen, 100 — 200 m.; Stonnesbotn,
40-8(» ni.; Troldliordsund. |n m.
Xiilini iLinnilnti niUvHinlia. j'lllL.
The Salten Fiord 1. 15 -2ti in.
Lofoten is the iiortiinn iiiiiit for this species.
X/ilii-ii I L(i)iitfin) <irij(iili(,i(lirti. I'.KCK.
The Salten Fiord 1. 15 -2n m.; The Kirk Fiord II, 50 m.:
The Kirk Fiord III, 7()-K(» m.; The Kirk Fiord IV, 30—50 m.:
Mortsund III, Hhi m. ; Digermulen, 100-150 m. (,s); The Qgs
Fiord I, 100 m.; Stonnesbotn, 40-80 m.; Lyngen II, 250 m. (s);
The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m. (si.
XiitirK iLnwifidt affinis, G.^iel.
The Beier Fioi'd, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fioixl I, 30—50
m.; The Salten Fiord, 320—380 m.; Øxsund, 600 m.; Ure I, 200
—250 m.; Østnes Fiord (s); Gaukværø, 250 m.; Malangen, 100- -
200 m. (s); Kvænangen II, 9o m. (s); The Jokel Fiord I. 100 m.;
The Jokel Fiord III, loo m.; lireisund, lOo m. ; The Porsanger
Fiord, 200 m.
Trichotropls hon-fdis, Brod. &. Sow.
Moskenstrømmeu I, 200 m.; Bålstad, 10—35 m.; Malangen,
100—200 m.; The Jøkel Fiord I, lOo m.; The Jøkel Fiord II,
80 m.; Hammerfest (s); Troldfiordsund, 4o m. ; The Por.sanger Fiord,
200 ra.
Trichotropis ro)iir(i. ^Iøll.
The Jøkel Fioi'd.
Tromsø is the southern limit for tliis species.
Litforina I'dtoren. Lix.
„Glea" (Røst), several large specimens.
Littorina rudis, Metox.
The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 8o m.; Risvæi-fiaket, 150—180 m. (s).
Var. (/rundcoidicd. Moll, collected at Vardo was given me by
my friend Olaf Vaade.
Littorina palliata, Say.
From Olaf "\'aai>e, factory-manager, I got specimens of tliis
species, which were collected at Vardø.
Littoriitd obtusi<(da. Lix.
„Glea" (Rø.st); Risværflaket. 150 — 180 m. (s).
Lacuna diraricata, Fabk.
The Salten Fiord I, 15 — 20 m.; Bålstad, 10—85 m.; Hennings-
værstrømmen, 20-40 in.; Svolvær (1894); Risvæi-flaket, 150 — 180
m.; The Kanstad Fiord. 30-90 m.; Kvænangen II, 90 m.; Trold-
liordsund, 40 m.; The North Cape (1894); Sværholt (1894).
Bin.iua (Ah-ania) j''ff'ri')/ni. Waller.
The Skjerstad Fiord VI, 125 m.; Hammerfest (s).
h'i.s.sod (Onoha) aculeus, Gould.
Haniinerfest (s).
0. Nordgaard.
LoveneUa metida, Lov.
The Kirk Fiord II, 50 m.; Brettesnes— Skroven, 300—400
Cerithiopsis costidata, Møll.
Hammerfest (s).
LæococMia grmiosa, Wood.
Reine I, 150 m.
Aporhcm pes-pelieani, Lin.
The Salten Fiord I, 15 — 20 m. Several rather lari^e specimens.
G. O. Sars has occasionally caught this species in Lofoten,
and M. Saes') mentions that he found a specimens in the 0x Fiord.
On the inner coast, from Lofoten to the 0x Fiord, the species has
not been noticed ; but on the outer coast it is mentioned by Schnei-
der as being- collected at Lyngø and Vandø.
Scalaria groenhmdica. Chemn.
The Skjerstad Fiord III, 230 m. (s); Lyngen III, 300 m.;
Hammerfe.st (s); Troldtioi-dsund, 40 m. ; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
At Hammerfest and at the station Lyngen III empty shells of
var. loveni were found.
Scaluria ohtut<icostata, Wood.
Lyngen III, 300 m. (s).
Hemiaclis ventrosa, Jeffreys.
The Sag Fiord, 200 m.
Eulhnella scillæ, Scacchi.
The Folden Fiord, 530 m.
Eulhna intermedia, Cantr.
The mouth of Raftsuud, 280—300 m. ; Oxsund, 600 m.
EaJlma stenustoiiia, Jeffe.
Landego, 200—400 m.; Mortsund I (Vest Fiord), 200 m.; the
mouth of Raftsund, 250—300 m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.
According to Schneider the former northern limit for this
species was Tromsø; but The Norw. Noi-th Atl. Exp. collected
specimens not only in The Skjerstad Fiord, but also in The Vest
Fiord, The Alten Fiord, The Porsanger Fiord and The Tana Fiord.
Admete vtriditla, Fabr.
The lieier Fiord, 50 — 150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord I, 30—50
m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IX (s); Moskenstrømmen, 200 m.; Bålstad,
150 m.; Mortsund 11, 200 m. (s); Stene (Vest Fiord), 100— 200 m.;
Gaukværø II, 250 m.; Lyngen II, 250 m.; The .Jokel Fiord, 100
m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
MangiUa (Rciphitoma) anceps, Eichw.
]\1oskenstrøramen I, 200 m.
This is one of the southern foi'iiis wliich has been caught by
G. 0. Sars at Hasvik on Sorø.
Tunoiis cirruta, Bruonone.
Lyng-en 11, 250 m.
Bela })yramidulis. Strøm.
Kvænangen IE, 90 m.
1) Beretning oni en zoologisk Reise Sommeren 1849. Sep. p. lU.
Bela sarsi, Verrill.
The Kirk Fiord IV, 30—50 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 70 ni.
Bcla declivis, Lov.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m. (s); The Jøkel Fiord, 100 m. (s).
Bela nobilis, Møller.
The Jøkel Fiord I, 100 m.
Bela scalaris, Møller.
Gaukværø II, 250 m. (s); Malangen, 100 — 200 m. (s); Lyngen
III, 300 m. (s).
Bela ruyulata, Møller.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord II, 185 m.;
Malangen, 100—200 m.; Kvænangen II, 90 m.
Bela exarata, Møller.
Lyngen II, 250 m.; Kvænangen, 300—343 m. (s).
Bela liarpularia, Couth.
The Salten Fiord I, 15—20 m.; Stønnesbotn, 40— 80 m. (var.
rosea).
Bela treveliiana. Turt.
The Skjerstad Fiord VI, 125 m.
Bela tenuicostata , M. Sars.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 80 m.;
Mortsund I, 200 m.; Gaukværø II, 25() m.
Typhlomangilia nivalis, Lov.
The Beier Fiord, 50— 150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 80 m.;
The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Mortsund II, 200 m.; Ure I, 200— 250 m.;
Digermulen, 100 — 150 m.; Gaukværø II, 250 m. ; Malangen, 100
— 200 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.
Spirutropis carinata, Phil.
Moskenstrømmen, 200 m.; Bålstad, 150 m.; Digermulen, 100—
150 m. (s); The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Gaukværø H, 250 m.; Mal-
angen, 380 m.
Met-geiia alba. Jeffreys.
Moskenstrømmen, 200 in.; Ure I, 200—250 m. (s); Malangen,
100—200 m.
Trophon traiieatus. Strøm.
Henningsværstrømmeu, 20 — 40 m.; Hammerfest (s).
Trojihvn elathratus, Lin.
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 150 m. (var. gunneri); Moskenstrømmen,
200 m.; The Kirk Fiord II, 70—80 m. (s); The Kirk Fiord HI;
Svolvær (1894) (var. gunneri); Breisund, 100 m. (the typical form
and var. gunneri): Tiie Porsanger Fioid, 2O0 m.
Trophon barvicensis, Johnst.
The lieier Fiord, 50— 150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 80 m.;
Moskenstroinmen, 200 m. (s); Malangen, 380 m. (s).
Fnrpura lapilhts, Lix.
The Salten Fiord I, 15—20 m.; „{Tlea" (Røst), on the beach;
The North Cape (1894); Nordkyn (1894).
Asti/rig runarcd, CiouLD.
„Glca" (Kusti. (Ill tlie beach; Hammerfest (s); IJreisuiul, loo m. (s).
X(i!<s(i iiin(i.i-s(ifu, Stkum.
Svolvær (1894).
Btirciiiu)» inidiihnii. Lin.
The Beier Fiord, 5o— 150 m. ; The yalten Fiord I, 15— 20 m.;
Tile Siijerstad Fiord I, 30—50 m.; Tlie fSlijerstad Fiord IX, 50 m.
„(Tlea" (Rost); The Ostiies Fiord. 40 m.: Malau-en, 100— 2((0 m.;
Stomiesbotii, 4o — sd m.
Ihicciiiiiiii iinii'iihiiidicinii, Chkmn.
Tlie .Tokcl Fiord II. (iO iii.
Troniso is its southern limit.
Biirciiiiitii fiiuiKircliiinutui. Vkhkk.
Kvænangen II, 90 m. (s); Breisund. Km in.: The Porsanger
Fiord, 200 m.; Sværholt (18941.
There is no certain proof that this species has been seen aUve
south of the Bals Fiord, where, according to Sohneideb, it has
been caught on a fishing line.
ridv txiioiii, Beax.
The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
VolutopsLs non-eylca. Chemn.
Reino (Vest Fiord), 100 m.; Bålstad II, 8() in.; The Østues
Fiord; The Kanstad Fiord (s).
The southern limit, as known at present, for this species is
The Vest Fiord.
Ni/ptunea dvspectn. Lin.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 80 m.;
The Kanstad Fiord. .30—90 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; Kvæn-
angen n, 90 m. ; Breisund, 100 m.
Sijiho IsJandlciis. Che.mn.
Rost I. 100
S'lphij gn(ciJi->, var. ghiber. Yerkkuzen.
Reine, 100 m.; Bålstad; The Østnes Fioid; Malangen, 100—
200 m.; Svu'i'holt (1894); Meliavn (1894).
Sipho fxrritus. M. Sars.
Reine, luu m.: Bålstad, 150 m. (s); Mortsund. 200 m. (s);
Svolvær (1894).
Siplw ehur, MøRCH.
The Skjerstad Fiord U, 185 m. (s); The Folden Fiord, 530 m.;
Arno, 300—400 m. (s); Malangen, 100—200 m.
Sipho tafi-rireiis. Mwi.i.ek.
The Jøkel Fiord HI. lOu ni. (s|; liicisund. loom.; The Pors-
anger Fiord, 20O m. is).
The southern limit is Tromso.
('i/IicJnia kIIhi. Brown.
The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord VII,
490 m.; Mortsund I, 20o ra.; The Østnes Fiord; The Porsanger
Fiord, 200 m.
Aiiililii.-jihi/)-!! <:rji(i)isa, Jiiekr.
The Folden Fiord, 530 m.
.\))iiiliisj)lii/ri( luvnidlis. Couth.
The P.eier Fiord, 50—150 m.; Risvær, 150—180 m.
Scdplmnih'r pniirlo-sfrintiis, Mi(;n.
The Salten Fiord II, 320—380 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.;
The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; The Kirk Fiord III, 70—80 m.; Svolvær
(1894); The Kanstad Fiord, 30-90 m.; Malangen, 380 m.; The
Jøkel Fiord 111. 100 m.
Sfiiiihiitiihi' hijiiiirnis. jjix.
Bålstad, 15o m.; .Mditsiind ill, loo m.
The northern limit is Lofoten. In the neighbourhood of
Bergen (Herlø Fiord) the species reachies a length of 40 mm., the
largest specimen from Mortsund measured 19 mm.
PhiVme <pimh<il(i. Wool..
The Skjerstad Fiord VII, 490 m.; Reine 1, 150 m.
Phlliiii' finmarchica, M. Saks.
The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord VH,
490 ni.
The Skjerstad Fiord is the southern limit for this species, as
far as is now known.
Pleurohrdiichus plumida, Mont.
The Tys Fiord. 500 m.; Breisund, 100 m.
Grik(i'i niriitioiis it from the Vaags Fiord (Nord Fiord) and
Storm-) fioiii llodlicig in the Troudhjem Fiord.
The northern limit must now be changed to the Breisund.
Remarl
Nu dibran chia ta.^)
bv Herman Friele. Avho has also determ.
Calidna obreldtd, 0. G. Midler.
('. repandd. A. i<: II. (?).
Kvænangen, 90 ra.
A small specimen. The teeth correspond to C. obvelata, but
in external appearance, thei'e seems to be some ditierence; I do not,
however, venture to name a new species after my examination of
a specimen which was possibly only imperfectly developed, and was
also greatly contracted.
JJoidronotu.--- drboirsccns. MC'eeeh.
Rost II. 150 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
JJoidronofds robdshis, Vehrill.
The Skjerstad Fiord II. lOO— 1,S5 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IV,
330 m.; Stønesbotn, 40—80 m.; The Jøkel Fiord, 80 m.
('(Dlljirsjic ilHljur. j'.KKCll.
The Skjerstad Fiord III, 230 m.
1) Skrabninger i Viiagsfjorden og Ulvesiiml, Yne Nordfjord. Berg. Mus
Aarb. 1897. no. XVI, pag. 23.
'^) Oversigt over Troiidhjemsfjordeiis fauna, p. 13. Meddelelser fra stations-
anlæggets arbeidskomite for Trondlijems biologiske station. Trondhjem 1901.
^) Descriptions by :\[i. FiuKi R ..' tin- nnv .species here mentioned will
soon be publislied.
182
0. Nordgaard.
Only one specimen of this species, which is described by Rttd.
Bergh in „Nudibranchien" from the Wilhehii Barents Expedition,
has previously been found, and that M-as at Vardø.
Cori/pheUa rufibr<mchialis. Johnst.
The Skjerstad Fiord, 130 m.; Grøtø, 6—24 m.; Repvaag, 10 m.
CorypJiella rohusfn, n. sp., M. S.
■^U 1899, Breisund, 100 ra. Two specimens.
Conjphella nonlguardi, n. sp., M. S.
The Skjerstad Fiord II, 100— 1R5 m. Four specimens.
Conjphdla .sp. ?
The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m. One specimen.
Judging from the structure of the teeth and the edges of the
jaws, it would seen that this specimen belongs to an unknown species;
but it was in such a mutilated condition that its external appearance
cannot be described.
AeoUda piift'dla. n. sp. M. S.
Kvænangen, 90 m.
Cephalopoda.
Ommutostrejjhes todunis, Raf.
Jaws of this species were found in the stomachs of cods and
coal fish (Gadus virens) at Sundere (in Vesteraalen) in February
1897.
Jiossid glaiicopi^. Lov.
Mortsund I, 200 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; Kvænangen II,
90 m.; Sværholt (189-1).
Crustacea,
Copepocla.
The author deterra.
Eiinjtc longic-auda, Philippi.
(Thordlid hruniim. Boeck), i)
Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), lo m.
The species was very common at this place, the females gener-
ally had ovisacks.
TJiæti/lopKs sfromi, Baikd.
Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
Thalcstris {Dactnloptisj (fihlm, KiiøvKJi. (G. 0. Saes determ.).
Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
Harpactrcus cheli/rr, Mitller.
Repvaag (The Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
Tdyci fureata, Baied.
Repvaag (The Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
1) Cf. GiESBRBCHT, MiUheilungen fiber Copepodi:n. MittlieiluiiHen aus der
zool. Station zu Neapel. 14 Vol. Nr. 1, 1900, p. 67.
Impoi'tant constributions to tlie knowledge of the Copepoda
of northei'n Norway have recently been made by Prof. G. 0. Saks,')
Dr. Thomas Scott'-) and the Rev. Canon A. M. Norm.\n. Dr.
Scott has described several new species from Finmark.
Brancbiopoda.
Nehulia iy;es, Fabk.
Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
A detailed description of Ncbalia is given by G. O. Sars in
launa Norvegiæ, Vol. 1. (FligUociirida and Phijllopodn).
Ostracoda.
G. 0. Saks detei'm.
Farddo.nistoma rariahilr. Baihd.
Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), lo m.
Cypr'idlna norvcglcn, Baird.
Oxsund, 600 m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Moskenstrømmen,
180 m.; Reine (Vest Fiord), from the stomach of cod; Høla (Vest
Fionl) 250 m. ; Gaukværø II, 250 m.
I also found this species in the stomach of cod (Gadus cal-
larias) caught at Christiansund -"/a 1896 and at Sartorø '-'Vs 1898.
Contributions to a knowledge of the Ostracoda of Northern
Norway have especially been made by A. M. Norman') and G. O.
Sars.^)
Cirripfdia.
The authoi- determ.
Ltpas unid'ifcin, Lin.
Moskenesø (Lofoten), on a glass ball.
Courhodrniiu nunlnm. Lix.
Mehavn (Finmark) on Mrgnptini hoops fastened to Coronula
diadema.
Sralpi'lhiiii strociiii. 'SI. Sars.^)
Tranodybet, 607 — 640 m. ; Tlie Porsanger Fiord, 20() m.
Balanus halanoides, Lin.
Connuon on tlie rocks along the beach.
Balanus crenatus. Bru<i.
The North Cape (1S94\ Is found in tolerably deep water.
Baldvus pureafus. da Costa.
Kvænangen II, 00 m.; The North Capo (1894).
1) Crustacea of Norway, VdI. IV.
^ Notes on some Copepoda from Arctic Seas coUected in l!Sil0 by the
Eev. Canon A. M. Noeman, F. R. S. By Thomas Scott, F. L. S. Ann. Mag.
Nat. Hist. Ser. 7. Vol. XI.
3) Notes on tlie Marine Cninfrarca Ostrricnda of Norway. Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist. Ser. 6, Vol. VII, 1891, p. 108.
*) Oversigt af Norges marine Ostraeuder. Kristiania. Vid. Selsk. Forh. 18(i.5.
'•) G. 0. Saes determ.
Hiihiinis hiiiiicri, Ascanius.
Kost I. IL>(1 111.
The specimen was about 50 mm. in leng-tli. G. O. Saes has
collected sonic specimens, in the yorosund near Hammerfest, which
were 90 mm. in leniith and 50 mm. in lieidit.
Several (possibly all) of the speeimens eoliected at Kost con-
tained a very larj^e number of nauplius iarv;v (-'Va 1809).
]\'nnca strdciiilii. Mvu,.
Counuon in all fiords.
Ciifoniihi di(i(h'iiui. Lin.
;Mehavn (Finmai-k) on tlic skin of Mcgaptcra boops. According-
to Weltener,') this species is a thorouijh cosmopolitan.
Amphipodn.
J. Si'AUKK-tSc'HXEiDKu (leterui.
Remarks by tlie author.
Socarni'ft ralili. KK(n-EH.
Troldtiordsund. 4ii ni.; Breisund, loo m.
Aiiifiii.-'iK ihinii'l.t>Keiii. Boeck.
The Skjerstad Fiord III. 230 m.; Ure I (Vest Fiord), 200—
250 m.
Aristias fioiiidiis, Keoyer.
Reine (Vest Fiord), 150 m., jiniiores.
CuHsoiii(( Jtopei, A. Costa.-)
CaUsoma crciuiid. G. 0. Saks, Aiiipliiiioda, p. 53, PI. XIX.
FiiT. 1.
The Skjerstad Fiord IX. SO ni.
HijijHJiui'duu ilriitirulatus, Bate.
The Salten Fiord I, 15—20 m. ; Napstrømmen (Lofoten) 30 —
40 ra.
H'qi[ionic(h))i projihitjKus, G. (_). Saks.
Kvænauyen II. 90 m.
Orrhomene st'rrtitKs. Boeck.
Henningsvær I (Vest Fiord), 150 m.; The Tys Fiord I, 500 m.
Orcliomene umhlyops, G. 0. Saks.
Mortsund I (Vest Fiord), 200 m.
OrcJiiiiiicnelhi minute, Kroyek.
Troldtiordsund, 40 m. ; Repvaay (Poi'sanger Fiord), 10 m.
Orchomnidlu innijim, lioECK.
Repvaag iPorsano-er Fiord), io m.
Tryphosdla-') IvJrnuj'i. Bxieck.
The Skjerstad Fiord II, 100—185 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530
m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Mortsund (Vest Fiord), 200 m.; Ure
I (Vest Fiord), 200—250 m.; Malangen, 380 m.
^) Die Cirripedien der Arktis. Fauna arctica vr)n Ko.mer iiiid Schaudinn.
Vol. I, p. .302,
-) Cf. NORMAX, Britisli Ainpliipoda. Ann. Mag. Xat. Hist. Ser. 7, Vol. V,
p. m).
3) Cf. XORMAX. On Britisli Aniphi])odM. p. :i0.5.
Schneider has used the names of Saks in „Awphipoda". I
have made some alterations in this respect, as I have acted upon
Norman's remarks in his revision of British Aniphipoda.
I'ristcK undionatKs, (i. O. Sars.
Psnidotn/phom umbontita, G. O. Sars.
Reine (Vest Fiord) from the stomach of cod.
Anonij.r nngux. Pmi-i'S.
The Salten Fiord I, 15—20 m.; The Kirk Fiord II; The
Kanstad Fiord, 30-90 m.; The Jokd Fiord, from the stomach of
cod; Repvaag (Porsani^cr Fiord), 10 m.
JldpJoii/j.r rimdfi, Fahr.
Reine (Vest Fiord), from the stomach of cod; Svolvær (Vest
Fiord), from the stomach of cod; The Jøkel Fiord II.
Chironesimus dcbniyni, Hoek.
Kvænangen II, 90 m.
This species is previously known fnmi The Barents Sea (Hoek);
Lofoten, The Trondhjem Fiord, Chrisliansund (G. 0. Sars).
Lepidepecreum umbo, Goes.
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 150 m.; Høla (Vest Fiord), 150 m.;
Stennesbotn, 40—80 m.; The Jøkel Fiord II, 80 m.
Leptopho.nis fdlcatux. (J. 0. Sars.
Malangen, 380 m.
This species was previously known from Bohuslen and up to
the coast of Nordland. The northern limit mu,st now be taken to
be Malangen.
Paniphoxus oeulatK^:. (i. 0. Sars.
The Skjerstad Fiord VII, 490 in.
Ampeliscii macrocephaht. Lill,ieboe(j.
Kvænangen II, 90 m.
Anipelhca cschrichti, Krøyer.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 80
m.; The Kirk Fiord, 50 m.; The Ogs Fiord, 100 m.; The Kanstad
Fiord, 30-90 m.
Antpdisca æquicornis, Bruzelics.
Malangen, 100—200 m.; Kvænangen II, 90 m. The previ-
ously known northern limit was Lofoten: this must now be changed
to Kvænangen.
Aiiipdisca aniblyops, G. 0. Sars.
Malangen, 380 m.
This species was previously known from Buhusicn, and Sars
has collected it in the Kristiania Fiord and the Trondhjem Fiord.
Its northern limit must now be taken to be Malangen.
Huphps tlth]ci)l((, LiLLJEBORG.
The Kirk Fiord \\, 50 ni.; Malangen, 380 m.
Stegocephalus inflatus, Krøyer.
Rost, from the stomach of cod; Malangen, 380 m.; Ingohavet,
300 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
18å
O. Nordo-aartl.
Slec/orephalns similifi. G. O. Såes.
The Skjerstad Fiord VII, 490 m.; Henaiiig-svær (Vest Fiord),
from the stomach of cod; Malangen. 380 m.
The most northerly place at which Sårs has collected this
species is Tjøtø. Its noi'thern limit must now be changed to Mal-
angen.
Andaniu ahijsii. Boeck.
Malangen, 380 m.
The northern limit must now be moved from Lofoten to Mal-
angen.
Awph'doehug teniiiinanus, Bokck.
Malangen, 380 m.
Saes has caught this species at different places on the west
coast right up to Selsøvik, which is a little north of the arctic
circle. Its northern limit will now be Malangen.
Metopa (il(le)-i, Bate.
The Skjerstad Fiord XVI; The Tys Fiord, 500 m.
Leucotlioe sinnicarpa, Abildgaaed.
Henningsvær I, 150 m.; Tranedybet, 530 m.; Malangen, 380 m.
Saes has found this form at different places on the south and
west coasts of Norway as far up as the Trondhjem Fiord. Its
northern limit will now be Malangen.
Oediceros saginatits\ Keøyee.
Troldfiordsund, 40 m. Occuri'ed in very large numbers and
with young.
Fiiropdiceros lynceus, M. Saes.
The Kanstad Fiord, 30— 90 m.; Stønnesbotn, 40— 80 m. The
southern limit for the species on our coast is, according to Saes,
A pp el vær.
Faroediceyus propinqxas. Goes.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; Lyngen II, 250 m.
Monoculodcs suhiudus, Noeman.
( Monoculodes falcatus, G. (). Sars).
The Kirk Fiord III, 70—80 m.; Ure I (Vest Fiord).
Halhnedon in/iUcri, Boeck.
Mortsund I (Vest Fiord), 200 m. ; Gaukværø II, 250 m.
Halimedoii acuti/rons. G. O. Saes.
Mortsund I, (Vest Fiord), 200 m.; Gaukværø II, 250 m.
Halimedon f)ie(j(dops, G. 0. Saes.
Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
Halimedon hrericalcar, Goes.
Malangen, 380 m.
Jiutlii/iiu'doii loiiijimanus, Boeck.
(Vest Fiord), 150—180 m.
Aceros phyUovi/x, M. Sars.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord I, 30—50
m.; The Salten Fiord, 200 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.; Landego,
200—450 m.; The Kirk Fiord IV, 50 m.; Mortsund I, 200 m.;
The Ogs Fiord I. 100 m.; The Kanstad Fiord. 30-90 m.; Gauk-
værø II, 250 m.; Stonnesbotn, 40—80 m.; The Jokel Fiord I. 100 m.
Pleuates 'panoplus, Keøyee.
Røsthavet, 700 m.; Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
Piiironiihltoc piikhella, Keoyee.
The Skjerstad Fiord XVI. on Hydroida.
Panciiipliitoc biruspis, Krøyer.
Troldtioi'dsund, 40 m.
Panimjihiton n-'iyimiVts. G. 0. Saes.
Malangen, 380 m.
I'((r((})Ieiisfes lidipe». M. Sars.
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord III, 230
m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.
EpivwriK coyiiiyera. Fare.
The Sag Fioi'd, 20(i m.
The northern limit is thus changed from the Trondhjem Fiord
to the Sag Fiord.
Eplmcria parusitica, M. Saes.
Bålstad (Vest Fiord), 150 m.
As far as I know, this form has not previously been observed
so far north as in Lofoten.
Epimena tiihrrcuhita, (i. 0. Saes.
Malangen, 380 m.
This species was not previously found north of the Trondhjem
Fiord.
Eptmpria loricafa, G. O. Saes.
Malangen, 100—200 m.; Lyngen II, 250 m.; Saes has collected
this form at Hasvig, West Finmark. Malangen is the southern
limit for the species.
Ac((iilho.:oi>)' cKsplddttt, Lepechin.
The Ogs Fiord. lOo m.
The southorn limit for this ar(^tic form is the Trondhjem Fiord.
Acinifltn)iotosij)ti(i si'i-i-iifiiiii, Fahr.
The Ikner Fiord, 50 — 150 m.; Grøto. o- 24 m.; The Kanstad
Fiord, 30—90 m.; Stønnesbotn, 40—80 m.; Kvænangen, 340 m. ;
Troldfiordsund, 10 m.
Tphlmed'ui ohesa, Rathke.
Bålstad (Vest Fioid).
Syrlioe crenulnta, Goes.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord II, 100—
185 m., The Skjerstad Fiord III, 330 in
Pirddlittca cusjjidat», Keøyee.
The Jokel Fiord, in the stomach of cod.
liottoni-Life.
I'anldlwca (ihi,ssi. lioixK.
IiiLTollilVot, 300 III.
KusiiK.t winiilKS, G. O. y.viis.
Malanucn, .JSO m.
This spocios liad provioiisly only been Ibiiiid by t^Aus at Rod-
lieiL'' in the Trondiijcin Fiord.
lihacufiojilf! aculi'dtd, Lkpechin.
lugohavet. .300 m.; The Porsan,<;er Fiord, 70 ni.
Iiliacotrop'u^ Iwllcri, liovxa.
The Skjerstad Fioi-d II, 100—185 m.; Tlic Skjerstad Fiord
IV, 330 m.; Tiie Skjei'stad Fiord VTI, 490 in.; Tiie Folden Fiord.
530 m. ; Malangen, 380 m.; Lyngen IT, 250 ni.; Kvænangen,
300—343 m.
Fhdcotropi.s m'icropus, G. 0. Saks.
The Salten Fiord 11. about 200 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IV,
330 m.; Oxsund, 600 m.; Mortsnnd (Vest Fiord), 200 in.; Tranø-
dybet, 607— G40 m.
HaUratjoiilcii inermis. G. 0. Sams.
Mortsuud I (Test Fiord), 200 m.; The Sag Fiord. 200 m.
HaUrages fidvocinctiis, M. Saks.
The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m.; Brettesnes— Skroven, 350—
400 m.; Risværtiaket, 150 -180 m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Kvæn-
angen, 300—343 m.
Aphenisd fridentatd, Bkuzelius.
Troldtiordsund, 40 m.
CdUiopiu»- keviuscdlm, Kkøyee.
Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
Pardtijlus swammerddmi, 11. Milne-Ed-\vakds.
Troldtiordsund, 4o m.
Mclpliidippu horcalis, Boeck.
Malaneeu. 380 in.
Bålstad (1S97
Røst n, 150
of cod.
AmathUln honuiri, Fabe.
The North Cape (1894); Sværholt (1S94).
Gdmmarus locustd, Lin.
Bålstad, 30 — 40 m. ; Reine, from the stomach
Md'ifa dentata, Kkøtek.
The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m.; Troldtiordsund. 4n in.; The
Jøkel Fiord II, 80 m.
Lilljchoryia jMllida. Bate.
Ure 1 (Vest Fiord); Malangen, 380 m.
LUIji'horgi(( fisHicornis, M. Sars
The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Malangen. 380 m.; Lvngcn III, 300 m.
/ihnirlla (njdiruniis, (i. 0. Saus.
Kvænangen, 300—343 m.
This species has on the coast of Norway previously only been
collected in the Varanger Fiord (Nouman, G. O. Saus). The occur-
rence in Kva-nangen is thus very interesting.
(I'diiniinioiisis cri/tlinijilitlidlnid, Lii,i,.ii;ii()i{(i.
Rosthavct, 7(in ni.
This form had iiul previously been eolleeted so far north as
the Troiulhjem Fiord. It was therefore remarkable to lind it on
the 68th degree of latitude.
Anipliilhoe ralirirdtd. Most.
Bålstad (1897); Henningsværstioiinnen (Vest Fiord), 20—40 m.;
Grøtø, 0—24 ni.
hchjjrocayus angr'ipa^, Kkpveu.
Rosthavet. 700 ni.; Ingohavet, 300 in.; Repvaag (Porsanger
Fiord), 10 m.
I.srlii/rorrids miudtds, LiLL.JEnuui;.
The Skjerstad Fioi-d XVI.
Erichtonids abdltds, Templeton.
Ingohavet, 300 in.
This species is. according to Saks ,,not unfrequently off the
south and west coast of Norway". Its northern limit will now be
the sea off Ingo.
Unciola Icucopis, Kuøyer.
Rosthavet, 700 m.
On the coast of Norway, this fonn had, hitherto, only been
observed in the ^^aranger Fiord.
Æginelld aijinosd, Boeck.
The Skjerstad Fiord XVI; Malangen, 380 m.; Ineohavet, 300
m.; Breisund, 100 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 70 in.
Cdpfell'i spptejitrioiudis, Keoyee.
Breisund, 100 m.; The North Cape (1894).
Caprdld monorcrd, G. 0. Saus.
The North Cape (1894).
Pdracijcmms boojiis. LCtkex.
On Mcgdptuni hoops at Mehavu.
Literature concerning the Amphlpoda of Northern Norway:
A. M. Norman, Notes on the Natural History of East Fin-
mark. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, ser. 7, Vol. X. p. 479—483.
.1. Spaure-Schneider, Undersøgelser af dyilivet i de arktiske
tjorde. Tromsø mus. aarsh. 14.
G. 0. Saus, Crustacea of Norway. Vol. I.
It is worth noticing that the maiority of the Amphipoda men-
tioned in the foregoing list were causrlit in the winter. In the list
only the localities and depths are given, but the dates of cateh
mav be found in the list of dredging- stations.
Isopoda.
,). 8pakre Schxeidek determ.
Ajiseudes spinosus, M. Sars.
Gaukværo; Ui-e I (Vest Fiord), 200—250 m.
Ægn psora, Lin.
Bålstad. 150 ni.; Moi'tsund (Vest Fiord): Ski'oven (Vest Fiord),
200—400 ui.
Æifi rrnirosu, M. Saus.
Ingohavet. 800 m. ; two specimens, one of tliem with ova.
2(lotlir<, haWea. Pali.as.
Hola (Vest Fiord), from the stomach of cod; Stonnesbotn, 40—
80 m.; Kvtenangen, 300— .343 m.
Idothea emaryhiata. Fabb.
Stene in Bo, several specimens from tiie stomachs of cods;
Troldtiordsuud. 4o ni.
AshiciUu loiifiirontis. fSowB.
Røsthavet, 70(i m.
Jdiiirii iiKiriilosa. Leach.
The Tys Fiord 1, 500 m.; Malangen. 380 m.
Muniia fahririi. Kkoyeb.')
Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord). 10 m.
Miiiniop.'^lf< fijjiini. M. ISaks.
Several places in the Skjerstad Fiord; The Folden Fiord, 530
m.; Landego, 200—450 m.; Malangen, 380 m. ; Lyngen II, 250 m.;
Lyngen III, 300 m.; Kvænangen, 300-343 m.
Eunjcopc cornuia, (t. O. Sabs.
The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord VII,
490 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Tranø-
dybet, 607— 640 m.; Malangen, 380 m.; Lyngen II, 250 m. ; Kvæn-
angen, 300—343 ni.
Concoruing tlie isopoda of uoithcrn Norway, reference sliould
be made to Nok.man-) and (i. O. Sabs.-)
Cumacea.
fi. O. Saks (h'torm.
Ldniprojis fitsr'iatd. (i. O. Saks.
Repvaag (Porsanger Fiord), 10 m.
Leueon nasiats, Kbøyer.
Malangen, 380 m.
1) G. O. Saes determ.
2) Notes on the Natural History of East FinmnrU. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist,
r, vol. X, p. 478.
3) CniFlacen of Norway, vol. II.
Eudorella emarginata. Krøyer.
The .Jøkel Fiord. 80 m.
Diasfijlls rathlxi, Krøyer.
Several places in the Skjerstad Fiord; Moskenstrømmen, 200 m.;
The Kirk Fiord (several places); Ure I, 200— 250 m.; Mortsund I,
200 in.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 2o0 m.
Dlastijlls goudsiri, Bell.
Malangen. 100—200 m.; Lyngen IL 250 m.; The .Jokcl Fiord
I, 100 m.
It has never previously been noticed so far south as Malangen.
It was. ho^\ever, known from Kvænangen (AitrmlVius, Schneider),
the Porsanger Fiord (G. O. Sars) and from the A'aranger Fiord
(M. Sabs).
C(iiii]igl(tspis luhinnnhi. Lilljeborg.
Mortsund I (Vest Fiord), 200 m.
Literature: — G. O. Sars, Crustacea of Noi'way, Vol. III.
A. M. Norman, Notes on the Nat. Hist, of East Finmark.
Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. Ser. 7, Vol. X, p. 47S.
Carl Zimmer, Die ai'ktischen Cumaceen. Fauna arctica, Bd. I.
Schizopoda.
The autlior deterui.
Buycomgsl.^ tyldcns, G. O. Sars.')
The Skjerstad Fiord \\\, 490 m.; The Folden Fiord, 530 m.;
Øxsund, 600 m.; Tranødybet, 640 m. ; Malangen, 380 m.
Norman-) has caught this form in the Trondhjem Fiortl, and
G. 0. Sars^) in the Vest Fiord.
Malangen is tlius the most nortlierly place at which this .species
is fomid.
Ergthrupfi goi-si, G. 0. Sars.
The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m.; Tiie Jøkel Fiord I. lOit ra.
Ergthrops scrratd, G. U. Sabs.
:\Iortsun(l 1 (Vest Fiord). 200 m.; Ui'e 1 (Vest Fiord), 200—
250 m.
Eri/thiops (d)ys!<o>-uiii. G. 0. Sars.
The Skjerstad Fiord 1\. 3:iO m.: The Skjei'stad Fioi'd VII,
■490 ni.; Mortsund I. 2()o ni.
P.s('i(d()iiuii(i ivscHm, (r. (). Sabs.
Malangen, 380 m.
PsciiduDiiiui truHcdtum. K. J. Sjutii.
Lyngen II, 250 m.
G. 0. Sars has cauglit it in the iSugo Fiord, a brancli oftlic
A'ai'anger Fiord.
''IMu^ southei'u Hmit foi' llic si)e('ies will now be tlie Lyngcii
Fiord.
Hcwiiiu/sis ahi/snicola ai
') Boreomysis arctica
planliton forms.
-) A Month on tlu; TroniUijeni Fiord. Aim. Mag-. Nat. Hist. Ser. (i, V(i
XUI, p. 27-1.
3) Monographie over Norges Mysider, h. Ill, p. 17.
Buttoni-Hfe.
I'.iir,,,llnn,,s ohcsa. (1. (>. Sai;-.
Tlie yai; Fioi'd, liUU in.; Mortsuiid I. lMui ni.
AmhlyqK ahhreviaUi, G. 0. yARs.
Tlic Sk.jorstad I'^ioril VIE, 490 m.
Ml/.-iillujI.-'Ut ilidcllllll/s. NoiiMAN.
RoiiH' I (Vest Fiord), loO in.
Ml/silh'is iiisiipiis. (i. (.). yAKs.
Tlu' Hkjerstad Fiord, .l.'JO in.; Ure I, •_'()() -25U in.; tiiLMiiouth
of Ivaftsmul, 250—300 in.; Malaiiircn, 3S() in.
Ml/sis mixta, l.ii,i,.ii:i;(iii(;.
'ilio i'.cicr Fiord. "lO -1.50 m.; Tiir .lokoi Fiord II, so m.;
Stoimosbotn. 40—80 m.
Mdcroiiif/sis iiiermi.s, Rathke.
Bålstad (Vest Fiord).
Decapods.
Tile author detenn.'l
l'((sijili(ri( tarda, Krøyek.'-)
Landeso, 200-40(1 ra.; Øxsund, 600 m.; Malangen, 3.S0 m.
A female from ^lalangen ("A 180!)) was earryinc- eiiiis without
ocular spots.
Pandalun anniilicomis, Leach.
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 150 m.; The Salten Fiord I, 15— 20 m.;
The .Skjerstad Fiord I, 30—50 m.; Røst II, 150 m.; Moskenstrøm-
men, 200 m. ; Bålstad, 30 m.; Henninirsværstrømmen, 20 — 40 m.;
the mouth of the Raftsund, 250—300 m.; The Kanstad Fiord,
30—90 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; Stønnesbotn, 40—80 m.;
Kvænangen, 300—343 m.; Breisund, 100 m.; Mehavn (1894).
Females bearing eggs with ocular sjjots were observed on
'■*/+ 1899, Malangen,
'Vi — ) Stønnesbotn,
-V:i 1900, the Beier Fiord.
Pundalus Imrealis, Krøyer.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; Landego, 200—450 m.; The
Salten Fiord II, 20(i m.; The Skjerstad Fiord II, 100—185 m.;
Bålstad, 150 m.; The Ostues Fiord, loO m.; the mouth of the Raft-
sund, 250—300 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.; Lyngen III,
300 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
Females bearing eggs with ocular spots were observed on
■'U 1900, Salten Fiord II, 200 m.
Pandal lis yropinqvus, G. 0. Sars.
Bålstad, 150 m.; Arnø, 300— 4(ii) m.; The Salten Fiord 11,
320-380 m.; The Tys Fiord I, 5(io in.; Malangen, 100—200 m.
Females bearing eggs with ocular spots occurred on
'V4 1899, Malangen, 100—200 m.
This species hat not previously been noticed north of Lofoten.
Malangen must now be looked upon as its northern limit.
Pandalun platyceros, Brandt.
(= F. Icptorrhyncus, Kinahan).
The Salten Fiord II, 320—380 m.
1) In doubtful cases Prof. G. O. Sars lias identitied.
2) This species is also includod in tin; iilaiikton forms
p. 37
i'aiidahis l,rrn rosins. Katiikk.
The Beier Fiord. .->() l.-)0 m.; Tiie Salten Fionl II. :!l'(( ;!sii
m.; The Folden l^'iord. .■).iu m.; The Sa^' Fiord. 2iio ni.; Traiio-
dybet, (J07— ()40 in.; ilalstad, loO in.; Moitsund 1. Kio in.; I'n; I.
200—250 m.; Henningsvær I, 150 m.; Skroven, 200—400 ni.:
The (Mnes Fiord, lOO m.; the mouth of the Raftsund, 250— .iuu
m. ; Gaukværø II, 250 m. ; Malangen. 380 m.
Females bearing eggs, Avithoiit ocular spots, occurred on
-Vs 1900, The Ostues Fiord, 100 m.;
"Vs 1900, Bålstad, 150 in.;
■"/a 1900, The Beier Fiord. 50 -loo m.;
% 1900, The Salten Fiord II, 320—380 m.
The species is new in Malangen, which roust now be considered
as its northern limit on our coast.
CaridiMU iionloiii, Hate.
Stene (Vest Fiordi. 120— 2(i() m.; Henningsvær, 150 m.
G. 0. Sars') says that the species is found ri<;ht up to the
Varanger Fiord.
ScLi-ocntii(/oii lion-its. Piiu'i's.
The Skjerstad Fiord XVI; The Skjerstad Fionl l.\. 30 — 40 m.;
Grøtø, 6—24 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30 — 40 in.; Troldtioi-dsiind,
40 m. ; Breisund, 100 m.
Females bearing eggs \\itli ocular spots occurred on "/a 19no,
the Skjerstad Fiord IX, 30-40 in. The Skjerstad Fiord is, as
far as is known at present, the southern limit for this species, but
it is probable that its distribution extends further south.
Crangon ciinujoii. Lin.
Females bearing eggs, without ocular spots, occurred on
■ 4 1900, Groto, (j— 24 ni.
Crangon ahiiani, Kixahan.
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 150 in.; Rost II, 150 m. ; Svolvær,
(1894); The Ostites Fiord; The Kanstad Fiord. 3(i— 9(i m.; Stønes-
botn, 40—80 m.; Mehavn (1894).
Females bearing eggs, without ocular spots, occurred on
^'A 1900, the Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.
PontojiliUiis echiirutatiis. "S\. Sars.
Mortsund, 100 m. (2 specimens, about 12 mm. in length);
Bålstad, 150 m. (1 Female bearing eggs without ocular spots).
Pontophilus norvegicas, M. Sars.
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; Arnø, 300—400 in.; Landego,
200 — 450 m.; The Salten Fiord II. 320—380 m.; The Skjerstad
Fiord IV, 330 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord VII. 490 m.; The Folden
Fiord, 530 m.; Oxsund, 600 m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Mosken-
strømmen, 200 m.; Bålstad, 150 m.; Mortsund I, 200 m.; Brettes-
nes-Skroven, 350—400 m.; the mouth of the Raftsund, 250—300
m. ; Tranødybet, 607 — 640 m. ; (iaukværo II, 250 m.; ilalangen,
380 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.
Females bearing eggs occurred, without ocular spots, on
-'-'A 1899, Mortsund I, 200 m.;
V4 1900. The Salten Fiord. 320— 3S() m.;
»V2 1899, The Sag Fiord, 2(io m..
with ocular spots, on
'Vs 1900, Bålstad, 150 in.;
V4 1900, The Salten Fiord. 320—380 m.
') Crustacea
L88
O. Nor^lMar
Sahinea scjotemmrinata, Sabine.
The Beier Fiord. 50-150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord I, 30—50
m.; The Skjerstad Fiord II, 100—185 ra.; The Kirk Fiord II, 50
m.; The Østnes Fiord, 130 m. ; Stønesbotn, 40 — 80 m.; Lyngen II,
250 m.; The Jøkel Fiord I, 100 m.; The Jøkel Fiord III, 100 m.;
The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.; The KjøUe Fiord (1894); Mehavn
(1894).
Females bearing eggs witli ocular spots occurred on
-'U 1899, The Jøkel Fiord, 100 m.;
=74 1899, The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.;
"-U 1900. The Skjerstad Fiord, 30—50 ni.
var. sarsl. Smith.
The l^.eier Fioid, 50—150 m.; Bålstad. 150 m.; Stene (Vest
Fiord), 120^200 ra.; Malaugen, 100—200 m.; Kvænangen II, 90
m.: Breisund, 100 m.
Females bearing eggs with ocular spots occurred on
"A 1899. Malangen. luO— 200 m.
H'qrpolijte (jalmnrdi. M. Edw.
The Beier Fiord, 50-150 m.; The Salten Fiord I, 15— 20 m.;
The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 30—50 m.; Grøtø, B— 24 m.; Napstrøm-
men (1896), 30—40 m.; The Østnes Fiord I, 30 m.; Risværflaket,
150—180 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.; The Jøkel Fiord I,
100 m.; Troldfiordsund, 40 m.; The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
Females bearing eggs with ocular spots occurred on
'Vs 1899, Risværflaket, 150 — 180 m.;
'■/■■ — , Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.;
="/4 — , Jøkel Fiord I, 100 m.;
-'"/i — , Troldliordsund, 40 m.;
"A 1900, The Østnes Fiord I, 30 m.;
74 -- , The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 30-50 ni.;
Vi — , The Salten Fiord I, 15—20 m.;
74 — , Grøtø, G — 24 m.
Hi])[)ol//t(' inislohi. IvKOYKB.
The Salten Fiord I, 15-20 ni.; l',alstad (1890), 30 ra.; Trold-
liordsund, 40 m.; Breisund, 100 m.
Females bearing eggs, without ocular spots, occurred on
-"A 1899. the P,reisund. 100 m.
Hippoli/te tiirfjHlii. i\u(>VEii.
The Østnes Fiord, 30 ni.
Hippoh/tc .sp'mii.s, Sow.
The Bciei- Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 30—
40 m.; The Skjerstad Fior-d XVI; Reine I, 150 in.; Bålstad, 150
m.; llenningsværstrømmcn, 20—40 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—
90 lu.; (laukva'ro II. 250 m.; Malangen, 380 m.; Stønesbotn, 40 —
80 ni.; Lyngoii 11, 250 m.; Kvamangen II, 90 m.; The Jøkel
Fioi'd, III, 100 m.; Troldliordsund, 40 m.; Breisund, 100 m.
Females bearing eggs with ocular spots occui'ied on .
-74 1899, The Jøkel Fiord, 100 m.;
-•'A 1899, The Troldfiordsund, 40 m.;
•'A 1900, The Skjerstad Fiord, 30 — 40 m.
Hippoh/fe UUjehorgi, Daniklssen.
(= H. sccunfi-ons, Norman).
The Beier Fiord, 50 — 150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord III, 230
m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 ni. ; The Skjerstad Fiord X,
10—30 in.; The Skjerstad Fiord XIII, 110 m.; The Øxsund, 600
m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; Landego, 200—450 m.; The Kirk
Fiord III, 70—80 ra.; Mortsund, 200 m.; The Østnes Fiord, 130
m.; Malangen, 380 m. ; The Porsanger Fiord, 70 m.
Females bearing eggs with ocular spots occurred on
"Vs 1900, Landego, 200—450 m.;
74 — , The Skjerstad Fiord III, 230 m.;
74 — , The Skjerstad Fiord X, 10—30 m.
Hijipnli/ta polaris, Sabine..
The Beier Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord III, 230
ra.; The Skjerstad Fiord X, 10— 30 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord XVI ;
The Tys Fiord I, 500 ra.; Røsthavet, 300—500 m.; Moskenstrøm-
men, 200 m.; The Kirk Fiord III, 30—50 ra.; The 0gs Fiord I,
100 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30— 90 m.; Tranødybet, 450— 530 m.;
Stønesbotn, 40—80 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; The Jøkel Fiord
III, 100 m.; Ingøhavet, 300 m.; Breisund, 100 ra.; The Porsanger
Fiord, 200 m.
Females bearing eggs with ocular spots occurred on
=73 1899, The Tys Fiord I, 500 m.;
'74 — , Malangen, 100—200 m.;
=7-1 — , The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.;
74 1900, The Skjerstad Fiord II, 230 m.;
74 — , The Skjerstad Fiord XVI.
At several of the foregoing stations, raales were found, these
have been described as a separate species (H. horealis). In all of
them the rostrum was without teeth or a slight indication of such
could be seen. Tiie lowest corner of tlie foi'e edge of Cephalo
thorax was rounded.
Bijthocaris simjilicirostris, G. 0. Saes.
Tranødybet, 607-640 ra.; Malangen, 100—200 ra.
CryptoclieJes pygmæa, G. 0. Sars.
The Folden Fiord, 530 m.; Tranødybet, 607—640 m.
At the former place females bearing eggs, without ocular spots,
occurred on 7+ 1900.
EitpaipirKS biriiiiKidus. Lix.
The Salten Fioid 1, 15—20 m.; (ii'oto. 6—24 ra. ; Napstrøm-
men, 30—40 m.; Svolvær, 15—20 m.; Troldfiordsund. 4o ra. (2
small specimens).
Females bearing eggs with ocular spots occurred on
74 1900, The Saltuu Fiord 1, 15— 2() ra.
Eupagurus pmhescens, Kbøyek.
The J^eiei' Fiord, 50—150 m.; The Skjerstad Fiord IX, 30—
50 ra.; The Skjerstad Fiord XVI, 10—100 ni. ; Rost I, 120 m.;
Moskenstrømmen, 200 ra.; Reine, 150 m.; IJalstad, 150 m.; Stene
(Vest Fiord), 120--200 m.; The Østnes Fiord, 20 ra.; Digermulen,
100—150 m.; Grøtø, 6—24 m.; The Kanstad Fiord, 30—90 m.;
Gaukva^rø II, 250 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m. ; KvcTnangen II,
90 m.; Troldfiordsund; 40 m.; Ingøhavet, 300 ni. ; lireisund, 100 ni. ;
The Porsanger Fiord, 200 ra.; Svæi'holt (1894).
Females bearing eggs with ocular spots occui'red on
"A 1899, Malangen, 100—200 m. ;
=74 — , Ingøhavet, 3()0 ni. ;
^74 — , Breisund, 100 in.
Maiauaen, luo-
Liihodes maia, Lix.
200 m.; The KjøUe Fiord (1894).
(;„li(th(V lU'.nl. IvMlil.KTClN.
Ualstad, -JO m.; lIeuiiiii.i;sva'r.stroiiiiiK'ii, I'd— lo m.
(idlntlmt ilisjicisd. li.viK.
The Bcier Fiord, 50 — 150 m.
As far as I know, tliis species lias not i)ieviously been tVmnd
north of tlio arctic cinde. The I icier i'iord nuist now be considered
to lie its linnt to the noilh.
(I'dkitlifd inUrmctVui, Lilljebouc;.
Henning-sviVrstrommen, 20 — 40 m.; Svolvær (1894).
Galnthodcs trkhntatus, Esmauk.
The Tys Fioi'd I, 500 ni.; Tranodybet, 450—530 m.
At both places, tlie species was foniid on Lophohdia bottom.
Tnuiodj-bet is the noiDiern limit, as far as is known at present.
Miniida yuiio.-<it. Fahk.
The licier Fiord, 50—150 m.; Arno, ;500— 4oo m.; Landego,
200—450 m.; The Salten Fiord IT, 320- 380 m.; The Folden Fiord,
530 m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.; The Tys Fiord I, 500 m.;
MoskenstriHnmen, 200 m.; Reine, 150 ni. ; Bålstad, 150 m.;
:Mortsund J. 2nii ni.: I're I, 200 -25u ni.; Svolvær (1894); Bret-
tesncs— Skroven, 350—400 m.; Digermulen, 100—150 m.; Gauk-
va'ro II, 250 ni.; Malangen, 100—200 m.; Lyngen III, 300 m.
Females bearing eggs without ocular spots occurred on
"V-: 1899, Brettesnes— Skroven, 350 — 400 m.;
-■'A — , Ingohavet, 300 m.
-'V:i — , Bålstad, 150 ui.
Munidit tenuimana, G. 0. Saes.
The Folden Fiord, 530 m. ; Øxsund, 600 m. ; The Tys Fiord,
500 ra. ; Brettesnes -Skroven, 350—400 m.; Tranødybet, 607—
6411 m.
Hijas araneus. Lix.
The :Misvær Fiord (arm of the Skjerstad Fiord), 10—50 m.
(1 female carrying eggs).
Hi/as coarctatiis, Lin.
The Misvær Fiord, 10-50 m.; The Salten Fiord I, 15— 20 m.;
Røst II, 150 m.; Moskenstrømmen, 90 m.; The Kirk Fiord III,
70 — 80 m.; Bålstad, 15 — 30 m.; Stene in Bø, from the stomach of
cod; Malangen, 100—200 m.; Stønesbotn, 40— .so m.; The Jokel
Fiord. 100 ra.: The Porsanger Fiord, 200 m.
FurtiiiiKS dcpurdfor, Lin.
The Salten Fiord I, 15—20 m.; Troldliordsund, 40 m.
As far as I know, tliis species has not previously been found
so far north.
Fortunus holsttfns. Fabk.
Stene in Bo (Vesteraalen). from the stomach of Fleuroiiedes
2)latc'ssa.
It is not likely that this species has been previously noted
from Lofoten. Its northern limit must now be taken to be Vester-
aalen.
" Fortimux pusillus, Leach.
Mortsund 11. 200 m.
This is also a new species for Lofoten.
Pantopo(la.\)
l)\: Ai'i>Ei,i.0F, Bergen, dclcriii.
/''/riKiiiiiiimii litordh'. Stuø.m.
Skjcrstadlidi-d III. 2.!u m.; K\;i'iianL^en, .300—343 m.; .lokel-
liord II, (11 » ni.
FsaiilopdJIcne clmildris. (iIddiisiu.
Sk.jerstadliord X, 10—30 m.; I'.aistad, 30 m.; Xapstrommeii,
30—40 m.
FsfiidiiiidUeiie npiniiKv. Fauh.
Napstrømmen, 3(» — 10 m.; Stønesbotn, 4(i— so m.; Jlannnerfest
(1894); Troldlioi.lsund, 4(i m.; Nordkap (1894).
Xi/dtjilion (jldcidlc. LiLL.jEBOUfi.
Mehavn (1894). New for the Norwegian fauna.
Nipnplion grossijics, Fabu.
Øgsfiord, 1(10 m. ; Troldliordsund, 40 m.; Nordkap (1894);
Sværholt (1S94).
Nipyiplion mixtum, Krøyer.
Kirktiord If, ca. 5o m.
Niimphon leptochrles. (}. O. Saks.
ilorsdaltiord, 50 ni.; ^lalangen, 380 m.
Nijmphon strømi. Kkøyee.
Morsdaltiord, 50—150 m.; Bålstad (Lofoten); Risva^rtlaket,
150—180 m.; Kanstadtiord, 30—90 m.; Arnø, 300-4(10 m.; Ost-
nesliord, 50—70 m.; Jøkelliord III, 100 m.
Nympthon maai-uvt, Wilson.
Foldenfiord, 530 m.; Ogsfiord I, 100 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.
Chaitonymj)hon hirtipes, Beli-.
Bålstad (Lofoten), 10— 35 m.; Malangen, 100— 200 m.; .Jøkel-
liord III, 100 m. ; Kvænangen II, 90m.; Breisund. 100 ui.; Nord-
kap (1894); Porsangerfiord, 200 m.
Chcvfo'ii!/ii/pldj)i sj)iiiosd))i. GooDSiii.
Arno, 300 — 400 m.; Saltentiord II, 320 — 3S0 m.; Morsdaltiord,
50—150 m.; Reine I ([.ol'oten), 150 m.; Malangen, 100—200 m.
Tunicata.
Synascidiae.
H. Huitfeldt-Kaas, Kristiania, dcterm.
Apliil'dqisis sarsi, IIiutf.-Kaas.
Uannnerfest (^1894).
According to Huitfeldt-Kaas-) this species has previously
been collected by M. Saks at Kristiansund and Beian.
Aiidvodciion muUdiUv. M. Saks.
Hammerfest (1894); Troldliordsund, 40 m.
Saes collected his specimens too at Hammerfest.
•) Cf. G. 0.
2) The XoiNv.
Xorw. North .Vtl. Exp. lS/(i-
:.,., p. 15.
O. Nordgaard.
Ascidiae simplices.
Dr. R. Haktmeyer, Berlin, and Di'. Johan Kiær, Kristiania,
determ.
Cionu intestinalls. Lin.
Moskenstrømmen, 90 m.; Tlie Tys Fiord I, 500 m.; Sunderø
(1897) in the stomach of cod.
According to Kiær,') the species occurs all along- the coast
of Norway. It has however, probably never before been collected
at a depth of 500 ra. At several places in Lofoten, 1897 in
March and in April. T found C'lona in the stomach of cod.
Ascidia gelatinosa, Kiær.
Mortsund I, 200 m.; Tranødybet, 607—640 m.; Gxsund, 600
m.; The Sag Fiord, 200 m.
Hartmeyer^) mentions tliis species as being found at Tromsø,
wliich is, I believe, its most northerly locality.
Amdia pnaiiim, 0. F. Mijll.
The North Cape (1894).
Ascidia conchllejia, O. F. Mull.
:Mortsund I (The Vest Fiord), 200 m.
Sfijela rustica, Lin.
Svolvær (1S94).
Dendrodoa aggregata, Rathke.
Henningsvær (from stomach of cod); Troldtiordsund, 40 m. ;
I'.reisund, 100 m.; Nordkyn (1894). In the Breisund this species
was so abundant that it almost tilled the dredging-net after a
short draw.
Folycarpu libera. Kiær.
The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 330 m.
Kiæ.r'') writes: ,, Found only in Komag Fiord, 0x Fiord and
at Vadsø." This species must be considered as an arctic one. The
Skjerstad l^'iord is its southern limit, as far as is now known.
Cipithia echinnta, Lin.
Nordkvn (1894).
Pisces.
Pi'of. Collett and the authoi' detoi'm.
Sehantcs ynarinn^, Lin.
'72 1897. Snndero in Vcstcraalen, from the stomach of cod.
Crntridermichthys uncinafus. Reinh.
"/:, 1900, 'i'lie Beicr Fiord, 50 m. (several specimens); 'A 1899,
Reine, 100 m. (1 specimen); 'V4 1899, Malangen, 100—200 m. (1);
'V4 1899, Stønesbotn, 40-80 m. (1); '-"V-i 1899, Breisund, lOO m. (1).
Centriderniirhllij/s li/nniiliis. K no ver.
7:i 1899. Henningsvær, 150 m. (1); -% 1899, The Jøkel Fiord
II, 80 m. (1); -"A 1899, Ingøhavet, 3()() m. (1); ^V* 1899, Brei-
sund, 100 m. (4).
') The Norw. Atl. Kxp. A Ijist of Asc-idine simplices, p. 3.
-) Holosome Ascidien, p. 3H. Me,eresfauna von Bergen.
•') The Norw. North Atl. Exp. A List of Norwegian Asciiliae simplices,
p. 12.
Triglops inngeli, Reinh.
-V4 1899. Breisund, 100 m. (1).
Coitus scorpius. Lin.
Sværholt (1894); -"/i 1896, Napstrommen, 40 m.
Cottunculus microps, Collett.
Vs 1899, The Lyngen Fiord II, 250 m. (1).
Agon IIS ciitai>1ii>irtiis, Lin.
-yi 1898, Breisund, luo m. (1).
Chirolophis guhrita, Lin.
■'A 1900, The Slgerstad Fiord X, 10—30 m. (several specimens).
At the mouth of the Misvær Fiord, we got the dredging bag full
of Lithothamnia, in whose openings a multitude of animals were
hidden, there were ophuirides, asterides, worms, molluscs, crabs etc.
Among these stone algae which are generally called „ ruggel"
by the Norwegian tishermen, many specimens of Chirolophis galerita
.were found. Some lumps of „ruggel" Avere left lying on the deck during
the night. The next morning, I broke up one of the lumps, and
a living specimen of Chirolophis came into view, it had — so to
say — spent a night on ,,di'y land". When at rest, this fish bends
the back part of its body sideways.
Linnpenus lampretiformis, Wahlb.
="/3 1900. The Beier Fiord, 50 m. (1).
Anarrhichas lupus. Lin.
"74 1896. Bålstad.
Contents of stomach: — Ophiuroidea, Onuphis conchylega,
Buecinum undatum, Eupagnrus pnhescens.
Crgstallogohius lineuris. Dru. & Kok.
'% 1899. Tiie Trold Fiord in Lofoten, several specimens from
the stomach of Gndus rallarias. The cod was 40 cm. in length.
Pleuroni'des eynoglossus, Lin.
^■'U 1899. Stønesbotn, 50—80 m. (3).
Fleuroneetes platessa, Lin.
"V4 1899. Stene in Bø (Vesteraalen), several large specimens,
with stomach and intestines full of shells (Pecten) and Echinoder-
mata. There were also Folyehæta, Eupagurus pubescens, Portunus
holsatns etc
Plafi/somaHchtlii/s hippoglossoitles, Walb.
'"/i 1896. Bålstad, from the stomach of cod.
Dripanopsetta platessoidcs. O. Fahr.
•"/:i 1900. Tile Beicr Fiord, 50—150 m. (several specimens).
(Idilus aeglejiiuis, Lin.
-"■'/4 1897. Iveine, one specimen (28 cm.) from the stomach
of cod.
I have written something about the food of the haddock in
my papei': — „Contributioii to tlie Study of Hydrography and
Biology on the Coast of Noi'way". ]). 17.
ikuhis callarias. Lin.
At several places we caught cod and examined the contents
of their stomachs, we also bought some for the same purpose. On
Hol torn-Life.
191
'74 1899, we examined some cod wliirli luid hrcn caiiL'ht at 8tcne
in Bø. Some Avero of a roddisli coldur. (iUhts were paler and
resembled ocean-eod („skrei").
The roe was not fully developed.
In the stomachs were found Polychcta. Hi/ns codrrtuftis etc.
A single specimen had Lcnxva hrancliiaUa on one (if its ojHs.
On '-"A 1899 we bouo-ht in the Jøkel Fiord KM-od which had
been tished by line in the fiord. Shape and colour were those of
the ocean-cod (..skrei"), in a few of the larger females the roe was
very loose. Schizopods and Anipliipods were found in the stomachs.
I have also referred to the food of the coil iu the paper (pioted
above, p. 14.
(iadus rireiis. Lin.
In the beginning of February. ISDT. I took part in a iishing
expedition with nets for ..skrci". lu the course of this, we also
caught a number of ,,sei" (Gadn,'! riroi.y). Cf. my paper referred
to above, p. 17.
Molcu molra. Lix.
Towards the end of April 1897, 1 went with a fisherman to
lish with nets near Røst. Among the rest, we also caught large
specimens of Moha. As a rule the stomach hang like a balloon
out of its mouth, but in one instance, bones of Gachts ægiefinus
could be identified.
l>rut>)))ius bivsiiic, Asc.
In the stomach of Brosm'nis, which was caught near Rest in
April 181)7, LUhudes mnjn was often found.
Lycodca sarsi. Collett.
"A 1900. The Folden Fiord, .530 m. (1).
MalMug ciUumis, O. F. Mull.
On -'"/i 1899, dead specimens were found drifting in the Trold-
tiordsund (between Rolfsø • and Ingø). Both males and females
were found, and on examination it was seen that they had spawned.
It is said that it is quite usual to find dead capelan floating in
Finmark in the spring, and many theories have been started to
otter an explanation for this. Some think that the death of the
capelan is to be accounted for by the coldness of the water; others
supi)0se that it must be attributed to unsuitable food etc.
But none of the theories advanced seem very satisfactory.
Clupm Jiarengiin, Lin.
'Vs 1896. Henningsvær, from the stomach of cod.
Herring catches are made in many of the fiords in Nordland
in the winter, so as to provide bait for the codfishery in Lofoten.
The supply of the socalled baiting herring („agnsild") is con-
veyed bv small steamers. On 'Vs 1897 I went on board one of ' skin of the sucked out cod.
these steamers (S/S «Svolvær") from Svolvær in Lofoten to the
Ler Fiord in Helgoland, where a (luantity of herrings had been
caught. On "A f examined the plankton at the bottom of the
fiord at the place wheie the catch had been made. It was not
very rich. On the suifacc, I got a few s|)ecimens of O'llhona
similis, as well as nauplii of Copepoda. \n a saiujile fiom 0 — 25
m. were found the following: —
Cal. finmarcliicus r
Fseudocal. clongutus r
Acartia longiremis rr
Microsetcllu atlantica c
^fl■fridia Innga rr
ynii/ilii iif Coiti-podd -|-
Tcnipci-aturc and salinity were found to lie tli.sti-ibuted as
follows: —
'"A 1897, The Ler Fiord,
t. s.
0 ni. 3",.5 C. .-JS.Ol "Ao
in ., 3,S - 33,73 „
Bottom 2.5 ., 3.8 - 33,73 „
The herrings were rather meagre. I made some measurements,
and found that the smallest were 1.5 cul in length, the largest 20
cm., the usual length was 16, 17, 18 cm. (The measurement was
made from the tip of the snout to the commencement of the division
of the tail fin). . Indications of. roe and milt were present iu the lar-
gest specimens. The stomachs were empty, but most of tiieui had
a white mass in the intestine.
One of the fioids which almost always in uiuter supplies Lo-
foten with „agnsild" is the Kvænangen Fiord. ^ly observations
hi this fiord (^Vi and '"A 1899), testify great uniformity iu tem-
perature and salinity during the winter.
This probably has much to do with the fact that plankton
Copepods may be found right up to the surface of the water. At
any rate, I observed quantities of Calainis finniarrliirus in a sample
from 0—5 m. on "/, 1899.
As the food of the herring can thus rise so far up, it is ex-
plicable that the herring itself follows it, and comes so far up in
the water that it can be reached by the tackle employed.
AngtiiUu nilgaris. Trirr.
°/4 19U0. The Salten Fiord 1, 15 — 20 m. (juniores).
]\f!/.rl)w ghdinoaa. Lix.
During the cod fishery at Sundero in Yesteraalen, in the be-
ginning of February 1897, I noticed that large numbers of fish
were destroyed by this destructive animal. In some cases the
robbers had not had a chance of escape, but were found under the
B. Bottom Samples.
Ml
a.
Hans
Foraminifera.
KiÆE, Tromsø, detei'm.
took bottom samples, and when the tow-
we also obtained a combination of bottom
At some places, w>
net reached the bottom,
mud and plankton.
These samples were sent to Mr. Ed. Thum, I^oipzig, and he
sorted out the Foraminifera and the Diatunuwcu and made excel-
lent preparations. Mr. Hans Kiær and Mr. E. Jørgensen have
classified the species thus prepared.
In the following pages, I give the list of the Foraminifera
from Mr. Kiær's Manuscript.
AVith regard to the synomyms, 1 beg reference to tlie works
of the author himself.')
"A
1899, Moskenstrømmen, 0 — 150 m.
Bottom sample and plankton.
Hyperammina ramosa, Hyperammina suhnudosa, Crithionina
abyssorum, Halophragmium hulloides, ValvuUna conica, Ammodiscus
toiuig, Reophax scorpimus, Trochammina robertsoni, Trochammina
nUrns, WcJ>h/iHi clavata, Verneuilina polystropha, Text.ularia agglu-
tinans. Balimina pyrula, Biilimina iiuinjinafa. Virjinlina s-chrei-
bersiaiiu. I'riyerina angulosa. Ciissidiiriiin liirniiiif((. Xadnsni'ia lae-
vigata, Globigerina bulloides, TiancataUiia luhalula, Tniiicatnlina
refulgens, Anomalina coronata, OpercuVma ammonoides, Nonionmn
umbilicatula, Nonionina turgida.
'Vi 1899, Stamsund.
Bottom sample.
Hnplophragmium mnariense, Hapilopkragmittm glomeruium. Val-
vidinii riiiiirii, IhiVniiiiiii pi/ntJii. Bulimiiui rHj^soiih's, Diiliiiiinn mar-
giiiahi. Iloliruni luiiirhita. Cissnhilnia l,ni,h/,, Clnlosloiurlhi nroidea,
Uvigcriua jjygmuca, i'rigerina aiigiilosu, I'dllcitin aphacroidcSj Pul-
lenia quinqueloba, Truncatulina lobatula, Anomalina coronata,
Nonionina umbilicatula, Operculina ammonoides, Cornuspira cari-
nata, Quiiuixcloadina seminulum, Biloculinn simjdex.
'7i 1899, Stamsund, 0—150 m.
Bottom sample and plankton.
Trochammina inflata, Bigenerina sarsi A, Bulimina marginata,
Balimina convoluta, Bulimina pyrula, Boliviiia pnmctata, Uvigerina
angulosa, Sagrina dimorpha, Patellina corrugata, Cassidulina lae-
vigata, Polymorphina compressa, Cornuspira foliacea, Nodosariu calo-
morpha, Lagena m^arginata, Lagena hexagona, Lagena apiculata,
Crislilliiriii mhihild. (ilnliifirrina bulloides, Pullenia spiwer aides, Trun-
raldliiiii liiliiiliilii. XniiiiiiiiiKi scapha, Operculina ammonoides, Quinque-
lociil.ina seimiiiiltiiii. Bilociiliiia elongata.
') Thalamophora. 'I'lie Norw. Nortli. Atl. Exp.
Synopsis of the Norwegian Marine Thalamopliora. Rop,
:i-y and Mariue Investigations, edited by dv. Hjort, Vol.
regian
1900.
1899, Høla (Svolvær), 0—150 m.
Bottom sample and plankton.
Halophragmium truncatum, Trochammina robertsoni, Bolivina
dilataia, Bolivina punctata, Virgulina schreibersiana, Bulima sub-
teres, Bulima marginata, Cassidulina laevigata, Cassid/iJina crassa,
Polymorphina compressa, Patellina carrugata, Lagi'im iiuinjinata,
Lagena laevis, Lagena striata, Truncatulina lobatula, iJitnurbina
globularis, Nonionina scapha, Operculina ammonoides, Quinquelo-
culina seminulum,, Bilocitlina elongata, Biloculina oblonga, Olobi-
gerina bulloides.
="/! 1899, Høla (Svolvær), 0—150 m.
Bottom sample and plankton.
Pcophii.r scoipiurus, Halophragmium glomeratum, Trochammina
roberfsiDii. Vulnilina conica, ValvuUna fusca, Irochammina nitida,
Bulima elipsuuk'f^, Bulimri pyrvhi. BifJimn m'lrginntn. Bolirivn punc-
tata, Bolivina dihitidn. \'iiiiiiruni siiiiiiiiin..ii. l'ri,i,i'iiiii mnjiilosa,
Sagrina dimorpha, CassKliilniu cnissn, russiihiliuft larrigahi. Lagena
striata, Lagena clavata, Lagena distoma, Lagena hexagona, Lagena
marginata, Globigerina bulloides, Pullenia sphæroides, Truncatulina
lobatula, Discorhina obtusa, Operculina ammonoides, Nonionina stelli-
gera, Nonionina turgida, Triloculina tricarinata, QuinquelocuVnia
seminuhim.
-.35
■•.Vi 1899, Lilands Bay (Østnesfjord), 0-
Bottom sample and plankton.
Trochammina sp., Spiroplecta biformis, Uvigerina angulom,
Cassidulina crassa, Cassidulina laevigata, Virgulina schreibersiana,
Bulimina marginata, Bolivina dilatata, Nodulina gracilis, Polymor-
phina compressa, Nodosaria communis, Nodosariu raJiiiiinridKi rafd-
lina corrugata, Lagena squamosa, Lagena willidiiisinii. Lmji im gni-
cilis, Lagena striata, Lagena marginata, Trunraiulina lobatula,
Nonionina scapha, Operculina ammonoides:, Quinqueloculina semi-
nulum.
Va 1899, Raftsund, •250—300 m.
Hyperammina sp., Trochammina robertsoni, ValvuUna fusca,
ValvuUna conica, Textularia agglutinans, Textularia williamsoni,
Bigenerina sarsi. Biginirina digifafit. Bolirina jnindafa. llolirina
dilatata, BuUuiiiin untrgninhi. litilniiina pyrula. Baliiuinu ilipsuidcs,
Uvigerina angulv^a, Sagrina dinwrpha, Cassiduli}ia lacrigala, ('as-
sidulina crassa, Globigerina bulloides, Pullenia sphaeroides, Pullenia
quinqueloba, Orbulina universa, Nodosaria scalaris, Nodosaria com-
munis, Lagena squamosa, Lagena marginata, Truncatulina lobatula,
Rotalia soldani, Discorbina araucana, Discorbina obtusa, Nonionina
umbilicatula, Operculina ammonoides, Cornuspira carinafa, Quinque-
loculina seminulum, Biloculina simplex, Biloculina clungala.
Bottom-Life.
Besides these, there were also found at the same pl.ace:
Saccammhia s2)h(icri<a , BlinlxIdwiiiiiKt alii/tisorKm.
Vs lSi)'.(. Kat'tsiuul. 0—270 in.
Bottom sample and plankton.
TroclMmm'nut rohertsoni, Textukttia siufitlidn. BUjcniynHi sarsi.
BiiUmina elijitioiile!', Biiliniiua pi/nihi, Bulnnhid iiiiirii'nKfta. lliili-
miiid co7irolittn, BuHmnid suhtcir.t, BuHi'uui pmirhitn. ViiyiiUna
.-(■Inciberniana, CasniduUria cmssa, C(is>:i(li(rni(i Inrrigatu, Poli/mor-
jiliiua compressa, Sagrina dimorplut. Gloh'n/crina hi(Uui(k'.'<. PuHenia
splvieroides, Nodosaria calomorpha, Lcu/enn semistriata, Lagenn mar-
g'lnata, Lagena gracUUma, Lagena striata, Trinicatulina lohatula,
Discorhina araitcana, Dmorhina herthelotiana, Nonioninu umbili-
ratitla, OpcrcuUnn ammono'idcs. Cornuspira foUncea. Triloculina
tr'n-arhiata.
'h. 1899, Ofoten I, 360 m.
Bigeiieria faisi (A + B), BuVimina normdiinl. Mrt/iiliiia
schreihersianu, BoVtiina punctata, Boliiina dilatata, BiiUmina eJip-
soides, Btdimina marginata, Uvigerina angiilosa, Sagrina dimoiyha,
Cassididina laevigata, Cristellaria rotulata, Nodosaria laevigata,
Xodosaria scalaris, N'odosaria soluta, Nodosaria infiexa, Lagena mar-
ginata, Lagena striata, Lagena distoma, Lagena semi striata, Lagena
hexagona, Globigerma huUoides, Pullenia sphaeroides, Pidlenia
quinqueloctdina, Sphaeroidina hulloides, Truncatulina lobatula, Po-
talia soldani, Discorbina bertkelotiana, Anomalina coronata, Patellina
corrugata, Nonionina stelligera, Nonionina umbilicatula, Operculina
ammonoides, Cornuspira carinata, Quinqueloculina scminuhim. Quin-
(pidocuUna arenucea.
'V2 189», Brcttesnes— Skroven, 350-400 m.
I.
Hyperammina ramosa, Reophax scorpiurus, Halophragmium
latidorsatum, Valvulina fusca, Webbina clavata, Bulimina marginata,
Uvigerina pygmaea, Nodosaria laevigata, Anomalina coronata, Eo-
talia soldani, Nonionina umbilicatula, Quinqueloculina arenacea.
At the same place were also found: —
Saccammina sphaerica, Bathysipton filiformis.
'Vs 1899, Brettesnes—ykroven, 350—400 ni.
Trochnmmina sp., Bulimina ju/rula. Buluuina jiiiin/iuata, Buli-
mina suhteres, Bolivina punctata, Bolivina dilatata, VirguUna schrei-
bersiana, Cassidulina laevigata, Cassididina crassa, Polymorphina
compressa, Uvigerina angulosa, Cornuspira sp., Lagena orbignyana,
Lagena distoma, Lagena marginata, Lagena striata, Globigerina
bulloides, Pullenia sphaeroides, Patellina corrugata, Discorhina arau-
cana, Nonionina umbilicatula, Nonionina scapha, Operculina am-
monoides, Quinqueloculina subrotunda.
V3 1H99, The Kirk Fionl 1. loo m.
I.
Ammodiseus incertus, VirguUna squamosa, Bulimina margiiuifa,
Cassidulina laevigata, Cassidulina hradyi, Poly morphina compressa,
Bolivina punctata, Bolivina dilatata, Uvigerina angulosa, Cristellaria
rotulcda, Å^odosaria communis, Lagena lagenoides, Lagena margimda,
Globigerina bulloides, Truncatulina lohatula, Discorbina araucana.
Discorbina berthelothiana, Nonionina scapha. Opcrcidina ummonoidc." .
Quinqueloculina agglutinans.
»/3 1891), Till- Kirk Fiord 1. loo ni.
II.
//filuiihnigniiiiiii luHdoisahnii. J/alojitnnguiiinn cunarirtisc, Tej-
iiduriu agglutininis. Ti .rtularlu siujillula, Jlulimina pyruhi, Bulimina
marginata, Boluinn ililalntn. Virgiilma schreibersiana , Uvigerina
angulosa, Cassuhdinn lucvigutn, Cassidulina crassa, Truncutidiiin
lobcdula, Discorhina globularis, Globigvrina hulloides, Nonioninu
scapha, Polystomella stri(dopunctata, Patellina corrugata, Operrulinu
ammonoides, Qui)ii/ucloculina scmiuuluiu.
^4 1899, The Ostnes Fiord, 10- -io m.
Reophax scorpiurus, Halopthragmium canariense, Halophragmium
glomcrcdum, Gordiammina sp., Vertieuilina polyslropha, Spiroplectu
biformis, Bulimina marginata, Cassidulina crassa, Cassididina laevi-
gata, Uvigerina angulosa, Polymorphina compressa, Lagena laevis,
Lagena distoma, Lagena marginata, Truncatulina lobcdula, Discor-
bina globularis, Rotcdia heccuri, Operculina ammonoides, Nonionina
scapha, Polystomella siriato-punctida, Quinqueloculina seminulum,
Globigerina bulloides.
V4 1899, Moldoren. near Svdlva-r, 10 in.
Bolivina dilatata, VirguUna schreibersiana, Lagena squamosa,
Lagena laevis, Globigerina hulloides, Patellina corrugata, Trunccdu-
lina lobatula, Trunccdulina ungeriana, Discorbina vilardehoana,
Nonionina stelligeru, Polystomella striatopuncfata, Quinqueloculina
seminulum.
1899, Svolvær harbour, 10— Io in.
Bigeneria sarsi, Bolivina ddatata, Bolivina punctata, Bulimina
marginata, Cassidulina laevigida, Uvigerina angulosa, Lagena
hexagona, Lagena squamosa, Lagena striata, Lagena gracillima,
Lagena lagenoides, Globigerina hulloides, Pullenia sphaeroides, Trun-
catidina lobcdula, Discorhina globularis, Rotcdia beccari, Polystomella
striatopunctata, Nonionina stelligera, Operculina ammonoides, Quin-
queloculina seminulum, Quinqueloculina subrotunda.
'7, 1899, Gaukværø (Yesteraalen), 0—180 m.
Plankton and bottom sample.
Textularia williamsoni, Cassididina luevigcda, Cassidulina crassa,
Uvigerina angulata, Lagena hexagona, Cristellaria rotulcda, Globi-
gerina bidloides, Tiuncatulina lobatula, Truneatidina refulgens,
Discorbina globularis, Nonionina stelligera, Quinqueloculina seminu-
lum, Biloculina simplex.
^°U 1899, Stene in Bo (Vesteraalen), 10 m.
Uvigerina angulosa, Cassidulina laevigata, Trunccdulina lohatula,
Discorbina araucana, Nonionina stelligera, Polystomella striatopunc-
tata, Spiruloculina plnnulafa, TrihcuUna tricarinata. Quinqueloculina
seminulum.
KiÆK has also classified several .species which were not pre-
pared.
-V:i 1900, The Ostnes Fiord.
Truncatulina lobatula, Truncatulina ungeriana, Truncatulina
refulgois, Anomalina coronata, PlanorbuUna mediterranensis.
25
0. Noidoaard.
-"■h 1899, Mortsund T, 200 m.
Nodosaria sohda, Cristellaria rofulufu. Cristell'iria n-pphhihi.
=73 1899. The Tys Fiord, 500 ni.
Piilrhud'nui pioictiilata on Lophohclia prolifvra.
"A 1899, The Sag- Fior'd. 200 m.
Saccamm ina sphaerica.
=-/.■, 1899, Tlie Sea NW of Røst, 700 m.
Biipcrfia stahilh.
"A 1899. Malangen, 380 m.
Astrorhizfi arcnacen, Discwhina yhlmluns.
Vo 1899, Lyngen III, 300 ni.
Asirorhua nrenaceu.
Hammerfest (1894).
TnmcatitUna lohntuJn. TruncdtiilhKi refiihjens. TriinctifuVma
iDn/cyinnd, Discvrhina ijluhnlaiis.
Sværholt (1894).
Discorhintt glohuJari^, TnincdfuliiKi lohidula.
-■/i 1S99, The Porsanger Fiord, 20o ni.
IiJiitliilamininii nhyssoriim.
With regard to the disti'ibution of the Thalamophora, Mr.
Kiær writes') „ln taking- a survey of the occurrence of Thala-
mophora in all the ocean-depths investigated by the North Atlantic
Expedition we find, in all, three different centi-es of distribution, viz: —
A. The southern gray clay, which includes the fiords and banks
along the Norwegian coast, about as far as to 19° E. Long;
and the gray clay neai- Iceland.
P.. Tlie northern gi-av clav. to Avliicli the tiords and banks along
the Norwegian coast east of 19" Long., near Beeren Island
and Spitzbergen belong, and the BhaMammina clay.
C. The brown clay, which is divided into the BUocuUna clay
proper and the transition clay."
KiÆE (1. c. p. 11) gives the following as being the forms
which are of most frequent occuri-ence in the southei-n gray clay
along the coast of Norway: —
Uvifjerina pygmaea, U. anyuhsa. TrunmiuJhm lohatiila, T.
refnlgens, Nonionma umhiUcatula, N. scapha, Lagena marginata,
Piillenia sphaeroides, Quinqiieloctdina semmulum, Qhhigerina hid-
hides, Bolivina dilatcda. BuUmlnn eJipsoulcs, B. margimda and-
Cassididina laerigcda.
As characteristic of the northern gray clay, Kiær (1. c. p. 12)
gives the following forms: —
Astrorhiza crassatina, Lagena ajiiralata, Pidrinalina larsteni.
Glohigefina pacliyderma.
These are considered to be arctic forms. „0n the other hand,
there are some southern species which are either absent from the
field of the northei-n centre or at any rate are veiy scarce, and
do not attain to their full size, e. g. Btdimina marginata, Uvige-
riiia pygmaea and angidosa, Opereulina ammonoidesr' -)
The samples I have collected almost exclusively represent the
southern gray clay, of M-bich Thalamophor-fauna they certainly give
a very complete illustration.
It is of considerable interest to see that the limit between the
northern and southei-n gray clay on the Norwegian coast is fixed
at 19° Long., which lies near Tromsø. Without thinking of this
fact, I have, for hydrographieal and zoological reasons (cf. Part IV)
fixed Malangen as the boundary fiord or i-ather the transition fioi'd
between the preponderant boreal and the preponderant arctic fauna.
This division is thus confirmed by a study of the deposits.
1) Thalamopho) a, p. 10. The Norw. Nortli Atl. Exp. 1876—78.
2) With respect to tlie chemical condition of the deposits, reference should
be made to Schmelck's treatise „()u Oceanic Deposits". The Norw. Noi-tli Atl.
Exp. Chemistry. A plate is adjoined giving the distribution of the deposits.
b. Diatoms in Bottom Samples from Lofoten and Vesteraalen.
1-',, .loiUilCNSKN.
Ill the I'ollowiiiL;- paiios ail aci'ount is i.'iveii ot tlir diatiniis coii-
taiiu'd in some bottom samples tVom the t'ollowiiii;- loealities in Lo-
foten and Vesteraalen:
Mosiicnstromincn, 0 — 180 m. (tiiL'ctlier witli idanktoii),
ytamsund, 0—150 ni. (togetiier witli iihuiktoiil,
Svolvær harbour, 10—15 m.,
The Ostnes Fiord, 10-20 m.,
Brettesnes — Skroven, 350 — -I0(t lii..
Mouth of the Raftsund, 250—300 m.,
Stone in Bo, 10 m.,
Gaukværø, 0-180 m. (together inth plankton).
Two of these, the samples from Brettesnes — Skroven aud from
Raftsund, were poor and consisted pei'haps only of dead specimens,
a good many of which naturally originate from the plankton. The
samples from Moskenstrommen, Stamsund and Gaukværo were taken
together with plankton.
The working through of bottom samples is a very troublesome
and lengthy task, when it is done as it should be. As there was,
however, not time enough to investigate the samples in the manner
I consider the right one, and as — on the other hand — it was
of some importance, to be able rightly to interprete the plankton,
to gain a preliminary knowledge of the bottom flora, I have con-
tented myself with the method usually adopted, and have studied
the species from the valves in slides. For this purpose the material —
together with a richer one from the west coast of Norway — has
been prepared as slides by Mr. Thum of Leipzig, in his well-known
perfect way.
For this reason, it has not been possible to discern between
living (recent) and fossil species.
The species occurring in the plankton are in detail dealt with
in another chapter of this work (pp. 90 — 108). Nevertheless, to
avoid arbitrariness, I have not omitted the plankton species, but
have in such cases mentioned them as originating from the plankton.
List of the species observed.
X- Cen'bx'±cæ Schutt.
I. CosciuodJsceæ.
CoseinodisciiK Ehki!.
C. nitidus (iHEO.
Cf. above p. 95.
Somewhat rare: Moskoiistrommcn r, Stamsund r, Raftsund r,
Stene r, Gaukværo r.
Distribution: Western Europe: JJalcai'ic Islands. Gi'eenland
and Finmark (Cleve). Warmer coasts of America, Asia and
Australia.
C. niqioUiiiin Kimii. (1844).
KiiRB. Jlikingeologie pi. 35 A, XXU, f. 4.
v.'ir. couipacta Rattr. Rev. of Coscinod. p. 579.
C. scintilUoiii ((iuKV.) .\. Schmidt Nords. Dial. p. iM, pi. ;}, f. ;33.
Differs from the main species (= ('. scinfillitiis Ghev.) in
having the puncta distinctly smaller towards the margin, more
numerous radial rows, the shortened ones being longer tiian usual.
Probably is a separate species.
Rare: Mosken.strømmen -f, Stamsund r, Svolvær r, Stene r.
Cosc. nitvhis A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pl. Ul, f. 32 does not
sho\\- the irregular distribution of the puncta that is characteristic
of the preceding species. This form occurs in my material together
with the one figured 1. c. f. 33 and has a similar radiate structure,
only much coarser.
Dlstrihution : The variety is only known from Solsvik (west
of Bergen, Norway). The main species, which has not been found
by us, occurs in the antarctic regions.
C. concavtts Ehrh. v Greg.
Greo. Diat. of Clyde 1857. p. 500, pi. X, f. 47. Eiirb. Mikro;;eol., pi. 21, f. i;
mm pi. 18, f. o8.
Hardly belongs to the genus Ccscinodiscus. Rattkay 1. c. p.
470 remarks that the girdle aspect of this species answers to E)t-
didya oceanica Ehkb. (cfr. Mikrogeologie pi. 35 A, XXVIII figs. G,
7; A. Schmidt Atlas pi. 65, figs. 10—15).
Very rare: Gaukværø r. Diameter 86 |i; 2 areoles on 10 jx;
border sharply defined, nearly 3 \i. broad.
DisUihution: Western Europe; Balearic Islands, Black Sea.
Sea of Kara (Cleve). Warmer coasts of America and Asia.
C. leptopns Grin.
V.\N Heurck Synops, pl. 131, figs. 5—6.
Rare: Raftsund r. Diameter 55 [j.; 5 areoles on 10 n. Re-
markable for the minute areoles on the border, like those in the
genuine C. Vmeatus Ehrb. It differs on the whole from the latter
species only in possessing the pseudonodule.
Coseinosira polycliorda Gran and the variety of Coscinodiscus
linentKs mentioned below have a much liner structure and less re-
gularly straight rows of areoles.
Distribution: Mediterranean. Southern Atlantic, Pacific Ocean,
Indian Ocean.
C. lineatiis Eiiiu!.. rar.
Cf. above p. 92.
Kare: Stamsund, r. Finer structure than in the genuine C
lineutiis. Small; TVs — 8 areoles on lo \>: Border narrow, striate,
15 striæ on 10 [i. Areoles near the border somewhat smaller.
Secondary rows somewhat flcxuose.
In the sample from Svolvær a very similar specimen was
found, only with a little finer structure and marginal spines. This
1 96
E. Jørgens
specimen agrees completely with Coscino.sira pob/chorda Gran, but
wants the peculiar transverse processus of the latter species.
Such forms, which are perhaps solitary cells of Coscinosira,
may easily be mistaken for C. lineahts.
Distrihidion: The main species is cosmopolitan. Cleve and
OsTRUP mention C. Uneahia from several arctic localities: Finmark,
iiaren Eiland, Greenland, Spitzbergen, Kara. I should, however,
think that the species has been confounded with Coscinosira polij-
rhoriln, at any rate to some extent.
C. excentricns Ehrb.
Cf. above p. 92.
Fi'equent: Moskenstrømmen r, Stamsund +, Graukva^i'o i' -\-.
Derived undoubtedly from the plankton.
Distribution : Cosmopolitan.
C. Kiitziugii A. Scum.
A. ScHM. Atlas, pi. 57, f. 17. C. maryivatus A. Schm. Novels. Diat. pi. .3, f. 35-
As Gkunow remarks, this species is intermediate between t'.
excentricns and the difficult group of C. snhtilis.
Very rare: Raftsund r, Stamsund r.
Distribution: North Sea. Arctic and antarctic regions (Grun.).
Not mentioned by Cleve as arctic. Very nearly related forms
are found near Greenland (C adnmhruttis Østr.) and Jan Mayen
I L898, E. Jørgensen).
C. Rothii (Ehrb.O Gein.
Gru.n'. Diat. Franz Jos. Land, p. 29, pl. III (C), fius. 20 a, b, 22. C. si/mme-
tricus A. Schm. Atlas pl. 57, tigs. 25 — 27, non Gbev. Heterostepliaiiici Botltii
Eheb. a octovaria Mikrogeolouie 35 A, XIII B, fig. 4 a.
Belongs to the difficult group of C. subtilis Ehrb., as well as
tlie following spedes and a good many more, which probably will
not bear a more thorough examination.
Structure plainly fasciculate, with numerous fasciculi separated
by radial lines made conspicuous by the marked inner ends of the
l)eginnings of new rows. Small marginal apiculi in the middle of
the fasciculi, one in each. Valve almost flat (occasionally undula-
ted according to Grunow).
Very rare: Stamsund r, Raftsund r. lirettesnes— Skroven r.
Probably a plankton form.
Distribution: P)elgium, Scotland; Caspian Sea. Warmer re-
gions of America and Asia. Southern Seas.
C. Norinanni (innG.
C.REO. Quart. .louni. Micr. Sc. 1859, p. HO, pl. 6, fig. 3. C. „noriiianmis" Van
Heuhck Synops, pl. 131, I. C', fascicitlatns A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pl. 111, figs.
41, 42: Atlas pl. .57, figs. 9, 10.
\'ery clo.scly related to tlio preceding species. Differs in hav-
ing a distinctly convex valve, liner structure (though variahlc in
this respect), more numci'ous anil narrow fasciculi and less distinct
marginal apiculi.
It is ]icrliii])s not quilo cci-tain lli;it tins species is identical
with ('. Xoniiiiuiti (liiEd.; the nanu^ ('. /u.-nrtilnliis A. Scnm. (1874)
must however be abolished on account of <'. fusviruliitas O'Mhak.v
(ISCT).
'J'his species seems to me to answer tolei'ably well to C. pune-
lidatus Greg. In specimens with fine structure the fasciculi are
only seen with difficulty, while the clear, scattered dots mentioned
by Geegoky 1. c. are conspicuous. If this should prove correct,
the C. Xormanni Greg, is perhaps the same as C. Rothii Grun.
Rather frequent: Stamsund r 4-, Svolvær r -f, Brettesnes—
Skroven r, Østnesfiord r +, Stcno r. Probably a plankton species
(living or fossil).
Distribution: Western Europe. America. Arafura Sea.
C. ciirvatulus Gruk.
Cf. above p. 92.
Derived undoubtedly from the plankton.
Very rare: Stene rr.
Distribution: Arctic regions; Northern European coasts; Ba-
learic Islands. America and Africa.
C. stellaris Rop.
Cf. above p. 92.
Derived undoubtedly from the plankton.
Very rare : Gaukværø r. When the conspicuous star is want-
ing, the species is difficult to determine.
var. symholophorus (Grun.).
C. symhohjyhorus Grun. Diat. Franz Jos. Land, p. 82, pi. IV (D), figs. 3— (j-
Differs from the main species in having much coarser structure.
Very rare: Moskenstrømmen r, Raftsund r. Like the main
species planktonic.
Distribution: The main species occurs in Western Europe, the
Mediterranean and the antarctic regions, the variety in the arctic
and antarctic regions.
C. concitinus W. Sm.
Cf. above p. 9:3.
Derived undoubtedly from the plankton.
Very rare: Gaukværø, rr; Stene, r.
Distribution : Cosmopolitan.
C. vcntnilis Kiihb., Rattr.
Cf. above p. 9:5.
Derived pi'obably from the plankton.
Not unfrciiuent: Moskenstronnucn r. Stamsund i', Raftsund r.
Stene r.
Distiiliutiou : Cosmopolitan.
C. siibbnlJiens Jørg.
C', octdus iridis ancf. scaiid., p. p.
Cf. above ]>. 9 1.
Probably dcrivcil tVoin tlu' plankton.
Rare: Moskenstrømmen r, Kaflsnnd r. (iaukv;erø r -|-.
Distribution: Arctic regions.
Hail. Anieric. Jdurn. Sc. 185(1, p. :i. A. SciiM. Atlas, pl. tiS, l'. 11.
Vei'y rare: Raftsund, rr. Diamctor l;i.'3 [i. Coarse structure;
areoles increasing towards the border, at the centre S'/s) i^eai' t'le
border 2 on 10 |)-; the largest ones only little larger than those at the
very margin. Lai'ge and very conspicuous .,papillæ" (poroides).
197
Border sharply defined, dark, striate. The disc somewliat convex
towards the border.
The spociiiR'ii fcnini! only ilitfci's tVnin SciiMinr's lii^iirc in
wantin;:- the ..reutral space". Instead of tins space, wliicli is, iiow-
ever. not mentioned liy iiArrnAv 1. c, a laiv' aroolo was present.
Distrihutioii: I'acilie Ocean, especially in the northern rcgioia
(ivaintschatka tSea, ISailey). t'ape Wankarenia (Ci.kvk).
C. decrescens Uri n.
mil, p. 28. A. Schmidt All
Eatthay 1. c. 1). 77.
til, figs.
Perhaps a plai
Coarse structni
the i-aitiil decreasin;
kton foi'ni, occni'rintr with us like ('. siMiiUiens.
\ conspicuous ..papillæ". Recognizable through
■ of the areoles outside of 'A radius.
Hare: Moskenstiouunen r -|-, Stamsund r. Diameter 92 {>. or
less; largest areoles somewhat outside of V2 radius, 2 on 10 \>., at
the centre smaller, on the bordei' much smaller. J^order broad,
sharply defined, striate, with .5 — 1) stiiæ on 10 {>■. Central space
generally absent (answering;' to rar. ivph-ta GErx. 1. c), sometimes
present.
Distribution: Fa?i'oe Channel. Franz .losef's Land, .Japan,
Macassar Straits, Florida.
C. radiatiis Khrb.
Cf. aboYe p. 92.
Probably deriYed fiom the plankton.
Rather frequent: Moskeustrommen c, Stamsund r +, Svolvær
r, Østnesfiord r, Gaukværo +, Stene r.
Distribution : Cosmopolitan.
A. SCHM. Nor
var. minor A. Sciim.
p. !I4, jl. :3, f. 4. C. (Icvius A. Schm. Atlas, pl.
Stamsund r, Svolvær r, Gaukværo r, Stene r.
var. oculus iridis (Ehub., Eattr.).
Flat. A conspicuous central rosette and often a small „central
space". Areoles largest at or beyond V2 radius, hexagonal, with
large „papilla", towards the border rapidly decreasing, at the very
margin small. Largest areoles 3 on 10 [>■.
This form, which answers very well to C'oscinodiscus oculus
iridis Ehrb. Mikrogeologie pi. 19. fig. 2, is certainly not specific-
ally distinct from C. nuliattts. intermediate foi'ms being rather
frequent.
Moskcnstrouuncn r. Gaukværo r. Occui'i'eil also in other
samples.
C. nodulifer Jan.
.Taxisch. ill A. Schmidt Athis, pi. 59, f. 21.
Flat. A small, but conspicuous nodule near the centre. Are-
oles hexagonal, increasing from the centre to 74 radius, here 3 on
10 \i; towards the margin rapidly decreasing, at the border 5 — 6
on 10 \i. Border shai-ply defined, striate, with 6 — 6 'A striæ on
10 11.
Answers very well to the figure referred to.
Rai-e: Raftsund +, Brettesues— Skroven r.
Distribution : This southern species is found near the Balearic
I Islands and in the warmer regions of tiie Atlantic, Pacific and In-
dian Oceans.
it is very reniarkalile that this species occurs .so far noiHi.
It is probalily a plankton form, most likely a fos.sil one.
Actinoryrlns Eiirh.
A. alienus (iju n.
Grlx. in Van Heurck Synopsis, pi. 12.5, f. 12 (var. arctinisl.
Very rare: Brettesnes— Skroven r; Stene r. ln structure
Coscinodiseus-like, as Grunow states intermediate between C', cur-
vatulus and C. radiatus. Central space circular, conspicuous, only
with a few irregularly scattered puncta. Numerous fasciculi (over
20) with interfascicular radii, which are more or less plainly ziczac
bent, especially towards the centre. Towards the margin, the fasci-
culi are not separated from each other, but form an even radiately
structured marginal part. Very small and incon.spicuous marginal
apiculi. Border narrow, indistinctly striate.
Diameter 61—66 [i.; rows of areoles 1.5 on H) [i.. at the mar-
gin closer. Ocellus marginal, evident.
Di.stribution: Cape Wankarema. Also mentioned from a few
places of the North Atlantic and Arctic Seas.
A. Ehrenhergi Ealfs.
Cf. above p. 9.5.
Probably derived from the plankton.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund r, Svolvær r, Gaukværo r, Stene -f •
Distribution : Cosmopolitan.
A. Ralfsii (W. Sm.) Ralfs.
Cf. above p. 95.
More frequent in the bottom samples than in the plankton
(from which however must not be concluded that it is a bottom
form): Stamsund r, Svolvær \--{-. Ostuesfiord r, Gaukva'io r+.
Stene r.
Dist) ibution : Western Europe. Greenland (Gstkfp). War-
mer Seas.
Rattr. Revis. Actiii
A. sparsus (Greg.) Eattr.
1890, p. 170. Eupodiscus sparsus Greg. Trans. Jlicr.
Soc. 1857, p. 81, pi., fig. 47.
The description by Rattray does not answer Avell to the figure
referred to. According to this figure, it seems chiefly to ditter from
A. Ehrenberfji in being more sparsely granulated towards the cen-
tre, so that only the interfascicular radii reach the central space.
It is, however, doubtful whether it can really be kept distinct
from the preceding species. Also A. moniliformis Ralfs seems to
be a species very closely related to .1. Ehrcnlnrgi.
Specimens which seem to belong lici-c were found in the sample
from Gaukværo. r.
A. crassus V. H.
Van Heurck Synopsis p. 215, pi. 124, figs. 6, 8.
Van Hecrck's figure shows interfasciculate radii, though not
so evident as those of A. Ehrenbergi. Smaller and coarser forms
of the latter species is puzzlingly similar to A. crassus. It is on
E. Joi-gensen.
the whole doubtful, whether these two species always eau he
distinguished from each other.
A more esseutial difference than in the structure of the valve
is found in the form of the cell (frustule). A. cntssus has high
cells, usually higher than broad, with thick walls, also in the con-
necting zone; here there is also a conspicuous difference in width
between the two valves. A. Ehrenbergii, however, forms low cells,
broader — often much so — than high, and the two valves have
nearly the same diameter.
The valve of A. cmssiis is flat from tlie centre to some di-
stance from the bordei', whei'e there is a high and steep marginal
zone.
Somewhat rare : S tamsund r, Raftsund r, Gaukværo r. Stene r.
Occurs also in the plankton samples.
Distrihution : Western Europe. After all, it is most probably
identical with Eupodifiens cynsxus W. Sm. (Cf. Van Heukck 1. c.
and Traité d. Diat. p. 524).
Melosira Ag.
M. (jranulata (Eheb). Ralfs.
Van Hel'RCK Synopsis p. 200, pi. 87, figs. 10—12.
Fresh water species.
Vei-y rare: Gaukværø, rr.
Dlstiihution : Frequent in fresh water, especially in Western
Europe. Franz Josefs Land.
21. Boescana Rabenh.
Van Heørck Synopsis p. 19(1, pi. 89, figs. 1—6.
Fresh water species.
Very rare: Ostnesfjord. rr.
Distrihution: Common fresh water species. Greenland (Ostrup).
M. Borreri Grev.
Grev. iu Hook. Brit. Fl. II, p. 401. Van Hel-rck Synops, p. 198, pi. 85,
Note. In the sample from Stene, several broken valves with
a rather large disc occurred, somewhat similar to X(mthiopyxi><'^
umbonata Gkev., cf. Van Heøeck Traité d. Diat. p. 512, fig. 263,
which cannot, however, be referred to the genus Xanthioju/xiK
Eheb., a doubtful genus including what are probably resting spores
of Chætoceros (cf. ScHiiTT. in Engler and Pkantl., Natiirl. Pflan-
zenfamil., Theil I, Abth. 1 b, p. 148). Structure rather fine, similar
to that of Co-seinodiscm ; valve rather convex, with numerous large,
slender, conical spines, as in the figure referred to. Undoubtedly
a fossil species.
2. Melosireæ.
Cosciiio.«iil'a polycborda (Gran) Gran.
Cf. above p. 97.
Derived from the plankton.
Very rare: Stamsund r, Gaukværø r.
Dislnhiiiwn: Cf. above p. 97. As stated before (p. 19G)
this .species seems also to occur singly, and is then easily mistaken
for Coscinodiscus lineatus. At any rate, forms occur in which the
peculiar transverse processus at the semiradius are wanting.
TlialasMiosira Ci..
T. gravida Cr,.
Cf. above p. 96.
In bottom samples tlic strong resting spores (endocysts) of this
species occur, thougii seldom (much more so tli;\n would ])robably
be the case, if this species generally „oversummcis'' on tiio bottom).
Rai'e: Stamsund r +, Svolvær r.
Disfrihatwn: Cf. above ]>. 96.
T. decipicns ((i
:.) J.
Cf. above p. 96.
Undoubtedly derived from tiio plankton.
Rare: Stamsund i-, Svolv;er r, Gaukværø i' +.
Distrihution (of Coscinodiscus decipiens Geun.): Caspian Soa.
Great liiritain and Ireland. West coast of Norwav.
Very rare: Svolvær, rr (/vo-. ad hi.^^pld. Castr.).
Distrihution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Green-
land (Cl.).
Paralia sulcata (Ehrb.) Cl.
Cleve Diat. Arct. Sea 1873, p. 7. Gallionella sulcata Ehrb., Jlikrogeologie
pi. 18, 1.
Common: Moskenstrommen -f, Stamsund c, Svolvær c. Raft-
sund r +, Brcttesnes— Skroven r, Ostnesf^jord c, Gaukværø ce.
Stene c.
Distribution.: Frequent on the coasts of Europe and America.
Arctic regions.
forma coroaata (Ehrb.) Grun.
Van Heurck Synopsis pi. 91, f. 18. Gallionella coronata Ehrb., JIikrogeol..i;i,.
pi. 38, XXII, fig. .5.
Rare: Svolvær r. Stone r.
C.vclotolla KiJTz.
C. striata (Kltz.) Grcn.
Grun. in. Cleve et Gri-now Arct. Diat. 1880, p. 119. Van Hel-rck Synapsis
p. 213, pi. 92, figs. 6—10. Coscinodiscus striatus Kutz.
Rare: Stamsund r, Raftsund r, Stene r.
Distribution: Frequent in brackish water. Western Eurojie.
Baltic Sea. Warmer parts of Asia and Africa.
C. couita (Ehrb.) Kl-tz.
KiJTZ. Spec. Algar. p. 21. Van Heurck Synops, p. 214, pi. 92. figs. 16—22.
Fresh water species.
Very rare: Gaukværo. rr.
Distribution: Weslcni iMiropc
ll.>al4>diKciiN Kiiiiii.
U. scoticus (IvcTz.) Grun.
Grun. in Journ. Royal Micr. Soc. 1879, p. 690, pi. 21, f. n. Van Heurck Syn..]!-.
pl. 84, figs. 1.5—18. Ci/clotella s. Kutz. BaciU. p. .50, pi. I, figs. H, III.
Frequent: Stamsund r, Svolvær -f, Gaukværø + c, Stener +.
Distribution: Western Europe. 13o.sporus. Arctic regions.
H. stthtilis liAii..
Hail. Nmv Sir-.'. |.. 10. f. 12.
Porliaii.'^ only a t'onii of (lie iirccodiiii;' .-^pocu'.-;.
Very rare: StaiiLsuiul r. Stoiio r.
Distriliiitiuit: l'>cli;iuiii. Scotland. Finmark (('1..I. America.
Asia.
H. stelliger Bail.
Xew S|.ei-. p. 10. Van Heirck Synops, p. ■2\.i. pi. 84, fiijs. 1—2.
Fiequent: Moskenstrommeii +, Stamsund r -|-, 8volv;er r,
l\at't.sund r. Brcttcsnes— iSkroven r. Gaukvivro r. Stene i'.
Di.-<tnbitfio)i: Western Eurojie. Viipin Isles. Spitsbei'iicn
(uncertain, Cl.).
I'odoKii'sl lioriuoides OIont.) Kutz.
KCtz. Uacill. p. 'y>, pi. 29. f. 84. A. Schmidt Nonls. Diat. pi. 3, l'. 40.
McloMr, h. .Most. F1. Boliv. 18.39. p. 2.
Rare: ytamsund r, Svolvær r, Kaftsund r.
Dislnhut'wn: Coasts of tlio North Sea. Greenland. West
coast of Soutli America. Adriatic Sea.
?. Enpodisceæ.
Koporia tessellata (Rop.) Guux.
Cf. above p. 98.
Undoubtedly derived from the plankton.
Rare: Stamsund r -(-, Stcne r r.
Distribution: Western coasts of Europe and Africa.
AnIi«>ons t^culptus (\V. Sji.) Ralfs.
Ealfs in Peitch. Inf. p. 84.5, pi. li. f. 3. Enpodiscns s. \V. Sm. Brit. Diat. I,
p. 25, pi. 4, f. 39.
Common: Mosken.strømmen +, Svolvær c, Raftsund r, Bret-
tesnes— Skroven r, Ostnesfjord r, Gaukværø c, Steue c.
Specimens occur -which are very similar to A. cælatug Bail.
(A. ScHM. Atlas pi. .32. figs. 14—15), but connected with A.
seul2}tus by intermediate forms: Gaukværø +, Stenc r.
Distrihiition: Coasts of the North Sea. Western Europe.
Mediterranean. America. A. cwlutiis: Warmer coasts of the
Atlantic. Pacific and Indian Oceans.
EnpodiNont^ argus W. 8m.
W. Sm. Brit. Dial., p. 24. A. Schmidt Atlas, pi. 92, figs. 7-
Van Heurck Svuops. p. 209, pi. 117
pi. 97, figs.
^'ery rare: Moskenstronimen, rr, only one broken valve.
I Distrihiition: Frequent on the coasts of the North Sea and
I Western Europe. America.
Aii1a4>nflÉ!«4>n!ii Ehrb.
A. Kittonii Arxott.
ÅRNOTT in Pritch. Inf. p. 844, pi. 8, f. 24. A. Schmidt Atlas pi. 3(5, figs. .5—7.
Rare: Moskenstrommen ■\-, Raftsund r, Brettesnes — Skroven r,
Gaukværø i'.
All specimens observed have 4 processus and no, or a very
small or inconspicuous, ,,central space'".
It is very remarkable that this tropical species occurs in
)ins. jf)C)
Lofoten. Very likely fossil. \{ pivs.^iit I have no ojiportunity of
ascertaining- whether the cells have really all been empty.
Distribution: Warmer coa.sts of the Pacific Ocean, especially
frequent on the coasts of California.
^l. Johnsouii .Vh.nott.
Abnott in rRiTCH. Int. p. 844. A. Schmidt Atlas pi. 36. figs. 1, 2.
.1. Kitlonii rai: J. Uattu. Rev. of Aulacodisc. p. 376.
Very rare: Raftsund r, Brettesnes— Skroven r.
Diflers from the preceding especially in having- a conspicuous
central .space and processus of a different siiape. .4. Kittouii is.
however, said to vary considerably.
Distribution: Tropical coa.sts of the Indian and Atlantic
Oceans.
4. Astcrohimprcæ.
A<*tiiiO|t(> rliiiK Einiii.
A. nndulatiis (Haii.-V) Kai.fs.
Cfr. above p. 98.
Frequent: Mosken.sfronuneii r +. Stamsund r -\-, Svolvær r.
Raftsund r, Brettesnes — Skroven r, Gaukværø r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of Western Europe and the North Sea.
Arctic regions. Cape of Good Hope.
A. .splendens (Ehrb.v) Shadh.
Shade, in Pritch. Inf. p. 840. Van Hbcrck Synojis. pi. 119, figs. 1—2, 4.
HaUonyx splendcnn Ehrb. Abli. Berl. Ak. 1844?
Very rare: Moskenstrommen r, Gaukværo r r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and the Baltic (Greifs-
wald).
ANtoroniiihaliiK heptactis (Bkéb.) Rai.ks.
Cf. above p. 98.
Undoubtedly derived from the plankton.
Very rare: Moskenstrommen ri'.
Distribution: Cf. above p. 98.
5. Biddulphieæ.
Biddlllpllia (Jray. V. H. (indmling AmplnMyns Ehrb.. Tncnatiiim Kiirb..
('a-alanlus Ehrb.).
B. pulchclla C.RAY.
Gray Arrang, of Brit. Plants, 1. p. 294. Van Hf.ckck Synops, p. 204, pi. 97,
figs. 1-3.
Rare: Stamsund r. Raftsund r, Brettesnes— Skroven r, Stene r.
Distribution : Frequent on the western and southern coasts of
Europe. America. Africa.
B. regina W. Sm.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. II, p. .50, pl. 46, f. 32.3.
rar,
B. regina A. Schm. Atlas pl. 1 IM. f. 18 (from Balearic Isles).
The 3 median elevated parts of the valve hispid, not smooth
as statell by W. Sm. both in his discription and figure.
Very rare: Stene, a single valve.
200
E. Jorgensen.
Dhtrihution: Balearic Isles. The main species known from
the coast of the isle of Skye.
B. aurita (Lyngb.) Bréb.
Cf. above p. 99.
Probably derived from the plankton.
Frequent: Stamsund +, Svolvær + c, Stene r -|-.
Dixtrihiiiion: CL above p. 99.
B, rhoiubiis (Ehrb.) W. S.m.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. II, ]i. 4!t, pi. 45, f. 320. Denticella r. Ehrb.
yar. trigona Cl. Van Heurck Synops, pl. 09, f. 2.
Very rare: Svolvær r.
Distriliidion: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
Finmark (Cleve).
B. turgida (Ehrb.) \V. Sm.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. II, p. .50, pi. t)2, f. 38. Vax HEaRCic Synops, pl. 104, figs. 1, 2.
Cerofnulun t. Ehrb.
Very rare: Svolvær r r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
B. Smithii (Ralfs) V. H.
Van Heueck Synops, p. 207, pi. 105, tigs. 1—2. A. Schmidt Atlas pi. Ill),
figs. 5 — 6. Ceratmlus S. Ealfs in Pritch. p. 847.
Very rare: Moskenstrømmen rr, Svolvær i-.
Didribution: Coa.sts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
Spitsbergen? ( Cleve i.
B. antfdiluyiana (Ehrb.) V. H.
Van Heurck Synops, pl. 109, tigs. 4—5. Amphifetras a. Ehrb., Mikrogeol.
pi. 21, f. 25 a— c.
Rather frequent: Moskenstrømmen -f > Stamsund r, Raftsund r,
Gaukværø r, Stene r.
Didrihution : Common spedes, cosmopolitan; very rare, how-
ever, iu arctic reyions: Spitsbei'ijen (rr, Cleve).
B. lata ((iREv ).
Triceralium 1. (Irev. Trans. Micr. So(^ 1865, p. 103, \Å. 9, f. 20. A. Schmidt
Atlas, pl. 77, figs. 38—39. ÅmphUetrais 1. De Toni Syll. vol. II, sect. 3, p. 901.
Very rare: Raftsund r. \'cry similar to the figures referred
to in S.ciimitit's Atlas. Side of the tctra.y-onc 07 |).. Marginal
pearls 5 on 10 |)-; tlie I'ows of sti-iæ in tiio corners somewhat
radiating, 10 on 10 [>..
Distiibntion : Tropical species, according to De Toni (1. c.)
only known from Singapore and North Celebes.
n. far us IKURB.) V. H.
Van Hel'rck Synops, pi. 107, figs. 1—4. Trurrtitiniii facus Khrb. A. Schmidt
Atlas, ]il. 82, f. 2.
Very rare: Rartsuiid. rr. Side of the triangle 92 |).; 2 ai'eoles
on 10 1»..
JJititriljution : Rathci' common sjjccios, cosmopolitan on tropical
and temperate coasts. Spitsbergen i('li;ve, ,,doubtful as an arctic
species").
B. arctica (Brightw.).
Triceratium a. Brightw. Micr. Journ. 1853, p. 250, pi. 4. t'. 11. A. Schmidt
Atlas pi. 79, figs. 12—13.
Very rare: Stene r.
forma balæna (Ehrb.).
Zygoceros b. Ehrb. Mikrogeol. pi. .35 A, XXIII, C. 17. Bitlduljihia h. Brightw.
Micr. .Journ. VII (1859), p. 181, ])1. 9, f. 15. Van Heurck Synops.pl. 112, f. 1.
Very rare: Stene r.
Distribution: Arctic regions. Vancouver; Cape of Good Hope
(De Toni Syll. p. 921).
B. formosa (Brightw.).
TriceratiHiii f. Brightw. Grun. in Cleve et Grun. Arkt. Diat. pp. 111 — 112.
A. Schmidt Atlas, jil. 79 f. 2.
Very nearly related to the preceding species, from wliich it
differs chiefly in having the centre of the valve irregularly punctate,
not areolate, with scattered puncta smaller than the neighbouring
areoles.
Very rare: Raftsund r.
fonna balæna.
An-swering to the forma baiwna of the preceding species.
Very rare: Raftsund r.
B. alteriians (Bail.) V. H.
Van Heurck Synops, p. 208, pl. 113, figs. 4—7. Triceratium a. Bail. Micr.
Obs. p. 40, figs. 55— 5tx
Very rare: Stamsund r r.
Distribution: Western Europe. West Indies.
B. punctata (Brightw.) V. H.
Van Heurciv Synops, pl. 109, f. 10 (forma 3-tjomi). Triceratium p. Brightw.
Micr. .Journ. 1856, p. 275, pl. 17, f. 18, non Biihhdphia punctata Grev. 1864.
Very rare: Gaukværø, rr. Irregularly punctate with puncta
very different in size, shape and distance from each other, on an
average 5 on 10 [a. Side of the triangle 10 \i.
Distribution: Tropical coasts of America, Africa and Asia.
The nearly related B. sculpta (Shade.) \'. H., wiiich by De Toni
1. c. p. 9-4-4 is Considered to belong to the same species, occurs in
Western Eui'ope, the Skagerack, and the Mediterranean.
B. nohilis (Wurx.).
Triceratium n. Witt. Diat. Siniliirsk 18S5, p. :!4. pi. 10, f. 3: pi. 11, figs. 4. 7.
A. Schmidt Atlas pi. 150, f. 25. Xon Biddulphia nabilis Brun 1889.
A specimen very similar to the figure referred to in Schmidt's
Atlas (from Archangel) was found: Gaukværø r r; Stene r r.
Large puncta, irregular in size and shape, intermingled with minute
ones. Near the margin, larger areoles. in tlie centre, a con-
spicuous inward pointing spine is found. Side of the triangle 5(i ;'.
A nearly related species is Triceratium Hvibcrgii Qinvfi., V. 11.
Synops, pl. 112, figs. 9 — 11 (from Mors).
Distribution : Only known fossil from Simbirsk. Perhaps also
fossil in my samples (as is probably also the case with some of the
other species).
JS. Weissei ((i rin.)?
Triceratiwn UVissci (Ikin. in A. Schmidt Atlas pi. i)n, f. 2.
A specimen very similar to the (ii?ure referred to (from Arch-
angel) was found: Stene, r r (a single specimen). Rather coarse
radiating- structure of puncta (pearls); about 0 rows on 10 |i. Large
circular central space without jjuncta, only one or two near the
periphery. Side of the triangle .57 ;a.
Might also belong to tlic genus Triiuicrid. I iiave not seen
a side view of the valve.
Distribiitmn: Only known fossil (Simbirsk, Archangel).
Isfliiiiia A(i.
/. ciicrvis Khrr.
KURn. Inf. i>. 209, 1)1. Iti, f. (i. Van Helkck Svuops. pi. 96, figs. 1—3.
Rather frequent: Moskenstionnnen ir, Stamsund r, Svolvær r,
Raftsund r, Brettesnes — Skroven i". Stene r. More frequent on algæ.
Distribution: Coast of Western Europe. Finmark; Spitsbergen
(Clkve). West Indies; Honduras.
KuTZ. BaciU. p. 137
I. nervosa KCtz.
19, f. 5. Van- Heirck Tr
Diat. 4.52. pi. 34, f. 891.
Very rare: Raftsund r.
Distrihdion: Western Europe. Denmark. Arctic regions.
Honduras; San Francisko. Kertruelen.
6. Chætocereæ.
Rartei ia»>itrnni varians Laid.
Lacd. Trans. Micr. Soc. 18ti3, XII, p. 8, pi. IK, figs. l-(5.
Derived from the plankton.
Very rare: Stene rr.
Distribution: Neritic plankton species, from the western coasts
of Europe. Warmer coasts of the Atlantic, Indian and Pacific
Oceans. Rare oflf the west coast of Norwav.
Chætoeeros Ehrb.
C. atlanticus Cl.
Cf. above p. 1(30.
Derived from the plankton.
Very I'are: Gaukværo r.
C. contortus Schutt.
Cf. above p. 101.
Thickened horns, most probably belonging to this species, is
found now and then in the bottom samples, though seldom. Un-
doubtedly derived from the plankton.
C. diadema (Ehrb.) Schutt.
The characteristic resting spores of this species ('Si/ndmdrium
diadema Eheb.) occur rarely:
Stamsund r, Svolvær r, Gaukværo r. Derived from the plankton.
Distribution: Ch: above p. 101. Syndendrium diadema Ehrb.
also in Peru guano.
Stcplianogonia Hmrb.
A specimen very similar to <S'. acUnuptijclias (Ehrb.) Gri-n.
in Van Hkurck Synops, p. 83.-,, ligs. 2—4 was found in the sample
from Moskenstrømmcn.
Nearly circular. Diameter 70 \y. 1.5 radii. On the smaller
upper disc, a coarse spine seems to be found. In other respects
corresponds very well to the figure referred to.
Stcphanoi/onia poli/gona Ehrb. seems to be a similar form,
perhaps the same. Both are probably resting spores (cfr. Schutt
in Engler and Prantl, Naturl. Pfianzenf., Th. 1. Abth. 1 b.
p. 147).
Distribution: ]>oth .species mentioned are known from ,,North
America" (Ehrenberg). The figure mentioned represents a fossil
specimen from Nottingham deposit.
A. SCHM. Noids. Dii
Pyxilla baltica (Srls.
111. .S, f. 2.5. Van Hel-rck Synops, pl. 8.3, f. 2.
According to the figure in Hensch (oter Ber. Komm. Kiel,
pi. V, f. 38 c) Pyxilla baltica must be the resting spore (endocyst)
of Ehizosolenia setiyera Brightw.
Undoubtedly derived from the plankton.
A'ery rare: Rhizosolenia setigera is a neritic plankton diatom
from the coasts of Europe (Western E., Skagerak, Mediterranean).
Pacific Ocean, Indian Ocean; north of South America. Pyxilla
baltica is known from the Baltic, and fossil from Simbirsk.
11- Fe-n -n a-fcæ Schctt.
7. Srnedreæ.
Sjiu'dra.
a. Eusynedra V. H.
S. affijtis KL-TZ.
KuTZ. Bacill., p. 68, pi. 15, figs. 6, 11. Van Heurck Synops, pl. 41, l'. 13.
var. tabulata (Kltz.) V. H.
V. H. Synops, pl. 41, f. 9 a. Si/nedra t. Kutz.
Very rare: Svolvær r, Østnesfiord r.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Arctic
regions.
S. kaiutscbatica Grun.
Gkun. in Cl. et grun. Avkt. Diat. p. 106, pi. VI.
Tar. intermedia Grun. 1. c. f. 111.
Very rare: Stamsund r.
Distribution: Kamtschatka, Finmark, Spitsbergen, Greenland,
Kara Sea, East Cape.
S- ulna (NiTzscn.) Ehrb.
Van Heurck Synopsis pi. 38, f. 7.
Fresh water species.
Very rare: Svolvær r.
Distributio)i: Common fresh Avater .species.
202
5. Jørge:
b. Ardissonia (De Not.) V. H.
S. crystallina (Ao.) KiJTz.
KUTZ. Bacill, p. %i). pl. Ifi. f. I. Van Heurck Synops, pl. 42, f. 10. Diatoma c.
Ag. Consp., p. .52.
Not unfrequent: .Stamsund r, 8volvær +. Gaukvæi'0 r,
Steue r.
Dishihuiion: Coasts of Western Europe. The Mediterranean.
Finmark.
S. siiperba Kutz.
KfTZ. Bacill. p. t)9, pl. 15. f. 13. Van Hecrck Traité d. Diat., p. 316, pl. 30, f. 834.
Very rare: Østnesfiord r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of Western Europe. Tlie Mediterranean.
Finmark (var. minor Gkun.).
S. baculus Greg.
•Greg. Trans. Micr. Soc. 1867, p. 88, pl. 1, f. 54. Van Heurck Synopsis pl. 42, f. 9.
Very rare: Svolvær r.
Disfrihiition : Coasts of Scotland and Ireland.
c. Toxarium (Bail.) V. H.
S. undnlata (Bail.) W. Sm.
W. Sm. Brit Diat. II, p. 97. Van Heprck Synops, p. 154, pl. 42, f. 2. Tox-
arium imdulatum Bail. Notes on new sp. and loe. of Micr. Org. p. 15, figs. 24—25.
Not unfrequent: Stam.sund r, Svolvær -|-, Østnesfiord y-\-,
■Gaukværø r.
Distribnfio» : Coasts of Europe and North America. Red Sea.
S. Hennedyana. Greg.
-Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 532, pl. XIV, f. 108. Van Heurck Synops, pl. 42, f. 3.
Very rare: Stamsund r. 400 ]). long.
D'lstrihittion: Coasts of Scotland and Belgium. The Mediter-
ranean.
S. (hrperhorea rar.?) rostellata Grun.
Grun. Diat. Franz Jos. Land p. .54, pi. II, figs. 6 a— b.
A specimen very similar to the tigui'e referred to was found:
■Gaukværø. 38 \>. x 3 |).. Stria^ very fine.
Di.strilnitio» : Franz Jo.sef's Land.
Tlialassiodii-ix nitzschioides Grun.
Cf. above p. 102.
Derived from the ]ilankton.
Very rare: Stamsund r, (jlaukvæi'0 r.
Distvihiition: Cf. above p. 102.
Sc4>ptrwiu>iK EnRii.
S. marina (Greg.) Grdn.
Grun. in Van Heuuck Synops., pl. 37, f. 2. Meridion marinum Greg. Diat. of
Clyde p. 497, pl. X, f. 41.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund r -j-, Raftsund r, Østnesfiord r,
Gaukværø r, Stene r.
Disfrilnition : Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark. Balearic
Isles.
S. katntschatica Grun.?
Grun. in Van Heurck Synops, pl. 37, f. 6.
A species very similar to the figure mentioned occurred in the
sample from Stene, r (several specimens). Usually broader than
the preceding, somewhat variable in shape, at the broader end
sometimes rounded, sometimes only obtuse. Valve distinctly costate
with linear pseudoraphe; costæ somewhat radiating, 6— 6V2 on 10 |i.
Length 38—40 [x, breadth 7—8 {>.. Also similar to Opephora pad-
fica Geun. in V.H. Synops, pl. 44, f. 22.
Distrihution : Kamtschatka. Opephora pacifica, perhaps the
same species, in the North Pacific.
Rliaplionois Ehrb.
R. nitida (Greg.) Grun.
Cocconeis n. Greg. Diat. of Clyde, p. 492, pi. IX, f. 26. Grun. Alg. Novara p. 99.
Rare : Stamsund r +•
Distrihution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Auckland.
S. PJagiogrammeæ.
riajfioiiraiiinia stanrophorttm (Greq.) Heib.
Heib. Consp. Diat. Dan. p. 55. P. Gregorianum Grev., Van Heurck Synops.
p. 145, pi. 36, f. 2. DeiiHciila slaurophora Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 496,
pi. X, f. 37.
Frequent: Stamsund r, Svolvær r. Raftsund r, Østnesfiord r,
Gaukværø -f, Stene +.
Distrihution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
Finmark; Greenland. South America. Cevlon.
Dinieregi-amina Bales.
D. minus (Greg.) Bales.
Bales in Pkitch. Inf. p. 79U. Van Heurck Synops, pl. 36, f. 10, 1 1 a.
Daitiada m. Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 496, pi. X, f. 35.
Somewhat rare: Stamsund r, Svolvær r, Gaukværø r, Stene r -f.
var. nana (Greg.) V.H.
Van Heueck Traité p. 336, pl. 10. f. 393. Dentiada nana Greg. 1. c f, 34.
Rare : Gaukværø r. Seems to be only a smaller form of the
preceding species.
Distrihution: Coasts of Western Europe. The Mediterranean.
D. iulTUm (Greg.) Ealfs.
Bales 1. c, Dentiada fulra Greg. Diat. of Clyde, p. 496, jd. X, f. 38. Van
Hei^rck Synops, pl. 36, f. 28.
Somewhat rare: Stamsund +, Gaukværø -f, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of AVe.stern Ein'oi)e. Sweden. The Me-
diterranean.
4»l,> |>li«Ml«>siiiiN Grev.
(i. Williamsonii (<!reg.) Grun.
Cf. above p. 1(»2.
Rather fretiuent: Moskcnstioniiiicn r. Stamsund + c- Gauk-
værø r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of the Xoitli yea and Western Europe.
Tlie Moditerranoan.
G'. (ItStHIIS (V.nEO.) (ilUN.
Orl-n. in Van Hkihi k Syn(ip<. pi. 'Mi. Il^s. lo~-1(i. Dentiaila d. Oreg. Dial.
i.f Civile II. 4H.i, pi. X, f. m.
Very rare: iStene r; ytamsuiid r.
Disinhution: Coasts of Western Kurope. Sweden. The Me-
ditenaneaii.
g. Eunotieæ.
Ennotia Khhii.
Frcsli water speeies.
E. (Iir-its Eh KB.
V.\x Hei-rck Syii.ps. p. 141, pi. 34, f, 2.
Very rare: Steue r.
Distribidion : Common fresli water species.
E. major (W. .S.m.I K.\benh.
Van Hccrck Synops, p. 14-2. pi. 34, f. 14.
Very rare: Ostnesfiord r.
D'lstribidion : Fresh water species from Western Europe.
E. pectinalis (Dillw.?) Rabenh.
V.\N Hedrok Synops, p. 142, pi. 33, figs. 15—16.
Very rar»: Svolvær r, Gaukværø r.
Distribution: Common fresh water species.
E. præriipta Ehrb.
Van Hecrok Synops, p. 143. pi. 34, f. U).
Very rare: Ostnesfiord r, Stene r.
Distribution: Northern Europe. America.
E. hklriitidn W. Sm.
W. S.M. Brit. Dint. II, p. 83.
Very rare: Gaukværo r r; Stamsund r r.
Distribution: Great Britain and Ireland.
E. triodon Ehrb.
w. Sm. Brit. Diat. I, p. 10, i)l. 2. f. IS. Van Hei-rck Synops, pl. 33. f. 9.
Very rare: Gaukværø r; Stene r.
Distribution: Northern Europe. Switzerland. Cayenne.
Ceratoneis arcits (Ehrb.) Kutz.
Van Heurck Tr.iité d. Diat., p. 30.5, f. 69.
Fresh water species.
Very rare: Gaukværø, r.
Distribution: Common fresli water species, especially in alpine
localities.
lo. Meridioneæ.
Merldion cb-cnlnre (Grev.) Ag.
Van HEtTRCK Synops, p. 161, pl. 51, figs. 10—12.
Fresh water species.
Very rare: Svolvæi-. Only two cells of a chain.
Distribution: Common fresh water species in temperate regions.
//. Tabellarieæ.
Tahclliiriu /lorcuhsa (Roth) KOtz.
llURCK Synops, p. 162, pi. 52, ligs. 10-
Fresli water species.
Rare: Svolvær r, Gaukværø r, Stene r
Distribution: Common fresh watei
Sli'iiifflla uniptmctata ([.vN(in.) Ag.
Cf. above p. 103.
Very rare: Gaukværo r.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Finmark.
The Red Sea. Cape Horn.
KlialMloiK'iiia Kltz.
jR. minututn Kutz.
p. 126, pi.
f. II, 4. Van Hel'RCK Synops, p. 166, pi. 54,
figs. 17—21.
Frequent: Stamsund i-, Svolvær c, Raftsund r, Gaukværo r,
Stene +.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe, especially
on the western and nortliei-n ones. Arctic regions. Cape of (jood
Hope.
R. arcuatum (Lyngb.) Kltz.
KiJTZ. 1. c. p. 126. pi. 18, f. VI. Van Hburck Synops, p. 166, pi. 54, figs. 14—16.
Diafoma a. Lyngb. Hydroph. p. 180, pi. 62.
Frequent: Svolvær + c, Raftsund r, Gaukværo r, ^teue r -f.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe and North
America. Ai'ctic regions.
R. adriaticum Kutz.
Kutz. Bacill. p. 126, pi. 18, f. 7. Van Heurck Synops, p. 166, pi. 54, figs. 11 —
13. Tessella catena Ehrb. Mikrogeol. pi. 22. t'. 65.
Rare: Svolvær r, Raftsund r r, Stene r r.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe and America.
Finmark (r r Cleve who remarks (Vegaexped. p. 484) that tliis
species else is wanting in the arctic regions). Africa. Pacific
Ocean.
<>raiiiiiiato|>liora Ehrb.
G. islandica Ehrb.
Van Heurck Synops, pl. 53. f. 7.
Not unfreqnent: Stamsund r, Svolvær r, Raftsund r, Brettesnes —
Skroven r, Stene r +.
Distribution: Nortliern and western coasts of Europe. North
Pacific. Cape Horn.
G. serpentina Rai.fs.
Ralps in Ami. and Mag. XI, pl. IX f. 5. Van Heurck Synops, pl. 53, figs. 1—3.
Frequent: Moskenstrommen r +, Stamsund r, Svolvær r, Raft-
sund r+, Brettesnes— Skroven r, Gaukværø r, Stene r.
Distribidion: Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Ceylon.
Cape Horn. Antarctic regions.
E. Jørgensen.
G. marina (Ltngb.) Kutz.
KuTZ. Bacill. p. 128, pi. 17, f. XXIV, 1—6. Van Heubck Synops, p. 163,
pi. 53, figs. 10—11. Diatoma m. Lyngb. Hydroph. p. 180, pi. 62 A.
Rare: Stamsund r.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Africa.
America. Ceylon.
G, oceanica Ehrb.
Eheb. Mikrogeol. pi. 19, f. 36 a, pi. 18, f. 87 a.
Perhaps ought to be united witli the preceding species.
Frequent: Stamsund r +, Svolvær +c, Østnestiord r -f,
Gaukværø r. Stene r.
var. niacilenta (W. Sm.) Gritn.
Grun. in Wien Verh. 1862. Van Heurck pl. 53, 2, f. 16. G. macileiita W. Sm.
Biit. Diat. II, p. 43, pl. 61, f. 382.
Svolvær +, Stene r.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Greenland.
Cape Horn. Indian Ocean.
G. arctiea Cl.
Cl. Diat. Spitsb. 1867, p. 664, pi. 23, f. 1. Van Hel-rck Synops, pl. .53, 2, f. 3.
G. africana Ehrb. Mikrogeol. pi. 35 A, XX, figs. 1—2, (uon 1. c. pi. 18,
f. 86 a, b).
Very rare: Stene ri'.
Distribution: Arctic regions.
12. Nitzschieæ.
Barillai'ia socialis Greg.
Cf. above p. 103.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund -f, The Østnes Fiord r, Gauk-
værø r.
Distribution: Coast of Western and Northern Europe. Arctic
regions. West Indies.
NitKsrliia Hass.
a. Pandiiriforiuis Grun.
N. panduriforuiis Greg.
Greg. Riat. oi Clyde p. 529, pi. XIV, f. 102. Van Heurck Syno])s. p. 172,
pi. 58, figs. \~i.
Rare: Svolvær r, Stene r.
Distribution: Western coasts of Europe. Baltic. Adriatic
Sea. Finmark. Spitsbergen. Indian Ocean. The Red Sea. Cape
Horn.
N. constricia ((ireg.) Griin.
Gri'n. in Cl. et Griin. Arct. Diat. 1880, p. 71. Tryblioiwlla c. Greg. Micr.
Journ. Ill, p. 40. |)1. 1, f. 13.
Rare: Stamsund r, Svolvær r, (iaukværø r.
Distribution: Western Europe. The Mediterranean. Cape
of Good Hope. Cape Horn. Ceylon.
b. Trj-hlionella (W. Sm.) Grun.
N. naricularis (Bréb.) Grun.
Grun. in Cl. and Grun. Avet. Diat. p. 67. Van Heurck Synops, p. 171, pl. 57,
f. 1. Srtrirella varicidaris Bréb. in Kutz. Spee. Alg. p. 36.
Very rare: Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
Spitsbergen (uncertain, Cl.)
N. punctata (W. Sm.) Grun.
Grun. in Cl. et Grun. Arct. Diat. p. 69. Van Heurck Sraops. p. 171. pi. 57,
f. 2. Trvhliondla p. W. Sm. Brit. Diat. I, p. 36, pi. X, f. 76 a.
Rare: Stamsund r, Svolvær r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and of Western Europe.
The Baltic. The Mediterranean.
N. coarctata Grun.
Grun. 1. c. p. 68. Van Heurck Synops, pl. 57, f. 4.
Several specimens which seem to belong here were found:
Gaukværø r.
Distribution: The Mediterranean; Japan; Cape Horn.
N. (Tryhlionella rar.?) litoralis Grun.
Grun. in Cl. and Grun. Arct. Diat. p. 75. Van Heurck Synops, p. 172, pi. 59
figs. 1-3.
Very rare: Stamsund r.
Distribution: Frequent in fresh and brackish water.
c. Apiculatæ Grun.
N, apiciilata (Greg.) Grun.
Grun. in Cl. et Grun. Arct. Diat. p. 73. Tri/blionella a. Greg. Micr. Journ. V,
p. 79, pi. 1, f. 43.
Very rare: Svolvær, r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
Finmark. Greenland.
N. acuminata (W. Sm.) Grutn.
Grun. in Cl. et Grun. Arct. Diat. p. 73. Van Heorck Synops., p. 173, pi. 58,
figs. 16—17. Tryhlionella a. W. Sm. Brit. Diat. I, p. 36, pi. 10, f. 77.
Rare: Svolvær r, Stene ]■.
Distribution: Coasts of Endand. The Mediterranean.
N. uiargiunlata Grun.
Grun. 1. c. p. 72.
var.? didyma Grun. 1. c.
Van Heurck Synops, pl. 58, figs. 14—15.
Rare: Stamsund r, Svolvær r.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Arctic re-
gions. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean.
N. hungarica Grun.
Grun. in Wjpu Verb. 1862, p. 568, pi. 22, f. 13. Van Heurck Synops, p. 173,
1,1. .53. f. 19.
Species from brackish water.
Very rare: Svolvær, r.
Distribution: Frequent in fresh and brackish water.
205
A', littorca Okun. {'.)
Hei'RCK Synoiis. pl. .VI. f. 21. S. thcimnlis r. UttnraUs Cj
V.WS. Aivt. Diat. n. TH.
Spathulatæ Gut'
A^ annularis W. Sm.
I, p. 40, |,l. 13. f. 117. Van Heokck Synops, p.
pl. ti2,
Very rare: .stamsund r. 11:3 ji lon-; 7 keel punda on 10 n. i father frequent: Stamsund r. Svolvær +, Ostncstiord r,
Similar to X lu/hiida, but is long-er and nai-rower, with more distant Gaukværø -\-.
j Distriliiition: Frequent on the western and northern eoasts
keel puncta and more excentric keel. Also Stene, r r.
Diftribiitio» : Newcastle. Lysekil (Sweden).
e. Bilohata- Crits-.
N. bilobata W. S>i.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. I. p. 4->, pl. 15, f. 113. Van Heurck S.vnops. p. 175,
pl. 60, f. 1.
Veiy rare: Ostnestiord. r.
Distribution : Frequent on the coasts of Europe (the most north-
ern ones excepted). Pacific Ocean.
N. hyhrida (Srun.
Cf. above p. 103.
Perhaps derived from tlie plankton.
Very rare: Stamsund r.
Dixfrihntion: Cf. above p. 103.
A'. Mitchelliana Greenl.
Cf. above p. 104.
Very rare: Ostnestiord r, Stene r.
Distributwn : North America. Arctic reirions.
f. Insignes Grun.
N. insignis Greo.
Greg. Micr. Jouvn. V, p. 80, pi. 1, f. 4<i.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund r, Ostnestiord r, Gaukværø r,
Stene r.
Distrihidion : Coasts of Western and Northern Europe. Arctic
regions. Adriatic Sea. Red Sea.
var. notabilis (Jrun.
Grun. in Cl. et Grin. Aret. Diat. p. 84. Van HEnRCK Synops, pl. 51, f. 5.
Very rare: Gaukværo r. 470 |). long; 9—10 striæ on 10 \i.
Distribution: The Mediterranean.
var. spathnlifera Grun.
Van Hecrck Synops, pl. 6], f. 3.
Very rare: Stamsund r.
Distribution: The Mediterranean. West Indies.
N. Smithii Ealfs.
Halfs in Pbitch. Inf. p. 781. V.\n Helrck Synops, pl. 61, f. 4.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund +, Stene r.
Distribution : Coasts of Western Europe. Adriatic Sea. Fin-
mark (var. marginifera Gkun.).
of Europe. The Mediterranean. Arctic regions. Ceylon. Cape
Horn.
N. spathnlata Brkb.
Bréb. in W. !-M. Brit. Diat. I, p. 40, pi. 31, f. 268. Van Heirck Synops, p. 177.
pi. 62, figs. 7—8.
Somewhat rare: Stamsund r, O.stnestiord, Gaukværo r.
Distribution : Frequent on the western and northern coasts of
Eui'ope. Tile Mediterranean. Arctic regions.
A', distans Greg.
Greg. Diat. of Clyde, p. 530, pi. XIV, f. 103. Van Hei-rck Synops, pl. 62, f. 10.
Rai'c: stamsund r (several specimens); Ostnestiord r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Red Sea. Australia. Baffin's Bay and Davis' Strait, Cape Wan-
karema (Cl., vai'ieties).
li. Signiata Grun.
A'. Sigma (KCtz.) W. Sm.
•W. Sm. Brit. Diat. I, p. 39, pi. 13. f. 108. Si/nedm s. KuTZ. Bacill. j). 67.
pi. 30, f. 114.
Frequent: Stamsund -{-. Svolvær +. Ostnesfiord -fr Gauk-
værø r +, Stene r.
Distribution : Cosmopolitan.
i. Lanceolatæ Gkun.
N. lanceolata W. Sm.
W. Sm. Biit. Diat. I. p. 40, pl. XIV. f. 118. Van Heurck Synops, p. 182,
pl. 68. figs. 1—4.
I have two times seen the wavy longitudinal lines, described
and illustrated by W. Smith. They were more distinct than the
transverse striæ.
Very rare: Stamsund r. Gaukværo r, Stene r.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe, the most
northern ones only excepted. Indian Ocean.
k. Nitzcliiella (Rabenh.) Grun.
A', longissima (Bréb.) Ealfs.
Cf. above p. 101.
Very rare: Gaukværo r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
The Mediterranean. West Indies. Indian Ocean.
13. Siirirelleæ.
C'anip.ylotlisrn^ Ehrb.
C. decorus Bheb.
C. decorus Bréb. Diat, Cherb. p. 13, f. 2. Van Heueck Synops, pl. 75, f. 3.
Not unfrequent : Moskenstrømmen r, Stamsund r, Østnestiord r,
Gaukværø r.
Distribution (including- the nearly related C. Ealfiii W. Sm.):
Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Greenland. Java. Pacific
Ocean.
W. S.M. Brit. Diat.
C. Ralfsii W. Sm.
30, pi. .30, f. 2.57. A. ScHM. Atla."! pi. 14, figs. 2—3.
Diifers from the preceding species in having a linear (not
lanceolate) pseudoraphe. Smaller in size.
Very rare: Stene r, Stamsund r.
C. annularis Greg.
Greg. Di.it. of Clyde p. .502, pi. XI, f. 53. A. Schmidt Atlas pi. 18, f. 7.
Frequent: Raftsund r, Bre ttesnes— Skroven r, Gstnesflord c,
Stene r.
Distribiifioti: Scotland. Tiie Skagerak. Arctic regions.
C. Thuretii Bréb.
Bréb. Diat. CUerb. pl, 1, f. 3. Van Heurck Synops, p. 190, pl. 77, f. 1.
Frequent : Moskenstrømmen r, Stamsund -(-, Svolvær r +,
Raftsund r, Bre ttesnes— Skroven r, Gstnesflord -\-c, Gaukværø -t-c,
Stene r -\-.
Disfrihiition: Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Arctic re-
gions. Indian Ocean.
C. parvnlus W. Sm.
W. Sm. ill Biit. Diat. I, p. 30, pl. (i, f. 5«. Van Heurck Synops, p. 191,
pl. 77, f. 2.
Is by some authors considered to be a form of (A Tliurrfii
Uricb. (cf. De Toni Syll. p. 622) by others to belong to C. decorus
P.RÉB. (cf. Van Heueck Traité p. 376).
Very rare: Stene r.
Dish-ihution: England. Belgium.
C. eximius Greg.
Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 503, pi. XI, l'. 54.
Very rare: Stene rr. Only a broken valve.
Distribution: Coasts of Western Europe. Tiie Mediterranean.
Red Sea. Indian Ocean.
Siirirolhi Tt up.
S. gemma Eiirb.
Khrb. Abli. Bhi-I. Akad. 1840, p. 76, pi. IV, f. 5. Van Hel'RCK Synojis. p. 187,
pi. 74, figs. 1—3.
Very rare : Gaukværø r i-.
Distrilmtion : Frequent on the coasts of Europe. Spitsbergen.
S. ovalis Bréb.
KiiTZ. Bacill. p. 61, pi. 30, f. 64. Van Hel-rck Synops, p. 188, pi. 73, f. 3.
In fresh and brackish Avater.
Very rare: Gaukværø r.
car. onda (Kutz.) V. H.
VH. Synops, p. 188, pi. 73, figs. 6—7. Sunvdla ovata KCtz. 1. e. p. 62, pi. 7,
figs. 1-4.
Very rai'e: Gaukværø r.
Distribution: Common .species.
S. fastuosa Ehrb.
Ehrb. Abh. Bevl. Ak. IS4I, p. 19. Van Heurck Synops, p. 188, pi. 73. f. 18.
Rather frequent: Svolvæi- +, Raftsund r, Gaukværø r,
Stene r -f.
var. lata (W. Sm ) VH
Van Heurck Synops, ii, lUS, pl. 72, f. 17. SwireUa }. W. Sm. Brit. Diat. I,
p. 31, p', 9, f. 61.
Frequent: Moskenstrømmen r -(-, Stamsund r, Svolvær r,
Raftsund r, Brettesnes— Skroven r. Gstnesflord r, Gaukværø r,
Stene r.
Distribution: Frequent on the coa.st.s of Europe. Gulf of
Mexico.
14. Achnantheæ Cl.
Aoliiiantli(')4 BoRY.
A. longipes Ag.
Ag. Syst. p. 1. Van Heurck Synops, p. 129, pi. 26, figs. 13—16.
Very rare: Svolvær r.
Distribution: Frequent (on algæ) on the coasts of Europe.
The Canary Isles.
A. brevipes Ag.
Ag. 1. c. Van Heurck Synops, p. 129, pi. 26, figs, 10—12.
Rare: Stamsund r, Stene r, Østnesfiord r.
Distribution: Frequent on the coasts of Europe.
Kiirorc-oiK'iiii CI.
Valves ecostate, without marginal loculifei'ous liin. Both val-
ves •with narrow axial area, rather similar in structure.
E. pseiidoiuarginata (Greg.) ('l.
Cl. Synops. Navic. Diat. II, p. 178. Coccnnns p. Greg. Diat. of Clyde j). 497,
pi. IX, r. 27. C. major Greg. 1. c. f. 28.
Rare: Stamsund r, Raftsund r, Østnesfiord r, Stene r.
Distribuiion: Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic regions. The
Mediterranean. Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Galapagos Islands.
Honduras.
ll<>(«>roil4'iM ('L. (iuclud. Discnneis Cl. 1. c. p. 180 and Artiiwncis Cl.
1. .-. p. 18.5).
Valves very dissiniihir. without marginal loculifcrous rim. Up-
per valve costate, sometimes only striate, then with broad axial area.
H.
norvegica (Gru>
•?)
Cl
510LL. Diat. no.
102 (upper
val
e, teste
Cl.)
,f-
18. 1 (upper figure
..Cocconeis
sp."
upper vs
Ive).
if. AUlllilUltiuilU ((iREO.).
Pinnularia A. (InEO. Diat. of Clyde p. 488, pi. IX, f. 21. Cocconeis quaritercnsis
A. ScHM. Nords. Diat. pi. Ill, f. 1(5; Atlas pi. 192, flg.s. 20—24. Rhaphtnit'is
q. CiRUN. Wien Verli. 1862, p. 381, pi. 7, f. 24. Xaiicula onilum A. Scum.
Nords. Diat. pi. II, f. 12. Hefaoneis q. Cl. 1. c. ]>. 184.
„Costæ apparently marginal, strong-, about -Jo in o.ooi", yivino-
the appearance of a narrow marginal band of very strong costæ.
Within this band, however, the valve, on close inspection, is found
to be marked with similar but much fainter costæ nearly to the
median line. Tlic valve appears to be thicker near the margin
than in the middle, and this perhaps is the reason why the costæ
are so strong and conspicuous there." Gkeg. 1. c.
It seems to me that there can scarcely be any doubt that
Pinnularia Allmanniana Geeg. is synonymous to Cocconeit; qnnr-
nerensis Geun. Size, shape and sti-ucture agree very well in both
species.
There seems to be a niarL;"inal rim whicii lias, liowevcr, only
faint traces of loculi.
Rare: Stamsund r, Stene r.
Dis-triliutio)i : Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic regions. The
Mediterranean.
Cocconeis norvegica (iRUX.,
A. SCHM. Nords. Diat. pi. Ill
Upper valve as illustrated 1. c. by A. Schmidt. Instead of
the median line (pseudoraphe), there is often a linear blank space,
which sometimes (but rarely) is somewhat irregularly widened. The
lower valve has a very delicate structure, consisting of close, some-
what radiating striæ, in the median part of the valve coarser and
more conspicuous, about 15 on 10 [j-, otherwise very faint, about
20 on 10 |i. Raphe strait, extending to the margin; the inner
ends somewhat thickened, separated from each other. A rather
broad hyaline border, but no loculiferous rim.
Cl. .Synops. Navic. Diat. II, p. 180 mentions that he has
found a frustule of Cocconeis hjru with an upper valve like that
illustrated by A. Schm. 1. c. (pi. Ill, f. 18, 1, upper figure). I
have, however, found a frustule, showing this upper valve, in con-
nection with a lower valve of the structure just described. There
must therefore here be some mistake, if there are not two different
species, with very similar upper valves.
There is a marginal rim, like a somewhat broad hyaline border,
with only faint traces of loculi.
Rare: Stamsund r-|- (many specimens); Stene r.
Distribution: West coast of Norway (Solsvik near Bergen).
I'oceoneis Eimn , Cl.
Valves eeo.state, with a marginal loculiferous rim, dissimilar in
structure.
C. scutelltim Ehkb.
14, f. 8. V.\N Heurck Syt
l:i2, pi. 2St, tigs. 1—3.
According to Cleve exceedingly variable. It seems, however,
that he has gone too far when referring so many different forms
to this species, as he has done (1. c. pp. 170—171).
Not uiifrequent. in different forms wliich only l)adly answei-
to the varieties described: Stuinsmid r, Svolvær i-, Ostiie.sliord i-,
Stene r.
Dlstrlhidion : Cosmopolitan.
C, distans fiREO., A. Schm.
(iUEO. Diat. of Civil.-, p. 490, pi. IX, f. 2.3 (18.57, non Micr. .Journ. Ill, p. ;^9.
pi. IV. f. <K 18.">.") «hirh (iREO. 1. c. p. 491 liiniself declares to be a var. of (.
scutellum illustr.ited as C. distans by mistake). A. Schm. Nords. Dial. pi. Ill,
fig's. 22—23 (forma minima Perao.).
Small specimens, very well answering to the figures in A. Sch.m.
1. c. (f. 2.3 entire frustule) occurred. They had no loculiferous
rim, only a hyaline border. Lower valve with very faint and in-
distinct striæ.
There is, however, sucji a remarkable agrceinenl with a foim
of 0. scutellum, most probably the one, mentioned above, which at
first was figured by Gkegoey as C', distans, that I do not feel
quite sure if not these two forms after all belong together. The
only difference seems to be the larger marginal areoles which are
wanting in the true C. distans.
The variety of C', scutellum just mentioned differs remarkably
from the common forms. There is a nai-row marginal rim, but no
loculi. Lower valve with straight raphe, stretching to the margin.
Median pores somewhat separated from each other. Axial area
indistinct except towards the central nodule, where it suddenly di-
lates into a small, round, central one. Striæ finely radiating, much
curved towards the ends of the valve, most conspicuous near the
margin, distinctly punctate, about 14 on 10 |i. A narrow striate
border with striæ somewhat closer and less conspicuous than the
marginal striæ of the valve, 15 — 16 one 10 [l. 38 \>. x 29 [i.
Smaller specimens seem to pass insensibly into such forms,
which A. Schm. has figured 1. c.
Very rare: Stamsund r.
Distrihution : Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Indian Ocean. Central and Arctic America. Sea of Kara.
A. Schm. Nords
C. lyra
III. f. 19 (rig
left figur.
As mentioned above I think there must be some mistake, when
Cl. mentions having seen a frustule of this species with the upper
valve of the species above named Heteroneis norvegica. Though I
have seen no entire frustule of C. lyra, I should think that A.
ScHM.'s illustrations to which I have referred, belong together, which
also answers very well to the dimensions. I have repeatedly found
this upper valve in connection with a loculiferous rim with 0 loculi
on 10 \i.. The species consequently is no Disconeis Cl., but belongs
to Cocconeis or Pleuroneis.
The remarkable lower valve occurred sparsely in my material,
but corresponded in size and shape precisely to the supposed upper
valve. Its structure is puzzlingly similar to that of small forms of
Navicula lyra var. atlantica. On one side of the valve between
the furrows and the margin, there is, however, an indistinct blank
line or furrow, parallel to the main fui-rows, which is absent in
the Navicula mentioned.
Upper valve with transverse and longitudinal co.sta'. the latter
a little closer than the former. Between the costæ there is, tliere-
fore, a single row of conspicuous areolæ.
Rare: Stamsund r (both valves); Stene r (ui)per valve only).
Distrihution: West coa.st of Norwav.
208
E. Jørgensen.
Plenroneis Cl.
p. 181.
Marg-iaal loculiferous rim. Upper valve costate. Between the
costæ double I'ows of small pearls.
p. costata (Greg.) Cl. 1. c.
Cocconeis c. Greg, in Q. M. J. Ill, 185.5, p. 39, pi. 4, f. 10. Van Heurck
Synop-*. pi. 30, figs. 11 — 12.
Has a broad and well developed loculiferous rim.
Rare: Stamsund r, Østnesflord r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic reg-ions. The
Mediterranean. Canada. Auckland.
P. pinnata (Greg.)
CocconeU p. Greg. Mior. .Jouni. VII, p. 79, pi. fi, f. 1. Van Heurck Syno])S.
pi. 30, figs. 6—7.
Lower valve: The raphe tine, straight, stretching' to the ends
of the valve, in the middle with clavate ends, somewhat separated
from each other. Axial area not visible, central one very small,
roundish. Stilæ very faint, not distinctly seen on my specimens.
Tliere is a marginal rim with rudimentary loculi which are
less tiian half developed, but very well visible, 4 on 10 [j.. A
distinct hyaline border. This species seems on the whole to be
closely related to Phuroneis costata though undoubtedly a separate
species.
P. britanniea (Næg.) Ci>.
Cl. 1. c. p. 181. Cocconeis b. KuTZ. Sp. Alg. p. 890. Van Heurck Synops.
pl. 30, figs. 1—2.
Very rare : Stamsund r r.
Distribution: England. The Mediterranean. The Barbadoes.
RlioieoNplioiiia Grun.
JR. ciirvata (Ivutz.) Grun.
(iRUN. Am. Novara p. 8. Gomphonema c. KiJTZ. 1883. Gomphonema minutis-
sima Ehrr. Mikrogeologie pi. 35 A, XII, f. 5, non G. minutissima Geev. (earlier
name, = G. exiguum Kutz.).
In fresh or brackish water. A coarser form (var. nmrina
Van Heurck Synops, pl. 26, f. -1) marine.
Very rare: Svolvær r, Ostnesfiord r.
Distribution: Cosmopolitan in fresh and brackish water.
15. G<>iu])h(meineæ.
4iioiii|»iioii(>iiia Ag.
(i. constrictiini Emm.
Eiirr. Ahh. Brrl. Ak. 1H30. Van Heurck Synojjs. p. 123, pi. 23,
Very rare: Svolvær r.
Distribution: Common fresh water species.
O. cxitiiiiiin KiiTz.
Kutz. ISacill. p. 84, pi. 30, f. 58.
var. pachyclada (Bréb.) VH. Synops, pl. 25, fig.s. 31—32.
Gomphonema p. Bred. Consid. p. 21.
Very rare: Stene rr.
Distribution: West coast of France. Arctic regions.
G. kamtschaticum Grun.
Grun. Casp. Sea Alg. p. 12. Van Heurck Synops. 25, f. 29.
Very rare: Svolvær, r r. Valve 45 x 8 ]j-, narrow, clavate,
with rounded bfoader end. Axial ai-ea narrow, dilated to an oblong
central area. Striæ little radiating, coarser outside the central
area, about 15 on 10 |x, in the middle only 11.
Distribution: (Marine). Arctic America and Asia. Iceland.
16. Navictileæ.
Anricnla complexa (Greg.) De T.
De Toni Syll. p. 347. AnipJiipora complexa Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 508,
pi. XII, f. 62, Van Heurck Tiaité d. Diat. p. 267, pi. 29, f. 807.
Probably derived from the plankton.
Very rare: Østnesflord r.
Distribution: Cf. above p. 108.
Tropidoiieis Ci
T. maxima (Greg.) Cl.
Cl. Synops. Navic. Diat. I, p. 26. Amphiprora m. Gbeo. Diat. of Clyde p. 507
pi. XII, f. 61. Van Heurck Synops, p. 120, pi. 22, figs. 4—5.
Somewhat rare: Stamsund r, Svolvær r, the Østnesflord r,
Stene r -f, Gaukværø i'.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Ireland. The
Mediterranean. Finmark (var. dubiu Cl. et Grun.). Indian
Øcean.
T. lepidoptera (Greg.) Cl.
Cl. 1. f. p. 25. Amphiprora I. Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 505, pi. XII, f. 59 a, b
(non c). Van Heurck Synops, p. 120, pi. 22, figs. 2—3.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund -f, Svolvær r, the Østnesflord r,
Stene v -\-, Gaukværø r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
Finmark. The Mediterranean. West Indies. Indian Øcean. Pacific
Øcean.
I>oiikiiiBa Hales.
D. recta (Donk.) Grun.
Grun. in Van Heurck Synops, p. 119, pi. 17, f. 9. Pleurosigma r. Donk.
Micr. Join-n. VI, p. 23, pi. 3, f. 6. Gi/rosiijma r. Cl. Synops. Navic Diat. I,
p. 119.
Very rai'e: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
The Mediterranean. J'^lorida. Pacific Øcean. Indian Øcean.
Z). carinata (Donk.) Rales.
Ralfs in Pritcii. Inf. p. 921. Van Heiirck Traité d. Dia
Plcurosiyma c. Donk. Micr, .lonni. VI, ji. 23. pi. ,'i, f.
). 248, pi. ;35, f. 912.
Cl. 1. c. p. 44.
Rare: The Østnesfiord r, Stene i', Gaukværø r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Ireland. Sea
Kara. Davis' Strait. Balearic Islands.
I*l4'lii'usi;;ilia AV. Sm.
Jinplflirosiiiin:!. Sliiæ iii three direciions (tmusveise nuil oblii|Ue).
P. nnhccula W.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. 1. p. tU.
-'Ul.
Cl. Svnops. Ni.
var. snbrecta Cl.
Diiit. I, p. ;!.">. Pleiiioniyiiia s. Cl., in ('i,, et CitiN. Aret.
DiMt. ].. 5:}. pl. a, f. 72.
Very rare: Stam.sniiil, r. 254 n x 21 {)-; oblitiue striæ 18
on 10 n, angle more than 00", transvei-sc striæ indistinct. Kapiie
central, almost straisrht. Somewhat broader in the middle, with
obtuse ends.
Distiihiitio)i (of the variety): Finmark. (Greenland. Sea of
Kara. Balearic Islands.
P. elon^atnni W. Sm.
AV. Sm. Brit. Diat. 1, \,\. 20, f. 199. Per.\gallo Monogv. Pleuros. pi. II. figs. 20—21.
Very rare: The Ostnesfiord r.
D'uftribiition : Coasts of the North Sea and Ireland. Baltic.
Arctic regions. The Mediterranean. Caspian Sea. North America,
east coast. Pacific Ocean. Indian Ocean.
P. rigitlnm W. Sm.
pi. 20, f. 198. Per.\g.\llo
VI. figs. 4— ti.
Very rare: Stamsund i', Gaukværo r.
Dhtrihiition: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Eed Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. West Indies. Straits of
Magellan.
P. Norinanni Ralfs.
I. 919, F. affine Grcn. in Cl. et (iKr:
Van Hel-rck Synops. jjI. 18, f. 9.
A ret. Diat. p.
Fre([uent : Stam.sund r, Svolvær e, the Ostnesfiord -(- c. Stene c,
Gaukværø +•
Dixtrihiidon: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Spitsbergen. Davis' Strait. East coast of North America. Pacific
Ocean. The Red Sea.
P. strigosum W. Sm.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. 1, p. 64, pi. 21, f. 203: pi. 23, f. 203. Perac. 1. c. pi. V, fig.s. 1—2.
Very rare: Stamsund i-, Svolvær r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean. In-
dian Ocean. Africa. America.
P. foruiosuni W. Sm.
AV. Sm. Brit. Diat. I. p. 63. |,1. 20. f. 19."). Van Heirck Synoj.s. p. 116,
pi. 19, f. 4.
Rare: Stamsund r, Stene r, Gaukværo r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and ^^■estern Europe.
The Mediterranean. The Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean.
West Indies.
P. speciosimi W. Sm.
AV. Sm. Brit. Diat. I, p. 63. pi. 20. f. 197. Perag. 1. c. pi. II, figs. 13—16.
Verv I'are: Stene. r.
Distribution: Coasts ol the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. West Indies.
(iyronigmii ( 1 1 as».).
P. Httvmuitum (KiTz.) W. Sm.
\V. Sm. Brit. Diat. I. p. 68, pi. 22, f. 216.
var. scalprutn (Jaili,. et Ti-rp.
TiHP. Jlem. <tii Mils. XV. pi. X, XI. f. 3. P.
Brit. Dial. I, p. 6t;, pi. 21. I'. 209.
Very rare: The Ostncstioni. i'.
Distribution (of the vai'ietv): North Se:
Ijiackish and marine.
AA\ Sm. Brit. Diat.
P. balticum (Ehkb.) AV. 8m.
p. 66. pi. 22, f. 207. Xariada b. Kiirb. Abh. Berl
Ak. 18.30. p. 114.
Very lare: Stamsund r, Svolvær r r.
Distribution: Cosniopolifan in warm and temperate regions.
KlioioosiKiiia Crin, Pf.k.
R. arcticttm ('i..
Cl. Diat. Aret. Sea p. 18. pl. III. f. 16. Peragallo Mon. Pleur. pl. X, figs.
16—17. Gyrosinttin a. Cl Syn^ips. Navic. Diat. I. p 119.
Frequent: Stamsund r, the Ostnesfiord 1- c, Gaukværø c.
Distribution: Scotland. West coast of Norway, frequent.
Arctic regions.
Seoliotropis Cl.
S. latestriata (Bréb.) Cl.
Cl. Syunps. Xavie. Diat. I, p. 72. Aiiij/hipyoia I. Bréb. in KiJTZ. Sp. Alg. p. 93.
Scolioplewa I. Grux. in A'a.s Heibck Synops, pl. 17. f. 12.
Very rare: Stamsund r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of the Nortii Sea and \\'estern Europe.
Caspian Sea. East coast of North America. West Indies. Cali-
fornia.
Seolioplt'nra tumida (Bréb.) Babenu.
Eabenh. Fl. Eur. Alg. p. 229. A' ax HErncK Synops, p. 112, pi. 17, figs. 11, 13.
ynvicithi t. Bréb. in KiiTz. Sp. Alg. p. 77; Cl. 1. c. p. 1.5.5.
Very rare: Oraukværo, r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
Franz .Josefs Laud. Black Sea. Cevlon. Sidney.
P»<('niloani|>hi|>rora ('l.
Cl. Synojjs. of Xavie. Diat. I. p. 71.
According to Clevf, the foUomiig species has 2 chromato-
phores peculiar in sliapc and position.
P. stauroptera (Bail.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. Amphora stauroptera Bail. Smiths. Contrib. VII. p. 8, fige. 14—15.
Amphiprorn obtxtsa Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. .506. pi. Xlt, f. 60 ami f . 59 c („Amphi-
prora IciAdoptera" Greg., non f. .59a, b.). A. Scum. Nords. Diat. pi. Ill, f. 1.
Very rare: Stamsund r, tiie Ostnesfiord r.
Distribution: North Sea. Finmark. Sea of Kara. Nova
Scotia. Sidney. (Cl. 1. c).
E. Jørgensen.
Caloneis Cl.
Cl. Synops. Navic. Diat. I, p. 46.
Valve striate; striæ parallel, except at the ends, crossed on
each side of the raphe by one or more longitudinal lines. Con-
necting- zone not complex.
C. Uber (\V. Sm ) C'l.
Cl. 1. c. p. 54. Sacmda I. W. Sm. Biit. Diat. I. p. 48, pi. 16, f. 133.
var. linearis (Ghun.) VH.
VH. Synops, pl. 12, f. 3.">. Xariada 1. Grun. Veih. 1860, p. 546. pi. 3, f. 2.
Frequent: Stamsund f, Svolv;fr -(- c. the Østnesfiord r+,
Raftsund r, Stene r +, Gaukværø +.
Distribution : Cosmopolitan.
Tar. maxima (Gheg.)
Navicula m. GnEC. Diat. o! Clyde ).. 4S7, jil. IX, f. 18. A. Schm. Nords. Diat.
pi. II, f. 44.
Frequent: Stamsund 4 c, Stene r +.
Bisfrihiition: Coasts of the North Sea and We.stern Europe.
var. elongata (Grin.) Cl.
('L. 1. c. p. 55. A^ai'kuln e. Grun. in A. Schm. Nords. Diat. p. 91, pi. II, f. 42.
Very rare: Stamsund r.
Distribution: Coasts of tlie Nortli Sea. Indian Ocean. Colon.
C. consimilis (A. Schm.) Cl.
Cl. 1. V. p. 57. Xavicula c. A. Schm. Nords. Diat. p. 91, pi. II, f. 46.
Very rare: Stamsund r.
Distribution: North Sea. Balearic Islands.
C. aiiiphislici'xa (Boby.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 58. Xnrinda a. BoRv Encycl. meth., t. 2. Van Heurck Synops.
p. 102, pi. XI, f. 7.
Vci-y rare: Stene, r.
Distribution: In bracki-sli and freshwater, frequent especially
in Nortlicrn and ^^'esterll P]urope. Caspian Sea.
C. brevis (Gbeg.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 61. Xavicula h. Greg. Diat. of Clyde, p. 478, pi. IX, l'. 4.
A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pi. II, f. 15.
Very rare: Stamsund r, the Østnesfiord r, Stene rr.
Distribution: Nortli Sea. Arctic regions.
C. blanda (A. Schm.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 62. Xni-kula h. A. Schm. Nords. Diat. p. 90, j)!. 11, f. 27.
Very rare: Stamsund ri-. the Østnesfiord r.
Distribution: Coasts of tlii' Noitli Sea. Black Sea. Indian
Ocean. Pacific Ocean.
C. musca (Greg.) ('l.
Cl. 1. c. p. 65. Xavicula m. (iiuiv.. Diat. of Clyde, p. 479, pi. IX, l'. 6.
A. Schm. Nords. Diat. |i. Hii, j)!. I, l'. 15.
Very rare: Stamsund r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Tlie Meditoi-ranean.
Indian aud Pacific Oceans. West Indies.
8cliiKonenia Ag
S. Grevillei Ag.
Ag. Coiisp. p. 18. Van Hei'HCk Synops, p. 110, pi. 16, f. 2.
Rare: Stamsund r, Svolvær r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe,
frequent. Arctic regions. West Indies. California. Kerguelen.
S. crueigerum W. Sm.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. II. p. 74, pi. 56. fig. 354: pi. 57, f. 356. Van Heurck
Synops, p. 110. pi. 16, f. 1.
Rare: Svolvær, r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western E^urope.
The Baltic.
Stanroneis Ehrb.
S. salina W. Sm.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. I. p. 60, pi. 19, f. 188. Van Heurck Synops, p. 68,
pi. X, t'. 16.
Rare: Stamsund r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Baltic. The
Mediterranean. Black Sea.
S. Gregorii Halfs.
Bales in Peitch. Inf. p. 913. Van Heurck Synops, p. 68. pi. A (suppl.). f. 4.
S. amphioxys Greg. Micr. .Jonrn. IV, p. 48, pi. V, f. 23.
Rare: Stamsund r, Gaukværo r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Black Sea. Caspian
Sea. East coast of Nortli America. Sea of Kara.
N. iilupniccnfcroii Ehkb.
Ehrb. Am. pi. II, 5, f. 1 etc. Van Heurck Synops, p. 67, pi. IV, f. 21
(car. gemmm Cl. Synops. Navic. Diat. I, p. 149).
Very rare: Stene, r.
Distribution: Fresh water species, especially frequent in Nor-
thern and Western Europe. America. New Zealand.
Xavicula Bory.
a. Orthostichæ Cr.. Synops. Navic. Diat. 1, p. 107.
\"alves with small puncta. arranged in parallel transverse striæ
I and also forming- straight longitudinal ones, crossing' the former at
right angles.
N. rus]ii(hit(( Ki'TZ.
KUTZ. Bacill. ],. 94, pi. 111. tigs. 24. 37. Van Heukck Synops, p. 100, p]. XII, t. 4.
Very rare: Stamsund r. the Østnesfiord r.
Dlstribatio)i: Common fresh water species.
b. Piimtatæ Cl. 1. c. II, p. 37.
Coarse puncta, arranged in transverse striæ (radiate at the
ends) but not in straiglit longitudinal rows.
N. liiiiiwrosii HiiÉu.
Brkb. ill \V. Sm. Hiit. Dirtt. 11. p. «Ki. Van llKincK Synops, p. 98, \,\. XI, f. 20.
Very rare: Kat'tsuiKl r.
])it>tribidion : Coasts of the North iSea. Baltic. Arctic re-
<rions. Tlie Mediterranean, Bhick Sea, Caspian JSea. The Red
Sea; Indian Ocean. Sidney. Cameroon.
N. monilifera Cl.
('L. 1. 0. p. 4;J. -Y. grautthta Brkb. in Bonk. Jlicr. .Jonni. VI. p. 17. pi. 111.
f. 19. non X. iirntuilatn Bail.
Very rare: Tlie Ostnc^tiord r.
Tar. heterosticba ('i,,
('L. 1. c. .V. ijramdata A. Scum. Atlas, pi. (j, figs. 15—1(3.
Very rare: Raftsund, r.
Dhtfrihidion (of the main species): North Sea. Ceylon.
Madagascar. The var. only known from Hungary, fossil.
iV. latissinia Gueo.
Greg. Jlior. Jouvu. IV, p. 40. i.l. V. fi-s. 4, 4*. A. Sciui. Xords. Dial. pi. 1, f. 30.
Frequent: Moskenstrommen r +, Svolvier r, the Ostnestiord r,
Raftsund r, Steue r +.
Disiribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark. The Me-
diterrauean. Black Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean.
N. punctnlata W. Sm.
"\V. Sm. Brit. Diat. I, p. hi. pi. Hi. t'. Inl. Van Heukck Synops, p. 98, pi. II, f. 16.
Very rare: Stamsund r.
Distribution : Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic regions. The
Mediterranean. Caspian Sea. America. Indian Ocean.
iV. frandulenta A. Schm.
A. Schm. Atlas pi. 70, f. 60; Xonl^. Diat. pi. Ill, f. 18„ (witliout name).
Rare : Stamsund r -f . Many specimens.
DistyUxition : North Sea. Sebastopol.
c. Lineolatæ ci. I. c. 11. p. 10.
Radiate or parallel striæ, transversely lineate.
A", mdiom Kutz.
KuTZ. Bacill. p. 91. pi. IV, f. 23. Van Helrck Synops, p. 83, pi. 7, f. 20.
Incl. Plnmdaria acuta \V. Sm. Brit. Diat. I, p. 56, pi. XVIII, f. 173.
Rare: Stene, r.
Distribution: Frequent fresli water species, especially in Nor-
thern and "Western Eui'ope. .\sia. Africa, America.
iV. per e grina Kiirh.
Ehrb. Ami. p. 1:33. pi. l.;, fi^s. 5—6. A. Scum. Atlas pl. 47, figs. 57—60.
Veiy rare: Gaukværo, r.
Distribution: Brackish water. Coa.sts of the North Sea. Bal-
tic. Adinatic Sea. Arctic regions. America. Pacific Ocean. In-
dian Ocean.
var. kcfwinHi'iisis (Kiium.) ('l.
L. 1. c. p. 18. Viniiitlarid k. Kiirb. Itfil Ak. 1840, ii. 20. Sarkula k.
A. Scum. Atlas pl. 47, fij;s. (il- 62.
Very rare: Svolvæi'. 141 |). loni:'.
Distribution: lirackisli water: Scotland.
A''. digito-riKliata (liitEii) A. Scum
A. Schm. Nonls. Diat. p. 92, pl. Ill, l'. 4. I'imiidaria d. GiiKrj. Jli.r. ,},,urn.
IV. pl. 1, f. 32.
Frequent: Stamsund -f, Svolv;er r, the Ostncsfiord r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coa.sts of the North Sea. Arctic regions. Ca.s-
pian Sea. New "S' ork.
N. directa W. Sm.
W. Sm. Biit. Diat. 1, p. 56, pl. 18, f. 172. A. Schm. Atlas pl. 47, figs. 4—5
(rar. ijenu'ma Cl. 1. c. p. 27).
Rare: Stamsund r +, the Gstuesfiord r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic regions. Yokohama.
var. reuiota finiN.
I Grun. in C'L. et Grcn. Avet. Diat. i,. 39. A. ScHM. Noids. Diat. p!. Ill, f. 2.
Somewhat rare: Stamsund -f, the Ostnesfiord r, Gaukværo r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic i-egions. The
Mediterranean. Red Sea. Central America.
var. siibtilis (Greu.) Cl.
Cl. Vega p. 467. Pinindaria s. Grei;. Diat. of Clyde, p. 488, pl. IX, f. 19.
Rare : Stene r, Gaukværo i'.
Distribution: Scotland. Ai'ctic reo-jons.
N. fintuarchica (Cl. et CiRUN.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 28. Stawnneh f. Cl. et Grun. Arct. Diat. p. 47, pl. Ill, f. 63.
Very rare: Stone, rr. Vei'y similai' to the figure quoted,
though -wanting the fainter or blank lateral areas. Also very
similar to A", tnnisiiuns forma miiiutu Cl. Vega pl. 36, f. 37.
N. frigida Grcn.
Grun. in Cl. et (tRIX. Aict. Diat. p. 39. Grin. Diat. Franz Jos. Land. p. 103,
pl. I, f. 25. Xaviada kaiinna r. frigida Cl. 1. c. p. 28.
Probably derived from the plankton.
Rare: Stamsund, r^-.
Distribution: Arctic regions. Cf. above p. 10.5.
N. cancellata Donk.
DONK. Brit. Diat. p. -55. pl. 8. fi<;s. 4 a. b. A. Schm. Xords. Diat. pl. II,
rigs. :36--37.
Very variable, probably also including A. zostrrcti and N. north-
umbrica.
Very frequent: Moskenstrommen -f. Stamsund -|-, Svolvær -f,
the Ostnesfiord +, Raftsund r, Stene + c, Gaukværo cc.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Baltic. Arctic re-
gions. The Mediterranean. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. Ker-
guelen.
E. Jørgensen.
var. Gregorii (Ealfs.) Geux.
Gruk. in Cl. and Gkun. Aret. Diat. p. 37. Naviada Gregorii Ealfs in Pritch_
Inf. p. 901. A. SCHM. Nord.s. Diat. pl. II, f. 22.
Very rare: Stamsund r, Gaukværo r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North .Sea. Baltic,
ons. Pacitic Ocean. Kerguelen.
Arctic reai-
N. nortlmiuhriea Donk.
DONK. Micr. Jouni. I, p. U, pi. I, f. 5, A. Scum. Atlas pi. 47, figs. 19—20.
Very rare: Stamsund r, Stene r r.
DistrUiittioii : North Sea.
N. zostereti Gron. (v)
Gkun. in Wien. Verb. ISOO p. h28, pi. IV, f. 23. A. Schm. Atlas pi. -17, f. 43.
Rare: Stamsund r. Stene r, Gaukværo r.
Distribution: Tlie Mediterranean. Indian Ocean. Pacific
Ocean. Brazil.
N. fortis (Greg.) Donk.
Donk. Bi-it. Diat. p. 57, pi. 8, f. 8. Pinmdaria f. Greg. Micr. Journ. IV,
p. 47. p). V, f. 19. A. Schm. Atlas pi. 46, figs. 37—39.
Perhaps only a coarse variety of V". canceJhita.
Very rare: Stene, r.
Distribution: North Sea. Arctic regions (Spitsbergen, Finmark,
Greenland).
A^. rostellata (Greg.) A. Schm.
A. Schm. Noi-ds. Diat., expl. ad pi. II (..N. rosfellaria Greg.;") Pinmdaria r.
Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 488, pi. IX, f. 20.
Very rare : Stene, r. Probably the same species as the follow-
ing one. There does, however, really exist a form answering to
Geegoey's figure, without a central transverse area.
Distribution : Coasts of the North Sea.
A. Schm. Atlas pi. 4(j,
N. crucitera Grun.
50—53: Nprds. Diat. pi. II, f. 31 /..rosfellaria G:
Must be reckoned as a variety to the preceding species (or vice
versa).
Very rare: Stamsund r; Gaukv;pro r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Baltic. The Medi-
terranean. Sumatra.
N. distans (W. Sm.) Cl
Pimndaria d. W. Sm. Hi-it. Diat
Very rare: Raftsund r, Stene i'.
Distribution: North Sea. Arctic regions.
A. Schm. Ni
N. compressicauda A. Scum.
Is. Diat. p. 91, pi. II, i. ;i5; Atlas
The peculiar aspect of the ends of the valve is due to the
convexity. The valve is boatshapcd with sharp stems, at the bot-
tom of which the terminal nodules are situated. I'hus they are
rather distant from the very ends.
Rare: Stam.sund r -(-.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Morocco. The Me-
diterranean.
N. siiperimposita A. Schm.
A. Schm. Nords. Diat. p. 90, pi. II, f. 34: Atlas pi. 46. t'. 61.
In many respects answering to the preceding species, though
undoubtedly distinct.
Very rare: Stamsund, r. Several specimens observed.
Distribution: West coast of Norway. Baltic. Morocco. China.
N. opima Gruk.
N. fortis var.? opima Qnws. Novara p. KO, pi. I A, f. 13. N. ojntiia A. Schm.
Atlas pi. 46, figs. 24—26.
Very rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: West coast of Norway. Baltic. Arctic regions.
Barcelona.
d. Lævistriatæ Cl. 1. c. p. 66.
Radiate striæ, not distinctly punctate nor lineolate. Valve
more or less lanceolate.
N. palpebralis Bréb.
Bkéb. in W. Sm. Brit. Diat. I, p. .50, \A. 31, f. 273. Van Heurck Synops.
p. 96, pl. 11, f. 9.
Rare: Stamsund r +, Moskenstrømmen r, Gaukværø r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediteranean
East coast of North America. Davis' Strait. Galapagos Islands. |
VH. Synopi
var. Barclayana (Greg.) VH.
11, f. 12. Xaricula B. Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 480.
id. IX, f. 9.
Rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
var. semiplena (Greg.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 70. Pinmdaria s. Greg. Jlicr. Journ. VII,
84, pi. VI, f. 12.
Rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: Scotland. Finmark. Spitsbergen.
var. angulosa (Greg.) VH.
Van HerrcK Synops, pl. 11. t'. lU. Xaricula a. Greg. Micr. Journ. IV, p. 42,
pi. V, i'. 8. A. Schmidt Noids. Diat. pi. II, f. 19.
Rather frequent: Stamsund +. Stene r, Gaukværo r^--
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
The Mediterranean.
var. minor liRi n.
Grun. in Cl. et Grun. Arct. Diat. p. 30, pi. I, f. 2:
Diat. of Clyde p. 477, pi. IX, f.
Rare: Stamsund r, (Jaukva^ro r.
Distribution: J'^inmark. Belo'ium.
N. præsecta A. Schm.
A. SciiM. Nords. Diat. pi. II, f. 20,
Recalls the mr. souijilruu of the preceding species (cf. Cl.
1. c. p. 70), but has a much finer structure. Striæ 15 on 10 \i..
An obscure line is to be seen between the central area and the
margin. Perhaps a species of Caloneis.
Very rare : ytanisuiul r. ").! n loiii;.
/>istiil>iitio)i: West coast of N'oiway. lioliuslaii (Sweden).
KHiiii. IH40, Miki-ofreolo
N. prætexta Ebrh.
1. lil, f. 28 < Piiniidaria p.). Van IIkihck Svn.
92. pi. IX, f. 18.
l)(slnl,ii!ii,ir. ('ousts of Ww. North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Red Sea. Indian (_)eean. I'aeilic Ocean. Ea.st coast of America.
A", lyni 1:miih.
I'il. pi. I. I, l', '.t. Van IIeihck Syiioix.
S. h/rii vm: Ehrenlcrii'u Cl. 1. c. p. «:J.
10, f. 1.
Not nnrre(iiient: Moskenstronnnen +• Stanisnnd r. Svolv;ei' r.
Raftsund r, Stene i'.
Distriliiition: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Ived Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacitie Ocean. Kerguelcn. Cape Horn.
America.
iV. Hennedyi W. Sm.
\V. SM. Hiit. Iiiat. II. II. <«. A. SCHM. Nuids. Dial. pi. 1. l'. H.
Very variable.
Frequent: Stamsunde, tlie Ostnesliord r, Brettesnes— Slcroveu r,
Raftsund +, Stene r+.
Dixfribiitioit: Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic regions. The
Mediterranean. Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacitie Ocean. Atlantic
Ocean.
var. cireumsecta Gkun.
Grcn. in A. ScHM. Xonls. Diat. p. 89, jil. I, figs. 3t>, 42 (A\ puli/stkfa rar. cl.
Frequent: Stamsund + c, Raftsund r, Stene -\-.
Dii-tnbxtion : Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark. Tiie INIedi-
terranean. Red Sea. Indian Ocean. America.
Besides, a fine variety from Stamsund, i', with short marginal
striæ between the main ones.
A'', spectabilis Greg.
Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 481, p!. IX, f. 10. A. Schm. Atlas, pi. .3, figs. 20—21.
Though usually easily recognizable, this species is scarcely
distinct from all forms of the very variable iV. h/ra (cfr. Cl.
1. c. p. 60).
Not unfrequent: Moskenstrommen r -|-, Stamsund r ^-. Svolva^r r.
Raftsund r, Stene r +•
An analogous variety to that of X. Henneihjl. with more
numerous marginal striæ, occurs (Stene, r).
Thshihdion: Coasts of the North Sea. Greenland. The
Mediterranean. Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. Cape
Horn.
JV. abriipta (Grko.) Donk.
DONK. lirit. Diat. p. 1.3, pi. II. I', fi. A. Scum. Novels. Diat. pi. 1, f. :i7. X Jijra
rar. a. Grkg. Diat. of Clyde p. 486, pi. IX. figs. 14. U h.
Frequent: Moskenstrommen r, Stamsund r, Svolvær -f- c. the
Ostnesliord c, Raftsund r, Stene +, Gaukværø +c.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark. Spitsbergen.
The Mediterranean. Black Sea. Red Sea. Indian Ocean. China.
Somewhat rare: Moskenstrommen r, Stamsund r +, Svolvær +,
the Ostnesliord r, Stene r.
DislrihHtiaii: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacilic Ocean. America.
mr. clliptica A. Scini.
A. Schm. Nords. Iliat. pl. I. r. H'.K Van Heuhik Synops, pl. 10, f. 2.
Very frequent: Stamsund -| , Svolvær -f, Raftsund -|-, I5ret-
tesnes— Skroven r, Stene c, Gaukværø -\-.
Distribution : Coasts of the North Sea. The :Mediterranean.
Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Philippines.
var atlantica A. Scum.
A. Schm. Nords. Diat. \i\. 1, t'. .'M.
Very characteristic. Recalls sometimes X ahniiita. but always
easy to distinguish from that species.
Rare: Stamsund r +, Moskenstrommen r.
Distnhulion : Coasts of the North Sea.
N. forcipata Grev.
Grev. in Jlicr. Journ. VII, p. m. pi. VI, figs. 10—11. A. Schm. Nords. Diat.
pi. I, f. 4.-1: 1,1. II, figs. l(i, 18.
Frequent: Stamsund c, Raftsund r. Stene r, Gaukværo + c.
Distribution : Coasts of the North Sea. frequent. Greenland.
The Mediterranean. Black Sea. Red Sea. Cape of Good Hope.
Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. Florida.
var. versicolor (Grcn.) Grin.
Grcn. in V. H. Synops, jil. X, f. (i. Xiiricnhi r. Guvs, in A. Schm. Nords.
Diat. pi. ir, f. 17.
A very well marked variety.
Rare: Stamsund. +•
Dixfriliutiun: North Sea. The Mediterranean. Sumatra.
Z. Sp. Alg.
A^. pygmæa Kc
. Van Heurck S'
p. 94. pi. 10.
IV,
A'', clavata Greg.
4H, jd. V. f. 17. A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pi.
Characteristic form, though hardly specifically different from
.certain varieties of N. Ji/ra.
Not unfrequent: Moskenstrommen r, Stamsund r, Svolvær r,
the Ostnesfioi'd r. Raftsund r +, Stene r.
It is hardly possible to keep this species distinct from certain
varieties of the preceding species (cfr. Cl. 1. c. p. (w;).
Very rare: Stamsund r, Stene r.
Distribution: Brackish water: Coasts of the North Sea. ]>altic.
Arctic regions. America.
Piiiiiiilaria Khkb.
a. Capitatæ Cl. Synops. Navio. Diat. II, p. 75,
P. microstauron Ehbb.
A. Schm. Atlas pi. 44, f. 16.
Very rare: Raftsund, r.
Distribution: Fresh water species. Arctic regions. Northern
Europe. North America.
2 14
F. nohiUs Ehrb.
Ehrb. Berl. Ak. 1840. p. 214. A. Schm. Atlas pl. 43, f. 1.
Rare: Stene r; the Østnesfiord r.
Dktribution: Fresh water species, especially frequent in
Northern and Western Europe.
b. Divergentes Cl. 1. c. p. 77.
F. l('i/ume)i Ehrb.
Ehrb. Mikrogeol. pl. II, a, f. 12. Xavimla I. A. Schm. Atlas pl. 44, figs. 44—47-
Very rare: The Østnesfiord, r.
DistriJnttion: Fresh water .species, frequent especially in
Northern and Western Europe. Africa. Asia. Australia. America.
F. diveryens W. Sm.
W. Sm. Blir. Diat. I, p. .^7, pi. 18, f. 177. Navicula d. A. Scum. Atlas pi. 44, f. 9.
Very rare: The Østnesfiord, r.
Distribution: Fresh water species, frequent especially in
Northern and Western Europe. Asia. Australia. America.
c. Distantes Ci.. 1. c p. 80.
P. lata (Bréb.) W. Sm.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. I, pi. 18, f. lt)7. FrustuUa lata Bréb. Cons. p. 18.
Frequent: Svolvær r, Raftsund r, the Østnesfiord r, Stene + c.
Distribution: Fresh water species. Arctic regions. Western
Europe. Switzerland. Australia.
F. borealis Ehrb.
Ekre. Am. pl. I, 2. C. ti Xaricnla b. A. Schm. Atlas iil. 45, figs. 1.5—21.
Very rare: Stamsund, r r.
Distribution: Frequent fresh water species, especially in arctic
and alpine regions: Northern and Western Europe; Switzerland.
Asia. Africa, America and Australia.
d. Marinæ Cl. 1. c. p. 94.
P. quadratarea (A. Schm.) Cl.
A. Schm. Nords. Diat. p. 90, pi. II, f. 26. Xavicida phumlaria Cl. Svensk. N.
Dint. |,. 224, pi. IV, figs. 1—2 (earlier name).
Frequent : Stamsund -f-, Svolvær r, the Østnesfiord r, Stene
r +, Gaukværø -f- c.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic regions, frequent-
The Mediterranean. Australia.
P. claviculus «iRKG.) Cl.
Cl. I, c. ]!. 9(i. Xarinila e. Grrg. Diat. of Clyde, p. 478, pi. IX, f. 5. A. Schm.
Kords. Diat. pi. II, f. 28.
Rare: Stamsund r -f, Gaukva^rø r.
Distribution: (\)a.sts of the North Sea. Sweden. Balearic
Islands.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Florida. Japan.
]>ipIoiieir4 El
Cl. Synops. Navic. Diat. I, p.
Do.NK. Micr. Journ. (n
P. cruciformis Donk.
I, 11. 10, id. I, f. 7. A. Scum. Nords. Diat.
I, f. 2.")
Rare: Stamsuii<l r, Svolvær r, (Jaukvieru r.
Distrihulion: Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark. Baltic.
West Indies. Cape Horn. Seychelles.
P. TrcTfJynna (Donk.) Rahenu.
Rabbnh. F1. Eur. Algar I, |i. 210. y,jri<ulii 'J'. Donk. Mier. -lonrn. 1, 1861,
l'- ^' pl- ': ''■ -■
Rare: Stamsund r, Svolvær r, Stene r.
The material examined was especially rich in forms of this
beautiful genus. For the sake of greater clearness, they are arranged
in the two groups Didymæ and EUiptieæ, although these groups
by some intermediate forms pass into each other.
a. Ellipticae V. H. Synop-.
D. hyalina (Done.) Cl.
Cl. 1. e. p. 80. Xavictda h. Doxk. Micr. Journ. I, p. 10, pi. I. f. ti. A. Schm.
Atlas pi. 70, figs. 1 — ,0.
Very rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark.
D. coffeæforinis (A. Schm.) Cl
Cl. I. c. p. 81. Nariada c. A. Schm. Nords. Diat. p. 88, pi. I, f. 22: pi. II, f. 1.3.
Perhaps a variety of the following species.
Rare: Stamsund, r -|-.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Naples. Macassar
Straits.
D, siiborbicularis (Gkei;.) Cl.
Cl. 1. e. p. 81. yavkida Smithii var. s. Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 487, pi. IX, f. 17.
Somewhat rare: Stamsund +, Svolvær r.
F)istril)ution : Coasts of the North Sea. Davis' Strait. The
Mediterranean. Caspian Sea. Indian Ocean. America.
D. eudoxia (X. Schm.)
Navkula e. A. Scum. Atlas pi. VIII, f. 40, (il. 70. f. 71. .V. uiedifen-aiira
A. Schm. Nords. Diat., id. II, f. 10, non Klttz. D. rontiijua rar. etidoæia ('i..
1. c. p. 83.
TIlis beautiful species is so easily recognizable and seems
to be so well distinguished from the following that I prefer to keep
them separate instead of referring both to D. roiitiijuu. as Cl.
(1. c. p. 82) does.
Rare: Stamsund r^ , Raftsund r.
Distribution: West coast of Norway. Tlie Mediterranean.
Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Galapa.u'os Islands.
D. sejuncta (A. Schm).
Xaricida .s. A. Schm. Nords. Diat. p. 87, pi. I, f. 18. X. eugenia A. Schm
Atlas pi. 8, figs. 44—4.5. Diploids contiyua (A. Schm.) rar eugenia Cl. 1. c. p. 83.
TIlis species is certainly a Dijiloiu-is. not a ('iiloueis as Cl.
1. c. supposes. A. Schm. (Noi'ds.) compares it with D. nitcscens and
mentions it (N. eugenia) another time (Atlas 1. c) as a connecting
link between D. nitescens and D. eudoxia.
Horns of the central nodule not plainly separated. Now and
then, till' division line is, however, seen. Costæ apparently lineate;
the very faint longitudinal lines form a, single row of alveoli bet-
ween the costæ. Sometimes tlie valves arc a little constricted in
the middle.
I (-an find no essential dift'erence between this form and .V.
rugciiiu. The cost;e in the latter are stated to be 8 — 9 on K) n,
in the IVtrmer 12. The structure of D. sejuncta is, however, some-
what variable, and answers perhaps best to 10 costæ on 10 |i
Tliere is also a remarkable airreeineiit in tiirir orciinriicc. as l)i)tli
are iiientioncil from Campeaehy l!a\.
Very rare: Stamsund r-|-, here in rather larye iuimbor.s.
DhtrihKtion (of X scjtnicta A. .Siii.m.): West eoast of Nor-
way (Hvidingsø). Campeaehy 15ay.
Dhtribiition of X. engeuiu A. Scum.: Ceylon. Macassar
Straits. Campeaehy P.ay.
D. notnbilis ((iKi:v.) Ci..
c. u. 113. yaviada votabilis Grev. Jlicr. .Joiini. XI
rar, expleta A. Shim.
\. SciiM. Nonls. Diat. pi. I, I. -JO. pi. II, (. 11.
Kare: Stamsuml r, Raftsund r, Stenc r. (iauUv;ero r.
Distribitfion: Coasts of tlic Nortii Sea. The Mediterranean.
Black Sea. Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. West Indies.
Brazil.
D. ftisca (GKF.ci.) Ci
93. yiicicula fusca A. Schm. Atlas p
tigs. 2—3 (far. norvegica
This species is exceedingly variable and includes probably D.
hyperborea and D. miiva. Even the limit towards D. Smithii seems
not to be reliable.
Frequent: Moskcnstrommen r, Stamsund +, Svolv;er +. the
Østnestiord r. Raftsund r, Stene r, Gaukva-ro -(-.
rar. Gregorii Ci,. 1. c. p. 94.
Nnv'irula SmMii var f. Greg. Diat. of Clyde IX, f. 15.
Ijarge, beautiful foi'oi. Dillers from the main species in the
same way as B. major Cl. from D. Sinithii. Central nodule elong-
ated; terminal nodules distant from the ends.
Very rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribittion: Coasts of the North Sea. Naples.
D. byperborea (Gbun.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 9,i. Xadcula hyperborea Grun. Wien Verb. 18H0 p. .531. pl. III, f. 16.
Furrows swelling round the central nodule.
Rare: Stene i', the Ostnesfiord r, Stamsund r.
Distribution: Bohuslan (Sweden).
y.avicula /h
rar. excisa A. Schm
excisa A. Schm. Nurds
Beautiful and characteristic form. Large, conspicuous pearls as
in D. fusca var. Gregorii.
Rare: Stamsund, r^--
Distribution: West eoast of Norway.
D. Smithii (Breb.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 9«. Xaricuhi SiHitliii Breb. in W. Sm. Brit. Diat. II. p. 9ii.
A. Scum. Atlas jil. 7, tigs. Iti— 17.
Exceedingly variable, probably also including I), major and
D. borealis.
Very frequent: Moskenstrommen r, Stamsund e, the Ostnes-
fiord r, Raftsund r, Stene c, Gaukværo c.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. 15altic. Arctic regi-
ons. The Mediterranean. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. Central
America.
J), major Ol.
I 'I.. 1. (■ p. iM>. .\'(irii;iiln Sntillni \. Schm. Atlas, pi. VII, f. U».
lleautiful form, but hardly anything other than a coarse variety
of J). Sniilhii. It seems quite impossible to keep it distinct from
large forms of the latter .species, witii coarser structure.
The central nodule is usually broadened, broader than the di-
stance between the horns, while it, in D. Smithii, is of equal
breadth. The terminal nodules are generally distant from the ends,
while they in D. Smithii lie close to them. Hotli these character-
istics are, however, unreliable. Thus forms occur, which, on account
of the structure ami tiie terminal nodules, should be refen-ed to
D. major, but on account of the form of the central nodule to /I
Smithii, and vice versa.
Not unfrequent : Moskenstrommen +, Stamsund r H. Stene i-.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean.
D. borealis (Gru.n.) Cl.
Cl. 1. C-. p. 91). Xariaila Siiiithii var. hnrealis Gm n. Diat. Franz .Jus. Land
11. ofi, pi. I. f. 40.
Furrows swelling round the central nodule.
Frequent: Stamsund cc. Stene r. the Ostnesfiord r. (laiik-
væro r.
My specimens differ somewhat from Gkuxow's figure, especially
in the central nodule, which is not elongated. The double rows
of pearls between the costæ are very delicate, but are now and
then distinctly seen. Agree very well with the descrijition in Grc-
NOW 1. c.
Distribution: Sweden (P>ohuslan). Arctic reLrions. .lava.
D. litoralis (Doxk.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 94. Xavirida I. Donk. Brit. Diat. p. 5, pi. I, f. 2. A. StHM.
Nords. Diat. pi. I. tigs. 24—25 (..rar. .<:„lillli.-<" ).
Very rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. .Arctic regions. The
Mediterranean. Indian and Pacific Oceans.
D. nitescens (Greo.) Cl.
Cl. 1. !■. p. 97. Xaviruln Siiiifliii var. nitescois Gheg. Diat. of Clyde p. 487.
pi. IX. f. Ui.
Somewhat rare: Stamsund -f, Stene r, Gaukv;cro r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Black Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. Central America.
b. Didymæ VH. Synops.
D. constricta (Grun.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. 1). 83. Xavicula c. Grun. in Wien Verb. 18»i0, )i. 535, pi. Ill, f. IS.
iV. Donkinii A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pi. I. f. 12, jil. II, f. 8.
Coarser structure than in the following species, horns of the
central nodule more divergent, and obtuse angles in the lateral
contour. At a certain focus, a few very indistinct oblique lon.gi-
tudinal costæ are sometimes to be seen.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund + c, the Ostnesfiord r, Stene r.
Distriliation : Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark. Balearic
Islands. Cevlon. Florida.
D. JneurTata (fiREG.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 84. Xaiirula i. Greg. Micr. Journ. IV. p. 44, pi. V, f. 13.
A. SCHM. Nords. Diat. pi. I, figs. 10—11; pi. 11, f. 6.
Frequent: Stamsund + c, Stene r +.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark. America.
D. intfrriipta (Kutz.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 84. Xanada i. Kitz. Bacill. p. 100, pi. 29. f. 93. A. Schm.
Nords. Diat. pi. I, f. 8.
Somewhat rare: Stamsund r, the Ostnesliord r, Raftsund r,
Stene r.
Distribution: Brackish water. Coasts of the North Sea.
F)altic. Arctic regions. The Mediterranean. Red Sea. Inchan
Ocean. Pacific Ocean. East coast of America.
D. lineata (Do.nk.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 8.5. Xancula I. Donk. Micr. Journ. VI, p. 32, pi. Ill, f. 17.
A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pi. I, figs. 16—17.
Rare: Stamsund r, Stene r. Both forms ilhistrated by A.
Schm. 1. c, occur.
Distrihution : Coasts of the Nortli Sea. The MediteiTanean.
D. suhcincta (A. S(HM.) Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 8(i. Xavkula s. A. Scum. Nords. Diat. pi. II, f. 7.
Very variable. Structure coarse, coarser than in tiie preceding
species.
Freiiueut: Svolvær r +; the Ostnesflord r -j-, Raftsund r,
Stene + c.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic reg-ions. The
^lediterranean. Indian Ocean.
var. media (Geux.)
Xaviaila honiboides var. media Grun. Arct. Diat. p. 41, pi. Ill, f. .54; Diat. Franz
Jos. Land pi. I, f. 39 (X. suhcincta). Diiiloneisi cntomon Cl. Synops. Navic.
Diat. I, p. 87.
Two, or a few, broad, ii-regular lono-itudinal costte, anastomosing-
through oblique ones.
This form is very remarkable. By Cleve it has been referred
to D. entumon (cf. under tliat species), by Geunow as a variety
to D. homhoidcs. Grun. has, however, noted the close relationship
to D. siibeincta. As this species is very variable as regards the
development of longitudinal costæ, and often shows similar peculi-
arities as the present variety, I have thought it best to consider
tile latter a variety of D. subrincta, though it is, on the whole,
so characteristic tiuit it might very well be regarded as a separate
species.
r also tiiink 1 have seen forms distinctly transitional to A".
subciiictK. Such forms are, however, rare.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund r -(-, the Ostnestiord r -(-, Raft-
sund r, Stene r.
Distrihiitio)i: Arctic regions.
I), cntomon.
Regarding the interpretation of tliis name Cl. 1. c. is not (juite
clear. His species seems to be = A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pi. I,
f. 14, a figure, on whicii the longitudinal costæ are very indistinct.
Cl. quotes, however, also A. Schm. 1. c. f. 13, a figure which
undoubtedly represents another species. A. Schm. himself remarks
that these two figures cannot be referred to the same species, but
that Geunow considers them to be D. entomon Eheb.
Cleve 's species is partly identical with D. bomboidcs var.
media Grun. (in Cl. et Geun. Arct. Diat. p. 41, pi. Ill, f. 541,
a form, which, according to Grunow, is an intermediate one be-
tween D. bomboides and subcincta. This var. media I have referred
to D. subcincta (ef. above). It is hardly essentially different from
that form from Franz Jos. 's Land, which Geun. illustrates (Diat. F. J.
L. pi. I, f. 39) as Navicula subcincta. In this figure the irregular
ramification of the longitudinal costæ is seen, producing two anosto-
mosing ones.
The figures from A. Schm. Atlas (pi. 1:5, figs. 48—49) refer-
red to by Cl. 1. c. represent a species, whicli I have not seen,
and which hardly occurs with us.
D. entomon of Van Heueck Traité p. 195, pi. 26, f. 732 is
a different species, identical with A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pi. 1, f. I'>.
This figure seems, however, to represent a form of D. constricfn.
The furrows, especially, answer very well to the latter species.
Van Heurck who is on the whole conservative on the question of
species, also mentions the near relationship between D. entomon
and D. incurvata, a species which ag^ain is very nearly connected
with D. constricta.
When Cleve 1. c. remarks that D. cntomon by intermediate
forms passes into D. spkndida, this also shows clearly tiiat his
species is different from that of A. Schmidt (f. 13) and Van
Heueck.
The furrows of D. entomon Cl. answer very well to tliose of
D. bomboides, less so to those of D. splendida.
I have, however, never seen specimens where it was doubtful,
whether they should be referi-ed to D. entomon Cl. (= bomboides
var. media Geun.) or D. bomboides.
D. entomon Eheb. Mikrogeologie pi. 33. XVII, f. 13 has tiie
shape of D. constricta, hnt very narrow furrows. D. cntomon Ehrb.
1. c. may be Van Heueck's species (A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pi. T,
f. 13); the specimen seems to lie somewhat obliquely, which may
have caused the median constriction of the furrows.
D. splendida (Greg.) Cl.
p. 87. Xavicula s. Greg. Micr. Journ. IV, p. 44.
14. A. SCH.A
This beautiful species is very similar to D. bomboides, but tlie
furrows do not swell in the middle and narrow evenly ellipticaliy off
towards the ends. The costæ. besides, distinctly cross the furrows at
the sides of the central nodule (i. e., in the furrows are here distinct
transverse costæ), while these furrows else are almost smooth. The
median structure of the valve generally is a little coarser, tlie
areoles liere somewhat larger.
1 have seen no distinct transition between J). splonJida and
the other species.
Somewhat rare: -The Ostnesfiord r-j-, Raftsund r, Stene r +.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. .\rctic regions (Fin-
mark, Baren Eiland, Spitsbergen, Greenland). Indian Ocean. Pacific
Ocean. West Indies. Florida.
n. homhoides (A. 8<
, Xariculn h. A. Scum.
:IIM.) Cl.
Nords. Di,
Similar to the preceding species, but the furrows swell slightly
round the central nodule, and the structure here is like that of the
otliiT parts of the v;il\i'. 'I'lic iiirnius air aNd more protracted
towards tlie oiuls, and not consiuciimisly (tos.mmI 1i\ transverse costæ
at the sides of the central nodiilr.
Always easy to distiiiLiuisli iVuni tlic incccdini.'- species.
FrtHincnt: Staiiisund i c, Hrctti'snos Skroven r4-. I^ai't-
sund r {-, Sti'iic r -\-.
Distrihiitiuii: Coasts of the Nortli Sea. Alexandria. Indian
Ocean. Pacitic Ocean. Central .America.
I), didyma (Ehrb.) Euhb.
EiiRH. Mikiosji-oliijr. |il. 19. f. 32. Piiinularia <l. Ehkii. Kiviileili. \\. I'l. AVirJc-
uht iJhhjiiia \. SiHM. Noi-its. Di.nt. ij1. I, t'. 7.
Not nnfrequent: .MosUenstrommen r. Svolva'r r+, the Ost-
nestiord r, Kaftsnnd r, iStcne r.
Distribution: Especially in lirackisli water. Coasts of tiie
North Sea. .\rctic regions, lialtic. lilack Sea. Caspian iSea.
Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. Cape Horn. West Indies.
D. hotubus Ehrb.
Ehrb. Mikn>i;eol. jil. U». f. 31. Xavicnla b. Creg. Dial. ..f Clyac, |i. 484,
pi. IX, f. l->. X. (/CDnm A. Schm. Norfls. ])i;it. pi. I. f. 1; pi. II, f. I.
Frequent: Moskenstrommcn r -(-, Stamsnnd c, Svolvær +,
the Ostnestiord r, Raftsund r, Stene +, (iaukværo r -{-.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
Finmark. The Mediterranean. Black Sea. Caspian Sea. Indian
Ocean. Pacitic Ocean, .\merica.
D. chersonensis (Grin.) Ci..
C'L. 1. <•. 1). 91. Xarkula c. (iRUN. in A. Schm. Atla.s ijl. 12, f. 40: pi. H9, f. 21.
Xaricuh apis (DosK.) A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pi. I. f. 9.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund +, Svolvær r, Gaukværo r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Indian C)cean. Pacitic Ocean. West Indies. Florida.
D. crabro Ehrb.
Jlikrofreol. pi. 19, fi^'.s. 29 a, b (non c). A. Schm. Nords. Diat. pi. I. figs. 5— 6;
pi. U, l'. 4. D. crabro rar. multkostata (Grc.n.) Cl. 1. c. p. 102. Xarkula
multicostata Grdn. Wien Vttrli. 1860, p. 524, pi. Ill, f. 13.
Rather frequent: Moskenstrømmen r, Stamsund +, the 0.st-
nesliord -|-, Raftsund r, Stene r, Gaukværø r +.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
The Mediterranean. Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacitic Ocean.
We.st Indies.
Van Heirck Sv
i-ar. pandura (Bkeb.) "VH.
9, l'. 1. Xaviculi pandura Bri-
^iHM. Nords. Dmt. pi. II. f. 3.
Peculiar form with tongue-shaped segments.
Very rare: Gaukværo, r r.
Distrihution : Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
The Mediterranean. Red Sea. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean.
A merica.
Frnstalia An.
F. rhomboides (Ehrb.) De Toxi.
De To.ni Syll. p. 277. Navicula rhomboides Ehrb. Amer. pl. 3, I, f. 1.5. Van-
licurckia r. Bréb. Ann. Soc. pliyt. Belg. I, p. 204. V. H. Synops, p. 112, i)l. 17.
figs. 1—2.
VciT rare: Svolvær r, Erettesnes— Skroven r.
histiiliiilion: Fresh watei- sjjccies, rather common.
St«>iiwiM>i*> iiifoiisi>icua ((iiiKr,.) Cl.
('I.. Synops. Navir. Diat. I, p. 124. Xarkula ( i. Grko. Dial, of Clyli- p 478
111. IX, t', ii. X. fistula A. SCH.M. Nords. Dial. pi. II, f. 29.
Frequent: Moskenstrømmen r, Stamsund r, Gaukværo -f c.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Hohusliln (Sweden).
Balearic Islands. .Vrctic regions.
Tra4-li,> iifiM aspera (Ehrb.) t'l..
Cl. Synops. Navic. Dial. I, p. 191. Stauroptern a. Ehrb. Anier. pi. I, fi^'s. 1—2;
Mikrogeol. pi. .3.5 A. XXIII. f. 13. Xarimla a. Van Heurck Synops, pl. X. f. 13
(rar. yenuina Cl,).
Common: Moskenstronnnen r, Stamsund -f c, Svolvær -f-,
the Ostnesliord c, i\aftsund i' -f, Stene c, (iaiikværo -|-.
Distributioi : Cosmopolitan.
!Tliisto;;'l4»ia I'hw,
M. exigna Lewis.
Lewis Prop, Ac. Nat, Sc. Philad, 18H1 p. 65, pl. II, f. 5. Van Helrck Synops.
p. 70, pl. 4, fiss. 25—26.
Very rare: Svolvær, r.
Distribution: B.rackish and marine: Baltic. Belgium. Atlantic
coast of America. Behrino' Island.
M. Smithii Tnw,
W, Sm, Brit, Diat, II, p, 65, pl, 54, f. ,341, Van Hecrck Synops, p. 70,
pl. 4. f. 1:3.
Very rare: Svolvær, i'.
Distribution: In brackish water. Baltic. England. Saxony.
Caspian Sea. Australia.
M. apicnlata W. Sm.
W. Sm. Brit. Diat. II, p. 65. \,\. 62, f, :J87, A, ScBM, Atlas pl, 18,5, f, 43;
pl, 186, f, 23,
Very rare: Svolvær, r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
The Mediten-anean. Black Sea. China.
17. Cymhelleæ.
Cymbella Ag.
C. cistula (He-mph.) Kirchx.
Van Hedrck Synops, p. 64, pi. 2. fi^s. 12—13.
Very rare: Brettesnes— Skroven, r.
Distribution: Fresh water species, frequent in arctic, northern
or alpine localities. Also in slightly brackish water.
C', cymbiformis (Ag.?) V. H.
Van Heuhck Synops, p. 63, pi. II, figs. 11 a— c.
Very rare: Stamsund r, the Ostnestiord r.
Distribution: Frequent fresh ■water .species, especially from
Northern and Western Europe. Arctic regions Asia, Africa,
America and Australia.
28
218
Aniphoi-a Ehkb.
Amphora Cl. s. s., Synops. Navic. Diat. II, p. 100.
Valves with transverse rows of coarse puncta, forming longi-
tudinal lines, Ol' strong transverse costæ, crossed by longitudinal
ones. Connecting zone simple.
Greg. Diat. of Cl\
A. proteus Geeg.
p. 518, pi. XIII. {. HI. A. SCHM, Atlas, pi
f. 3.
Very variable.
Frequent: Stamsund -j-, Svolvær r, Raftsund r, Stene +,
Gaukværø + c.
Distribidion : Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic regions. The
Mediterranean. Black Sea. The Atlantic, Indian and Pacific
Oceans.
var. contigua Cl.
Cl. 1. <•. p. 1(13. A. SCHM. Atlas, pl. 28. f. 4.
Perhaps a separate species.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund r, Svolvær r, the Ostnesfiord r.
Digtrihution (of var. contigua Cl.): North Sea. The Adriatic.
Labuan. New Caledonia.
A. robusta (i reg.
Greg. Diat. .)f Clyde p. .il9, pl. XIII, f. 7(».
Not uafi-e{|uent : Stamsund r, the Ostnesfiord +.
DidvlhiitluH: Coasts of the North Sea. Spitsbergen. The
Mediterranean. Macassar Strait. Pacific Ocean.
A. ovalis KiJTZ.
KUTZ. Synops., figs. 5—6. Van Heurck Synops, p. 59. pl. I, f. 1.
Very rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: Fresh or slightly brackish water.
Northern and Western Europe. Arctic regions.
1). Diplainpbora Ci.. 1. c p. 107.
Frequent in
Connecting zone complex, with more or less numerous longi-
tudinal divisions and transverse striæ or costæ. Valves with trans-
verse costæ, or rows of puncta, on the dorsal side with one or two
longitudinal lines.
A. crassa Gueo.
Greg. Min-. Jom-n. V, \,. 72, pi. I, f. 35; Diatoms of Clyde j), 524, pi. XIV,
Atlas
f. 30.
Rare: Stamsund r, Svolvæ,r r. Stone r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic regions
Mediterranean. Indian Ocean. China.
Tile
Petit Diat. Cap IIl
SO/.STI^It'/J.Sl.S I'ETIT.
111. N, f. 15, II. p. A. ScHM. At
48, f.
Beautiful form.
Very rare: Stamsund, r. Ul x 18 \i-; costæ 4'/;; on 10 i).,
lineate. Strong longitudinal line. The costæ answer to the fig. 18
in A. ScHM. Atlas, the margin of the ventral side to fig. 17 (tliese
figures thus correspond to different focussing).
A. Graeffii Grus.
Gkcn. in A. ScHM. Atlas pi. 25, fig. 40.
Very rare: Stamsund, r. 63 ^< 14 ]).; striæ 17 on 10 |)-, crossed
on the dorsal side by a blank line. Ends little protracted. Axial
area a little constricted in the middle.
Not unfi'equent: Stamsund r -f, Stene +> Gaukværø r.
Distribution: Naples. Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean.
A. Grevillcava Greg.
Greg. Micr. Journ. V, p. 73, pi. I. f. 3(i. Diat. of Clyde p. 522, pi. 13, f. 89.
A. ScHM. Atlas pi. 25. f. 41. .4. fasciata (imo. 1. c. pi. 13, f. 90 (cfr. Cl. 1. c).
Rare: Stamsund r, Stene r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
Spitsbergen. The Mediterranean. Pacific Ocean. Central America.
A. sulcata Breb.
Bebb. Diat. Clieib. f. 8. Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. .523. pi. XIll, figs. 92, 92 b.
Cl. 1. c. p. 112.
Very rare: Stamsund r, the Ostnesfiord r. 1.5 striæ on 10 n.
74 iJ. long. Corresponds exactly to the figures and description
in Gregory 1. c. Also tolerably well answering to Cleve's species.
Disfrihutiun: West coast of Europe. Balearic Islands.
A. Miilleri A. Schm.
A. Schm. Atlas \,\. 26, f. 31. .4. moiiiU/era Greg.
pi. XII, f. 69.
Diat. of Clyde,
Very rare: Stamsund, r. Valve 73 x 11 |i, with 7V3 striæ
on 10 |)., obtuse. The ventral side as illustrated by A. Schm.,
rather narrow, towards the ends broader, then again narrowing.
The raphe is not so distinctly bent as in the figure. On the
broader part of the ventral side, inside the marginal striæ, tiiere
is a band of short striæ, as in A. proteus, separated from tlic
marginal striæ by a blank line. Dorsal striæ, as in the figure
mentioned, crossed by a broad blank, longitudinal line. Another
sharp line is seen close to the dorsal margin.
Distribution: West coast of Norwav (Hvidingso).
A. alata Veuag.
Peeag. Diat. de Villefr. p. 41. ],\. 11. f. 11. Van Heueck Traité d. Diat.
pi. 24. f. 677.
Very rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: West coast of Norway. Morocco. The Medi-
terranean. Macassar Straits. America.
.4. hinodis
i KEG. Diat, of (^1
X'cry rare; Stamsund, r. ;34 ;). k)iig. Completely answering
to the iilustnition in Gkkc I. c.
Distribuiiou: Scotland, iiaiearic Islands.
c. HaUiuiphoru ('i.. 1. c. \t. 117.
Connecting zone complex. Raphe close to the ventral margin.
Transverse, punctate striæ, not crossed by any longitudinal line.
Ends of the valve usually I'ostrate or capitate.
.1. luucilcntn tliii'.c.
(jREll. DiiU. of Cly.lr 1.. :">HI. I'l. XU, I. (i:>. ('l.. I. cv 1.. I'.'l.
Answers best to -4. rnimlciisix (iRv.u. 1. c. p. 'jl-i, pi. .\ll, I'. 71,
wliicli by CYevk 1. c. — probably riditly i.-< coii.Mdcicd ;i
variety of .1. mm-ihuhi. Vv\\<U\W 4S >c l!i ii.. with rather narrow
eonnec-tinsz- /.one. 11 stria' on Ui ;i.
Very rare: Stamsiuid, r.
Distrihiition: Coasts of Sweden and Scothmd. The .Mc(htor-
ranean. Maea.ssar Straits.
A. vunotiii I 'l..
\'ery rare: Stamsund, r.
Similar to an Amplwni fmviis. witii distinctly punctate trans-
verse striæ. Valve SO x' 1.5 m its ends a little capitate-rostrate.
Striæ 7V2 on 10 [>..
Didrihiitioii: Bohusliin (Swed(Mi). Arctic regions. Indian
Ocean.
A. costata W. Sm.
W. Sm. Biit. Dial. I. p. '20, pi. 30, f. 2.i3. Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 527, pi. XIV,
f. 99. .4. inflafa Guvs, in A. Schm. Atlas pi. 25, figs. 29-.30.
Rare: Stamsund, r.
Frustule 3i x 16 <>., coarse structure; 9—10 striæ on 10 ix;
many longitudinal division lines. Ends pi-otracted.
Distribidion: Coasts of the North Sea. Mediterranean. Sumatra.
East coast of America. Galapagos Islands.
A. terroris Ehrb.
A. erehi Ehrb. Micvogeol. pi. 35 A, f. 2. A. cymhifera Grec;. Diat. of Clyde
p. .52ti, pi. XIV, f. 97. A. Schm. Atlas pi. 26, f. 33: pi. 39, f. 18: pi. 25,
figs. -17- 19, 33-34, 36.
Not unfrequent : Stamsund + , the Østnesfiord r, Gaukværo r.
Distrihiition: Coasts of the North Sea. Arctic regions. The
Meditci'i'anean. Macassar Straits, (xulf of Mexico.
Svi
A, ostrearia Bhéu.
A. Hcii.MiUT Atlas pi. 2l>, f. 2:1. Van Hi
. I, f. 25 (rtir. t/fpirn ('i,. I. c. |i. 129).
Rare: Stamsund, r; daukva-i'o, r.
Dishihiitlon: Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark. Tiie .Medi-
terranean. Indian Ocean. Pacitic Ocean.
Oxyainphora Ci,.
p. 125
Complex connecting zone. Valves acute with the I'aphe close
to the ventral margin. No dorsal lonsjitiuliual lines. Usually delic-
ate structure of transverse or slightly I'adiate striæ with puncta
arranged in undulating, longitudinal lines. \'entral side usually of
still finer structure than the dorsal side. Often a stauros.
A. acuta Greg.
Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. 524, pi. 14, f. 93. A. Schji. Atlas pi. 2i), figs. 19—20.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund r, the Ostnesfioi-d r. Raftsund r,
Gaukværø r.
iJistiihiition: Coasts of tiie NortJi Sea. Arctic reu'ions. The
ilediterranean. China. Straits of Magellan.
A. groenlandica Cl.
Cl. 1. c. p. 128, pl. IV, f. 1.
No stauros.
var.
Median striæ 12 on 10 [>-, towards the ends of the valve some-
what closer. Puncta elongated, 10 on 10 |)..
Very rare: Stamsund, r.
Distrihiition of the main spedes: Davis' Strait.
A. lævis Greg.
J14, pl. XII, figs. 74 a-
A. Scii.M. Atlas, pl. 2()
Rare: Stamsund, r +.
Distrihiition: Coasts of the Nortli Sea. Fimnark. Balearic
Islands, .lava.
var. lævissiina (Greo.) ('l.
Cl. 1. r. p. i:iU. AiHijhora lævissima Greg. Diat. of Clyd»;, p. 51.-}, pl. XII. f. 72.
A. Schm. Atlas pl. 26, figs. 3, 13—14.
Rare: Stamsund r, Stene r.
Distrihiition: Coasts of the North Sea. Finmark. Sea of Kara.
e. Ainblyainpbora ('l. 1. c. p. l:iO.
Connecting zone complex. Valves obtuse with tiie rapiie
diverging dorsally. No longitudinal lines. Fine puncta, arranged
in transverse striæ. Structure not finer on the ventral part of
the valve.
A. obtnsa Gheg.
Greg. Mici-. .loui-u. V. p. 72, pi. I, f. 34. A. Scum. Atlas pi. 40, figs. 4—7,
11—13.
Very rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Black Sea. Red Sea. Indian Ocean. China. East coast of
America.
Greg. Diat. of
A. spectabilis Greg.
p. 516, pi. XIII, figs. 80 a, c. A. Schm. Atlas pi. 40,
figs. 18-2.3.
Not unfrequent: Stamsund +, Stene i-, Gaukva'ro r.
Distrihiitiun: Coa.sts of the North Sea. The Mediterranean.
Indian Ocean. Pacific Ocean. West Indies. Davis' Straits.
t. Psammamphora Cl. 1. c-. ji. 132.
Connecting zone simple. Else as Amhhjimiiliora.
A. ocfUata Donic.
DONK. Micr. .Joui-n. 1861 (ii. s.) I, p. 11, pi, I, f. 11. V.vN Hecrck Synojis. p. 56.
pi. I, f. 26 (var. ti/pica Cl. c. p. 133).
Somewhat rare: Stamsund r, Svolvan- r. the Ostnesfiord r -{-,
Gaukværo +.
Distrihiition: Coasts of the North Sea. Sweden. The Adriatic.
g. Cyiuhaniphora Cl. 1. c. p. 134.
Connecting zone simple. Valves of rather delicate structure.
No longitudinal lines. Raphe close to the ventral margin.
A. atigusta Greg, r ('l.
Cl. 1. c. p. 135. Greg.'^ Diat. of Clyde p. 510. pi. XII, f. 66 (rai: tijiiirn Cl.).
Rare: Stamsund, r. Hardly Gregory's species.
Distrihiition: Scotland. Arctic regions. East coast of North
America. West Indies.
E. Jørge
rar. ventricosa (Gbeg.) Cl.
Cl. 1. e. p. 13.1. Amphora v. Greg. Diat. of Clyde p. .511. pl. XII. f. «8.
Not unfrequent, Mosken.strømraen r. Stam.sund r, the Ø,stnes-
fiord r -{-. Stene r, Gaukværø +.
_ Answers completely to Gregory's species, but is very variable.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea. Sweden. Arctic
regions. The Mediterranean. Red Sea.
Epitheniia Bréb.
U. turgida (Eheb.) Kutz.
Kdtz. Bacill., pi. 5, f. 14. Vax Hei'Rck Svnops.. pi. 31,
1—2. Navicula
f. Ehrb. 18.30.
Fresh -iwater species
var. Westerinaani (Ehrb.) Grun.
Grun. in Wien Verb. 186:^, p. 32.5. Van Heurck Svnops. p. 138, pi. 31, f. 8.
Naviada W. Ehrb. 1833.
Very rare: Gaukværø, r; Moskenstrømmen, r.
Distribution: In brackish water. Coasts of the North Sea.
E. avfjiis (Ehkb.) Kutz.
KiJTZ. Bac-ill. pi. 29, f. 55. Vak Hehkok Synops, pl. 31, figs. 15 — 17. Eunotia
argits Ehrb., Mikrogeol. pi. XV A, f. 59.
Very rare: Brettesnes — Skroven r, Gaukværø r.
Distrihiition: Fresh water species; also in brackish water.
Frequent, especially in Northern Europe and in alpine localities.
E. zebra (Ehrb.) KtJTz.
KtJTz. Bacill. pi. 5, f. 12; pi. 30, f. 5. Van Heurck Synops, pl. 31, figs. 9,
11 — 14. Eunotia z. Ehrb. Inf. p. 191, pi. 21, f. 19.
Very rai'e: Gaukværø r, Stene r.
Distribtitioii: Common fresh water species.
E. tnusculus KiJTz.
f. <i. Van Heitrck Synu
32, tlKS. 14— Ir
rar. constricta (Bréb.) V. H.
Van Hei-hck Synops. ]). 140: Ti-aité d. Diat. p. 297. pi. 9, f. 3liO. EpWiemiac.
Bréb. in W. Sm. Brit. Diat. 1. p. 14, pi. m, f. 248.
Very rare: Svolvær r, Gaukvæio r.
Distribution: Coasts of the North Sea and Western Europe.
The Mediterranean.
KtJTZ. Bacill., pi.
Rare: Svolvær, r.
E. gibberula Kutz.
t. Van Heurck Ti-aité d. Diat., p. 297, pi. 30, f. 825.
rar. prodiicta (inuN.
Van Heurck Synops, pl. .32, figs
-13.
Rare: Stamsund, r.
Distribution: Marine, also in lirackisli and fresh water (rar.
producta Grun.I. fi'equent in h^uropc and .\iiieiica.
RhopulodJH (jibbu (Eniiii.) Otto Mull. 1895.
Epithcniia tjUiha Kutz. IJacill. p. 35. pi. 4, f. 22. Van Heurck Synops, p. 1.39i
pi. 32. figs. I- -2.
rar. ventricosa (KiiTZ.) Grun.
Grun. in Wien Veiii. 18(i2, p. 327. E2)itJiemia ventricosa Kutz. Bacill. pi. 30, f. 9.
Very rare: Gaukværø, r; the Østnesfiord, r.
Distribution: Common fi-esh water species.
G-eneral lemarks on the cliaracter of the bottom diatom flora.
The most striking facts regarding the distribution of the dia-
toms in the foregoing list of bottom species are, that the arctic
forms are rare and that the floi'a, on the whole, has a much more
pronounced southern character than would be expected from the
geographical situation. This is in sharp contradistinction to the
character of the diatom flora during ,,the diatom inflow" of plankton
species in spring (cf. above p. 88), when the actual arctic species
predominate.
Generally speaking, the bottom flora shows a remarkable
agreement with that of the east coast of Scotland. It is especially
striking that a great many of the species described by Gregory in
Diatoms of the Clyde (1854) are common to these two regions,
situated at a rather considerable distance from each other. On the
other hand, these species also occur on the west coast of Norway,
at any rate most of them. It may, consequently, be concluded that
the characteristic western bottom flora of diatoms wliich inhabit
the coasts of the North Sea extend to the north as far as to past
the Vest-Fioi'd, probably, however, but little farther.
For the sake of clearnes.s, I divide the species found into (;
gr-ou])S:
I. The actual arctic species, only found in the ai'ctic r'egion.
11. Species with a western and arctic distribution.
III. Species with a very wide disti'ibution, occurTing trom southern
i-egions right up into the arctic one. Some of these species
seem to be cosmopolitan. In I]ui'ope, the species belonging
to this gi'oup are generally found fr-om the Mediterr'anean to
the ai-ctic regions.
IV. Western species, especially known •from tire coasts of the Noi'tli
Sea, but not befor'e mentioned from the arctic zone.
V. Species with a southei-n and we.ster-n distr-ibution. generally
occurring fr-om the Mediterranean — or- still farther to the
south — to the coasts of the Norih Sea.
VI. Species with only southern distribution, not before found so
far north as on the coasts of the North Sea.
Most of the species observed belong to group III, and man\
of these species will probably later orr be found to have a still widn-
distribution than is at pi'esent known. For such more oi' 1c>n
decidedly cosmopolitan species, a thorough treatise on their varieties
and forms is a very important and valuable work, indispensable
when one wishes to obtain an accur-ate knowledge of the distr-ibution
of identical and closely related species. Notwithstanding the exten-
sive matci-ial consisting of an immense number of facts and obser-
vations, often made with the utmost care and accur-acy as to details
in structure, we are still obliged to acknowledge with r-egret that
our- krrowledge of the individual vai-iations and r-eal constancy ni'
the var-ious distinguishing characters is ver-y deficient.
These species play an nnimportant jiart with regai-d to the
char-acter of the flora. It is. hewevei-, an interesting fact that,
appar-errtly, so many sjrecics of diatoms ar-e common to most seas
of the world. Even if a good many of these widely distr-ibuted
species, on a moi-e thoi-ough examination, should prove to consist of
similar-, but separate species, having ditter-ent areas of distribution,
there will still i-emain a great number of species which, in Europe.
occur fr-om the Mediterr-anean to the Arctic Sea. It must, however-,
be i-emembered that the valves of diatoms ai-e almost of eternal
221
duration aiul tliat thus fossil valves Avill ciilarLrf the apjiai-cut area
of distribution of the still livin;^' species.
Most of the species of this i.-'rouj) 111 aic jnoliahly recent
OIK'S, a y^reat number of them beiny olisrrvcd alive on the west
coast near Heriren.
Next to srroup 111 it is i;iou|i \'. which contains the greatest
number of species. Many of tlieni have a pi'edominating- southern
distribution, but occur, uune or less freriueiitly. as far north as the
coasts of the North Nea. To this group belong tlie following (a few
of wliich might perhaps rightly be reckoned to anotiier group):
Vv.-citiudi^ciis Botliii.
Biddulphiu pHlchella (a broken
valve, Tromso, Cl.i.
B. regina (only exceptionally found
as far north as Scotland I.
B. faviis (once found in Spits-
bergen).
J5. alter Hci) IS.
B. punctata.
Syneåra undulata.
S. Hennedyana.
Raphoneis nitida.
Dimeregramma minub-.
£>. fulvitm.
Gbjidiodcsm is distans.
Grammatophora serpentin<(.
Nitzschia punctata.
N. acuminata.
N. hilohata.
2s. lancflolata (a).
Canqiylodiscus eximius.
Surirella fastuosa.
Achnanthes longipes.
Phuroneis distans.
P. hritannica.
DonVmia recta.
Pleurosigma rig id urn .
P. formosum.
P. speciosum.
P. halticum.
Scoliotropis latastriata.
Caloneis consimilis.
C. Uanda.
C. iiiusca.
Ibtauroncis .•adiiin.
Navicula moniliformis.
N. latissima.
K. compressicauda.
N. superimposita.
K. palpchralis a, var. Barclayana,
var. (iiigulosa.
iV. pnetrxfii.
N. clanita.
y. forcijxitd rar.
Fiinidhirid cluriculus.
P. Tn-rrlipiua.
Diploneis coff'eiform is.
D. lineata.
D. (contiguii var.) eudoxia.
J). notidiUts (var. explrta).
D. fusen var. (jregorii.
D. nidjar.
D. nitvsrrvs.
1). sejddrld.
D. didiidid.
D. cher.iunt'Hsis.
D. crcdiro et var. paiidura.
Mastogloia apiculatu.
Ampliora protcds var. eontigua.
A. macilenta.
A. costafa.
A. hinodis.
A. sule.dtd.
A. dldfd.
A. ohtu.^-d.
A. spectabilis.
A. ocellata.
Epifhemia mdsculus.
Many of these species were for the first time described and
illustrated in the work by Gregory above mentioned.
All these species have not previously been mentioned from
the arctic zone. To this group should properly also most of those
be i-eckoned which are previously known from the arctic zone, but
only from the coast of Nordland („ Finmarken").
Less numerous are the species of a mere western European
distribution, group IV. Such species are, however, on the whole
not numerous. Here belong the following species:
Coscinodiscus diwUinis var. (west C. Nonmmni. C. fuscieulatus A.
coast of Norwav). Sch.ai.
Actinoeyclus crassus.
Aetinoptychus s})lendens.
Bidduljili ia turgidd.
Synedra ktculds.
A'itzscliiu litorea.
N. naricularis (Spitsbergen?).
Campylodiscus par rains.
Coeconeis lyra (west coast of
Norway).
These species, the first and the last ones only excepted, are
common to Great Britain and Norway.
A closely related group is g'roup II, including species with a
predominating western area, though also occui'ring right up to the
arctic zone. These are the following:
Coscinodisc us Kiitzingii.
Flcurosigma attcnuatum (^).
Caloneis liber.
Schizonema crucigcrum (Y).
Naricula northumbrica.
N. peregrina var. hfwingensis,
N. prasccta (west coast of Norway).
Diploneis hyperborea vai". excisa
(west coast of Norwav).
Hyalodiscus .scotieus.
Biddulphia rhombus.
B. Smithii.
Nitzschia apiculata.
Campylodiscus angularis.
Ehoicosigma arcticum.
Caloneis brevis.
Narieula dirrcta et var. subtilis.
N. fortis.
N. distans.
N. palpehralis var. semijdena.
A", pygnuea.
Diploneis hyalina.
Amphora lævis.
The genuine arctic species, belonging to gToup 1, are few
Nitzschia Mitchelliana.
Gomphonema Icam isehatieum.
Amphora groenlandica.
Diploneis entomon Cl. p. p. (^
D. sdheinetd var. niedid).
Coscinodiscus borecdis.
Aeiinoeyclus cdienus'Y
Bidddlphid drcticd.
Syncdrd kam tscha ticum.
S. rostellata.
Grammatophora arctica.
All these species, except the last one, are besides very rai-e.
At last we have the remarkable group VI of only southern
forms, partly only known from regions situated far to the south or
even only from the tropical zone. Their distribution (as earlier
known) extends northwards only as far as to the Mediterranean.
To this group belong:
Nitzschia (insignis var.) t^jiafhu-
lifei-a
N. coarctata.
N. (Smithii var.) notabili.-<.
Amphora Grwffii.
(Coscinodiscus leptopus i-erxis
C. nodulifer.
Aulacodiscus Kittoni.
A. ■Johnsonianus.
Bidddlphid regina var.
B. Idtd.
There may, however, be some doubt as to whether the ibrms
observed of Biddidphia lata and Amphora Græffii ai'e identical with
those, which usually occur in southern regions. Moreover, Coscino-
discus leptopus, Nitzschia spathulifera, N. coarctata, N. notahilis and
Biddulphia regina var. are all veiy rare and scai'ce. There remain,
however, Coscinodiscus nodtdifer and the two species of Aidacodiscus,
all of ^\-hich occur in compai-atively large numbers, and in several
samples. These species are easily recognizable, and have a pro-
nounced tropical area of distribution.
Probably these species are all fossil, but T cannot at present with
certainty decide this. Coscinodiscus nodulifer has most prol)ably
occurred as a plankton species.
All the species of groups IV. V and W, a considerable number
of species in all, have not before been known fiom the arctic zone.
Index.
Pag.
Achnanthes brcvipes Ag 206
— longipes Ag 206
Actinocj'clus alienus Gkun 197
urassus VH , . 197
— Ehrenbergii Ralfs 197
— moniliformis Ralfs 197
— Ralfsii (W. Sm.) Ralfs 197
— sparsus (Greg.) Rattr 197
Actinoptychus splendens (Ehrb. ?) Shade 199
— imdulatus (Bail.) Ralfs 199
Ampliiprora hpidoptera Gheg., = Tropidoneis 1.
— maocima Greg., = Tropidoneis ni.
— obtusa Greg., = Pseudoamphiprora staurupteia.
Amphitetras antediluviana Ehrb., = Biddulphia a.
— lata De T., = Biddulphia 1.
Amphora acuta Greg 219
— alata Perag 218
— angusta Greg., Cl 220
— binodis Greg 218
— costata W. Sm 219
— crassa Greg., et var 218
— cymbifera Greg., = terroris.
— eunotia Cl 219
— fasciata Greg. = Grevilleana 220
— Græffii Grun 218
— Grevilleana Geeg 218
— groenlandica Cl. var 219
— inflata Grun., = costata.
— lævis Greg 219
— lævissima Greg. = lævis var.
— macilenta Greg 219
— monilifera Greg 218
— Mullen A. SCHM 218
— obtusa Greg 219
— ocellata DoNK 219
— ostvearia Bréb 219
— ovalis KiJTZ 218
— proteus Greg., et var 218
— robusta Greg 218
— spectabilis Geeg 219
— stauroptera Bail., = Pseudoampliiprora s.
— sulcata Bréb., Greg 218
— terroris Eheb 219
— ventrinosa Greg., = angusta var.
Asteromphalus heptactis (Bréb.) Ralfs 199
Aulacodiscus Johnsonii Arnott 199
— Kittoni Aenott 199
Auliscus sculptus (W. Sm.) Ralfs 199
Auricula complexa (Greg.) Db T 208
Bacillaria sooialis Greg 204
Bacteriastrum varians Laud 20 1
Biddulphia alternans (Bail.) VH 200
— antediluviana (Ehrb.) VH 200
— arctica (Brightw.) 200
Pau.
Biddulphia aurita (Lyngb.) Bréb 2()0
— halæna Brightw., = arctica.
— f avus (Ehrb.) VH 20U
— formosa (Brightw.) 200
— lata (Grev.) 200
— nobiUs (Witt.) 200
~ pulchella Gray 199
— punctata (Brightw.) VH. . 200
— regina W. Sm., var 199
— rhombus (Eheb.) W. Sm., var 200
— Smithii (Ralfs.) VH 200
— turgida (Ehrb.) AV. Sm 200
— Weissei (Grun.) 201
Caloneis amiDhisbæna (Bory.) Cl 210
— blanda (A. Schm.) Cl 210
— brevis (Greg.) Cl 210
— consimilis (A. Schm.) Cl 210
— liber (W. Sm.) Cl. et var 210
— musea (Greg.) Cl 210
Campylodisous angularis Geeg 206
— decorus Bréb. ... 206
— e.ximius Greg 206
— parvulus W. Sm 206
— Ralfsii W. Sm 206
— Thuretii Bréb 206
Ceratoneis arcus (Ehrb.) KiJTz 203
Chætoceros atlanticus Cl 201
— contortus Schutt 201
— diadema (Ehrb.) Gran 201
Cooconeis britannica KiJTZ., = Pleuroneis b.
— costata Greg., = Pleuroneis c.
— distans Greg 207
— lyra A, Schm 207
— nitida (Jreg., = Rhaphoneis n.
— norvegica Grun., = Heteroneis n.
— pinnata Greg., = Pleuroneis p.
— pscMdomarginata Greg., = Eucocconeis p.
— quarncrensis Grun., = Heteroneis Alliuiuminna.
— scutellum Ehrb. et var 207
Cosoinodiscus apoUinis Ehrb. var 195
— borealis Bail 196
— centralis Ehrb., Rattr 196
— ooncavus Geeg 19.5
— concinnus W. Sm 1 96
— curvatulus Geun 196
— decrescens Gkun., et var 197
— e.xcentricus Ehrb 196
— fascimlatus A. Schm., ^ Normanni.
— KUtzingii A. Schm 196
— leptopus Grun 19.")
— lineatus Ehrb., et var 19.'), litH
— marginatus A. Schm., = KUtzingii.
— nitidus Greg 19.5
— nodulifer Jan 197
t'osciiiodiscus Noinianni (iKEo I9(i
— oculiis iridis Kllitii.. — riiili;ii. \;\v.
— punctulntiis Oreo Hit»
— ladiatus KliRB., et var 197
— Kothii (Ehrh. ?) CrBUN I9(i
— KciiitUlans (Jrev., = apollinis var.
stellaiis Rop Ult)
— Ktriatiis Kii-rz., = C.vclotella s.
— snbbuUiens Jøro 19H
sublineatns GuiN.
— siilitilis Ehrb 191)
— si/inbolophonts Grun., = stellaiis var.
— si/mmetrictis A. ScHM., = Rotliii.
Coscinosira polvcliorda (Gran) Gran 196, 198
Cyclotella comta (Ehrb.) Kutz 198
— striata (KiJTZ.) Grun 198
C'ynibella cistula (Hempr.) Kirciin 217
— cymbiformis (Ag.?) VH 217
Denticida distans Greg., = Glyphodesmis d.
— fulra Grbg., ^ Bimeregramma l'.
— minus Greg., = Dimeregranima m.
— nana Greg., = Dimeregramnia miuii.< var.
— statirophora Greg., = Plagiogramma .s.
Dimeregranima fulvum (Greg.) Ealfs 202
— minus (Greg.) Ralfs 202
Diploneis bomboides (A. Schm.) Cl 216
— bombus Ehrb 217
— borealis (Grun,) Cl 215
— chersonensi.s (Grun.) Cl 217
— coffeæformis (A. Schm.) Cl 214
— constricta (Grun.) Cl 21.5
— contigua (A. Schm.) Cl., var 21-t
— , crabro Ehrb , et var 217
— didyma (Ehrb.) Ehrb 217
— entomon 216
— eudo.xia (A. Schm.) 214
— fusca (Greg.) Cl. et var 215
— hyalina (Donk.) Cl 214
— liyperborea (Grun.) Cl., et var 215
— incurvata (Greg.) Cl 216
— interrupta (Kutz.) Cl 216
— lineata (Donk.) Cl 216
— litoralis (Donk.) Cl 215
— major Cl 215
— nitesceiis (Greg.) Cl 215
— notabilis (Grev.) Cl., var '. 215
— sejuncta (A. Schm.) 214
— Smithii (Breb.) Cl 215
— splendida (Gbeg.) Cl 216
— subcincta (A. Schjl) Cl 216
— suborbicularis (Greg.) Cl 214
Doukinia carinata (Donk.) Ralfs 208
— recta (Donk.) Grun 208
Endictya oceanica Ehrb 195
Epitliemia argus Kutz 220
— gibba Kutz., = Rhopalodia g.
— gibberula KiJTZ., et var 220
— musculus, KiJTZ., var 220
— turgida (Ehrb.) Kutz., var 220
Encocconeis pseudomarginata (Gkeg.) Cl 206
Eunotia arcus Ehrb 203
— bidentula \V. Sm 203
— major (W. Sm.) Rab 203
— pectinalis (Dillw. V) Rab 203
— prærupta Ehrb 203
triodon Ehrb 203
Eupodiscus argus W. Sm 199
— crassus W. Sm., = Actinocyclus c.
— sparsiis Gkeu., = Actiuocyclus s.
Frustulia hita Bréb., = Pinnularia 1.
Pag.
Frustulia rliomboides (Ehhb.) De T 217
Gallionella sulcata Ehub., = Paralia s.
Glyphodesmis distans (Gheg.) Gbun 203
— WilHamsonii (Greo.) Grun 202
Gomphonema constrictum Ehrb 208
e.xiguuni Kutz., var 208
— kamtscliaticum Grun 208
Gramniatopliora arctica Cl 204
— islandica Ehrb 203
— macilenta W. Sm., = oceanica var.
— marina (Lynob.) Kutz 204
— oceanica Ehrb 204
— serpentina Ralfs 203
Heteroneis AUmanniuna (Gbeo.) 207
— uorvegica (Grun.) 207
— qnarnet-ensis (Grltj.) Cl., = AUmanniana.
Heterostephania Rothii Ehrb., = Coscinodiscus R.
Hyalodiscus scoticus (KiiTz.) Grun 198
— stelliger Rail 199
— subtilis Bail 199
Isthmia enervis Ehrb .' 201
— nervosa KiJTz 201
Mastogloia apiculata W. Sm 217
— exigua Lew 217
— Smithii Thw 217
Melosira Borreri Grev 198
— gi-anulata (Ehp.b.) Ralfs 198
— Eoeseana Rab 198
Meridiou circulare (Grev.) Ag 203
— marinum Geeg., = Sceptroneis lu.
Navicula abrupta (Greg.) Donk 213
— amphisbæna Boby, /= Caloneis a.
— angulosa Geeg., = N. palpebralis var.
— apis A. Schm., = Diploneis chersonensis.
— aspera V.H., = Trachyneis a.
— Barclayana Greg., = palpebralis var.
— blanda A. Schm., = Caloneis b.
— bomboides A. Schm., ^ Diploneis b.
— bombus Geeg., = Diploneis b.
— borealis A. Schm., = Diploneis b.
— breris Greg., = Caloneis b.
— cancellata Donk. et var 211
— cha-sonensis Grun., = Diploneis c.
— clavata Greg 213
— claviculus Gkeg., = Pinnularia c.
— coffeæformis A. Schm., = Diploneis.
— compressicauda A. Schm 212
— c07isimilis A. Schm., = Caloneis c.
— constricta Gbdn., = Diploneis c.
— crabro Ehrb., = Diploneis.
— crucif era Grun 212
— cntciformis Donk., ^ Pinnularia.
— cuspidata KtJTZ 210
— didijma A. Schm., = Diploneis d.
— digito-radiata (Gbeg.) A. Schm 211
— directa W. Sm., et varr 211
— distans (W. Sm.) Cl 212
— divergens A. Schm., = Pinnularia d.
— Donkinii A. Schm., = Diploneis constricta.
— elongafa Grun., = Caloneis liber var.
— entomon , = Diploneis e.
— Eudoxia A. Schm., = Diploneis E.
— Eugenia A. Schm., = Diploneis sejuncta.
— finmarchioa (Cl. et Grun.), Cl 211
— fistula A. Schm., = Stenoneis inconspiiua.
— forcipata Grev. et var 213
— fortis (Greg.) Donk 212
— fraudulenta A. Schm 211
— frigida Grun 211
— fusca Greg., = Diploneis f.
22i
E. Jørgensen.
NaviculH geniina A. Schm., = Diploneis bombus.
— granulata Bréb., = monilifera.
— Gregoru Ralps., = cancellata var.
— Hennedyi W. Sm., et var 213
— humerosa Bréb 211
— hyalina Donk., = Diploneis h.
— hyperhorea Gr'jn., = Diploneis h.
— incons2nciM Greg, = Stenoneis i.
— incurvata Greg., = Diploneis i.
— interrupta Kutz., = Diploneis i.
— latissima Greg 211
— legumen A. Schm., = Pinnularia 1.
— liber W. Sm., -- Caloneis 1.
— lineata Donk , = Diploneis 1.
— litoralis Donk., = Diploneis 1.
— lyra Ehrb., et varr 213
— maxima Greg., = Caloneis liber varr.
— mediterranea A. Schm., = Diplonei.i eudoxia.
— minor Greg., = palpebralis var.
— monilifera Cl., et var 211
— multicostata Gnus., = Diploneis orabro.
— musca Greg., ^= Caloneis m.
— nitescens Greg., = Diploneis n.
— northumbrica Donk 212
— notabiUs Grev , = Diploneis n.
— opima GRtJN 212
— ovulum A. Schm., = Hetemneis Allmanuiana.
— palpebralis Bréb., et var 212
— ])amlura Bréb.. = Diploneis crabro var.
— peregrina Ehrb., et var 211
— Pinnularia Cl., = Pinnularia quadratarea.
~ polystida Grun., = Hennedyi var.
— præsecta A. Schm 212
— prætexta Ehrb 213
— punctulata W. Sm 211
— pygniæa KiJTZ 213
— quadratarea A. Schm., = Pinnularia q.
— radiosa Kutz 211
— rhomboides Ehpb., = Frustulia r.
— rostellata (Greg.) A. Schm 212
— sejuncta A. Schm., = Diploneis s.
— Smithii Bréb., = Diploneis S.
— spectabilis Greg 213
— spkndida (xReg., = Diploneis s.
— subcincta A. Schm., =; Diploneis s.
— superimposita A. Schm 212
— Trevelyana Donk., = Pinnularia T.
— tumida Bréb., = Scoliopleura t.
— versicolor Grun., = forcipata var.
— Zostereti Geun 212
Nitzscliia acuminata (W. Sm.) Geun 204
— angularis W. Sm 205
— apiculata (Greg.) Grun 204
— bilobata W. Sm 205
— coarctata Grun 204
— coustricta (Greg.) Grun 204
— distans Gkeg 205
— hutigarioa Grun 204
— liybrida Grun 205
— insignis Greg., et var 205
— lanceolata W. Sm 205
— litoralis Grun 204
litorea Grun 205
— longissima (Bréb.) Ralfs 205
— marginulata Grun., var 204
— Mitclielliana Greenl 205
— navicularis (Bbéb.) Grun 204
— notabilis Grun., = insignis var.
— panduriforniis Grhg 204
— punctata (W. Sm.) Grun 204
Nitzscbia sigma (Kutz.) W. Sm 205
— Smithii Rai.fs 205
— spathulata Bréb 205
— thermalis Grun., var 205
Opephora pacifica Grun 202
Paralia sulcata (Ehrb.) Ci 198
Pinnularia acuta W. Sm., ^ Xavicula radiosa vai-.
— Allmanuiana Greg , = Heteroneis A.
— borealis Ehrb 214
— claviculus (Greg.) Cl 214
— cruciformis (Donk.) Cl 214
— digito-radiata Greg., = Navicula d.
— distans W. Sm., = Navicula d.
— divergens W. Sm 214
— fortis Grcg., = Navicula t'.
— lata (Bréb.) W. Sm 214
— legumen Ehrb 214
microstauron Ehrb 213
— nobllis Ehrb 214
— peregrina Ehrb., = Navicula p.
— (juadratarea (A. Schm.) Cl 214
— radiosa W. Sm., = Navicula r.
— rostellata Greg., = Navicula r.
— semiplena Greg., = Navicula palpebralis var.
— subtilis Greg., = Navicula directa var.
— Trevelyana (DONK.) Cl 214
Plagiogrannna Gregorianum Grev., = staurophorum.
— staurophorum (Greg.) Heib '. 202
Pleuroneis britannica (Næg.) Cl 208
— costata (Greg ) Cl 208
— pinnata (Greg.) 208
Pleurosigma acuminatum W. Sm., = attenuatum var.
— affine Gron., = Normanni.
— attenuatum (KiJTZ.) W. Sm., var 'JiHi
— balticum (Ehrb.) W. Sm 20!i
— carinatiim Donk., = Donkinia c.
— elongatum W. Sm 2n;»
— torniosum W. Sm 20tt
— Normanni Ralfs 20H
— nubecula W. Sm., var 2(.)9
— recta Donk., — Donkinia r.
— rigidum W Sm ., 20!»
— speciosum W. Sm 209
— strigosum W. Sm 209
— suberectum Cl. = nubecula var.
Podosira hormoides (Mont.) Kijtz. 19»
Pseudoaniphipora stauroptei-a (Bail.) Cl 209
Pyxilla baltica Grun 201
Rhabdonema adriaticum Kutz 203
— arcuatum (Lyngb.) Kutz 203
— minutum Kutz 203
Rhaphoneis nitida (Greg.) Grun 202
Ehizosolenia setigera Brightw 201
Ehoicosigma arcticum Cl 209
Rhoicosphenia curvata (Kutz.) Grun 208
Ehopalodia gibba (Kutz.) 0. MiJLL 203
Roperia tessellata (Rop.) Grun 1 99
Sceptroneis kamtschatica Grun 202
— marina (Greg.) (Jrun 202
Schizonenia crucigenun W. Sm 210
— Grevillei Ag 210
Scoliopleura latestriata Grun., = Scoliotropis 1.
— tumida (Bréb.) Rab 209
Scoliotropis latestriata (Bréb.) Cl 209
Stauroneis finmarchira Cl. et Grun., = Navicula f.
— Gregorii Ralfs 2!0
— phoenicenteron Ehrb 210
— salina W. Sm 210
Stawoptera aspera Ehrb., = Tra<-liyneis a.
Stenoneis inconspicua (Greg.) Ci 217
Pa-.
Steplmiiogonia actinoptvchus (Hiirh.) Gri'N 201
— poh-gomi Ehrb 201
Striatella uiiipunctata (Lynob.) Ao 203
Surirella fastuosa Guru 206
— «remma Ehrb 206
— lata \V. Sm.. = fastuosa var.
— naricularis Bréb., = Niteachia n.
— ovalLs Bréb., et var 206
— orata KiJTZ., = ovalis var.
Svnedra afflnis KiiTZ., var 201
bacillus Grko 202
— erystalliua (Ao.) KuTZ 202
— Heiineayana Greg 202
— hyperborea Grun. var ' 202
— kamtschatica Grun.. var 201
— rosteUata Grun 202
— superba KuTZ 202
— tabulata Kutz., = affinis var.
— ulna (NITZSCH.) Ehrb 201
I'Hf,'
Syiieilra micliiliita (Baii,.) \V. Sm 202
Tabellarui Hocciilos» (Roth.) Kutz 203
Thalassiosira decipiens (Grl'N.) Jøro 198
— gravida Cl 198
Tlialassiothri.v uitzschioides fJRUN 202
Trachynei.>i aspera (Ehrb.) Cl 217
Triceratium alternans Bail., = Biddul] liia a.
— arcticum Briohtw., = Biddnlpliia a.
— favus Ehrb., = Biddulphia f.
— formosuni Brightw., = Biddulphia f.
— latum Grev., = Biddulphia 1.
— nobilc Witt., = Biddulphia n.
— punctatum Brightw., = Bidduljjhia ji.
— Weissei Grun., = Biddulpliia W.
Tropiduneis lepidoptera (Greg.) Cl 208
— maxima (Greg.) Cl 208
Vanheurckia rhomboiden Bréb., = Frustulia r.
Xanthiopy.vis umbonata Grev 198
Zyqoceros balæna Ehrb., = Bi(i(Uili>liia arctica (Brightw.).
IV. COMBINATION
OF
HYDROGRAPHICAL AND BIOLOGICAL FACTS.
NOTES.
In this section I have aiven some facts, which it has occurred to me might be of practical interest. It is, however, quite
impossible to define clearly between practical and purely scientific marine investigations.
A. The natural (/Oiulitioiis of the Fiords.
relates, that in a tVat;uieiit of an ancient
: in tlie year 872 „one of the two Nor-
IvAii. went with a large army from Ire-
•) to aid lii.s father wiio was at war with
One of our historian
Irish annal it is tolil. tin
wegian kiniis in Dulilin.
land to Lochlann (Norwa
the king of Lochlann."')
It must be said that the ancient Irish had found a particu-
larly suitable name for the land, which is also in modern tourist
language made famous as „the land of fiords'' . The Norwegian
series of fiords presents many interesting problems to the naturalist
too, and a thorough examination of them will undoubtedly serve to
thi-ow light on many questions.
If one sets to work to make a tlioiduiih seieiititie investigation
of a tiord, the facts obtained may be divided into three principal
groups; those concerning the shape and situation of the fiord (top-
ography), or concerning the medium with which the fiord basin
is filled (hydrography) or concerning the plants and animals con-
tained in it (biology). The object in view, in case of such an
examination, should be to gain the greatest possible insight mto the
biological phenomena, but in order to attain this end, one will be
compelled to study most carefully the topographical and hydro-
gi-aphical conditions of the fiord. As a part of the topography of
the fiords one must. I think, consider such things as their geo-
graphical position, proi)ortionate size, subdivisions, relative depths,
the occurrence of barriers, rocks under water, holms and islands.
In addition to these things, the nature of the bottom and the sur-
rounding hills, the geological history of the fiord (e. g. the rise and
fall in the shore line) etc., must be taken into consideration as be-
longing to the topography of a fiord. To the hijdroyrapluj of the
fiords may be reckoned all the facts and qualities concerning the
medium which fills their basins, such as salinity, temperature, gas-
eity, transparency, the motions of the water (currents, waves, tides),
formation of ice, inflow of rivers or streams etc. Finally, atmos-
pherical conditions must also be taken into consideration as play-
ing an important part in the physical state of a fiord (c. g. tem-
perature, downfall, prevailing winds, atmospheric pressure etc.).
The biology of the fiords will include vegetable and animal life
in their waters, at the bottom and in the bottom mud. The plan
here suggested for the examination of a tiord must, I thiidc, he taken
to be tolerably complete, and I will look upon it as a guide in
my future work. I must, however, at once confess that the in-
vestigations I have hitherto made in noiihern Norway do not make
it possible to fill in very much of the frame work I have set up
in the foregoing lines. I will, nevertheless, build up the skeleton
in the hope that it may be sohdly covered later on.
a. Topographical Notes.
The Geographical survey of the Norwegian coast has given us
maps, in which very much of what I call the topography of the
fiords is made clear. But the complete mapping out of the northern
fiords is not yet finished. A good deal of information about the
fiords will also be found in Prof. A. Hellands-) topographical works,
and a description of the ground through which the fiords have dug
their way, will be found in „Det nordlige Norges geologi" (The
Geology of Northern Norway) by Dr. H. Reusch. The problem
of the fluctuations in the shoreline ai-e treated in detail by Dr.
Andreas Hansen.^) In a hydrographical paper concerning the
western fiords,*) I have touched upon the etfect which changes in
the level of the sea have upon these inner parts of the fiords which
are connected with the principal fiord by comparatively shallow
curi-ents.
As rega'-ds these currents, it seems i)retty generally to be the
') Loch = lake, fiord.
'•^) Lofoten og Vesteraalen, Tromsø amt.
*) Norges geoL undersøgelses aarbog f. 1896 — 99.
*) Studier over naturforholdene i vestlandske tjordu
Mus. aarb. 1903, no. 8.
Hvdriigrafi. lierg.
case that they have forced their way through moraines, which in
many instances cause the comparative confinement. Helland')
mentions examples of this, in Kvænangen, both the „Stor'"- and
„Lille strømmen" having forced themselves through old morain' -.
It is most probable, that the majority of the so-called „stroinnn ■■
(currents) in the fiords, run over such moraines.
With respect to the situation of a fiord, it is not only its geo-
graphical latitude which is of importance for its vegetable and
animal life, a very weighty factor is also its relative position to
the prevaiUng current in the surrounding ocean. I^et us make an
experiment. We cut a section along the 22nd degree of longitude
(E of Greenwich) towards the boundary line of Finland and con-
tinue to cut along the boundary to Jacob's river on the south side
of the Varanger Fiord. Then we turn this section around the point
where the longitudinal line and the shore line of the continent
intersect, so that the fiords of Finmark will lie in a direction which
is approximately E— W. These fiords will then undoubtedly undergo
a chauire in their biologv. and notwithstanding that they wei-e
0. Nordgaard.
now further north, the cliang-e would quite certainly be such that
several boreal species would occur there, while some of tlie arctic
ones would die out, or possibly retire into the innermost parts of
the tiords. Such a change would take place, because the fiords
in this way would have been brought into closer contact with
the heat axis of the northwards ilowing current.
On the relative depths of the fiords, I have made some re-
marks in the first part of this work, and reference should also be
made to the coast maps. The Finmark fiords are of rather a
different character than those in Noi-dland and Tromsø amts, for
they are comparatively shallow. An explanation of this has been
given by Dr. Andreas Hansen') who writes: — „ When the high-
land ceases in Finmarken, the fiords too acquire another character.
They become broader and shallower, less typically formed basins
in the loose schist, beds, indeed, for less active and less concen-
trated glacier-streams, because here, in the low plateau country,
there were not originally such deep caiions to determine the course
of the glaciers, as on the western slope of the mountains." As a
general rule it may be said that there is a deep channel in the
fiords with a muddy bottom. On either side, there is a bank or
edge of land, which in some cases is evenly sloped, but generally
has a most uneven surface. It is, nevertheless, in many instances,
])Ossible in a definite section to speak of the angle of inclination
of the bank of land.
It is clear that, the depth being the same, the side surfaces
will increase in proportion to the diminution of the angle of in-
clination, as will be seen from the figure below, which represents
a transverse section through a fiord.
ide surfaces are thus in inverse proportion to the
sinus of the angles of inclination.
Eg.
- 90",
S : Si
Si
30", and then:
S.
r\e of inclination is 30", the side surface will
large as it is when the land bank is perpendi-
If in the one case, the line of intersection between the side-
area and tlie transverse section be s and the angle of inclination
a, and in another case the corresponding values be Si and a, we
get: —
h
sin a,
Are the side surfaces (S and Si) taken to have equally long
ground lines, or if one will, shore lines, but with different angles
of inclination (a and «,) one gets, according to elementary geome-
trical law: —
S : Si = s : Si but hence follows: —
S : Si = sin ui : sin ci.
') Norway, Official Publication
When the
thus be double
cular.
This little mathematical exposition is valuable in so far as it
plainly shows that the space which is available for the distribution
of animals depends, to a great extent, upon the angle of inclina-
tion of the edge of land. And it gains in interest when it is re-
membered that experience proves that the edges, both in the ocean
and the fiords, teem with animal life.
The presence of islands, holms, rocks etc. in a fiord must also
be said to be important factors in the animal life of a fiord. They
all tend to increase the extent of the particularly productive areas.
Another important factor in the vegetable and animal life of
a given district, is the occurrence of a belt of skerries („skjær-
gaard"). With respect to navigation, such belts of skerries act as
powerful breakwaters. And as such they are biologically too of
importance, and of course the many islands, holms and rocks, with
their rich algae vegetation, greatly increase the number of speci-
ally productive surfaces.
Mr. M. FosLiE of Ti'ondhjem lias kindly given nie some in-
formation about the influence of such a „skjærgaard" on algae.
He writes that where there is none it will, amongst other effects,
also be found that the number of species is less. If the coast be
an open one, a number of species which require more or less pro-
tected spots is as a rule absent. With Mr. Foslie's permis-
sion, I quote a part of his letter to me, he writes: — ,. Those
species which are principally found on the open coast, will also
generally be found inside the „skjærgaard" or in the larger fiords,
but usually in the most exposed places, and even there they arc
not so strong and well developed as on the ocean coast. An ilhi-
stration may be found in the large Laminarians. L. hi/perhorea
and L. (hg'ituta are always large and strong in the open sea, but
decrease in size and change their shape the further in one finds
them. A total absence of some „breakwater" or other often re-
sults in the tearing away of large quantities of algae, which the
autumn and winter storms drive ashore. I have, for instance, seen
immense masses of Laminaria cast in, especially in Berlevaag and
Loppen. On the other hand, there are species which are loss
hardy, and they are smaller on the open coast tlian in more
sheltered places, even if they are found on the coast. They then go
further down, where the rush of the waves is less. Therefore,
especially along the coast of East Finmark, there are many places
where vegetation seems to be poor and only to consist of a fin\
species, while there is comparatively rich vegetation in fairly shel-
tered bays.''
An exceedingly important factor in the hydrography and bi-
ology of the fiords, is their relative position to the prevailing sum-
mer and winter winds, and a closer study of these things will pro-
bably throw light upon many matters which hitherto have been
uncertain.
231
b. Hydrographical Notes.
Ill the tirst part of tliis work, a iiiiiiilicr of liydrojrrapliical
(lata from tlie tiords will 1)0 found. Now I will mention a fow
moiv dotail.-;. and treat of some tliiiiLjs wliicli have not yet been
mentioned. First then, some remarks on llir inlliienee which the
prcvailiiii.'' winds, waves and tidal currents exert mi veyetahle and
animal life in the sea.
In a very iiiterestiii>; pajier. .Mr. !■'. W. IIakmkh has recently
explained tlie inipoitaiice of the prevailiiii; winds as a ireoloiiical
factor.') Mr. Hak.meu call.s attention to the fact that dead shells
are not found in lariie numbers on the eastern shores of the
counties of Norfolk and Suffolk, although there is no want of mol-
luscs in the adjacent sea. The reason for this absence of shells
is found by Mr. I!.\iiMi;ii in the fact that the prevailing winds at pre-
sent are westerly. On the contraiy, the presence of Crag beds on
the east coast presupposes a ditleient prevailing; wind from that
which is now the case.
..Easterly gales might have been prevalent in that part of the
North Sea, rather than those from a westerly (juarter, as at pre-
sent.'' In another paper, Mr. Hakjier-) has drawn attention to
the tidal currents as a geological factoi'.
He points to the state of things in the Irish Sea, „where an
accumulation of dead shells on the Turbot bank, ott' the coast of
Antrim, is caused by the tidal currents which sweep with much
velocity through the narrow channel separating Ireland from Scot-
land." The fact that in some places in Coralline Crag, layers of
large shells may occur, while at other places smaller shells are
predominant, is considered in the light of tidal currents, for Mr.
Harmer says : — „Shells are sorted out by currents of varying
strength as pebbles in beds of gravel ; small specimens Avould there-
fore have accumulated in one place, larger ones in another, and
comminuted shells, or fine calcareous sand in a third.''
Wind and current are not of little importance in dynamical
geology, on account of their carrying powei-. But just this charac-
teristic causes these factors also to have an influence, in different
ways, upon living creatui-es. The course of a current offers par-
ticularly favourable conditions for the nourishment of plankton-
eaters, and a current-facies of animals may be spoken of. It is
true that animal life is not profuse where the deposits of material
are greatest, but, on the whole, it is correct to say that the bed of
a current is profusely supplied with animal life.
In a purely theoretical light, the supply of plankton for a given
animal must be in proportion to the velocity of the current. It is,
at any rate, evident that the motions of the water are of great
importance in connection with the supply of nourishment for plank-
ton-eaters.
Dr. Ei)WAin> 1'>ri)wnf. •') has drawn attention to the fact that
medusae, which are kept in an aquarium where the water is un-
disturbed, will at tirst swim quickly about, „but in a few hours, it
sinks to the bottom, apparently tii-ed out. After an interval of
rest, it takes another swim, and again sinks to the bottom. This
is repeated until the medusa becomes exhausted; then it stays at
the bottom and slowly dies." This unfortunate state of things has
^) Influence of Winds upon Climati' ilurii
Journ. Geol. Soc, vol. LVII, 1901, p. 408.
-) A Sketch of the later tertiaiy Hist or
Assoc, vol. XVII, 1902, p. 42.o.
^) On Keeping Jlednsaf : live in an Aipia
N. S. Vol. V, no. 2. 1898.
the Plcistotene Epoch Quart,
of Kast Anglia. Proc. Geol.
in. .lonrn. Mar. Biol. Assoc,
been remedied by Ur. E. T. Brownk and Dr. E. 1. Aliæn ha\1ng
succeeded in constructing an apparatus by means of whidi the
movements of the water have been skilfully imitated. Mr. Danne-
vifi's hatching apparatus is constructed on a similar principle.
With regard to the force of the tidal currents, it will easily be
seen that this will tlepend upon thi' height of the title, i. e. the
difference between ebb and flow. In the north of Norway, this
difference is, on an average, about 2 mtrs., and as a consequenct;
of this, the tidal currents are considerably strong in the narrow
channels and in the smallest parts of the fiords. Based upon
material furnished by the Norwegian „Gradmaalingskommission",')
I will give some figures which show tiie average difference between
high and low tide in succession in 1884 and 1885.
1884. 188.5.
Stavanger 0.424 m. 0.427 m.
Bergen 0.988 „ 0.97.5 „
Kabelvaag 2.(i40 „ 2.014 „
Vardø 2.19;-) „ 2.175 „
Generally speaking, it may be said that the tidal wave runs
northwards along the coast, and the tidal currents flow- into the
fiords when the tide rises and outwards when it falls.
In the channels of the „skjærgaard", it may be taken as a
general rule, that the direction of the current is northerly or
easterly when the tide I'ises, westeriy or southeriy when it falls.
But it must be remarked that in many channels the direction of
the current changes a little after the water has been at its highest
and lowest. In the currents running between the islands of Lofoten
(Gimsøstrøm, Napstrom, Sundstrøm etc.) the water at first flows
northwards when the sea is at half-high-tide and turns again at
half-low-tide. The same is said to be the case in the currents
which connect the Skjerstad and Salten Fiords. The best known
of these is the socalled ..Saltstrøm", which surpasses even „Mosken-
strømmen" in force.
I have attempted, in an article on the two mael streams in
Norway, (de to store malstrømme i Norge) -) to explain the change
in the direction of currents at half-high and half-low-tide, and have
theoretically worked out the following conclusion: — If the inner
part of a fiord be connected by a current with the prmcipal fiord,
and the direction of this current be changed aftei' high and low
tide, the difference between ebb and flow will be less inside than
outside the said current.
Thus, the difference between the niveau at high and low ^\-ater
should be less in the Skjerstad than in Salten Fiord. I have not
as yet had an opportunity of verifying this theoretical conclusion.
Concerning the direction of the surface stream along the coast
of Norway, Mohn's current map is very instructive.') The fol-
lowing amusing little story shows that there, in the summer, may
be an easterly current along the coasts of Finmarken. Sophis
Tromholt'') relates that in the beginning of the eighties S/S.
«Nordstjernen" was in the summer wrecked on Knivskjælodden, a
little west of the North Cape, and very soon sank. A couple of
months later, the vicar of Næsseby had rowed out a little way in
1) C'f. Vantlstandsmaalinger, h.
2) „Naturen" 1901, p. 30r,.
•■<) The X..rth Ocean, jil. XLIII.
*) Under Nordlysets Stra.aler, p.
V, p. 124.
Copenhagen 1885
232
the Varauger Fiord and suddenly he caught sight of a little box
floating in the water. On closer examination, he found, to his
great surprise, that his own name and address was written on it.
It had been sent by the „ Nordstjernen" from Kristiania, and
after the wreck of the vessel „the clever little box" had found its
own way to its destination, which is a fanciful expression of the fact
that winds and waves had carried it to the inner part of the
Varanger Fiord.
Outside the prominent rocks of Finmarken, the tidal currents
are very strong, the direction being easterly when the tide rises,
and westerly during its fall.
I have had personal experience too of the strength of tidal
currents. In the summer of 189i, in the course of a zoological
expedition in Finmai'ken, I was out in a little boat on August
14th anil had three men with me, I intended to pass Nordkyn
going west. We had been sailing a little while, but the wind
ceased and we were obliged to try to row; this was exactly oppo-
site Nordkyn. The stream was, however, against us, and it proved
to be utterly impossible for us to make any headway. Fortunately
the water was so .shallow just here that we wei'e able to anchor
until the current slackened.
That the tidal currents have a considerable carrying capacity,
I have also noticed in Nygaardsstrømmen at Bergen, very near
the Biological station. Not only large mussels but mediumsized
specimens of a star-fish (Asterias rubens) now and then sail along
with this current. So it is not strange that bottom forms, as for
instance Foraminifera. are often found in plankton. Currents and
\\inds play also an important part in the fact that plankton is
heaped up in quantities at certain special places. A closer study
of this subject will undoubtedly throw light on things connected
with the catch of plankton-eaters, such as herrings, sprats etc.
Lately, it has become clear to me that the downfall plays
an important part in the hydrography and biology of the fiords.
My thoughts were first turned in this direction, when I noticed
that an increase of salinity occurred in the fiords of northern
Norway, from January and throughout the spring. In the fiords in
the neighbourhood of Bergen too, I have seen that the surface
salinity is greatest in the winter, as the downfall then is least and
there is a portion which does not exert its influence for the time.
( )ne would then expect that the great difterence in downfall in the
west aud north of Norway would be remarkably felt, and this is
clearly shown to be the case.
A closer study of the downfall also gives an explanation of
tiie fact that the deeper layers in the Porsanger Fiord have such
a low temperature. According to Gean,') Dr. Hjokt found on
the 24th of August 1900 the following conditions in Osterbotten,
which is connected by a shallow channel with the rest of the
Porsanger Fiord: —
d.
0 m.
t.
7°.0(i C.
under ;32.oo
20 „
4».1.S ,,
.•i.3.51
50 „
-^ 0".07 ,,
34.24
90 „
^ 1".02 „
34.29
According to Mohn,-j the annual average temperature at
Kistrand, which is in the inner part of the same fiord, is 0".8 C.
>) Das Plankton dea norwegischen Nordineeres. Rep. Norw. Fish, and
Marine Investigations, vol. II, nr. 5, 1902, p. 142.
2) Klimatabeller for Norge, I, p. 18.
The annual average downfall for the years 1896 — 1902 at Older-
øen at the end of the Porsanger Fiord is reckoned to be 374 mm.').
In the years 1899 and 1900, the downfall for the different months
was found to be as follows:-) —
0 1 d e r 0 e u.
Downfall.
January . .
February .
March . . .
April . . . .
May
June
July
August . . .
September
October . .
November
December
1900
mm.
11
5
2
24
62
94
30
69
11
23
20
17
32
67
10
49
Year '
155
409
As a conseriuenee of tlie slight downfall in tlie winter, the
salinity of the surface layers constantly increases, and in this way
there is a tendency to great regularity both in the temperature and
salinity of the layers.^) But under these circumstances, the cooling
of the surface by means of the vertical current will be felt far
down, (Cf. Hydrography, p. 17) and the cold of the arctic winter
will, in this way, penetrate down into the deeper layers. When
the state of things is like that in Osterbotten, where a shallow
channel effects the connection with the fiord, the warm under-
currents cannot penetrate. Then too, the summer downfall is much
more effective than tiiat of the winter, so the mixing on the sur-
face in the summer will serve to pi'event the summer heat fi'om
penetrating downwards. Taken together, these things will, I think,
explain Dr. H.jort's surprising statement of h- 1.02 at a depth of
90 mtrs. in Osterbotten, and will also give a clue to the fact tliat
most of the arctic animals are found in the inner parts of the fiords.
It should also be i-emembered that the longer a fiord is, the more
will the continental influence be felt.
In western Norway, a different state of things is found in
such shut-in basins as Osterbotten. I have studied conditions in
the Lyse and the Mo Fiords, both of which belong to districts
which form centres foi' the maximum downfall in Norway. At the
station Nedrebø, in the Lyse river district, the average fall from
1896—1902 was 2 169 mm.; and at the station Farstveit, in the
Mo river district, it was 2 738 during the same period.
I beg to refer to what I have recently written about these
fiords.*) Now I will only mention that while the bottom water in
Osterbotten contains degrees of cold from the winter, the bottom
1) Nedberiagttagelser i Norge, aarg. Vill, 1902, j). 12.5.
2) Cf. Nedbøriagttagelser, aarg. V, VI.
•') Cf. Hydrogr. Tables nrs. 8.3:3— 84f).
■») Studier over naturforholdene i vestlandske fjorde. I. H.vdrograti. Berg.
Mus. Aarb., nr. 8, 1903.
CuDibination.
233
wat.T ill tlu' Mo ami l.ysr Kinnls bad a tniiiicratuiv convsiKimlin--
to tlu' avcraiiv aiiiiiial aliiiosplu'iic li'iniuMatm'f o( tlif place. Also
ill the latter lionl.-;, subiiiaiiiic ridiics prevent the warm bottom
water tVoiii pcnctratinir in, and. moreover, tlio snpply of fresh water
ill the winter is so ij-reat that the vertical current is prevented from
assumiii",' any lariie proportions. Tiie transmission of heat down-
wards takes place princiiially by conduction. A niaxiinum in the
autumn ami a mininiuni in the spring find their way ijradually
downwards, ami liiially an averaij'c is readied, wliicli coi'i-csponds
to the annual average atmospherie temperature.') The yicjerstad
Fiord must probably be classed with the ^lo and Lyse Fiords.
The bottom water is homoterniic (cf. Hydrography, p. 11). the
supply of fresh water is suflicient to prevent the wintei- cold iVuin
penetratinir down into the depths.
The station yulitjelma, in the Vatnbynd river district, Jiad an
average fall of 1 097 mm. in the years 1896 — 1902, and the station
Graddis, in the Salt river district, during the same period had an
annual average of 533.-) According to Mohx,^) the annual average
temperature at Bodo is 4".l C. and at Ranen 3.5. On August 17th
1877, the Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition found that the
temperature in the Skjerstad Fiord at a depth of about 500 mtrs.
was 3.2. On April 4th 1900, I registered at the same depth 3".l5 C.
If one now considers these two atmospheric averages, it would
seem that 3.^; is a probable value for the annual aveiage tem-
perature of the air in the Skjerstad Fiord.
If we, however, imagine the large basin of the Skjerstad Fiord
moved to the inner part of the Porsanger Fiord, and with the same
connections with the lattci- as it now has with the Salten Fiord,
we should certainly tind that the bottom temperature would be
considerably lower than that of the annual average of atmospheric
temperature in the inner part of the Porsanger Fiord. For, from
what has already been said, it will be seen that the supply of
fresh water at the latter place is not suftieient to preveait an
evening out of its salinity in the winter, thus allowing the winter
cold to exert its influence on deeper layers of water.
In some of the lesser tiords adjacent to the Vest Fiord, I have
also noticed that the bottom temperature has been lower than the
annual average atmospheric temperature, which would imply that
somewhat of the Avinter cold has found its way downwards.
Examples of this fact may be found in Rombakeu, Skjomen,
the Ggs Fiord etc. Such places excel in many arctic forms. These
tiords have already been referred to, and I would call attention to
what has been said about them in previous pages and also to PI.
19, where the curves YI, VII, YIII represent the conditions of
temperature in Skjomen, the Ogs and Skjerstad Fiords. The curves
for Skjomen and the Ogs Fiord are especially characteristic on
account of their slight bend, which is a sign of a uniform salinity.
The temperature curves for Tranodybet, the Tys Fiord and
Oxsund are given so that compaiisons may be made, (PI. 19,
curves I, II, IV, V), all the curves are very much bent in the
upper layers, where there is great variation in salinity, but in the
layers where there is uniform salinity they become almost a straight
line. Curves III and IV, which represent the conditions of tem-
perature in March 1899 in the sea off Røst and in the Tys Fiord,
show plainly that a higher temperature prevails in the deeper
layers in the tiords than in the corresponding depths in the Nor-
') Cf. Studier over uaturtbi-holdene i vestlandske fjorde, p. 4t;.
2j Cf. Nedbøi-iagtfagelsei- i Norge, aarg. VIII, ji. 12.5.
3) Kliinatabellei- for Xorge I. p. IS.
wfoiaii Sea. .\s I iiave already stated, the rca.son for this is to
lie found in llie fact that such tiords as the Tys Fiord are of such
a formation as excludes the arctic bottom water from the .Nor-
wegian Sea, but gives admittance to the warm .\tlaiitic, waters
which fill the basins. Then too the fresh wafei' which Hows into
the tiord from the land, is sutticiently large in quantity from the
Bokn Fi(n'd to the Vest Fiord to prevent the wintei' cold from
penetrating downwards to any eoiisidei-alile depth.
There is another tliiiii.'- wliicii one midit suppose to be, to
some extent, dependent upon the variation in downfall. 1 mean the
height of the water on the coa.st.s.
From ..Vandstandsobservationer", published by „den norske
gradmaalingskommission" I have on pi. 20 drawn some curves,
which give the monthly average height of the water at Kabelvaag
and Vardø in the years 1882, 1884 and 1885.
The measurements have been made with selfregistering instru-
ments at 0, 1, 2, 3 etc. hours after the moon's culmination and
from these results the average has been calculated. Taking it for
granted that the 0 points have been unaltered, and that the instru-
ments in other respects too. have been quite reliable, one must be
able, by help of the data thus obtained, to form a wellfounded
opinion of the variations in the rise and fall of the water, in the
course of the year, on the northern coasts. A glance at the curves
(I — VI, PI. 20), will show that there is at any rate one tiling
which cannot possibly be accidental, the curves show a definite
tendency to a minimum in April. Similarly, too, a maximum can
be arrived at for the months November— January, while the re-
maining variations suggest accidental causes.
On the same plate the curves representing the average monthly
downfall at Svolvær, which is situated near Kabelvaag and Vardo,
are given. Both these curves show a decrease during the first
months of the year up to May, in which month the year's minimum
downfall is reached. The Svolvær-curve shows a maximum in
November, and the Vardø-curve in October. Tliere is this point
of resemblance between the water-heights and downfall curves, that
they generally show a decrease during the first months of the year,
respectively up to April and May, but it cannot at all be said that
the decrease in heights is caused solely by the decrease in down-
fall. Of course the variations in downfall exert some influence on
the height of the coast water, but as regards the north of Norway,
it Avill easily be seen on comparing the curves that this influence
is by no means sufficient to account for the great differences in
height. It should be remembered that 1 cm. is taken as the unit
for the height, and 1 mm. for the downfall curves.
At Svolvær, the amplitude of the curve representing the aver-
age, monthly downfall is 8.3 cm., the corresponding value at Vardo
is 5.3 cm. The observations made of heights have not been so
complete that it has been possible to calculate the normal average
for each month, but on the basis of the amplitudes of the Kabel-
vaag and Vardo curves, we get: —
.Ainplihide.
Amplitude
Kabelvaag 1882 . . .
... f) 1 cm.
Vardo 1S82 . .
.... 52 cm.
— 1884 .. .
. . . (lO „
— 1884 . . .
35 „
— 1885 ...
... 45 ,.
— 1 8S5 . . .
47 ,,
These figures show, with all desirable clearness, that the
variations in the course of the year are so considerable, that they
30
can only in a slight degree be caused by ttie variations in down-
fall from one month to another. The principal cause must be
looked for in another direction, and one naturally turns one's atten-
tion to the distribution of atmospheric pressure, which, as is well
known, determines the motions in the air — atmospheric currents — .
Di-. Andreas Hansen^) has called attention to the fact that
the maximum atmospheric pressure in the spring and the minimum
height of the water, and the minimum midwinter barometric altitude
and the greatest height of the water are, practically speaking,
correspondent.
Prof. MoHx-j in his meteorology, has given the atmospheric
pressure curves at Stykkisholm, in Iceland, and Gjesvær, near the
Noith Cape, and with respect to the course of these curves, he
says that, on both sides of tiie Norwegian Sea, the atmosplieric
prcssur'e is lowest in the winter and highest in May.
'fhe lowest atmosphei'ic pressure from January — May, we
should expect to iind somewhere in the Norwegian Sea, and this
is seen to be the case from Mohn's chart (1. c. p. 173) where a
minimum is given at the NE of Iceland. This minimum is main-
tained, according to Prof. O. Pettersson,^) by the upper layers
of water in tlio Norwegian Sea giving olF heat to the atmosphere.
At any rate, it appears to be certain that the distribution of
the atmospheric pressure on land and sea during the winter causes
such winds as help to sweep the water a\\ay from the coasts.
It is probable that the most important causes of the annual
fluctuations in the height of the water on the northern coasts may
be found in the different distribution of atmospheric pressure in
summer and winter and the winds which are dependent upon this.
On pi. 21, I have given the down- fall curves for 1899 witli
crossed lines for the stations at Svolvær, Skomvær, Tromsø and
Alten, and have based them upon ..Nedbøriagttagelser'' (Ob-
servations on Downfall) published by the Norwegian Meteorolo-
gical Institute. Similarly, the normal curves for the same stations
are given in straiglit lines for a period of observation from 13 to
29 years.
From these curves, it will be seen that, in a single yeai'. there
may be great divergence from the normal downfall.
It is evident that the fluctuations in the amount of downfall
exei't an influence on the temperature and salinity of the sea. By
increasing the height of the Avater in the fiords, the downfall also
has some influence in producing currents. In the chaptei- dealing
with the cod fishery in Lofoten, I will try to prove that there is
a correspondence between the fishery results and the variations in
the distribution of atmospheric pressure, and will, in so doing, use
the height of the downfall as a measui'c of the influence of tlie
A\'inds.
c. Biological Notes.
The problem of tlic vertical distribution of living beings lias
occupied many biologists. I will not here treat of it at length, but
only mention a few facts.
As far back as 1835, Michael Sahs*) divided our seaweed
belt into the following 4 zones: — (1) That of the Balanns,
(2) that of the Patelhi, (3) of the corals, and (4) that of the La-
mi naria. The greater depths had at that time been so little ex-
amined, that Sars could not attempt any division of the life found
there. Since 1835, however, this subject has occupied the atten-
tion of many, and several divisions have been made. But I will
only give here the one I prefer. Dr. Stuxberg has, in his book
„Evertebratfaunan i Sibiriens Ishaf", accepted the same division
for the animals as F. R. Kjell.mak^) for algae, viz: —
(1) The littoral zone.
That part of the bottom, which is laid bare at low water,
and \\liicli in Norwegian is called „f.jærcn".
(2) The suUittond zone.
From low water' mai-k to the lower- limit for' algae.
(3j The elittorul zone.
All that is below the lower- limit for' algae.
1) Skandinavieus Stigninjj. Noi-ges Geor. Unders. Am-r). f. 1896^99.
2) Kristiania 1902.
•■') Die liydrogi-aphisciien Veiiiiiltnisse der oberen Wasserschicliten des iionl-
iidien Nurdineeres. Bilian^' t. K. Sven.ska Vet. Akad. Handliiigar B. 23, afd. II,
■*) Beskriveiser og lagttagelser, p. VI.
'') SuxBEKG refers to Kjellmax's treatise: — Ueber die Algenveiretation
des Murmansclien Meeres an der Westkiiste von Novaja Semlja und Waigatscli.
Nova Acta Heg. Soc. Scient. Ups., Ser. Ill, vol. e.\tra ordinem ediiinii. Upsala
1877.
According to P. Buye,') the dividing line between the sublitto-
ral and elittoral zones is fixed by Kjellman at a depth of about
40 m. in Bohuslen, and this figure seems to suit the conditions on
the soutlnvest coast of Norway too. „0n the coasts of Nordland
and Firrmark", says M. Foslie in a letter to me, ,,algae may ge-
nerally be found down to 40—50 in., but vegetatioir mostly occur's
to a depth of only about 30 m."
With regard to the vertical distribution of animals, STUXBERt;
fixes the limit between the sublittoral and elittoral zones in the
Sibei-ian polar water's at 30 — 40 fathoms, but I think it is best
to keep to the algologists' limit, for a lar'ge number of animals is
found irr the seaAveed zone. As far as I krrow, Norwegian alg-
ologists have accepted Kjellman's division, and I would suggest
that zoologists also should test its practicability for animals too.
If it be necessary to have a finer division, Michael Saks's zones
should be given a new ti'ial.
As algae vegetation only r'eaches down to a certain depth, the
(|uairtity will to some extent depend upon the inclinatiorr of the bot-
tom. On a rock which forms an angle of 30" with the hoi'izon,
ther'c Avill, other things being equal, be much moi-e algae than if
the rock were per'pendiculai'. The space between the shor'e line
and the lower algae limit, which may be called the growing area
for algae, has a definitB propoi'tion to the angle of inclination. Here
again the same remar'ks as on page 230 ai-e applicable, and the
same mathematical explarrafion stands good. It will be found that
the growing ar-eas are in iiivorse propoi'tion to the sinus of the
andes of inclination.
') Bidiag tir Knndskaben oni Algevegetationen ved Norgi^s Vestkyst
Berg. Mus. Aarb. 189.1—95. No. XVI.
Combinntiou.
L'.Jo
Notes on the animal life in some of the (lords examined.
In tlic small Hords surroniKiiug 8aiKlhoino, a Ibw (lro(i<,'-inj,'-s
were made, and the result was so far satisfactoiT as to enable us
to form an opinion of the cliaraeter of the animal life in these
liords. Of annelides, the followinir were noticed: — Hannotlior
iiiipar. LcjiiduiiulKs cinviis, PhijUoduiv mactihita. N('iihtli;/s ciliatn,
X. cocca, ())ii(i)liis conch i/lcf/a, Lcodicc itorrcj/irn, Areiiicoln marina,
Potnniilla nviilecta. FiH(jranu imidcja, Stcrnaains fosnor. In „fjaM'en"
near tSund farm, several specimens of Echhims paUasi were taken.
Of echinoderms') were taken e. g. Ctcnodiscnn cnspatus and
Solaatcr syrteHsif, and of brachiopods and molluscs: — TeieJnatulina
caput serpentit:, T. scptcntrionali^: Pcctcn wJandicas. P. septemradiatus,
Modiolaria lærujafa. Leda minutn, Portlandia tenuis, P. lentieuln,
Area pectaucaloides, Cardium fasciatum. C. minhmim, Astarte banlsi,
A. sulcata, A. coiDin-essa, Xeæra arctica,X.obesa, N. ohesa vnr. (jlacialis,
Saanciua arctica, Zirphæa crispata, Margarita groenlandica, Machce-
roplax obscura, Trochas occidentalis, Amauropsis islandica, Xafica
affinis. Admete riridula, Beta declivis, B. rn<iu1((ta. P. tmaicostata,
Ti/phloinangelia nivalis, Trophon clatratus rar. ijuinieri. T. bar-
ricensis, Buccinum undatam, Neptunea despecta. Amphlsphijra glo-
bosa, A. hiemalis. Of Amphipoda may be mentioned: — Lepidepe
cream umbo, Ampelisca eschrichti, Paroediceros jjropinqvus, Aceros
phijllonijx, Paraplenstes latipes, Acanthonotosoma serratum, Sgrhoe
crenulato. Of Dccapoda: — Pandahis annulicornis, P. borealis,
P. brerirostris, Crangon almani. Pontophihis iiorregiciis. Sabinea
scptemcarinata, S. scptemccrinata var. sarsi, HippoJi/ti' fiiiiiiiardi, H.
spinas, H. lilljeborgi, H. polaris. Eupagnras ]iabcscens, Galathea
dispersa, Mnnida rugosa. Of fish in these small fiords, the follow-
ing were taken: — Centridermichthys uJicinatas, Drepanopsetta
platessoides and Lumpenus lampretiformis. Especially characteristic
for the fiord between Sandhoi'uo and Gildeskaal was the large
number of Dccnpoda. There was a good fishing place for Sebastes
marinas in the fiord. There arc several boreal forms among the
above mentioned animals, but a more thorough examination than I
was able to make would probably show that the arctic forms are
in the majority.
The Skjerstad Fiord has a fauna which corresponds to
chat of the fiords surrounding Sandhorno. There too, we made several
hauls so that we got a more perfect result. Of Coelenti-rat t which
were noticed the following may be mentioned: —
Lucernaria qradricor)tis, Alrgonium digitatiim, Paraspongodes
fruticosa, Cladiscas gracilis. PtraeditwrUia arenaren, Actinostola
callosa. Of Echinodermuta : — Antedon tenella, Ophiura robusta
Ctenodisct(s crispatus, PsiUtster andromeda, Hippasterias phrygiana^
Solmter papposus, Asteriaj millleri, Strongylocentrotus droebachiensis'
Simtangus purpurcus etc. Of Polychceta: — Hnrmothoc impar, H.
oerstedi, Leanira tetragona, Eumida sanguinea, Glyceria capitcita,
Onuphis conchylcga, Xcreis 2^elagica, Leodice norregica, Brada vil-
losa, Eumenia erassu, Xicomaehe lumbricalis, Pectinaria hyberborea,
Maldane biceps, Terebellides stromi. Telepus eircinnatas, Potamilla
np.glecta. Of Brachiopods and Mollusks wei-e observed: — Wald-
heimia cranium, Tcrebratulinn septcnfrionalis, Anomia aeuleata,
Pecten islnndiciis, P. vitrcas, Xacahi fumiduhi, X. tenuis, Leda
pernula, L. minuta, Portlandia lucida. P. tenuis. P. lenticula, Area
ptctanculoides, Cardium fasciatum, C', minimum, Astarte banksi, A.
') Asterias rubens occurred in monstrous s
thiown its arms around a Cyprina idandka, \vl
crmata. Ajinitf flcxuoKus. A. croulinciisis. Xmni arctini, X. sub-
torta. X. casjiidata, Saxicava arrlini. J)fulidiu»t < utale. Siphono-
dentidium vitreum, Tecfuru rirgiura. Lepcta cocca. Puucturella noa-
ehi)ia. Xatica affinis, Lillunnu rudis, Rissoa jeffreysi, Scalaria.
groenlandica (s), Admctc viridula. Bcla rugulala, B. tri-rcllyana,
B. tcnuicostata. Typhbm<nigelia nivali». Trophon barviccnsis, Bucci-
num imdutum, B. flnmurchia)iam {?}. Xeptunea despecta, Siphoebar
(s), Cylichna alba, Philine quadrata, Philine finmarckica, Dcndro-
notus 7-obustus. Campespe major, Coriiph"lla rufibranchialis. C. uord-
gaurdi.
AnipluiMHJa: — Anibasia daniclsaii, Calisonui crenata. 7'ryphosa
horingi, Paruphorus oculatus, Amjiclisca eschrichti, Stegoccphalus
sitnilis, Metopa alderi, Monoeulodes longirostris, Aceros phyllony.r,
Paramphitoe pulchella, Parupleustes latipes, Syrrhoe. crcnulata,
Rhacotropis helleri, E. macropus, Halirages fnlvocinctas. Mclita
dentata, Ischyrocerus minutus, Æginella spinosa.
Isopoda : — Miinn'o2}sis typica, Eurycope eornuta.
Schizopoda: — Bm-eumysis tridcns, Erythrops goiisi, E. abys.io-
rum, Amblyops abbreviata, Mysideis insignis.
Decapoda: — Pasiphwa t/irda, Pandahis annulicornis, P. bo-
realis, Sclcrocrangon boreas. Pontophilus norvegicits, Sabinea septem
cnrinata, Hippolyte gaimardi, H. spinns, H. lilljeborgi. H. polaris,
Eupagurus pubescens, Hyas araneus, H. coarctatus.
Monuitcidia : — Polycurpa libera.
In the Skjerstad Fiord, as already mentioned, tiie warm, salt
bottom water (t = G — 7", .s = about 35 ° oo) cannot penetrate,
or at any I'ate not in sufficient quantity to have any dominating
influence on the natural conditions in the fiord. Here too. how-
ever, boreal forms occur in no small numbers, although arctic forms
are undoubtedly found m much larger numbers than boreal ones.
And when one finds that the fiord contains such forms as Potamilla
neglecta, Necera arctica, X. subtorta, Siphonodentalium vitreum, Phi-
line finmarchica, Campespe major, Sclcrocrangon boreas, Polycurpa
libera etc., there is reason to conclude that the fauna of the Skjer-
stad Fiord is predominantly ai-etic
The same must also be said of Skjomen, the Kanstad Fiord
(cf. Hydrography, p. 20).
I will not give any detailed list of the forms noticed in these
latter fioi'ds,' but only mention that in the Ogs Fiord wei-e found,
amongst others, Ctenodiscus crispatus, Pectinaria hyperborea, Acan-
thozone cuspidata, in the Kanstad Fiord Asterias lincii was found
and in the Kirk Fiord, Clymenia 2}>'"etermissa. Eteonc depressa,
Defrancia lucernaria etc.
On the other hand, it has been pi'oved that in those fiords, or
pai-ts of fiords, where the ocean water has free access (t = 6 —
7° C, s = about 35 "/oo) the fauna in the deep water is predomi-
nantly boreal. (Cf. Hydrography, p. 19). With respect to the Vest
Fiord, Professor G. 0. Saks') many years ago called attention to
the fact that in the littoral and sublittoral zones some characteristic
arctic animal forms certainly do occur, while the fauna in the deep
water is southern in its character, and corresponds in most respects
to the fauna on the west coast of Norway.
By the aid of the material which has been obtained by hydro-
graphical research in recent years, we are now able to explain the
reason for this state of things. On the surface, the warm current,
which flows northwards, makes itself most felt on the outer coast,
but its influence decreases the further one goes in the fioi'ds. But,
') NogU Bemerkninger om den Marine Fai
Kyster. Troniso Museums Aarshefter, II. Ti
Karakter ved X.irL'.-s lie.
0, 1879.
2 36
O. Nonlg-aa cl.
on the contrary ^vith regai'd to the warm bottom water, which
is almost independent of continental factors, and which, therefore,
can retain its propeiiies almost unchanged during its course in the
tioi'ds.
And the observations made have shown that the temperature
and salinity of the bottom water in the Vest Fiord ditfers only
very slightly from that of the fiords on the west coast of Norway.')
The similarity in fauna which the zoological examinations have
brought to lig-ht are thus quite natural. As the Vest Fiord is the
last of the large fiords which has bottom water with a temperature
of 6 — 7° C. and a salinity of about :35 pro mille, it is also natural
that it forms the northern limit for many boreal and lusitanic forms.
Many southern' forms are also found in Malangen, but the arctic
species arc doubtless in the majority there, and this is still more
certainly the case in the Bals Fiord, the Ulfs Fiord, Lyngen and
Kvænangen. As Malangen, hydrogivaphically speaking, takes the
position of a kind of transition fiord, I will mention some of the
animal forms we dredged there.
Polychæta: — Harmothoe rarispina, H. nodosa, H. aspprrima,
Lepidonotus amondseni, Laetmonice filicornis, Leanira tetragona,
Nephtys incisa, N. ciliata, Leodica norvegica, Brada (jnmulosa,
B. granulata, Euphrosyne lorealis, Nicomache hiudnindis. Pecti-
narin koreni, Terebdlides strowi, Sabella pavonia.
Of Bryozoa, there are two very characteristic boreal species
which have their northern limit in Malangen, namely, K'metoskias
smitti and Domopora stellata. ,
Amphrpcda :"-) — Hyale nihoni. Sommes athli. Hipiiomcdon
jirophujnis. Ori-ltfJDiinrUii min/ifx. (). pfnguis. Tryphosn hoihufi.
Anonyx mfi/n.r. Li'jiiili'jicr-i-cinii midio. Lejitojiho.rns fith-nfus. Hai-
phiia nrglectii. H. .■<rn(ttii. An/ii'Ii-^'n iinicrocrjihfild. A. eschrichti ,
A. iiequiconiis. A. aitihlyops. lii/Jilis i/niiiiniiH. Biiphops tiibicola,
Sf('goceph((liis inflatu.-: S. s'nnUis. Audmiut ubyssi, Amphilocus teiivi-
manus, Stenothoe brevicornis, Metopa borealis, M. hruseli, Leuco-
thoe sjnnicarpa, Paroediceros lynccus. P. propinqvus, Monoculodes
borealis, M. tessellatus. M. btfiiiiffuus. M. hngirostris, M. packardi.
Halimedon megalopis, H. brcricidctir. Batliymedon obtusifrons, Aceros
phyUonyx, Pleiistcs pnnoplus. Paruniph'itoi' ussuiiilis. Ejili'micria tu-
bcrcvliita, E. loricata, Acantlionotosoma scrnifuin. Iphniuilni obesu,
Syrrhoii crenulata, Tiron acanthurus, E-iisii uti nuiuitus, Rhucotropis
helleri, HaUrages ftihocindus, Apherttsa bispinosa, A. tridentatu,
Cailiojmis laeviusculus, Dexaminc sp'tnosa, D. thea, Melphidipha bo-
rralis. Gfimmarus lonist(t. Meliln dciit((f((. Lilljeborgia jinllida. L.
fissicornis. J'rofome.di-in fiisrinfn. O'lnniutropsis mclanop^. Aiiijihifoi'
rubririil'i. Tucliyyoccnis diujilpc^. Cornjihiiini crdss'icoynr. I'ltfiold
phniipes. Dnllehtn sp.. rhlis'im uuiinin. .Kynirlhi spiiiosa. Cdprclbi
liiiaiyis.
Spakre Schneidkk had no opportunity to examine the great-
est depth of Malangen, so our dredgings form a suitable supplement
to Schneider's investigations. We brought to light 18 species of
amphipods, which wei'e new to the Malangen fauna, and most of
these were from the great depth where, as above mentioned,
8(;hneider did not make any dredgings. There are several bo-
real forms among the amphipods mentioned, but the ai'ctic ones are
however, in a small majority. EpnucrKi iiibnciilntji. which is a
') Of. NoBDOAABD, Stndier over natiirforhokleiie
H.vilrogiafi. Bei-g. Miis. Aaib. 1903, nv. 8, p. 32.
2) Heve I have also included the ampliipods whi
gim liy Sparrk Schneidkr. Cf. Mal.-xnoenf.jonleiis i-.wx
14, 1891.
■e foil
roni-ii
id in Maliui-
Mus. Aaish.
boreal form, has its northern limit in Malangen and Epimeiia loricata,
which is an arctic one, has here its southern limit. Of Cumacea.
I found for instance Diastylis goodsiri, which is a decided arctic
form. It was new to Malangen, which is the southern limit for
the species on our coast.
Schizopoda: — Borcopiiuusiu inermis, Boreomysis urctica, B.
tridens, Pseudomma roseum, Mysideis insignis, Alysis mixta.
Boreomysis tridens has not been found north of Malangen.
Deeapoda: — Pasijihæa tarda, Pandalus annulicornis, P. propin-
qnts, P. brevirostris, Crangon ahnani, Pontophilus norvegicus, Sahinea
septemcarinata, S. septemcarinata var. sarsi, Hippolyte sjnnus, H.
lilljeborgi, H. polaris, Bythocaris simplicirostris, Eupagurus pubeseens,
LitJiodes maja, Munida rugosa, Hyas coarctalus. Of those mentioned,
both Pandalus propinqvus and brevirostris have here their northern
limit. Respecting the fauna of Malangen, I refer to the mentioned
paper by Srarre Schneider. With the exception of the amphipods,
I have here only mentioned the forms which 1 pei'sonally observed
in the fiord.
Brachiopods and molluscs have long been considered to be
useful in forming a precise picture of the zoogeographical character
of a .given district. I will therefore arrange these animals in a
table, based upon the examinations which have been made by
Sparre Schneider'), the Norwegian North Atlantic Expedi-
tion-), C. W. S. AuKiviLLius''), Johan Hjort-*), A. M. Norman^),
G. 0. Saks«) and myself.
enfjc
') Kvænangeiis MoUusUfaiina, M;i
Tromso Mus. Asr.sh. 14, 1891.
-) Herman Friele & James A. Grieg. Mollusca III.
^) Hatsevei-tebrater fi'An nordligaste Tromso amt ocli
bang 111 Kgl. Sv. Vet. Akad. Handl. II, No. 4.
^) Herman Friele, Mollusken dei- erstfu Nordnieev
ilampfers „Midiael Sars" 1900 untei- Leitung von Hern
Berg. Mus. Aarb. 1902, Nr. 3.
■■■) Notes on the Natural History of East I'inmark.
'') Mollusca regionis arcticae Norvegiae.
hrt des Fischer
Dr. JoHAX Hjol
Brarhinpodn and Mollusca
Brachiopoda.
RIii/ii(Ii()i}clhi psittacen. Ciiemn'..
Terchrittulina caput serpentis, I.
T. scptvntiionalis, Couth
Wal'Uiciiiiia cranium, 0. F. Mi'
Pelecypoda.
Anomia ephippium, Lin
A. aciileata, MOll
Pecten inlandinis, 0. F. Mull.
P. seplcmradiafns, O. F. Mull
P. tigrinus, 0. F. Mull
P. striatiis, 0. F. MiJLi
P. titypMS. Chem.s
F. abyssoriUH, IjOV
P. inibrifer, Lov
P. groenlnndieus, Sow
Mytilus cdulis, Lix
Modiola modiolus, Lin
M. phascolina, Phil
Pelecypoda.
Modiohnia tUscors, Iak
^V. hvcigata, Gv.\x
M. cornigala, Stimps
M. nu/ra, Gray
Daciijdmm riheuiii, JfpLL
Ci enella dent-ssntn, JIont
Xtiniln hiiiiis, Mont
X dilphinodnnia, Jlion
Leda pernula, Mlli
L. minuta, 0. F. Mltll
Portlandia liicida. Lov
P. inlennedia, M. Sars
P. lentiadn, Fabr
P. friyidn, Toreli
Yoldin liiimlida. Say
Area ptctwiridoides, ScHAfciii
A. p. var. se))tit>tnoiialis, G. O. Saus .
A. glarialis, Gray
Limopsis winiitn, Phil
Cnrdhint echinatuiii, Lix
C. edule, Lin
C. ciliatum, Fabr
C. fasciaiuin, JIont
C. miyiiiiium, Thil
SaTipes grocnlaiidiea, Lix
Cypr'wa islnmlien, Lix
Astarte boiealis, Ciiemx
A. bankni, Leach
A. sidcata, d-.x Costa
A. (omjiressa, Lix
A. crenata. Gray
Vcmts gallina, liix
V. ovata, Penn
Lttcina borealis, Lix
Axinns flexuosa, SIoxt
A. sarsi, Phii
A. goiddi, Phil
A. obesits, Verb
Axinopsis orbicidala, G. O. Sars
Cyamium niimttum, Fabr
Kdlia suhorbkularis, Mont
Montacuta bi:entata, Moxt
M. maltza.n, Verk
Mactra elliptiea, Brown
M. sitblrwicata, da Costa
Syndosmya nitida, Mull
Tellina ealcarea, Chemn
T. balthica, Lix
T. fabula, Groxov
Solen pclbicidiis. Pen x
Thracia truncata, Browx
Neæra avctica, M. Sars
jV. obe.ia, Lov
X. obesa, var. glacialis, G. O. Sars...
JV. subforta, G. 0. Sars
Poromya granulaln. Nyst
Corbula yibba, Olivi
Mya arenaria, Lix
M. truncata, Lix
Panopca norvegica, Spexgi
Saxicara arelica, Lix
+ I +
Molliiw,
c
W
1
£.1
r
Sciiphopoilu.
Dentalium entidis, Lix
+
. |_
+ 1 +
+ 1 +
D. occid.'vtalc, Stimps
■'^iplionodciitnliniti ritrnim, M. Sabs
Placophora.
Hnnlei/ia haideyi, Bean
!■■ +
Tracliijdermoii aUrns. Lin
' jl
T. ruber, Lowe
-1_
+ . +
Tonicella marmnrea, Va
Gastropoda.
Patina jiellncida, Lin
Acmra test^diiialin, JIl'li
Tedxira ridx lln, Fabr
T- ririjiiica, MiJLL
T. fidra, 0. F. SIuli .^ ^ ^ ! ^ ' ' ! ! ^
Lepeta coeca, 0. F. Mijll -^'-
Pundunlla iwacMna, Lin -|-
Scisswella crispafa, Flem
xVøWo ia costnlafa, Møll
Cydostrema pelferseni Friele
Margarita lielicina, Fabr —
M. yrocnlandica, Chemn
M. cinerea, Couth
M. olivncca, Brown
Afaehwroj lax obsiura, Colth
M. vnricosa, Migh
Gibbida iineraiia, Lin +
G. tnniida, Mont ! -|-
Trochus ocndeiitalis, Migh -|-
Veliitina Uecigata, Penx •. ! -)-
V. laniyera, Møll
V. zonafa, Gould
V. fcxilis, Mont
v. a-yptospira. Medd
Lamellaria Metis, O. F. Muli
Marspiiia jr/odita, Lev
M. micromphala, Berch
M. groenlandica, JFøll
Onchidiopsis gladalis, M. Sars
AmpnUina smiihi. Brown
Avinnropsis islandica, Gmel
Xatliri ( Lnnctia) groenlandica, Beck
.V. ( Lini((tia) monfagui, Fokb
N. (Lnnatin) nana, Møll
N. affinis, Gmel
Triehotripis boreidis, Brod. & Sow
T. conica. Møll i . .
Littoriim httorea, I-ix -|-
L. rudis var. groenlandica, Møli ^ . . -}"
i. palliatn, Say
i. obtnsata, Lin
Lacuna pallidula, da Costa
i. divnricaia, Fabr
Hydrobia minuta. Totten
ff. «?iw, Pesx
Onoba striata. Mimt
-r
+
+
+
+
+
+
-f
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Gastropoda.
Onoha aathus. Goild
Chiyula castnnea, Møi.l
('. twnichda, (i. 0. Sars
Alvania jeffreysi. Waller
A. jan iiiai/eni, 1'riele
Yi'issort parva, da Costa
7.'. pnrrn. var. iuferruiita, Adams
/,'. hi<o„.iiir,n,. Ald
.<iL;;n„ l.hlw.rhis. FaBU
.h'ffn'ijs'i.i .jlnhiilnris, Jeff
TariitiUnjj^is iiriciiln, Stimps. . . .
Lnrnir/I,, iH,l„l,i, Lov
Cerithiiiiniis oislulata, Moll I
LæococlUis granosii, Wood
Scnlaria groe: Inn dica, (Jhemn +
■S. oblusieontaia, S. Wood
Parthenia eximia, Jeff
P. apiralis, Mont
Odosfoinia imidentatn, Mo.nt
O. tlin-itfl, HANLElf I . .
Aurkulhia insculida. Mont j +
Ltosto)uia ebuniea, Stimps : . .
Eulima bilinenia, Alder '
K. stcnostomn, Jeff j
Homalngyra atomus. Phil
Admela » iridula, Fabr | +
Taranin cirrata, Brug
Mavgilia (Teretia) amæna, Q. O. Sars
}r. (Tliesbia) nana, Lov +
Bela pyramidal is. Strøm
B. pingeli, Beck
B. caiiccllata, Migh
B. obliqva, Møll
/>'. cinerea, Møll
B. nohilis, Møll
/;. fivaUirifi, M0LI
/;. IKi/llllltd, Tkosch •
/;. e.rarnta, Møll
B. harpularia, Couth
/;. trevelgaim, Turt
B. decussata, Couth
IS. tenuicostata, M. Sars
B. bicarinata, var. violacea, Micih
B. kobeUi, Verk
B. simple.1-, Midd
li. sarsi, Verr
'I'liphhini'ivgelia nivalis, Lov
Sjiiriilrojiis carinata, Phil
.Mrhi/nid alba, Jepf
'I'ld/ilii'ii truncatns, Strøm
r. riathratus, LiN
'/'. hiirrimisis, Johnst
Purpura lapillus, Lix
Asfyris rosacea, Gould
\assa incrassaia, Strøm
Buccinum undalum, Lin
B. grocnlainlicum, Chemn
B. undulatmn. Møll
B. fiiimarchiamtm, Verk
B. hjdrophanum, Hancock
B. humphregsiamim, Ben
Neptunea despccfa, Lin
+
+ +
+
-f-
+
:|
+
-j-
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
—
+
+
-4-
-f
+
+
+
..
+
+
+
-h
4-
+
+
+
+ (s)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Gastropoda.
Volnfopsis vorcegica, Chemn
Uliko fnrtoin, Bean
Sipho islandicMS, Chemn
5. gracilis, da Costa, var. glaber. Verkr.
S. iurritus, M. Sars
S. lachcsis, M0RCH
■!?. verh-iizeni, Kobelt
iS. lafdricats, JIøll
S. ebur, Møucii
S. fudformis, Brod
Borcofiisus berninensis, King
Acera bullata, MiJLi
Cylichna alba. Brown
C. prnpiiiqra, M. Sars
Toinatina nitidula, Lov
Utricuhis inincatidus, Brcg
U. pcrtenuis, Migh
Amphisphyra hyaliwi, Turt
A. hiemalis. Couth
Scaphander puncto-striatus. Migh
Pkiline scabra, Mull
P. fiinnarchica, M. Sars
P. fingiiis, a. 0. Sars
P. ijradrata. S. Wood
P. lima, Brown
fe.x
Niidihranchiati
Doris oUrrMn, 0. F. MuLt
Lamellidoris bilamcllafa, Lin
L. mwicata, O. F. Mull
Acantliodoris pilosa, 0. F. Mull
Triopia larer, O. F. Mull
Dendrorotus frondosus, Asc
D. robusfiis, Verr
Æolida papulosa, Lin
Æ. pusilla, Friele
CurypheUa nifibranchialis, Johnst
C. sarsi, Friele
Limnjmiifiii capilala. O. F. Mfi.i
From tlicso tables, it will he seen that Malangen, Kvænangen
and the lionls of Ka.st Finiiuu'k for the most part have the same
molluscs. It is probable that further investigation would show a
still greater similarity than that found in the tables. It may,
however, with certainty be aflirmed, that there arc moi-e boreal
forms in Malang-en and KviPnangen than in the East Finmark fiords,
in the latter tiiere are, on the other hand, more arctic species.
The warm cui-rent which flows northwards also exerts some influence
in East Finmark. On --V* 1899, at the mouth of the Porsanger
Fiord, at a deptii of 250 mtrs., I registered 2".75 C. (p. 8), which
proved that a comparatively warm current was seeking to pene-
trate at the bottom. The teinpei-ature at a depth of 2()() mti's. was
1.3 and salinity ;|4..54.
According to (Jkax. on Aug. 2sth I'.iOO, at the mouth of the
Porsanger Fio'rd, the following contlitions were registered from
..Michael Sars": —
combination.
239
Depth: — 0 I'O
Temp.: — (i.n O.J
Sal.: — 3;5..-.<i M.u
.■U.:!ii
.M.l
iiinlii. Piiii... wliicli
A little farther in tiie tionl. Liinoii
a boreal lonn, was taken, aceordiiiy to Fhiklk.
In the Taiia and Varang-er Fiords, .such eompaiatively IiIkI'
temperatures at tiie bottom as 2.8 and 3.1 (p. 20) have also been
resristered. So that one must not expect to find an altotrether
unmixed ai-ctic fauna in East Finmark cither, although the arctic
forms are greatly in the majority. Such species as Perten fitjrinus,
Venus ov(it(( and (/(itHiHi. Dentalutm entalis. Patina iiellucida, Gih-
buhi cineraria and tiinnda, Natira inontaijui etc. must be con-
sidered to be decided boreal forms, and yet they have puslied their
Avay up to East Finmark.
Professor G. O. S.vrs has found several boreal forms at Hasvik
in Sorø. This place has not been hydrographically investigated,
but 1 am inclined to think that the deep channel, which penetrates
in from the ocean along the island, has comparatively warm water
at the bottom. Another stopping place for boreal forms is the
Malangen, where the bottom temperatui-e at the greatest depths
varies between 4 and 5".5 C. but the Vest Fiord is the most
definite limit for marine fauna on the Norwegian coast, a very
large number of boreal animal forms being found here, but not
further north. It is interesting to be able to connect this fact
with the one that the Vest Fiord is the most northerly of the large
Norwegian fiords in which ocean water dominates the natural conditions
at the depths (t = 0 — 7°, s = ca. 35 %o). As a general zoogeo-
graphical result, it may be stated that, Avith respect to the large
important fiords, whicii are open to the ocean, tiie lusitanic and
boreal forms occur as far up as the Vest Fiord in larger numbers
than the arctic ones. It is first in the Malangen that the arctic
forms are in the majority, and this even more noticeable in the
Kvænangen and Porsanger Fiords, the latter having almost unmixed
arctic fauna. The inner parts of the fiords and the branch fiords
have retained more of the arctic .species. For instance, while in
the Salten Fiord, the southern forms are in the majority, we find
that in the Skjenstad Fiord, which lies further inland, and in the
Beier Fiord whicli is a little farther south, the arctic animals are
more profuse than the southern ones. The Rauen Fiord has not
yet been investigated, but it is probable that also there arctic forms
will be predominant.
Generally speaking, these facts coincide with the opinion ex-
pressed long ago by Prof. G. 0. Saes.') What I have tried to
adduce is the connection between zoogeographieal and hydrogra-
phical limits.
The northernmost Lophohelia reef, hitherto known.
In his description of Ophiacantha spectahiUs. G. (J. Sars-)
says: — „I have found this important species at one place only,
namely near Bodo, where it is not so very scarce between the
corals (Lophohelia proUfera), which are abundant at a depth of
from 80—100 fathoms. It is generally so firmly attached to the
tangled branches of the corals, by means of its spiked arms, that
it is exceedingly difficult to get it loose." On June 19th 1878. the
Norw, North Atl. Exp. took two specimens of this echinoderm at
St. 255 in the Vest Fioi.l (cs" i-_>' N., 15" 40' E.). The depth
is given as being (\2i ml is., ti-niperature ()..5 and the bottom
matei'ial. clay.
About the sMuic time. O. sjiertuhilis was found by \". S-|"ii.m
in the outer part of the Troudhjem Fiord. In a paper wiitteii
in recent years Stok.m') says that this species occurs in largo
quantities on Lophohelia proUfera in the outer part of the Troud-
hjem Fiord. According to Gkikg,-) also Hoyle has mentioned
the species from the Faeroe Channel (433 fathoms). I do not
know if Lophohelia proUfera is found at the latter place, but it
is veiy probable, for M. Sars') mentions that it is found off llie
Shetland Isles. Verrili/) too mentions spectahiUa as found off
Nova Scotia, 1883, 131 fathoms, one specimen. Nothing is said
about 0. apectahiUs having been found together with Lophohelia
proUfera, but in another place, Verrill writes (1. c. p. 53(i): ,.L.
proUfeia B. range, 100 to 300 fathoms, off Nova Scotia; lOUO
fathoms, dead, 1884, rare." There is thus probably nothing which
makes it unlikely that the ophiurid in question may have l)een
attached to the coral here mentioned.
When working out my material of echiuoderms, Grieg'^) mentions
that KoEHLER has given 0. s2)ccfabilis as being found in the Bay
of Biscay, but as Koehlee's specimens appear to be somewhat
different to Sahs's species, Grieg raises doubt as to their identity.
The following table gives some important data concerning the places
where I have found spectahiUs.
0. spectahiUs, G. 0. Sars.
Date Place
{.■At. & Long.
Dredged
between
Ul.
Depth
of
water
sample
m.
Temp.
C.
Salin.
cont.
Bottom.
"/s 1899 ' Tranedybet
«8» lo'.s N. ..^ .„„
1.5» 49'.o E. h^^O-^^O
500
eo^s
35.06 iLophohelia
28/ ifiQQ The
««:}!;:- aoo_«oo
500
60.3
35.11 \ Lophohelia
1
'O/a 1900 Anio
?r!; 1:1300-400
400
b«.55
35.18 LophoheUa
) Nogle bemerkninger om den maiim; faun
lige kyster. Tromsø Mus. Aarsli., II, 1879.
^) Nye Kchinodermev fra den norske Kyst.
Selsk. Forh. 1871.
Se,,., p. 12.
Arno is situated outside the mouth of the Salten Fiord near
Bodø, and Tranodybet is a little farther in than st. 255 of the
Norw. North Atl. Exp. in the Vest Fiord, the bottom here is
given as being of clay, but there has probably been a hai'd spot
which is , accounted for by the presence of Lophohelia, which was
the case in Ti'anodybet.
There is thus reason to conclude that 0. spectahiUs is so closely
connected with Ijophohelia proUfera as to make the latter almost
a necessity for the former. This does not, however, at all inqily
that where ever Lophohelia occurs, 0. spectahiUs is also found. This
is an interesting instance of one animal's dependence upon another.
') Oversigt over Trondh.jemsfjordens fauna. Beretning fra arbeidskomiteen
for Trondlijenis biologiske .station 1900.
3) Ophiurioidea, p. 24. The Norw. North Atl. Exp.
") Fossile dyrelevninger fra Quartærperioden, p. 92.
♦) Results of the Explorations made by the steamer Albatross.
Ann. Rep. of the Comm. of Fish and Fishery for 1883.
5) Oversigt over det nordlige Norges echinodermer. Berg. Mus. Aarb.
1902. n,). 1. p. 14.
240
0. Nordgaanl.
and it will be interesting- to see what other animals exist together
Avith Lophohelia. But first I will mention a few facts about the
coral itself. This easily recognized species has been found in several
of the fiords on the west coast of Norway up to the Vest Fiord,
in rather deep water (about 150—500 in.). As far as I know,
my specimens have been taken at the most northerly place for tliis
species (Tranødybet, the Tys Fiord I). And 1 am inclined to think
that no living specimens will be found farther north, as the colonies
live on our coast under unusually uniform and settled natural con-
ditions, with a temperature of 6—7" C. and a salinity of about
35 7oo. There is reason for supposing that at Verrill's locality
..off Nova Scotia" the conditions are similar. At any rate, Yerbill
(1. c. p. oOG) mentions that oft" Capo Sable the temperature, at a
depth of «5 — 131 fathoms, varies between 42» and 4(5'' Fhr.
(5".5 — 8" C). Cf. stations nr. 2065—2071. The bottom at a
couple of these stations is given as being of coral. It is, therefore,
probable that the temperature here too is near 6 — 7° C. at those
places where Lophohelia prolifera occurs alive. According to Verrill,
only dead specimens were taken at 1060 fathoms, and if it be
remembered that in the Norwegian waters the coral in question
does not extend beyond the boundary of the ocean water, it tempts
me to conclude that the species cannot live at a depth of 1060
fathoms oft' Nova Scotia, notwithstanding that the fall in temperature
is not particularly great. Yerrill (1. c. p. 503) says „The bottom
temperatures between 1 000 and 2 000 fathoms were usually between
37° F. and 39° F., and rarely 40°." If Lophohelia from 1060
fathoms had existed at this place under present natural conditions,
it ought tlierefore also now to be able to thrive in a temperature
of 3—4° C. But the investigations hitherto made in Norway seem
to contradict this possibility. A couple of sugg^estions may be made
to account for the occurrence of LophoheUa at such a great depth.
The colonies may have been transported from some other locality,
so that when the dredgings were made from the „Albatross" they
were in a secondary layer, or a fall in the bottom level may have
taken place. There ai'e instances of a rise of the bottom in a
couple of places in Norway where Lophohelia has been brought
several meters higher than the present water level.
Prof. Michael Sars') was the first who discovered Lo^>/i(^/(''//''y
liroUfera at a height of 30 meters above sea level, tliis was at
Drobak in the Kristiania Fiord, he paid great attention to this
occurrence and gave a good description of it. Later on, more light
has been thrown upon the subject by Piof. W. C. Brøgger,-) who
writes in part as follows: — „From the time of the deepest sub-
mergence of the Kristiania reg-ion, an epiglacial fauna is known,
which lias lived at a great depth, at least 150 meters. This is
the famous dead coralrecf at Drøbak, soutli of Ki'istiania, where
tile shore, from 60 meters below the sea-level to about 30 meters
above it, is covered witli the remnants of a great reef of Lophohelia
prolifera.'-' J^røgger also shows the height of the reef above the
sea-level (30 m.) + the minimum depth of the coral in the present
fiords (150 m.) answers to the upper marine boundary at Drøbak
(180 m.) — „a proof, that the Lopliohelia-veef was formed, partly
at any rate, during the deepest submergence of the land at Drøbak."
A similar argument holds good with regard to tlie other occurrence
at Stenkjær at the end of the Trondhjem Fiord.
1) Fossile dyielevningev fra quartscrperioden, p. 7H — 77.
-; Om de senglaciale og postglaciale iiiveaufoiandiinger i ICi
N. G. U. No. 31, p. 182-187, p. 689 (Englisli Summary).
Natural conditions at the time when Lophohelia lived at Drøbak
and Stenkjær cannot have been very ditterent to what they arc
now in the deep western fiords, and it may from this be concluded
that the Gulf Sti'eam, at least from the epiglacial time, filled the
channels and basins in the Norwegian fiords with its warm water.
Together with Lophohelia. M. Sars found various other cha-
racteristic forms, e. g. Pecteii rifreas. P. aratu.'^. Lima exeavata,
Area nodalosa fete.
These animals very frequently follow Lophohelia in our fiords
at the present day, but in no definite state of dependence. Further,
the presence of these animals proves that the natural conditions in
the depths of the fiords during the epiglacial time could not have
been so very dissimilar to the present conditions. But, on the
other hand, the deposits in the shallow waters plainly show that
in the upper layers of water, quite a different state of things was
prevalent to that of the present day.
It is interesting to give a list of the most important animals
which have been observed together with Lophohelia at the most
northern localities where this species has been found.
•'% 1900, Arnø, 300—400 m.
Lophohelia prolifera. Pall., Paramuricea plaeonuni. Lis., OpMa-
cantha speetabilis. G. 0. Sars, Flastra barleei, Busk, Lima excavata,
Fabr., Lamellaria latens, 0. F. Mijll., Pandalus propinqvus, G.
O. Sars, Pontophilns norrcgicas, M. Sars.
"Vs 1899, Tranødybet, 450—530 m.
I IjOjjhohelia prolifera, Pall., Ophiacantha speeUihilis, G. O. Sars,
Pteranter militaris, O. F. Mull., Pandalus propinqvus, G. 0. Sars,
Hippohjte polaris. Sab., Galatlwiles irinentalas. Esmark.
-"■k 1899, The Tys Fiord I, about 500 m.
A sounding at the beginning of our dredging stated a deptli
of 725 m. and at the end 500 m. We drove along very quickly,
however, and our line was hardly long enougji, so that we got
nothing from the clay at 725 m. It was first at the edge that
the trawl began to take in anything, and when wt^ drew it up
from a depth of about 500 meters, the net was half full of living
and dead branches of Lophohelia, on which was found: —
Pidvinulma panctidata, D'OKb.
There were also: —
Lophohelia prolifera. Pall., Protanthea simplex, Carlg., Ophia-
cantha spectahiJis, G. 0. Sars, Ophioscolcx glaeialis, Mull, and
Trosch., 0. purpureas, Di'b. and Kor., Pterustcr militaris, 0. F.
MiJLL., Eehinus elegans. Di'is. and Kor., Linens cinereus, Punnett,
Leodico norvegica, JjIN., L. gunneri. Storm, Terehratulina caput-
serpentis, Lin., Waldheimia cranium, Mijll., Lima excavata, Fabr.,
Pecten vitreus, Chemn., Pleurohranchus plumula, Mont., Metopa
alderi, Bate, Janira maculosa, Leach., Pandalus propinqvus, G.
0. Sars, Hippohjte polaris, Sab., Galathodes tridenfatus, Esmaek,
Mwuida nigosa, (J. (_). Saus, il/, tciiaimaiia, (i. (). Saks, Ciona
intestiiiidis. Li.v.
Some of the species mentioned have here their noi'thern limit,
e. g. Protanthea simplex, Echinus elcgans, Lima excavata, Galt-
thodes tridendatus, A wide distribution southwards has for instance
Galathodes tridentatus, which, according to Milnk-Edwards and
Bouvier, extends right down to the west coast of Marocco, and
Lima excavata, of which Friele and Grieg write in their account
of the Mollusca of the Norw. North Atlantic Exp.: — „It is also
known in the deep water lictuccii tlie llclnii
cs ami the
•aeroe
Isles, in Poi'tu<ral, the Azores ami SciicL'^ainliia."
From the investitrations made hy .M. ami (■
. (). Saus. ;
s well
as V. Stohm, we liave a tiilcral>l\ comiilrtc
knowli'd-r
of the
fauna of the eoral regions in our lionls. Stoum has jiiven a con-
cise account of the conditions in tile 'rrondhjem Fiord, witii a map
s!io\vin<r tlie position of the corals, and to this I would beg- refe-
rence. I will here also emphasize the fact that the characteristic
forms on the episrlacial LophohclKt-reei at Drobak (Peefoi ritrtus,
P. ((nitiis. Lima ('rcanttn. Area noduJosa etc.) also at the present
time show themselves to be faithful companions. Howevei-, 1 do
not tliink practical boundaries can be drawn between tlie fauna
which are connected with Lopliolwliu and those which are connected
with othei' corals, such as. Piirafiorghi (irhnrea, Pitramiiy'iccd placomns
or Piimnoa lepadifera.
It may, on the other hand, be said that the le^ion of the
deep water corals lias its detinite, decided fauna, which is parti-
cularly uniform in M the large Norwegian fiords to which the
ocean water has free access, from the l^okn to the Vest Fioi'd.
There is a coral facies of animals, just as there is a clay facies.
A few words on the fauna in clay.
The deep channels and basins in tlie fiords (150—200 m. and
more), of which clay forms the bottom and into which the ocean
water has access, have also their characteristic animal life.
And since the investigations made by G. 0. ISaks, in the
sixties, at the fishing- place Skroven and at other places in the
Vest Fiord, we know that there are especially interesting- forms on
the clay-bottom of the depths. Such as, for instance, JsideUa li'ip-
piiris, Uloci/athiis arcticus, Bliizocrinus lofotensis, Brisinga coronata,
Flustra abyssicola etc. The fauna at Skroven, where I have made
a very successful haul with a trawl at a depth of 350—410 m.,
is very rich. In addition to the forms just mentioned, it was quite
usual to find such species as the following, on the clay depths in
the Vest Fiord and those of its arms into which ocean water pene-
trates at the bottom: —
Foraminifera : — Astrorhiza arenaria, Saccammina sphærica,
Stort}iosj)hæra idhidu, Bathysifon filiforniis, Mhabdammina abyssorum.
Echinodefrmata : — AmpMhins norvegica, Ophioscolex glacialis,
Fsilaster andromeda, Stichopus tremidiis, Bathyplotes natans, Meso-
thiiria iiitestuudin. CucumarUi Jiispida. Myriotrochus vifreus.
Polychadu: — Ld'fmoniir filiroruis. Leanira tetragona, Terre-
bellided strdmi.
Mollusca: — Nuculu tionidiila. rorUnudm hu-'ida. MaUetia
obtusa, Area pectunculoides, Linioptiis nnmiia, (.'(irdiinii minimum,
KellieUa milliaris, Syndosmy a-^pccies, A'ecera obesa, X. rostmta,
Deidalium occidentah, D. agile, SiphonodcntAium quinquangulare.
Scaphander lignarius.
Ostracoda: — Cypridina norvegica.
Isopoda : — J/MJino^w/*- typicu, Eiiiyeope eunuda.
Schizopoda: — Boreomysis tridens, Psendomma roseiim.
Decapoda: — Pontophilus norvegicus, Munida rugosa, M. tenui-
mana.
Afeidiu: — Ascidia gelatinosa.
The above list gives some of the species which are constantly
found on the clay at the bottom of rather deep water. Many of
these forms are undoubtedly mud-eaters, more especially is this the
case with reg-ard to the above mentioned Holothurioidea. Some of them
appear to be dependent upon ocean water (t = 6—7" C, s = about
3.") "on). According to OsTFiidHKX,') BuUiyphles natans, Mrsotharia
iiilestiiKdis-. Ciiciiiiiinid hispiilii ;ind Myriotrochus ritrens are not
iouiid ill Norwegian lionls further north than the Vest Fiord. It
is characteristic that I took several s])ecimciis of Bathyplotrs natans
and Mrsothiiria intcstiiialis in the Salten Fiord where the tempe-
rature was ri",(),') r. an<l the salinity 35, 1.3 7o„, while in the
Skjerstad Fiord, wliieh is only a little further in, where t = 3",
2 and s -= 34 "/,„., not a single specimen was to be seen in all
the dredgings made. Balhyjilote.< occurs in rather larg'e numbers
at its northern limit; at the station at the mouth of the Folden
Fiord at a deptli of 530 m., 20 individuals of this species were
taken, but only 4 Mesotharia. Of clay-bottom molluscs, which have
not hitherto been found noi-tli of Lofoten, tlie following may bo
mentioned: —
MaUetia ohtusa, Kellirllii miUinris, Den ta Ham agile, Seaphander
lignarius etc. The deepwater fauna on the mud-bottom is remark-
ably uniform in the large fiords which are filled with ocean water,
from the Bokn Fiord to the Vest Fioi-d, nothwithstandin.g- that the
Vest Fiord and its adjacent fiords contain some forms which are
wanting in the Bokn Fiord. Further investigations will probably
equalize this apparent difference to some extent, foi- instance, I
have latterly found Rhizocrinus lofotensis also in the Bokn Fiord.
But it will probably be found that such a species as ilocyathiis
arcticus cannot be included among the fauna of the Bokn Fiord,
this species must, judging from what is up to the present knoAvn
with regard to its disti-ibulion, be considered to be an arctic species,
which has been able to exist under the natural conditions deter-
mined by the ocean water which penetrates into the fiords. On
the whole, one may say that, zoogeographically speaking, the deep
water fauna on the clay-bottom of the fiords in question are spe-
cially remarkable on account of the large number of foi-ms in them
which have a wide distribution southwards. But, north of Lofoten,
the fauna on the clay have t^uite another character. The southern
forms disappear, and the northern ones take their place. At my
stations in the Lyngen Fiord (Lyngen II and III) at the re-
spective depths of 250 and 320 m. on clay-bottom such forms as
the following occurred in large quantities: — Ctenodiscus erispatus,
Myriotrochus rinlci, Pecten groenlandicus and Astarte ci-enata. Here
too were found Siphonodentalimn vitreum, Sealaria groenlandiea,
Bela exarata etc. The peculiar arctic Bryozo, Aleyonidium disci-
forme, was also taken here. Diastylis goodsiri, Pseudomma trun-
catum and many other arctic forms also occurred. At the station
Lyngen II,' d = 250 m., t = 2'',85 C, s = 34,47 7oo, and at
Lyngen III, d = 320 m., t -= 3",G5 C. and s = 34,84 "/oo.
At both stations in the Lyngen Fioi-d, several specimens of two
actinia species were taken, but none were conserved. If I remem-
ber rightly, they were Aetinostoln callosa and Bolocera tuediae.
Edwardsia andresi and Epizoanthus crdmanni were also found.
As I have previously mentioned, there is another character over
the fauna in the deep waters of the Malangen Fiord, and if we go
as far as to Lyngen aud Kvænangen, the difference is even more
striking. In the deep waters of Kvænangen where d = 343 m.,
t = 2'',3 C, and s = 34,49 Voo, were found, for instance,
Myriotrochus rinh, Polychæta, e. g. Harmothoe rarispina, Nephthys
malmgr-eni, N. ciliata, Nieomache lumbriccdis, Terebellides stromi.
Mollusca: — Pecten groenlandicus, Area pecttinculoides, var.
septentrionalis, Astarte crenata, SiphonodentaVmm. titreum etc.
I) T)ie HoMliuriuldea of Noi
Bero-. Mils. A:iih. li)02, Nc
31
•2-12
O. Nordgaari
Ampliipoda : — Halirageg fidroeincfus, IdtmeUa æquicornis.
The latter has, hitherto, only been taken in the Varanger Fiord.
Notwithstanding that the clay depths both north and south of
Lofoten have some forms in common, the Vest Fiord, however, foi'ms
a very decided limit for fauna, as has been explained in the fore-
going pages. One may also in the fauna of the Norwegian deep
waters make a distinction between an arctic and a subarctic (boreal)
clay-facies.
Remarks on the fauna of the ocean banks.
I was not able to make many dredgings on tlie ocean banks
in 1899, but I succeeded, however, in getting an idea of their
fauna. The station. Røst II, is not far from the ocean banks, at
a depth of 150 mtrs. here Ccqmlus lumganms, which is a southern
form, was dredged, here this form has its northern limit on our
coast. On the banks themselves, it extends, perhaps, a little far-
ther nortli wards. And at the station at Gaukværø, 250 m., t =
7",1 C, s = 34,38 7oo, HaniKjtlwi' ociiUnarum was taken, this
foim must be characterized as a boreal one, judging from the pla-
ces where it has hitherto been found. In the sea off Ingø (71°
10' N., 2.3" 10' E.), d = 315 m.. t = S^IS C, s = 35,24 0;oo,
an amphipod, Erichtonim uhdUiis, occurred, among other things;
this form, according to G. 0. Sahs has a distribution as far south
as The Azores, and was previously only known from „the south
and west coasts of Norway". Taking into consideration the hydro-
g-raphical conditions on the banks outside Lofoten, Yesteraalen,
Tromsø and Finmark, one woukl expect to tind that at any rate
some boreal forms M'ould be able to exist there. To get light
on tills subject, reference can be made to the material collected
by the Norwegian North Atlantic Expedition. First I will give a
table showing the temperatures at some of the stations in the sou-
thern bankdisti'ict of the Norwegian Sea (Stadt— Shetland — Lofoten).
Cf. map of tlie district of the Norwegian North Atlantic Expe-
dition.
)ttom tenntcratui'es
rn banks in the Norwesian Se;
Station
Nr.
Situation.
Depth.
Temp.
Bottom.
9.
610 30' N
30 .87' E.
377 m.
50,9 C
Clay.
10.
610 41' N.
30 19' K.
402 m.
6,0
Ooze, Clay.
92.
640 0' N.
60 42' E.
326 m.
7,2
Sabulous Clay.
79.
640 48' N.
6» 32' E.
283 m.
6,9
Sabulous Clay.
101.
6.50 36' N.
80 32' E.
408 ni.
6,0
Sabulous Clay.
66» 49' N.
IvO 8' E.
Bottom temperatures on the northern l)anks in the Norwegian Sea.
On these banks, one would expect to lind ;in animal life which
differs only slightly from that of the Norwegian liords (The Lokn
Fiord — the Vest Fiord), where there are corresponding tempera-
tures. The investigations hitherto made appear to confirm this
expectation. I will now give a table showing the bottom temper-
atures on the northern banks from Ijofoten to Beeren Island.
Station
Nr.
Situation.
Depth.
Temp.
Bottom.
195.
700 55' N.
180 38' E.
196 m.
50,1 C.
Stones, Clay.
290.
720 27' N.
200 51' E.
349 m.
3,5
Sabulous Clay.
720 53. N.
210 51' E,
280.
740 10' N.
180 51' E.
64 m.
1,1
Stones.
315.
740 53' N.
150 55' E.
329 m.
2,5
Clay, Saud.
326.
7.50 31' N.
170 50' E.
2i'5 m.
1,6
Clay.
According to Fiuele and Giueu, 43 species of ]Mollusca were
taken at station 195, several of which are widely distributed south-
wards. Among these may be mentioned: —
Cadtdus suhfusiformis, Cyclostrema iKttarsen'i , ('niinhiy hn»-
fjaricHs (shells), Alvania cimieoidcs, A. jeff'reysi, A. sKhsolufK. A.
punchira, Aclis walleri, Partheyiia spvralis, Odostomia unklcntata.
0. acuta, Eulimella scillce, E. rentricosu. Eidima bilineata. Adeorhis
fragUis, Metzgeria alba. Bucclnum huwphmjsianum (shell). Sijiho
fusiformiti.
At the stations previously mentioned in the northern bank
district, forms also occurred which have a wide southern distribution.
At station 315 (74" 53' N.) a boreal Bryozo, BiceUana alderi^)
was taken. I have not on any other occasion noticed this species
north of Lofoten. Undoubtedly there are several species which on
the banks go further north than in the fiords, so that it is impor-
tant to state clearly, when mentioning distribution, whether the
species in question occurs in the fiords and the belt of skerries
(skjærgaard) or on the banks.
Zoologically speaking, there remains much to be done \\itli
respect to the Norwegian ocean-banks, and a thorougli investigation
of the edge towards the deep basin of the Norwegian Sea would
be highly interesting. For here the transition from boreal to arctic
fauna occurs, and that too not spread over several geographical
degrees of latitude, but in the space of a few hundred meters.
Shallow-water shells found at great depths.
Of late years, there has been a good deal of discussion among
Danish and Norwegian authors as to the cause of the occurrence
of littoral shells at great depths, especially in the Norwegian Sea.
1 do not intend to go into the matter, as 1 do not possess the
necessary material to take part in the discussion of it. I would
refer those Avho Avish to have a clear account of the various opi-
nions advanced to l)i'. A. C. .Tim.\NSEN"s-') paper, in which infer-
ences will also be found to other works dcaliim wilh the same
suljject.
1) Cf. NoRnGAARD. Pub/zoa of the Non
2) On the hypothesis on the sinking- u
of (ieail shallow-water shells at great depths
Foreu. i Kjøbenhavn 1902.
N.
Atl.
E.x
!>• P- <
, 2
ea
-beds
b:
sed on
the
0CCU1
t
le se;
Medd.
fra
den n
•_'4.!
Those who have consiilcnMl tliis (jucstion seem to have forgotten
that also A. E. Vekkim, has ixpicssed an opinion with refercnee to
transportation by ice.
In 18K;3. (Ire(li;ini;s weiv niailc tVoiii SS ..All)atross" in the
region of the (iiilf Stream fiuni oD' ("ape llatteras to Nova Sentia.
In tile ..I\esults of tiie P^xplorations" (p. 507) Veukim, writes: —
..In many instances we iiave also dredircil pebbles and small, ronniled
bowlders of i;ranite and cither crystalline rocks from liciicath the
Gulf Stream in deep water. These, I snppose, have lircii carried
to that reyion by sliorc-iee tloatioir off in i^rcat (luantities trom our
northern coasts in wintei- and sprin<;-, and meltinL;- where the warm
(nilf Stream water is encountered." From this, it will be se('n
that Vkkrili, inclined to the opinion that the pebbles found in the
deep water were broug-ht thither by tloatini;- ice, and if tiio ice
takes along- pebbles, there is nothin>;- to hinder for its also taking
along shells from the coast.
. In the Norwegian fiords, it is highly probable that drift-ice
causes a transportation of littoral shells out into the deep basins.
For instance, Litturina rndis and ohtunsata found at a depth of
150—180 m. on Risværflakot, and Gibbnla cineraria at a depth of
000 meters in the Oxsund, (in each case the shells were empty)
were neither of tiiem in their primary locality. Hans Kiæe,') too,
has given a very plausible explanation of the storing of gravel and
shells in the snow and ice on the shore, and their conveyance to
places farther off when the ice melts in the spring; his explanation
is based upon personal observations at Tromsø.
Fauna and Hydrography.
In the foregoing pages. I have ti'ied to pi-ove that there is a
close connection between fauna and hydrogi'aphy. It would from
this again appear, that a majority of species of animals have an
organisation which can only bear a very slight variation in hydro-
graphical conditions. The number of socalled cosmopolitan species
is very small, and it seems to me that the number of those which
are mentioned as being widely distributed is also on the decrease.
The more exact moiphological investigation which is demanded now-
a-days often results in the dividing of a species into two or more.
And this is the case, not only with bottom forms, but also
with reference to plankton.
I will give some instances of what I mean. We have for years
heard that Calanux finmairliiciif' is found in nearly every sea. But
G. 0. Saks-) now tells us that under the name C. fimnarchicus
was hidden another species, C. hclgolandicus, Claus, which is spe-
cially distributed southwards, while the former has an arctic and
boreal distribution. Strictly speaking, Calunns finmarchicus contained
three ditfereut .species, for Calantis hi/perhoreus was considered
to be a variety of C finmarchicus previous to the publication of
Dr. GiESBRECHTs well-kuown monograph on Copepods. Instead,
therefore, of one species distributed over nearly every sea, we now
get three species with comparatively limited distribution, C. hyper-
horeus being arctic. C. /inmdrchinis boreal and arctic and C. hel-
golandicux lusitanic.
Similarly with respect to Euelia-ta. Instead of the widely di-
stributed Eucho'ta norvegica, we now have, norvegica, glacialis and
harhat'i. Examples might easily be multiplied from the Copepods.
On the other hand, it is l)eyond doubt that there are also deep-
(Is whirh h
^) Niveaufoviinilrin
-) Crustacea ot Xc
• ti-ansijor
Vol. IV.
exceedingly wiile distri-
liitioiis are (inly subject to very slight changes
and this too for extensive stretches. It is also
Illere are shallow-water forms which are .so
ai)le easily to adapt themselves to changes in
mil are thus able to exist under very diveisc
but Ihrii' nnniiier has undoubtedly been over
northern AmniUdn. (',. M. K.
watei' jonns ul Co
butioii. Natnial en
at the -real d.'pth^
very lirohahh' that
organized as to be
natural conditions,
jihysical conditions,
rated. In his excellent
I.iovinsen') says: —
.,[ must say that I doubt whether the northern seas really
have so many species in common with the Mediterranean as would
appear from the lists given in the literature available." On account
of this doubt. Li:vinsen carefully comjKired the northern forms and
those from the Meditei'ranean, and come to the conclusion that Aroii-
rolii niariitii and Peetinaria fcorri/i from tiie latter sea were ditter-
ent from the northern species beaiin<: the same name. They were
given the iiaiiies .1. cliijmirdi and /' rohusfn.
Similarly with respect to Fci-timiriu (niricoina, I'otdiniHa rnii-
formis etc.
1 could give a number of examples from the Bryozoa too, to
show how the extent of the distribution of a species diminishes, as
the claim for greater exactness in the determination of a species
increases. The change which has taken place in the use of the
word „species" with regai-d to the Bryozoa. has had a similar effect.
F. A. Smitt, for instance in his work on boreal and arctic Bryo-
zoa, which in other respects is excellent, has used the word «spe-
cies" in a very extended sense. He has entered as „forms" a large
number of specimens which are given the rank of „species" by
recent systematical investigators.
As a result, Smitt's species Avere attributed with a much too
extensive geographical distribution.
The distribution of a species is undoubtedly dependent on many
other things than the temperature and salinity of the water in which
it exists. Currents especially have both a direct and indirect in-
fluence. If one considers the conditions on the Norwegian coast,
where arctic and boreal fauna meet, the question naturally suggests
itself: — Is it the arctic or the boreal animals which on our coasts
are gaining ground?
To settle whether the movements of a given element of fauna
or flora are progressive or retrograde, one can examine the currents
in the adjoining sea. On the Norwegian coast, the current which flows
in a northerly direction is predominant, and the southern animal forms
are carried along with it. On tlie east coast of North America,
the reverse is the case. The duration of the pelagic state is also
important with regard to the penetration of the species into new
districts. It would therefore seem likely that such species as Mgfi-
lus cdalis and Modioht modiohtg, in which the pelagic state hardly
lasts much more than a week, would find it difficult to g-et over
the space between two coasts Avhich ai-e separated by a wide
expanse of ocean. Along a length of coast line, however, these
and similar species are widely distributed, for. in tiie course of
thousands of years, the many small stejis forward amount to a
considerable distance.
I do not know very much about the plankton in the more
southerly seas, but I have tiie. impression that there is not so much
difference there in its (luantity and quality at the difl'erent times
') Systematisk geoavafisk Oversikt ovc
Chætognathi og Balonoglossi. At'tiyk at' \\
Foren, i Kjf.benli.ivn 1882 o- 1883 (p. L'87).
e nordiske Annnlafa. Geplii/rea,
skab. Mi-dd. fra dt-n naturliist.
O. Nortlp^aard.
of year, as is the case in tlie northern latitudes.') And if this be
a fact, its influence will be seen on the plankton-eating animal world.
It is possible that the suitability of the molluscs as zoographical
character-forms, depends upon the fact that a great many of them
are plankton eaters. The mud-eating worms, for instance, are much
less suitable in giving a characteristic of the fauna. Besides, there
are species of mudeaters with a small geographical distribution. A
star-tish, Ctenodiacus crisiMtus, whose stomach is almost always full
of mud, is very little found beyond the arctic district. In such
cases, one is compelled to conclude that the animal has very little
power of adaptation.
Further Remarks on Plankton.
In the tiords near IJei-.i^en. Febiiiary is the month in which
the plankton is poorest, and there is reason to think that the
minimum for the year, for the noi'thcrn fiords of Norway, also falls
in this month. The great change in i)lankton life occurs at the
spring inflow of the diatoms.
In the fiords near Bergen, March is the month when the dia-
toms begin to show themselves e n m a s s e. but at ditterent times,
Avithin the limit of this month, from year to year. It is not yet
possible definitely to fix the time Avhen the winter state gives way
to the spring one in the northern fiords, but it is probable that
the spring-diat.oms appear in very large ' quantities somewhat later
here than in the south west fiords. Below I give some data con-
cerning the occurrence of diatoms on the northern coasts.
In the Tys Fiord on -",3 1899 only a few diatoms were found,
but on Vi they were numerous near Lille Molla, and this was also
the case on *U in the same year at Hola near iSvolvær.
'V4 1899. In the harbour at Stene in Bø (Yesteraalen) many
diatoms, 0 — 3 m'.
'Vi 1899. The Malangen Fioi'd, many diatoms. Whilst there
in Malangen, from 12th— llth of April 1899, was a rich develop-
ment of diatoms, in Kvænangen on 19th of the same month, winter
conditions prevailed. But on '-'A the spring diatoms also had shown
themselves in Kvænangen.
^'/4 1899, Trold Fiord harbour, many diatoms.
^V-i 1899, Ingøhavet. many diatoms.
^Vj 1899, Repvaag haibour, diatoms.
'"A 1899, The Porsanger Fiord, many diatoms.
'*U 1899, Mehavn, diatoms.
Vs 1899, Vai-dø, some chains of diatoms.
Vd 1899. Hola near Svolvær, few diatoms.
At the place last mentioned (in Lofoten) the first rush of
diatoms was over. In place of them, there were multitudes of
forms in ditterent stages of development belonging to CojH'poda,
Cliripedki, Annelida etc.
--/.•i 1900, The Østnes Fiord. 0—25 ni., development of the spring
diatoms.
'"/a 1900, The Vest Fiord, 0 — 25 m., many diatoms.
-'/4 1900. The Skjerstad Fiord, still winter conditions.
74 1900, The Salten Fiord, many diatoms.
V4 1900, The Folden Fiord, still winter conditions.
Previously in this treatise, it has been shown that the Vest
Fiord is the most important terminus for a great number of south-
I) Both large
plankton- crustaceans.
le Spitzbergenreiniieei- to llie
relic zone is a time when food
ern bottom forms. It is probably also the case, if one substitutes
plankton forms for bottom animals. North of the Vest Fiord such
species as Pleuromamma ruhustd. Dahl, and Candacia nrmatci, Boeck,
will hardly be found. In the Norwegian series of fiords, En-
chceta norvegica, for instance, is not found north of the Vest Fiord,
but I took specimens of Chiridius annatus in Malangen.
The very large quantities of such Siphonophoni as Cupulifa
sarsi and Physophbra borealis along the northern coast andjn the
northern fiords during the winter of 1899, was an occurrence which
merits further mention. Of the forms mentioned, Cupulita sar.yi
was exceedingly common. On -74 1 saw in the Jøkel Fiord (arm
of Kvænangen) a fisherman whose gloves on the inside were stri-
ped red by the remains of this siphonophor which had fastened
itself to the fishing lines. The inhabitants looked upon this as
being something unusual, which points to the fact that the pheno-
menon is not of annual occurrence. As the plankton species in
question are oceanic, their occurrence in large quantities in the
fiords can hardly be explained in any other way than by supposing
that there had that year been an unusually strong flow of the
current in the upper layers of water in the sea towards the coast
and into the fiords. It occured to me to connect this with the
prevailing winds. To be able to form an opinion of the relation
between the sea and land winds, we will look at the downfall
for the period in question.')
Downfall from October 1898— March 1899.
Bodø
Tromsø
Gjes
vær
Vadsø
Downf.
Normal
Downf.
Normal
■'""■"■
Normal
Downf.
Normal
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm.
mm
1898.
October
108
106
86
98
77
79
53
80
November . . .
148
109
184
86
113
66
61
69
December . . .
153
7.5
103
100
63
121
60
1899.
January
70
77
.')8
108
78
no
79
50
February ....
129
61
174
110
78
57
55
45
March
96
61
80
9.5
69
61
114
41
Average
117.3
83.6
109.6
100
85.8
63.5
K0.6
57.5
As it is more especially the ocean winds which cause down-
fall, one must be .justified in concluding that, from October 1898
to March 1899, their influence on the coast line in question must
have been greater than usual. But this would again result in more
than the ordinary quantity of water being driven in from the sea
coast, which must be evident in the kind of plankton which occurs.
In this connection, it is also interesting to recall that, on the
south west coast of Norway (in the spring-herring district), the
fishermen call some Salphæ ,,silderæk",-) and they look upon their
appearance as a sure sign that the herrings will come in shoals
to the coast. It is not altogether impossible that scientific investi-
gations will verify this prognostication. At any rate, it appears to
be (piitc reasonable, that the prevailing ocean winds stir up sui'-
face currents wiiicli drive both herrings and their food towards the
coasts.
') Cf. Nedboriagtiagelser i Norge. Aarir. IV (1898) og V (1899).
2) From sild (herring) and reka (to drift with the stream).
Cf. M. Sars, Fauna littoralis Norvegiae, Part I, p. 63.
B. The Investigations considered from a practical Point of View.
The Vest Fiord is one of the most thorouahly investigated of
our fiords, speaiiing in a biolog-ical and liydrograpliical sense. And
the reason for this is not difficult to understand. The government
has found it necessary to send naturalists to the district in whicii a cod
fishery is carried on, upon the results of which the income of the
country shows an important rise or fall, in proportion to the suc-
cess or failure of the catch. The statistics taken have shown that
the catch varies quite considerably from one season to another, and
it has been the aim of the investigating naturalists to discovei- the
factors which have an influence on the fate of the fishing. The
most important marine animals for us are undeniably cod and her-
rings, but in addition to these, there arc many other fish which
arc caught in large quantities on the coasts of the counties of
Nordland, Tromsø and Finmark.') I will first mention some inverte-
brates, which are of economic importance. Then I will deal with
the cod fisheries in l^ofoten and Finmark.
a. Some Invertebrates of economic Importance.
The animals may be divided into the following groups: —
injurious, indifferent, indirectly useful, directly useful, if account
only be taken of their useful or baneful relation to mankind.
A decidedly injurious animal is Myxine ghtfinosa. which sucks
out the fish caught in nets and on lines. tSuch forms as Calanus
finmarchicus, Boreophaus'm iiicnnis, Xyctiphanes norvegica, many
worms, molluscs etc., may be said to be indirectly useful, as they
serve as food for edible fish.
To the du'ectly useful animals, belong first of all those which
are eaten by man, then those from which useful products are ob-
tained, and lastly those which are used as bait for the edible fish.
Only some of those which are directly useful to man shall be men-
tioned here.
Arenicola marina, Lin.
This polychæt occurs rather numerously and at many places
in muddy beaches, it is dug up by the fishermen and used by them
as bait. Similarly too, a fish (Ammodytes tohinnus) is taken and
also serves as bait.
IWtru 'idandlnis, Mi'-LL.
The Trondhjem Fiord is the most southerly place, on our
coast, where this mussel occurs of sufficient size and in such quan-
tities as to give it any economic importance. According to ^'. Storm,
it is particulaiiy plentiful on the banks north of Tautra, where it
has been dredged for a very long time and has been used as bait.
Of late years it has also been taken to Trondhjem and used as
food. In the north of Norway, too, this species is a much prized
bait, and S. Schneider says that it is eaten by many better-class
famOies at Tromsø. The southern limit on our coast for the oc-
currence of this species, is the Lyse Fiord, not far from Stav;
(59° 3' N.).
Mytihis cchdis, Lin.
On our noi-thei'u coasts, this species is as a rule so small that
it is not of much use as bait.
Mod'wla mod'tuhis, Lin.
At the present time, this is our most important bait-mussel, it
is found in large quantities at some places on our northern coasts.
It is used as bait on the day fishing lines in Lofoten. The grea-
test part of the shell-bait which is used in Lofoten is, however,
taken from the fiords in the neighbourhood of Bergen and Stav-
anger. This mussel attains to a considerable size in the western
fiords. A specimen from Lonevaag (Osterø) was, for instance, 17.;i
cm. long and 9.5 cm. wide. The shells held about Vj liter.
I have measured unusually large specimens from the Sogne
Fiord, from 17 to 18.4 cm. In the Oster Fiord, where shells to
the value of several thousand kroner have been dredged, I took
100 from a heap at Raknes. The most usual measurement of
the shells which were sorted out here to be used as articles of
commerce, was 10 — 15 cm. In the arctic district of our country.
M. modiolus does not attain the size of those in the western fiords.
A specimen from Vardo was. however, found to be 11.2 cm. long
and 5..3 cm. wide.
It is quite usual to find the tubes of Pomatocerus iriqucter
and various forms of Bryozoa and Hydroida on the shells. On one
single occasion, I saw in an aquarium Cancm- payurns crush these
shells to eat them.
In the aquariums of the Bergen liioloLncal Station, we have
had M. modiolus for many years, and their mortality has been low.
Spawning in these aquariums has been observed on -% 1899, "n
') Cf. Helland, Lofoten og Vesteraalen, p. 119.
0. Noidgaard.
1901 and '-/t 1901. From what I have been told by those enga-
ged in dredghig shells, I conclude that spawning also takes place
in the months of March and April. Spawning time may therefore
be supposed to be from March to August. The spawning process
itself was seen quite plainly on Vs 1901. Both eggs and sperm
emerged through the anal sipho. The eggs were ejected in the
form of narrow, short libbons which were, for the most part, bro-
ken up in the water and immediately sank to the bottom. A
single female shell expelled so many that a large reddish-yellow
elevation was formed. Some of the eggs were whirled about in
tlie water and were greedily devoured by shrimps and barnacles;
some settled down in empty mussel shells and in the openings of
tiie lumps of Pomatocerus triqueler, which covered the living and
dead specimens of M. modiolus. On closer investigation, it was
found that only a small number were fecundated. This was espe-
cially so with regard to the reddish-yellow mass above mentioned,
these eggs soon began to decompose.
I also succeeded in seeing fecundated eggs at several stages
of development. The eggs, which were 0.078—0.09 mm. in diame-
ter, had no special colour. Division was, as in other mussels, com-
plete and inequal. There is reason to suppose that fecundation
took place outside the female's body.
While spawning goes on, the eggs (and the sperm) are pressed
out through the genital openings, one on either side, then the
spawn passes through the innermost branchial passage, close up
to the hindermost constrictor and finally enters the cloaeal room to
be expelled thence into the water through the anal sipho. The
i-eason for the eggs assuming the form of narrow, short ribbons
is probably that the genital opening is a column and not a pore.
The eggs rushed quite quickly out of the anal sipho, and it is
most probable that fecundation did not take place until they were
protruded here.
On '7? 1901, spawning of specimens which had been in tlic
a(iuarium about a year, was observed. Sperm was so plentiful as
to give the tank the appearance of being filled with milk and water.
There was at the same time a strong stream of water flowing into
the tank and this caused the eggs, for the most part, to whirl
about in the water. But as soon as the stream of inflowing water
was turned oft', the eggs sank to the bottom. The process of di-
vision took place rapidly. Already in the evening of the same
day ('-7) the eggs were divided into a large number of small balls,
and the next morning at 9 o'clock ('V?) they had become larvae,
which were wheeling arovind by the help of cilia and describing tiny
circles. They had formed themselves into irregular small lumps,
which moved about at the bottom, their movements being quite re-
gular. Three days later ('"/t) the specimens were seen to have
larval shells and velum. These shells were 0.1 mm. long, their
ventral side being curved and the dorsal forming a straight line.
The velum could be drawn entirely inside the shells. At this stage,
the young Modiolu possess a considerable power of motion, for they
swim quickly about by means of their velum. Instead of being
confined to a rotatory motion with very little change of centre,
they now moved more in a straight line. When they were six
(lays old, the specimens at the „velum" stage were seen to have
acquired circle shaped shells, the straight edge which represented
the dorsal side having become more curved. The length of the
.siiclls was 0.156 mm., width 0.13(» mm. The development of these
particular specimens was not followed furtlior. but, from analogy
with other mussels, we know tiiat the next iuqiortant stage is the
disappearance or alterations of the velum, while the foot now per-
forms the motion, until the little animal finally attaches itself to
some object or other. To catch these animals, a shell dredge of
a special construction is used, and also a „ slikkert", which is a
kind of pinchers with three or four claws.
Sometimes too they are taken by divers. They are taken out
of their shells after being brought to land. In addition to the
shells, the bundles of byssus and the gills are also removed. The
remainder is salted in kegs containing 28 liters. If the shells are
large, about 400 are enough to fill a keg, but as a rule from 700 —
800 are necessary. The price is about 9 kroner (10/ — ) per. keg
at first hand, and as the expense of catching them is very slight,
mussel fishing may be very profitable.
I have referred somewhat at length to Modiola modiolus, as
this particular mussel plays an important part as bait in the cod
fisheries at Lofoten.
Cijprinu islundifii. Lin.
This animal is used as bait in ordinary fishing, but sometimes
too in fishing ocean cod.
As for instance in 1896, about the middle of March, at Bål-
stad fishing station, where it was asserted that there were good
results Avhen using this bait.
Pjcsides Cjiprinu. which was dredged somewhere in Napstrøm-
men, ArenicuJa marinn was also used, which was found near the
Bålstad station.
Ziiphæa crispufa, Lin.
This peculiar mussel was noticed by me in 1899, alive, in the
sand on the beach at the farm Sund, in Gildeskaal; several spe-
cimens were dug out and used as bait.
Oiiunutostrcjihes todarus, K.\f.
„Sprut" and ,,akker" are common names in the north of Nor-
way for this Cephalopod species, which, in the autumn come in to
the coast in large quantities and thence into the fiords, where they
are taken in thousands to be used as bait during the cod fishing
in Lofoten. In the Kvæ Fiord in the north of Hinno a consider-
able catch of cuttle-fish has of late years been made. In many
instances, a single family has made an income of kr. GOO -800 in
the course of a few weeks.
Pundalus boienlis, Krøyer.
During the investigations in the Skjerstad Fiord in April 1900,
several specimens of this species were met with, and 1903, Niels
Haagensen, who was my assistant at the earlier date, made some
trial catches with a shrimp trawl, and he succeeded in taking from
10 — 30 liters each time. So that it was thus proved tliiit P. horc-
alis occurs in large quantities in this fiord.
This species is now sent to Bergen and Kristiania to be used
as food in no small quantities, but in tlic north of Norway it is
more difficult to sell tlicm. so that there is not mucli prospect of
making much prolit on them.
Haagensk.n, has. nevertholess, suggested lliat a trial should
be made to salt them, ])repared as bait, for the fisheries in the
north. His suggestion might, at any rate, be found useful for
such times as there is a scanty supply of other bait.
H. Ki.T.R at Tromsø in 1903 made investigations witii resjiect
to the oecnrrencr of /'. /mrndis in the Hals Fiord, tlie Tromso-sund,
the Kvalsund and the Kal Fioid.
ln till" iiiiiiM- part .if the I'.als ImiuiI. he lislicd. un an avcrai^v.
3 liters pr. Iionr \\itli a liltlr shiimp Irawi, Imt at the otlirr pla-
ces mentioned. /'- lnDvalis onl\ nccniTrii sini.'l.v.') Tlu' anllini- nirn-
tioneil is not sure that it would pay to carry on this kiuil of lish-
inir, even in tlie Hals Kioni, under prosent condition^. The day
Avill, however, doubtless come wlion it will ho found pi'olitahle to
do so. also in the northern distiicts whore this siieoios is found.
I'diicrr jiiijiKnis. LiN.
The species is of no importance in the economy of the northciMi
districts, as it occurs very sparsely. Concerning its distribution, it
should be noticed that M. Saus-') . mentions haviny- found it at
Lofoten. Spauue Schxioidek has informed nu> that it does not go
so tar north as Tromso. Schnkider has also told me that the
common crab, Cairhius ma('ii((>', has its northern limit at Hyio and
the outer coast of Senjen. For the present. Ltdbten ouiiht. thero-
foi'e, to be considered to ho the northern limit for (\ iKujitrus.
Hoiiiitnif: <iimiiiKini!<, Lin.
M. Saks says (I. c. p. 1211 that lobster is only rarely found
in Lofoten and the Folden Fiord ((i7',2" N.).
Later on, it was proved that lobster is found in the Tys Fiord.
In 189(3 ,,NordIands tiskeriforening-", on the suggestion of inspector
Dahi., decided to use a sum of money on tiial lishery. About on(!
hundred l(d)sters, ]art;e and of a -ood flavour, were caught, but no
actual lohstoi- lishery has resulte(| from this trial. It would indeed
be i|iiite uni(pie. if an animal should be fouml in such large quan-
tities near the boinidary limits for its distribution as to make it
possible to carry on a prolitablc catch.
Tt is, of course, a necessary condition that, to be of any
economical impoi'tance, a marine animal must occur in comparatively
large numbers within a limited area. Bucr'niinn muhttiDn, for
instance, would no doubt be excellent bait, but as it does not occur
so close together as Pectoi isl/didicii.s or ('//iiriiiK ishimlirfi it is of
little pi'actical iinjiortance.
A form, w liich has recently been taken into use, is Xi/ctiplKnii-x
yiiin-njicn. M. Nahs. At one place in the Trondhjem Fiord (near
Veidalsoi'cn) a lai'ge number of this iSchizopod is washed ashore,
and in recent years they have been salted and used, with excellent
i-esults, as bait for haddock (Godas æylefiiiusj.') On our northern
coasts. Bor euphd USUI inennls occurs in large numbers, and it is
probable that also this foi-m. as well as Xi/cfijiliintes. may be used
as bait for haddock.
b. The ..Skrei" Fishery in Lofoten.
The Lofoten tisheiy is very old. In the latter half of the
9th century Tokolv Kveldulvsøn lived at iSandnes in Alsteno,
and it is said of him, in Egils historical tales, that he had sent
men out fishing „skrei'' at Vaagan (Lofoten) and some were also
gone to tish herrings.^) In the same tale too, it is related that
Toroja- sent his ti-usty man Toegils gjallande to England with
a vessel laden with dried „skrei", furs, etc. And wheat, iKuiey,
Avine and clothes made up the return cargo from England. There
are many historical references, in the following centuries, to the
fisheries in Lofoten, but I will only here refer to some of them.
The tackle used in the old times took the form of hand-lines,
about A. D. 1600 longlines came into use, and about the year
1700 nets appeared upon the scene. At the present day all three
are used.
For several centuries the ,,skrei" was exclusively prepared as
„dried fish", the head was cut oft" and entrails taken out and then
the fish was hung up to dry. ToAvards the end of the 16th cen-
tury some trials were made to prepare „klip" fish (tor-fisk =
dried fish = stockfish [commercial], klipfisk = salted, dried cod).
In a description of Lofoten in 1591,'') we read that the fish
was first salted and then dried on the rocks so that it became
„as hard as a piece of wood". In the same account, it is also
mentioned that in the summer when the fish were dried and the
oil was pressed out of their livers, traders came to Lofoten to
') Cf. H. Klær, Om fm-ekonistun iif (l.vbv.-iiiclsni-ker vcd 'rromso. Norsk
Fiskeritidende, 1903, p. «24.
2) Kristiania Vid. Selsk. Forh. 18.58, p. 123.
») Cf. Egils saija Skallagrimsonar. Reykjavik, 1892, p. 3».
„Han hnvdi pa menn i shridfiski i Vcigum, enn surna i sitdfiskir'
••) Beskrivi-Ue over Lofoten o. s. v. Det kgl. norske Virl. Selsk. Skr. i
det 19de uarh., 13. 1, p. 473.
barter barley, rye, salt, iron, clothes, linen etc. in exchange for
the fish and codrliver oil. The primitive i)reparation of the latter
consisted in the collecting of the liver in large cisterns, which were
exposed to the direct heat of the sun, the oil was thus melted out
and drawn oft' little by little. About the middle of the 17th cen-
tury, cod-roe began to be considered as an article of commerce.
Preben von Ahnen, the last of the feudal lords of Nordland,
made strenuous efforts to ett'ect the sale of cod-roe, and in lO.'i.'s
he obtained a license from Fredrik III to trade in this article.-)
About the year 1600, Peder Claussøn Friis relates that it
was forbidden, under severe penalty, to throw single cod heads into
the seti, for fear that fish should eat them to their harm. If one.
at that time, wished to be quit the heads of cod one had to string
them together and sink them. However, the same writer mentions,
some heads were dried to be used as fodder. Now-a-days, the
heads and back bones, which are removed when cod is prepared
as „klip"fiih, are made into guano in factories erected for the
purpose. iSo that not only the flesh of the cod, but also its head,
backbone, liver and roe are now made use of. The sperm bags
are also sometimes used as fodder, but the rest of the entrails aie
still thrown into the sea.
The honour of founding the present cod-liver oil industry
belongs to a Norwegian pharmaceutical chemist. Peter Moller, he
having started the first factory for the preparation of medicinal
cod liver oil in 185.3.
His son. Dr. F. P. Møller studied the subject also, and he
has, in a compreheusive work,') explained the scientific ba.sis of the
method adopted by his father.
') Cf. NOHDOAARD, Et nyt agu for liysen. Norsk Fiskeritidende, 1903, p. lilK.
^) Cf. O. Nicolaissen, Fra Nordlands fortid. Kristiania, 1S89, p. 80.
:•) Cod-Liver Oil and Chemistry, London, 1895.
O. Nordgaanl.
From 1859, there arc statistical reports of the Lofot tisheries,
including remarks on the course of the fishery etc. There is prob-
ably no instance of a completely unsuccessful fishing season, it has,
however, happened that only very little has been caught and the
(|uality has not always been equally good. The exact statistics
show that the variations in quantity have been very considerable.
As the prosperity of thousands depends upon the fishing, the in-
habitants have tried, in the course of the centuries, to discover
different signs upon which to build prognostications, and resource
was even had to divination. For instance. Axel Hagemann') relates
tliat the fishermen, in Saltdalen, made use of the following device,
to be able to foretell the prospects for the Ijofot fishing season.
(_)n Christmas Eve an outline of the Lofot islands was made on a
deep dish, which was then filled with water and put aside to freeze
(luring the night. If there were, the next morning, found to be
a good number of air-bubbles formed in the dish, it was said that
tlie coming fishing-season would be a good one. And according
to the position of the bubbles, one tried to decide at which places
tiiei-e would be most fish. According to Prof. H. Htrøm,-) the
lisherfolk in Søndmor adopted a similar method to discover what the
cod-fishery, which began directly after Christmas, would be like.
As time went on, scientists began to concern themselves with
]>roblems connected with the fisheries. The wonderful progress
made in natural histoiy, which is due to Carl Linné, was also
seen in an increased interest in the study of the natural causes
which are the necessary conditions for the carrying on of various
industries. Martin Vahl was a Norwegian who had studied under
Linnes guidance, and he in his turn had a pupil, Jens Rathke,
who was sent, in 1801, to Northern Norway on account of the
fishing which -was being carried on there. Rathke's report of this
journey has not been printed, as far as I know, but various extracts
from it may be found in a topographical-statistical Avork by A.
Helland on the county (amt) of Tromsø. It is G. O. Sars Avho,
in our country, actually laid the foundation for fishery investig-
ations, in the years 1864—70, when he made his wellknown in-
vestigations in Lofoten. In 1874, he also visited Finmark to examine
into certain questions concerning cod fisheries. The Norwegian
North Atlantic Expedition 1876 — 78, also had matters of a practical
scientific nature with regard to the fisheries on its programme.
From this period, there are a series of valuable „reports" written
by Saes, in which a great mauy fishery phenomena are discussed.
I have previously given an account of the hydrographical
investigations which have been made in the Lofotfishery district.')
In the years 1900-01, Dr. H.tout, on S/S „Michael Sars" made
extensive investigations along the northern coast of Norway. In
his preliminary account, Dr. Hjokt gives many important I'esults,
among which may be mentioned the exceedingly interesting fact
tliat the young of the cod is found far out in the Norwegian Sea
in the summer, while spawning chiefly takes place on the coast
banks, and in a less degree in the fiords. Hjort has given a very
insti'uctivc chart (1. c. p. 43) showing the distribution of the eggs
and young of tiie „skrei" in the summer of 1900 and 1901. From
this it would appear tliat the movement from land is not the samo
every year.')
1) Blamlt lapper og bumænd, p. 101. Kristiania, 18S9.
*) Skmdmoi-rt beskrivelse, I, p. .536. Sorøe, 1762.
') Cf. NoRDQAARD, Contribution to the Study of Hydrogi-.npliy and Kiolngy
on the Coast of Norway, p. 5—7. Bergen, 1899.
■») Hjort, Fiskeri og hvalfangst i det nordlige Norge. Bergen, 1902.
During the last twenty years, when the Lofot-fishery season
has not been a good one, the usual explanation for this fact has
been offered in the circumstance that the temperature of the water
has been too low. In the course of time, however, so many
measurements of temperature have been made that it must be pos-
sible to form a decided opinion on the actual I'elation between the
quantity of fish and the temperature of the water. I have previ-
ously dealt with this subject, and will now repeat that at the depths
where fish is generally found the temperature is approximately the
same year after year; consequently the thermometer cannot, as a
rule, be taken as a guide. Capt. Gade, too, ari-ived at a similar
conclu.sion, as a result of measurements of temperature made in the
Lofoten fishing waters in the years 1891—92.') On a former
occasion, I mentioned, among other things, that the fluctuations in
the quantity of fish might possibly be accounted for by the variations
in the number of sexually fully developed ,,skrei". I must, how-
evei', confess that a more careful consideration of the question
makes this supposition much less likely. The investigations made
by Hjort and Dahl in recent years have made it clear that
quantities of cod are found in the summer on the Finmark banks
and in the sea between Norway and Spitzbergen. Of these, the
sexually fully-developed individuals in the Avinter go westwards and
southwards to spawn, while the younger ones (loddetorsken) stay
near the coast of Finmark. As there is every reason to suppose
that, even in the most successful seasons, only a small fraction of
the whole number of spawning cod is fished up, it must be con-
cluded that quite extraordinary vaiiations in theii" number would
have to occur if there were to be any noticeable effect on the catch.
The natural in.stinct, whether it be intense or slight in degree, which
impels to a change of environment, must be taken to be the same
year after year for the same species, and finally, the conclusion is
reached that the fluctuations in the quantity of fish must depend
upon certain conditions in the medium in which they move. The
investigations made up to the present appear entirely to confii-m
the opinion that it is not the ditt'erences in temperature and salinity
which determine the yield of fish. The properties of Gadits callariati,
which determine this in Lofoten, must certainly be taken to be
the same, year in and year out; on the other hand, such things
as the number of fishermen, of days when it is possible to put out
to sea etc. are subject to vai-iation. But I am convinced that
such variations alone are not a sufficient explanation of the fluctu-
ations in the yield of fish. With respect to the number of fisher-
men, this decreases on account of the fall in the yield, while a
prospect of better yield increases the number of fishers. There
must, therefore, be conditions in the sea itself, which contribute in
various degrees to increase, or diminish, the eftect of the positively
active factors, which, in spite of everything, have exeiled so much
influence as to prevent the Lofot fishery from having at any time
been altogether a failure. By the yield of the Lofot fishery is
meant, in the Norwegian fishery statistics, the „skrei" (ocean cod)
which is caught from the middle of January to the end of April,
during which period an official control is exercised, in the district
from Guldviken to Lofotodden. During the decennium 1886—95,
the average yield was 26.5;$ millions. The maximum was reached
in 1895 with 38.6 millions. For the years 1890 — 1902, the average
yield was 16 millions, the greatest catch was in 1897 (25.8 9iillions)
and the least in 19o0 (8.4 millions). The year 1895 foi'ms the
turning i)oint, and it is tolerably natural to set the limit here. If
1) Ten,
r.ger i Lofo
Kristiania, 1894.
249
comparison be made witli statistics for 1859—85, it will be seen
that the years 188G — 95 were particularly favourable ones, while
from 1896 up to the present time, there have been unusually bad
seasons. In this cleai-ly defined state of things, there lies an in-
creased possibility of getting at the causes thereof, and I have tiied,
in various ways, to connect facts, but it was a long time before I
succeeded in finding anytiiing wiiich seemed to point to a law.
During my work, however, the opinion lias gained upon nic
that the movements in the sea itself have a great ett'ect upon
the direction taken by the fish. A. Bokck, to whom much is due
for his study of the spring-herring fishery, was of the opinion
that the herrings went a g a inst the stream, but later obseivers
do not agree with him in this matter, and I believe that both
herrings and cod most probably, as a general rule, move with
tlie stream. So that a very careful study of the currents in the
sea is of great practical import. In recent years, V. Bjerknes,
Sandstrøm and Helland-Hansen have developed the analytic
apparatus to be used in calculating the movements of the sea, but
it would seem that these scientists have taken no account of the
wind. In his well known work on the Norwegian Sea, Mopin, has,
on the contrary, very strongly emphasized the importance of the
wind as a cause of currents, and this opinion is shared by many
foreign hydrographers. With regard to the mutual dependence of
winds and currents upon each other, it may, generally speaking,
be said that a constant off-land ^nnd causes a corresponding current
from land, while during a constant sea-wind, the water is forced
in towards the coasts. In the spring (March and April) the water
on the west coast of Norway is particularly low, the supply of
fresh water being slight, but more especially does the continual
land-wind blow a quantity of water away from the coasts. At the
end of March this year (1904), there was in Bergen continually
easterly winds, which were so strong that they kept the tide waves
so much at bay as to make the difference between ebb and flow
very slight indeed. Similarly, a strong sea-wind in the late autumn
is able to keep the water for days at an unusually high level. It
is, however, clear, that, during the movements to or from the coast
of the surface water, a compensating current must be set in motion
in the deep water; it has long been a recognized phenomenon in
the fiords, that the surface and under-currents go in contrary
directions. If we now take it for granted that both heirings and
cod are to a certain extent drawn along by the currents, it natur-
ally follows that one must try to find out whethej- it be the motions
in the surface-layers or the deeper situated compensation-currents
which exert a special influence on the direction taken by the fish.
Keeping this question to the fore, I have gone through a large
number of fishery reports, and it seems from these to be fairly cer-
tain that the herrings move coastwards especially in the surface
layers, while the ,,skrei" travels along in the deeper layers. This
would imply that herrings are most influenced by the surface-cur-
rents, cod by the compensation-currents. In reports on spring-
herring fishery, it is, for instance, mentioned that small lots of
herring (the so-called „Aater") are often seen drifting along with
the stream, and there are many remarks made by skippers about
the sea being of a peculiar colour just beyond the spring fishery
district, and that this is caused by the large number of herrings
which are there present, and this fact denotes that the fish cannot
..be at any great depth. There is, however, no reason why the
herrings should not lower themselves deeper in the water, but as
a general rule. T think one may conclude that they move principally
ill till' u|)per layeis. On the other hand, no one has observed
shdiils (if ...ski'ci" off the coast, and the first .,skrei" of the year
is. iu fact, usually taken from a depth of lOO — 150 meters. It
umst. therefore, be supposed that as cod and herrings, to a certain
extent, depend upon contrary curi-ent phases, a particularly good
spring-herring fishery would prevent a coi'respondingly good cod
fishery in the same district; for a strong tendency of the upper
layers towards the coast certainly takes herrings along in the cur-
rent, but this at the same time causes a compensation current in
the deep water, and this cuirent liindci-s the cod in its passage to
the spawning places. It is indeed specially mentioned in reports
on spriug-heriing fishery, that, in really good herring years, cod
does not, as a rule, occur in any quantity.
The „ skrei" fishery takes place in Lofoten in the months
.lanuary — April.
Let us have a look at Mohn's Climate tables (Vol. IV), so as
to get an idea of the winds prevalent at this time of year. We
find that at Skomvær, from October— April, the prevailing wind is
from S. At Andenes station, there is prevalent southerly wind
from September— April, and at Fruholmen station from SE in the
months of October— March. From this, it would follow that, as a
rule, the wind and the surface current go in a contrary direction
to that taken by the cod from the northern banks, while the under-
currents probably go in the same course as that which the cod
has to follow. On looking through the remarks on the weather
which are found in the annual reports of the Lofot fishery, I have
got the impression that the cold-bringing easterly winds by no
means retard the fishing, as has been stated, but that they, on the
contrary, assist it. For instance, the following paragraph is found
iu the chief controller's report on the excellent season 1895: —
„Easterly and north-easterly winds were prevalent, with clear
skies and frost, north-westerly and westerly winds and snow were
not unusual either, but southerly winds and rain were rare." When
easterly winds prevail, it is found that the surface temperature on
the Lofoten banks falls considerably, and the principal reason for
this fact is that the wind sweeps along the cold surface water
from the tioi'ds, while the under-currents undoubtedly go in a con-
trary direction and carry along the cod.
As a result of the foregoing, it is quite natural to conclude
that the fluctuations in the Lofot fishei-y really are due to the
distribution of atmospheric pressure, or, in other words, the direction
and strength of the winds. As, however, there are many difficulties
to be surmounted in studying the changes in the influence of winds,
I have chosen another thing, which is greatly affected by them,
namely downpour. I take it for granted that the annual downpour
must, taken generally, give a measure of the influence of the winds.
By noting the changes in downpour from year to year, one must
be able to form an opinion of the relation of the sea and land
winds to each other; for upon this, according to the theory stated
above, depends the success of the fisheries. In the ,. Observations
of the Downpour in Norway" published by the Norwegian meteoro-
logical institute, we have an excellent aid in studying the fluctu-
ations in downpoui-. From this work, I have taken the necessary
data to enable me to give the following table, which shows the
annual average height of downpour in millimeters, at a series of
coast stations, during the years 1886—95 and 1896—1902, as well
as the calculated normal heitrht.
0. Nordgaard.
Fredi'iksliald
Kragerø . , . .
Tvedestrand .
0x0
Mandal
Skudenes . . .
Ullensvang . .
Berg-en
Florø
Aalesund .' . .
Kiistiansund
Trondhjem . .
Nordøerne . .
Brønnø
Sandnessjøen
Bodø
Svolvær
Tromsø
Gjesvær . . . .
Vai-dø
725
682
718
1027
925
1019
1181
1118
1157
1073
810
1000
1491
1348
1339
1181
1151
1158
1375
1355
1297
2096
2250
1916
2233
2348
2050
1234
1396
1170
1148
1158
1097
1013
1033
1001
765
817
960
884
897
1104
1008
1080
923
1248
905
1301
1284
981
1120
1017
665
729
669
731
(525
Koi- the sake of clearness, I have, in the following table only
put a -|- to represent those average values which are greater than
tile normal ones, and a — for those below the normal ones.
Station
-95 1896 — 1902
Fredrikshald .
-1-
Kragerø
+
Tvedestrand..
+
0x0
+
Mandal
+
Skadenes : . . .
+
Ullensvang . .
+
Bergen
4-
Florø
-f
Aalesund
4-
Kristiansund .
+
Trondhjem . . .
+
Nordøerne . . .
Brønnø
+
Sandnessjøen .
+
Bodø
+
Svolvær
Tromsø
—
r;jcsva>r
—
Vanlo
On comparing the values at the stations from Fredrikshald to
Skudenes, it will at once be seen that the downpour was gener-
ally above the normal in the years 1886—95, below, in 1896—1902.
The exception which is found at Mandal is of no consequence, as
the surplus above the normal in 1896 — 1902 is exceedingly small,
in comparison to the difference between the average height of
downpour in the series of years mentioned.
If we next investigate the results of the herring fishery in
the Skagerack. we find that the Swedish Bohus fishery shows
considerable increase in tiie years 1886 — 95, with a succeeding
decrease up to the present time. In 1886 — 95 the catch of fish
in Eastern Norway was, as a rule, good, and at times very plenti-
ful. In 1893, the culminating point was reached with a catch of
337000 HI. But from 1896 — 1902 the herring fishery in the same
district was poor.
It will be found that the winter herring fishery, l)oth in the
North Sea and Norwegian Sea off the coast of Norway, had a differ-
ent I'esult. As will be seen, on reference to the tables, there- was a
surplus downpour both in 1886 — 95 and 1896 — 1902 from Skudenes
to Kristiansand and Trondhjem, but it was very slight at the two
last mentioned places, so that no decided effect can be expected there.
On the other hand, on the coast southwards from Aalesund, a con-
siderable surplus during both periods, greatest during the years
1896—1902, will be noticed. These facts harmonize well with the
particularly successful spring-herring fisheries from 1896 onwards,
the catches in the previous period, 1886 — 95, being unimportant in
comparison. And, as is well known, it is also from 1895 onwards
that there has been herring fishery in the Romsdal district.
During the years 1896 — 1902 then, the downpour on the
Skagerack coast was on an average below the normal, and in the
spring-herring district considerably above the usual average; at the
same time, the spring-herring fishery flourished, and that in the Bo-
hus and East Norwegian districts decreased.
It has long been affirmed that there is an alternation between
the winter-herring fishery in the Skagerack and the Norwegian
springherring fisheiy, so that when the curve for the latter i-eaches
its maximum, the other is at a minimum, the highest point for the
one corresponding to tlie lowest for the other. As far as can be
seen from the historical notices of the fisheries, this interchange
would appear to be almost an unbroken rule, which does not, how-
ever, prevent the possibility of there being some catch of fish at
one and the same time both on the Bohus and the West Norwegian
coasts. In the light of my hypothesis, of the definite influence of
the pressure of the atmosphere on the fisheries, an explanation
may be sought in the fact that the barometrical minima which compel
winds and currents to send the herrings into the west coast of Nor-
way, cannot at the same time act similarly on the south Norwegian
and ]?ohus coasts.
From what has no\\- been advanced, it follows that the in-
fluences which arc favourable to an inflow of heri'ings along a
given sti'ctch of coast will obstruct the passage of the cod land-
wai'ds.
Let us, thei'efoic. have a look at the results of the cod fishery.
That which is cai'i'led on in the springherring district (Stavanger
and the Bergenhus counties) yielded, during the years 1886—95,
about 3 million fish, calculated from the official statistics; for the
years 1896—1902, the average was about 1 million.
In the Romsdal district, where big herring fishery has been
flourishing since 1895, I have calculated the average yield of cod
to be 7.!i millions during the years 1886-95, and about 6.5 milli-
ons for tlie years 1896 — 1902. Thus, in both these districts, an
increase in heriings and a decrease in cod have gone together. On
reference to the tables, it will be seen that the stations at Kristi-
Combination.
251
ausund and Trondhjcin sliow. tor tlio vcmis isim; l'.m-_>, as cdiii-
pared with ISSfi — 95, an avi'iaL;T duwnpoiir wliifli is not vt-ry
nnliiio or nuu-h above tiie normal liciirlit. During tlic years
lS0(i— 1902 the downpour was below the avera>re at Nordoernc,
Hronno and .Sandnessjoen. .So that we should expect to find an
improvement in the cod fishery in the 'rrondiijcm district and on
tlie coast of Nordland south of the ^'est Fiord, and statistics prove
that this was actually the case; for I liavc calculated, from the
official statistics, that the average yield in 1S86— 95 was about 2
millions, from 1896—1902 about .'J. In the district where the lar-
gest cod fishery is carried on, it is interesting to notice that there
was an usually high average downpour in tlie „bad" years 189G —
1902, while the ..good" fisiiiug seasons are characterized by vei-y
little downpour. And, as already mentioned, the average yield of the
Lofot fishery in the years 188(5 — 95 was 26.5 millions., but from
1896—1902 only about 16 millions. Thus, there does appear to
be a connection between the downpour, on the one liand. and the
cod and herring fisheries, on the other.
In judging the various tislieries, a nuich too important part
has hitherto been given to tlie natural animal instinct, while, on
the other hand, it would be incorrect to attribute all the chief
phenomena connected with tlie fisheries to purely hydrodynamic
conditions. Especially Avith regard to the cod, it should be men-
tioned that if everything depended upon the mechanics of the water
layers, one would also expect to find younger individuals than fully
sexually developed ones at the spawning places. Dr. H.iokt has
shown that spawning principally takes place on the banks, less in
the clay channels, so that Gudiis caUarias must, undoubtedly, pos-
sess some degree of initiative. But it can hardly be denied that
the currents in the sea exert a very modifying influence on the
movements of the fish. From this point of view, it becomes of
considerable interest to have a clear knowledge of the causes of
these currents. But on this matter, there is no little disagreement.
Some scientists assert that the rotatory motion of the earth is
alone necessary to cause the system of currents taken as a whole.
But even if this be so, it can be said that the influence of the
rotatory motion of the earth, whether it be great or small, must
at any rate, be constant, and when one is trying to discover the
causes of fluctuations in the fishery-yield, one must especially exa-
mine the variable factors which may be supposed to exert some in-
fluence. And then, I think, the winds must first of all be con-
sidered. As variations in atmospheric pressure cause winds, winds
cause currents and currents, with great probability, exert an in-
fluence on the course of herrings and cod, it must certainly be
practical to turn one's attention to the barometrical minima. In the
foregoing pages, I have considered that the downpour will gener-
ally be influenced both by the situation and the degree of prom-
inence by which they are characterized. In the meantime, it is
interesting to consider these minima direct.
It may now be taken for granted that the great atuiosj)heric
depression, which is called the winter minimum, in the Norwegian Sea
is subject to considerable variations, both with respect to place and
degree. In „The Book on Norway", Einar Haffner describes the
variations in atmospheric pressure in the years 1884 and lS9<i.
Haffner also gives charts showing the distribution of atmospheric
pressure, respectively in .January 1K84 and Decembei- 1890. The
tornirr shows a low pressure north of Noiway, and the result was
tiiat .January 1884 was unusually mild. In the ciiart for December
1890, this northern minimum has disappeared, the lowpressurc centre
near Iceland determined the direction of the winds, and in the month
in question the temperature was very low over the whole of the
Scandinavian peninsula. In „^'mer" for 1898 (Nr. 2), Uxru
Pettersson has described how the great development of the Ciulf
Stream, in the northern part of the Norwegian Sea in the summer
of 1897, caused a winter minimum to the N.W. or N. of Norway.
In consequence of this, there was a higher average temperature in
Sweden in .January and February 1898, on account of the prevailing
westerly winds. As a whole, several winters from 1 896- onwards
have been unusually mild, while the summers have, to some extent,
been cold, at any rate, in the north. There have also been „grecn"
years in the same period. -Another peculiar feature in connec-
tion with these years, is that some arctic mammals have come far
south during the spring and summer (Phoca groeiilandica and
DelphinaptcrKs leiiras). }iut of greatest interest is the fact that
thei-e was a much smaller yield of cod than usual, in these years.
If the theory, advanced in the foregoing, be adhered to, with respect
to the dependence of this fishery upon winds and currents, a natu-
ral explanation of the decrease in the Lofot yield will be found in
the fact of the atmospheric winter depre.ssion in the Norwegian Sea
having been so marked and so situated as to make the system of
currents, set in motion by the wind, act as an obstacle to the pro-
gress of the fish.
It is possible, too, that this way of looking at tilings, may
throw new light upon the subject of the changes in the heii;ht of
our coast water.
According to Dr. Andreas Hansen, the variations in the height
of coast water have been above and below a settled medium, and
the result, in historical times, has been that the relation between
land and sea on the coasts of the North Sea and the Norwegian
Sea has remained unaltered. It might perhaps be practical to in-
troduce the idea of a medium normal height of watei', which would
correspond to the normal height of downpour for a given stretch
of coast. The medium annual height of water, according to An-
dreas Hansen falls into groups of years in which it is above, and
years in which it is below the normal height. In Røst 1891—94
he mentions a lesser height than usual, but in 1890 at Skagerack
a greater.') This answers particularly well to the circumstance
that on the Skagerack coast in the pei-iod 1886 — 95 there was a
surplus downpour, while on the northern coasts the average was
not attained. For, as both downpour and water-level depend upon
the direction and force of winds, they must have a corresponding
course, and the measure of the one may, therefore, serve,' to' judge
of the other. It is also probable that just as the water on the
Skagerack coast and the west coast of Norway may be in ditterent
phases, as proved by Hansen, so may there also be places, on the
long stretch of coast from Skudenes to Vardø, where the water
is higher than the normal height, while at others, it is lower. There
is reason to suppose that, in the years 1896 — 1902, the medium
water-level was lower than usual on the coast of Helgeland, and
probably also on the coasts of the Trondhjem district, for the table
shows that the downpour was below average.
If events should prove that my opinion, concerning the in-
fluence of atmospheric pressure upon the yield from the fisheries.
Stigning, p. .52. Norges geol. Unders. Aarb. f. 189H-99.
25-2
is well founded, it is at the same time settled that an increased
interest will be attached to the question of the causes of, and laws
troverning, atmospheric pressure. But this is an exceedingly difficult
problem, for, as an English scientist, F. W. Harmere), says: —
„It seems impossible in these questions to distinguish between cause
and effect. Temperature, pressure, winds and ocean currents act and
react upon each other as links in an endless chain."
It is evident that, if tiie connection referred to really does
exist, an important advance in weather prognostications will also
be of some weight with regard to the prediction of the fisheries.
And it would then be a reasonable supposition that an investigation
of the distribution and degree of heat of the Gulf Stream in the
Norwegian Sea. in December, for instance, would provide material
wliich would make it possible to get an idea of the prospects for
the subsequent Lofot fishery. Similarly, it may be supposed that,
if the fluctuations in the fisheries were given a place in the group
of phenomena, which vary during the so-called „Bruckner Periods",
a helpful plan of the rise and fall which occur in the fisheries
mio'ht be obtained, by means of the historical-statistical method.
One is then tempted to conclude with regard to the Lofot
fisheries that as tlio years 1886—95 were unusually favourable, it
is not likely that the present marked poor yield of cod can last
much longer, a change for the better must soon occur. It is,
however, a fact that the changes in climate hardly occur with the
regularity which the word „ period" demands. In the last edition
of his Meteorology, Mohn writes (p. 302): — „Beyond the daily
and the yearly period in the course of the meteorological elements,
we know no other period in the weather changes. One day, the one
year, is not like the same day, another year, one month, the one
year, is not like the same month another year; there is,indeed, a
variation from one year to another in the weather, which seems quite
iri'egulai-.'"
But on tiie other iiand, tlie circumstance that bad years, —
as well as good years, — both on land and at sea are inclined to
follow each other, would seem to modify the supposition that there
is an interchangeable tightening and slackening in the play of for-
ces. At any rate it will be exceedingly interesting to follow the
working out of the problem: — Are there pei'iods of years which
are characterized by great downfall, high medium water-level, good
winter herring fishery, less good cod fisheiy, cold summers, with
sometimes „green" years for the farmer; and are there periods of
years when there is little downfall, low medium water-level, good
cod fishery, less good herring fishery, diy and warm summers, with
sometimes „dry" years for the farmer?
With regard to the special problem hero being dealt with,
what lias ali'eady been said will, I hope, make it clear tiiat thei'e
seems to be an agreement between the yield of the cod and herring
fisheries and the winds, for whose influence the downfall has been
used as a measure. To this method may be objected that the cod
and lierring fisheries are carried on in certain months, while the
calculations of the downfall are made for the whole year. But it
should be noticed that those months, in whicli these fisheries are
carried on, arc the richest in the year in downfall. Consequently,
there will hardly be any real ditt'ei-ence in results on account of
tlic method lierc adopted. It might, however, perhaps be found
tiiat the agreement between tlie winds and the yield would be
•) Influence .
Joui-n. Geol. Soc,
greater, even in details, if the downfall for the months September —
December were taken in conjunction with the downfall in the months
of January — April in the succeeding year. Any very detailed
agreement must not, however, be expected, as the catch foi' a single
year is only an uni'eiiable measure of the actual quantity of fish
present.')
The observations of downfall are of comparatively recent date
in our country, consequently they can only be used as a measure
of the effect of the winds, during recent years. But there are
other things which g-ive hints as to the conditions previously. Dur-
ing the last period of years in which there was a surplus down-
fall, a storm flood occurred in Lofoten and caused much damage.
Richard Hansen writes about this, as follows: — ..During the
week, 19th -26th January (1901) a violent stoim of wind from
southwest, to northeast raged; and on the 22nd, there was such
high water that it was unparallelled in the memory of the oldest
inhabitants, and much damage was done by this unusually higli
flood all along the Lofoten district."-) This kind of damaging flood
will probably only occur in years with great downfall and high
average water-level, so that the mention of such a flood makes it
possible to draw conclusions with regard to the weather and mat-
ters connected with it. When, for instance, Absalon Pedeesson,
in his diary') mentions that on November 1st 1570 „a very great
and high flood occurred, whose equal no one in Bergen remembered
and which did great damage to flour, malt and fish," one might
from this circumstance conclude that herring catch was made during
these years. Fiom Christmas 1570 to February 1571 there was
according to the same writer, severe frost, and the herring fishery
that year was a failure, but the next year (1572) herrings were
caught in the beginning of Februai'y, and in the years proceeding
1570 in February herrings were regularly to be had in the
Bergen market. From several sources, we find that the yeai-s
1740—12 were „bad" ones or „green" years. Professor Hans
Strøm, in his well-known description of Søndmør, mentions that
spring-herring fishery was started there about 17-10, „that is to
say about the same time as the general failure of crops occurred
in Norway." And at another place, in the same work, he says
that the summer is generally short and warm, but „from 1740 the
summer here has generally been cold and damp with thick fogs,
which have continually come in from the sea and brought a cold
northerly, or westerly, wind in its wake." Here we have a clear
combination of bad weather and inflow of spring-herrings, and this
is not the only example of its kind. The first „green years" men-
tioned in our history occui'red during the reign of Harald Graa-
I'ELD (961 — 970), and were exceedingly bad. Snorre relates that
„the country people were almost entirely without grain and fish".
At Helgeland, there was great hunger and want. Oivind Skalde-
1) After this was written, J. Rekstad'.s interesting treatise on tlie changes
in Xoi-wegian glaoiei's was publislied („0m Justedalsbræen" Berg. Mas. Aarb.
1904). Rekstad comes to the conclusion that temperature exerts a greater
influence than downfall ori the changes in the glaciers, and in the course of hi.s
investigations, lie lias compared the downfall curves for the period 1st May —
1st September, and fiom September — May. He says (1. c. p. 70): „0n cim-
sideiing the anual curves and those for the 8 winter months, it was found that
they (downfall curves) pretty closely corresponded. When the annual downfall
was great, the same was the case in t^he winter months; and when the annual
downfall, on the contrary, was small, the corresponding was found to be tnii>.
with regard to the winter months."
2) Norges Fiskerier 1901, Nr. 2, p. 109.
3) Cf. Nioolaysen's edition (1860), ij. 20:3.
si'iLBEK, wlio HvihI at Tjøtta, wrote about the coninion misery,
and he too was a irreat sutt'erer daring the bad years. One spring-,
there was an intlow of herrings to some outlying places, and Oivind
rowed thither to buy some. Snokke furtiier writes that „the tii-st
winter (970—1)71) that Haakon Jaki, ruled in Norway, herrings came
aromid the whole country." We see, that, at this time too, bad
years and intlow of herrings wei-e coincident, and 1 am, moreover,
inclined to conclude that, as there was such hunger and want at.
Helgeland, the cod fishery had not been successful. Snorre indeed
says that there was a want of fish. We know that, about a hun-
dred years previously, the Lofot fishery had been so good that a
man at Helgeland had been able to export stock fish to England.
Right back in the olden days, there are sources of information
which hint at considerable variations in the yield of the Tjofot
fishery. And at the present day, we have certain pi'oofs tliat rather
great fluctuations do indeed occur.
To confirm which, I will, finally, give a few features of the
history of the Lofot fishery in the 19th century. At the commen-
cement of the century in question, there were many bad years for
the farmer, 1812 being one of the worst. From an account written
at the time 'I, it will be seen that the Lofot fishery had so fallen
off that it was feai-ed tiiat it would altogether fail, and the reason
for this was not sought in natural circumstances, but in the
increasing use of nets during the fishing season.
About ten years latei-, there appears to be an improvement
in the fishery. The clergyman in Saltdalen, S. C. Sommerfeldt-)
writes that, in the year 1823, there was a particularly good Lofot
fishing season, and the yield was calculated to be 15,923000 fish,
di\1ded among 2788 boats. For the succeeding years the following
figures are given by Jens Kraft') for Lofoten and Vesteraalen.
1825
1826
1827
of boats. Nr. of fisli
2589 — 11509180.
2790 — 1282l7(iO.
2916 — 15864620.
1828') — 2734 — 13919380.
1829 — 3027 — 14076200.
These ligures, according to A. M. Sch\veigaard=) are too low,
as the fishers were supposed to have given too low numbers, on
account of tithes to be paid. As, however, the yield from Vester-
aalen') is also included in these figures, the yield for Lofoten alone
can hai'dly be said to be more than 15 millions.
From 1859, there are complete reports of the Lofot yield.
A graphic illustration of the millions caught from 1859—1903
gives a particularly irregular picture, suggesting a panorama of
Jotunheim, with a Galdhopig for the maximum year.
It is evident that the catch of a single year may, to some
extent, be aftected by more or less accidental factors, whose influ-
ence must be supposed to be disregarded when an average for a
period of years is to be given, e. g. a decennium.
The result would then be: —
18.4 million fish
24.5 —
85
1861
1876
1886— 95
1896 — 1903
26
15.4
These figures are supposed to be comparable.
It is interesting to note that during the years 1861—74, there
was a big-herring period in Nordland. At the same time, the avei--
age water-level is mentioned as being higher than normal, and the
yield of cod must be reckoned as not very good. The next period
shows an improvement in the \ield, and the best seasons are
reached in the years 1886 — 95. This agrees beautifully with a low
average water-level in Nordland in the years 1891—94, and a
downfall less than usual in the same decennium. On the contrary,
as already mentioned, the Lofot fishery has of late years not been
very good, while there has been a surplus downfall.
c. Some Remarks on the Cod-fishery in Finmark.
The catch of spawning cod ( skrei i in Finmark is not very
unportaut, at any rate at the present time. Spawning takes place,
however, every yeai- and Brevik and Hasvik in Sørøen are import-
ant stations during the Minterfishery in Finmark. A. F. Bremer-*)
mentions that, about 183f>, there was a very good catch of „skrei"
in the fiords of West Finmark, in pai'ticular in the Alten Fiord.
But in 1838 a change occurred, and from that year the fishery in
the fiords was poor, and the i-eason Bremer thought, was that the
considerable inflow of Ommaiot?trcphe)< todariis (akker) and herrings
began just that year. Bremer, and others, also mention that from
1830—40 the ,,loddefishery" ^) was very poor. It is mentioned as
') E. A. Colban, ForsOs til en Beskrivelse over LofotPns og Vesteraalens
Fogderi (1814). Det Kgl. nor.ske Vid. Selsk. Skrifter i 19de Aarh., Bd. 2, Trond-
hjem, 1824—27.
2) Physisk-okonomisk Beskrivelse over Saltdalen, p. I.'i9. Det Kgl. norske
Vid. Selsk. Skr. 19 Aarh. Bd. 2, Trondbjem 1824—27.
*) Beskrivelse over Kongeriget Norge, 6 Del, p. 373, Kristiania, 1835.
'') En gammel Finmarkings Betragtninger o. a. v. Hammerfest, 1881.
') By this expression is meant the cod fishery which is carried on at the
time when Mallofns villosus, MCll. (lodde) spawns.
a general rule that the winter cod fishery in Finmark is always
better in those years when the „lodde" (capelan) occurs only in
small numbers. The spring cod-fishery, which depends upon the
capelans being followed on its spawning travels by young individuals
of Gadus caUarias, is very much more important than the winter
fishery (skrei-fishery), therefore the absence of capelan is a serious
matter for the Finmark fishers economically speaking. It would
therefore be of great economical importance to get a thorough
knowledge of the capelan's life. In one of his latest works, Prof.
Collett*) has collected what is up to the present known about
this fish. I beg to refer to this account, from which it will be
seen that „during the inflow, the capelan often travels in compact
shoals in the surface layers". Sometimes, spawning occurs at a
depth of a few meters, but generally deeper down (70—90 m.i.
') Lofoten alone.
2) Norges Statistik, p. 96. Kristiania, 1840.
*) According to Sommerfeldt (1. c. p. 139), the yield from Vesteraalen in
1823 was 581700 fish.
*) Meddelelser om Norges Fiske i Aarene 1884 — 1901, II. Kristiania Vid.
Selsk. Forh. f. 1903, nr. 9, p. 147—163.
0. NordgaavJ.
A glance at a curve depicting the yield of this tish (cf. Hjort,
Hvalfangst og fiskeri, p. 81) gives the impression of great irregul-
arity, without any sign of any rhythmical law. It must, however,
be remembered that there are many things which affect the yield
of a fishery. It cannot be denied that there are immense variations
in the occurrence of capelan, and this cannot be supposed to be a
A\hun on the part of the fish, but must depend upon variations in
the natural conditions in the sea itself. When I \asited Finmark,
in 1899, M. Ingebrigtsen, the whale-catcher, told me that old
fishermen took two things as signs of a good number of capelan,
and these were (l) a plentiful supply of driftwood, and (2) a good
ptarmigan year.
Carefully considered, it will be found that these two „signs"
point to the fact that sea winds have been prevailing; for the
drift wood is driven by wind and storm landwards, and prevailing
winds from the ocean means a good deal of moisture which here
falls as snow, and a good deal of snow in the mountains sends the
ptarmigan down into the low lands. If it be taken for granted
tliat the capelan, as well as the herring, is dependent upon the
movements of the surface layers, my hypothesis would mean that
in the years when there is a plentiful downfall, there would be
large shoals of capelan. This does not, however, seem very likely
from the statistics given for the years 1896—1902, during which
period there was a surplus downfall, but only a poor yield of fish.
15ut Phoca groenlandim occurred in large numbers in the years
iiienticncd, and the presence of this animal was said to have a
particularly bad influence on the fishery.
According to Bremer there was, from 1830—38, good skrei-
tishing in the fiords of Finmark, but then Ommatostreplm and
herrings showed themselves and the skrei diminished in numbers.
'I'he same writer says that the capelan, about the year 1840, again
came in large numbers to the coasts of Finmark.
I have already shown that the „skrei"-fishery and the winter
herring-fishery appear to depend upon contrary current-phases, and
as the capelan's habits are, as far as is at present known, similar
to those of the herring at the time of infiow, we must expect that
the surface cui-rents, which drive the capelan landwards, cause
compensation cui'rents further down, and these latter obstruct the
inflow of „skrei". What I have just said must only be taken as
an attempt at an explanation. It is, meanwhile, interesting that
this attempt harmonizes with the prognostications made by old
fishers in Finmark.
At any rate it would seem to be worth while'to pay attention
to those mechanical factors which may be supposed to exert an
influence on the yield from the fisheries.
It is possible that it will be found that the large catches of
herrings on the coast in the months of October — December, and
to some extent also January, may be accounted for by the fact
that meteorological conditions in these months cause a strong flow
of water to the coasts, which is also evident from there being a
maximum height of water in the autumn. And with regard to the
spawning herring (vaarsild) and the spawning cod (skrei), I think
I have found as a result of historical and statistical investigations,
that, as a rule, a good herring fishery and a good „skrei"-flshery
will not occur on the same stretch of coast, simultaneously. At
the period these fisheries are carried on (Januai'y — April), there is
a sulking tendency in the water towards the spring minimum, and
it seems reasonable, that just as the relation between ocean and
land winds at this time exerts an influence on the medium water-
level, by regulating the currents in the coast water, so ■^vill its
effect on the currents also, to some extent, further or hinder the
inflow of cod and herrings. There can be no doubt that biological
and physical factors play an important part in the fisheries. The
former may be taken to be constant, while, at any rate, some, of
the physical ones are variable.
If one takes it for granted that the ocean-currents have an
important influence on the course of tiie fish towards land, the
difficulty meets one that scientists are not agreed as to which of
the causes of cuiTents one should give most weight. Can it, how-
ever, be proved that there is a connection between the periodical
changes in the yield of the fisheries and the fields, one will be
compelled to suppose that there is a common cause at the bot-
tom, and we have thus come to the conclusion that this must be
the variations in atmospheric pressure. But we get no farther, and
will hardly be able to do so, until meteorologists have solved the
problem of the laws governing the rise and changes in barometrical
minima.
As far as practical niai'ine investigations are concerned, the
following famous words of Laplace may well be used: —
„Ce que nous sarom est pen de chose, ce que nous ignoro)is
est immense."
PLATE I
PLATE I.
Map showing- tlie northern part of Norway. The curves are isohyets and represent downfall in mm. for the year 1899
(blue) and 1900 (yreen).
PLATE II.
PLATE II,
Fig. 1 — 12. Phuromamma robusia, Dahl, Skroven (Vesttiord). 0—300 m., */'■• 1899.
„ 1. Anterior antenna, right side, *Vi-
2. First joints of anterior antenna, left side, *Vi-
3. Posterior antenna, ^Vi-
4. Mandible, ''Vi.
.5. Maxilla, 'Vi
(j. 1. Maxilliped, '^Vi-
7. 2. Maxilliped, *Vi-
8. 2. pair of natatory legs, 'Vi-
9. 3. pair of natatory legs, "Vi-
10. Rostrum, ** Vi-
ll. Abdomen, -71.
12. 5. pair of natatory legs, "A.
13. Chiridius tenuispim<><, G. 0. Sårs, female, Ofotfjord, 300—3.50 ui.. Vs 1899.
Spine of the last segment of cephalothorax, '*Vi-
U. Chiri'liiis ((rmahis, Boebk, female, The Malang Fiord, 0—380 m., ",'4 1899.
Spine of tiie last segment of cephalothorax, **Vi-
y&/f/<//y. ///MV////,'- -s/yy//<"/'
1^
l,U'rA,„.rr,/ r/r/
PLATE III.
PLATE III.
Fitr. 1. Fliistra carlntsea, Ellis & Sol., Mehavn, 1894, Vi-
„ 2. Flustra securifrons, Pallas, Breisund (Finmarken), Vi-
„ 3. Flustra memhranaceo-truncata, Smitt, Skjerstad Fiord, Vi-
„ 4. Flustra memhranaeeo-truneata, Smitt, Mehavn, 7i— Vi-
„ 5. Flustra barleei, Busk, Arnø (Vestfjord), 300—400 m., Vi-
„ 6. Flustra barleei, Busk, Røst II, 1.50 m., -'h 1899, Vi-
„ 7. Flustra abyssxcola, M. Såes, on a little stone. Bålstad, 150 m., Vi-
„ 8. Bugula murrayana, Johnst., the typical form, from the „skjærgaard" outside Bergen, Vi-
„ 9. Schkoporella sinuosa, Busk, Svolvær, 50—70 ra., aperture of the zooecium, 'Vi-
„ 10. Schizoporella sinuosa, Busk, Digermulen, 100—150 m., operculum, *Vi-
„ 11. Membranipora minax, Busk, Moskenstrømmen, mandible, ^Vi-
,, 12 — 14. Eschara sinrera. Smitt, Nordkap, 1894.
„ 12. Mandible, ^'Vi-
„ 13. Operculum, **Vi-
„ 14. Zooecium, . lateral view, r, rosetplate, h, hole, 'Vi-
„ 15. Porella lævis,'FLEM., The Trondlijem Fiord, Vi-
„ 16. Porella saccata, Busk, Nordkap, Vi-
„ 17. Escharopsis rosacea, Busk, Moskenstrømmen, '/i.
„ 18. Escharoides cnccinea, AbildcxAaed, Solsvik in the Bergen „skjærgaard", mandible, *Vi-
„ 19. Escharoides jacJcsoni, Waters, Kvænangen II, mandible, *Vi-
„ 20. Retepora tvalUchiana, Busk, young colony, Bålstad, Vi— Vi-
„ 21 — 24. CcUepora nodulosa, Lokenz.
„ 21. Colony from Mehavn (Finmarken), 7i— Vi-
„ 22. Colony from the Norwegian Noi1h Atl. Exp., St. 273, Vi-
„ 23. An operculum of a colony from the .Jøkel Fiord III, 100 m., "Vi-
„ 24. A mandible of a colony from the Jøkel Fiord III, 100 m., *Vi-
„ 25. Cellepora mcrassata, Smitt, Hammerfest, Vi-
„ 2G — 29. Cellepora ventricosa, Lorenz.
,, 26. Colony from Breisund (Finmarken), 30—40 m., Vi-
„ 27. An operculum of the same colony, "/i
„ 28. Mandible of oral avicularium, "Vi-
„ 29. Mandible of a spatulate avicularium, '^Vi-
„ 30. Tubulipora lUeacea, Pallas, Solsvik in the Bergen „skjærgaard", Vi — Vi-
„ 31. Tulmlijiiirit sp i'^ iienicillata, Fabr.), Mehavn (Finmarken), Vi — Vi-
„ 32. Idmoncn (ithnitin). FoEB., Hustadviken, outside Romsdals amt, Vi-
„ 33. Hornera lichenoides, Pontop., the Porsanger Fiord, 200 m., Vi-
,, 34. Domopora sfellnfa, Goldf., the Malangen Fiord, 100 — 200 m., Vi— Vi-
„ 35. Alcyonidnnu disci/hrme, Smitt, the Lyngen Fiord III, the border a little ruptured. Vi— V
„ 36. Bowcrhioikin iwhrimta, Adams, The Norw. North Atl. Exp., st. 343, Vi-
„ 37 — 38. Flustrelln coriiiciilata. Smitt, Svolvicr (Lofoten), -'/i.
„ 37. Zooecia, "V,.
„ 38. Spino of tho same colony, -'/i.
A'/</f//s , l/ffAr/ZMx ,^/y////^ /
\ ^
/
#
17. I*©
f
\ !
^^
-^,
W
31. |;|^ a11?>^ 12.
-^1-
^(il-^
'#^
''<f^''%H''
1 '
" /,
h>/(/fj/f/t/y/ ff Bi/cÅi^f r/i'^
PLATE IV.
PLATE IV
Fi"-. 1—2. Phyxophom horcalis, M. Sårs, Moskenstrømmen, 0 m., Va 1899.
„ 1. Tentacular knob, "Vi.
„ 2. Older tentacular knob, "Vi-
„ 3 — 5. Esckara mofhmsis. n, sp., Moskenstrømmcn II, 15u ni.
„ 3. Zooecium, 'Vi-
„ 4. Ooeciuin, "/j.
„ 5. Operculum, "Vi-
„ 6 — 7. Schizoporella mndida, Smitt, Tlie Malanfjeii Fiord, 100 -200 ui.
„ 6. Zooecium, "/i.
„ 7. Operculum, "Vi-
„ 8 — 11. Porella prohosculva. Hincks, The Nortii Cape.
„ 8. Zooecium, lateral view. a. a = avieular aperture, r. p = rosette-plate, h = hole, 'Vi-
„ 9. Mandible, "Vi-
„ 10. Operculum, "Vi-
., 11. Oral aperture, the condyles are seen, "Vi-
„ 12. Palmicellaria slenei var. tridens, Busk, Radosund, a little north of Bergen, 100 m.. operculum, "Vi-
„ 13. Pcdmieellaria shenei var. hicornis, Busk, Jøkel Fiord III, 100 m., operculum, "'/i.
„ 14 — 15. Moiioporella spinulifera, Hincks, Hammerfest.
„ 14. Ooecium and oral aperture, ^Vi-
„ 15. Zooecium, lateral view,. °Vi-
„ 16 — 17. SchizoporelJa retiadato-pwurUda, Hincks, The Porsanger Fiord. 200 m.
„ 16. Ooecium with the upper part of the zooecium, 'Vi-
„ 17. Operculum, "Vi-
„ 18 — 20 b. Porella pro^iinqua, Smitt, Nordkap (1894).
„ 18. Zooecia, lateral view, a. u, aviculai'iau umbo, o, ooeciuin, r. p, I'osette-plate, =Vi-
„ 19. The back side of the zoarium, ^Vi-
„ 20 a. Operculum, "V,.
„ 20 b. Ooecium, "Vi-
„ 21 — 23. Porella ■princrpK, Nohman, Mehavn (1894).
„ 21. Operculum, "Vi-
„ 22. Mandible, "V,.
„ 23. The under side of the front wall of the zooecium, showing the aviculariaii chamber la. c) and the lateral channels (c h),
„ 24. Smittina sniitti, Kibchenp., The Øgs Fiord I, loO m., ooecium and the uppei- part of the zooecium. ^Vi-
„ 25—26. Escharella labiata, Boeck, Svolvær, on coal.
„ 25. Zooecium, lateral view, "Vi-
„ 26. Base of the ooecium, "Vi.
„ 27. Oral denticle of Etfcharella immersa, Flem., Moskenstrømmen, "Vi.
„ 28. — : — — rcntricom, Hass., Hammerfest, "Vi-
„ 29. — :— — laqiæata, Noem., Hammerfest, "Vi.
,, 30. — :— — abi/ssicola, Norm., The Bømmel Fioi'd, "V,.
„ 31. — : — — labiata, Boeck, Svolvær, "Vi-
„ 32-35. Etscharu nordlandica , n. sp.. The Kvænang Fiord, 90 m.
„ 32. .\ young zooecium and ooecium, ■•'■|^.
„ 33. Oral aperture of the zooeciuin, c, coudylus, i-, opercular rib, "'/i.
„ 34. Ooecium, "Vi-
„ 35. Operculum, "Vi-
„ 36 — 38. Smittina majuscula, Smitt, Tlie Porsanger I'^iord, 90 m.
„ 3(). Zooecium and ooecium, ^Vi-
„ 37. Operculum, "Vi-
„ 38. Mandible, "Vi-
yjin/f/fo //''^Mv////.' rS/y/v/Zf/'
n ^
m
y^
I ¥
MM
tOf -^^^T^
h:n/,,..r,/r/,/
PL, ATE V.
PLATE V.
Fig. 1 — 2. Schizoporella stormi, n. sp., The Noi'th Cape (1894).
„ 1. Zooecia, "/i. The avicularia are not quite correct, as the niamlibles are more pointed tlian in tlie fitrure.
2. Operculum, o. r, opercular rib, *'/i.
3 — 4. Schizoporclla Jevinsem, n. sp., Kvænangen 11, 90 m.
3. Zooecia, "/i.
4. Operculum with the proximal margin of the oral aperture, *Vi-
5 — 7. Porella glaciata, Waters, Mehavn (1894).
5. Zooecia, "/i.
6. Operculum, *Vi-
7. Mandible, '"7:-
8 — 11. Rhamphostomella scabra, Fabr., The Porsanger Fiord, 70 ra.
8. Zooecium, "-/i-
9. Oooecium, ^Vi-
10. The back side of the zoarium, ^Vi-
ll. Mandible, "A-
12 — 13. ScMzoporella hexagona, n. sp., Kvænangen II, 90 m.
12. Zooecia, ^"'/i.
13. Operculum, ^Vi.
14 — 15. BhamphostomvUn pliciitii, Smitt, Nordkyn (1894).
14. Ooecium witli the upper pail of tlie zooecium. ^'Vi- The two small denticles, one on each side of the large one, are not illustrated.
15. Mandible, "Vi-
16—17. Rhamphostomella vadiatida, Hincks, The North Cape (1894).
16. Ooecium and oral aperture, "Vi-
17. Part of the frontal wall of the zooecium, *7i-
18—20. Ehamphostomella contigua, Smitt, The Ostnes Fiord, 50 — 70 m.
18. Zooecium, '-/i-
19. Operculum, *Vi-
20. Mandible, "Vi.
21 — 22. Rhamphostomelln coi^tata, Lurexz, Tromsø.
21. Ooecium, "/i.
22. Oral denticle, ^y,.
23 — 25. ScMzoporella unicornis, Johnst., Glea (Rost).
23. Zooecia, ^-/i-
24. Operculum, 'Vi-
25. Mandible, "/,.
26. Schizoporelld Iniciins, Mass., Bognøstrømmen (Bergen), 30 — 50 in., operculum, "A.
27. Schiioporella toiicorjiis, Johnst., The Hjelte Fiord (Bergen), operculum, "Vi.
28—31. Phylactella peristoniata, n. sp.. Jøkel Fiord II, 80 m.
28. Zooecium with marginal pores, p. a. c, pores to the avicularian chamber, '^"A-
29. Zooecia, s, shield beneath the oral aperture, ''-/j.
30. Mandible, =«7,.
„ 51. Oral denticle, «V,.
„ 32. Scliizoporella porifcra, Smitt, Napstrouunon (Lofoten), opci'culum, '^'i.
,, 33—34. ScMzoporella linmta, NoRixi., Nordkyn (1894).
„ 33. Operculum, «Vi.
„ 34. Oral aperture, *Vi-
„ 35. Smittina trispinosa, Johnst., Bålstad (l^ofoten), operculum, "Vi-
//r/i////< . ///M/////.S ,S/,/'/////-
W
o^l
&
m
\:M
m
o
o
^
J-'
o
^^ u
m'
Ælk^.. ^^
\y
L
Å
m
h>rr/„,„fr,/ r/r/
PLATE VI
\
Fig. 1. Coseinodit^ciis centndis Ehkb., Rattr. Valvc in side view, •'■'^"Vi.
„ 2. C. siihbidlu'n!< Jørg. n. sp. Sample from Evenstad (near Helsesrscii, Lofoten) II, ',':, ISO!), 0—200 m. \'alvc in side view, ^"'A.
.!. Thalastiiosira decipiens (Grun.), "^"/i-
a. The Skjerstad Fiord V, -/i 1900. 0—420 m. The odd, asymmetrical, spine is distinctly seen (as also in the ti^'ures b— c).
The structure is very difticult to draw with a satisfactory result. There are some errors in the reproduction, especially
in the median part of the valve. When, however, the drawin.ffs ai'e compared with the description they will, I hope.
nevertheless be of some use. The lines are meant to show the dii-eetion of the rows of areoles; some of these are also
illustrated.
b. The Herlo Fioi'd near Beriien, "A 189S.
c. Folstad (the Ostnes Fiord, Lofoten), */i 1899, 0-3 m. Only tlie spines are shown in the liirurc.
d. The Herlo Fiord. '■'/:• 189S. A valve in side view, showing the lony. somewhat curved, marginal spines and the hii:h
marginal zone.
e. The Vest Fiord (Lofoten), ^% 1900, (I--25 m. A cell (frustule) in side view. The common foi-ms are L'enerally lowei
f. O)tho!<ira avgidata Greg. Diat. of Clyde, pi. X, tigs. 43 and 43b, -""Vi-
,, 4. Thalassiosira gravida Cl. A piece of a chain, "'''"/i. showing' the mucilaginous threads after stainiiiL;' with methylene blue.
„ 5. Th. hyaVma (Grcn.) Gkax.
a— c. Valves of different specimens from Folstad, V4 1899, 0—3 m., ^'='"/,. The very fine structure is not illustrated, but
only the marginal spines, in b and c only that part of the valve Avhere the odd, asymmetrical, spine is found. In tin
figure a the more coarsely punctate median part is also shown.
d. Gaukværo, ^'/4 1899, 0 — 3 m. A chain, """/i, showing the long mucilaginous threads of which only the outermost
illustrated. The central connecting band is a little too thick in this figure.
„ 6. Th. h-ijophda (Grun.). Cape Wankarema (North Eastern Siberia, Vega Expedition; slide in the Riksmusæum. Stockhdl
a, b. Valves of two different specimens, ''''■'"/ 1. Only a part of the border with marginal spines and the odd one are here sho^
,, 7. Pofosini gbiclaVis (Grun.). a, b, d from Stene in Bo (Vesteraalen), '"/4 1899.
a. 2 cells, connected by a thick mucilaginous band, "7i. Outside this band two isolated connecting threads arc seen.
b. 2 cells with protoplasma and chromatophores (conserved in formaline), '''"'1.
c. A 3-jointed chain with very thick connecting bands, *=7i. A specimen from the Arctic Sea 1898.
d. A 3-jointed chain. '^^"U, showing the long, diverging mucilaginous threads (after staining with methylene bluei.
8. Eucampia grnenlandka Cl. Part of a chain. '■'■",. P.rettesnes (Lofoten), V* 1899. The transverse lines are much liner 1 1
represented in the figure.
9. FragUaria njlindrm Grun. A valve of a small and short specimen, "'"'/i. Lille MoUa (near Raftsunti), •/4 1899.
„ 10. F. idandiea Gbun. The Skjerstad Fiord V, -/, 1900. 0—400 m. A piece of a long chain after being ignited on co\
glass; "^"/,. Breadth 51 {jl; 16 — 18 striæ on 10 \i.. Connecting zone striate.
.. 11. Tltahissiotln-i.r nitzschioides Grun. IMie Skjerstad Fiord V, '74 1900, 0—420 ra.
a. A zigzag chain of 4 individuals, •'^",1.
b. 2 cells, one in side view, the other in valvar view. '■'7,. 52 ;«. long. 4 n broad; 11 pearls on 10 ;i. The undulation^
the marL'in in the lower ligure are due to an error in reproduction.
Fig. 12. Xitischia hijhrlda Grux. b— e from Brettcsnes, ^4 1899. The sti-iæ of the eoiinecting zone are in reality much tiner tlian
in the figures.
a. The Skjerstad Fiord XII (outer part), -'4 1900, 0—50 m.; "■"1. 44 |i. h)ng, s m. broad; about 9 l^eel puneta on 10 ;>..
Transverse striæ (of the valve) were not visible.
b. N. (hyJyrida var.?) jÆiicida Grun.? One valve, in side view, "'-"/i. 38 ]). long, about 10 — 11 keel puneta on 10 n.
e, d. Cells in side view, c "'"'/), d ^^"/i- In the figure d the keel puneta ai'e a little too lon<;-. They were, however, some-
what, but only slightly, elongated,
e. 2 valves belonging to one cell, one of them in valvar view, showint;- a veiy excentric keel; ''■'"/ 1. The valve is, however,
perhaps lying somewhat obliquely.
- f. A twin cell of a different foi'm, perhaps not belonging to X. lu/brida: "'^"/i- The Skjerstad Fiord XII, -^/t 1900. 0— .50 m.
.57 ;• long, the bi'eadth (of the cell! 7 <<.; 12 — 14 keel puneta on 10 \>.. About 27 striæ on 10 n.
., 13. A', lanceohdn no: jii/gmæa Cl. Valve (in valvar view), ''■'"'1. Lille Molla, "A 1899. 30 [i- long, 4 |). broad. Keel puneta
small, about 14 on 10 \>., in the middle of the valve wanting; there is a trace of a central nodule. Hardly belongs to AT.
Innceolata W. Sm.
., r4. A', angularis var. Åariana Gkun., ^°7i.
a. Cell in side view, from Seivaagen (Salten), ^V 1900, 0— 20 m. 54 \>- long, 8 |i broad; 5-(; keel puneta on 10 [j-, much
closer at the ends, scarcely more distant in the middle. No transverse striæ were seen.
b. Valvar view. Lille Molla, V4 1899, 0 m. 30 ij. long, 4 |). broad; 4V3 keel puneta on 10 m.. The longitudinal lines which
accompany the keel, are badly reproduced.
U-^CH
a^
; I
I i
PLATE VII.
Fis;-. 15. Xit.-sclii(i (ircfica Cl.
a. Cell in side view, «=7,. Tiic Ostncs Fiord T, --'A 1900, 0—25 in. 80 <>. long-, 7 <>. broad; 7—8 keel puncta on 10 ;j.. No
distinct tiansversc striæ were seen. By an error in reproduction the margin appears to be a little undulated. Tlie coll
is. indeed, slightly broader in the middle, then evenly narrowed off to the ends, which are of even breadth.
The same species occurs in Cl. et Møll., nr. 318, from Cape Wankarema (slide in the Riksmusæuni, iStockliolm).
b. Cell in side view, '^'^7i. Kvænangen, =',4 1899, 300—200 m. 71 jj. long, 8 |i broad; 8 keel puncta on lo ;).. The division
lines of the connecting zone are here — as in the following ligui'cs — too plainly visible. They are in reality only seen
with difKculty.
c. Cell in side view, ■'■'7i, from Brettesnes (Lofoten) 74 1899. The keel puncta of only one valve are illustrated. Gl 'i. long,
9 n broad; about 10 keel puncta on 10 ji. Transverse striæ were not plainly visible. The connecting zone finely striate.
d. Cell in side view; "^7,; a very large specimen. Folstad, ^4 1899. 108 \i long, 12 \i broad; 9 and 10 keel puncta on
10 <L. On the left valve only the keel puncta of the median part are shown. The keel seemed to be very excentric.
Transverse striæ indistinct.
e. A single valve, ^=7,. Lille Molla, V4 1899, 0 m. 90 [>. long, 5 [). broad; 7'h keel puncta on 10 <>.. Stria' indistinct.
f. Valve in valvar view, ^=7i, from the same locality. 83 n long, -i— 4V-' l'- broad; 9 keel puncta on 10 ;).. .Striæ were
not seen.
The specimens e-f are very similar to X. lærisnima Geux., but seem to belong to the same species as a— d.
10. Tfopidonels imruUela Joeg. n. sp., •'■'7,. a, b from 71" 48' n., -49" 38' e., .S/S Heimdal, ■"/., 1900.
a. Cell in side view. 7o \>. long, 18 \i. broad: about 10 striæ on 10 ;i..
b. Valve (in valvar view). 67 \>. x 12 ij., 15 striæ on lo \l. Boatshaped, with a nai-row, high, median part.
c. Twin cell, in side view. The Ostnes Fiord I, ^Vs 1900, 0—25 m. The striæ are only shown on a portion of the valve,
and ought to be somewhat closer.
17. Pkurosigma tenerum Jørg. ^ P. Stuxher(jli Cl.
a— c. 3 cells with protoplasmatic parts, from samples consei'ved in formaline; -'"7i. Rombaken (the Ofoten l-'iord) ",:. I89!i.
0—40 m. Lengths 290 i^, 340, 275; breadths 38 \i, 38, 40. The inner parts are badly reproduced. In the figure a the
chromatophores should not be united above. In b the chromatophore of the right side has paitly disappeared. The median
longitudinal line of the figure c is the raphe.
d. Cell in valvar view, ^"7,. The Salten Fiord II, 74 1900, 0— 50 m. The specimen has been ignited on cover-glass ami
has become somewhat deformed.
18. P. (lelieaMum W. Sm., ="7,. Folstad, */i 1899, 0—3 m. 222 \>. x 26 |i. The 3 crossing lines to the right show the
direction of the striæ. Veiy similar to P. delicatulum var. lariana Giu-N., but differs in having the transverse striæ rathei-
less close than the oblique ones.
., 19. P. temimimiim W. Sm. var. hi/perhorea Geun. The contour of the valve is badly I'eproduced.
a. Lille Molla, 'A 1899, 0 m.; "'7i. 77 'j. x 5 |x; transverse striæ 20—22 on lo jj., longitudinal ones 24.
b. Folstad, 74 1899, 0—3 m.; «"7,.
20. P. tmnirostre Gecx., S""/,. The Folden Fiord I, 74 1900, 0—100 m. The specimen Ues somewhat obliquely. Only one
half of the valve is given in the figure. In this position, close oblique striæ were seen, 25—30 on 10 |j.. At the ends, in-
distinct lontritudinal lines, which wei'e somewhat wavy, were seen.
21. Nnrieujn frigUla Grun.
a. Cell in valvar view, showing the usual ehr'omatophores; ■'=°/i- Senjenhavet, "A 1899, 0—80 m. (sample preserved in formaline).
b. Cell with chromatophores; larger form; ^^"/,. Harent's Sea 71° 48' n., 49" 38' e. (S/S Heimdal =Vo 1900; c— e from the
same locality).
c. 2 cells of a small form, one in valvar view, with ciii'omatophores, the otlier in side view. ■'^" i. Valve 34 \i x 11 |)..
d. Typical iV. frigkla Grun., ='=7i. The ti'ansversc striæ are only slightly oblique towards the ends, not by far so nuicli as
in the figure. The longitudinal lines are only put on a small part of the valve. 55 ii x 14 \i-.
c. A large specimen, somewhat deformed by being ignited on cover-glass; ''^7i- 96 [j. x 15 \i.: 12 transverse striæ on 10 |j.;
distinct longitudinal lines, nnich clpser. No distinct centi-al area,
f. A twisted chain, probably not belonging to N. frigkla, ^^Vi. The Skjerstad Fiord 11,^ '-/4 19(i0, 0— 180 m. Un account of
the chromatophores it seems related to N. Vanhoffeni and is perhaps N. pelagica.
22. N'. Vanhoffeni Gran.
a. A chain with protoplasmatic contents; ■*°7i- Senjenhavet, ''A 1899. 0 — 80 m.
b. 2 cells of a ciiain. in tlie process of selv-dividing; ■'^"/i. Barents Sea 71" 48' n., 49" 38' e., ''V» 1900 (f, g froui tlie
same locality).
c. d. Chains, after being ignited on cover-glass, ^^Vi- The central nodules smaller and more indistinct than in the figure d;
in c they have disappeared. The cell walls, also in e, should be much narr'ower. Malangen, 'V* 1899, 0 — 3 m.
e. Chain, ignited; "''Vi- Brettesnes, '-"A 1899. The central nodules smaller than in the figure; the division lines of the con-
necting zone very fine.
f. 2 valves with intermediate complex connecting zone, somewhat deformed (a short time treated with sulphuric and nitric
acids, then ignited on cover-glass I; ''=7i- Length 38 i^, breadth 6 |j. (or a little more). In the middle something like a
narr'ow transverse stauros was indistinctly seen. It might, however, also be due to indistinct striæ (the striæ otherwise
being quite invisible).
g. Like f. The valve boatshaped, somewhat higher in the middle tlian at the ends. Length 24 \i., breadtli i; ;).. (Jn one
valve the stauroslike figure in the middle is shown.
h. A narrow valve; »°7,. Folstad, 74 1899. 0—3 m.
i. Cell in optical transverse section, with chromatophore. Barent's Sea, "A 1900.
23. N. 2)chtgica Cl. A chain, after being ignited on cover-glass; ^'^°/i. Length of the cells 17 n. Brettesnes, 74 1899.
24. SUmroncis sq)teiitrio)udis Grun. Barent's Sea ^Vs 1900 (cfr. above).
a. Valve; '■'■'"/ 1. To the left the striæ in the middle part of the valve are represented.
b— g. Different valves; "''71 • On several of tliem tlie striæ. of the middle part are shown. Tliose towards tiic ends wei'e
only seen with difficulty,
h. A chain with protoplasmatic contents; ''°7i-
i. Another chain. In 3 of the cells the protoplasmatic contents are seen.
k. A chain, after being ignited on coverglass; "■"7i- The striæ towards the ends are not seen distinctly. On most of tlic
cells only the more conspicuous median striæ are illustrated. All striæ much finer than in the figure.
25. S. (h-ani .TøRft. n. sp. Barent's Sea, 'Vo 1900.
a. A chain with protoplasmatic contents; *^7i- (Sample not well preserved).
b. A chain, after being ignited on cover-glass ; """/i. Iktween the cells, a connecting zone \\ith vci'v lino division lines is seen.
2(). Aclmanthes sp., «"/j. The Salten Fiord II, V4 1900, 0— 50 m.
a. Lower valve with 3 cells of a chain, ignited. The structui'o of tlie valve is badly reproduccil. The striation should be
more regular, and only slightly radiate towards the ends.
b. Like a. The upper end nodule should not be distant from the end. The valve lies somewhat obliquely.
c. A chain ignited. Only the striæ of one valve is seen in the fignie. The 3 left cells are lepresented in oplical section.
.n. ■ ,o r^] å
å
f' ■ //I
II
kkjj-\
\J
PLATE VIII.
PLATE VIII.
Achnaufhes fæniata Geun.; '•>'°/u Sea of Kara, bottom mud from a rlepth of 36 fathoms (Swedish bCxpedition to Jenissey
1875; sample from the Riksmnsæum, Stockholm).
a. Part of a long chain, ignited on cover-glass (dry preparation). Breadth 2-i i>..
b. Part of another chain, in styrax. Here it is more distinctly seen that only one valve is provided with a central nodule.
,4. hyperhorea Geun. Barent's Sea, "/s 1900.
a. Lower valve; "^"/i- In the middle part more distant and conspicuous striæ, the others, towards the ends, rather indistinct.
Dry preparation. The valve appeared distinctly convex. Length 28 |i.
b. Lower valve, from the inner side; ^=°lu 28 |ji x 6 |j..
c. Part of a chain of the same species (?), ignited on cover-glass; "'"Vi. Length of the valve 30 ]i..
Feridinium jjedunculatuvt Schutt, ■'=7i- The Oster Fiord near Bergen, 1901.
a and d. Ventral view.
b and c. The same specimen, dorsal view.
e. The same, seen from the right side.
Hexacontium enthacanihum Jørg., *^°li. Sea northwest of Vesteraalen, '-"h. 1901, 0 m. (S/S Michael Sars).
a. Second shell with two radial spines and a portion of the outer shell. Only 2 byspines are figured.
b. The inmost shell.
H. pachydermum Jøeg., ■'°°/i-
a. The Herlø Fiord (near Bei-gen), '-/s 1898. Only some of the byspines of the outer shell are figui'ed.
b. Henningsvær, Vs 1899.
Hexaconthim; young specimen, as yet with only two shells; ■'■'■'Vt. From the same locality as fig. 30.
a. Second shell with 4, as yet only thin, radial spines.
b. The same specimen in optical section, showing the two shells.
Ech'momma leptodermum Jøeg., ■'""/i.
a. Kvænangen I, -*/i 1899, 0—140 m.
b. Sea off Røst, "/s 1899. The outer shell is pai-tly removed.
c. Helligvær, '7i 1899, 0—250 m., without outer shell. The 3rd shell is indicated by transverse processus on the radial. spines.
Drymyomma elegans Jøeg., "'^Vi- Skroven, Y-' 1899, 0—300 m.
a. Outer shell with main- and byspines.
b. The same specimen in optical section, showing the 3 shells.
('hromyechiniis horeaUs (Cl.), *'"•"/:. The Tys Fiord, -% 1899, 0—700 m.
a. The 3rd shell with main- and byspines. Around it the very delicate outer shell is seen (only incompletely illustrated).
Also the shell next to the inmost one is indicated in the figure; it is more distinctly seen through a large (accidental)
irregular hole in the 3rd shell.
b. The same specimen. Optical section, showing the 4 shells.
#
Æ.
im-
n
å zn
F
^cfe9V^
w/iy:/'
:^\'«
PLATE IX.
PLATE IX.
Fig-. 3(i. Chromyeehiniis horeaUs (Cl.), ^'"^/i. The outer shell is only indicated by the transverse processus of the I'adial sjiines. Larger
spines on one side of the shell. Kvænangen, "Vi 1899.
a. The 3rd shell, with spines.
b. Optical section, showing- the three shells. Diameters 93 |)-, 40 i)..? Pores very uneven, 10 — 25 \k + 6 [x,?
„ 37. ('. horealis (Cl.), the larger form with byspines on the 4th shell; ■'^"A-
a. Sea oif Røst, ^-/s 1899, 0—900 m. Optical section, showing the 4 shells. Diameters 132 \>., 89, 38, ^ 17.
b. The same specimen. A portion of the 3rd shell with one larger and two smaller radial spines and pores, together with
a portion of the 4th shell, with pores.
c. A form Avith well developed byspines on the 4th shell; optical section. The Vest Fiord, V2 1899, 0—200 m.
d. The same specimen. The portion of the 3rd shell, where the outmost shell is wanting; pores and spines.
e. The same. A portion of the 4th shell (very thinwalled) with pores, main spines and byspines (slender, oblique).
„ 38. Ehizoplegma horeale (Cl.) Jøeg., ''^Vi-
a. A well developed specimen. Sea off Røst, -/s 1899, 0—900 m.
b. The same specimen. One of the main spines with surrounding network.
c. The same. The inner shell; the other parts in optical section.
d. Young specimen. From the sea between Norway and Iceland, due east of Iceland, 60° 43' n., 3° 1' w., 'V12 1903 (SS
Michael Sars).
l///.sr/////,\ A//-/Y//fy
PLATE X.
PLATE X.
Flir. 38. Hhuoplegma horeaJc (Cl.) Jpro., -'^^i-
e. Young specimen with 7 main spines. Diameter of the inner shell 28—30 \i. Sea 40 miles NW of Gaukværø, '"/i 1899,
0—700 m.
f. Young specimen, divergent form with 11 main spines. Henningsvær, ''/i 1899, 0—180 m.
., 39. tiiylodictija tenuispina Jørg. n. sp., ""A. Sea off Røst, "/a 1899, 0—900 m.
a. In the figure the inner rings are seen, and the connecting inner radial beams which are, however, only shown on the space
between the two outer rings. The coarse pores on the median part of the shell and some of the pores on the other
portion are also depicted.
b. The same specimen, optical section, showing the rings and radial beams.
c. The same in side view, optical section. In the middle the rounded higher portion is seen. Punctiform byspines on both sides.
„ 40. S. raftdispina Jørg. n. sp., *'=7i- Sea off Røst, ^Vs 1899, 0—900 m.
a. Optical section, showing the system of rings and the radial spines. The pores on the outside are shown on a portion of
the valve.
b. The same specimen in side view; optical section.
., 41. S. aculeaia Jøeg. n. sp., «"/i. Sea off Røst, "I-, 1899, 0-900 m.
a. The disc from above, with pores and radial spines. The small dark puneta on the surface ai-e the byspines. The inner
rings are suggested.
b. The same specimen; optical section.
c The same in side view; optical section.
., 42. Phorticium pylonium (Hck.?) Cl., «o/j, T]^e Tys Fiord, -«/s 1899, 0-700 m.
'''. Schematical iigure, dorsal view, showing in perspective the 3 girdles, perpendicular to each other. The tigure shows only
one of these systems of girdles; in reality there are 3 of them. L = the lateral girdle, seen from the (narrow) side;
T = the transverse girdle, S ■= the sagittal one. In the middle of the latter an inner lateral girdle is developed,
parallel to the outer one (is not seen in the figure), in the middle of this inner lateral girdle, an inner transverse one,
a. s. 0. For the sake of clearness, the girdles are depicted narrow, and distinctly compressed.
a. Dorsal view, showing the pores and the outer spines (main- and byspines).
b. The same specimen, same view, optical section (lateral section). To the right and left the outer latei-al girdle is seen,
and parallel to this two innei- ones.
c. Same specimen, apical view. When the figure is seen from the side, where the number (42 c) is printed, it answers to
the fig. a, seen from above.
d. Same specunen, same view: optical section (= transverse one). The transverse girdle goes around the figure, and is
seen from the (narrow) side. Across this girdle the outer sadttal one is seen, and in the inner, the second and third
transverse ones.
^./y.y/y,//^/.^^/''//''-^'^'^'^'^^'^^
PLATE XI,
PLATE XI
Fig. 4-2. Phortirium pijlonium (Hck.?) Cl., «7,. The Tys FiorcL "Vs 1S99, 0—700 m.
e. The same specimen as fig. 42 a— d (pl. X); lateral view.
f. Same specimen, same view, optical section (.= sagittal one). The outer sagittal giitlle is seen from the side, and two
similar inner ones.
„ 43. Ph. pylonium (Hck.?) Cl., forma (?) ; *=°/,. From the same locality. In a certain position of the shell, this spiral is seen.
„ 44. Ph. iiyhnium (Hck.?) Ciu, funna CO: '^^"/i. Odupyle octosfi/lc f minor J ørg. Sea off Røst, ='-A 1899, 0—900 m. Apical view.
„ 45. Ph. pylonium (Hcic?) Cl., forma (?): ■'^"/i. Octopyk. octostyle f. minor Jørg. From the same locality.
a. Dorsal view.
b. d. The same specimen; lateral view. The right and left sides correspond to the lower and upper ends of fig. a.
c. Same specimen; apical view.
„ 46. StreUacantha circunitexta (Jørg.). ■'""/i- The Tys Fiord, -*/.i 1899, 0— "()(» m.
a. There are more byspines than illustrated in the figure. Most of them are only seen with difficulty, except near the outlines.
b. Same specimen, same view, optical section.
c. Young specimen with 9 main spines.
d. The same in optical section.
f. The pores on a portion of the outer shell, of an oldei' specimen.
e. Same specimen, showing a piercing main spine with tiie fine comiecting beams between the byspines. Side view.
I ///x, /////x s///'///r/'
%
Sv
n
u
PLATE XII
PLATE XII.
Fisr. ■!(■). Strehlacantha eircumtexta (Jørg.).
!.'■. The same specimen as fig. 46 a (pl. XI), in another position; optical section, ■'""/i-
h. •'°7i- From the same locality,
i. The same, in optical section.
1. Young- specimen, *^7i. The Vest Fiord I, 'V, 1899, 0—180 m.
k. The same, in optical section.
,, -±7. Campylacnntha dndojylwra Jørg. n. sp., ""^Vi- The Tys Fiord I, -'/s 1899, 0—700 m. In this figure, and in the following
of species of the group NasseUaria. the letters have the same signification as in tlie corresponding description given on pp.
122—140: A is the apical main spine, D the dorsal one, Lj. the right lateral, Lj the left lateral main spine, V the ventral
sagittal spine.
a. Oblique lateral view. The secondary lateral spines are not seen.
I). Oblique view, where one of these secondary lateral spines is distinctly seen.
c. Dorsal view, showing both these secondary spines.
' yt A-s- , l///x> /////\ . s///'///,
PLATE XIII.
PLATE XIII.
Fig^. 48. Dicti/orircus dathratiis Jørg. n. sp. Hemiing-svær, -% 1899. a °"7i, b— e ■'""/i. As regards the sig-iiitieation of the letters,
cfr. above p. 125 and p. 130.
a. Dorsal view.
b. Dorsal-lateral vie\\-.
c. Sagittal view . Only the meshes f, the spines g and the right side of the spines k and meshes c are illnstrated.
d. Lateral view.
e. Ventral view.
„ ii). Cnratospyns hijperhorea Jørg. n. sp., ''■''Vi. The Vest Fiord Vj 18'*9, 0—200 m.
,, 50. Pledacantha oiJcislcos Jørg., *°7i- Ofoten II, Va 1899, 0 — 10(» m. Apical view. Diameter of the network about 65 ;)..
„ 51. P. oiJdslcos JøKG., var.: ■'"Vi- Sea off Røst, "Vi 1899, 0 — 900 m. Very strong spines and arches,
i). Ventral view; the piimary ventral arch and the primary ventral mesh in front.
b. The same specimen, apical view. Length of spine D 55 [j-; greatest breadth of the beams G \>.; largest mesh (the secondary
mesh to the right of spine D) 22 x 15 [j..
c. The same, lateral ■view; the left lateral arch and the left lateral mesh in front.
(1. The same, lateral vieAV ; the right lateral arch and the .right lateral mesh in front.
e. The same as the foregoing, but turned 90° upwards. The mesh beyond (and below) the right lateral mesh in front.
52. P. oiMskos Jørg., ^''Vi- The Vest Fiord 1, "A 1899, 0—180 m. Young specimen. Antapical view.
„ 53. P. oildslcos Jørg., ■'"Vi- Henningsvær, "Vs 1899, 0—280 m. Lateral view; the right lateral arch and mesh in front.
„ 54. The same, ^'"Vi- Dorsal view.
„ 55. P. oihislws Jørg., ■■■'*Vi- Helligvær, 'Vi 1899, 0— 25(» m.
a. Lateral view; the right lateral arch in front.
b. The same, turned a little upwards and to the left. ,
c. Lateral view; the riglit lateral main spine in front. The unclosed network is seen.
d. Lateral view; the meshes under the right lateral spine in front.
e. Antapical view.
„ 5(3. /*. oihshos Jørg., ■*^Vi-
a. .Somewhat oblique antapical view. The Vest Fiord II, 0—200 m., ''Vi 1899. Diameter of the network about 5it |)..
b. Oblique antapical view. Sea off Aalesnnd, (il" 56' n . 2" 40' e., 'Vs 1893, 0 m. (S/S Michael Sars). Diameter of the network
about 60 ]J-.
„ 57. P. oildskos Jørg., ^**Vi- A well developed specimen from Henningsvær, -'Vs 1899. 0 — 280 m.
a. Ventral view; the ventral arch and the notwoi'k above, in front.
b. The same, apical view.
„ 58. P. frichoi(l(v Jørg. n. sp., ''"Vi- Ventral-latei'al view; the right lateral spine in front. Sea north of Shetland, 03" 36' n..
0» 32' e., 'V2 1903 (S/S Michael Sars).
^^(/y/C/^y, ////My////.v aX/y//',./'
I
PLATE XIV.
PLATE XIV.
Fig-. 59. Fhormacaufha hi/strix (Jøkg.) Jøbg., ™7i- The Vest Fiord I, "/i 1899, 0—180 m. A well developed specimen.
a. Lateral view; placed as a species of Monocyrtida after Hæckel, with the ,,tophorn"' upwards. The right latei'al main
spine, Li, in front.
b. The same, dorsal view, showing the network I'ound the (columella and) tophorn. The spine A is removed.
c. The same, ventral view, showing the ventral sagittal spine and the network above. The other main spines are only indicated.
., 60. Ph. hystrix (Jøeg.) Jøeg., *=%. Ofoten II, V2 1899, 0 — 100 m. Lateral view, the right lateral arch (Bj) and mesh in front.
A young specimen, pei'haps belonging to a species intermediate between PhonnarantJia hy><frix and Plectacmiiha oil-isl-os.
Diameter of the network about 68 \>-. Skeleton very light in weight.
„ 61. Ph. hystrix (Jøno.) JøRa., ^'^^/i. Helligvær, '-/i 1899, 0—250 m. A young specimen; dorsal view. Length of the spine L,. 75 t)-.
62. Ph. hystrix (.Joug.) Jøbg., *'''°/u Sea off Aalesund, 61" 56' n., 2" -40' c., '",2 1903 (S/S Michael Sars). A young specimen;
ventral view. 'Die short branch from spine Lj to the point of connection between the ventral (B^,) and the one lateral arch
(Hi) is distinctly seen.
„ 6;^. Ph. hystrix (Jøkg.) ,Jøeg., *''°/,. From the same locality. Lateral view. The short common branch, mentioned under fig. 62,
is here in front, together with the right lateral arch (Bi) and the network above. The spine A is broken off.
„ 64. (ionosphcera jjrimordialis Jøeg. n. sp., '^°/i. The Oster Fiord (near Bergen\ 'Vo 1900, 200—400 m. Diametei' of the I'ing
22 |).; length of the largest spine about 100 |i.
,, 65. <T. primordialis Jøeg., ^""/i- Ofoten II, "A 1899, 0—250 ni. From a sample preserved in formaline.
„ 66. G. primordialis, Jøeg., *=7i- Skroven, ■'.^ 1899, 0- 350 m. The connecting polygonal beam, Avith its two long, spieading
spines, is seen below and to the left. Diameter of the ring 17 ]j., length of the largest spine 90 n.
„ 67. ('. 2»'imordialis Jøeg., ''°7i- From the same locality. The two pentagons are seen above, to the right and to tlie left (the
arrows are perpendicular to their planes), the connecting polygonal beam below.
6S. ('. primordialis Jøkg., rar., *^7i- Sea between Norway and Iceland, due east of Iceland, 65" 43' n., 3" 1' w., '^/s 1903,
100 — 0 m. (S/S Michael Sars). Diameter of the pentagons 22 [j.; largest spines 50 |x long. Pei'haps a different species.
„ 121. House of Cyttarocylis denticidata (Ehrb.) Fol., var. suhedentata Jøeg. n. var.; ■'■'^"/i- The Ox Fioi-d, '^ a 1899, 0 — 90 m.
Lengtii 145 [>-, breadth 51 [j.; narrow end (,,tail tip") 17 \y long. Teeth 36 — 38. The areoles are only figured on a little
portion of the surface and the wail.
PLATE XV.
PLATE XV.
Fig-. 69. Protoscenium simplex (Cl.) Jørg., '•''•°i\. fSea north of Shetland 63" 36' n.. O" 32' e., "A 1903, o m. (S/S Micliael Sårs).
Somewhat oblique, apical view. Diameter of the network 68 |i.
„ 70. Euscenkim corynephorum Jøkg., ^'"^/i. Raftsund. 'V2 1899, 0—260 m. Oblique antapieal view. Diameter of the network
about 100 [).; longest spines 120 ii.
„ 71. Cladoscenium Jricolpium (Hck.) Jørg., ■''"/i. A well developed specimen from the By Fiord (near Bergen), -V2 1899, 0 — 50 m.
Ventral-lateral view; the spine Lj in front. Network 58 |j. high, 75 \>. broad. Tophorn protruding 94 \>..
b. The same as a. optical section, showing the most important spines and arches.
„ 72. C', tricolpium (Hck.) Jørg., very young specimen; ■"*7i. Helligvær, '-/i 1899, 0—250 m.
a. Oblique, apical view.
b. I;atei-al view; the spine Lj in front.
„ 73. C. tricolpium (Hck.) Jørg., young specimen; '"*'7i. Fom the same locality. Apical view.
„ 74. C. limhiihim Jørg. n. sp., ''°7i- Sea 40 miles N\V of Gaukværø, ^7i 1899, 0 — 7<>0 m. Lateral view. In the upper part,
tile outer netwoi'k is removed.
„ 75. Peridinm longispinum Jørg. Sea off Aalesund. 61° 56' n.. 2° 40' e.. '"/j 1903, <) m. (S/S Mieliael Sars). A well devel-
oped specimen.
a. Ventral view; the „tophom" downwards; ''"7i-
b. The same, lateral-venti'al view; the spine L in front; ■''"'/i. Diameter of the network 32 11-.
,, 76. P. longispinum Jørg., *=7i. The Vest Fiord II, "/'i 1899, 0— 20(i m. The typical form. Cephalis 42 ]). high.
a. Lateral-ventral view.
b. Lateral view; the spine L in front.
e. Apical view; the very long ventral sagittal spine is seen.
(1. The same, lower optical section, showing the meshes about the spines D and V.
,. 77. /'. loiuiispiiium JoRG., ''571. Øxsund, 'Vs 1899, 600 m. Not fully developed specimen; dorsal view. Diameter of the net-
work 34 [i.
„ 78. I', hnuiispinum JøR{^., "'*7i- Helligvær, '7i 1899, 0 — 250 m. Ventral view.
„ 79. P. lungi)<pinum Jøkg., "'*7i. From the same locality. Lateral view. Ceplialis 50 |i. long. 42 ;). broad.
/////,'. V'////''/'
(\
^r
-tV^.
'/^
P
7^^
PLATE XVI
PLATE XVI.
Fig-. 80. Piridium longiapinxm Jøkg., ■*=7i- Senjcn, ^Vi 1899, 0 — 130 in. Fully developed specimen. Lateral view; the left lateral
aix'h (]3j.), with two strong- byspiaes, in front.
„ 81. Lithomelissa setosa Jøhg., ■'*7i- Henningsvær, *7i 1899, 0—180 m. Young specimen. Dorsal view; tlie spine A in front,
somewhat to the left (directed downwards).
,, 82. L. setosa Jøkg., ''^Vi- Apical view.
., 83. L. setosa Jørg., *°°/i. The Herlø Fiord (near Bergen), -^/-^ 1899. Almost fully developed specimen; lateral view.
84. L. laticeps Jøeg. n. sp., *^7i- Sea off Røst, "A 1899, 0—900 m. Lateral view.
b. The same, optical section, showing the main spines.
„ So. L. hystrix Jørg., *"7i. Skroven, V2 1899, 0—300 m. 50 \i high and broad. Thorax 36 'i high; cephalis 14 <i high, 25
l>- broad. Most of the spines broken off.
„ 86. Helotholus Mstricosa Jørg. n. sp., ^°7i. Øxsund, '72 1899, 0—300 m.
a. Inside the shell the long axial divided spine is seen.
b. Antapical view of the cephalis and the upper part of the thorax (neck stricture). 4 spines are seen.
,, 87. H. Mstricosa Jørg., ^'*7i- From the same locality. Young specimen.
b. Portion of a broken shell, showing the protruding ventral, sagittal spine.
„ 88. H. Mstricosa Jørg., ^=^'U. Ofoten II, 72 1899, 0—100 m. Apical view. Diameter of the thorax 94 ij., of the cephalis 27 [i..
Pores very uneven, from 5 to 20 |j..
„ 89. DictyopMmus Mstricosus Jørg. n. sp., -'571. Sea off Røst, --/a 1899, 0—900 m. Shell 68 'j. high, 85 broad; cephahs 22 |t
hig-h, 84 broad. Pores uneven, from 9 n to very small, not considerably smaller on the cephalis.
b. The same; optical section, showing 4 main spines. The three swelling-s, mentioned \inder Lithomelissa srtosa (above p. 127)
and other species, are distinctly seen.
., 90. Litharachnium tentorium. Hck. Sea north of Shetland. 63" 36' n., 0" 32'_ e., "A 1903 (S/S Michael Sars).
a. The entire shell of a fully developed specimen, ="7].
b. Upper (conical) part of the shell, ■'^7i.
c— e. Pores and parts of the network, ''«7i ; c from below the broken part of the shell, e the largest pores of the cone,
above the beginning intermediate ribs, d farther down on the cone, where intermediate ribs appear.
„ 91. L. tentorium Hck., *^"/\. Skroven, 7* 1899, 0 — 150 m. "^'oung specimen.
a. Lateral view.
b. Apical view. The 3 primary meshes in the neck stricture are seen.
c. A portion of the network near the margin below.
Åvf/ez/s, l//m'////Av S/y/Z/r/'
ihV/ /
82
\ \
LQ
mm
Li
rr-P ^EGi
PLATE XVII
PLATE XVII.
Fig. 92. Androojdns yamplionycha (Jørg.) Jørg., ■*^°/i- The Herlø Fiord (near Bergen), -'/e 1898, 0—400 m. A well developed
specimen with very strong and numerous byspines. Cephalis 38 i^ (long) x 34 \i. (broad); thorax 42.5 x 76; abdomen
110 X 110; tophorn 64 |i.
„ 93. .4. gamphmyeha (Jørg.) Jørg., ''"Vi- Ofoten II, "A 1899, 0—100 m. Antapical view, showing the main spines (except the
spine D), the „collar septum" (Hck.) and the outlines of the shell.
„ 94. A. amhhjcephalis (Jørg.) Jørg., «"/i. Øxsund, '"/a 1899, 550—620 m. yhell 102 (long) x 90 |i.
„ 95. A. ambhjcephalis (Jørg.) Jørg., ■'=7i. The Vest Fiord I, 0—180 m., 'Vi 1899. Young specimen. Cephalis 27 \y broad,
thorax 72 [i. Cephalis as yet open above; abdomen not yet developed, only indicated through some marginal spines below.
a. Lateral-ventral view; the spine Lj. in front, a little to the right.
b. The same, lateral view. The inner septum, between thorax and abdomen, is seen.
„ 96. A, amhlyæphalis (Jørg.) Jørg., *^7i-
„ 97. A. amUycephalis (Jørg.) Jørg. Apical view, showing the cephalis open above.
„ 98. Clathrocyclas craspedota (Jørg.) Jørg., '*7i- Helligvær, '7i 1899, 0 — 250 m. A well developed specimen; apical view.
Greatest diameter of the abdomen 167 |i, of the thorax 133 |)., of the cephalis 42.
„ 99. CI. craspedota (Jørg.) .Jørg., **7i- From the same locality. Young specimen; abdomen as yet wanting.
a. Lateral view.
b. Apical view.
„ 100. CI. ffraspedota (Jørg.j Jørg., ■'=7i- Ofoten II, 72 1899, 0—250 m. Young specimen without abdomen. Cephalis 25 [jl high
X 42 [i broad below; the longest tophorn 127 n.
a. Lateral view, showing the two strong tophorns.
b. Apical view.
c. Optical section in the region of the „neck" ; apical view. The main spines, except spine D, are seen.
d. Optical section, lateral view, showing the two tophorns protruding from the inner skeleton.
„ 101. a. Didyoceras acanthicum Jørg., *'=°/i. Skroven, V* 1899, 0 — 150 m. Apical view, showing the „collar septum'", the main
spines (except spine D) and the outlines of the shell.
„ 105. Radiosphæra anacanthica Jørg. n. sp., ''^7i- The Skjerstad Fiord IV, 0 — 330 m., '-'A 1900. Diameter of the central capsule,
68 |i. The calymma quite invisible in water.
„ 106. R. anacanthica Jørg., ■'=7!- Kvænangen II, 0 — 50 m. The calymma made visible through staining with safranine.
.-. .\/y/v/h'/'
X
,4
^
;'r
'.M$^fj:C
m
#
. /i/h/t:/i.ycfi del
PLATE XVIII.
PLATE XVIII.
Fig. 101. b. Dictyoceras acanthimm Jøkg., ■*"7i. The Herlø Fiord (near Bergen), =7* 1898, 0— iOO m. Cephalis .33 [j. high X 31
broad; thorax 73 x 101; abdomen 38 x 126 ji. Pores of the cephalis 3.5 n, of the thorax 4—7.5 ]j., of the abdomen
(5—10 1^.
., 102. Stichocorys seriafa (Jørg.) Jørg., ■'^o/,. Øxsund, "A 1899, 250—350 m. A well developed specimen.
,. 103. St. seriata (Jørg.) Jørg.. *=°/u 8ea off Aalesund, 61" 5«' n., 2" 40' e., 'V2 1903, 0 m. (S/S Michael Sars). A well devel-
oped specimen.
., 104. St seriata (Jørg.) Jørg., «7i. Sea north of Shetland, 63° 36' n., 0" 32' e., ^Va 1903, 0 m. (S/S Michael Sars). A well
developed specimen. Length (tophorn not included) 128 |)-, greatest breadth 72 jj.. Largest pores 6 |x long. The pores on
the upper part are omitted in the figure.
[Figs. 105—106, on pi. XVII.]
., 107. Acanthocorys umhelUfera Hck. (?), "0/j_ The Oster Fiord (near Bergen), ^Ve, 1900, 200 — 400 m.; Cephalis 54 \i. high x 46
broad, thorax 38 x 96.
,, 108. Lithovielissa setosa Jørg., ""7i- Kvænangen, -■'/i 1899, 0 — 140 m.
a. Lateral view; the spine Lj in front.
b. Ventral-apical view; the sagittal ventral spine in front upwards. The inner lattice plate between tiic spines V and Lj is
seen; also the axial spine", a. The specimen not fully developed.
., 109. Am^Mmelissa setosa (Ch.) J ønG., •'•'7i. Near Jan Mayen, S/S Michael Sars 1900, st. 19, Vs, 50 — 100 m. Young specimens (?).
a. Antapical view.
b. Another specimen; dorsal view.
„ 110. Cannosphæra lepta Jørg., ■'°7i. The Herlø Fiord (near Bergen), ^7= 1898, n — 300 m. Some tangential and radial beams.
., 111. Challengeron Channeri (Mtjrr.) Hck., ^oo/^^ gg^, 40 miles N\V of Gaukværo, ^Vi 1899, 0—700 m. Peristome and radial
spines broken off. The crossing lines in the middle indicate the structure of the shell.
., 112. Oh. armatum Borg., *^"/i. From the same locality- Illustrated from a sketch, as the specimen was lost before a complete
drawing could be finished.
,, 113. Cadium melo (Cl.) Borg., *^'^/i. Sea off Røst, "/a 1899, 0—900 m. 85 [i long x 60 |x broad.
„ 114. House oi Leprotintinnus pellucidus (Cl.) Jørg., ■'°7i- The Skjerstad Fiord IV, Vj 1900, 0—300 m. Foreign bodies on the
house much more numerous than usual.
„ 115. House of Tmtinnopsis nitida Brandt, vav. ovalis Jørg. n. var.; """/i. Moskenstrommen, 'Vi 1899, 0—100 m. Length 43 n,
greatest breadth 38 ji; breadth of the mouth 22 \i..
„ 116. House of T. nitida Brandt, var. sinuata (Brandt); '™/j. Moskenstrommen, 'Vi 1899, 0 — 50 m. Lengtli 83 \>., breadth of
the mouth 58 (i, breadth in the middle 46 |i..
„ 117. Codone.Ua lagenula (Clap, et Lachm.) Entz, var. orata Jørg.; ="7i- From the west coast, near Bergen.
., 118. Ptychocylis nrnula (Clap, et Lachm.) Brandt var. subarctica Jørg. n. var; ""^71. Lyngen II, 0—250 m., -'Vi 1899. The
plicæ of the house only indicated near the mouth, where they are more conspicuous.
„ 119. Cyttarocylis doiticulata (Ehrb.) Fol., rar. subedentata Jørg. n. var.; *^°/u Kvænangen I, ■*/i, 0—50 m. Length 111 [jl,
„tail tip" 12 |x; breadth of the mouth 49 [>.. 36 teeth. Areoles omitted in the figure.
„ 120. C. denticiilata (Ehrb.) Fol., var. subedentata Jørg.; ^'^/i. The Ogs Fiord, ^Vs 1899, 0-90 m. Lengtli 145 |jl, tail 34 |j.;
breadth 51 |).. 36 teeth. Areoles 2V2 on 10 |x, omitted in the figure.
[Fig. 121 on pi. XIV].
'////.v S/i/'/Z^r/-
<^^
f)C0COCC
ococccc
DCCCOCii
fiCCOOOr
■.OOCOCC-
\pOOOOCc
'■■r^-
'^y^:
•y ''
, 112 i
t«,
PLATE XIX.
PLATE XIX.
Temperature curves.
I. Tranødybet, Vs 1899.
II. Tranødøbet, ^Vs 1899.
III. The ,Sea NW of Røst, ^Vs 1899.
IV. Tys Fiord I, -'/'s 1899.
V. Øxsund, 'Vi 1899.
VI. Skjomen II, V2 1899.
VII. Øgs Fiord II, "/a 1899.
VIII. Skjerstad Fiord XII, V2 1900.
Bert/ens Museums Skriftei
¥\
^
i^i
PLATE XX.
PLATE XX.
The monthly average heights of water at Kabelvaag (red curves) and Vardø (blue curves)
I. 1882 IV. 1882
II. 188-i V. 1884
III. 1885 VI. 1885
The averag-e monthly downfall at
Svolvær and Vardø
S (red curve) V (blue curve).
From „Vandstandsmaalinger" ed. by „Den norske gradmaalingskomraission" and „Nedbøriagttagelser i Norge'' ed. by ..Det
norske meteorolognske institut'".
Bergens Muieiims Skrifter
5-1 • i-i-ij-i -i-L-|.-ii±mt
v^r:^:^
^^±x'mt^. :
--
I
-- /-x
\ '■■■■,,
r--^^
\ ^ /:,
i^. ^^^'"'^'^T^^
/
■-^ ^-1
" \
\ /
/
— \ /
"%//'
v^
X/
^
^.---'^^^^
\
j — ^~-->,
/
[\
/
/
[ ^
/
~~\
/
\
/
\
y
\
^^
'
v__^^ ^^^^_^
--^^.__
-
^^^~^-~^^^
-
_._:.■ i 1 : i, : i ■ |i !„;,
- . ! .1... : . 1
Ftbraar. Man, April,
PLATE XXI.
PLATE XXI.
Downfall curves.
The crossed lines ( ) represent the monthly average downfall of the year 1899, and the straiglit lines ( ) show the
monthly values for
T. iSvolvær (black curves).
II. fSkomvær (blue curves).
III. Tromsø (red curves).
IV. Alten (green curves).
From „Nedbøriagttagelser i Norge" ed. by „Det norske meteorologiske institut".
lifrgens Miisvnim Skriftei
I i-T::T::rrr:aT:i -jj^^-yj: ^■jj'-r^^^^jj ■[■■■y-,.. .|..j,..,....,....,....::...|..
' , \
\ \ \
I ! M I ! I I I ! I I r ; I I FT'T-ri I ' I I I I \yy
nuar, Pebimr, Mars, April, Hal, Juni^ Juli, August, Stpltmber,
Nouember. December.
i
\
J
I
i
3 2044 07;
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11